Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology: Diagnosis and Management

Mallory Prelims

27/1/05

1:16 pm

Page i

Illustrated Manual of

Pediatric Dermatology

Mallory Prelims

27/1/05

1:16 pm

Page ii

Mallory Prelims

27/1/05

1:16 pm

Page iii

Illustrated Manual of

Pediatric Dermatology Diagnosis and Management

Susan Bayliss Mallory MD Professor of Internal Medicine/Division of Dermatology and Department of Pediatrics Washington University School of Medicine Director, Pediatric Dermatology St. Louis Children’s Hospital St. Louis, Missouri, USA Alanna Bree

St. Louis University Director, Pediatric Dermatology Cardinal Glennon Children’s Hospital St. Louis, Missouri, USA

Peggy Chern

Department of Internal Medicine/Division of Dermatology and Department of Pediatrics Washington University School of Medicine St. Louis, Missouri, USA

Mallory Prelims

27/1/05

1:16 pm

Page iv

© 2005 Taylor & Francis, an imprint of the Taylor & Francis Group First published in the United Kingdom in 2005 by Taylor & Francis, an imprint of the Taylor & Francis Group, 2 Park Square, Milton Park Abingdon, Oxon OX14 4RN, UK Tel: Fax: Website:

+44 (0) 20 7017 6000 +44 (0) 20 7017 6699 www.tandf.co.uk

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior permission of the publisher or in accordance with the provisions of the Copyright, Designs and Patents Act 1988 or under the terms of any licence permitting limited copying issued by the Copyright Licensing Agency, 90 Tottenham Court Road, London W1P 0LP. Although every effort has been made to ensure that all owners of copyright material have been acknowledged in this publication, we would be glad to acknowledge in subsequent reprints or editions any omissions brought to our attention. British Library Cataloguing in Publication Data Data available on application Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data Data available on application ISBN 1-85070-753-7 Distributed in North and South America by Taylor & Francis 2000 NW Corporate Blvd Boca Raton, FL 33431, USA Within Continental USA Tel: 800 272 7737; Fax: 800 374 3401 Outside Continental USA Tel: 561 994 0555; Fax: 561 361 6018 E-mail: [emailprotected] Distributed in the rest of the world by Thomson Publishing Services Cheriton House North Way Andover, Hampshire SP10 5BE, UK Tel: +44 (0) 1264 332424 E-mail: [emailprotected]

Composition by Parthenon Publishing Printed and bound by T.G. Hostench S.A., Spain

Mallory Prelims

27/1/05

1:16 pm

Page v

CONTENTS

Preface Dedication Chapter 1. Principles of Clinical Diagnosis 2. Neonatal Dermatology 3. Papular and Papulosquamous Disorders 4. Eczematous Dermatoses 5. Acne and Acneiform Disorders 6. Bullous Disorders 7. Bacterial and Spirochetal Diseases 8. Viral and Rickettsial Diseases 9. Fungal Diseases 10. Infestations and Environmental Hazards 11. Hypersensitivity Disorders/Unclassified Disorders 12. Photodermatoses and Physical Injury and Abuse 13. Drug Eruptions 14. Pigmentary Disorders 15. Collagen Vascular Diseases 16. Vascular and Lymphatic Diseases 17. Tumors, Cysts, and Growths 18. Hair Disorders 19. Nail Disorders 20. Genodermatoses and Syndromes 21. Therapy Index

vii ix 1 9 33 49 71 81 95 119 149 163 177 199 217 229 257 275 297 335 359 369 391 411

Mallory Prelims

27/1/05

1:16 pm

Page vi

Mallory Prelims

27/1/05

1:16 pm

Page vii

PREFACE

Pediatric dermatology is an exciting area of medicine. When children are young, they cannot give a history. In fact, pediatrics is said to be much like veterinary medicine! The practitioner must use sharp observational skills to assess a problem. For example, rather than asking a 1 year old if they scratch or if a rash itches, merely observing the child scratching in the office or seeing excoriations on the skin will lead a physician to the correct conclusion. Thus, looking for clues further sharpens one’s visual skills. This book is a synopsis of basic pediatric dermatology. The approaches that we use are practical ones which we have found to be simple basic approaches to problems that pediatricians and dermatologists see in their practices. This book is aimed at the common problems seen in medical offices with some added information about unique conditions in pediatric dermatology.

Teaching at a pediatric tertiary care hospital, we find that pediatric and family practice residents ask us frequently which book they might purchase for their library. Mainly, they are interested in a book that has good photographs so that they can visually recognize skin diseases combined with a practical, concise text. Our purpose in writing this book was to produce a manual of high-quality photographs which can easily aid the pediatric house officer and primary care physician in the diagnosis of pediatric skin diseases. In addition, we have tried to provide a pertinent, easy to read outline with easily applied suggestions on treatment. Realistic criteria for referring patients are also outlined and a few pertinent references are given. We hope that you enjoy this text and that it can be of benefit to all who read it. Susan Bayliss Mallory MD Alanna Bree MD Peggy Chern MD

Mallory Prelims

27/1/05

1:16 pm

Page viii

Mallory Prelims

6/4/05

3:02 pm

Page ix

DEDICATION

We would like to dedicate this book to our children and patients who have been a great source of learning not only about pediatrics but also about pediatric dermatology. For Susan Bayliss Mallory, my children, Elizabeth and Meredith, have been a source of joy and encouragement as well as keeping me grounded. My parents, Milward William Bayliss MD and Jeanette Roedell Bayliss were always encouraging me to study and learn. God has been an ever-loving omniscient presence in my life and has been my source of inspiration. For Alanna Bree, to all of my many teachers, especially my first teachers – my parents, Al and Shirley Flath. Most importantly, to my husband, Doug, and children Sam and Kendyl for their unconditional love and constant support.

For Peggy Chern, to my parents, Henry and Myra Chern, and to Matt Shaw for their support and encouragement. Others who have been a major source of help and inspiration have been: General Elbert DeCoursey MD, Esther DeCoursey, Jere Guin MD, Arthur Eisen MD and Lynn Cornelius MD. Special thanks to the following physicians who helped review the manuscript: Chan-Ho Lai, Pam Weinfeld, Jason Fung, Tony Hsu, Angela Spray, D. Russell Johnson, Alison Klenk, Margaret Mann and Yadira Hurley.

Mallory Prelims

27/1/05

1:16 pm

Page x

Mallory Chapter 01

27/1/05

1:18 pm

Page 1

1 PRINCIPLES OF CLINICAL DIAGNOSIS

GENERAL

• Diagnosis of cutaneous disorders in infants and •

•

children requires careful inspection of skin, hair and nails Skin disorders of infants are different from skin disorders in adults 1. For example, erythema toxicum neonatorum is only seen in newborns 2. Skin of a young child tends to form blisters more easily (e.g. insect bites or mastocytomas) Determining morphology of skin lesions, their color and distribution will help generate a differential diagnosis

HISTORY

• Take a thorough history of events surrounding the skin disorder (Table 1.1)

Table 1.1

1. This includes the patient’s age, race, sex, details of previous treatments and duration of the problem 2. Focus attention on the particular morphology 3. Physicians should be sensitive to the anxieties that parents might have and address these issues appropriately a. While taking a family history, note whether a family member has a similar but more severe disorder that may cause concern (e.g. psoriasis). Talking about these issues will let the parent know that you understand their concerns 4. Developmental aspects, previous illnesses and previous surgery are important points in the history 5. Newborn history should include the prenatal period, pregnancy and delivery

Interviewing and treating pediatric dermatology patients

1. Children are different from adults. Learn the differences. 2. Approach patients cautiously. Sit across the room and talk to the parents before examining the child. This gives them time to ‘size you up’. 3. Speak directly to the child as if he/she understands what you are saying. Make eye contact with the child. 4. Keep the parent in the room for procedures as much as possible unless it interferes with the procedure or the parent wishes to step out of the room. 5. Conservative management is best. Try to use the lowest effective dose of medication for the shortest time. 6. Avoid new therapies which do not have a proven track record in pediatrics until adequate clinical trials are performed. 7. Do not use treatments which may decrease growth or mental development. 8. Anticipatory guidance and emotional support are helpful especially in chronic disorders (e.g. alopecia areata, atopic dermatitis). Adapted from Honig PJ. Potential clinical management risks in pediatric dermatology. Risk Management in Dermatology, Part II. AM Medica Communications LTS: New York, 1988: 6

Mallory Chapter 01

27/1/05

1:18 pm

Page 2

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

a. Maternal history may quickly lead to a diagnosis in some cases (e.g. maternal HIV or systemic lupus erythematosus) 6. Evaluation of young children requires a modified approach, depending upon the age of the child a. Establish a positive relationship with not only the parent but also the child b. Gain eye contact with the child at his own level. This is less threatening than standing over him in an intimidating manner c. Sit and talk to the parents without making any movements toward the young child. This allows time for him/her to observe your actions (‘size you up’) before speaking with them directly d. Refrain from using a loud voice or touching the child until he feels comfortable. These are techniques which pediatricians know very well e. Allow the child to play with small toys in the room. This is a way to distract him and allows one to observe his interactions, which could help with developmental history f. Obviously, young children cannot always answer specific questions. However, carefully observing the child may reveal answers to questions not even asked (e.g. observing scratch marks on a 6-month-old child obviates the necessity of asking whether the child is scratching) 7. School age children (5–10 years) can answer questions directly and are sometimes very informative a. Engaging them in conversation about school or an interest, such as a pet, may put the child at ease quickly 8. Adolescents can give a history and should be given instructions, giving the adolescent the ability to take care of his own skin, demonstrating his maturity and ability to care for his own health

• •

•

1. Additional lighting with high-intensity examination lights 2. Side-lighting may demonstrate subtle elevations or depressions A magnifying glass may enlarge tiny variations of the skin Examination of the genitalia should not be overlooked; have an assistant or parent in the room, not only for the comfort of the patient but also for legal purposes Mucous membranes should also be examined, specifically looking for ulcers, white spots or pigmented lesions that may reflect a primary skin disorder Teeth should be examined for evidence of enamel dysplasia (pitting), infection or general hygiene

TERMINOLOGY

• The description of lesions is important to help • • • •

• • •

determine whether lesions are primary (initial) lesions or secondary lesions Primary lesions are de novo lesions which are most representative of the disorder (Table 1.2) Secondary lesions occur with time and demonstrate other changes (Table 1.3) Configuration describes the pattern of lesions on the skin (Table 1.4) Distribution describes where the lesions are found. Examples: localized, generalized, patchy, symmetric, asymmetric, segmental, dermatomal, or following Blaschko lines Number of lesions: single, grouped or multiple Color of lesions: red, pink, blue, brown, black, white, yellow or a variation of these colors (Table 1.5) Regional patterns if lesions are found primarily in a certain distribution (Table 1.6). Examples: photosensitive eruptions are seen on the face and arms with sun exposure; tinea versicolor tends to be on the upper chest and back

PHYSICAL EXAMINATION

• Include the entire skin surface including hair, nails and oral mucosa

• Adequate lighting is important, preferably natural lighting through a window

DISEASES

• In a pediatric dermatological practice, 35 diseases account for more than 90% of the diagnoses seen in patients (Table 1.7)

Mallory Chapter 01

27/1/05

1:18 pm

Page 3

Principles of clinical diagnosis

Table 1.2

Primary lesions

Primary (initial) lesions Macule Patch Papule Nodule Tumor Plaque Wheal Vesicle Bulla Pustule Cyst Comedone Petechiae Purpura

Table 1.3

Description Flat; any change in color of the skin < 1 cm in size Flat lesion > 1 cm in size Solid elevated lesion < 1 cm diameter; greatest mass above skin surface Solid elevated lesion > 1 cm diameter; greatest mass below skin surface Solid elevated lesion > 2 cm diameter; greatest mass below skin surface Raised, flat, solid lesion > 1 cm; may show epidermal changes Raised, solid, edematous papule or plaque without epidermal change Fluid-filled (clear) < 1 cm diameter, usually < 0.5 cm Fluid-filled (clear) > 1 cm diameter Vesicle or bulla with purulent fluid Cavity lined with epithelium containing fluid, pus, or keratin Plugged sebaceous follicle containing sebum, cellular debris and anaerobic bacteria Extravasated blood into superficial dermis appearing as tiny red macules Extravasated blood into dermis and/or subcutaneous tissues associated with inflammation; may or may not be palpable

Secondary lesions

Secondary lesions Crust Exudate Eschar Scale Lichenification Excoriation Erosion Ulcer Fissure Atrophy

Scar Papillomatous Friable Pedunculated Filiform

Description Collection of dried serum, blood, pus and damaged epithelial cells Moist serum, blood or pus from either an erosion, blister or pustule Dark or black plaque overlying an ulcer; seen in tissue necrosis Dry, flaky surface with normal/abnormal keratin; present in proliferative or retention disorders Accentuation of normal skin lines caused by thickening, primarily of the epidermis, due to scratching or rubbing Localized damage to skin secondary to scratching Superficial depression from loss of surface epidermis Full-thickness loss of epidermis, some dermis and subcutaneous fat, which results in a scar when healed Linear crack in the skin, down to the dermis Thinning or loss of epidermis and/or dermis Epidermal atrophy may be very subtle, showing only fine wrinkling of the skin with increased underlying vascular prominence Dermal atrophy shows little if any epidermal change but shows depressions, reflecting loss of dermis or subcutaneous tissue Healed dermal lesion caused by trauma, surgery, infection Surface with minute finger-like projections Skin bleeds easily after minor trauma Papule or nodule on a stalk with a base usually smaller than the papule or nodule Finger-like, usually associated with warts on the face

Mallory Chapter 01

27/1/05

1:18 pm

Page 4

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Table 1.4

Configuration of skin lesions

Configuration

Description

Annular Linear Grouped Target

Round lesion with an active margin and a clear center (e.g. granuloma annulare, tinea corporis) Lesion occurring in a line (e.g. poison ivy dermatitis, excoriations) Lesions of any morphology located close together (e.g. molluscum) Dark, dusky center with erythematous border and lighter area in between (e.g. erythema multiforme) Semicircular Lesions which were annular and/or arched and have moved and become joined Snake-like margins (e.g. urticaria, creeping eruption) Appearing like an eruption of herpes simplex virus with tightly grouped vesicles or pustules (e.g. dermatitis herpetiformis) Following a dermatome (e.g. herpes zoster)

Arciform Gyrate/polycyclic Serpiginous Herpetiform Zosteriform/ dermatomal Segmental Reticulated Umbilicated

Table 1.5

Following a body segment (e.g. hemangioma) Net-like pattern (e.g. livedo reticularis) Surface has round depression in center (e.g. molluscum contagiosum)

Other descriptive terms

Characteristic

Examples

Color

Pink – caused by increase in blood flow or interstitial fluid Red – caused by increased blood or dilated blood vessels Purple – caused by increased blood or dilated blood vessels Violaceous – lavender, bluish pink Depigmented – complete loss of pigment Hypopigmented – partial loss of pigment Brown – increase in melanin in epidermis Gray/blue – increase in melanin in dermis or subcutaneous tissue Black – intensely concentrated melanin Yellow – associated with lipids or sebaceous glands

Border

Circumscribed – limited in space by something drawn around or confining an area Diffuse – spreading, scattered

Palpation

Smooth – surface not different from surrounding skin Uneven – felt in scaly or verrucous lesions Rough – feels like sandpaper

• Reaction patterns help group disorders together (Table 1.8) 1. Examples are eczematous eruptions: atopic dermatitis, allergic contact dermatitis 2. Examples are papulosquamous disorders: psoriasis, seborrheic dermatitis

DIAGNOSTIC TESTS Potassium hydroxide examination Potassium hydroxide (KOH) examination is used for suspected fungal infections of skin, hair and nails

Mallory Chapter 01

27/1/05

1:18 pm

Page 5

Principles of clinical diagnosis

Table 1.6

Table 1.7

Regional patterns and diagnosis

Face Contact dermatitis Perioral dermatitis Pityriasis alba Acne Milia Photosensitivity disorders Trunk Tinea corporis Tinea versicolor Pityriasis rosea Psoriasis Extremities Psoriasis (also scalp and nails) Scabies (also groin and waistline) Granuloma annulare Erythema nodosum Erythema multiforme Dyshidrotic eczema Gianotti–Crosti syndrome Cutis marmorata Nails Psoriasis Alopecia areata Twenty nail dystrophy Lichen planus Ingrown toenail

Genital/groin Lichen sclerosus Condyloma acuminata Acrodermatitis enteropathica Intertrigo

• Scrapings (using a scalpel blade) from a scaly lesion

• Apply a few drops of 10–20% KOH • Apply a cover slip • Heat the slide to facilitate dissolution of the cell • •

are placed on a clean glass slide

• Nail scrapings can be obtained by scraping with a •

scalpel blade or small dermal curette underneath the nail for keratinous subungual debris Place scrapings on a glass slide

Most common dermatoses in children

Acne Alopecia areata Atopic dermatitis (eczema) Café au lait macules Capillary malformation (port wine stain) Condyloma acuminata Contact dermatitis Drug eruption Epidermal cyst Folliculitis Granuloma annulare Hemangioma Herpes simplex Ichthyosis Impetigo Keloid Keratosis pilaris Mastocytosis Milia Molluscum Nevi Pityriasis alba Postinflammatory hyperpigmentation Postinflammatory hypopigmentation Psoriasis Pyogenic granuloma Scabies Seborrhea Telangiectasias Tinea capitis Tinea corporis Tinea versicolor Urticaria Viral exanthem Vitiligo Warts

Scalp Seborrheic dermatitis Tinea capitis Alopecia areata Psoriasis Nevus sebaceus Aplasia cutis congenita

Oral Lichen planus Mucocele Geographic tongue Stevens–Johnson syndrome

•

walls or allow the slide to sit for 15–20 min without heating If 20% KOH in dimethylsulfoxide (DMSO) is used, heating is unnecessary KOH can also be formulated in ink-based preparations which darken the hyphae for easier identification (examples: Chlorazole fungal stain from Delasco Dermatologic Lab and Supplies, Inc (www.delasco.com), or Swartz–Lampkin solution) Examine microscopically at 10× or 20× power with the condenser in the lowest position

Mallory Chapter 01

27/1/05

1:18 pm

Page 6

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Table 1.8

Common dermatologic diagnoses by reaction pattern

Eczematous Atopic dermatitis (eczema) Infantile eczema Nummular eczema Allergic contact dermatitis Dermatophytosis Diaper dermatitis Scabies Papulosquamous Psoriasis Seborrheic dermatitis Pityriasis rosea Syphilis Lichen planus Vesiculobullous Impetigo Herpes simplex virus Varicella-zoster virus Epidermolysis bullosa Miliaria Scabies

Infiltrative pattern Nodular Erythema nodosum Pyogenic granuloma Juvenile xanthogranuloma Cyst Papular Granuloma annulare Mastocytosis Xanthomas Molluscum contagiosum Atrophy and/or sclerosis Scleroderma Morphea Lichen sclerosus Lipoatrophy Aplasia cutis congenita

Acneiform Acne vulgaris Steroid-induced acne Perioral dermatitis Rosacea Verrucous Warts Nevus sebaceus Epidermal nevus Erosive Acrodermatitis enteropathica Epidermolysis bullosa

Vascular reactions/erythema Urticaria Vasculitis Viral exanthem

• Demonstration of hyphae or spores confirms the •

Erythema multiforme Erythema annulare centrifugum

diagnosis of tinea Oral lesions suspected of Candida can be scraped in a similar fashion to demonstrate the typical pseudohyphae or budding yeast forms

Scabies preparation Scrape a burrow or unexcoriated papule, and apply KOH or mineral oil to the slide before microscopic examination • Best areas to find mites: wrists, in between fingers, or along sides of feet of infants • Examine at 4× power to demonstrate mites, eggs or scybala (feces)

Pediculosis This can be confirmed by finding a live louse on the skin or scalp, or by demonstrating nits on the hair shafts • Affected hairs can be cut with scissors, placed on a glass slide and covered with immersion oil or KOH to demonstrate nits

Fungal cultures Fungal cultures confirm a diagnosis of tinea capitis, tinea corporis or onychomycosis • Using appropriate fungal culture media (Sabouraud’s agar, Mycosel agar) allows for identification of fungal species • Dermatophyte Test Media (DTM) can be used in the office for easy identification of dermatophytes, but does not speciate fungi

Tzanck smear This is used for diagnosis of herpes simplex or varicella-zoster virus • Remove vesicle roof with a scalpel blade and place on a glass slide • The base of the lesion is gently scraped and transferred to a slide, then stained with a Giemsa or Wright stain • Multinucleated giant epithelial cells under 40× microscopy are diagnostic for herpes virus or varicella-zoster infections

Mallory Chapter 01

27/1/05

1:18 pm

Page 7

Principles of clinical diagnosis

Wood’s lamp examination A Wood’s lamp emits long-wave ultraviolet light • Screening for fungal scalp infections caused by Microsporum species shows green fluorescence of affected hair shafts 1. It is important to verify that the actual hair shaft is causing fluorescence, which can easily be seen with a magnifying lens 2. Lint, scales and other debris on the scalp also fluoresce and should not be confused with tinea • Hypopigmentation or depigmentation can be accentuated (e.g. tuberous sclerosis patches) and delineated, particularly in light-skinned patients • Corynebacterium minutissimum, which causes erythrasma, fluoresces a coral red color • Urine of patients with certain types of porphyria fluoresces pink

Bacterial cultures

• Purulent material from representative lesions are swabbed with a soft sterile swab, inserted into the appropriate tube and sent to the laboratory

Viral culture This requires a special transport medium, which is available at most large hospitals • Blister fluid and the base of the lesion should be swabbed or aspirated and then inoculated into the appropriate media

Skin biopsy Skin biopsy is carried out for routine histopathologic or immunofluorescence examination • Topical anesthetic can be applied to the skin prior to biopsy to reduce the pain of the needle stick for local anesthesia • Punch biopsies or elliptical biopsies should demonstrate all three levels of the cutis (epidermis, dermis and subcutaneous fat)

• Shave biopsies (saucerization) may be indicated for more superficial lesions

• Biopsy is best done by a physician who is trained •

in the knowledge of which areas are best biopsied and what histology is expected Immunofluorescence may be indicated for certain connective tissue disorders or bullous diseases and requires special transport media

Diascopy Diascopy is performed by placing a glass slide over the skin lesions with light pressure • Vascular lesions typically show characteristic blanching with refilling once the slide has been removed • Granulomatous disorders such as sarcoidosis may demonstrate an apple jelly color References Brodkin RH, Janniger CK. Common clinical concerns in pediatric dermatology. Cutis 1997; 60: 279–30 Eichenfield LF, Frieden IJ, Esterly NB, eds. Textbook of Neonatal Dermatology. WB Saunders: Philadelphia, 2001 Eichenfield LF, Funk A, Fallon-Friedlander S, Cunningham BB. A clinical study to evaluate the efficacy of ELA Max (4% liposomal lidocaine) as compared with eutectic mixture of local anesthetics cream for pain reduction of venipuncture in children. Pediatrics 2002; 109: 1093–9 Freedberg IM, Eisen AZ, Wolff K, et al., eds. Fitzpatrick’s Dermatology in General Medicine, 6th edn. McGraw Hill: New York, 2003 Harper J, Oranje A, Prose N, eds. Textbook of Pediatric Dermatology. Blackwell Science Oxford: UK, 2000 Lewis EJ, Dahl MV, Lewis CA. On standard definitions: 33 years hence. Arch Dermatol 1997; 133: 1169 Renzi C, Abeni D, Picardi A, et al. Factors associated with patient satisfaction with care among dermatological outpatients. Br J Dermatol 2001; 145: 617–23 Schachner LA, Hansen RC, eds. Pediatric Dermatology, 3rd edn. Mosby (Elsevier): New York, 2003 Sybert VP. Genetic Skin Disorders. Oxford University Press: New York, 1997

Mallory Chapter 01

27/1/05

1:18 pm

Page 8

Mallory Chapter 02

27/1/05

1:19 pm

Page 9

2 NEONATAL DERMATOLOGY

COMMON CUTANEOUS FINDINGS

ceramide pattern in vernix and fetal skin. Br J Dermatol 2002; 146: 194–201

Vernix caseosa

Joglekar VM. Barrier properties of vernix caseosa. Arch Dis Child 1980; 55: 817

Major points

• Common finding in the neonatal period • Characteristic white to gray, greasy covering on the • • • •

skin surface of the newborn (Figure 2.1) Thickness increases with gestational age Considered a protective covering and mechanical barrier to bacteria Lipid composition is variable depending on gestational age Discoloration and odor can indicate fetal distress and/or intrauterine infection

Pathogenesis • Composed of shed epidermal cells, sebum and lanugo hairs • Variable lipid composition of cholesterol, free fatty acids and ceramide

Cutis marmorata Major points

• Transient mottling of the skin in the newborn period

• Normal physiologic response to ambient • •

temperature changes; accentuates with decreased temperatures and improves with rewarming Symmetrical, blanchable, red–blue reticulated mottling of trunk and extremities. (Figure 2.2) More common in premature infants, but also affects full-term newborns

Diagnosis • Clinical diagnosis Differential diagnosis • Ichthyoses (disorders of keratinization) if atypical Treatment

• None needed Prognosis • Sheds without therapy during the first week of life References Hoeger PH, Schreiner V, Klaassen IA, et al. Epidermal barrier lipids in human vernix caseosa: corresponding

Figure 2.1 newborn

Vernix caseosa – cheesy white material in a

Mallory Chapter 02

27/1/05

1:19 pm

Page 10

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

References Devillers ACA, De Waard-Van der Spek, Oranje AP. Cutis marmarota telangiectatica congenita. Clinical features in 35 cases. Arch Dermatol 1999; 134: 34–8 Ercis M, Balci S, Atakan N. Dermatological manifestations in 71 Down syndrome children admitted to a clinical genetics unit. Clin Genet 1996; 50: 317–20 Treadwell PA. Dermatoses in newborns. Am Fam Physician 1997; 56: 443–50

Sebaceous gland hyperplasia Figure 2.2 Cutis marmorata – reticulated vascular normal pattern in an infant

Major points

• Prominent sebaceous glands present in the • Improves with increasing age; typically resolves by 1 year

•

Pathogenesis

•

• Physiologic vascular reaction based on immature

•

autonomic control of the vascular plexus in response to temperature changes Postulated to be caused by increased sympathetic tone with delayed vasodilatation in response to a flux in temperature resulting in dilatation of capillaries and small venules Persistent cases associated with Down syndrome, trisomy 18, hypothyroidism, Cornelia de Lange syndrome, congenital heart disease

newborn period Affects up to 50% of term infants; less common in premature infants Characteristic pinpoint yellow papules with no surrounding erythema (Figure 2.3) Location: nose, cheeks, upper lip and forehead

Diagnosis

• Clinical findings Differential diagnosis

• Cutis marmorata telangiectatica congenita • Livedo reticularis caused by collagen vascular disorder Treatment

• Maintain even temperature of infant and surroundings Prognosis

• Generally resolves spontaneously as vasomotor responses mature

• May require further evaluation for underlying disorder if persistent beyond 6 months of age and does not respond to warming (e.g. thyroid disorder, heart disease)

Figure 2.3 newborn

Sebaceous gland hyperplasia seen in a

Pathogenesis

• Caused by maternal androgen stimulation of sebaceous glands that occurs in the final month of gestation Diagnosis

• Clinical findings • Histology: enlarged sebaceous gland with a widened sebaceous duct

Mallory Chapter 02

27/1/05

1:19 pm

Page 11

Neonatal dermatology

Differential diagnosis

Prognosis

• •

• Typically resolves within weeks to months • Can be associated with syndromes: type I

Milia Neonatal acne

Treatment

• None required or recommended Prognosis

• Spontaneous resolution during the first few months of life

oral–facial–digital syndrome, hereditary trichodysplasia, pachyonychia congenita References Akinduro OM, Burge SM. Congenital milia in the nasal groove. Br J Dermatol 1994; 130: 800

Reference

Bridges AG, Lucky AW, Haney G, Mutasim DF. Milia en plaque of the eyelids in childhood: case report and review of the literature. Pediatr Dermatol 1998; 15: 282–4

Rivers JK, Friederikesn PC, Dibin C. A prevalence survey of dermatoses in the Australian neonate. J Am Acad Dermatol 1990; 23: 77–81

Langley RG, Walsh NM, Ross JB. Multiple eruptive milia: report of a case, review of the literature, and a classification. J Am Acad Dermatol 1997; 37: 353–6

Milia Major points

• Occurs in up to 40% of infants, most commonly • • •

on the face Known as Epstein’s pearls when they occur in the oral cavity; affect up to 85% of newborns 1–2 mm white, firm papules on the face, but can also occur on the trunk, extremities, genitalia and oral mucosa (Figure 2.4) Can occur at sites of scars

Larralde de Luna M, Paspa ML, Ibargoyen J. Oral–facial–digital type I syndrome of Papillon-Leage and Psaume. Pediatr Dermatol 1992; 9: 52–6 Stefanidou MP, Panayotides JG, Tosca AD. Milia en plaque: a case report and review of the literature. Dermatol Surg 2002; 28: 291–5

Erythema toxicum neonatorum Synonym: toxic erythema of the newborn Major points

• Occurs in 40–70% of full-term infants

Pathogenesis

• Keratinous cyst originating from vellus hair follicle • Results from retention of keratin within the lowest portion of the infundibulum of the pilosebaceous unit at the level of the sebaceous duct Diagnosis

• Clinical findings • Histology: identical to epidermal cysts except for smaller size; lined by stratified epithelium; contains laminated keratin Differential diagnosis

• Neonatal acne • Sebaceous hyperplasia • Molluscum contagiosum Treatment

• No intervention required • Incision and expression rarely required

Figure 2.4

Milia – multiple white papules on the face

Mallory Chapter 02

27/1/05

1:19 pm

Page 12

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

• Rarely affects preterm infants or infants weighing • • • • •

<2500 g Characteristic eruption with macular erythema and discrete, scattered yellow papules and pustules with surrounding erythematous wheals (Figure 2.5) Location: primarily face, trunk and extremities with sparing of the palms and soles Typically occurs on day 1–2 of life; not present at birth Waxing/waning course over 1 month and can occur in crops Can be associated with a peripheral eosinophilia

• Staphylococcal impetigo • Neonatal herpes simplex • Scabies Treatment

• No treatment necessary Prognosis

• Self-limited course typically over 1–4 weeks References Bassukas ID. Is erythema toxicum neonatorum a mild selflimited acute cutaneous graft-versus-host reaction from maternal-to-fetal lymphocyte transfer? Med Hypoth 1992; 38: 334 Marchini G, Stabi B, Kankes K, et al. AQP1 and AQP3, psoriasin, and nitric oxide synthases 1–3 are inflammatory mediators in erythema toxicum neonatorum. Pediatr Dermatol 2003; 20: 377–84 Mengesha YM, Bennett ML. Pustular skin disorders: diagnosis and treatment. Am J Clin Dermatol 2002; 3: 389–400 Nanda S, Reddy BSN, Ramji S, Pandhi D. Analytical study of pustular eruptions in neonates. Pediatr Dermatol 2002; 19: 210–15 Schwartz RA, Janniger CK. Erythema toxicum neonatorum. Cutis 1996; 58: 153–5

Figure 2.5 Erythema toxicum neonatorum – erythematous papules and pustules on the back

Pathogenesis

• Unknown but several unproven hypotheses, including a transient graft-versus-host reaction against maternal lymphocytes

VanPraag MC, VanRooij RW, Folkers E, et al. Diagnosis and treatment of pustular disorders in the neonate. Pediatr Dermatol 1997; 14: 131–43 Wagner A. Distinguishing vesicular and pustular disorders in the neonate. Curr Opin Pediatr 1997; 9: 396–405

Transient neonatal pustular melanosis

Diagnosis

• Clinical findings • Scrape a pustule; Wright stain of contents reveals •

numerous eosinophils and rare neutrophils Histology: subcorneal or intracorneal pustules filled with numerous eosinophils and some neutrophils within the follicle; exocytosis of eosinophils in the follicular epithelium; eosinophils and edema of the perifollicular papillary dermis

Differential diagnosis

• Transient neonatal pustular melanosis • Congenital candidiasis

Major points

• Self-limited, benign dermatosis of the newborn • Occurs in 0.2–4% of all term infants; 4.4% of • • •

Black infants affected, 0.6% of White infants affected Lesions may be present in utero and are almost always present at birth Location: distributed diffusely on trunk, face, extremities and palms and soles Three stages: 1. 1–5 mm, fragile pustules present at birth; may not be evident at birth due to rupture with birth trauma or initial cleaning (Figure 2.6)

Mallory Chapter 02

27/1/05

1:19 pm

Page 13

Neonatal dermatology

•

2. Resolution of pustules with surrounding fine white collarettes of scale 3. Hyperpigmented macules represent postinflammatory hyperpigmentation (Figure 2.7); this stage may not be present in lightskinned infants All three lesion types can be present at any stage of presentation

Pathogenesis

• Unknown; possible variant of erythema toxicum

Figure 2.7 Transient neonatal pustular melanosis – hyperpigmented phase

Prognosis

• Pustules resolve over a few days • Hyperpigmented macules resolve over several weeks to months

• No systemic associations Figure 2.6 Transient neonatal pustular melanosis – pustular phase at birth

Diagnosis

• Clinical findings • Scrape pustule and stain with Wright stain; reveals many neutrophils and rare eosinophils

• Histology 1. Hyperpigmented macules: basilar hyperpigmentation; no dermal melanin 2. Pustules: intracorneal or subcorneal collections of neutrophils with a few eosinophils Differential diagnosis

• • • • •

Erythema toxicum neonatorum Miliaria Acropustulosis of infancy Staphylococcal impetigo Candidiasis

Treatment

• No treatment necessary

References Ramamurthy RS, Reveri M, Esterly NB, et al. Transient neonatal pustular melanosis. J Pediatr 1976; 88: 831–5 Van Praag MC, Van Rooij RW, Folkers E, et al. Diagnosis and treatment of pustular disorders in the neonate. Pediatr Dermatol 1997; 14: 131–43 Wagner A. Distinguishing vesicular and pustular disorders in the neonate. Curr Opin Pediatr 1997; 9: 396–405

Neonatal cephalic pustulosis Major points

• Presents with monomorphic inflammatory papules • • •

and pustules on the face, scalp and neck during the first month of life Comedones are absent Lesions are not follicular Male/female ratio is 1 : 1

Pathogenesis

• Lesions may be induced by inflammatory reaction to Malassezia furfur or M. sympodialis

Mallory Chapter 02

27/1/05

1:19 pm

Page 14

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Diagnosis

Differential diagnosis

• Potassium hydroxide preparation shows Malassezia sp. • Histology: neutrophilic inflammation and yeast

• Omphalomesenteric duct cyst/umbilical polyp • Patent urachus

Differential diagnosis

Treatment

• • • •

• Silver nitrate application • Cryocautery, ligature and excision have been

Infantile acne Erythema toxicum neonatorum Transient neonatal pustular melanosis Eosinophilic pustulosis

Treatment

• •

Resolves spontaneously without treatment Ketoconazole or miconazole cream twice a day for 1–2 weeks

reported to be successful Prognosis

• Can resolve spontaneously but usually requires •

treatment Persistence indicates the presence of an umbilical remnant

Prognosis

References

• Transient and resolves without residual scarring

Campbell J, Beasley SW, McMullin N, Hutson JM. Clinical diagnosis of umbilical swellings and discharges in children. Med J Aust 1986; 145: 450–3

References Bernier V, Weill FX, Hirigoyen V, et al. Skin colonization by Malassezia species in neonates: a prospective study and relationship with neonatal cephalic pustulosis. Arch Dermatol 2002; 138: 215–18 Niamba P, Weill FX, Sarlangue J, et al. Is common neonatal cephalic pustulosis (neonatal acne) triggered by Malassezia sympodialis? Arch Dermatol 1998; 134: 995–8 Rapelanoro R, Mortureux P, Couprie B, et al. Neonatal Malassezia furfur pustulosis. Arch Dermatol 1996; 132: 190–3

Donlon CR, Furdon SA. Assessment of the umbilical cord outside of the delivery room. Part 2. Adv Neonatal Care 2002; 2: 187–97

OTHER CUTANEOUS DISORDERS Neonatal lupus erythematosus Major points

Umbilical granuloma Major points

• Cutaneous findings seen in 50% with two variants: •

• Pink papule or nodule within the umbilical stump that bleeds easily (Figure 2.8)

• Develops at the site of the umbilical cord remnant after it falls off

• Clinically resembles a pyogenic granuloma Pathogenesis

•

• Inadequate healing at umbilical stump with •

subsequent endothelial cell proliferation and inflammation (granulation tissue) Not true granuloma

Diagnosis

• Clinical findings • Histology: endothelial cell proliferation without atypia

• •

papulosquamous (most common) and annular (See Chapter 15) Location most common on the face and scalp with characteristic patterns: 1. ‘Raccoon eyes’ or ‘owl-like’ periocular involvement 2. ‘Headband’ distribution with lesions on the forehead and bilateral temporal areas (Figure 2.9) Skin lesions rarely present at birth and usually develop in the first few weeks of life after light exposure New lesions can continue to appear for up to 6 months and then fade with waning of the maternal autoantibodies Congenital heart abnormalities (most common is congenital heart block) occur in up to 30% of affected infants and have up to 20% mortality rate; appropriate work-up mandatory if diagnosis suspected

Mallory Chapter 02

27/1/05

1:19 pm

Page 15

Neonatal dermatology

• • •

autoantibodies, and occasionally anti-RNP autoantibodies 1. The majority of mothers are asymptomatic 2. Mothers are affected by mild systemic lupus erythematosus or Sjögren syndrome IgG autoantibodies are transplacentally passed to the fetus and bind to autoantigens, causing cellular cytotoxicity and inflammation Skin lesions resolve with waning maternal autoantibodies Cardiac inflammation causes permanent scarring in conduction system of the heart

Diagnosis Figure 2.8 umbilicus

Umbilical granuloma – vascular nodule on the

• Clinical findings confirmed by blood tests • Serologic studies: anti-Ro (SS-A), anti-La (SS-B),

• •

anti-RNP, anti-DNA, anticardiolipin antibodies, antinuclear antibodies and rheumatoid factor may be positive Histology: epidermal atrophy, basal vacuolar changes, dermal edema and superficial mucin with minimal lymphocytic inflammation Direct immunofluorescence: linear IgG, IgM and C3 along the basement membrane zone in up to 60% of cases

Differential diagnosis

• • • • • •

Erythema multiforme Tinea corporis Urticaria Bullous pemphigoid Annular erythema of infancy Erythema annulare centrifugum

Treatment Figure 2.9 Neonatal lupus erythematosus – typical annular lesions on the face

• Broad-spectrum sunblock daily • Topical steroids: low- or high-potency depending

• Other findings: thrombocytopenia, cholestatic liver

• Oral corticosteroids (rarely needed) • Pulsed dye laser for residual telangiectasias after

on severity

•

enzyme elevation, anticardiolipin antibodies, thrombosis, hypocalcemia, pneumonia Transient brain computerized tomography (CT) abnormalities, spastic paraparesis, myasthenia gravis, and neurologic symptoms caused by vasculopathy of the central nervous system (CNS)

Pathogenesis

• 95% of mothers have anti-Ro (SS-A) autoantibodies and 60–80% have anti-La (SS-B)

antibodies undetectable

• Congenital heart block: cardiology consultation intravenous immunoglobulins (IVIG), pacemaker as indicated Prognosis

• Skin lesions resolve in 1–2 years with occasional residual dyspigmentation, telangiectasias and mild scarring

Mallory Chapter 02

27/1/05

1:19 pm

Page 16

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

• Transient liver and brain CT abnormalities • Congenital heart block: 50% require a pacemaker; • •

15% mortality Recurrent pancytopenia has been reported in the neonatal period, and may be related to ribonuclear protein and Smith autoantibodies Small increased risk of associated disorders later: juvenile rheumatoid arthritis, Hashimoto thyroiditis, congenital hypothyroidism, diabetes mellitus, psoriasis, nephritic syndrome and iritis

• Location: typically involves the cheeks, shoulders, buttocks, thighs and legs

• Can develop calcification, fluctuance or ulceration

References Arkachaisri T, Lehman TJ. Systemic lupus erythematosus and related disorders of childhood. Curr Opin Rheumatol 1999; 11: 384–92 Brucato A, Cimaz R, Stramba-Badiale M. Neonatal lupus. Clin Rev Allergy Immunol 2002; 23: 279–99 Buyon JP, Clancy RM. Neonatal lupus: review of proposed pathogenesis and clinical data from the US-based Research Registry for Neonatal Lupus. Autoimmunity 2003; 36: 41–50 Buyon JP, Clancy RM. Neonatal lupus syndromes. Curr Opin Rheumatol 2003; 15: 535–41 Cimaz R, Spence DL, Homberger L, Siverman FD. Incidence and spectrum of neonatal lupus erythematosus: a prospective study of infants born to mothers with anti-Ro autoantibodies. J Pediatr 2003; 142: 678–83 High WA, Costner MI. Persistent scarring, atrophy, and dyspigmentation in a preteen girl with neonatal lupus erythematosus. J Am Acad Dermatol 2003; 48: 626–8 Prendiville JS, Cabral DA, Poskitt KJ, Au S, Sargent MA. Central nervous system involvement in neonatal lupus erythematosus. Pediatr Dermatol 2003; 20: 60–7 Sandborg CI. Childhood systemic lupus erythematosus and neonatal lupus syndrome. Curr Opin Rheum 1998; 10: 481–7 Silverman ED, Laxer RM. Neonatal lupus erythematosus. Rheum Dis Clin 1997; 23: 599–618

Subcutaneous fat necrosis

Figure 2.10 Subcutaneous fat necrosis – erythematous firm patches on the back

• Can develop hypercalcemia with symptoms of irritability, vomiting, failure to thrive and seizures as well as nephrocalcinosis up to 5 months after initial presentation Pathogenesis

• Unknown with several hypotheses 1. Localized hypoxic injury to fat secondary to trauma 2. Increased saturated fatty acid : unsaturated fatty acid ratio in newborn that predisposes to crystallization with hypothermia 3. Hypothermia Diagnosis

• Clinical findings • Histology: lobular panniculitis with patchy areas of fat necrosis and fat cyst formation, polymorphous inflammation and typical needle-shaped clefts Differential diagnosis

Major points

• Presents with asymptomatic subcutaneous nodules

•

or erythematous plaques in otherwise healthy fullterm and post-term infants at 1–6 weeks of life (Figure 2.10) Often follows a difficult delivery with perinatal complications such as hypothermia and asphyxia

• Traumatic panniculitis • Post-steroid panniculitis • Sclerema neonatorum Treatment

• Treatment usually unnecessary • Aspiration of fluctuant lesions

Mallory Chapter 02

27/1/05

1:19 pm

Page 17

Neonatal dermatology

• Hypercalcemia requires appropriate treatment and may include hydration, furosemide, intravenous corticosteroids and etidronate

Diagnosis

• Clinical findings in typical setting • Histology: identical to subcutaneous fat necrosis

Prognosis

Differential diagnosis

• Most infants have resolution of lesions within 1–2

• • • •

• •

months Subcutaneous atrophy can occur Monitor for hypercalcemia for 6 months after initial presentation of skin lesions (can be fatal), especially if lesions are extensive

References Bachrach LK, Lum CK. Etidronate in subcutaneous fat necrosis of the newborn. J Pediatr 1999; 135: 530 Burden AD, Krafchik BR. Subcutaneous fat necrosis of the newborn: a review of 11 cases. Pediatr Dermatol 1999; 16: 384–7

Subcutaneous fat necrosis of newborn Restrictive dermopathy Systemic sclerosis Stiff skin syndrome

Treatment

• Supportive measures to reverse the underlying • •

disorder: temperature control, hydration, electrolyte balance and aggressive antibiotic therapy Systemic corticosteroid use is controversial Exchange transfusions

Prognosis

Cook JS, Stone MS, Hansen JR. Hypercalcemia in association with subcutaneous fat necrosis of the newborn: studies of calcium-regulating hormones. Pediatrics 1992; 90: 3

• High infant mortality related to the underlying

Hicks MJ, Levy ML, Alexander J, Flaitz CM. Subcutaneous fat necrosis of the newborn and hypercalcemia: a case report and review of the literature. Pediatr Dermatol 1993; 10: 271–6

•

Mather MK, Sperling LC, Sau P. Subcutaneous fat necrosis of the newborn. Int J Dermatol 1997; 36: 435–52

Battin M, Harding J, Gunn A. Sclerema neonatorum following hypothermia. J Paediatr Child Health. 2002; 38: 533–4

Sclerema neonatorum

Burden AD, Krafchik BR. Subcutaneous fat necrosis of the newborn: a review of 11 cases. Pediatr Dermatol 1999; 16: 384–7

Major points

• Characteristic widespread thickening and • •

• •

induration of the skin in critically ill newborns (e.g. sepsis, hypoglycemia and metabolic acidosis) May occur up to 4 months of age Presents with sudden onset of rapid hardening of the skin that starts distally and progresses to involve the skin diffusely but with sparing of the palms, soles and genitalia No pitting of the skin is noted with pressure Skin becomes bound-down with mask-like facies and immobile joints

Pathogenesis

•

References

Requena L, Sanchez Yus E, Panniculitis. Part II. Mostly lobular panniculitis. J Am Acad Dermatol 2001; 45: 325–61, quiz 362–4

Aplasia cutis congenita Major points

• Occurs in approximately 1 : 5000 births • Characterized by the absence of skin (i.e. • •

• Etiology unknown; hypothesis of cold injury and secondary solidification of the tissue due to enzymatic dysfunction

condition Skin changes can resolve with treatment of the underlying disorder Worse prognosis with thrombocytopenia, neutropenia, and progressive acidosis

•

epidermis, dermis and/or subcutaneous tissues) in localized or widespread areas at birth Location: most common on the scalp (Figure 2.11) May be an isolated finding, associated with underlying defects or seen with other isolated anomalies, syndromes and chromosomal disorders Lesion types: 1. Membranous

Mallory Chapter 02

27/1/05

1:19 pm

Page 18

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Pathogenesis

• Unknown • Proposed etiologies include: developmental, genetic, vascular insufficiency, trauma, teratogens, infection

• Most cases are sporadic; some show autosomal dominant or autosomal recessive inheritance patterns Diagnosis

• Clinical findings • Histology: thinned or absent epidermis; thinned dermis with loose connective tissue and collagen disarray; thinned subcutis; small or absent appendages

Figure 2.11 Aplasia cutis congenita – typical location on the vertex of the scalp

•

a. Most common presentation b. Typically well-circumscribed, atrophic, 1–5 cm defects c. Can be solitary (75%) or multiple (25%) in a linear distribution d. Can be bullous, eroded, ulcerated or scar-like e. May have an associated ‘hair collar sign,’ suggestive of associated cranial dysraphism f. Location: vertex of the scalp or face 2. Stellate a. Midline scalp with associated underlying bony defects and vascular malformations b. Can also be seen as large defects on the face or trunk with associated disorders and multiple extracutaneous findings Proposed classification system: 1. Group 1: aplasia cutis congenita (ACC) of scalp without multiple anomalies 2. Group 2: ACC of scalp with associated limb anomalies (shortening, club feet) called Adams–Oliver syndrome 3. Group 3: ACC of scalp with associated epidermal and sebaceous nevi 4. Group 4: ACC overlying embryologic malformations 5. Group 5: ACC associated with fetus papyraceus or placental infarcts 6. Group 6: ACC associated with epidermolysis bullosa (Figure 2.12) 7. Group 7: ACC of the extremities without epidermolysis bullosa 8. Group 8: ACC due to teratogens 9. Group 9: ACC associated with syndromes or malformations

Differential diagnosis

• • • • • • •

Trauma Neonatal herpes simplex infection Encephalocele Dermoid cyst Goltz syndrome (focal dermal hypoplasia) Incontinentia pigmenti Amniotic band syndrome

Treatment

• Daily cleansing and topical antibiotic application if • •

ulcerated Surgical excision, grafting, hair transplantation if indicated Genetic counseling recommended

Prognosis

• Excellent if isolated lesion • Most small skin lesions heal completely without • • •

treatment, as do small underlying bony defects; asymptomatic scars persist for life Risk of infection high with exposed dura Hemorrhage and death can occur from associated intracranial anomalies (rare) Associated syndromes and defects with variable prognosis

References Benjamin LT, Trowers AB, Schachner LA. Giant aplasia cutis congenita without associated anomalies. Pediatr Dermatol 2004; 21: 150–3 Casanova D, Amar E, Bardot J, Magalon G. Aplasia cutis congenita. Report on 5 family cases involving the scalp. Eur J Pediatr Surg 2001; 11: 280–4

Mallory Chapter 02

27/1/05

1:19 pm

Page 19

Neonatal dermatology

Colon-Fontanez F, Fallon Friedlander S, Newbury R, Eichenfield LF. Bullous aplasia cutis congenita. J Am Acad Dermatol 2003; 48: S95–8 Drolet B, Prendiville J, Golden J, et al. ‘Membranous aplasia cutis’ with hair collars. Congenital abscence of skin or neuroectodermal defect? Arch Dermatol 1995; 131: 1427–31 Frieden IJ. Aplasia cutis congenita: a clinical review and proposal for classification. J Am Acad Dermatol 1986; 14: 646 Koshy CE, Waterhouse N, Peterson D. Large scalp and skull defect in aplasia cutis congenita. Br J Plast Surg 2000; 53: 619–22 Maman E, Maor E, Kachko L, Carmi R. Epidermolysis bullosa, pyloric atresia, aplasia cutis congenita: histopathological delineation of an autosomal recessive disease. Am J Med Genet 1998; 78: 127–33 Mempel M, Abeck D, Lange I, Strom K, et al. The wide spectrum of clinical expression in Adams–Oliver syndrome: a report of two cases. Br J Dermatol 1999; 140: 1157–60

Nevus sebaceus of Jadassohn

Figure 2.12 Aplasia cutis congenita – associated with dystrophic epidermolysis bullosa on the leg

Major points

• Characteristic yellowish hairless plaque on the scalp (Figure 2.13)

• More prominent in the newborn period because of

• • •

maternal hormone influence, becoming less obvious during childhood, but then more apparent and papillomatous with pubertal hormonal influences Location: head and neck Usually isolated but can be associated with other syndromes and anomalies Occurs in 0.3% of newborns

Pathogenesis

• Localized developmental anomaly of appendageal structures Diagnosis

• Clinical findings • Histology: mild acanthosis and papillomatosis with immature and malformed pilosebaceous units

Figure 2.13 Nevus sebaceous of Jadassohn – yellow papules in a hairless patch

Differential diagnosis

Treatment

• • • • •

• Observe for clinical change, since there is a low

Epidermal nevus Aplasia cutis congenita Encephalocele Juvenile xanthogranuloma Verruca vulgaris

risk of malignant tumors

• Elective surgical excision, usually recommended around puberty when lesions become more apparent and annoying

Mallory Chapter 02

27/1/05

1:19 pm

Page 20

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Prognosis

• Lesions persist throughout life • Potential for secondary tumors within these lesions: syringocystadenoma papilliferum, basal cell carcinoma. Variably reported risk, up to 30%, of benign and malignant neoplastic growths, but probably very low risk for malignant growths References Beer GM, Widder W, Cierpka K, et al. Malignant tumors associated with nevus sebaceous: therapeutic consequences. Aesthetic Plast Surg 1999; 23: 224–7 Chun K, Vazquez M, Sanchez JL. Nevus sebaceus: clinical outcome and considerations for prophylactic excision. Int J Dermatol 1995; 34: 538–41 Cribier B, Scrivener Y, Grosshans E. Tumors arising in nevus sebaceus: a study of 596 cases. J Am Acad Dermatol 2000; 42: 263–8 Dunkin CS, Abouzeid M, Sarangapani K. Malignant transformation in congenital sebaceous naevi in childhood. J R Coll Surg Edinb 2001; 46: 303–6 Santibanez-Gallerani A, Marshall D, Duarte AM, et al. Should nevus sebaceus of Jadassohn in children be excised? A study of 757 cases, and literature review. J Craniofac Surg 2003; 14: 658–60

Figure 2.14 Neonatal scar caused by intravenous fluid extravasation

Diagnosis

• Consistent clinical history • Clinical findings Differential diagnosis

Neonatal scars Major points

• The number of neonatal scars is related to gestational age and length of time spent in an intensive care unit

• Scarring can occur with amniocentesis, chorionic

•

villus sampling, fetal monitoring, arterial or venous punctures, catheter insertions, heel sticks, chest tubes, adhesives and extravasated intravenous fluids (Figure 2.14) Amniocentesis scars occur in <1% of neonates whose mothers underwent amniocentesis; risk decreases during second trimester; scars are usually not apparent for weeks to months after birth If less than 29 weeks’ gestational age at birth, anetoderma can develop at sites of monitors and adhesives; presents as atrophic scars on the anterior trunk and proximal extremities

• • • •

Congenital dimples Congenital sinus tracts Aplasia cutis congenita Focal dermal hypoplasia (Goltz syndrome)

Treatment

• None effective • Red lesions (vascular component) can be treated with vascular laser with variable results Prognosis

• Most commonly small and inconspicuous, but can • •

be large with underlying fibrosis Can develop secondary calcified papules and hypertrophic scars Puncture sites can rarely become secondarily infected with abscess or gangrene

References Pathogenesis

• Caused by multiple procedures performed in utero or in the neonatal intensive care unit

Cambiaghi S, Restano L, Cavalli R, Gellmetti C. Skin dimpling as a consequence of amniocentesis. J Am Acad Dermatol 1998; 39: 888–90

Mallory Chapter 02

27/1/05

1:20 pm

Page 21

Neonatal dermatology

Cartlidge PHT, Fox PE, Rutter N. The scars of newborn intensive care. Early Hum Dev 1990; 21: 1–10 Prizant TL, Lucky AW, Frieden IJ, et al. Spontaneous atrophic patches in extremely premature infants. Arch Dermatol 1996; 132: 671–4 Todd DJ. Anetoderma of prematurity. Arch Dermatol 1997; 133: 789

Dermal erythropoiesis Synonyms: extramedullary hematopoiesis, blueberry muffin baby Major points

• Hematopoiesis occurs in the skin during • •

embryonic development Persistence of this process in the neonate can be seen in healthy newborns but typically results from intrauterine infection or hematologic dyscrasias Characteristically produces a generalized eruption with purpuric infiltrative papules primarily on the head, neck and trunk (Figure 2.15)

Diagnosis

• Clinical findings • Histology: superficial and deep dermal perivascular infiltration with myeloid and erythroid cells

• Work-up for underlying cause: complete blood count, TORCH serologies, viral cultures and Coombs test Differential diagnosis

• Diffuse neonatal hemangiomatosis • Congenital leukemia • Metastatic infiltration: neuroblastoma, rhabdomyosarcoma, Langerhans cell histiocytosis

• Coagulation/platelet defects Treatment

• None needed for skin involvement Prognosis

• Skin lesions resolve spontaneously over several weeks

• Overall prognosis dependent on the underlying cause

Pathogenesis

• Causes: intrauterine infections such as rubella, •

cytomegalovirus (CMV), coxsackievirus, parvovirus, toxoplasmosis, varicella virus, HIV Hematologic dyscrasias: hemolytic disease of the newborn (Rh incompatibility or ABO incompatibility), spherocytosis, twin to twin transfusion

References Baselga E, Drolet BA, Esterly NB. Purpura in infants and children. J Am Acad Dermatol 1997; 37: 673–705 Epps RE, Pittelkow MR, Su WP. TORCH syndrome. Semin Dermatol 1995; 14: 179–86 Evole-Buselli M, Hernandez-Marti MJ, Gasco-Lacalle B, et al. Neonatal dermal hematopoiesis associated with diffuse neonatal hemangiomatosis. Pediatr Dermatol 1997; 14: 383–6

NEONATAL INFECTIONS Herpes neonatorum Major points

• Presentation is variable and depends on route and •

Figure 2.15 infection

Dermal erythropoiesis caused by neonatal

time of exposure, virulence and maternal immunity (Chapter 8) Primary congenital (intrauterine) infection: 1. 5% of herpes simplex virus (HSV) infections in the newborn period 2. Acquired in utero 3. Exposure via ascending infection or viremia 4. Can lead to intrauterine fetal death

Mallory Chapter 02

•

27/1/05

1:20 pm

Page 22

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

5. Newborn will have specific cell-mediated immunity (i.e. lymphocyte transformation) to HSV at birth, as opposed to infants who are infected at the time of labor and delivery 6. 70% have vesicles and 30% have scars at birth 7. CNS involvement: >50% have microcephaly, 60% have chorioretinitis Primary neonatal infection: 1. 95% of HSV infections in newborn period 2. HSV is acquired perinatally (85%) or postnatally (10%) 3. Risk of perinatal infection is 50% with primary maternal infection but only 5% with recurrent maternal infection 4. Postnatal exposure can be from maternal infection (e.g. genital or extragenital), other family members or health-care workers 5. Incubation period highly variable: 30% have symptoms at birth; the rest appear in the first 6 weeks of life 6. Characteristic patterns: a. Skin, mouth and eye lesions – vesicles, erosions or ulcers typically on scalp or presenting part; oral vesicles, erosions or ulcers; conjunctivitis or keratitis; CNS involvement symptoms are often delayed or absent (Figures 2.16 and 2.17)

Figure 2.17 Herpes neonatorum with a positive culture for herpes simplex virus-1

b. CNS disease – cutaneous lesions present in 60%; focal encephalitis or meningoencephalitis with irritability, lethargy, fever or seizures c. Disseminated disease – cutaneous lesions in 77%; affects liver, adrenals, lung and brain with symptoms suggestive of neonatal sepsis Pathogenesis

• Caused by HSV type 1 or 2; most often transmitted from an infected mother

• Intrauterine, perinatal (during delivery) or

•

postnatal (after delivery) transmission; or by postnatal contact with those with viral shedding or active lesions Recurrent maternal infection confers some degree of passive immunity to the neonate

Diagnosis

• Viral cultures from skin and oral mucosal lesions, • • • Figure 2.16

Herpes neonatorum in a 28-day-old neonate

nasopharynx, conjunctivae, urine, plasma and cerebrospinal fluid (CSF) Tzanck smear of vesicles: multinucleated epithelial giant cells Direct fluorescent antibody for HSV-1 or -2 Serology for HSV antibodies: rising IgG titers are sensitive and specific for infection, whereas IgM titers are not sensitive in the newborn

Mallory Chapter 02

27/1/05

1:20 pm

Page 23

Neonatal dermatology

• Polymerase chain reaction for HSV is highly • • •

sensitive CSF: lymphocytic pleocytosis, elevated protein and red blood cell count indicative of CNS involvement Imaging: CT or magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) of the brain if indicated Histology: intraepidermal vesicles, ballooning and reticular degeneration with secondary acantholysis and eosinophilic intranuclear inclusion bodies

Differential diagnosis • Congenital infections: varicella, syphilis, enterovirus, parainfluenza, adenovirus, toxoplasmosis, CMV, bacterial sepsis • Bullous impetigo • Erythema toxicum neonatorum • Transient neonatal pustular melanosis • Sucking blister • Incontinentia pigmenti • Langerhans cell histiocytosis

• Neonatal disseminated infection: 75% mortality rate if untreated and 50% mortality rate if treated; 40% will have CNS sequelae References Enright AM. Prober CG. Neonatal herpes infection: diagnosis, treatment and prevention. Semin Neonatol, 2002; 7: 283–91 Jacobs RF. Neonatal herpes simplex virus infections. Semin Perinatol 1998; 22: 64–71 Kimberlin DW. Neonatal herpes simplex infection. Clin Microbiol Rev 2004; 17: 1–13 Kohl S. The diagnosis and treatment of neonatal herpes simplex virus infection. Pediatr Ann 2002; 31: 726–32 Trizna Z, Tyring SK. Antiviral treatment of diseases in pediatric dermatology. Dermatol Clin 1998; 16: 539–52

Congenital varicella and infantile herpes zoster Major points

• Most infants exposed to varicella in utero (i.e.

Treatment

• Systemic antiviral therapy:

•

1. Acyclovir 30 mg/kg per day intravenously every 8 h for cutaneous-only disease; adjust for renal disease 2. Acyclovir 60 mg/kg per day intravenously every 8 h for congenital disease, CNS or disseminated disease; adjust for renal disease 3. Vidarabine 30 mg/kg per day intravenously every 12 h or foscarnet 40 mg/kg per day intravenously every 12 h Prevent secondary bacterial infection of the eroded lesions with topical mupirocin or antibiotic ointments

Prognosis • Intrauterine infection can result in fetal demise; nearly 100% of congenital HSV survivors have significant neurologic delay • Cutaneous-only disease has nearly 100% survival; 40% will have ocular sequelae • CNS infection is more severe with HSV-2 infection; 50% mortality rate if untreated, 15% mortality rate if treated; approximately 75% have permanent neurologic disease and 20% have persistent ocular disease

• •

•

mother had varicella during pregnancy) are normal with no sequelae (Chapter 8) Disease manifestations depend on the time of exposure and maternal immune response Congenital varicella syndrome (fetal varicella syndrome or varicella embryopathy): 1. Fetal exposure before 20 weeks of gestation with greatest risk from 13 to 20 weeks 2. 9% reported risk of developing disease with exposure 3. Presents with dermatomal lesions: denuded or scarred with associated underlying tissue hypoplasia 4. Additional findings: low birth weight, neurologic (e.g. hydrocephalus, retardation, seizures), ophthalmologic (e.g. chorioretinitis, cataracts, nystagmus), musculoskeletal (e.g. extremity hypoplasia and paresis), gastrointestinal and genitourinary anomalies Neonatal varicella: 1. Due to fetal exposure near the time of delivery with maternal infection between 5 days prior to and 2 days following delivery 2. 23–62% risk of developing disease with exposure 3. Cutaneous findings from 1 to 16 days postpartum: papulovesicular lesions which can become hemorrhagic or necrotic

Mallory Chapter 02

•

27/1/05

1:20 pm

Page 24

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

4. High risk for disseminated disease: pneumonitis, hepatitis, encephalitis Infantile herpes zoster: 1. Develops during first year of life after in utero varicella exposure 2. 2% of infants exposed to intrauterine varicella will develop infantile herpes zoster 3. Clinical findings: papulovesicles in dermatomal pattern, typically thoracic area

Pathogenesis

• Maternal varicella infection with viremia leads to fetal exposure to the varicella zoster virus (VZV)

• Infantile herpes zoster is caused by reactivation of dormant virus in the sensory dorsal root ganglia Diagnosis

• Consistent maternal history • Clinical findings • Congenital:

•

1. Viral culture of amniotic fluid or fetal blood for VZV 2. Prenatal serology and cultures are neither sensitive nor specific for diagnosing fetal infection Neonatal: 1. Tzanck smear of vesicle shows multinucleated epithelial giant cells 2. Direct fluorescent antibody for VZV 3. Viral culture

Differential diagnosis

• Aplasia cutis congenita • Epidermolysis bullosa • Neonatal infections: HSV, candidasis, Staphylococcus aureus

• Erythema toxicum neonatorum • Transient neonatal pustular melanosis

•

2. Ultrasound anomalies include fetal hydrops, polyhydramnios, microcephaly and limb hypoplasia Neonatal varicella 1. VZIG 2. Acyclovir 3. Isolation Infantile herpes zoster 1. No specific therapy needed if immunocompetent 2. Consider systemic acyclovir, especially if there are hemorrhagic or disseminated lesions

Prognosis

• Most exposures during pregnancy result in no fetal sequelae

• Intrauterine infection may lead to fetal demise • Neonatal varicella – 10–30% mortality References Enders G, Miller E, Cradock-Watson J, et al. Consequences of varicella and herpes zoster in pregnancy: prospective study of 1739 cases. Lancet 1994; 343: 1548–51 Harger JH, Ernest JM, Thurnau GR, et al. Frequency of congenital varicella syndrome in a prospective cohort of 347 pregnant women. Obstet Gynecol 2002; 100: 260–5 Nathwani D, Maclean A, Conway S, Carrington D. Varicella infections in pregnancy and the newborn. A review prepared for the UK Advisory Group on Chickenpox on behalf of the British Society for the Study of Infection. J Infect 1998; 36 (Suppl 1): 59–71 Sauerbrei A, Wutzler P. Neonatal varicella. J Perinatol 2001; 21: 545–9 Sauerbrei A, Wutzler P. The congenital varicella syndrome. J Perinatol 2000; 20: 548–54 Tseng HW, Liu CC, Wang SM, et al. Complications of varicella in children: emphasis on skin and central nervous system disorders. J Microbiol Immunol Infect 2000; 33: 248–52

Treatment

• Intrauterine exposure

•

1. Varicella zoster immunoglobulin (VZIG) given within 5 days to nonimmune mothers with recent VZV exposure 2. Acyclovir is considered safe for pregnant women who are infected and may minimize the risk of disease in the newborn Congenital varicella 1. Supportive

Candidiasis Major points

• Congenital candidiasis 1. Caused by ascending vaginal infection of Candida albicans with in utero exposure or direct inoculation during labor and delivery 2. Cervical sutures and retained intrauterine devices are risk factors for infection

Mallory Chapter 02

27/1/05

1:20 pm

Page 25

Neonatal dermatology

3. Lesions typically appear on the first day of life, presenting with generalized erythematous papulovesicular eruption leading to desquamation (Figures 2.18 and 2.19) 4. Often involves palms, soles and oral mucosa (thrush) 5. Can have respiratory and gastrointestinal involvement from aspiration of infected amniotic fluid 6. Rare development of systemic disease

• Neonatal candidiasis 1. Caused by postnatal colonization of Candida albicans 2. More common in low-birth-weight infants (<1500 g) 3. Develop classic mucocutaneous eruption with satellite lesions and diaper area involvement 4. Dissemination to the lungs, meninges and urinary tract with sepsis more common in low-birth-weight infants Pathogenesis

• Caused by vertical transmission with intrauterine chorioamnionitis or direct inoculation of Candidia albicans, typically from the mother Diagnosis

• Potassium hydroxide preparation from skin scrapings reveals budding yeasts and pseudo-hyphae (Chapter 9) Differential diagnosis

Figure 2.18 Congenital candidiasis – close-up of pustules, associated with candida septicemia

• • • • •

Neonatal herpes infection Erythema toxicum neonatorum Transient neonatal pustular melanosis Miliaria Staphylococcal scalded skin syndrome

Treatment

• Topical: nystatin cream or imidazole cream • •

•

BID for cutaneous disease is typically sufficient Fluconazole 3–6 mg/kg per day PO for severe skin involvement Disseminated disease: 1. Amphotericin B 0.5–1.0 mg/kg per day IV or 2. Fluconazole 5 mg/kg per day IV or 3. 5-fluorocytosine 50–150 mg/kg per day PO Intravenous fluconazole for preterm, low-birthweight infants at risk for systemic candidiasis

Prognosis

• Excellent for only cutaneous disease with rapid resolution over 1 week with topical therapy alone

• Disseminated disease carries a worse prognosis Figure 2.19 Congenital candidiasis – sheets of pustules in a 3-day-old with only cutaneous involvement

with increased risk of renal and CNS involvement, as well as sepsis and death

Mallory Chapter 02

27/1/05

1:20 pm

Page 26

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

References Darmstadt GL, Dinulos JG, Miller Z. Congenital cutaneous candidiasis: clinical presentation, pathogenesis, and management guidelines. Pediatrics 2000; 105: 438–44 Kaufman D. Strategies for prevention of neonatal invasive candidiasis. Semin Perinatol 2003; 27: 414–24 Pradeepkumar VK, Rajadurai VS, Tan KW. Congenital candidiasis: varied presentations. J Perinatol 1998; 18: 311–16

Congenital syphilis Major points

• 50–60% of infants are asymptomatic at birth • 2–6 weeks after birth is the most common age of • •

•

onset for those infants infected in the third trimester Early congenital syphilis is clinically similar to presentation of exaggerated secondary syphilis in an adult (Chapter 7) Early disease 1. Usually apparent by 3 months of age but can be up to 2 years 2. Presenting signs: a. Syphilitic rhinitis (snuffles) b. ‘Barber’ pole umbilical cord (red and blue with white streaks) c. Cutaneous lesions: condyloma lata, mucous patches, petechiae, hemorrhagic vesicles/bullae on palms and soles (Figure 2.20), or diffuse papulosquamous eruption involving the palms/soles and resembling that of secondary syphilis (Figure 7.29) d. Other systemic findings: meningioencephalitis, chorioretinitis, hepatosplenomegaly, lymphadenopathy (especially epitrochlear), low birth weight, prematurity, anemia, thrombocytopenia, respiratory distress and osteochondritis Late disease (very rare) 1. Develops >2 years of age 2. Cutaneous findings: rhagades, gummata 3. Extracutaneous findings: a. Neurosyphilis b. Interstitial keratitis c. Sensorineural hearing loss d. Bony changes (saddle nose, frontal bossing, saber shins, syphilitic arthritis, Clutton joints (effusions of the knees),

Figure 2.20 Congenital syphilis – acquired early in pregnancy; with hepatosplenomegaly, respiratory distress and erosions of palms and soles (previously published in Pediatric Dermatology 1989; 6: 51–2)

Higoumenaki sign (thickening of the inner third of the clavicle) e. Oral deformities: mulberry molars and Hutchinson pegged central incisors f. Paroxysmal cold hemoglobinuria 4. Hutchinson triad includes: interstitial keratitis, Hutchinson incisors, cranial nerve VIII deafness Pathogenesis

• Infection with spirochete Treponema pallidum during gestation

• Invades via placenta to infect multiple fetal organs

• Adheres to endothelial cells and causes vasculitis Diagnosis

• Consistent maternal history • Clinical findings • Spirochete identification from placenta, umbilical •

• •

cord or a mucocutaneous lesion: dark field microscopy or direct fluorescent antibody Maternal and infant serology: infant nontreponemal titer >4 times maternal titer indicates true neonatal infection; treponemal serologies are more specific, especially IgM FTAABS or VDRL on CSF Long-bone radiologic evaluation for osteochondritis Histology: swelling of vascular endothelium and lymphoplasmocytic perivascular inflammation

Mallory Chapter 02

27/1/05

1:20 pm

Page 27

Neonatal dermatology

Differential diagnosis

• • • •

Congenital candidiasis Scabies Psoriasis Epidermolysis bullosa

• Majority are external; 30% can be intranasal or with oropharyngeal extension Pathogenesis

• Evagination of neuroectodermal tissue via a

Treatment

• Establish status of CNS involvement by examining •

CSF Aqueous crystalline penicillin G 50 000 units/kg per dose intravenously every 12 h for first 7 days of life, then every 8 h thereafter to complete a 10-day course; infants and children are dosed at 200 000–300 000 units/kg per day divided every 4–6 h for 10 days

•

sequelae Skin lesions typically resolve with postinflammatory hypo- and hyperpigmentation

References Evans HE, Frenkel LD. Congenital syphilis. Clin Perinatol 1994; 21: 149–62 Hollier LM, Cox SM. Syphilis. Semin Perinatol 1998; 22: 323–31 Parish JL. Treponemal infections in the pediatric population. Clin Dermatol 2000; 18: 687–700 van Voorst Vader PC. Syphilis management and treatment. Dermatol Clin 1998; 16: 699–711 Wicher V, Wicher K. Pathogenesis of maternal–fetal syphilis revisited. Clin Infect Dis 2001; 33: 354–63

developmental abnormality of the nasofrontal fontanelle Failure of complete retraction during formation of dura leads to isolation of this tissue upon suture closure; a stalk may connect to the underlying brain through the foramen caecum

Diagnosis

• Imaging: CT or MRI recommended prior to biopsy • Histology: collections of astrocytes embedded in dense connective tissue trabeculae with occasional striated muscle

Prognosis

• 25–40% intrauterine fetal death • High risk for preterm birth and neurologic

Differential diagnosis

• • • • • •

Encephalocele Hemangioma Nasal dermoid cyst Lacrimal duct cyst Neuroblastoma Rhabdomyosarcoma

Treatment

• Evaluate with MRI • Treatment is surgical by experienced pediatric surgeons in collaboration with neurosurgeons as needed

NEONATAL DEFECTS Nasal glioma Major points

• Typically presents at birth • Firm bluish or red swelling on the nasal root with overlying telangiectasias (Figure 2.21)

• Composed of ectopic neural tissue • Regarded as a variant of encephalocele; intracranial connection not always present

• Does not increase in size with crying or Valsalva maneuver

Figure 2.21 Nasal glioma resembling a hemangioma but with a connection through the cranium in a newborn

Mallory Chapter 02

27/1/05

1:20 pm

Page 28

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Prognosis

• Excellent with appropriate resection • Recurrences occasional

• Lesions persist if not surgically corrected and may

References

El Shabrawi-Caelen L, White WL, Soyer HP, et al. Rudimentary meningocele: remnant of a neural tube defect? Arch Dermatol 2001; 137: 45–50

Brown MS, Sheridan-Pereira M. Outlook for the child with a cephalocele. Pediatrics 1992; 90: 914–19 Davis DA, Cohen PR, George RE. Cutaneous stigmata of occult spinal dysraphism. J Am Acad Dermatol 1994; 31: 892–6 El Shabrawi-Caelen L, White WL, Soyer HP, et al. Rudimentary meningocele: remnant of a neural tube defect? Arch Dermatol 2001; 137: 45–50 Hoving EW. Nasal encephaloceles. Childs Nerv Syst 2000; 16: 702–6 Hunt JA, Hobar PC. Common craniofacial anomalies: facial clefts and encephaloceles. Plast Reconstruct Surg 2003; 112: 606–15 Paller AS, Pensler JM, Tomita T. Nasal midline masses in infants and children. Arch Dermatol 1991; 127: 362–6

Paller AS, Pensler JM, Tomita T. Nasal midline masses in infants and children. Arch Dermatol 1991; 127: 362–6 Rahbar R, Resto VA, Robson CD, et al. Nasal glioma and encephalocele: diagnosis and management. Laryngoscope 2003; 113: 2069–77

Encephalocele Major points

• Cystic structure on the midline face • Presents in the neonatal period with nasal • •

broadening (67%) or as a soft, blue pulsatile mass that transilluminates on the nasal bridge Increases in size with crying, Valsalva maneuver, or external compression of the jugular veins Associated with facial clefting and other midline defects

Pathogenesis

• Herniation of brain tissue through the skull with connection to the underlying brain Diagnosis

• Image with MRI • Biopsy of the skin lesion not recommended,

•

owing to the connection with the subarachnoid space which could lead to CSF rhinorrhea and infection Histology: similar to nasal glioma

Differential diagnosis

• • • •

Hemangioma Nasal glioma Dermoid cyst Hypertelorism

become infected

Congenital dermal sinus Major points

• Cutaneous sign of potential spinal dysraphism • Midline epithelium-lined tract most common in • • • •

occipital or lumbar area Typically associated with a dermoid or epidermal cyst Presents as a dimple with an opening visible on the skin Tuft of hair may arise from the sinus tract A cord may be extend from the dimple to the bony defect

Pathogenesis

• Occurs as a result of a developmental abnormality in the separation of the neuroectoderm and the cutaneous ectoderm Diagnosis

• Characteristic skin findings • Imaging studies: MRI Differential diagnosis

Treatment

• Pilonidal sinus

• Evaluation with MRI or CT scan is essential • Surgical excision is recommended by a skilled

Treatment

pediatric neurosurgeon and otolaryngologist

• Excision of area only after appropriate imaging

Mallory Chapter 02

27/1/05

1:20 pm

Page 29

Neonatal dermatology

Prognosis

Pathogenesis

• 30% of patients are asymptomatic • Complications: repeated meningitis or

• Branchial cysts are epithelial cysts arising from

•

space-occupying symptoms In the absence of complications, surgical removal leads to resolution of symptoms and minimizes the risk of meningitis

•

incomplete closure of the branchial clefts in embryologic development, most commonly the second or third branchial clefts Branchial sinuses are remnants of branchial clefts with depressions

References

Diagnosis

Pacheco-Jacome E, Ballesteros MC, Jayakar P, et al. Occult spinal dysraphism: evidence-based diagnosis and treatment. Neuroimag Clin North Am 2003; 13: 327–34, xii

• Histology: cyst lined by stratified squamous

Saito H, Ogonuki R, Yanadori A, et al. Congenital dermal sinus with intracranial dermoid cyst. Br J Dermatol 1994; 130: 235–7 Schijman E. Split spinal cord malformations: report of 22 cases and review of the literature. Childs Nerv Syst 2003; 19: 96–103

epithelium and ciliated columnar epithelium on deeper portions; wall of cyst can be surrounded by heavy lymphoid infiltrate Differential diagnosis See Table 17.2 Treatment

• Preoperative imaging to assess for a fistulous connection to the posterior pharynx Surgical excision

Branchial cleft cyst/sinus

•

Major points

Prognosis

• Cysts or sinus tracts on the lateral aspect of the

• If untreated, cyst may have persistent mucoid

• • • •

neck which are deep to sternocleidomastoid muscle (Figure 2.22) May be unilateral or bilateral Usually present at birth or become obvious in early childhood Can be apparent on the cutaneous surface or drain into the pharynx Most cases are sporadic, but familial cases have been reported

discharge or become infected References Eastlack JP, Howard RM, Frieden IJ. Congenital midline cervical cleft: case report and review of the English language literature. Pediatr Dermatol 2000; 17: 118–22 Glosser JW, Pires CA, Feinberg SE. Branchial cleft or cervical lymphoepithelial cysts: etiology and management. J Am Dent Assoc 2003; 134: 81–6 Mukherji SK, Fatterpekar G, Castillo M, et al. Imaging of congenital anomalies of the branchial apparatus. Neuroimag Clin North Am 2000; 10: 75–93, viii Vaughan TK, Sperling LC. Diagnosis and surgical treatment of congenital cartilaginous rests of the neck. Arch Dermatol 1991; 127: 1309–10

Preauricular cyst/sinus Synonyms: ear pits, congenital auricular fistula Major points

• An epithelial cyst, sinus, or swelling in preauricular region Figure 2.22

Branchial cleft with skin tag

• Common, occurs in 1% of the population • Autosomal dominant or sporadic

Mallory Chapter 02

27/1/05

1:20 pm

Page 30

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

References Leung AK, Robson WL. Association of preauricular sinuses and renal anomalies. Urology 1992; 40: 259–61 Marres HA, Cremers CW. Congenital conductive or mixed deafness, preauricular sinus, external ear anomaly, and commissural lip pits: an autosomal dominant inherited syndrome. Ann Otol Rhinol Laryngol 1991; 100: 928–32 Moreland RF, Elston DM. Photo quiz. Preauricular pit. Cutis 2001; 68: 324, 353–4 O’Mara W, Guarisco L. Management of the preauricular sinus. J LA State Med Soc 1999; 151: 447–50

Accessory tragus Major points

• Presents with round, pedunculated, skin-colored Figure 2.23

Accessory tragus

• Most cases are bilateral and asymptomatic • May become infected and drain purulent material • Associated defects include deafness and renal abnormalities Pathogenesis

• Due to incomplete fusion of the first two branchial arches with epithelial entrapment Diagnosis

• Imaging, preferably CT, defines the lesion • Histology: cysts and sinus tracts are lined by stratified squamous epithelium

• •

papule, occurring anywhere along the line from the tragus to the lateral commissure of the mouth (Figure 2.23) Can be unilateral or bilateral; single or multiple Familial cases have been reported

Pathogenesis

• Anomalous migration of the dorsal portion of the first branchial arch Diagnosis

• Clinical findings • Histology: polypoid lesion with numerous hair follicles, small sebaceous glands and often cartilaginous core; eccrine glands, nerve fibers and Pacinian corpuscles may also be present Differential diagnosis

Differential diagnosis

• Epidermal cyst See Table 17.2 Treatment

• Most lesions are asymptomatic and do not require treatment

• Secondarily infected cysts can be treated with •

antibiotics Excision is indicated if there is chronic inflammation, drainage or infection

• Skin tag • Preauricular cyst/sinus • Goldenhar syndrome (oculoauriculovertebral syndrome) Treatment

• Surgical excision Prognosis

• Usually asymptomatic, may need surgery References

Prognosis

• Lesion persists throughout life

Ban M, Kamiya H, Yamada T, Kitajima Y. Hair follicle nevi and accessory tragi: variable quantity of adipose tissue in

Mallory Chapter 02

27/1/05

1:20 pm

Page 31

Neonatal dermatology

connective tissue framework. Pediatr Dermatol 1997; 14: 433–6 Jansen T. Romiti R. Altmeyer P. Accessory tragus: report of two cases and review of the literature. Pediatr Dermatol 2000; 17: 391–4 Resnick KI, Soltani K, Berstein JE, Fathizadeh A. Accessory tragus and associated syndromes involving the first branchial arch. J Dermatol Surg Oncol 1981; 7: 39–41

Tadini G, Cambiaghi S, Scarabelli G, et al. Familial occurrence of isolated accessory tragi. Pediatr Dermatol 1993; 10: 26

Mallory Chapter 02

27/1/05

1:20 pm

Page 32

Mallory Chapter 03

27/1/05

1:21 pm

Page 33

3 PAPULAR AND PAPULOSQUAMOUS DISORDERS

Psoriasis

• Infantile psoriasis

Major points

• Affects approximately 1–3% of the population • <1% of all cases develop in infancy with reports of •

•

congenital presentation; 37% develop lesions prior to 20 years of age; peak age of onset is 15–25 years Variable course triggered or exacerbated by drugs (e.g. antimalarials, withdrawal of steroids), trauma (e.g. surgery, physical, sunburn) or infections (e.g. streptococcal, HIV) Classic lesions are well-circumscribed erythematous plaques with overlying silvery scale that produces pinpoint bleeding when removed (Auspitz sign) (Figure 3.1) Koebner or isomorphic phenomenon can develop in sites of trauma, often producing linear lesions

Figure 3.1 Psoriasis – classic erythematous plaque with silvery scale

•

1. Most common in the diaper area; sharply demarcated and involves skin folds (Figure 3.2) 2. Can also affect face, scalp, palms and soles 3. Periumbilical involvement common 4. Can progress quickly to erythroderma Guttate psoriasis 1. Common presentation in children and adolescents 2. Abrupt development of numerous small plaques on the trunk and proximal extremities; can have follicular accentuation (Figure 3.3)

Figure 3.2 Psoriasis – diaper area involved with mild scaling and erythematous plaques

Mallory Chapter 03

27/1/05

1:21 pm

Page 34

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Figure 3.4 Scalp psoriasis – thick, scaly plaques without significant hair loss

Figure 3.3 Guttate psoriasis – numerous drop-like erythematous scaly papules

•

3. Can be initial presentation of psoriasis vulgaris; increased likelihood of developing typical psoriasis within 5 years Plaque psoriasis (psoriasis vulgaris) 1. Typical silvery-scaled pink plaques; children often have finer scale than adults; may be pruritic 2. Plaque-type variants: annular, figurate, follicular, linear 3. Scalp involvement (common): frontal hairline and retroauricular crease involvement; can have thick scale surrounding clumps of matted hair (pityriasis amiantacea) (Figure 3.4) 4. Flexural involvement occurs in 44% of pediatric cases: axillae, umbilicus, gluteal cleft, inguinal creases, perineum, labia and penis 5. Facial involvement common Pustular/erythrodermic psoriasis 1. Very rare in the pediatric age group; more common in males <2 years old 2. Localized variants: a. Palmoplantar pustulosis: pustules on palms and soles turn to brown macules, then desquamate (Figure 3.5) b. Digital acropustulosis (acrodermatitis continua of Hallopeau): swelling of the nail folds with glazed erythema, pustules and

Figure 3.5 Psoriasis of the palms and soles with marked thickening and fissuring

desquamation of the fingertips with nail dystrophy 3. Generalized variants: a. Acute generalized pustular psoriasis (von Zumbusch): diffuse erythroderma with overlying pustules and lakes of pus which later form sheets of desquamation; often accompanied by fever and constitutional symptoms b. Annular pustular psoriasis: erythematous, annular plaques with pustules and desquamation at the periphery

Mallory Chapter 03

27/1/05

1:21 pm

Page 35

Papular and papulosquamous disorders

•

c. Generalized pustular variant has been associated with lytic bone lesions and capillary leak syndrome/acute respiratory distress syndrome 4. Associated findings: alopecia, geographic tongue, nail dystrophy, arthritis, lytic bone lesions, osteomyelitis, renal failure and jaundice Nail psoriasis (Chapter 19) 1. Occurs in 15–79% of children with cutaneous signs of psoriasis 2. Rarely the initial presentation of childhood psoriasis 3. Pitting of the nail plate is most common; rarely can involve all 20 nails (Figure 3.6) 4. Other findings: discoloration, onycholysis, distal subungual debris and oil spotting 5. Periungual psoriasis can lead to marked nail dystrophy with hyperkeratosis and crumbling of the nail plate 6. Psoriatic nail changes are seen in 80% of children with psoriatic arthritis

b. Asymmetric distal interphalangeal joint involvement c. Arthritis mutilans with sacroileitis d. Symmetric arthritis e. Ankylosing spondylitis 4. Can have associated eye inflammation (e.g. conjunctivitis, uveitis, episcleritis) Pathogenesis

• Etiology not known; probably complex •

•

Figure 3.6

Nail psoriasis with pitting

• Psoriatic arthritis 1. Develops in 1% of children with psoriasis; represents 8–20% of all childhood arthritis; peak age of onset is 9–12 years old 2. 50% will have only one joint involved at initial presentation 3. Subgroups: a. Oligoarthritis of the interphalangeal joints is the most common presentation in childhood

•

interactions of the vasculature, immune system and epidermis Genetic susceptibility 1. HLA Cw6, B57, DR7 with early-onset type 2. HLA B27 with pustular variant 3. HLA B13 or B17 with guttate and erythrodermic type 4. HLA B8, Bw35, Cw7, DR3 with palmoplantar psoriasis 5. Increased risk if first-degree relative affected; increased in monozygotic twins Immune system activation 1. Antigen presentation by Langerhans cells leading to T-cell activation 2. Role of activated CD4+ T-helper cells in initiation 3. Role of activated CD8+ T-helper cells in establishment and maintenance 4. Th1 cytokine profile: interferon-γ, interleukin2, tumor necrosis factor (TNF)-α 5. Neutrophil accumulation 6. Lesional increase in antimicrobial peptides (βdefensins) 7. Often precipitated by a pharyngeal or perianal streptococcal infection; caused by superantigen stimulation of T lymphocytes Keratinocyte proliferation 1. May be T-cell activated, cytokine-mediated or a primary defect of keratinocyte proliferation 2. Reduced keratinocyte cell-cycle time 3. Reduced apoptosis: increased Bcl-2 4. Leads to hyperproliferation and keratinocyte hyperplasia: increased keratins 6, 16 and 17 plus reduced keratins 1, 2 and 10

Diagnosis

• Clinical diagnosis • Histology: regular epidermal hyperplasia, parakeratosis, intracorneal neutrophils (Munro

Mallory Chapter 03

27/1/05

1:21 pm

Page 36

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

microabscesses), diminished granular layer, keratinocyte mitoses, intraepidermal neutrophils (spongiform pustules of Kugoj), thinned suprapapillary plate, dilated vessels in the dermal papillae, perivascular lymphocytic infiltrate, mild erythrocyte extravasation Treatment

• Avoid triggering factors • Topical treatments

•

1. Liberal emollients 2. Topical corticosteroids (moderate to ultrapotent) 3. Calcipotriene 4. Exfoliants 5. Anthralin 6. Coal tar preparations 7. Topical retinoids 8. Topical immunomodulators: tacrolimus, pimecrolimus Phototherapy 1. Ultraviolet B (UVB) 2. Oral psoralen and ultraviolet A (PUVA, not recommended for those <11 years of age) or topical PUVA Systemic therapy for severe disease: methotrexate, cyclosporine, oral retinoids, immunomodulators (anti-TNF agents)

Differential diagnosis

• • • • • • • • •

Eczema Seborrheic dermatitis Pityriasis rosea Drug eruption Tinea Secondary syphilis Candidiasis Acute generalized pustular dermatosis Staphylococcal scalded skin syndrome

Prognosis

• Chronic skin condition with intermittent exacerbations and remissions

• Typically partially responsive to topical therapy alone

• Unpredictable; may spontaneously resolve or persist into adulthood

• Systemically treated psoriasis can lead to side-effects associated with the medications

References Cassandra M, Conte E, Cortez B. Childhood pustular psoriasis elicited by the streptococcal antigen: a case report and review of the literature. Pediatr Dermatol 2003; 20: 506–10 Leman J, Burden D. Psoriasis in children: a guide to its diagnosis and management. Paediatr Drugs 2001; 3: 673–80 Liao PB, Robinson R, Howard R, et al. Annular pustular psoriasis – most common form of pustular psoriasis in children: report of three cases and review of the literature. Pediatr Dermatol 2002; 19: 19–25 Morris A, Rogers M, Fischer G, Williams K. Childhood psoriasis: a clinical review of 1262 cases. Pediatr Dermatol 2001; 18: 188–98 Rogers M. Childhood psoriasis. Curr Opin Pediatr 2002; 14: 404–9

Pityriasis rubra pilaris Major points

• Chronic skin disorder with variable clinical spectrum

• Most cases are sporadic; familial cases with autosomal dominant pattern

• Characterized by salmon-orange plaques with

•

classic ‘islands of sparing’ and perifollicular ‘nutmeg grater’ papules with palmoplantar keratoderma Clinically defined classification 1. Type I: Classic type, adult onset 2. Type II: Atypical type, adult onset 3. Type III: Classic type, juvenile onset a. Accounts for 10% of all reported cases b. Usually develops within first decade c. Typically begins on scalp, face and neck with palmoplantar keratoderma followed by development of characteristic coalescent plaques on trunk and extremities (Figure 3.7) d. Facial skin taut with ectropion e. Nails thickened and dystrophic 4. Type IV: Localized or circumscribed juvenile onset a. Accounts for 25% of all reported cases; 60% of all childhood cases b. Typically prepubertal children c. Presents with hyperkeratotic follicular papules coalescent to plaques over the elbows and knees (Figure 3.8) d. May have palmoplantar keratoderma

Mallory Chapter 03

27/1/05

1:22 pm

Page 37

Papular and papulosquamous disorders

•

5. Type V: Atypical type, juvenile onset a. Accounts for 5% of all cases b. Typically develops in the first 2 years of life; may be seen at birth; often familial c. Presents with widespread erythema and folliculocentric papules d. Variable palmoplantar keratoderma e. May have associated arthropathy May be associated with underlying HIV

Diagnosis

• Characteristic clinical findings • Histology: alternating ortho- and parakeratosis in a ‘geometric’ pattern, superficial follicular plugging, acanthosis, hypergranulosis, variable spongiosis, perinuclear vacuolation and mild superficial lymphohistiocytic infiltrate Differential diagnosis

• • • • • • •

Psoriasis Atopic dermatitis Lichen planus Lichen nitidus Viral exanthem Kawasaki disease Nonbullous congenital ichthyosiform erythroderma

Treatment

• Treatment is often difficult • Topical treatments

Figure 3.7 Pityriasis rubra pilaris – palmar keratoderma with typical yellow, waxy appearance

•

1. Emollients 2. Exfoliants 3. Topical corticosteroids 4. Calcipotriene Systemic therapy 1. Systemic retinoids 2. Methotrexate 3. Cyclosporine

Prognosis

• Type III and IV disease may resolve spontaneously within 3 years of onset

• Type V persists throughout life References Albert MR, Mackool BT. Pityrisis rubra pilaris. Int J Dermatol 1999; 38: 1–11

Figure 3.8 Pityriasis rubra pilaris – juvenile type with keratotic plaques on the knees

Pathogenesis

• Unknown etiology • Increased epidermal cell proliferation • Reduced levels of retinol-binding protein that is a specific carrier of vitamin A

Allison DS, El-Azhary RA, Calobrisi SD, Dicken CH. Pityriasis rubra pilaris in children. J Am Acad Dermatol 2002; 47: 386–9 Griffith WA. Pityriasis rubra pilaris. J Am Acad Dermatol 1984; 10: 1086–8 Menni S, Brancaleone W, Grimalt R. Pityriasis rubra pilaris in a child seropositive for the human immunodeficiency virus. J Am Acad Dermatol 1992; 27: 1009 Terasaki K, Kanekura T, Saruwatari H, Kanzaki T. Classical juvenile pityriasis rubra pilaris in a patient with Down syndrome. Clin Exp Dermatol 2004; 29: 49–51

Mallory Chapter 03

27/1/05

1:22 pm

Page 38

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Pityriasis rosea Major points

• Acute, transient papulosquamous disorder of unknown etiology

• Peak incidence: 20–24 years old; 45% of cases in • •

• • • • • •

patients <19 years old, 4% <4 years old; rare reports in patients <2 years old Preceding viral prodrome in some cases Presents with ‘herald patch’ as the initial lesion: oval pink macule which becomes an annular plaque developing a collarette of scale (Figures 3.9 and 3.10) Similar lesions then develop on the trunk and proximal extremities over 1–3 weeks May be pruritic Lesions oriented parallel to skin lines and show a ‘school of minnows’ pattern in the flank area and a ‘Christmas-tree’ pattern on the back May have oral lesions Variant lesion types: vesicular, pustular, purpuric and erythema multiforme-like Variant patterns: inverse, atypical (inverse with acrofacial lesions) and localized

Figure 3.9 Pityriasis rosea – herald patch with typical ‘fir tree’ distribution of secondary lesions

Pathogenesis

• Unknown etiology • Epidemiologic data support a viral etiology, possibly human herpes virus-6 (HHV-6) and -7 (HHV-7), cytomegalovirus (CMV), Epstein–Barr virus (EBV) or parvovirus B19 virus

Figure 3.10 Pityriasis rosea – typical oval lesion with trailing collarette of scale

Diagnosis

• Clinical findings • Histopathology: mounding parakeratosis, focal spongiosis, exocytosis of lymphocytes, dyskeratosis, papillary dermal edema, upper dermal erythrocyte extravasation, lymphocytic infiltrate in upper dermis Treatment

• None usually required • Symptomatic therapy 1. 2. 3. 4.

Topical steroids Erythromycin UVB phototherapy Oral steroids (short course)

Differential diagnosis

• • • • • •

Tinea Secondary syphilis Psoriasis Nummular eczema Drug eruption Graft-versus-host disease

Prognosis

• Self-limited • Resolves with or without therapy over 4–12 weeks • May result in postinflammatory hypo- or hyperpigmentation

Mallory Chapter 03

27/1/05

1:22 pm

Page 39

Papular and papulosquamous disorders

References Chuh AA. The association of pityriasis rosea with cytomegalovirus, Epstein–Barr virus and parvovirus B19 infections – a prospective case control study by polymerase chain reaction and serology. Eur J Dermatol 2003; 13: 25–8 Imamura S, Ozaki M, Oguchi M, et al. Atypical pityriasis rosea. Dermatologica 1985; 171: 474–7 Sharma PK, Yadav TP, Gautam RM, et al. Erythromycin in pityriasis rosea: a double-blind, placebo-controlled clinical trial. J Am Acad Dermatol 2000; 42: 241–4 Watanabe T, Kawamura T, Jacob SE, et al. Pityriasis rosea is associated with systemic active infection with both human herpesvirus-7 and human herpesvirus-6. J Invest Dermatol 2002; 119: 793–7

Figure 3.11 Pityriasis lichenoides et varioliformis acuta with generalized erythematous and necrotic papules

Pityriasis lichenoides Major points

• Disease entitity encompasses pityriasis lichenoides

• • •

•

et varioliformis acuta (PLEVA) and pityriasis lichenoides chronica (PLC), which are thought to be on a clinicopathological spectrum Variable clinical presentation Typically occurs in children and young adults Pityriasis lichenoides et varioliformis acuta (PLEVA) (synonym: Mucha–Habermann disease) 1. Polymorphous eruption of diffuse reddishbrown macules, papules and varicella-like vesicles with abrupt onset (Figure 3.11) 2. Lesions progress with ulceration, crusting, central petechiae and necrosis 3. Usually involves the trunk and flexural surfaces of proximal extremities 4. Crops of new lesions develop over weeks to months 5. Can resolve with hyper- or hypopigmentation, and depressed scars 6. May be accompanied by fever, malaise, lymphadenopathy and arthritis 7. Papulonecrotic variant: rare, severe form; associated with high fever and constitutional symptoms; acute onset of large nodules with hemorrhagic necrosis and ulceration; may be fatal Pityriasis lichenoides chronica (PLC) 1. Can arise de novo or may evolve from PLEVA 2. Lesions are pink–brown macules and papules with thin centrally adherent scales (Figure 3.12)

Figure 3.12 Pityriasis lichenoides chronica with hypopigmentation and scaling

3. Resolves with postinflammatory hypo- or hyperpigmentation 4. Indolent and persistent course Pathogenesis

• Unknown etiology • Hypotheses include: 1. Response to foreign antigens: infectious agents and drugs 2. Cutaneous T-cell lymphoproliferative disorder

Mallory Chapter 03

27/1/05

1:22 pm

Page 40

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Diagnosis

• Clinical findings • Histology: lymphocytic vasculitis with lichenoid

•

reaction pattern 1. PLEVA: parakeratosis, variable erosion/ulceration, spongiosis, basal vacuolar change, exocytosis of lymphocytes and erythrocytes, epidermal necrosis, papillary dermal edema, dense perivascular wedge-shaped papillary dermal infiltrate of lymphocytes (mostly CD8+), endothelial swelling, extravasated erythrocytes 2. PLC: Confluent parakeratosis, mild spongiosis, focal necrotic keratinocytes, mild lymphocytic (mostly CD4+) interface and perivascular inflammation, limited erythrocyte extravasation Recommend biopsy of persistent or clinically atypical lesions to rule out progression to malignancy (rare)

• Rare subset progresses to lymphomatoid papulosis or T-cell lymphoma References Gelmetti C, Rigoni C, Alessi E, et al. Pityriasis lichenoides in children: a long-term follow-up of eighty-nine cases. J Am Acad Dermatol 1990; 23: 473–8 Ito N, Ohshima A, Hashizume H, et al. Febrile ulceronecrotic Mucha–Habermann’s disease managed with methylprednisolone semipulse and subsequent methotrexate therapies. J Am Acad Dermatol 2003; 49: 1142–8 Margo C, Crowson AN, Kovatich A, Burns F. Pityriasis lichenoides: a clonal T-cell lymphoproliferative disorder. Hum Pathol 2002; 33: 788–95 Romani J, Puig L, Fernandez-Figueras MT, de Moragas JM. Pityriasis lichenoides in children: clinicopathologic review of 22 patients. Pediatr Dermatol 1998; 15: 11–16

Lymphomatoid papulosis

Differential diagnosis

• • • • • • • • • •

Pityriasis rosea Psoriasis Secondary syphilis Lichen planus Arthropod reaction Lymphomatoid papulosis Drug eruption Varicella Vasculitis Erythema multiforme

Major points

• Recurrent self-healing papulonodular eruption • • • •

Treatment

•

• Topical treatments

•

1. Topical low or mid-strength corticosteroids 2. Coal tar preparations Phototherapy 1. Ultraviolet B (UVB) 2. Psoralen + ultraviolet A (PUVA) - not recommended <11 years old Systemic therapies 1. Oral antihistamines 2. Oral antibiotics: erythromycin, tetracycline 3. Methotrexate (low dose) 4. Systemic corticosteroids

Prognosis

• Most cases resolve over several months • 25% of patients will have recurrences with a chronic relapsing course over years

with risk of malignant transformation Rare in children Presents with recurrent crops of red–brown papules and nodules with variable crusting, ulceration and necrosis (Figure 3.13) Lesion variants: pustular and vesicular Occurs primarily on trunk and proximal extremities Lesions involute spontaneously over weeks to months May resolve with pigmentary change or scarring

Pathogenesis

• T-cell lymphoproliferative disorder • Majority of cells are CD4+; a few cells may be CD30+

• 60% of lesions have clonal T-cell populations Diagnosis

• Clinical diagnosis • Histopathology important in establishing diagnosis • Three histologic subtypes: 1. Type A: mixed cellular, wedge-shaped infiltrate with large atypical lymphocytes 2. Type B: band-like or perivascular inflammation with epidermotropism, lymphocytes with cerebriform nuclei

Mallory Chapter 03

27/1/05

1:22 pm

Page 41

Papular and papulosquamous disorders

correlation and statistical analysis of 86 cases: a multicentric study from the European Organization for Research and Treatment of Cancer Cutaneous Lymphoma Project Group. J Clin Oncol 1995; 13: 1343–54 Rifkin S, Valderrama E, Lipton JM, Karayalcin G. Lymphomatoid papulosis and Ki-1+ anaplastic large cell lymphoma occurring concurrently in a pediatric patient. J Pediatr Hematol Oncol 2001; 23: 321–3 VanNeer FJ, Toonstra J, VanVoorstVader PC, et al. Lymphomatoid papulosis in children: a study of 10 children registered by the Dutch Cutaneous Lymphoma Working Group. Br J Dermatol 2001; 144: 351–4 Zackheim HS, Jones C, Leboit PE, et al. Lymphomatoid papulosis associated with mycosis fungoides: a study of 21 patients including analyses for clonality. J Am Acad Dermatol 2003; 49: 620–3

Figure 3.13 Lymphomatoid papulosis – 1 cm erythematous nodule on the wrist

3. Type C: single population of large atypical CD 30+ lymphocytes Differential diagnosis

• • • •

Pityriasis lichenoides Arthropod reaction Pseudolymphoma Anaplastic large cell lymphoma

Zirbel GM, Gellis SE, Kadin ME, Esterly NB. Lymphomatoid papulosis in children. J Am Acad Dermatol 1995; 33: 741–8

Cutaneous T-cell lymphoma Synonym: mycosis fungoides Major points

• Cutaneous neoplasm with an indolent progression •

Treatment

• Potent topical or intralesional corticosteroids for

•

individual lesions

• Phototherapy: UVB and PUVA (not recommended for <11 years of age)

• Oral antibiotics: erythromycin and tetracycline • Systemic corticosteroids • Methotrexate

•

Prognosis

• May spontaneously regress • May persist with recurrences over many years • 5–20% progress to an associated malignant form: •

cutaneous T-cell lymphoma anaplastic large cell lymphoma, Hodgkin disease Requires careful long-term follow-up

References Paulli M, Berti E, Rosso R, et al. CD30/Ki-1-positive lymphoproliferative disorders of the skin clinicopathologic

• • • •

and late involvement of the lymph nodes, bone marrow and viscera Typically a disease of adults but reported with increasing frequency in childhood and adolesence Presents with a solitary or a few scaly pink patches and plaques on the lower trunk or buttocks; may have a surrounding hypopigmented halo; can progress with increased infiltration of the plaques and eventual development of pink nodules and tumors that can ulcerate (Figure 3.14) Hypopigmented variant (seen in up to 24% of childhood cases) presents with hypopigmented macules and patches on the trunk and extremities Can present with concurrent lymphomatoid papulosis, which is more common in childhood and seen in up to 18% of cases Variable progression through the clinical stages: patch, plaque, tumor Sezary syndrome (leukemic variant) with erythroderma and lymphadenopathy; rare in children TNMB staging: skin (T), lymph nodes (N), viscera (V) and peripheral blood (B)

Mallory Chapter 03

27/1/05

1:22 pm

Page 42

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

1. Skin a. T1: <10% body surface area (BSA) b. T2: >10% BSA c. T3: tumors d. T4: erythroderma 2. Lymph nodes a. N0: no involvement b. N1: clinically palpable only c. N2: pathologic involvement only d. N3: both clinical and pathologic involvement

• Cause of malignant transformation unknown; HTLV-1, HTLV-5 and HHV-8 have been implicated as possible causes Diagnosis

• Clinical findings; diagnosis is often delayed for •

Figure 3.14 Cutaneous T-cell lymphoma – presenting as poikiloderma in a teenager

3. Viscera a. V0: not involved b. V1: involved 4. Blood a. B0: not involved b. B1: involved c. ‘B’ does not affect the staging 5. Stages a. Stage IA T1, N0, M0 b. Stage IB T2, N0, M0 c. Stage IIA T1–2, N1, M0 d. Stage IIB T3, N0–1, M0 e. Stage IIIA T4, N0, M0 f. Stage IIIB T4, N1, M0 g. Stage IVA T1–4, N2–3, M0 h. Stage IVB T1–4, N0–3, M1 Pathogenesis

• Malignant neoplasm of T-helper cells with monoclonal proliferation of CD4+ cells most common, can also be CD8+ cell proliferation

• •

many years because of nonspecific cutaneous lesions Skin biopsy imperative: histology depends on stage of disease 1. Patch stage a. Sparse infiltrate of lymphocytes tagging along the basal cell layer either in small groups or singly as ‘a string of beads’ b. Limited epidermotropism (i.e. lymphocytes ascending in the epidermis) c. Rare Pautrier microabscesses (i.e. clusters of closely apposed lymphocytes in the epidermis without spongiosis) 2. Plaque stage a. More dense infiltration of lymphocytes along the epidermis and within the papillary dermis with aggregation around vessels and adnexae b. Increased numbers of atypical lymphocytes with classic cerebriform nuclei c. Conspicuous epidermotropism d. Increased number of Pautrier microabscesses 3. Tumor stage a. Deep monomorphic infiltration of atypical lymphocytes throughout the dermis and into the subcutaneous tissue b. Increased number of mitoses c. Epidermotropism and Pautrier microabscesses are rare T-cell receptor rearrangements by polymerase chain reaction (PCR) Staging work-up should include complete blood count, serum chemistries including renal and liver functions, chest X-ray, lymph node biopsy if palpable lymphadenopathy

Differential diagnosis

• • • • •

Eczema Psoriasis Tinea corporis Pityriasis lichenoides Lymphomatoid papulosis

Mallory Chapter 03

27/1/05

1:22 pm

Page 43

Papular and papulosquamous disorders

Treatment

• Depends on symptoms, degree of cutaneous • •

involvement, and presence of systemic involvement Main treatment goals are symptomatic relief and control of the disease Treatment has not been shown to prevent the progression of disease 1. Topical antipruritics 2. Potent or ultrapotent topical corticosteroids 3. Topical retinoids (e.g. Targretin) 4. PUVA 5. Topical nitrogen mustard 6. Oral RXR-receptor retinoids (e.g. Targretin)

Prognosis

• • • •

Typical slow progression from cutaneous to systemic involvement 95% disease-specific survival at 5 years 93% disease-specific survival at 10 years Complete remissions are rare but reported

References Crowley JJ, Nikko A, Varghese A, et al. Mycosis fungoides in young patients: clinical characteristics and outcome. J Am Acad Dermatol 1998; 38: 696–701 Garzon MC. Cutaneous T cell lymphoma in children. Semin Cutan Med Surg 1999; 18: 226–32

• Characterized by purple, polygonal, planar, pruritic papules (Figure 3.15)

• May have overlying Wickham striae (superficial white reticulate pattern)

• Commonly occurs on the volar wrists, sacral area and pretibial surfaces

• May display Koebner phenomenon (development at sites of trauma)

• Oral mucosa (uncommon in children): white reticulate pattern on buccal mucosa

• Nail involvement in children is uncommon; may • •

present with trachyonychia or twenty-nail dystrophy Clinical variants: linear, hypertrophic, annular, follicular, erosive, bullous and actinic Typically resolves with prominent postinflammatory hyperpigmentation

Pathogenesis

• Unknown etiology • Possible genetic susceptibility with familial cases • •

reported Evidence for a cell-mediated immune response Increased prevalence in adults with hepatitis C; may cause presentation of viral antigens to antigen-presenting cells leading to the induction of effector T cells with cytotoxic activity

Neuhaus IM, Ramos-Caro FA, Hassanein AM. Hypopigmented mycosis fungoides in childhood and adolescence. Pediatr Dermatol 2000; 17: 403–6 Quaglino P, Zaccagna A, Verrone A, et al. Mycosis fungoides in patients under 20 years of age: report of 7 cases, review of the literature and study of the clinical course. Dermatology 1999; 199: 8–14 Wain EM, Orchard GE, Whittaker SJ, et al. Outcome in 34 patients with juvenile-onset mycosis fungoides: a clinical, immunophenotypic, and molecular study. Cancer 2003; 98: 2282–90 Whittam LR, Calonje E, Orchard G, et al. CD8-positive juvenile onset mycosis fungoides: an immunohistochemical and genotypic analysis of six cases. Br J Dermatol 2000; 143: 1199–204

Lichen planus Major points

• 2–3% of all cases occur in children

Figure 3.15 Lichen planus – violaceous flat-topped papules with white Wickham striae

Mallory Chapter 03

27/1/05

1:22 pm

Page 44

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Diagnosis

Lichen nitidus

• Clinical diagnosis (usually) • Histology: hyperkeratosis, wedge-shaped

Major points

hypergranulosis, variable acanthosis with sawtoothing of the rete ridges, band-like lymphohistiocytic infiltrate at the dermal–epidermal junction, basal layer damage causing Caspary–Joseph spaces, Civatte bodies and colloid bodies, variable melanin incontinence Differential diagnosis

• • • • • •

• Uncommon, benign dermatosis of childhood • Male/female ratio >1 • Discrete pinpoint, shiny, skin-colored or • • •

hypopigmented papules (Figure 3.16) Location: trunk and extremities, penis Typically asymptomatic but may be pruritic May display Koebner phenomenon: linear lesions in areas of trauma

Lichenoid drug eruption Lichen nitidus Lichen simplex chronicus Psoriasis Granuloma annulare Sarcoidosis

Treatment

• • • • •

Mid-strength or potent topical corticosteroids Oral antihistamines Oral corticosteroids Oral retinoids Phototherapy: UVB, PUVA (not recommended for <11 years of age)

Prognosis

• Typically resolves within 1–12 months • 10–20% will have intermittent recurrences for many years

• Residual pigmentary changes can be disfiguring References Alam F, Hamburger J. Oral mucosal lichen planus in children. Int J Paediatr Dent 2001; 11: 209–14 Eisen D. The clinical manifestations and treatment of oral lichen planus. Dermatol Clin 2003; 21: 79–89 Kabbash C, Laude TA, Weinberg JM, Silverberg NB. Lichen planus in the lines of Blaschko. Pediatr Dermatol 2002; 19: 541–5 Nocente R, Ceccanti M, Bertazzoni G, et al. HCV infection and extrahepatic manifestations. Hepato-Gastroenterology 2003; 50: 1149–54 Peluso AM, Tosti A, Piraccini BM, Cameli N. Lichen planus limited to the nails in childhood: case report and literature review. Pediatr Dermatol 1993; 10: 36–9 Sharma R, Maheshwari V. Childhood lichen planus: a report of fifty cases. Pediatr Dermatol 1999; 16: 345–8

Figure 3.16

Lichen nitidus – hypopigmented tiny papules

• Rare associated oral and nail involvement • Rarely lesions can be vesicular, hemorrhagic or purpuric Pathogenesis

• Unknown etiology • Considered a variant of lichen planus Diagnosis

• Clinical findings • Histology: ‘ball and claw’ circumscribed lymphohistiocytic infiltrate within 2–3 dermal papillae; can have thinning of the overlying epidermis; claw-like extension of the rete ridges;

Mallory Chapter 03

27/1/05

1:22 pm

Page 45

Papular and papulosquamous disorders

multinucleate giant cells within inflammatory infiltrate

• Clinical presentation with asymptomatic, skin-

Differential diagnosis

• • • • • •

Papular eczema Molluscum contagiosum Planar warts Keratosis pilaris Eruptive vellus hair cysts Lichen planus

• •

Treatment

• No therapy usually required • Symptomatic relief with topical corticosteriods and

•

topical/oral antihistamines For severe, persistent cases: PUVA (not recommended <11 years), systemic steroids or oral retinoids

•

Prognosis

• Variable course • Spontaneous resolution occurs in 69% of patients •

within 1 year May be persistent and unresponsive to therapy for many years

References Arizaga AT, Gaughan MD, Bang RH. Generalized lichen nitidus. Clin Exp Dermatol 2002; 27: 115–17 Kubota Y, Kiryu H, Nakayama J. Generalized lichen nitidus successfully treated with an antituberculous agent. Br J Dermatol 2002; 146: 1081–3

colored to red keratotic papules in a linear, arcuate or serpiginous array; most common on neck but can involve upper extremities, face or trunk (Figure 3.17) Can demonstrate Koebner phenomenon 25% of cases associated with disorder: Down syndrome, Ehlers–Danlos syndrome, Marfan syndrome, pseudoxanthoma elasticum, osteogenesis imperfecta, cutis laxa, Rothmund–Thomson syndrome, systemic sclerosis, morphea, acrogeria, XYY syndrome and chronic renal disease Has been described associated with D-penicillamine therapy Familial cases reported with an autosomal dominant inheritance pattern suspected

Pathogenesis

• Unknown etiology • Histologic transepidermal elimination of fragmented elastic fibers may be a common pathway for elimination of abnormal elastic fibers; keratinocytes with elastin receptors can be found surrounding eliminated elastic material Diagnosis

• Clinical findings, especially in presence of •

associated disorders Histopathology: acanthosis of the epidermis; central channel through the epidermis with an overlying keratinous plug and elimination of fragmented eosinophilic elastic fibers and

Lestringant GG, Piletta P, Feldmann R, et al. Coexistence of atopic dermatitis and lichen nitidus in three patients. Dermatology 1996; 192: 171–3 Sanders S, Collier de AH, Scott R, et al. Periappendageal lichen nitidus: report of a case. J Cutan Pathol 2002; 29: 125–8 Soroush V, Gurevitch AW, Peng SK. Generalized lichen nitidus: case report and literature review. Cutis 1999; 64: 135–6

Elastosis perforans serpiginosa Synonym: perforating elastosis Major points

• Male/female ratio >1 • Typically presents at >20 years of age

Figure 3.17 Elastosis perforans serpiginosa with typical keratotic, grouped papules

Mallory Chapter 03

27/1/05

1:22 pm

Page 46

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

basophilic nuclear debris; papillary dermis contains increased coarse elastic fibers that are easily seen on elastic stains; variable amount of inflammation and foreign body giant cells

• Porokeratosis of Mibelli

Differential diagnosis

• • • • • •

Porokeratosis of Mibelli Granuloma annulare Tinea corporis Sarcoidosis Lichen planus Cutaneous larva migrans

•

Treatment

• • • • •

Typically not required; limited effectiveness Keratolytic agents Topical retinoids Cryotherapy Lasers

•

Prognosis

• Slowly enlarges • Typically resolves spontaneously over 5–10 years • With associated disorder, the overall prognosis is

•

based on the specific disease entity References Mehta RK, Burrows NP, Payne CM, et al. Elastosis perforans serpiginosa and associated disorders. Clin Exp Dermatol 2001; 26: 521–4 Outland JD, Brown TS, Callen JP. Tazarotene is an effective therapy for elastosis perforans serpiginosa. Arch Dermatol 2002; 138: 169–71 Saxena M, Tope WD. Response of elastosis perforans serpiginosa to pulsed CO2, Er:YAG, and dye lasers. Dermatol Surg 2003; 29: 677–8

•

1. Male/female ratio >1 2. Onset in infancy or adolescence 3. Presents with solitary, localized annular plaque with a distinctive keratotic border 4. Typically occurs on the legs Linear porokeratosis 1. Presents in infancy or childhood; can be congenital 2. Classic porokeratotic plaques distributed in the lines of Blaschko (Figure 3.19) 3. Most common on an extremity 4. Can coexist with disseminated superficial actinic porokeratosis 5. Rare risk of malignant degeneration Punctate porokeratosis 1. Noted during adolescence or adulthood 2. Characterized by small discrete keratotic papules on the palms and soles in association with linear porokeratosis or porokeratosis of Mibelli Porokeratosis palmaris et plantaris disseminata 1. Occurs during childhood or adolescence 2. Develops multiple keratotic papules on the palms and soles initially, then spreads diffusely on the trunk and extremities with areas of confluence; male/female ratio >1, autosomal dominant Disseminated superficial actinic porokeratosis (DSAP) 1. Most common type 2. Develops in mid-adulthood typically 3. Widespread small keratotic papules on sunexposed areas, usually lower legs

Pathogenesis

Sehgal VN, Jain S, Thappa DM, et al. Perforating dermatoses: a review and report of four cases. J Dermatol 1993; 20: 329–40

• Unknown etiology • Genetic susceptibility; autosomal dominant in

Wu JJ, Wagner AM. A case of elastosis perforans serpiginosa. Cutis 2002; 69: 423–5

• Hypothesis: proliferation of aberrant keratinocyte

Porokeratosis

• Overexpression of p53 tumor suppressor protein • May be due to loss of heterozygosity

Major points

Diagnosis

• Clinically variable disease of keratinization • Classic lesion: papule or plaque with a thin,

• Clinical findings • Histology: pathognomonic cornoid lamella

some cases clone

keratotic, thread-like border, resembling ‘Great Wall of China’ (Figure 3.18)

(parakeratototic column) overlying a reduced or absent granular layer

Mallory Chapter 03

27/1/05

1:22 pm

Page 47

Papular and papulosquamous disorders

• Morphea • Punctate keratoderma Treatment

• Variable results with topical 5-fluorouracil, surgical excision, cryotherapy, CO2 laser ablation, dermabrasion, exfoliants, topical and systemic retinoids Prognosis

• Chronic and persistent course • Linear variant has a small risk of malignant degeneration to squamous cell carcinoma in later life References

Figure 3.18 Porokeratosis – classic thin-edged scale resembling the ‘Great Wall of China’

Boente MC, López-Baró AM, Frontini MV, Asial RA. Linear porokeratosis associated with disseminated superficial actinic porokeratosis: a new example of type II segmental involvement. Pediatr Dermatol 2003; 20: 514–18 Fisher CA, LeBoit PE, Frieden IJ. Linear porokeratosis presenting as erosions in the newborn period. Pediatr Dermatol 1995; 12: 318–22 Flanagan N, Boyadjiev SA, Harper J, et al. Familial craniosynostosis, anal anomalies, and porokeratosis: CAP syndrome. J Med Genet 1998; 35: 763–6 Pierson D, Bandel C, Ehrig T, Cockerell C. Benign epidermal tumors and proliferations: porokeratosis. In Dermatology. Bolognia JL, Jorizzo JL, Rapini RP, et al. eds. Mosby: New York, 2003: 1707–9 Silver SG, Crawford RI. Fatal squamous cell carcinoma arising from transplant-associated porokeratosis. J Am Acad Dermatol 2003; 49: 931–3 Suh DH, Lee HS, Kim SD, et al. Coexistence of disseminated superficial porokeratosis in childhood with congenital linear porokeratosis. Pediatr Dermatol 2000; 17: 466–8

Keratolysis exfoliativa Major points Figure 3.19 Porokeratosis – linear type following Blaschko lines

Differential diagnosis

• • • • •

Elastosis perforans serpiginosa Tinea corporis Lichen striatus Lichen sclerosus Granuloma annulare

• Chronic superficial desquamative dermatosis (Figure 3.20)

• Acral variant (synonym: lamellar dyshidrosis)

•

1. Presents with recurrent peeling of the palms and soles with circinate or annular exfoliation 2. No antecedent primary lesions 3. No associated hyperhidrosis Diffuse variant (synonyms: keratolysis exfoliativa congenita, familial continual skin peeling)

Mallory Chapter 03

27/1/05

1:22 pm

Page 48

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Differential diagnosis

• • • • • • • •

Juvenile plantar dermatosis Dyshidrotic eczema Atopic dermatitis Tinea Sunburn Virus-induced exfoliation Congenital ichthyosiform erythroderma Netherton syndrome

Treatment

• No effective treatment available • Topical steroids, keratolytics and retinoids tend to Figure 3.20 Keratolysis exfoliativa – nonerythematous chronic scaling on the feet, not associated with tinea

be ineffective Prognosis

1. Can be noninflammatory or associated with congenital erythroderma 2. Sporadic, but has been described in families; autosomal recessive inheritance suspected 3. Presents with chronic, superficial peeling over large areas of the body, often sparing the palms and soles 4. Typically begins at birth or early childhood 5. Usually asymptomatic, although may have associated stinging and burning Pathogenesis

• Unknown etiology

• Typically lifelong with spontaneous, continual peeling

• Can worsen during the summer months References Hashimoto K, Hamzavi I, Tanaka K, Shwayder T. Acral peeling skin syndrome. J Am Acad Dermatol 2000; 43: 1112–19 Lee HJ, Ha SJ, Ahn WK, et al. Clinical evaluation of atopic hand-foot dermatitis. Pediatr Dermatol 2001; 18: 102–6 Mevorah B, Orion E, de Viragh P, et al. Peeling skin syndrome with hair changes. Dermatology 1998; 197: 373–6

Diagnosis

Tastan HB, Akar A, Gur AR, Deveci S. Peeling skin syndrome. Int J Dermatol 1999; 38: 208–10

• Consistent clinical history and examination • Histopathology reveals hyperkeratosis and

Tolat SN, Gharpuray MB. Skin peeling syndrome. Cutis 1994; 53: 255–7

epidermal separation at the stratum corneum–granular layer interface

Mallory Chapter 04

27/1/05

1:23 pm

Page 49

4 ECZEMATOUS DERMATOSES

ECZEMATOUS DERMATITIS

Table 4.1 Criteria for the diagnosis of atopic dermatitis in children

General

• Eczema is a general term, often used •

interchangeably with dermatitis Results from inflammation of superficial dermis and epidermal spongiosis leading to crusting, oozing and sometimes cracking (fissures)

ATOPIC DERMATITIS

Major features 1. Pruritus 2. Typical morphology and distribution Facial and extensor involvement during infancy and early childhood Flexural lichenification in childhood or adolescence 3. Chronic or chronically relapsing dermatitis 4. Personal or family history of atopy

Major points

• One of the most common skin disorders of • • • •

childhood Inherited disorder, presumably autosomal dominant Often associated with either a family or a personal history of other ‘allergic’ conditions (e.g. asthma or allergic rhinitis) The word ‘atopy’ comes from the Greek word meaning ‘without place, unusual.’ Described by Coca and Cooke in 1923 Characteristics 1. Diagnosis is made clinically by recognizing a combination of features. No single diagnostic criterion exists, but there is a constellation of features (Table 4.1) 2. Crusty, oozing, eruption with frequent secondary changes from scratching (Figure 4.1) 3. Pruritus is a hallmark and can be severe, often set off by certain environmental or psychological causes

Minor or less specific features 1. Xerosis 2. Periauricular fissures 3. Ichthyosis 4. Hyperlinear palms 5. Keratosis pilaris 6. IgE reactivity (increased serum IgE, RAST, or prick test positivity) 7. Hand or foot dermatitis 8. Cheilitis 9. Scalp dermatitis 10. Susceptibility to cutaneous infections (especially Staphylococcus aureus and herpes simplex) 11. Perifollicular accentuation (especially in darkly pigmented races) 12. Dennie’s lines (Figure 4.12) 13. Pityriasis alba (Figure 4.13)

Mallory Chapter 04

27/1/05

1:23 pm

Page 50

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Figure 4.1 Infantile eczema – typical facial, oozing pruritic plaques

5. 6.

a. Itching often intensifies in the evening and disrupts sleep patterns b. Threshold for itching is low and often prolonged Distribution often depends on the age of the child (e.g. infants have significant facial involvement, older children have flexural involvement) Lesions can be follicular and papular More susceptible to viral infections (e.g. molluscum contagiosum, warts, herpes simplex) and staphylococcal infections (Figure 4.2) Types of eczema a. Generalized – this can become erythrodermic, and usually denotes more severe involvement b. Infantile eczema (from infants to 2 years) – distribution primarily on cheeks, face, extensor surfaces of arms and legs; tends to spare diaper area c. Childhood eczema (from about 2 years to puberty) – tends to occur on flexural areas (antecubital fossae, popliteal fossae, hands and feet) (Figures 4.3 and 4.4) d. Adult/teenage eczema (puberty through adulthood) – occurs in flexural areas, hands

Figure 4.2 Secondarily – infected atopic dermatitis with Staphylococcus aureus

Figure 4.3 Childhood eczema – lichenified, pruritic plaque on the neck

and face, especially eyelids (Figure 4.5) Face has typical central pallor e. Nummular eczema Coin-shaped, oozing plaques with minute papules and vesicles at the periphery (Figure 4.6); generally scattered over the body, but may be mainly localized to one area, such as the legs; plaques usually >1 cm; pruritus common but variable; staphylococcal infections commonly play a role

Mallory Chapter 04

27/1/05

1:23 pm

Page 51

Eczematous dermatoses

f. Lichen simplex chronicus Thickened lichenified plaques with accentuated skin markings caused by chronic scratching (Figure 4.7); nodules are called prurigo nodularis

Figure 4.4 Follicular eczema – multiple keratotic, pruritic, follicular papules

Figure 4.7 Lichen simplex chronicus with typical lichenification

Figure 4.5 markings

Eyelid eczema with accentuation of skin

Figure 4.6 plaque

Nummular eczema – typical round, oozing

g. Dyshidrotic eczema Bilateral hand and/or foot dermatitis with characteristic tiny vesicles along the sides of fingers or toes with intense itching (Figure 4.8); frequent relapses h. Juvenile plantar dermatitis (‘sweaty sock syndrome’) Scaling, cracking, fissuring of both plantar feet, especially the big toe (Figure 4.9); spares toewebs i. Frictional lichenoid dermatitis Papular eruption of elbows in patients aged ~4–12 years; discrete 1–2 mm lichenoid skin-colored papules (Figure 4.10); pruritus occasional; considered to be secondary to trauma j. Autoeczematization (‘id’ reaction) Acute pruritic dermatitis that develops at a site distant from the primary inflammatory focus and is not caused by the primary inciting event; papulovesicular lesions

Mallory Chapter 04

27/1/05

1:23 pm

Page 52

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Figure 4.8 Dyshidrotic eczema affecting the hands with tiny, pruritic vesicles

Figure 4.9 Juvenile plantar dermatosis – shiny, glazed toes with scaling

Figure 4.10 Frictional lichenoid dermatitis – lichenoid papules on elbows and knees

irritation from certain stimuli such as wool clothing, soaps, etc b. In winter months, in cool climates, or in dry climates, the skin is prone to increased dryness, often causing exacerbations 3. Vasomotor responses a. Unusual reaction patterns such as a tendency to vasoconstriction b. White dermatographism is produced by stroking erythematous or normal-appearing skin in an atopic patient. Instead of the stroked area turning red (normal), it turns white, demonstrating vasoconstriction (Figure 4.11) c. Facial skin, particularly around the nose, may be pale

scattered over the body; can evolve into scaly oozing plaques; infection, wounding, or irritation can precipitate; diagnosis of exclusion; example: papular eruption with tinea capitis Pathogenesis • Etiology is multifactorial • Clinical factors: 1. Primary lesion is subclinical and may be papular or erythematous 2. Xerosis (dry skin), which most atopic patients have, is caused by reduced water content of the stratum corneum, with decreased secretion of sebum and sweat a. Dry, ichthyotic skin may result in loss of epidermal barrier and a higher incidence of

Figure 4.11 White dermatographism – reactive vasoconstriction after stroking the skin in an atopic patient

Mallory Chapter 04

27/1/05

1:23 pm

Page 53

Eczematous dermatoses

•

d. Distal extremities may have a lower skin temperature 4. Sensitivity a. Patients are more sensitive to irritation by wool, detergents and certain chemicals b. Localization of dermatitis may be a clue to certain irritants (e.g. hand dermatitis in a frequent hand washer) 5. Humoral immunity: elevated IgE levels 6. Cell-mediated immunity a. Increased susceptibility to viral infections (herpes simplex, vaccinia, molluscum contagiosum) b. Anergy can be demonstrated with increased frequency c. Numbers of T helper (Th) >T suppressor (Ts) cells d. Chemotactic defects of polymorphonuclear leukocytes and monocytes Molecular factors 1. Keratinocytes primed to react to antigenic stimuli by producing preformed interleukin (IL)-1, followed by more IL-1 produced by endothelial cells and macrophages 2. Secondary cytokines (tumor necrosis factor (TNF)-α, IL-6, IL-8) are then produced 3. T lymphocytes bind to endothelial cells and migrate into the dermis and epidermis, producing damage to the epidermal barrier 4. Antigens are presented to stimulated Langerhans cells 5. Imbalance of Th2 > Th1 lymphocytes a. Th1 cells produce interferon-α, IL-1, IL-2, TNF-β b. Th2 cells produce IL-4, IL-5, IL-6, IL-10 6. Cytokines of Th2 cells are self-amplifying and inhibit Th1 responses 7. T cells in atopic dermatitis are responsive to IL-4, which suppresses IFN-γ, with subsequent promotion of B-cell proliferation and increased IgE production 8. IL-4 stimulates mast cells to release histamine 9. Vicious cycle caused by repeated stimulation, abnormal responses and cytokine release

Diagnosis

• Clinical diagnosis (see Table 4.1) • Laboratory: no specific laboratory criteria 1. Allergy testing (prick tests)

Figure 4.12

Dennie’s lines – extra skin folds on lower lid

Figure 4.13 Pityriasis alba – hypopigmented slightly scaly patches

•

a. Food allergies in minority of patients b. Inhalant allergies in some patients 2. Blood tests a. Complete blood count – may see increase in numbers of eosinophils b. Serum IgE may be slightly or markedly elevated c. Radioallergosorbent test (RAST) may help define some allergies Histology: variable spongiosis and lymphocytic infiltration of the upper dermis and epidermis; acanthosis, hyperkeratosis; thick-walled blood vessels in papillary dermis

Differential diagnosis

• Scabies • Seborrheic dermatitis

Mallory Chapter 04

• • • • • •

27/1/05

1:23 pm

Page 54

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Immunodeficiences Langerhans cell histiocytosis Acrodermatitis enteropathica Psoriasis Contact dermatitis Phenyketonuria

• Antibiotics

Treatment

• Eliminate precipitating factors

• •

1. Bathing can be performed once daily, but excessive bathing causes increased dryness a. Apply ointments immediately after patting skin dry b. Oils in bath are messy, and make children slippery to handle; may be useful for older children c. Tepid temperature is best; avoid very hot water; do not make the water too cool, causing the child to shiver d. Soap should be kept to a minimum, and applied only to excessively dirty areas e. Superfatted soaps (e.g. Dove®, Tone®) or soapless cleansers (e.g. Cetaphil®, Aquanil®) are best 2. Excessive sweating, whether heat- or exerciseinduced, can cause itching 3. Temperature extremes (hot and humid, or cold and dry) can increase itching 4. Avoid coarse or irritating clothing (e.g. wool) Emollients are necessary to decrease dryness (which can lead to itching) Topical corticosteroids reduce pruritus and inflammation 1. Hydrocortisone 1% or 2.5% ointment (class 6–7 steroids) for mild inflammation 2. Mid-strength steroids (class 3–5) (triamcinolone 0.1% ointment) only in isolated areas for young children 3. High-potency steroids may be indicated for hand or foot dermatitis because of the thickness of the stratum corneum. Be careful to avoid dorsa of hands and feet with high-potency steroids Antipruritics 1. Antihistamines (see Chapter 21) Topical tacrolimus 0.03% for children aged 2–15 years BID, or 0.1% for children aged >15 years BID or pimecrolimus 1% for children aged >2 years) BID

•

• • • •

1. Antistaphylococcal drugs a. Topical agents (e.g. mupirocin) may be helpful for the short term, but some topical antibiotics (e.g. neomycin, bacitracin) can sensitize the skin and cause further allergic contact dermatitis b. Oral antibiotics may be given in short courses to reduce staphylococcal infections of the skin c. Frequent use of antibiotics can lead to resistant bacteria Systemic corticosteroids 1. Short courses for acute, severe exacerbations may be indicated 2. Long-term oral steroids are not recommended Referral to a dermatologist is recommended for severe and moderately severe cases uncontrolled by standard measures Hospitalization is indicated only if not controlled by methods at home Consider psychological stresses and counseling if unresponsive to treatment For severe, recalcitrant cases consider phototherapy (PUVA, UVB), IFN-γ, or immunosuppressive drugs (e.g. cyclosporine, methotrexate)

Prognosis

• Half of the cases of typical atopic dermatitis improve by 2 years of age

• Most improve by teenage years • Patients tend to have dry, sensitive skin throughout life

• <10% of patients have lifelong problems References Eichenfield LF, Hanifan JM, Luger TA, et al. Consensus conference on pediatric atopic dermatitis. J Am Acad Dermatol 2003; 49: 1088–95 Eichenfield LF, Lucky AW, Boguniewicx M, et al. Safety and efficacy of pimecrolimus (ASM 981) cream 1% in the treatment of mild and moderate atopic dermatitis in children and adolescents. J Am Acad Dermatol 2002; 46: 495–504 Feingold, S, Huang C, Kristol L, et al. Eczemas. Curr Probl Dermatol 1998; 10: 41–92 Hanifin JM, Cooper KD, Ho VC, et al. Guidelines of care for atopic dermatitis. J Am Acad Dermatol 2004; 50: 391–404

Mallory Chapter 04

27/1/05

1:23 pm

Page 55

Eczematous dermatoses

Nghiem P, Pearson G, Langley RG. Tacrolimus and pimecrolimus: from clever prokaryotes to inhibiting calcineurin and treating atopic dermatitis. J Am Acad Dermatol 2002; 46: 228–41 Ong PY, Ontake T, Brandt C, et al. Endogenous antimicrobial peptides and skin infections in atopic dermatitis. N Engl J Med 2002; 347: 1151–60 Patel RR, Vander Straten MR, Korman NJ. The safety and efficacy of tacrolimus therapy in patients younger than 2 years with atopic dermatitis. Arch Dermatol 2003; 139: 1184–6 Proceedings of an International Consensus Conference on Atopic Dermatitis. Understanding atopic dermatitis: pathophysiology and etiology. J Am Acad Dermatol 2001: S1–S68 Resnick SD, Hornung R, Konrad TR. A comparison of dermatologists and generalists, management of childhood atopic dermatitis. Arch Dermatol 1996; 132: 1047–52 Ricci G, Patrizi A, Neri I, et al. Frequency and clinical role of Staphylococcus aureus overinfection in atopic dermatitis in children. Pediatr Dermatol 2003; 20: 529–30 Rothe MJ, Grant-Kels JM. Atopic dermatitis, an update. J Am Acad Dermatol 1996; 35: 1–13

• Prominent follicular plugs over extensor surfaces of • • • • •

extremities, especially upper arms, upper legs, buttocks and cheeks (Figure 4.14) Erythema may be seen, especially if the areas have been rubbed or irritated Dryness aggravates the condition Associated with atopic disorders: atopic dermatitis, hay fever, asthma, allergic rhinitis Rarely extensive and generalized More common in people of northern European or Celtic ancestry

Pathogenesis

• Cause unknown • Considered a disorder of keratinization because a •

keratinous plug is produced by abnormal follicular epithelium May be a response to dryness, and is seen more commonly in cold dry climates

Diagnosis

• Clinical presentation Differential diagnosis

KERATOSIS PILARIS Major points

• Common papular eruption of childhood which tends to continue into adulthood but may improve

• • • • • • •

Acne Folliculitis Molluscum contagiosum Warts Milia Lichen spinulosus Follicular mucinosis

Treatment

• Lubricants or emollients can improve dry skin, •

• Figure 4.14 Keratosis pilaris – keratotic, follicular, slightly erythematous papules on upper legs

especially if applied after a bath or after wetting of the skin Topical keratolytics 1. Lactic acid preparations such as ammonium lactate 5–12% (e.g. LacHydrin®) 2. Urea creams (e.g. Carmol-20® OTC) 3. Topical retinoids (e.g. adapalene cream) may be reserved for severe involvement in a patient who is very compliant, as it can actually aggravate dryness and irritation Treatment takes time and should be used twice daily for at least a month, except retinoids (used once daily, at bed time) before results can be expected

Mallory Chapter 04

27/1/05

1:23 pm

Page 56

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

• Class 6–7 topical steroids may be indicated for inflammation; do not recommend long-term usage, but only for temporarily decreasing irritation Prognosis

•

• Chronic condition which responds poorly to •

treatment. Parents should be educated on what to expect During adolescence, lesions on the face may improve Improvement may occur in more humid environments

2. Cracking 3. Hands or lower legs most frequently involved 4. Pruritus if severe 5. Frequently occurs in winter in cool climates Physical examination 1. Superficial reticular cracks in skin appear like a ‘dried river bed’ (Figure 4.16) 2. Fissures may be mildly erythematous

References

Pathogenesis • Associated with dryness and dehydration of the epidermis • Low humidity • Mainly in atopic individuals

Lateef A, Schwartz RA. Keratosis pilaris. Cutis 1999; 63: 205–7

Diagnosis

•

Oranje AP, Van Osch LDM, Oosterwijk JC. Keratosis pilaris atrophicans. Arch Dermatol 1994; 130: 500–2

XEROSIS Synonyms: winter eczema, erythema cracquele, asteatotic eczema Major points

• Clinical characteristics 1. Dryness, scaling (Figure 4.15)

Figure 4.15

Xerosis – ashy appearance on black skin

• Clinical characteristics Differential diagnosis

• • • •

Atopic dermatitis Contact dermatitis Irritant dermatitis Ichthyosis vulgaris

Treatment

• Avoid harsh, drying soaps • Hydration of the stratum corneum with a daily bath with plain water only

Figure 4.16 Eczema cracquele – extremely dry skin aggravated by soap and water

Mallory Chapter 04

27/1/05

1:23 pm

Page 57

Eczematous dermatoses

• Use mild soaps, superfatted soaps (e.g. Dove, Tone, • • • • •

etc.) or non-soaps (e.g. Cetaphil) only where needed (groin, axillae) Increase ambient humidity with humidifier in house or child’s room Emollients should be liberally used (e.g. petroleum jelly, Eucerin®, Aquaphor®) Emollients best applied after bath when skin is moist as well as several times a day Unscented moisturizers are best in order to avoid contact sensitivity Mild topical corticosteroids (0.5–1% hydrocortisone) in ointment base for erythema only

Reference Hara M, Kikuchi K, Watanabe M, et al. Senile xerosis: functional, morphological, and biochemical studies. J Geriatr Dermatol 1993; 3: 111–20 Figure 4.17 Eczematous dermatitis in chronic granulomatous disease with abscess formation

ECZEMATOUS DERMATITIS WITH IMMUNODEFICIENCIES Major points

• Eczematous dermatitis associated with

•

immunodeficiencies looks similar to atopic dermatitis, but is usually more severe and does not respond well to therapy Dermatitis can be the first sign of: 1. Wiskott–Aldrich syndrome 2. Severe combined immunodeficiency 3. Hyperimmunoglobulin E syndrome Characteristics 1. Generalized, eczematous dermatitis with scaling, erythema, pruritus 2. Bacterial infections are common (Figure 4.17) a. Impetigo b. Furuncles c. Otitis media d. Pneumonia 3. Fungal infections common a. Candidiasis 4. Diarrhea 5. Failure to thrive 6. If a sibling has died after live viral vaccine, this may be a clue 7. Petechiae – suggests Wiskott–Aldrich syndrome in a male

Pathogenesis See Atopic dermatitis Diagnosis

• Laboratory 1. Wiskott–Aldrich syndrome a. Deficiency of sialophorin (glycoprotein) on the surface of lymphocytes and platelets b. Low or absent antibodies to blood group antigens A and B c. Increased IgA and IgE d. Decreased IgM e. Splenomegaly f. Hepatomegaly g. Adenopathy h. Thrombocytopenia with petechiae and purpura i. Defects in cell-mediated immunity j. Platelet dysfunction k. X-linked recessive 2. Hyperimmunoglobulin E syndrome (Job syndrome) a. Marked elevated serum IgE levels (>10 times normal) b. Eosinophilia c. Neutrophil chemotaxis abnormal d. Sinopulmonary infections

Mallory Chapter 04

27/1/05

1:23 pm

Page 58

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

e. Coarse facial features in some patients f. Recurrent staphylococcal infections of skin, lungs, joints, etc. 3. Severe combined immunodeficiency syndrome a. Decreased levels of IgG, IgM, IgD, IgA, IgE b. Lymphopenia c. Defects in cell-mediated immunity d. Adenosine deaminase deficiency, and others Treatment

• Usual treatment for atopic dermatitis with topical steroids, emollients, etc

Rosen FS, Cooper MD, Wedgwood RJP. The primary immunodeficiencies. N Engl J Med 1995; 333: 431–40 Schurman SH, Candotti F. Autoimmunity in Wiskott–Aldrich syndrome. Curr Opin Rheumatol 2003; 15: 446–53 Stewart DM, Tian L, Nelson DL. Linking cellular activation to cytoskeletal reorganization: Wiskott–Aldrich syndrome as a model. Curr Opin Allergy Clin Immunol 2001; 1: 525–33 Thrasher AJ, Burns S, Lorenzi R, Jones GE. The Wiskott–Aldrich syndrome: disordered actin dynamics in haematopoietic cells. Immunol Rev 2000; 178: 118–28

• Infections should be treated with appropriate antibiotics

• Fresh frozen plasma or whole blood for severe lifethreatening illnesses

• Bone marrow transplantation when indicated

ALLERGIC CONTACT DERMATITIS

References

Major points

Arbiser JL. Genetic immunodeficiencies: cutaneous manifestations and recent progress. J Am Acad Dermatol 1995; 33: 82–9

• Characteristics

Badour K, Zhang J, Siminovitch KA. The Wiskott–Aldrich syndrome protein: forging the link between actin and cell activation. Immunol Rev 2003; 192: 98–112 Berron-Ruiz A, Berron-Perex R, Ruiz-Maldonado R. Cutaneous markers of primary immunodeficiency diseases in children. Pediatr Dermatol 2000; 17: 91–6

•

Bonilla FA, Geha RS. 12. Primary immunodeficiency diseases. J Allergy Clin Immunol 2003; 111(Suppl 2): S571–81 Buckley RH. The hyper-IgE syndrome. Clin Rev Allergy Immunol 2001; 20: 139–54 Dave S, Thappa DM, Karthikeyan K. Disseminated and disfiguring molluscum contagiosum in a child. Pediatr Dermatol 2003; 20: 436–9 Erlewyn-Lajeunesse MD. Hyperimmunoglobulin-E syndrome with recurrent infection: a review of current opinion and treatment. Pediatr Allergy Immunol 2000; 11: 133–41 Lindegren ML, Kobrynski L, Rasmussen SA, et al. Applying public health strategies to primary immunodeficiency diseases: a potential approach to genetic disorders. Morbid Mortal Weekly Rep 2004; 53: 1–29 Mueller BJ, Pizzo PA. Cancer in children with primary or secondary imunodeficiencies. J Pediatr 1995; 126: 1–10 Paller AS. Immunodeficiency syndromes. Dermatol Clin 1995; 13: 65–71 Ratko TA, Cummings JP, Blebea J, Matuszewski KA. Clinical gene therapy for nonmalignant disease. Am J Med 2003; 115: 560–9

•

1. First exposure does not cause a reaction 2. Reaction begins 12–96 h after subsequent exposure if already allergic 3. Lesions can persist up to 3 weeks 4. Pruritus may vary from mild to severe Clinical pattern and shape give clues to offending antigen (Table 4.2) 1. Linear configuration with sharp borders (Figure 4.18) 2. Individual lesions are pruritic, erythematous papules or papulovesicles which may become vesicular with oozing, weeping and crusting 3. Erythema with scaling in chronic cases 4. Edema may be prominent especially around the face and groin 5. Urticaria-like eruption can occur 6. Heat, sweating and friction accentuate the reaction Major causes in childhood 1. Toxicodendron – poison ivy/oak/sumac (Figure 4.19) a. Most common allergic contact dermatitis in the USA b. Sensitizing substance is an oleoresin called urushiol c. Typical lesions in spring, summer, fall d. Pruritic, erythematous streaks with vesicles are typical e. Erythematous patches, papules can occur

Mallory Chapter 04

27/1/05

1:23 pm

Page 59

Eczematous dermatoses

Table 4.2

Contact dermatitis history

1. Determine the onset – exact time and location of appearance of lesions 2. Course of dermatitis – progression, recurrence, remission 3. Topical medicines used 4. Previous therapy and response 5. Work exposure – relation to work, days off, vacation, duties 6. Other persons having similar dermatitis 7. Hobbies – chemical exposure 8. Topical cosmetics – perfumes, soaps, sunscreens, toothpaste, nail polish, hair dyes, etc.

Figure 4.19 be

9. Plant exposure – poison ivy, chrysanthemums, weeds, etc. 10. Chemical exposure – work and home 11. Water exposure – hand washing, job-related 12. Clothing history – underwear, jewelry, watches, earrings, belts, snaps

13. Atopic history – asthma, eczema, personal and/or family history 14. Immune status

Figure 4.18 Poison ivy dermatitis – linear streaks of vesicles and erythema

2. Nickel a. Common in children who wear earrings for pierced ears, metal belt buckles, metal zippers, metal snaps, or metal buttons b. Erythema, scaling, crusting and pruritus on earlobes from earrings or around umbilicus

Poison ivy plant – leaves of three, let them

from snaps or belt buckles (Figure 4.20 and 4.21) c. Infants may have involvement from snaps on undershirts Rubber/adhesives, causes: a. Antioxidants: paraphenylenediamine, hydroquinone b. Accelerators: mercaptobenzathiazole, thiuram, carbamate Shoe dermatitis – acute or subacute dermatitis on dorsal feet (Figure 4.22); toewebs spared, causes: a. Rubber (most common) b. Chromates (in leather) c. Glutaraldehyde (in leather) d. Adhesives e. Dyes Adhesive tape dermatitis caused by rubber or colophony: well-demarcated area where adhesive tape is applied Cosmetics a. Acute or subacute (may require detective work) b. Parabens c. Perfumes – can be generalized or localized d. Deodorants – in axillae e. Nail lacquers – may see reaction around the eyes from zlacquer which was not completely dried and patient rubbed the eyelids f. Eye products g. Lipstick – rim of erythema around lips

Mallory Chapter 04

27/1/05

1:23 pm

Page 60

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Figure 4.20 Nickel dermatitis – typical distribution from a snap on the pants or belt buckle

Figure 4.22 dorsal feet

Shoe dermatitis – typical distribution on

Pathogenesis

• Delayed-type hypersensitivity reaction (type IV)

•

Figure 4.21 Autoeczematous dermatitis ‘id reaction’ – generalized eczematous changes from nickel dermatitis

7. Formaldehyde – used in clothing (permanentpress fabric finishes); periaxillary area 8. Benzocaine – over-the-counter (OTC) topical anesthetics 9. Caines/diphenhydramine (e.g. Benadryl®) – topical anesthetics 10. Neomycin – topical antibiotics; increased sensitivity if applied to broken skin 11. Mercury – e.g. Merthiolate®, Mercurochrome®

1. Afferent (induction) phase (5–25 days) 2. First contact; allergen penetrates skin and acts as hapten, binding to skin proteins 3. Helper T cells activated 4. Langerhans cells recognize antigen as nonself and present it to T lymphocytes 5. Langerhans cells with hapten move from epidermis to lymph nodes 6. Naïve T cells differentiate into clones of effector cells directed at foreign antigen 7. Results in committed sensitized T cells reactive to specific antigen Elicitation reaction (24–48 hours) 1. Re-exposure results in accumulation of effector cells which produce numerous cytokines (e.g. IFN-γ, TNF, etc.) and mediators which result in dermatitis in areas limited to skin contact

Diagnosis

• Laboratory – not indicated. Refer to dermatologist •

for evaluation if diagnosis unclear Skin patch tests (T.R.U.E. tests) (Tables 4.3 and 4.4) 1. Helpful for difficult cases 2. Patches applied to normal nonhairy skin (back or upper arms) for 48 h; read at 72 h and 5 days 3. False-positive reactions often seen in atopic patients

Mallory Chapter 04

27/1/05

1:23 pm

Page 61

Eczematous dermatoses

Table 4.3

Patch testing T.R.U.E. Test (Glaxo Dermatology)

Standard allergens

Found in:

1. Nickel sulfate

Jewelry, belt buckles, eyeglass frames, alloys, orthopedic appliances, money, scissors, eating utensils

2. Wool alcohols

Cosmetics, creams, lotions, ointments, soaps (cross-reacts with lanolin)

3. Neomycin sulfate

Topical antibiotics, first-aid creams, eardrops, nosedrops

4. Potassium dichromate

Tanning solutions for leather, cement, photography solutions, paints, glues, pigments and some detergents

5. Caine mix

Topical anesthetics

6. Fragrance mix

Toiletries, soaps, perfumes, shampoo, scented products, industrial cutting fluids

7. Colophony (rosin)

Used by violinists, ball players, bowlers; in cosmetics, adhesives, lacquers, varnishes, paper and industrial products

8. Epoxy resin

Uncured epoxy resin, nail products

9. Quinolone mix

Topical antimicrobial medicated creams, medicated bandages and veterinary products

10. Balsam of Peru

Perfumes, flavoring in drinks, tobacco, topical medications, dental agents

11. Ethylenediamine dihydrochloride

Stabilizer for some creams; found in rubber, color photography solutions, epoxy catalyst systems and some antifreeze solutions (cross-reacts with hydroxyzine, aminophylline)

12. Cobalt dichloride

Some paints, cement, metal, metal-plated objects

13. Para-tert butylphenol formaldehyde resin

Leather finishes (shoes), paper fabrics, furniture, glues

14. Paraben mix

Preservative in numerous creams, cosmetics, industrial oils, glues

15. Carba mix

Rubber, rubber glues, vinyl, pesticides

16. Black rubber mix

Rubber antioxidant, hair dyes

17. Cl+Me– Isothiazolinone

Preservative found in cosmetics, medications, household cleaning products, industrial fluids and greases

18. Quaternium 15

Stabilizer, formaldehyde releaser found in cosmetics, creams, lotions

19. Mercaptobenzothiazole

Shoes, rubber accelerator, antifreeze, cutting oils, flea and mosquito repellants

20. Paraphenylenediamine

Hair dyes, inks, photodevelopers, textile dyes

21. Formaldehyde

Clothes, textiles, preservatives, disinfectants, dental plastics, glues, nail polishes, adhesives, shampoo Formaldehyde releasers: Quaternium 15, imiadiazoyl urea, Bronopol

22. Mercapto mix

Rubber, glues, coolants, industrial products

23. Thimerosal

Preservative in vaccines, contact lens solutions, eye cosmetics, nose and ear drops

24. Thiuram mix

Rubber, disinfectant, lubricating oils, fungicide

Mallory Chapter 04

27/1/05

1:23 pm

Page 62

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Table 4.4 Patch test materials/nickel detection kits can be ordered

Glaxo Dermatology (T.R.U.E. Test) 5 Moore Drive Research Triangle Park, NC 27709, USA www.truetest.com/ Hermal Pharmaceutical Laboratories, Inc. Route 145 Oak Hill, NY 12460, USA (518) 475-0175 www.hermal.de/english/index.html Allerderm Labs Inc. 28 Glen Drive Mill Valley, CA 94941, USA (415) 381-0106 www.allerderm.com

• Histology:

•

1. Multilocular intraepidermal spongiotic vesicles 2. Eosinophils in dermis and epidermis 3. Langerhans cells in the epidermis associated with lymphocytes 4. Immunohistochemical studies show primarily memory T-helper lymphocytes, although Tsuppressor cells can be noted Nickel detection kit: dimethylglyoxime in a 10% aqueous solution of ammonia – turns pink on contact with nickel (see Table 4.4)

Differential diagnosis

• Atopic dermatitis • Irritant contact dermatitis • Autoeczematization Treatment

• Avoidance of contactant

•

1. Education 2. Give patients a list of objects or products which contain allergens 3. Wash skin with plain water if known allergen is contacted Acute dermatitis with oozing and weeping, vesicles or bullae 1. Compresses with Burrow’s solution (e.g. Domeboro®, Blurobor®) for 15 min 2. Apply shaken lotion of calamine three times a day for drying effect

3. Avoid topical diphenhydramine or caines which are added to some products 4. Topical corticosteroids a. Medium to ultra-potent steroids (class 1–4) for about 5–7 days used two or three times a day then taper to lowest strength to keep erythema and itching under control 5. Oral antipruritics (see doses in Chapter 21), diphenhydramine (Benadryl), hydroxyzine (Atarax®), cetirizine (Zyrtec®), fexofenadine (Allegra®) 6. Systemic corticosteroids a. Oral prednisone 0.5–2 mg/kg per day tapered over 10–21 days for widespread or severe involvement b. Barrier creams: Stokogard® (OTC)–linoleic acid dimer, Hollister Moisture Barrier Ointment® (OTC by Hollister Inc., Libertyville® IL) and Theraseal® Prognosis • Most patients recover from acute hypersensitivity in 14–21 days • Hyposensitization injections not effective and may be unsafe • Oral hyposensitization used mainly for workers in forest industry who cannot avoid contact with toxicodendrons (of questionable value) • Wash skin and clothes with water and soap immediately after contact • Most contact allergens bind to the epidermis and set up response within 0.5–2 h of contact • Chronic exposure to allergens such as rubber, perfumes, preservatives which are not obvious, would benefit from patch testing by a dermatologist skilled in this technique References Bourke J, Coulson I, English J. Guidelines for care of contact dermatitis. Br J Dermatol 2001; 145: 877–85 Drake LA, Dorner W, Goltz RW, et al. Guidelines of care for contact dermatitis. J Am Acad Dermatol 1995: 32: 109–13 Mallory SB. The pediatric patient. In Practical Contact Dermatitis. Guin JD, ed. McGraw-Hill, 1995: 603–21 Maouad M, Fleischer AB, Sherertz EF, Feldman SR. Significance–prevalence index number: a reinterpretation and enhancement of data from the North American Contact Dermatitis Group. J Am Acad Dermatol 1999; 41: 573–6

Mallory Chapter 04

27/1/05

1:23 pm

Page 63

Eczematous dermatoses

Sharma V, Beyer DJ, Paruthi S, Nopper AJ. Prominent pruritic periumbilical papules: allergic contact dermatitis to nickel. Pediatr Dermatol 2002; 19: 106–9 Silverberg NB, Licht J, Friedler S, et al. Nickel contact hypersensitivity in children. Pediatr Dermatol 2002; 19: 110–13 Wildemore JK, Junkins-Hopkins JM, James WD. Evaluation of the histologic characteristics of patch test confirmed allergic contact dermatitis. J Am Acad Dermatol 2003; 49: 243–8

IRRITANT CONTACT DERMATITIS Major points

Figure 4.23 Irritant contact dermatitis – caused by excessive hand washing

• In general, all people will react to an irritant if

• •

applied in a high enough concentration 1. People with atopic dermatitis are more susceptible to irritant dermatitis, especially in dry climates 2. Skin of infants can redden quickly when irritated Characteristic erythematous, pruritic patches and plaques with ill-defined borders Common causes: 1. Hands repeatedly exposed to water, cleansers, or soaps show fissuring or a ‘glazed’ appearance (Figure 4.23) 2. Bubble baths, bleaches, detergents, solvents, acids, alkalis 3. Lip-licking habit – wetting and drying caused by saliva 4. Thumb-suckers in toddlers 5. Perioral area in babies – foods, dribbling saliva and rubbing the area 6. Diaper area secondary to multiple factors such as wetting, maceration, urine, feces Severe forms: chemical burns (alkalis, acids) with vesiculation, necrosis, or ulceration Chronic irritant dermatitis usually lacks vesicles and is characterized by dryness and chapping

• Histology: mild to moderate epidermal spongiosis; epidermal necrosis; usually does not contain eosinophils (as in allergic causes); perivascular lymphocytes and neutrophils Differential diagnosis

• Atopic dermatitis • Allergic contact dermatitis Treatment

• Avoid offending agents • Occlusive pastes (zinc oxide paste) or barrier • •

creams (e.g. Desitin®) Emollients (e.g. petrolatum) Steroids of low to moderate potency

Prognosis

• Benign condition but usually reappears if same circumstances occur References Weedon D. Skin Pathology. Churchill Livingstone: New York, 1997: 88–9

Pathogenesis

• Wetting and drying causes decreased lipids in the •

epidermis with a resultant break in the epidermal barrier Occurs more commonly in atopic patients

Diagnosis

• Clinical findings

DIAPER DERMATITIS Major points

• Irritant diaper dermatitis (chafing dermatitis) 1. Involves convex surfaces of buttocks, upper thighs, abdomen (Figure 4.24)

Mallory Chapter 04

27/1/05

1:24 pm

Page 64

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

•

3. Satellite red papules or pustules at the periphery are common 4. Frequently occurs after diaper dermatitis has lasted >72 h 5. KOH: budding yeast and pseudohyphae 6. Commonly seen with thrush (oral candidiasis) Seborrheic dermatitis 1. Involves inguinal folds (Figure 4.26) 2. Yellowish-pink scale 3. Cradle cap can be prominent on scalp and a clue to correct diagnosis (Figure 4.27) 4. Typical lesions present elsewhere

Figure 4.24 Diaper dermatitis (irritant) – caused by infrequent diaper changes

•

a. Spares inguinal folds b. Common between 7 and 12 months of age 2. Ulcerative form a. Marked erythema b. Shallow or deep ulcers (Jacquet ulcers) (Figure 4.25) c. Most frequent around perianal area d. Commonly follows diarrhea Candida albicans dermatitis 1. Beefy-red, confluent erythema (Figure 4.28) 2. Involves inguinal creases

Figure 4.26 Seborrheic dermatitis – erythematous scaling in the diaper area

Figure 4.25 Jacquet ulcers – caused by chronic moisture in an incontinent child

Figure 4.27 on the face

Seborrheic dermatitis – erythematous scaling

Mallory Chapter 04

27/1/05

1:24 pm

Page 65

Eczematous dermatoses

• Minimize irritants

•

• Figure 4.28 Candidal diaper dermatitis – satellite erythematous papules

1. Use water with or without mild soap 2. Avoid diaper wipes which may contain alcohol, propylene glycol or perfumes 3. Use soft washcloth or soft paper towel for cleaning Candidal infections 1. Topical antifungal therapy (e.g. nystatin, miconazole, ketoconazole, clotrimazole) with every diaper change until clear Erythema 1. Hydrocortisone cream or ointment 1%, 3–4 times a day until clear (usually <7 days) 2. Avoid steroids stronger than class 7 in diaper area

References Pathogenesis

• Moisture, maceration, occlusion and possibly •

Candida and bacteria play a role, causing damage to the epidermis Elevation in pH of skin allows fecal lipases and proteases to further irritate skin

Berg RW, Milligan MC, Sarbaugh FC. Association of skin wetness and pH with diaper dermatitis. Pediatr Dermatol 1994; 11: 18–20 Janniger CK, Thomas I. Diaper dermatitis: an approach to prevention employing effective diaper care. Cutis 1993; 52: 153–5

Clinical presentation

Jordan WE, Lawson KD, Berg RW, et al. Diaper dermatitis: frequency and severity among a general infant population. Pediatr Dermatol 1986; 3: 198–207

Differential diagnosis

Singalavanija S, Frieden IJ. Diaper dermatitis. Pediatr Review 1995; 16: 142–7

Diagnosis

• Langerhans cell histiocytosis • Atopic dermatitis • Immunodeficiencies

• • •

1. HIV – uncommon presentation with granulomatous component 2. Severe combined immunodeficiency – usually generalized, eczematous eruption Psoriasis Bullous impetigo Granuloma gluteale infantum

Treatment

Sires UI, Mallory SB. Diaper dermatitis. Postgraduate Med 1995; 98: 79–86 Wilson PA, Dallas MJ. Diaper performance: maintenance of healthy skin. Pediatr Dermatol 1990; 7: 179–84

SEBORRHEIC DERMATITIS Major points

• Age:

• Remove contactants (urine and feces) • Eliminate wetness and maceration

•

1. Frequent diaper changes with absorptive gel disposable diapers 2. Air dry if possible 3. Change diapers in middle of night so baby does not sleep all night with wet diapers Protective maintenance with barrier creams can be used once dermatitis has cleared

•

1. Infancy: usually begins 4–6 weeks of age with cradle cap (Figure 4.27) 2. Adolescents: dry, fine, flaky desquamation of scalp, mid-face and eyebrows (Figure 4.29) Location: 1. Scalp, mid-face, mid-chest, perineum 2. Less common areas: forehead, anterior chest, axillae, umbilicus, intertriginous areas 3. Facial involvement in adolescents along nasolabial folds

Mallory Chapter 04

27/1/05

1:24 pm

Page 66

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

• • • •

Figure 4.29 Seborrheic dermatitis – in a teenager, often seen on the central face

4. Lesions have greasy, yellowish scale with slightly salmon-colored, erythematous base which can be easily removed 5. Blepharitis – erythema and scaling along lid margins 6. Pruritus slight or absent 7. Persistent recalcitrant seborrhea may be early sign in HIV infection 8. Rare cause of erythroderma in infants Pathogenesis

• Mechanism unknown • Excess sebum accumulation • Increased quantities of Pityrosporum ovale (Malessezia furfur) are seen in sites of seborrheic dermatitis and may contribute to the disorder Diagnosis

• Clinical features are typical • Histology: parakeratosis of the follicular infundibulum; perifollicular collections of neutrophils and lymphocytes in stratum corneum; acanthosis with mild to moderate spongiosis

Tinea capitis Rosacea Candida infection Systemic lupus erythematosus

Treatment • Low-potency topical steroid creams (class 5–7) twice a day, usually necessary for <7 days • Shampoos 1. Keratolytic tar shampoos – sulfur or salicylic acid (e.g. T-gel®) 2. Zinc pyrithione (e.g. Head & Shoulders®) 3. Selenium sulfide 2.5% shampoo (e.g. Selsun®) 4. 2% ketoconazole shampoo (e.g. Nizoral®) • Mineral oil in scalp for a few hours then shampoo and scrub with soft brush • Blepharitis – warm compresses, non-irritating baby shampoo, mechanical removal of scales, topical sulfacetamide ointment (e.g. Sulamyd®) • Topical antifungal agents BID (e.g. Micatin®, Lotrimin®) Prognosis • Usually clears with topical corticosteroids, but tends to recur References Heng MCY, Henderson CL, Barker DC, Haberfelde G. Correlation of Pityrosporum ovale density with clinical severity of seborrheic dermatitis as assessed by a simplified technique. J Am Acad Dermatol 1990; 23: 82–6 Mimouni K, Mukamel M, Zeharia A, Mimouni M. Prognosis of infantile seborrheic dermatitis. J Pediatr 1995; 127: 744–6 Tollesson A, Frithz A, Berg A, Karlman G. Essential fatty acids in infantile seborrheic dermatitis. J Am Acad Dermatol 1993; 28: 957–61 Williams ML. Differential diagnosis of seborrheic dermatitis. Pediatr Review 1986; 7: 204–11

Differential diagnosis

• • • • • • •

Atopic dermatitis Contact dermatitis Psoriasis Dermatophyte infection Langerhans cell histiocytosis Scabies Immunodeficiency diseases (severe combined immunodeficiency, HIV infection)

INTERTRIGO Major points

• Superficial inflammatory dermatitis which occurs •

in skin folds where there is apposition of the skin (e.g. folds of the neck of infants or axillae) Skin develops well-demarcated erythematous, macerated patches which are often secondarily

Mallory Chapter 04

27/1/05

1:24 pm

Page 67

Eczematous dermatoses

•

infected with Candida or bacteria (e.g. streptococci) (Figure 4.30) Obesity, diabetes, immunosuppression are predisposing factors

Pathogenesis • Caused by friction, heat and moisture • May be a form of seborrheic dermatitis Diagnosis • Clinical appearance is typical • KOH prep shows budding yeast and pseudohyphae • Culture may demonstrate Candida Differential diagnosis See Seborrheic dermatitis Treatment • Eliminate causes of maceration (e.g. obesity) • Keep skin dry with air drying and dusting powders (not in infants because of inhalation) • For inflammation, hydrocortisone 1% cream TID • For secondary infection with Candida, a topical antifungal agent TID (e.g. clotrimazole, miconazole) • For secondary bacterial infections: oral antibiotics or topical mupirocin

Figure 4.30 axilla

Intertrigo – erythema and maceration in the

Prognosis • Excellent if skin apposition decreases References Garcia Hidalgo L. Dermatological complications of obesity. Am J Clin Dermatol 2002; 3: 497–506 Honig PJ, Frieden IJ, Kim HJ, Yan AC. Streptococcal intertrigo: an underrecognized condition in children. Pediatrics 2003; 112: 1427–9

LICHEN STRIATUS Major points • Self-limited, unilateral, asymptomatic, linear dermatitis which is sudden in onset • Linear, shiny, hypopigmented or erythematous papules which occur in streaks following lines of Blaschko (Figure 4.31) • May have fine scale on surface or hypopigmented papules

Figure 4.31 Lichen striatus – hypopigmented linear papules following Blaschko lines

• Usually limited to one extremity, but can affect the face

• Asymptomatic • Common in ages 2–12 years; more common in girls • Starts proximally and spreads distally in a linear fashion

Mallory Chapter 04

27/1/05

1:24 pm

Page 68

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

• Lesions last 3 months to 3 years (mean 9 months),

• Presents as pustules or vesicles on palms and soles or along sides of hands and feet (Figure 4.32)

then flatten and resolve Pathogenesis

• Unknown etiology Diagnosis

• Clinical characteristics are typical • Histology: lichenoid dermatitis limited to 3–4 •

• May be present at birth but more common in • • • •

infancy Occurs in recurrent crops until 2–3 years of age Extremely pruritic Pustules resolve with scale and hyperpigmentation Cultures of the pustules are sterile

dermal papillae with perieccrine lymphoctyic involvement Skin biopsy is rarely indicated

Differential diagnosis

• • • • • • • •

Epidermal nevus Lichen nitidus Contact dermatitis Lichen planus Psoriasis Gianotti–Crosti syndrome Porokeratosis Verruca plana

Therapy

• Treatment usually unnecessary • Low-strength topical steroids (class 5–7) may be •

beneficial to hasten resolution Patient education as to course of the disease

Figure 4.32 Acropustulosis of infancy – typical intensely pruritic papules and pustules along the sides of the feet

Pathogenesis

• Cause unknown

Prognosis

Diagnosis

• Spontaneous resolution

• Clinical presentation, rule out other disorders (e.g.

References Kennedy D, Rogers M. Lichen striatus. Pediatr Dermatol 1996; 13: 95–99 Patrizi A, Neri I, Fiorentini C, et al. Simultaneous occurrence of lichen striatus in siblings. Pediatr Dermatol 1997; 14: 293–5 Tosti A, Peluso AM, Misciali C, Cameli N. Nail lichen striatus: clinical features and long-term follow-up of five patients. J Am Acad Dermatol 1997; 36: 908–13

scabies) Differential diagnosis

• Scabies • Dyshidrotic eczema • Contact dermatitis Treatment

• Moderate potency topical steroids (class 3–6) two or three times a day during outbreaks

• Oral antihistamines: hydroxyzine, diphenhydramine

ACROPUSTULOSIS OF INFANCY

• If no relief from the above therapy, refer to a dermatologist

Major points

Prognosis

• Seen most commonly in 15–18-month old Black

• Eruption lasts several months to several years,

male infants

slowly becoming less symptomatic, then abates

Mallory Chapter 04

27/1/05

1:24 pm

Page 69

Eczematous dermatoses

References Braun-Falco M, Stachowitz S, Schnopp C, et al. Infantile acropustulosis successfully controlled with topical corticosteroids under damp tubular retention bandages. Acta Dermato-Venereologica 2001; 81: 140–1 Dorton DW, Kaufmann M. Palmoplantar pustules in an infant. Acropustulosis of infancy. Arch Dermatol 1996; 132: 1365–6 Dromy R, Raz A, Metsker A. Infantile acropustulosis. Pediatr Dermatol 1991; 8: 284–7

Mancini AJ, Frieden IJ, Paller AS. Infantile acropustulosis revisited: history of scabies and response to topical corticosteroids. Pediatr Dermatol 1998; 15: 337–41 Prendiville JS. Infantile acropustulosis – how often is it a sequela of scabies? Pediatr Dermatol 1995; 12: 275–6 Wagner A. Distinguishing vesicular and pustular disorders in the neonate. Curr Opin Pediatr 1997; 9: 396–405

Mallory Chapter 04

27/1/05

1:24 pm

Page 70

Mallory Chapter 05

27/1/05

1:43 pm

Page 71

5 ACNE AND ACNEIFORM DISORDERS

5. Resolves without treatment

Early-onset acne

• Prepubertal acne Major points

1. 2. 3. 4.

• Neonatal acne (neonatal cephalic pustulosis)

•

1. Inflammatory papules on cheeks, face and scalp in first 2–3 weeks of life (Figure 5.1) 2. No associated comedones Infantile acne 1. Onset prior to 2 years of age 2. Male/female ratio >1 3. Facial involvement only 4. No identifiable underlying endocrine abnormality

Pathogenesis

• Considered to be caused by androgen excess or sensitivity to androgens

• An enlarged zona reticularis in the fetal adrenal

•

Figure 5.1 Neonatal acne – grouped papules, pustules and comedones at 2 months of age

Onset after 2 years of age Male/female ratio <1 Facial, chest, back involvement (Figure 5.2) Uncommon underlying endocrinopathy; only noted when other signs of virilization are also present

gland produces increased levels of dehydroepiandrosterone (DHEA) and dehydroepiandrosterone sulfate (DHEAS) until 6 months of age Testosterone production from the male gonads is also increased until 12 months of age

Figure 5.2 Childhood acne in a 6-year-old boy without evidence of androgen excess

Mallory Chapter 05

27/1/05

1:43 pm

Page 72

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Diagnosis

• Lesion types: 1. Comedones: obstructive lesions a. Microcomedone: microscopic plugging of the hair follicle that is the precursor lesion to acne vulgaris b. Open comedone (blackhead): plugging at the follicular opening; cellular plug of stratum corneum with oxidized melanin within the follicle (Figure 5.3)

• Clinical examination • If severe, signs of virilization or rapid growth, a •

work-up for an underlying endocrine disorder should be pursued Hand X-ray for bone age is a good screening evaluation

Differential diagnosis

• Miliaria rubra • Neonatal cephalic pustulosis Treatment

• Varies depending on the severity and risk for scarring

• Topical retinoids (e.g. adapalene) • Topical antibiotics (e.g. benzoyl peroxide or erythromycin)

• Systemic antibiotics (e.g. erythromycin) • Systemic isotretinoin (rarely needed) Prognosis

• Neonatal and infantile types often resolve spontaneously without treatment

• Prepubertal subset has a higher risk of scarring and

Figure 5.3 Comedonal acne – on forehead with open and closed comedones

often requires treatment

• Higher incidence and increased severity of •

adolescent acne vulgaris Monitor for development of endocrine abnormality

References Chew EW, Bingham A, Burrows D. Incidence of acne vulgaris in patients with infantile acne. Clin Exp Dermatol 1990; 15: 376–7 Cunliffe WJ, Baron SE, Coulson IH. A clinical and therapeutic study of 29 patients with infantile acne. Br J Dermatol 2001; 145: 463–6

• •

Lucky AW. A review of infantile and pediatric acne. Dermatology 1998; 196: 95–7

• Acne vulgaris Major points

• Most prevalent skin disorder in pediatrics 1. Affects 40% of children aged 8–10 years 2. Affects 85% of adolescents aged 15–17 years

•

c. Closed comedone (whitehead): plugging of the pilosebaceous unit just below the follicular opening with cystic swelling of the duct; filled with cellular debris 2. Inflamatory lesions: papules, pustules, cysts, sinus tracts (Figures 5.4–5.6) 3. Scars: depressed, pitted, macular, papular, hypertrophic, keloidal Acne is one of the earliest stages of adrenarche Lesion type often correlates with pubertal stage 1. Comedonal acne is predominant type in prepubertal children 2. Inflammatory acne is more prevalent in adolescents Develops in areas with high numbers of pilosebaceous units: face, chest, back Increased severity often predicted by earlier onset and positive family history of scarring acne

Pathogenesis

• Acne development is a complex process that involves four main contributing factors

Mallory Chapter 05

27/1/05

1:43 pm

Page 73

Acne and acneiform disorders

Figure 5.6 Inflammatory acne with comedones, erythematous papules and nodules on the back of a teenager

Figure 5.4 Papulopustular acne – numerous erythematous papules and pustules on the face

Figure 5.5 Cystic acne on the chest with erythematous nodules, crusts and scarring

1. Abnormal keratinization and obstruction of the pilosebaceous unit a. Initial lesion is a microcomedone; caused by obstruction of the follicular opening with the accumulation of cellular debris b. Obstruction is due to abnormal keratinization of the cells lining the follicle with delayed shedding and increased cohesiveness 2. Hormonal stimulation and increased sebum production

a. Increased secretion and accumulation of sebum within the follicle which is stimulated by increased adrenal and gonadal androgens that occur with adrenache b. Polycystic ovary syndrome, a heterogeneous disorder with altered gonadotropin secretion, hyperandrogenism (acne, hirsutism and virilization), chronic anovulation, obesity and insulin resistance 3. Bacterial overgrowth a. Propionibacterium acnes overgrows within the dilated follicle b. Bacterial lipases convert accumulated sebum triglycerides into free fatty acids that cause inflammation c. P. acnes also releases other proteolytic enzymes and chemotactic factors that further stimulate inflammation and recruitment of polymorphonuclear cells (PMNs) 4. Inflammatory reaction a. Inflammatory cells including PMNs are recruited to the area b. Ingestion of bacteria by PMNs causes release of hydrolytic enzymes that causes rupture of the follicular wall c. This leads to intense inflammation and a surrounding foreign body reaction

Mallory Chapter 05

27/1/05

1:43 pm

Page 74

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Diagnosis

• Clinical findings Differential diagnosis

• • • • •

Drug-induced acne Chemical-induced acne Rosacea Gram-negative folliculitis Pityrosporum folliculitis

Drug-induced acne Major points

• Acneiform eruption precipitated by medication • Associated drugs: adrenocorticotropic hormone, systemic corticosteroids (Figure 5.7), topical steroids under occlusion (Figure 5.8), androgens, anticonvulsants (e.g. phenytoin, phenobarbital), lithium, isoniazid, bromide and iodides

Treatment

• Topical retinoids: important for normalizing • • • • • •

keratinization (e.g. tretinoin, adapalene) Topical keratolytics: salicylic acid, azelaic acid Topical benzoyl peroxide preparations Topical antibiotics: clindamycin, erythromycin Systemic antibiotics for inflammatory lesions 1. Doxycycline, tetracycline and minocycline most commonly used in those >9 years of age Systemic retinoids for severe cystic acne or early scarring Oral contraceptives

Prognosis

• Can have significant impact on social interactions • •

and self-esteem and can lead to depression in severe cases May produce significant scarring in inflammatory and cystic lesions Can rarely be associated with an underlying endocrine disorder

Figure 5.7 Acne aggravated by steroids with multiple pustules arising simultaneously

References Cunliffe WJ, Holand DB, Clark SM, Stable GI. Comedogenesis: some new aetiological, clinical and therapeutic strategies. Br J Dermatol 2000; 142: 1084–91 Harper JC, Thiboutot DM. Pathogenesis of acne: recent research advances. Adv Dermatol 2003; 19: 1–10 Lee DJ, VanDyke GS, Kim J. Update on pathogenesis and treatment of acne. Curr Opin Pediatr 2003; 15: 405–10 Leyden JJ. A review of the use of combination therapies for the treatment of acne vulgaris. J Am Acad Dermatol 2003; 49: S200–10 Lucky AW, Biro FM, Simbartl LA, et al. Predictors of severity of acne vulgaris in young adolescent girls: results of a five-year longitudinal study. J Pediatr 1997; 130: 30–9 Weiss JS. Current options for topical treatment of acne vulgaris. Pediatr Dermatol 1997; 14: 480–8

Figure 5.8 Acne in an infant caused by potent topical steroids on the face

Mallory Chapter 05

27/1/05

1:43 pm

Page 75

Acne and acneiform disorders

• Medications can be the sole cause of an acneiform • •

eruption or can exacerbate underlying acne vulgaris Drug-induced lesions are typically monomorphic, papulopustular and diffuse, involving the shoulders and upper arms Comedones are typically absent

Pathogenesis

• Variable, depending on drug; steroids affect keratinization, while androgens stimulate sebaceous gland activity Diagnosis

Figure 5.9 Perioral dermatitis – with acneiform papules around the mouth aggravated by topical steroids

• Clinical examination and history Differential diagnosis

• Acne vulgaris • Folliculitis Treatment

• Discontinuation or tapering of offending agent if possible

• Topical agents (e.g. benzoyl peroxide, antibiotics) • Oral antibiotics Prognosis

• Typically resolves without residua after discontinuation of the causative agent

Figure 5.10 papules

Perioral dermatitis – with tiny erythematous

References Guillot B. Adverse skin reactions to inhaled corticosteroids. Expert Opin Drug Saf 2002; 1: 325–9 Shaw JC. Acne: effect of hormones on pathogenesis and management. Am J Clin Dermatol 2002; 3: 571–8

•

periocular and possible genital areas with monomorphic coalescent papules Symptoms include stinging/burning and occasional pruritus

Pathogenesis

Perioral dermatitis Synonym: periorificial dermatitis Major points

• Common acneiform eruption in children • Presents with erythema, scaling, skin-colored

•

papules and pinpoint pustules around the mouth with sparing of the vermillion border (Figures 5.9 and 5.10) Granulomatous lesions can involve the entire face, and be concentrated in perioral, perinasal,

• Unknown etiology • Known to be induced by use of topical steroids on •

the face Also exacerbated by fluorinated toothpaste and other substances

Diagnosis

• Clinical findings • Histology: spongiosis of the follicular infundibulum with lymphocytic exocytosis and perivascular lymphohistiocytic inflammation

Mallory Chapter 05

27/1/05

1:43 pm

Page 76

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Differential diagnosis

• • • • • •

Atopic dermatitis Seborrheic dermatitis Contact/irritant dermatitis Rosacea Planar warts Sarcoidosis

Treatment

• Eliminate aggravating/precipitating topical agents, especially topical steroids

• Topical antibiotics (e.g. metronidazole, clindamycin)

• Systemic antibiotics (e.g. erythromycin) – may be needed for 2 months of continuous therapy Prognosis

• Intermittent course • Can worsen after withdrawal of precipitating • •

agent Recurrences are not uncommon Responds well to therapy in 1–3 months

References Knautz MA, Lesher JL. Childhood granulomatous periorifical dermatitis. Pediatr Dermatol 1996; 13: 131–4 Laude TA, Salvemini JN. Perioral dermatitis in children. Semin Cutan Med Surg 1999; 18: 206–9 Manders SM, Lucky AW. Perioral dermatitis in childhood. J Am Acad Dermatol 1992; 27: 688–92 Urbatsch AJ, Frieden I, Williams ML, et al. Extrafacial and generalized granulomatous periorificial dermatitis. Arch Dermatol 2002; 138: 1354–8

Figure 5.11 teenage girl

Rosacea associated with easy blushing in a

Pathogenesis

• Unknown but probably multifactorial • Questionable role of Demodex folliculorum • Chronic topical steroid application can lead to rosacea-like eruption (steroid-induced acne) Diagnosis

• Clinical features • Histology variable; most common findings include vascular dilatation and perivascular and perifollicular lymphocytic infiltrates Differential diagnosis

Rosacea Major points

• Rare condition in childhood • Can present with chronic and intermittent facial • • • •

erythema, flushing, telangectasias and papulopustular eruption (Figure 5.11) Eye involvement including blepharitis, conjunctivitis and episcleritis may occur Comedones are absent Typically involves the cheeks and chin Most children have an associated family history of rosacea

• • • • • •

Perioral dermatitis Acne vulgaris Folliculitis Sarcoidosis Discoid lupus erythematosus Papular granuloma annulare

Treatment

• Topical antibiotics (e.g. metronidazole, • •

clindamycin) Systemic antibiotics (e.g. erythromycin, tetracycline, doxycycline, minocycline) Discontinuation of topical steroids

Mallory Chapter 05

27/1/05

1:43 pm

Page 77

Acne and acneiform disorders

Prognosis

Pathogenesis

• Intermittent and chronic course

• Disrupted keratinization with follicular

References Drolet B, Paller AS. Childhood rosacea. Pediatr Dermatol 1992; 9: 22–6 Howard R, Tsuchiya A. Adult skin disease in the pediatric patient. Dermatol Clin 1998; 16: 593–608 Morras PG, Santos SP, Imedio IL, et al. Rosacea-like demodicidosis in an immunocompromised child. Pediatr Dermatol 2003; 20: 28–30 Weston WL, Morelli JG. Steroid rosacea in prepubertal children. Arch Pediatr Adolesc Med 2000; 154: 62–4

•

hyperkeratosis and plugging of the apocrine duct leading to dilatation of the duct with perifolliculitis, abscess formation, destruction of the pilosebaceous unit ending in fibrosis Secondary bacterial infection can occur with staphylococci, streptococci and Gram-negative organisms

Diagnosis

• Typical clinical presentation Differential diagnosis

Hidradenitis suppurativa Major points

• Chronic scarring disease of the apocrine glands that occurs after puberty

• Occurs in apocrine gland-bearing areas of the skin • • • • •

including the axillae, inframammary fold, inguinal area and anogenital region (Figure 5.12) More common in Blacks Male/female ratio <1 Obesity is a predisposing factor Presents with tender, suppurative nodules and abscesses which heal with fibrosis leading to sinus tracts and bridging hypertrophic scars Associated with other follicular occlusion diseases: acne conglobata, dissecting cellulitis of the scalp, pilonidal cysts

• • • •

Furunculosis Lymphadenitis Keratinaceous cysts Ulcerative colitis

Treatment

• • • • • •

Topical antibiotics Benzoyl peroxide preparations Systemic antibiotics Systemic retinoids Intralesional triamcinolone for inflamed lesions Excision of the affected area

Prognosis

• Disease severity is variable • Mild disease can remit with age • Severe disease can be chronic with relapses and significant morbidity References Adams DR, Gordon KB, Devenyi AG, Ioffreda MD. Severe hidradenitis suppurativa treated with infliximab infusion. Arch Dermatol 2003; 139: 1540–2 Mengesha YM, Holcombe TC, Hansen RC. Prepubertal hidradenitis suppurativa: two case reports and review of the literature. Pediatr Dermatol 1999; 16: 292–6 Palmer RA, Keefe M. Early-onset hidradenitis suppurativa. Clin Exp Dermatol 2001; 26: 501–3 Slade DE, Powell BW, Mortimer PS. Hidradenitis suppurativa: pathogenesis and management. Br J Plast Surg 2003; 56: 451–61

Figure 5.12 Hidradenitis suppurativa – with multiple draining cysts in the axilla

Wiseman MC. Hidradenitis suppurativa: a review. Dermatol Ther 2004; 17: 50–4

Mallory Chapter 05

27/1/05

1:43 pm

Page 78

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Miliaria Major points

• Miliaria crytallina 1. Presents as generalized small clear vesicles that are easily ruptured with no surrounding erythema (Figure 5.13) 2. Accentuated in intertriginous areas 3. Can be congenital or develop in the first few weeks of life 4. Can follow sunburn

Figure 5.14 Miliaria rubra – typical ‘prickly heat’ around the neck of a child in the summer

Figure 5.13 overheating

Miliaria crystallina in a newborn from

• Miliaria rubra (prickly heat, heat rash)

•

1. Common in febrile, overheated infants or in hot weather 2. Presents with generalized 1–3 mm nonfollicular papules, vesicles and pustules with an erythematous base (Figures 5.14 and 5.15) 3. Accentuated in intertriginous areas and in areas of occlusion Miliaria profunda 1. Clinically appears as erythematous-based papules and pustules 2. Can prevent adequate sweating leading to hyperthermia in older children

Figure 5.15 Miliaria rubra/pustulosa – caused by lying in bed for several days with a febrile illness

Pathogenesis

• Caused by obstruction of the eccrine ducts that •

leads to retention of sweat in the skin Level of obstruction of the eccrine duct determines the clinical presentation

1. Miliaria crystallina: subcorneal or intracorneal (superficial) 2. Miliaria rubra: intraepidermal

Mallory Chapter 05

27/1/05

1:43 pm

Page 79

Acne and acneiform disorders

• •

3. Miliaria profunda: at the dermal–epidermal junction Secondary inflammatory response can develop if there is deeper obstruction Questionable role of extracellular polysaccharide substance of Staphylococcus epidermidis causing duct occlusion

Diagnosis

• Clinical findings • Histologic findings: 1. Miliaria crystallina: intra- or subcorneal vesicles that contain few neutrophils 2. Miliaria rubra: spongiosis and spongiotic vesicles with surrounding lymphocytic infiltrate; variable papillary dermal edema; can have amorphous casts that are PAS-positive within the intraepidermal sweat duct 3. Miliaria profunda: similar to miliaria rubra with subepidermal vesiculation and deeper inflammation involving the lower epidermis and upper dermis Differental diagnosis

Sellheyer K, Medenica M, Stein SL. Vesicular eruption on the trunk and in intertiginous folds. Arch Dermatol 2004; 140: 231–6 Van Praag MC, Van Rooij RW, Folkers E, et al. Diagnosis and treatment of pustular disorders in the neonate. Pediatr Dermatol 1997; 14: 131–43 Wenzel FG, Horn TD. Nonneoplastic disorders of the eccrine glands. J Am Acad Dermatol 1998; 38: 1–17

Hyperhidrosis Major points

• Sweating beyond what is necessary to maintain thermal regulation

• May be primary (idiopathic, essential) or secondary to diseases or drugs

• May be localized, regionalized or generalized • Frequently socially embarrassing and occupationally disabling

• Generalized hyperhidrosis caused by febrile •

• Neonatal acne • Neonatal infections: Candida, Staphylococcus and herpes simplex Treatment

• Limit bundling of infants; recommend lightweight clothing

• Cooler ambient temperatures; air-conditioning • Cool baths • Avoidance of excessive heat and occlusion Prognosis overheating can lead to hyperthermia and heat stroke

illnesses, neoplastic disease, neurologic diseases, metabolic disorders and drugs Localized hyperhidrosis includes primary or focal hyperhidrosis, unilateral circumscribed, intrathoracic neoplasms, olfactory hyperhidrosis, gustatory hyperhidrosis, spinal cord injuries, Frey syndrome and others

Pathogenesis

• Eccrine sweat glands assist in maintenance of body • •

• Lesions resolve spontaneously with avoidance of • Obstruction of sweat ducts in miliaria profunda

temperature in response to heat exposure or exercise as a function of the sympathetic nervous system Sweat glands are innervated by sympathetic postganglionic fibers mediated by acetylcholine Stimuli include thermal or emotional stimuli (more common on palms, soles and forehead)

Diagnosis

• Clinical findings

References

Differential diagnosis

Feng E, Janniger CK. Miliaria. Cutis 1995; 55: 213–16

• Miliaria

Gan VN, Hoang MP. Generalized vesicular eruption in a newborn. Pediatr Dermatol 2004; 21: 171–3

Treatment

Mowad CM, McGinley KJ, Foglia A, Leyden JJ. The role of extracellular polysaccharide substance produced by Staphylococcus epidermidis in miliaria. J Am Acad Dermatol 1995; 33: 729–33

• Aluminum chloride (Drysol® 20%) • Anti-anxiety medications: diazepam (Valium®), •

fluoxatine (Prozac®) Systemic anticholinergic agents: Robinul®

Mallory Chapter 05

• • • •

27/1/05

1:43 pm

Page 80

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Iontophoresis Botulinum toxin (Botox®) Surgical excision of axilla eccrine/apocrine glands Sympathectomy

Prognosis

• Usually lifelong • May improve in middle age

Reference Stolman LP. Treatment of hyperhidrosis. J Drugs Dermatol 2003; 2: 521–7

Mallory Chapter 06

27/1/05

1:45 pm

Page 81

6 BULLOUS DISORDERS

GENERAL

• Characterized by the presence of autoantibodies to

• Blisters in children are generally caused by:

• Diagnosis is made by correlating the histologic

•

1. Acute eczematous dermatitis (e.g. contact dermatitis) 2. Viral infections (e.g. herpes simplex) 3. Bacterial infections (e.g. bullous impetigo) 4. Mechanobullous genetic diseases (e.g. epidermolysis bullosa) 5. Immunobullous disorders (e.g. chronic bullous dermatosis of childhood) When taking a history, it is important to determine whether trauma played a role in blister formation, and when the blisters began. This helps distinguish the mechanobullous disorders (genetic blistering disorders which usually start at birth) from acquired blistering disorders Although most blisters are fragile and break spontaneously, blisters on the palms and soles have a thick stratum corneum covering and may appear deeper and not rupture Blisters in the mouth are superficial and do not stay intact long, because of the lack of stratum corneum in the oral mucosa

components of the skin findings with the direct immunofluorescence (DIF)

• Blisters may appear flaccid, tense or may present as erosions References Fine J-D. Management of acquired bullous skin diseases. N Engl J Med 1995; 333: 1475–84 Weston WL, Morelli JG, Huff JC. Misdiagnosis, treatments, and outcomes in the immunobullous diseases in children. Pediatr Dermatol 1997; 14: 264–72

Pemphigus General

• Autoimmune blistering disease of the skin and

• •

IMMUNOBULLOUS DISORDERS General

• Immunobullous diseases in childhood are uncommon but should be considered if the blistering condition has been persistent for longer than a month, particularly if unresponsive to antibiotic therapy

mucous membranes with intraepidermal blisters, acantholysis and circulating IgG directed against cell surfaces of keratinocytes Four major types: pemphigus vulgaris, pemphigus foliaceus, paraneoplastic pemphigus and fogo selvagem Very rare in childhood

Major points

• Pemphigus vulgaris (PV) 1. Blisters occur in lower epidermis, just above the basal layer 2. Painful fragile flaccid blisters occur anywhere on the body, and arise on normal or erythematous skin (Figure 6.1) 3. Intact blisters are sparse; erosions are common

Mallory Chapter 06

27/1/05

1:45 pm

Page 82

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

9. Antigen is desmoglein 3

• Neonatal pemphigus displays clinical, histologic,

•

Figure 6.1

Pemphigus vulgaris – in an 11-year-old girl

4. Nikolsky sign is positive (application of lateral pressure to the periphery of an active lesion causing extension of the blister) 5. Excessive granulation tissue may be seen in intertriginous areas, on scalp or face 6. Mucous membrane lesions (particularly in the mouth) occur prior to skin involvement and affect the majority of patients (Figure 6.2) 7. Erosions may involve the pharynx or the larynx, causing hoarseness 8. Associations: myasthenia gravis and/or thymoma

Figure 6.2 Pemphigus vulgaris – in a young adult with erosions in the mouth

•

and immunopathologic signs of PV 1. Neonatal PV occurs when maternal IgG crosses the placenta, causing disease in the neonate 2. Remits when maternal antibodies decrease (~6–12 months) 3. May be mild or severe Pemphigus foliaceus (PF) (superficial pemphigus) 1. Superficial blisters occur in granular layer 2. Scaly, crusted erosions, often on an erythematous base, located in seborrheic distribution (face, scalp, upper trunk) (Figure 6.3) 3. Primary lesions: small flaccid blisters which are painful or burn 4. Disease may stay localized for years or progress rapidly to exfoliative erythroderma 5. Sun and heat may exacerbate 6. Oral lesions rare 7. Antigen is desmoglein 1 Fogo selvagem (endemic pemphigus foliaceus) 1. Endemic in rural Brazil 2. Affects children <14 years in 25% of cases, two-thirds are <30 years old 3. Occurs along inland river beds where black fly Simulium nigrimanum is endemic Pemphigus erythematosus

Figure 6.3

Pemphigus foliaceus – in a young adult

Mallory Chapter 06

27/1/05

1:45 pm

Page 83

Bullous disorders

•

1. Localized variant of pemphigus foliaceus, usually on face, associated with lupus erythematosus Paraneoplastic pemphigus 1. Very rare in childhood 2. Associated with neoplasms mainly of lymphoid tissue (e.g. leukemia, lymphoma, thymoma, benign lymphoid tumors) 3. DIF shows IgG and C3 in between keratinocytes and linear or granular pattern along the basement membrane zone (BMZ) 4. Indirect immunofluorescence is positive in other desmosome-containing tissues 5. Clinical: a. Severe oral and conjunctival erosions with erythematous blistering b. Polymorphic lesions with blisters and erosions, may resemble erythema multiforme (Figure 6.4) Drug-induced pemphigus can be caused by penicillamine or captopril, and resolves when medicine stopped; DIF positive; antigen is desmoglein 3

• Chronic bullous disease of childhood • Staphylococcal scalded skin syndrome • Stevens–Johnson syndrome Treatment

• Prednisone 1–2 mg/kg per day until activity is • • •

suppressed. Once under control, steroids should be tapered to avoid side-effects Steroid-sparing agents can be used as an adjunct: cyclophosphamide, azathioprine, cyclosporine, methotrexate, or gold High-potency topical steroids might be helpful for localized disease Intravenous immunoglobulins (IVIG) may be a promising therapy

Prognosis

• Pemphigus has significant morbidity and mortality • Infection is often the cause of death in adults • Prognosis without treatment is poor

Pathogenesis

• IgG autoantibodies are directed against desmosomes in epidermis, interfering with calcium-sensitive adhesional function. Acantholysis is in areas of deposition of IgG (See Table 6.1) Diagnosis

• DIF is positive for IgG on the cell surfaces of keratinocytes in perilesional skin

• In PV and pemphigus foliaceus (PF), 75% will • •

have circulating antiepithelial cell surface IgG found on indirect immunofluorescence Correlation between titer of circulating anti-cell surface antibodies and disease activity Histology: 1. PV shows suprabasilar blister with acantholysis, leaving a ‘row of tombstones’ where basal cells stay attached to the basement membrane by hemidesmosomes 2. PF shows acantholysis in the granular layer 3. Paraneoplastic pemphigus shows a combination of PV and erythema multiforme-like histology

Figure 6.4 Paraneoplastic pemphigus – with extensive mouth involvement in an adult

References Bystryn JC, Steinman NM. The adjuvant therapy of pemphigus. An update. Arch Dermatol 1996; 132: 203–12 Harman KE, Albert S, Black MM. Guidelines for the management of pemphigus vulgaris. Br J Dermatol 2003; 149: 926–37

Differential diagnosis

Kanwar AJ, Dhar S, Kaur S. Further experience with pemphigus in children. Pediatr Dermatol 1994; 11: 107–11

• Bullous pemphigoid • Bullous insect bite reactions

Lyde CB, Cox SE, Cruz PD. Pemphigus erythematosus in a five-year-old child. J Am Acad Dermatol 1994; 31: 906–9

Mallory Chapter 06

27/1/05

1:45 pm

Page 84

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Table 6.1

Major immunobullous disorders

Disorder

Target antigen

Histology

DIF

Pemphigus vulgaris

In desmosomes: Desmoglein 3 (130 kDa)

Suprabasilar acantholysis

IgG, C3 or both along keratinocyte surfaces

Neonatal pemphigus

Desmoglein 3 (130 kDa) Maternal IgG

Suprabasilar acantholysis

IgG, C3 or both along keratinocyte surfaces

Pemphigus foliaceus

Desmoglein 1 (160 kDa)

Granular cell layer acantholysis

IgG, C3 or both along keratinocyte surfaces

Fogo selvagem

Desmoglein 1 (160 kDa)

Granular cell layer acantholysis

IgG, C3 or both along keratinocyte surfaces

Pemphigus erythematosus

Desmoglein 1 (160 kDa)

Granular cell layer acantholysis

IgG, C3 or both along keratinocyte surfaces

Bullous pemphigoid

In hemidesmosomes: BPAG-1 (230 kDa) BPAG-2 (180 kDa)

Subepidermal blister with eosinophils

Linear IgG/ C3, IgA, IgM at BMZ

Pemphigoid gestationis

BPAG-2 (180 kDa)

Subepidermal blister (in lamina lucida)

IgG, C3 or both in linear pattern at BMZ

Dermatitis herpetiformis

Gliadin Tissue transglutaminase

Dermal papillary neutrophils; with subepidermal blister in lamina lucida

Granular IgA in dermal papillae

Chronic bullous disease of childhood

LABD, 97 kDa, others

Subepidermal bullae in lamina lucida with neutrophils

Linear IgA along BMZ

Paraneoplastic pemphigus

Desmoplakin 1 (250 kDa) Envoplakin (190 kDa) Periplakin (170 kDa) Desmoplakin 2 (210 kDa) BP antigen (230 kDa) Others

Suprabasilar acantholysis Linear granular IgG, and lichenoid dermatitis C3 or both along keratinocyte surfaces and in BMZ

EB acquisita

Type 7 collagen (290 kDa and 145 kDa)

Subepidermal blister with neutrophils or cell poor infiltrate

IgG, C3 or others in linear pattern along BMZ

BMZ, basement membrane zone; DIF, direct immunofluorescence; IF, immunofluorescence; EB, epidermolysis bullosa

Prendiville JS, Israel DM, Wood WS, Dimmick JE. Oral pemphigus vulgaris associated with inflammatory bowel disease and herpetic gingivostomatitis in an 11-year-old girl. Pediatr Dermatol 1994; 11: 145–50 Rybojad M, Leblanc T, Flageul B, et al. Paraneoplastic pemphigus in a child with a T-cell lymphoblastic lymphoma. Br J Dermatol 1993; 128: 418–22 Stanley JR. Pemphigus. In Fitzpatrick’s Dermatology in General Medicine, 6th edn. Freedberg IM Eisen AZ, Wolff K, Austen KF, eds. McGraw-Hill: New York, 2003: 558–67

Tope WD, Kamino H, Briggaman RA, et al. Neonatal pemphigus vulgaris in a child born to a woman in remission. J Am Acad Dermatol 1993; 29: 480–5 Walker DC, Kolar KA, Hebert AA, Jordan RE. Neonatal pemphigus foliaceus. Arch Dermatol 1995; 131: 1308–11 Wanaukul S, Pongprasit P. Childhood pemphigus. Int J Dermatol 1999; 38: 29–35 Weston WL, Morelli JG, Huff JC. Misdiagnosis, treatments, and outcomes in the immunobullous diseases in children. Pediatr Dermatol 1997; 14: 264–72

Mallory Chapter 06

27/1/05

1:45 pm

Page 85

Bullous disorders

Bullous pemphigoid Major points

• Large, tense blisters arising on normal or • • •

erythematous skin Mucous membrane involvement in 10–35% Sites of predilection: lower abdomen, inner thighs, flexor forearms or generalized Bullae may have clear or hemorrhagic fluid (Figures 6.5 and 6.6)

• Erosions tend to re-epithelialize quickly • Nikolsky sign is negative • New vesicles may form at the edge of old blisters

• Blisters do not tend to scar but may be hyperpigmented

• Mild to moderate pruritus • Early lesions tend to look urticarial • Rare in childhood Pathogenesis

• Bullous pemphigoid (BP) antigens are proteins in

• •

the hemidesmosomes (HDs). Autoantibody binds both inside the cell to plaques of HDs and outside cells to the extracellular section of HDs BP antibodies are directed against both BPAg-1 (230 kDa) component and also BPAg-2 (180 kDa) (also called type XVII collagen) BP IgG can activate complement by the classical pathway causing leukocyte adherence to the basement membrane, degranulation of polymorphonuclear leukocytes and subsequent dermal–epidermal separation

Diagnosis Figure 6.5 Bullous pemphigoid – large bullae on erythematous patches

• Histology: subepidermal blister without necrosis, • •

•

and superficial dermal infiltrate with lymphocytes, histiocytes and eosinophils DIF: linear pattern of C3 and IgG at BMZ Indirect immunoflourescence: 70–80% of patients will have circulating IgG which binds to stratified squamous epithelium; titers do not correlate with disease extent or activity ~50% have elevated IgE, and sometimes eosinophilia, which correlates with pruritus

Differential diagnosis

• • • •

Bullous insect bite reactions Bullous impetigo Bullous erythema multiforme Chronic bullous disease of childhood

Treatment

• Prednisone 1–2 mg/kg per day until activity is • Figure 6.6 Pemphigoid gestationis – in a young pregnant woman. Her child was unaffected

suppressed. Once under control, steroids should be tapered to avoid side-effects Steroid-sparing agents can be used as an adjunct: cyclophosphamide, azathioprine, cyclosporine, methotrexate, or gold

Mallory Chapter 06

27/1/05

1:45 pm

Page 86

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

• Localized BP can be treated with high-potency •

• Characterized by intensely pruritic chronic small papules and vesicles located symmetrically over extensor surfaces (elbows, knees, upper spine), scalp hairline and posterior nuchal area (Figure 6.7)

topical steroids Some patients respond to sulfones, tetracycline, or nicotinamide

Prognosis

• BP may be self-limited and can last several months to many years

• Prognosis is good. In adults, half of treated patients go into remission in 2.5–6 years References Chimanovitch I, Hamm H, Georgi M, et al. Bullous pemphigoid of childhood. Arch Dermatol 2000; 136: 527–32 Kuenzli S, Grimaitre M, Krischer J, et al. Childhood bullous pemphigoid: report of a case with life-threatening course during homeopathy treatment. Pediatr Dermatol 2004; 21: 160–3 Nagano T, Tani M, Adachi A, et al. Childhood bullous pemphigoid: immunohistochemical, immunoelectron microscopic, and Western blot analysis. J Am Acad Dermatol 1994; 30: 884–8

Figure 6.7 Dermatitis herpetiformis – typical excoriated lesions on extensor surfaces

Nemeth AJ, Klein AD, Gould EW, Schachner LA. Childhood bullous pemphigoid: clinical and immunologic features, treatment and prognosis. Arch Dermatol 1991; 127: 378–86

• Primary lesions: erythematous papules, urticarial

Oranje AP, Vuzevski VD, van Joost T, et al. Bullous pemphigoid in children. Int J Dermatol 1991; 30: 339–42

• • •

Petronius D, Bergman R. Bullous pemphigoid in two young infants. Pediatr Dermatol 2002; 19: 119–21 Stanley JR. Bullous pemphigoid. In Fitzpatrick’s Dermatology in General Medicine, 6th edn. Freedberg IM, Eisen AZ, Wolff K, Austen KF, eds. McGraw-Hill: New York, 2003: 574–81 Trüeb RM, Didierjean L, Fellas A, et al. Childhood bullous pemphigoid: report of a case with characterization of the targeted antigens. J Am Acad Dermatol 1999; 40:338–44 Vaillant L, Bernard P, Joly P, et al. Evaluation of clinical criteria for diagnosis of bullous pemphigoid. Arch Dermatol 1998; 134: 1075–80 Weston WL, Morelli JG, Huff JC. Misdiagnosis, treatments, and outcomes in the immunobullous diseases in children. Pediatr Dermatol 1997; 14: 264–72

Dermatitis herpetiformis Major points

• Most common immunobullous disease in children

• • •

plaques or vesicles, but crusted lesions are frequently the only lesions seen. Large bullae infrequent Mucous membrane involvement is uncommon Onset is usually in adolescence or later Most have gastrointestinal (GI) abnormality similar to celiac disease (villous atrophy of the small intestine) but are asymptomatic About 80% of patients have HLA-B8 and DR3 Lesions can be exacerbated by gluten or oral iodides Sometimes associated with GI lymphomas, or autoimmune disease (e.g. thyroid disease, diabetes, lupus erythematosus, Sjögren syndrome, or vitiligo)

Pathogenesis

• Gluten plays a critical role • IgA deposits may be complexes of • •

immunoglobulins and GI-derived antigens which react with an unidentified skin antigen IgA is found in all skin sites, not just lesional skin IgA activates complement, probably via the alternative pathway, causing chemotaxis of neutrophils which release enzymes causing blistering. Cytokines or proteases that induce basal keratinocytes to produce collagenases or stromelysin-1 contribute to blister formation

Mallory Chapter 06

27/1/05

1:45 pm

Page 87

Bullous disorders

Diagnosis

• Histology: dermal papillary collections of

• • • •

neutrophils. Blood vessels are surrounded by lymphohistiocytic infiltrates with neutrophils and eosinophils Blister formation is within lamina lucida of the BMZ, and above lamina densa DIF shows granular IgA deposits (subclass IgA1) in dermal papillary tips in normal appearing skin; frequently, C3 is seen Antireticulin antibodies of IgA and IgG classes can be detected in the majority of patients Circulating IgA autoantibodies to endomysium (EMA), tissue transglutaminase (tTG) and gliadin are detected in both dermatitis herpetiformis and celiac disease

Differential diagnosis

• • • • • • • • • • •

Scabies Eczema Impetigo Pityriasis lichenoides Erythema multiforme Bullous drug reaction Factitial excoriations Bullous pemphigoid Bullous insect bite reactions Chronic bullous disease of childhood Pemphigus vulgaris

Chorzelski TP, Rosinska D, Beutner EH, et al. Aggressive gluten challenge of dermatitis herpetiformis cases converts them from seronegative to seropositive for IgA-class endomysial antibodies. J Am Acad Dermatol 1988; 18: 672–8 Ermacora E, Prampolini L, Tribbia G, et al. Long-term follow-up of dermatitis herpetiformis in children. J Am Acad Dermatol 1986; 15: 24–30 Weston WL, Morelli JG, Huff JC. Misdiagnosis, treatments, and outcomes in the immunobullous diseases in children. Pediatr Dermatol 1997; 14: 264–72 Zone JJ, Meyer LJ, Petersen MJ. Deposition of granular IgA relative to clinical lesions in dermatitis herpetiformis. Arch Dermatol 1996; 132: 912–18

Chronic bullous disease of childhood (linear IgA dermatosis) Major points

• Presents as blisters which resemble bullous • •

• •

Treatment

• Dapsone 2 mg/kg per day, adult dose • •

100–150 mg/day Sulfapyridine 1–4 g/day given four times a day for an adult Gluten-free diet may be effective; may take >5 months to 1 year to see an effect

Prognosis

•

References Bardella MT, Fredella C, Trovato C, et al. Long-term remission in patients with dermatitis herpetiformis on a normal diet. Br J Dermatol 2003; 149: 968–71 Caproni M, Cardinali C, Renzi D, et al. Tissue transglutaminase antibody assessment in dermatitis herpetiformis [Letter]. Br J Dermatol 2001; 144: 196–7

impetigo unresponsive to antibiotics Second most common immunobullous disease in childhood Typically presents in children <5 years of age with large tense bullae or vesicles on an erythematous base in the diaper area, face and other areas (Figures 6.8–6.10) Lesions are symmetrical and pruritic Numerous crusted vesicles or a ‘cluster of jewels’ appearance with new lesions appearing around the periphery of previous lesions Mucous membranes involved in up to 70% of cases, ranging from asymptomatic oral ulcerations to severe disease

Pathogenesis

• Caused by linear deposition of IgA to 97-kDa

• Lifelong disorder, persisting indefinitely with varying severity

•

antigen among others in lamina lucida of BMZ, which incites inflammation and destruction of the epidermal–dermal barrier Associations: 1. Drugs: vancomycin, lithium, diclofenac 2. Lymphoid and nonlymphoid malignancies

Diagnosis

• Diagnosis is usually overlooked initially, because of the rarity of this disease and its confusion with bullous impetigo

Mallory Chapter 06

27/1/05

1:45 pm

Page 88

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Figure 6.8 Chronic bullous dermatosis of childhood – typical ringed blisters on the feet

Figure 6.10 Linear IgA bullous dermatosis – typical blisters along the edge of healed blisters

•

to BP); at or below lamina densa (similar to epidermolysis bullosa acquisita); both above and below lamina densa Low titer IgA serum autoantibodies can sometimes be detected

Differential diagnosis

• • • • • • Figure 6.9 Chronic bullous dermatosis of childhood – extensive involvement of the trunk

• Histology:

•

1. Biopsies should be taken in skin adjacent to a blister, not an old blister or crusted lesion 2. Subepidermal bulla with neutrophils along the BMZ, often in papillary tips. Lymphocytic infiltrate may be present around superficial dermal blood vessels without vasculitis DIF: IgA in a homogeneous linear pattern along BMZ; occasional IgG and C3 1. Three patterns of IgA deposition (found on electron microscopy): in lamina lucida (similar

Bullous impetigo Pemphigus Bullous pemphigoid Epidermolysis bullosa Erythema multiforme Bullous systemic lupus erythematosus

Treatment

• Dapsone 2 mg/kg per day • Prednisone 1–2 mg/kg per day • Most cases respond to combination of prednisone and dapsone

• Topical antibiotics and nonstick gauze covering if lesions are oozing or crusted

• Patients do not benefit from gluten-free diet • Other drugs which may be beneficial: dicloxacillin, colchicine, sulfapyridine Prognosis

• Usually lasts several years and then remits. Occasionally, persists into puberty but is less severe

Mallory Chapter 06

27/1/05

1:45 pm

Page 89

Bullous disorders

• Oral medications can be tapered as child improves,

• At least 18 distinct types, based on identification of mutations in various genes encoding proteins and clinical symptoms (Table 6.2)

and then discontinued when totally clear of lesions for 6 months References

Major points

Legrain V, Taïeb A, Surlève-Bazeille J-E, et al. Linear IgA dermatosis of childhood: case report with an immunoelectron microscopic study. Pediatr Dermatol 1991; 8: 310–13

• In general, EB is divided into scarring (dystrophic)

Powell J, Kirtschig G, Allen J, et al. Mixed immunobullous disease of childhood: a good response to antimicrobials. Br J Dermatol 2001; 144: 769–74 Rao CL, Hall RP. Linear IgA dermatosis and chronic bullous disease of childhood. In Fitzpatrick’s Dermatology in General Medicine, 6th edn. Freedberg IM, Eisen AZ, Wolff K, Austen KF, eds. McGraw-Hill: New York, 2003: 587–92 Siegfried EC, Sirawan S. Chronic bullous disease of childhood: successful treatment with dicloxacillin. J Am Acad Dermatol 1998; 39: 797–800

and nonscarring (simplex and junctional) types

• Nonscarring types demonstrate an intraepidermal • •

separation (EB simplex) or a separation at the dermal–epidermal junction (junctional EB) Scarring types: subepidermal blisters are found in dystrophic EB Usually presents in newborn period with blisters and erosions. Extensive blistering may be potentially life-threatening to newborns

Pathogenesis

Wojnarowska F. Chronic bullous disease of childhod. Semin Dermatol 1988; 7: 58–65 Zone JJ, Taylor TB, Kadunce DP, et al. IgA antibodies in chronic bullous disease of childhood react with a 97 kDa basement membrane zone protein. J Invest Dermatol 1996; 106: 1277–80

• Defects associated with anchoring complexes along •

Diagnosis

• Diagnosis is established by clinical symptoms and •

EPIDERMOLYSIS BULLOSA

the basal cell layer and dermal–epidermal BMZ determine the type of EB Gene mutations (See Table 6.2)

General

• Epidermolysis bullosa (EB) is a group of genetic diseases where mild trauma induces blister formation

skin biopsy. Electron microscopy is the gold standard. Gene mutation can be identified Biopsy of an infant may be difficult 1. Induce a blister with gentle traction with a cotton-tipped applicator 2. Shave biopsy, gentle punch biopsy or excisional biopsy should include both epidermis and dermis

Table 6.2

Common types of epidermolysis bullosa

Type gene

Mutations

Locations

Simplex Weber–Cockayne type Koebner type Dowling–Meara type

Keratins 5, 14 Keratins 5, 14 Keratins 5, 14

Hands, feet Generalized Generalized

Junctional Herlitz type Generalized atrophic benign type With pyloric atresia

Laminin-5 Type 17 collagen or Laminin A3, B3 α6β4 integrin

Generalized, laryngeal Generalized Generalized, laryngeal, pylorus

Dystrophic Recessive type Dominant types

Type 7 collagen Type 7 collagen

Generalized Generalized

Mallory Chapter 06

27/1/05

1:45 pm

Page 90

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

3. Avoid old blisters because secondary changes occur with re-epithelization 4. Specimen should be sent for light and electron microscopic examination as well as immunofluorescence mapping

Epidermolysis bullosa simplex Major points

• Weber–Cockayne type (localized EB simplex)

•

1. Most common form of EB 2. Localized to hands and feet (Figure 6.11) 3. Aggravated by warm weather 4. Begins in childhood or adolescence 5. Hyperhidrosis common Generalized EB simplex (Koebner type) 1. Presents with generalized blistering within first 12 months of life (Figures 6.12–6.14) 2. Blisters tend to be more common on distal extremities, especially the feet, knees, elbows and hands 3. Palmoplantar keratoses EB herpetiformis (Dowling–Meara type) (Figure 6.15) 1. Generalized with pronounced oral mucosa involvement (Figure 6.11)

Figure 6.12 Epidermolysis bullosa simplex – typical tense blisters in a neonate

Figure 6.13 Epidermolysis bullosa simplex – same child as in Figure 6.12, age 6 years

Figure 6.11 Epidermolysis bullosa simplex (Weber– Cockayne type) localized to hands and feet

Figure 6.14 Epidermolysis bullosa simplex – mouth involvement causing difficulty feeding

Mallory Chapter 06

27/1/05

1:45 pm

Page 91

Bullous disorders

Figure 6.15 Epidermolysis bullosa simplex, Dowling–Meara type, severe generalized blistering in the neonatal period

2. Blisters are grouped 3. Nails may be shed and regrow 4. Hyperkeratosis of palms and soles

Figure 6.16 Junctional type epidermolysis bullosa – typical granulation tissue on the fingertips

Junctional epidermolysis bullosa Major points

• Two major forms of junctional EB, although other subtypes exist

• Herlitz type

•

1. Severe form usually fatal before the age of 5 years 2. Blisters appear in the neonatal period 3. Oral mucosa is usually affected, causing failure to thrive from poor nutrition 4. Laryngeal involvement is common; may present with hoarse cry 5. Nonhealing granulation tissue (mid-face, neck, spine, ears and nail beds) is characteristic (Figures 6.16 and 6.17) 6. Enamel dysplasia 7. Bacterial infection occurs frequently 8. Nails usually lost 9. Respiratory, GI and genitourinary systems can be involved 10. Growth retardation 11. Anemia Mitis junctional EB 1. Mild but chronic ulcerations with poor healing, which may improve with age 2. Hoarseness mild or absent

Figure 6.17 Junctional epidermolysis bullosa – typical chronic nonhealing granulation tissue around the neck

•

3. Periorifical nonhealing erosions common 4. Enamel dysplasia 5. Scalp and nail lesions prominent 6. Atrophic scarring Generalized atrophic benign EB 1. Generalized involvement 2. Bullae on extremities and fewer on trunk, scalp and face 3. Alopecia 4. Mucous membrane involvement mild 5. Enamel defects 6. Normal lifespan

Mallory Chapter 06

27/1/05

1:45 pm

Page 92

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Dystrophic epidermolysis bullosa

• Recessive dystrophic EB of Hallopeau–Siemens

•

1. Lesions heal with scar formation and milia (tiny white cysts within the scars) 2. Scarring results in loss of nails; webbing of fingers and toes leads to mitten-like appearance; flexion contractures common (Figures 6.18–6.20) 3. Scarring in scalp causing alopecia 4. Eyelid involvement can lead to blindness 5. Bullae of oral mucosa can cause pain and severe restriction in eating 6. Blisters of esophagus can cause esophageal strictures resulting in dysphagia 7. Vagina, urethra and anus can be involved with blistering and stricture 8. Although teeth are usually normal, they often become carious because of difficulty with oral hygiene 9. Mixed anemia from chronic blood loss and malnutrition occur in childhood 10. Failure to thrive is common with growth retardation 11. Secondary bacterial infection frequent 12. Aggressive squamous cell carcinoma commonly arises in poorly healed atrophic areas in adolescence or early adulthood – usually fatal Dominant dystrophic EB of Cockayne–Touraine type 1. Blisters are similar to recessive dystrophic EB but generally not as severe, usually acral 2. Babies may be born with erosions secondary to intrauterine blister formation 3. Atrophic scars with milia (Figures 6.21 and 6.22) 4. Loss of nails may occur, but no webbing of fingers and toes 5. Failure to thrive and chronic anemia rare 6. Oral lesions uncommon 7. Teeth normal Dominant dystrophic EB of Pasini 1. Hypopigmented atrophic lesions (called albopapuloid lesions) in symmetrical pattern 2. Dystrophic nails common 3. Mucous membranes and teeth normal

Pathogenesis

Figure 6.18 Recessive dystrophic type epidermolysis bullosa – scarring and chronic blistering in a teenager

Figure 6.19 Recessive dystrophic epidermolysis bullosa with severe involvement on extremities

Diagnosis

• Skin biopsy (light microscopy, electron •

• Gene mutations of major structural proteins are known to cause the different types of EB (see Table 6.2)

•

microscopy) as well as a molecular genetic analysis can differentiate the types of EB Electron microscopy: blister formation in EB simplex is found within epidermal cells above basal cell layer In junctional EB, blister formation occurs within the lamina lucida, just below the plasma

Mallory Chapter 06

27/1/05

1:45 pm

Page 93

Bullous disorders

Figure 6.20 Dystrophic epidermolysis bullosa – mitten deformity of the hand

Figure 6.22 Dominant dystrophic type epidermolysis bullosa – blistering at the site of trauma

• Erythema multiforme • Immunobullous diseases (e.g. pemphigus) Treatment

• Supportive with avoidance of trauma and wound • • • Figure 6.21 Dominant dystrophic epidermolysis bullosa with residual milia and scarring on the hands

• •

membrane of basal cells and above the lamina densa Dystrophic EB demonstrates a separation within anchoring fibrils below the basal lamina within the dermis Genetic analysis may be required if combination of clinical signs and electron microscopy is not conclusive

• •

• • •

Differential diagnosis

• •

• Bacterial infections (e.g. bullous impetigo,

•

• • •

staphylococcal, streptococcal) Fungal infections (e.g. Candida infection) Viral infections (e.g. herpes simplex) Epidermolytic hyperkeratosis

management Physician with knowledge of EB is the best source for a comprehensive care program including skilled nursing Nutritional support: frequent feedings with soft nipples; may require G-tube placement Gentle handling: avoid clothing or devices which might injure skin Sheep-skin pad in crib and car seat softens friction Blisters should be opened with a sterile needle or scissors and roof allowed to remain intact by gently pressing out of blister fluid, leaving a ‘biologic bandage’ Topical antibiotics (e.g. bacitracin or mupirocin) can help prevent secondary bacterial infection Most patients, especially young children, benefit from gauze wrapping Care should be given to wrap the fingers individually in recessive dystrophic EB in order to prevent webbing of fingers Physical therapy can help prevent contractures Cool ambient temperature may help decrease blistering Wound dressings such as hydrophilic dressings, occlusive dressings and hydrogel dressings (e.g. Exudry®, Omniderm®, Vigilon®, DuoDerm®, Mepitel®) may aid in healing and reduce pain. Be careful not to pull dressings off forcefully

Mallory Chapter 06

27/1/05

1:45 pm

Page 94

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

• Protein and caloric requirements may be twice • • • • •

normal. Extra calories should be encouraged with nutritional supplements or even gastric buttons Anemia: vitamin supplements and iron Constipation: high-fiber foods, stool softeners or mineral oil may help prevent rectal blistering Genetic counseling: chorionic villus sampling sent for prenatal diagnosis if gene defect is known Surgical release of fused digits followed by grafting and splinting Support group: D.E.B.R.A. of America, Inc. Internet address: www.DEBRA.org

Prognosis

• Lifelong, chronic, blistering disorder • EB simplex tends to improve with age, perhaps •

because older children and adults learn how to avoid blisters Recessive dystrophic EB tends to be slowly progressive, with further destruction of skin, including fingernails, web spaces and, in most severe cases, causing mitten deformities of hands

References Eady RA, McGrath JA, McMillan JR. Ultrastructural clues to genetic disorders of skin: the dermal-epidermal junction. J Invest Dermatol 1994; 103: 13S–18S Fine JD. Skin bioequivalents and their role in the treatment of inherited epidermolysis bullosa. Arch Dermatol 2000; 136: 1259–60

Livingston RJ, Sybert VP, Smith LT, et al. Expression of a truncated keratin 5 may contribute to severe palmar–plantar hyperkeratosis in epidermolysis bullosa simplex patients. J Invest Dermatol 2001; 116: 970–4 Marinkovich MP. The molecular genetics of basement membrane diseases. Arch Dermatol 1993; 129: 1557–65 Marinkovich MP, Khavari PA, Herron GS, Bauer EA. Inherited epidermolysis bullosa. In Fitzpatrick’s Dermatology in General Medicine, 6th edn. Freedberg IM, Eisen AZ, Wolff K, Austen KF, eds. McGraw-Hill: New York, 2003: 596–609 Nakano A, Pulkkinen L, Murrell D, et al. Epidermolysis bullosa with congenital pyloric atresia: novel mutations in the beta-4 integrin gene (ITGB4) and genotype/phenotype correlations. Pediatr Res 2001; 49: 618–26 Parisi MA, Sybert VP. Molecular genetics in pediatric dermatology. Curr Opin Pediatr 2000; 12: 347–53 Pearson RW. Clinicopathologic types of epidermolysis bullosa and their nondermatological complications. Arch Dermatol 1988; 124: 718–25 Pfender E, Uitto J, Fine JD. Epidermolysis bullosa carrier frequencies in the US population [Letter]. J Invest Deramtol 2001; 116: 483–4 Uitto J, Christiano AM. Molecular genetics of the cutaneous basement membrane zone. J Clin Invest 1992; 90: 687–92 Uitto J, Pulkkinen L. Molecular genetics of heritable blistering disorders. Arch Dermatol 2001; 137: 1458–61

Mallory Chapter 07

27/1/05

1:49 pm

Page 95

7 BACTERIAL AND SPIROCHETAL DISEASES

Impetigo

• Bullous impetigo

Major points

• Most common bacterial skin infection in children • Occurs superficially with no scarring • More common in hot, humid climates or in crowded environments

• Associated with regional lymphadenopathy • Nonbullous impetigo (impetigo contagiosa)

•

1. Presents with fragile vesicles and pustules that are easily ruptured forming characteristic ‘honey-colored’ crusts (Figure 7.1) 2. Most common on face and around nose, but can also occur on the extremities 3. Can be a primary infection or can be secondary with an underlying dermatosis, called ‘impetiginization’ Bullous impetigo 1. Most common in infancy 2. Typically affects the diaper area 3. Presents with flaccid, transparent bullae with little surrounding erythema; leads to erosions with a rim of scale (Figure 7.2) 4. Can present with constitutional symptoms

• •

1. Staphylococcus aureus is the causative organism with 80% from phage group 2 2. S. aureus produces epidermolytic toxins A or B (exfoliatin) which interacts with desmoglein-1 to form bullae Causative organisms enter through breaks in the skin such as abrasions or insect bites Carriage of the organism in the nares can be a source of infection

Diagnosis

• Clinical findings • Gram stain reveals Gram-positive cocci in clusters or chains

• Staphyloccoci or steptococci may be isolated from lesions

• KOH prep and Tzanck prep are both negative • Histology 1. Nonbullous lesions reveal an intraepidermal vesicopustule within the subcorneal or granular layer with numerous neutrophils 2. Bullous lesions reveal a bulla with cleavage in the uppermost epidermis and limited inflammation

Pathogenesis

• Nonbullous impetigo 1. Staphylococcus aureus causes in up to 85% of cases 2. Group A streptococcus causes in up to 30% of cases with groups B, C, G and F rarely present 3. Epidemics are caused by Streptococcus pyogenes M-serotypes (i.e. 2, 49, 53, 55–57, 60)

Differential diagnosis

• Nonbullous impetigo

•

1. Nummular eczema 2. Tinea corporis 3. Herpes simplex 4. Pemphigus foliaceus Bullous impetigo 1. Arthropod reaction

Mallory Chapter 07

27/1/05

1:49 pm

Page 96

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

•

coverage (e.g. dicloxacillin, cephalexin or erythromycin) Can resolve spontaneously over 2 weeks if left untreated in some cases

Prognosis

• Typically resolves without scarring • Can be recurrent with nasal carriage of •

• •

staphylococci 2–5% of cases of impetigo are associated with the development of acute glomerulonephritis; most commonly associated with Streptococcus pyogenes M-serotypes 2, 49, 55, 57 and 60; treatment does not reduce risk of development Development of cellulitis is uncommon Hematogenous spread is rare

References Figure 7.1 Impetigo contagiosa – typical crusted lesions on the face

George A, Rubin G. A systematic review and meta-analysis of treatments for impetigo. Br J Gen Pract 2003; 53: 480–7 Hedrick J. Acute bacterial skin infections in pediatric medicine: current issues in presentation and treatment. Paediatr Drugs 2003; 5 (Suppl 1): 35–46 Hirschmann JV. Impetigo: etiology and therapy. Curr Clin Top Infect Dis 2002; 22: 42–51 Mancini AJ. Bacterial skin infections in children: the common and the not so common. Pediatr Ann 2000; 29: 26–35

Folliculitis Major points Figure 7.2 plaques

2. 3. 4. 5.

Bullous impetigo – with annular, crusted

Fixed drug eruption Erythema multiforme Staphylococcal scalded skin syndrome Chronic bullous disease of childhood

Treatment

• Topical mupirocin • Topical mupirocin to the nares may be effective at reducing carriage in recurrent cases

• If widespread or associated with constitutional symptoms: oral antibiotics with Gram-positive

• Infection of the hair follicle • Variable clinical presentation depending on the •

infectious organism, depth of penetration and location Staphylococcal folliculitis 1. Most common type 2. Often related to maceration, occlusion or poor hygiene 3. Presents with diffuse, discrete, erythematousbased, perifollicular papules and pustules on the scalp, face, buttocks and extremities (Figures 7.3 and 7.4) 4. Can present concurrently with impetigo 5. Patient or household members may be nasal carriers of S. aureus

Mallory Chapter 07

27/1/05

1:49 pm

Page 97

Bacterial and spirochetal diseases

•

Figure 7.3

Folliculitis – caused by Staphylococcus aureus

•

Figure 7.4

•

Folliculitis – common location on the buttocks

6. Rarely related to immunodeficiency, HIV, or diabetes mellitus Furunculosis 1. Caused by S. aureus, especially phage type 80/81 2. Develops from preceding superficial folliculitis with extension into the dermis and subcutaneous tissue 3. Presents with tender, erythematous, perifollicular nodules with eventual central necrosis and rupture 4. Often resolves with scarring 5. Most common on the face, neck, axillae, or buttocks 6. Carbuncle: two or more confluent furuncles Pityrosporum folliculitis 1. Superficial infection of the hair follicle with Malassezia furfur

2. Presents with pinpoint perifollicular papules and pustules on the back, chest and upper arms 3. Can be pruritic 4. May be associated with tinea versicolor or seborrheic dermatitis 5. KOH reveals characteristic hyphae and spores 6. Responds to topical or systemic antifungal therapies 7. Typically chronic and recurrent Gram-negative folliculitis 1. Infection of the hair follicles by Escherichia coli and species of Enterobacter, Klebsiella or Proteus 2. Occurs in patients with acne who have been on long-term oral antibiotic therapy 3. Presents as suddenly worsening acne with facial papules, pustules or nodules 4. Responds well to isotretinoin as well as amoxicillin–clavulanic acid or trimethoprim–sulfamethoxazole Pseudomonas folliculitis (hot tub folliculitis) 1. Caused by follicular infection with Pseudomonas aeruginosa 2. Acquired in hot tubs, whirlpools, swimming pools and water slides or using body sponges that have not dried completely 3. Presents with follicular papules and pustules accentuated in the bathing suit distribution (Figure 7.5) 4. Can be associated with otitis externa, conjunctivitis, mild constitutional symptoms and rarely pneumonia and urinary tract infections 5. Cutaneous disease resolves without treatment but can be recurrent

Pathogenesis

• Bacterial organism invades the follicular wall, •

leading to occlusion of the follicular orifice and causing inflammation Can be precipitated by occlusion with emollients, dressings or tar in hair-bearing areas

Diagnosis

• • • •

Clinical presentation Gram stain reveals organism Bacterial culture Histology rarely needed; reveals subcorneal pustules with surrounding neutrophilic infiltrate

Mallory Chapter 07

27/1/05

1:49 pm

Page 98

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

treatment of atopic dermatitis is not associated with an increase in cutaneous infections. J Am Acad Dermatol 2002; 47: 562–70 Neubert U, Jansen T, Plewig G. Bacteriologic and immunologic aspects of gram-negative folliculitis: a study of 46 patients. Int J Dermatol 1999; 38: 270–4 Stahelin-Massik J, Gnehm HE, Itin PH. Pseudomonas folliculitis in a young child. Pediatr Infect Dis J 2000; 19: 362–3

Ecthyma Major points

• Deep, punched out, ulcerative, painful, cutaneous • Figure 7.5

Hot tub folliculitis caused by Pseudomonas

• •

Differential diagnosis

• Eosinophilic pustular folliculitis • Candidiasis Treatment

• •

infection (Figure 7.6) Typically develops on legs and buttocks at sites of minor trauma, insect bites or excoriations Often occurs in the setting of malnutrition or poor hygiene Develops as an erythematous-based vesiculopustule with progression to a crusted ulcer with overlying adherent crust and elevated peripheral rim Slow healing with resultant scarring Can be associated with fever and lymphadenopathy

• Can improve with antibacterial cleansers and • • •

drying Topical antibiotics (e.g. mupirocin, clindamycin) Penicillinase-resistant systemic antibiotic may be needed if extensive Consider topical mupirocin ointment to the nares and perianal area of patient and household members if there are recurrent episodes

Prognosis

• Good, typically responds to therapy • Can be recurrent if poor hygiene or nasal carriage of S. aureus

• Unresponsiveness, severe or systemic involvement warrants evaluation for an underlying immunodeficiency References Duarte AM, Kramer J, Yusk JW, et al. Eosinophilic pustular folliculitis in infancy and childhood. Am J Dis Child 1993; 147: 197–200 Fleischer AB Jr, Ling M, Eichenfield L, et al. Tacrolimus Ointment Study Group. Tacrolimus ointment for the

Figure 7.6 Ecthyma – typical punched out crusted papules and ulcers

Mallory Chapter 07

27/1/05

1:49 pm

Page 99

Bacterial and spirochetal diseases

Pathogenesis

• Caused by Streptococcus pyogenes most commonly, or Staphylococcus aureus Diagnosis

• Clinical appearance • Can be confirmed with Gram stain and bacterial culture Differential diagnosis

• Anthrax • Cutaneous diphtheria • Ecthyma gangrenosum caused by Pseudomonas • •

aeruginosa Second-degree burn Cigarette burns from child abuse

Treatment

• Warm compresses • Local wound care with gentle cleansing and

Figure 7.7 Cellulitis – caused by streptococcus with marked erythema

debridement

• Topical and systemic antibiotics Prognosis

• Heals with scarring • Can rarely progress to cellulitis • Infection can rarely be associated with poststreptococcal glomerulonephritis References Gucluer H, Ergun T, Demircay Z. Ecthyma gangrenosum. Int J Dermatol 1999; 38: 299–302 Mancini AJ. Bacterial skin infections in children: the common and the not so common. Pediatr Ann 2001; 29: 26–35

• Typically blue to purple dusky erythema if caused by Haemophilus influenzae (usually on the face)

• Most commonly seen on the face, neck or extremities (Figures 7.8 and 7.9)

• Predisposing factors: immunosuppression and diabetes mellitus

• Typically accompanied by regional lymphadenopathy, fever and constitutional symptoms Pathogenesis

• Initiated by a break in the skin (e.g trauma or

Stulberg DL, Penrod MA, Blatny RA. Common bacterial skin infections. Am Fam Physician 2002; 66: 119–24 Travers JB, Norris DA, Leung DY. The keratinocyte as a target for staphylococcal bacterial toxins. Symposium Proceedings. J Invest Dermatol 2001; 6: 225–30

• •

Cellulitis Major points

• Acute infection and inflammation of the deep •

dermis and subcutaneous fat Presents with warm, red, tender, edematous plaques with ill-defined borders (Figure 7.7)

•

primary dermatosis) that serves as a portal of entry for the organism or preceded by upper respiratory infection, otitis media, sinusitis or tooth abscess Most common etiologic organisms: Streptococcus pyogenes or Staphylococcus aureus Preseptal or periorbital cellulitis (infection anterior to the orbital septum) is typically caused by S. pyogenes or S. aureus, but can also be caused by Streptococcus pneumoniae, especially in patients <5 years old Orbital cellulitis (infection behind the orbital septum) is most commonly caused by S. aureus, but can also be caused by S. pyogenes, S. pneumoniae, or H. influenzae

Mallory Chapter 07

100

27/1/05

1:49 pm

Page 100

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

• Blood cultures may be positive if there is associated bacteremia

• Computed tomography may be indicated if there is ocular involvement

• Lumbar puncture is indicated if the patient is <1 year old or if there are signs of toxicity or sepsis

Figure 7.8 Facial cellulitis – caused by Haemophilus influenzae with a violaceous hue

Figure 7.9 Orbital cellulitis with meningitis caused by Haemophilus influenzae

• Additional causative agents in neonates include •

group B streptococci and rarely E. coli Inoculation through animal bites: Pasteurella multocida from cats and dogs, Eikenella corrodens from humans

Diagnosis

• Clinical findings • Typically accompanied by leukocytosis • Gram stain and bacterial culture from lesional aspirate is positive in 25% of cases

• Histology reveals edema and intense neutrophilic inflammation in the dermis and fat; tissue Gram stain or bacterial culture is positive in the minority of cases

Differential diagnosis • Allergic contact dermatitis • Urticaria • Drug eruption • Cold panniculitis • Insect bite • Wells syndrome Treatment • Therapy is based on the age of the patient, location of the infection, and the immune status of the patient • Systemic antibiotics are required • Localized infection on the extremity can be treated with oral penicillinase-resistant antibiotic with outpatient follow-up in 24 hours to re-assess status of patient • Patients <5 years old should also be covered for S. pneumoniae • Intravenous antibiotics and hospitalization are warranted if refractory to oral antibiotics, or with facial involvement • Orbital cellulitis is an emergency and requires hospitalization, intravenous antibiotic therapy and evaluation by an ophthalmologist and otolaryngologist Prognosis • Good prognosis if diagnosed and appropriately treated early • Delay in diagnosis or treatment is associated with increased complications • Complications: subcutaneous abscess (Figure 7.10), necrotizing fasciitis, lymphangitis, thrombophlebitis, bacteremia, osteomyelitis, septic arthritis and systemic involvement of the heart valves, eyes or central nervous system (CNS); poststreptococcal glomerulonephritis can also occur References Capdevila O, Grau I, Vadillo M, et al. Bacteremic pneumococcal cellulitis compared with bacteremic cellulitis caused by Staphylococcus aureus and Streptococcus pyogenes. Eur J Clin Microbiol Infect Dis 2003; 22: 337–41

Mallory Chapter 07

27/1/05

1:49 pm

Page 101

Bacterial and spirochetal diseases

101

• Typically involves the face, scalp or leg; the lower • • •

extremity has replaced the face as the most common location of involvement Presents as a red, shiny, warm, indurated plaque with well-demarcated, advancing border (Figure 7.11) Can also be vesicular, bullous or petechial Fever and constitutional symptoms can precede the cutaneous eruption

Pathogenesis

• Bacteria enter the skin through some disruption of • • Figure 7.10

Abscess – caused by Staphylococcus aureus

Cohen PR, Kurzrock R. Community-acquired methicillinresistant Staphylococcus aureus skin infection: an emerging clinical problem. J Am Acad Dermatol 2004; 50: 277–80 Darmstadt GL. Bacterial skin infections in adolescents. Adolesc Med 2001; 12: 243–68

skin integrity leading to bacterial proliferation causing intense lymphatic inflammation Most commonly caused by infection with Streptococcus pyogenes Can also be due to infection with S. aureus, S. pneumoniae and group G, B, C, D streptococci

Diagnosis

• Clinical findings • ASO and anti-DNAase B titers may be elevated • Gram stain and bacterial culture of the portal of •

entry may identify the organism Histology reveals marked dermal and lymphatic edema with surrounding neutrophilic infiltrate

Eady EA, Cove JH. Staphylococcal resistance revisited: community-acquired methicillin resistant Staphylococcus aureus—an emerging problem for the management of skin and soft tissue infections. Curr Opin Infect Dis 2003; 16: 103–24 Fisher RG, Benjamin DK. Facial cellulitis in childhood: a changing spectrum. South Med J 2002; 95: 672–4 Givner LB. Periorbital versus orbital cellulitis. Pediatr Infect Dis J 2002; 21: 1157–8

Erysipelas Major points

• Acute, superficial cellulitis with infection and • •

inflammation in the dermis and upper subcutaneous tissue involving the superficial dermal lymphatics Infection follows inoculation through breaks in the skin (e.g. trauma, fissures, primary dermatosis such as intertrigo, tinea pedis or ulceration) Predisposing factors include lymphatic/venous obstruction, diabetes mellitus and nephrotic syndrome

Figure 7.11 Erysipelas – quickly-spreading erythema with pain caused by streptococcus

Mallory Chapter 07

102

27/1/05

1:49 pm

Page 102

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

• Latex particle agglutination for streptococcal

• May be preceded by impetigo with secondary infection of the perianal skin

antigens in skin biopsy specimens may be positive Differential diagnosis

• • • • • •

Systemic lupus erythematosus Dermatomyositis Relapsing polychondritis Acute tuberculoid leprosy Contact dermatitis Urticaria

Treatment

• Typically presents between 6 months and 10 years of age

• More common in males • Presents acutely with well-demarcated, bright red, • •

• Systemic penicillin or cephalexin for at least 10

•

days; can use erythromycin or clarithromycin if penicillin allergic

•

tender erythema surrounding the anus (Figure 7.12) Chronic infection leads to perianal fissures, crusting and psoriasiform plaques Associated with perianal itching and pain leading to painful defecation and fecal retention Rarely associated with constitutional symptoms Can precipitate guttate psoriasis in children

Prognosis

Pathogenesis

• May resolve with postinflammatory

• Local infection in the dermis caused by

• • •

hyperpigmentation Can rarely progress to bacteremia, thrombophlebitis, abscess formation, necrotizing fasciitis, gangrene or bony changes Post-streptococcal renal and cardiac involvement can occur Recurrence occurs in up to 20% of cases

Streptococcus pyogenes Diagnosis

• Perianal swab with positive bacterial culture for S. pyogenes or latex agglutination are confirmatory

• Histology is not well-described and is rarely required

References Bisno AL, Stevens DL. Streptococcal infections of skin and soft tissues. N Engl J Med 1996; 334: 240–5 Bonnetblanc JM, Bedane C. Erysipelas: recognition and management. Am J Clin Dermatol 2003; 4: 157–63 Dahl PR, Perniciaro C, Holmkvist KA, et al. Fulminant group A streptococcal necrotizing fasciitis: clinical and pathologic findings in 7 patients. J Am Acad Dermatol 2002; 47: 489–92 Eriksson B, Jorup-Ronstrom C, Karkkonen K, et al. Erysipelas: clinical and bacteriologic spectrum and serological aspects. Clin Infect Dis 1996; 23: 1091–8 Hedrick J. Acute bacterial skin infections in pediatric medicine: current issues in presentation and treatment. Paediatr Drugs 2003; 5 (Suppl 1): 35–46

Perianal streptococcal dermatitis Major points

• Superficial infection of the perianal skin • Associated with concurrent pharyngeal infection in >50% of cases

Figure 7.12 Perianal streptococcus with typical bright shiny erythema

Mallory Chapter 07

27/1/05

1:49 pm

Page 103

Bacterial and spirochetal diseases

103

Differential diagnosis

• • • • • • •

Psoriasis Intertrigo Candidiasis Seborrheic dermatitis Pinworm infestation Inflammatory bowel disease Sexual abuse

Treatment

• Oral penicillin or cephalexin for 10 days • Alternatives: oral erythromycin or clarithromycin • •

in penicillin-allergic patients Oral clindamycin has been successful in recurrent cases Mupirocin ointment topically along with systemic antibiotics have also been utilized to treat recurrences

Prognosis

• • •

Typically heals without sequelae Frequently recurrent Can lead to behavioral defecating difficulties if untreated

References

Figure 7.13 Blistering dactylitis caused by Staphylococcus aureus

• Can involve multiple digits • May be associated with fever and constitutional • •

symptoms Resolves with desquamation Can be associated with asymptomatic infection of the nasopharynx or conjunctiva

Pathogenesis

• Caused by a localized infection with group A streptococcus Can rarely be due to infection with group B streptococcus or S. aureus

Anonymous. Kindergarten-based outbreak of perianal group A streptococcal infection. Arch Dis Child 2003; 88: 811

•

Barzilai A, Choen HA. Isolation of group A streptococci from children with perianal cellulitis and from their siblings. Pediatr Infect Dis J 1998; 17: 358–60

Diagnosis

Mogielnicki NP, Schwartzman JD, Elliott JA. Perineal group A streptococcal disease in a pediatric practice. Pediatrics 2000; 106: 276–81

• Positive Gram stain and bacterial culture from blister fluid Differential diagnosis

Petersen JP, Kaltoft MS, Misfeldt JC, et al. Community outbreak of perianal group A streptococcal infection in Denmark. Pediatr Infect Dis J 2003; 22: 105–9

• Herpetic whitlow • Friction blisters

Velez A, Moreno JC. Febrile perianal streptococcal dermatitis. Pediatr Dermatol 1999; 16: 23–4

Treatment

Blistering distal dactylitis

• Incision and drainage • Systemic penicillinase-resistant antibiotics Prognosis

Major points

• Superficial blistering infection of the skin • Typically affects school-aged children • Presents with tense, tender, dusky, erythematousbased vesicles over the anterior fat pad of the fingers and toes (Figure 7.13)

• Resolves without sequelae • Can be recurrent References Barnett BO, Frieden IJ. Streptococcal skin diseases in children. Semin Dermatol 1992; 11: 3–10

Mallory Chapter 07

104

27/1/05

1:49 pm

Page 104

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Ney AC, English JC, Greer KE. Coexistent infections on a child’s distal phalanx: blistering dactylitis and herpetic whitlow. Cutis 2002; 69: 46–8 Woroszylski A, Duran C, Tamayo L, et al. Staphylococcal blistering dactylitis: report of two patients. Pediatr Dermatol 1996; 13: 292–3

Scarlet fever Synonym: scarlatina Major points

• Most common in children aged 2 to 10 years • Uncommon in children <2 years old because of maternal anti-exotoxin antibodies

• Typically begins with fever and sore throat • Exanthem follows after 1–2 days; typically starts

• • • •

on upper trunk and then generalizes with typical sandpaper texture and sparing of the palms and soles (Figures 7.14–7.16) Resolves with fine brawny desquamation Erythema is accentuated in the skin folds which can develop petechiae (Pastia’s lines) Facial flushing with circumoral pallor is common Enanthem with petechiae of the palate and uvula (Forschheimer spots), or bright red mucous

Figure 7.15 hand

Scarlet fever – typical sandpaper rash on the

Figure 7.16 Scarlet fever – desquamation 1 week later, typically concentrated on hands, feet and knees

Figure 7.14 of papillae

Scarlet fever – strawberry tongue with loss

membranes and a white-coated tongue with dilated papillae (white strawberry tongue) that sloughs producing a glistening red tongue with dilated papillae (red strawberry tongue)

Mallory Chapter 07

27/1/05

1:49 pm

Page 105

Bacterial and spirochetal diseases

• May have associated lymphadenopathy, fever and constitutional symptoms Pathogenesis

• Initiated by infection of the pharynx, skin, soft •

tissue or surgical sites with S. pyogenes or group C or G streptococci Clinical manifestations are caused by streptococcal pyrogenic exotoxins A, B or C produced by the infectious organism

Diagnosis

• Clinical presentation • Leukocytosis with increased number of bands and eosinophilia

• Rising antistreptolysin-O titer during the acute phase and declining titer with convalescence

• Rapid antigen detection may be positive, but can

105

• 80% of children develop lifelong antibodies to the exotoxins, eliminating the chance of recurrence References Bialecki C, Feder HM Jr, Grant-Kels JM. The six classic childhood exanthems: a review and update. J Am Acad Dermatol 1989; 21: 891–903 Espinosa de los Monteros LE, Bustos IM, Flores LV, AvilaFigueroa C. Outbreak of scarlet fever caused by an erythromycin-resistant Streptococcus pyogenes emm22 genotype strain in a day-care center. Pediatr Infect Dis J 2001; 20: 807–9 Shiseki M, Miwa K, Nemoto Y, et al. Comparison of pathogenic factors expressed by group A Streptococci isolated from patients with streptococcal toxic shock syndrome and scarlet fever. Microb Pathol 1999; 27: 243–52

be falsely negative early in the disease course

• Positive Gram stain and bacterial culture of the •

throat or wound is confirmatory Histology: dilated dermal blood and lymphatic vessels especially around hair follicles along with perivascular mononuclear cell infiltration

Differential diagnosis

• • • • • • • •

Viral exanthem Exanthematous drug eruption Kawasaki disease Toxic shock syndrome Staphylococcal scalded skin syndrome Measles Rubella Mononucleosis

Staphylococcal scalded skin syndrome Synonym: Ritter disease Major points

• Typically presents in children <5 years old • Initially begins with fever, malaise, irritability, skin tenderness and erythema

• Rapidly progresses to diffuse erythroderma that is accentuated in the flexural areas with characteristic perioral erythema (Figures 7.17–7.21)

Treatment

• Penicillin is the treatment of choice • Alternatives: erythromycin, clarithromycin, or azithromycin Prognosis

• Typically good with early treatment • Early complications can include otitis media, mastoiditis, pneumonia, bacteremia and osteomyelitis

• Rheumatic fever is a rare sequela; risk is reduced with early treatment

• Acute glomerulonephritis is a rare sequela and treatment of skin infection does not reduce its risk of development

Figure 7.17 Staphylococcal scalded skin syndrome – in a neonate; mother had a positive vaginal culture for Staphylococcus aureus

Mallory Chapter 07

106

27/1/05

1:49 pm

Page 106

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Figure 7.18 Staphylococcal scalded skin syndrome – typical painful erythema and crusting around the face

Figure 7.20 Staphylococcal scalded skin syndrome – painful erythema caused by exfoliative toxin

Figure 7.21 Staphylococcal scalded skin syndrome – localized to the diaper area

• Causative organisms produce epidermolytic toxins Figure 7.19 Staphylococcal scalded skin syndrome – typical crusting and scaling on the face

• Followed by diffuse exfoliation or bullous desquamation with perioral, perinasal and periocular crusting and radial fissuring and underlying shiny erythema Pathogenesis

• Primary colonization or infection with S. aureus phage group II (types 3A, 3B, 3C, 55, 71) of the nasopharynx, conjunctivae, cutaneous wounds, umbilical cord stump or urinary tract

•

A and B that are hematogenously spread Exotoxins have serine protease activity causing cleavage of desmosomal desmoglein 1 leading to a granular layer split and generalized sloughing of the superficial epidermis

Diagnosis

• Culture of the primary source (e.g. nasopharynx, conjunctivae or umbilical cord)

• Gram stain and culture of the exfoliated skin is negative for organisms unless secondarily infected

• Tzanck smear may reveal acantholytic cells • Histologic evaluation of the exfoliated skin in frozen sections reveals only stratum corneum

Mallory Chapter 07

27/1/05

1:49 pm

Page 107

Bacterial and spirochetal diseases

• Histology of skin reveals a subcorneal vesicle with the cleavage plane within the granular layer, a few acantholytic cells and limited inflammation Differential diagnosis

• • • • • •

Scarlet fever Kawasaki disease Toxic shock syndrome Bullous impetigo Bullous mastocytosis Drug-induced toxic epidermal necrolysis

Treatment

Meningococcemia Major points

• Severe, acute bacterial septicemia • Most common in infants of 6–12 months of age; 50% of all cases are <5 years of age

• Increased susceptibility with asplenia or complement deficiency

• Begins with prodrome of fever, headache and • •

• Gentle cleansing with antibacterial cleansers may prevent secondary infection

• Emollients, mupirocin, or topical silver sulfadiazine to denuded areas

•

• Oral penicillinase-resistant antibiotics in cases with limited cutaneous involvement

• Parenteral antibiotics are required if there is extensive cutaneous involvement or signs of systemic involvement

• Infection with Neisseria meningitidis; typically from

•

electrolyte imbalance

• Can develop pneumonia, endocarditis, cellulitis or bacteremia

• Mortality is less than 4% from sepsis

upper respiratory symptoms, followed by meningeal irritation and neurologic symptoms Progression is variable but typically rapid Cutaneous findings: acrocyanosis of the ears, nose, lips, legs and genitalia (often the first cutaneous finding), petechiae, purpura, confluent ecchymoses with central necrosis that can progress to gangrene (Figure 7.22) Chronic meningococcemia is rare in children; has been associated with complement deficiencies or prior meningococcal disease

Pathogenesis

Prognosis

• Typically heals without scarring in 14 days • May be scarring if secondarily infected • Extensive desquamation can lead to fluid and

•

nasopharyngeal carriage or inhalation of infected secretions with bacterial seeding of the blood and widespread dissemination Endotoxin-mediated procoagulation and thrombosis leads to infarction and necrosis in multiple organ systems with consumption of protein C, protein S and antithrombin III Serogroups A and C are associated with epidemics; serotype B is associated with sporadic cases and is most common in childhood cases

References Faden H. Neonatal staphylococcal skin infections. Pediatr Infect Dis J 2003; 22: 389 Ladhani S, Joannou CL. Difficulties in diagnosis and management of the staphylococcal scalded skin syndrome. Pediatr Infect Dis J 2000; 19: 819–21 Ladhani S, Joannou CL, Lochrie DP, et al. Clinical, microbial, and biochemical aspects of the exfoliative toxins causing staphylococcal scalded skin syndrome. Clin Microbiol Rev 1999; 12: 224–42 Patel GK, Finlay AY. Staphylococcal scalded skin syndrome: diagnosis and management. Am J Clin Dermatol 2003; 4: 165–75 Sarkar R, Sharma RC, Koranne RV, Sardana K. Erythroderma in children: a clinico-etiological study. J Dermatol 1999; 26: 507–11

107

Figure 7.22 Meningococcemia – angulated irregular necrotic lesions

Mallory Chapter 07

108

27/1/05

1:49 pm

Page 108

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Diagnosis

• Complications occur in 11–19% of cases and include gangrene with skin necrosis, septic arthritis, myocarditis, pneumonia, renal failure, adrenal involvement (Waterhouse–Friderichsen syndrome), neurologic involvement and seizures

• Clinical findings of an acutely ill child with fever, • • • •

•

typical skin lesions and signs of sepsis Cultures of blood and cerebrospinal fluid (CSF) which reveal Gram-negative diplococci Latex agglutination of the CSF is the most rapid diagnostic test Gram stain of aspiration fluid or scraping from a petechial lesion occasionally reveals organisms Histology reveals thrombi in the dermal vessels with acute vasculitis and perivascular hemorrhagic necrosis; Gram-negative diplococci may be identified within or around vessels Cultures of skin are positive in up to 85% of cases; requires chocolate agar or Thayer–Martin medium with specific growth requirements

Differential diagnosis

• Gonococcemia • Bacteremia with Haemophilus influenzae or • • • • •

Streptococcus pneumoniae Henoch–Schönlein purpura Leukocytoclastic vasculitis Endocarditis Rickettsial infections Rheumatic fever

References Darmstadt GL. Acute infectious purpura fulminans: pathogenesis and medical management. Pediatr Dermatol 1998; 15: 169–83 Domingo P, Muniz-Diaz E, Baraldes MA, et al. Associations between Fc gamma receptor IIA polymorphisms and the risk and prognosis of meningococcal disease. Am J Med 2002; 112: 19–25 Malley R, Huskins WC, Kuppermann N. Multivariable predictive models for adverse outcome of invasive meningococcal disease in children. J Pediatr 1996; 129: 702–10 Ploysangam T, Sheth AP. Chronic meningococcemia in childhood: case report and review of the literature. Pediatr Dermatol 1996; 13: 483–7 Powars D, Larsen R, Johnson J, et al. Epidemic meningococcemia and purpura fulminans with induced protein C deficiency. Clin Infect Dis 1993; 17: 254–61

Pitted keratolysis

Treatment

• Broad antibacterial coverage: ampicillin and

• • •

cefotaxime or ceftriaxone with or without doxycycline until culture and sensitivity are available Supportive and intensive care Management of sepsis and other complications Polyvalent polysaccharide vaccines for serogroups A, C, Y and W-135 are available and recommended in those who are asplenic, those with complement deficiencies and those in closed communities (e.g. dormitories and the military); vaccination is 90% effective

Major points

• Bacterial infection of the stratum corneum of the weight-bearing plantar surfaces

• Rarely affects palmar surfaces • Malodorous; occasionally painful but typically asymptomatic

• Presents with shallow, discrete pits or •

erythematous plaques with shallow ulcerations (Figure 7.23) Associated with humid climates, hyperhidrosis, extended immersion in water or walking barefoot in wet environments

Prognosis

Pathogenesis

• Fatal if not diagnosed and/or treated appropriately • Morbidity and mortality increase with increasing

• Multiple causative organisms have been identified

• •

purpuric lesions Fulminant, rapidly progressive disease is associated with >50% mortality 90% recovery rate if treated in the early stages of disease

•

and may exist synergistically: Corynebacterium, Micrococcus, Dermatophilus, Actinomyces or Kytococcus Extracellular enzymes classified as serine proteases are produced in cultures and have been shown to degrade human keratin

Mallory Chapter 07

27/1/05

1:49 pm

Page 109

Bacterial and spirochetal diseases

109

Cat scratch disease Synonym: cat scratch fever, benign lymphoreticulosis Major points

• Benign, self-limited infection • > 90% of patients have a history of exposure to a kitten

• Inoculation site characterized by a maculopapule,

• Figure 7.23 Pitted keratolysis with typical multiple shallow craters on the feet

Diagnosis

• Clinical appearance

• • •

Differential diagnosis

• Tinea pedis • Plantar warts • Dyshidrotic eczema

•

Treatment

• Topical antibiotics including erythromycin, • • • •

clindamycin or mupirocin Castellani’s paint Aluminum chloride Topical benzoyl peroxide Dakin solution (diluted bleach water 0.25%)

Pathogenesis

• Caused by the pleomorphic, Gram-negative bacillus Bartonella henselae

• Domestic cats, especially kittens <6 months of age,

Prognosis

• Can be recurrent but responds rapidly to treatment

vesiculopapule or pustule, develops 3–10 days after exposure; most common on the upper extremity, head or neck Primary inoculation occurs in the eye in 7% of cases leading to conjunctivitis or ocular granuloma Regional lymphadenopathy is the hallmark of the disease and develops 3–50 days following the primary inoculation Other rare associated cutaneous findings: morbilliform eruption, petechiae, urticaria, erythema multiforme and erythema nodosum May be accompanied by constitutional symptoms: fever, malaise, headache, anorexia, sore throat and nausea Systemic involvement in 4% of patients, typically those who are immunocompromised: thrombocytopenic purpura, pneumonitis, hypercalcemia, endocarditis, CNS involvement, hepatitis and hepatosplenic abscesses

•

are the reservoir; fleas are implicated in the transmission between animals; rarely, dogs have been associated with infection Transmission to humans by cutaneous inoculation through a scratch, bite or lick of an infected animal

References

Diagnosis

Longshaw CM, Wright JD, Farrell AM, Holland KT. Kytococcus sedentarius, the organism associated with pitted keratolysis, produces two keratin-degrading enzymes. J Appl Microbiol 2002; 93: 810–16

• Clinical history and examination • Serologic tests for B. henselae, but may be falsely positive

• Biopsy of the skin or lymph node reveals areas of

Shah AS, Kamino H, Prose NS. Painful, plaque-like pitted keratolysis occurring in childhood. Pediatr Dermatol 1992; 9: 251 Takama H, Tamada Y, Yano K, et al. Pitted keratolysis: clinical manifestations in 53 cases. Br J Dermatol 1997; 137: 282–5

•

necrobiosis in the dermis characterized by a central acellular zone surrounded by palisading histiocytes and a few giant cells with a surrounding zone of lymphoid cells Small bacilli seen with Warthin–Starry silver stain from the skin or lymph node

Mallory Chapter 07

110

27/1/05

1:49 pm

Page 110

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

• Culture of skin or blood is difficult without specific growth requirements Differential diagnosis

• Bacterial lymphadenitis • Viral lymphadenopathy (e.g. HIV, Epstein–Barr • • • • • •

virus, cytomegalovirus) Toxoplasmosis Histoplasmosis Atypical mycobacteria Sporotrichosis Sarcoidosis Lymphoreticular malignancy

Treatment • Not required as skin lesions resolve spontaneously over 2–4 weeks and lymphadenopathy typically resolves in 4 months • Multiple antibiotics have been used and are reportedly effective in speeding recovery if used early in the disease course: azithromycin, rifampin, gentamicin or trimethoprim/sulfamethoxazole • Warm compresses • Needle aspiration or incision and drainage of lymph nodes may relieve symptoms, but can lead to a chronic draining fistula • Lymph node excision may be undertaken for persistent lymphadenopathy or to aid in diagnosis • Disease in the reservoir animal is also self-limited and does not require specific treatment or disposal

Murakami K, Tsukahara M, Tsuneoka H, et al. Cat scratch disease: analysis of 130 seropositive cases. J Infect Chemother 2002; 8: 349–52 Somech R, Spirer Z. Uncommon presentation of some common pediatric diseases. Adv Pediatr 2003; 50: 269–304

Atypical mycobacterial diseases Major points

• Nontuberculous acid-fast organisms that •

Prognosis

• Patients with normal immune function have an • •

excellent prognosis; disease resolves spontaneously over 1–3 months Associated with rare neurological sequelae Immunocompromised patients have a higher rate of systemic involvement and a more aggressive course (bacillary angiomatosis) which can lead to disseminated intravascular coagulation, shock and death

• •

References Chian CA, Arrese JE, Pierard GE. Skin manifestations of Bartonella infections. Int J Dermatol 2002; 41: 461–6 Metzkor-Cotter E, Kletter Y, Avidor B, et al. Long-term serological analysis and clinical follow-up of patients with cat scratch disease. Clin Infect Dis 2003; 37: 1149–54

•

encompass a group of ~ 30 pathogens found in soil, animals, food, milk and water Genus Mycobacterium classified into four groups by Runyon: 1. Group I a. Photochromogens b. Produces yellow pigment on Lowenstein–Jensen medium at 37°C with light exposure c. Includes M. kansasii, M. marinum, M. simiae 2. Group II a. Scotochromogens b. Produces yellow-orange pigment with dark exposure c. Includes M. scrofulaceum, M. szulgai, M. gordonae, M. xenopi 3. Group III a. Nonphotochromogens b. Does not produce pigment c. Includes M. avium-intracellulare, M. haemophilum, M. ulcerans, M. malmoense 4. Group IV a. Rapid growers; growth within 3–5 days in culture b. Does not produce pigment c. Includes M. fortuitum and M. chelonei Low pathogenicity unless traumatic exposure or underlying immunocompromised state Most common cutaneous atypical mycobacterial infection is caused by M. marinum (formerly known as M. balnei) acquired from a swimming pool, aquarium or fish tank Cutaneous lesions: pink, red, purple or brown papules and nodules that can spread to adjacent surrounding skin and develop ulceration or crusting (Figures 7.24 and 7.25)

Mallory Chapter 07

27/1/05

1:49 pm

Page 111

Bacterial and spirochetal diseases

111

Pathogenesis

• M. marinum is an aerobic acid-fast bacterium that

•

inhabits warm water (open seas, natural pools, swimming pools or aquariums) and can affect fish, especially tropical fish, aquatic animals and humans Causative organism is inoculated into the skin either traumatically or through abrasions while working or playing in an affected environment

Diagnosis

• Consistent history and physical examination • Intradermal testing with purified protein derivative • • Figure 7.24 Atypical mycobacterial infection – fish tank granuloma caused by Mycobacterium marinum

•

(PPD) may be positive and can be supportive Tissue culture for M. marinum can be positive in up to 70% of cases with proper growth requirements Histologic features depend on the stage of development: 1. <2–3 months: nonspecific mixed inflammation 2. ~4 months: small epithelioid granulomas with a few multinucleated giant cells 3. >6 months: typical tuberculoid granulomas which may have central necrosis with or without epidermal hyperkeratosis and papillomatosis Acid-fast organisms may be identified by Fite stain of skin biopsy specimens from early lesions

Differential diagnosis • Bacterial abscess (e.g. S. aureus) • Verruca vulgaris • Cutaneous tuberculosis • Sarcoidosis • Foreign-body granuloma • Sporotrichosis • Blastomycosis • Leishmaniasis

Figure 7.25 Atypical mycobacterial infection – abscess caused by Mycobacterium intracellulare

• Lesions are most commonly found on the extremities, especially the fingers, knees, elbows and feet, and appear ~3 weeks after exposure

Treatment • Multiple systemic antibiotics: tetracycline, minocycline, doxycycline, trimethoprim–sulfamethoxazole, clarithromycin and rifampin effective if given for at least 8 weeks • Surgical excision can be used if unresponsive to antibiotics • Proper cleaning of the reservoir (e.g. fish tank) should be undertaken if feasible Prognosis

• Resolves with scarring

Mallory Chapter 07

112

27/1/05

1:49 pm

Page 112

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

• Can resolve without treatment in 1–2 years but • •

may persist for over a decade without treatment Can produce secondary draining sinuses, synovitis, bursitis, arthritis or osteomyelitis Rare cases of fatal disseminated disease

References Ang P, Rattana-Apiromyakij N, Goh CL. Retrospective study of Mycobacterium marinum skin infections. Int J Dermatol 2000; 9: 343–7 Aubry A, Chosidow O, Caumes E, et al. Sixty-three cases of Mycobacterium marinum infection: clinical features, treatment, and antibiotic susceptibility of causative isolates. Arch Intern Med 2002; 162: 1746–52 Bartralot R, Pujol RM, Garcia-Patos V, et al. Cutaneous infections due to nontuberculous mycobacteria: histopathological review of 28 cases. Comparative study between lesions observed in immunosuppressed patients and normal hosts. J Cutan Pathol 2000; 27: 124–9 Pumberger W, Hallwirth U, Pawlowsky J, Pomberger G. Cervicofacial lymphadenitis due to atypical mycobacteria: a surgical disease. Pediatr Dermatol 2004; 21: 24–9 Speight EL, Williams HC. Fish tank granuloma in a 14month-old girl. Pediatr Dermatol 1997; 14: 209–12

• Tuberculosis Major points

• Classification of cutaneous lesions is based on route of transmission and immunologic response

• Exogenous source 1. Previously uninfected: primary inoculation tuberculosis or primary tuberculosis complex a. Typically occurs in a wound: abrasion, insect bite, ear piercing, circumcision site b. Lesion develops 2–4 weeks after inoculation c. Presents as a red-brown papule with ‘apple jelly’ translucence on diascopy that may ulcerate or crust d. Associated with regional lymphadenopathy or lymphangitis 2. Previously infected: reinfection tuberculosis or tuberculosis verrucosa cutis a. Very rare in children b. Presents with large verrucous papule or plaque at the site of re-inoculation c. Due to strong immunity and hypersensitivity against M. tuberculosis

3. Bacillus Calmette–Guérin (BCG) vaccination a. Site of injection develops an enlarging papule which ulcerates and then heals spontaneously over 2–4 weeks b. May have associated lymphadenopathy c. Rarely develops a local abscess, scrofuloderma, generalized eruption or lupus vulgaris 4. Scrofuloderma a. Caused by direct extension of the organism to the skin overlying an infected lymph node or bone b. Lesions are most common over the cervical lymph nodes c. May ulcerate or form draining sinuses d. Heals with characteristic cord-like scar 5. Tuberculosis cutis orificialis a. Autoinoculation of the mucous membranes b. Occurs at the mouth, nose, anus, urinary meatus or genitalia from infected secretions or visceral involvement c. Presents as painful punched-out ulcers with undermined edges d. Indicates failing resistance to disease Hematogenous spread 1. Lupus vulgaris a. Chronic, slowly progressive cutaneous form b. Associated with strong immunity to M. tuberculosis c. Presents with atrophic red-brown plaques on the head and neck in ~90% of cases d. Lesions can ulcerate and cause ectropion or eclabium 2. Miliary or disseminated tuberculosis a. Presents with generalized macules, papules, pustules, nodules or purpura associated with fulminant pulmonary or meningeal involvement b. Systemically ill with poor prognosis 3. Metastatic tuberculosis a. Occurs in patients with decreased immunity or malnutrition b. Presents with ulcerated nodules and sinuses 4. Congenital tuberculosis a. Intrauterine infection through placental circulation b. Presents at 4–8 weeks of age with discrete crusted papules on the face, trunk and extremities

Mallory Chapter 07

27/1/05

1:49 pm

Page 113

Bacterial and spirochetal diseases

• Tuberculids – cutaneous reaction related to an immunologic response to the organism; associated with an underlying focus of distant infection with hematogenous spread 1. Papulonecrotic tuberculid a. Most commonly seen in children b. Presents with successive crops of dusky-red papules with or without central necrosis on the extensor extremities which heal spontaneously with varioliform scars c. Typically have infected lymph nodes 2. Lichen scrofulosorum a. Occurs in children and young adults b. Presents with clusters of lichenoid papules and discoid plaques on the trunk c. Resolves spontaneously and can recur d. Associated with infection of the bone or lymph nodes 3. Erythema induratum (Bazin disease) a. Typically seen in girls and young women b. Presents with ulcerated nodules on the posterior calves with underlying panniculitis and vasculitis Pathogenesis

• Caused by infection with Mycobacterium tuberculosis • Can be spread by exogenous or endogenous routes Diagnosis

• Positive tuberculin test with PPD • Histology: variety of inflammatory reaction

• • •

patterns including nonspecific acute inflammation, epithelial hyperplasia, non-necrotic granulomas and necrotic granulomas Fite stain of skin biopsy specimen may reveal acidfast bacilli Culture of tissue Polymerase chain reaction for M. tuberculosis DNA in tissue

113

Treatment

• Isoniazid (10–15 mg/kg per day) and rifampin (10–20 mg/kg per day) for 9 months

• Pyrazinamide, ethambutol or streptomycin is added for the initial 2 months of therapy if drug resistance is a consideration (Hispanic or Asian population), or if the duration of therapy is limited to 6 months Prognosis

• Variable course and prognosis depending on •

classification and systemic involvement Cutaneous tuberculosis typically heals with scarring

References Antaya RJ, Gardner ES, Bettencourt MS, et al. Cutaneous complications of BCG vaccination in infants with immune disorders: two cases and a review of the literature. Pediatr Dermatol 2001; 18: 205–9 Caksen H, Arslan S, Oner AF, et al. Multiple metastatic tuberculous abscesses in a severely malnourished infant. Pediatr Dermatol 2002; 19: 90–1 Jacinto SS, Lopez de Leon P, Mendoza C. Cutaneous tuberculosis and other skin diseases in hospitalized, treated pulmonary tuberculosis patients in the Philippines. Cutis 2003; 72: 373–6 Kivanc-Altunay I, Baysal Z, Ekmekci TR, Koslu A. Incidence of cutaneous tuberculosis in patients with organ tuberculosis. Int J Dermatol 2003; 42: 197–200 Tan H, Karakuzu A, Arik A. Scrofuloderma after BCG vaccination. Pediatr Dermatol 2002; 19: 323–5 Thami GP, Kaur S, Kanwar AJ, Mohan H. Lichen scrofulosorum: a rare manifestation of a common disease. Pediatr Dermatol 2002; 19: 122–6

Leprosy Synonym: Hansen disease

Differential diagnosis

Major points

• • • • • • • •

• Chronic infection of the skin, nasal mucosa, nerves

Cat scratch disease Atypical mycobacterial infection Syphilis Leprosy Sporotrichosis Tularemia Sarcoidosis Cutaneous lymphoma

and eyes

• Clinical manifestations and disease course is •

dependent on the immune response of the host to Mycobacterium leprae Endemic in India, Southeast Asia, China, Central and East Africa, Central and South America, Louisiana, Hawaii and California

Mallory Chapter 07

114

27/1/05

1:49 pm

Page 114

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

• Incubation period ~5 years • Disease classification

• •

1. Tuberculoid leprosy a. <3 skin lesions which are anesthetic and anhidrotic b. Highest immune resistance and reactivity c. Organisms are not identified in tissues (paucibacillary) d. Nerve involvement e. Strong positive reaction to the lepromin skin test 2. Borderline tuberculoid leprosy a. Few (3–10) skin lesions b. May have enlarged nerves with mild motor impairment 3. Borderline borderline leprosy a. Indeterminate type b. Multiple asymmetric annular plaques c. Host resistance is unstable d. Organisms may be identified 4. Borderline lepromatous leprosy a. Skin lesions are symmetrical and numerous b. Nerve involvement is not prominent 5. Lepromatous leprosy a. Diffuse skin infiltration with characteristic leonine facies and loss of the eyebrows b. No host resistance or reactivity c. Organisms are numerous (multibacillary) d. No reaction to lepromin skin test Childhood disease typically presents within the tuberculoid or indeterminate spectrum with hypopigmented macules (Figure 7.26) Children can also present with nerve involvement alone causing thickened peripheral nerves with sensory loss (e.g. temperature is lost first, followed by light touch and pinprick)

Figure 7.26 Vietnam

Leprosy – anesthetic plaque in a patient from

Diagnosis

• Slit skin smears stained with Ziehl–Neelsen reveals organisms

• Organisms cannot be cultured in vitro • Histology varies depending on disease state 1. Tuberculoid leprosy: noncaseating granulomas of epithelioid cells, Langhans giant cells and lymphocytes throughout the dermis; granulomas may extend along nerves; acid-fast bacilli are identified by Fite stain in <50% of cases 2. Lepromatous leprosy: collections and sheets of histiocytes with a few lymphocytes; foamy macrophages (Virchow cells); Grenz zone; organisms are numerous within macrophages

Pathogenesis

Differential diagnosis

• Infection caused by acid-fast bacillus

• • • • • • • • • •

Mycobacterium leprae

• Low infectivity • Transmission is not fully known although droplet • •

infection via an upper respiratory route is suspected Genetic predisposition may play a role in disease development Animal reservoirs: armadillos, monkeys and chimpanzees

Pityriasis alba Tinea corporis Tinea versicolor Nummular eczema Granuloma annulare Vitiligo Sarcoidosis Syphilis Tuberculosis Lupus erythematosus

Mallory Chapter 07

27/1/05

1:50 pm

Page 115

Bacterial and spirochetal diseases

Treatment

• Dapsone (1 mg/kg per day) for 1 year in all types • Rifampin (10 mg/kg per day) should be added for • •

6 months in cases of tuberculoid, borderline tuberculoid or indeterminate disease Clofazimine (1 mg/kg per day) should be added for 2 years in cases of borderline, borderline lepromatous and lepromatous disease Type I reaction (downgrading or reversal reaction that represents an enhanced cell-mediated response to M. leprae) and type II reactions (erythema nodosum leprosum due to circulating immune complexes with potential multisystem involvement) are treated with systemic corticosteroids

• Often associated with other sexually transmitted diseases including HIV

• Congenital syphilis (See Chapter 2) • Primary stage

•

Prognosis

• Chronic disease with unpredictable course unless treated

• Reactional phenomenon can occur and leads to •

tissue damage, especially nerve injury with persistent neurologic sequlae 50% of patients will experience a reaction after starting antibiotic therapy

References Boggild AK, Keystone JS, Kain KC. Leprosy: a primer for Canadian physicians. Can Med Assoc J 2004; 170: 71–8

•

1. Initial lesion at the site of inoculation (chancre) 2. Presents as a painless ulcer that heals over 1–6 weeks 3. Typically found on the genitalia, but can also be seen on the lips, tongue, areola or hands (Figure 7.27) Secondary stage 1. Begins 2–10 weeks after healing of the primary chancre 2. Results from hematogenous spread 3. Constitutional signs: generalized lymphadenopathy, hepatosplenomegaly 4. Classic findings: diffuse papulosquamous eruption, specifically involving the palms and soles (Figures 7.28 and 7.29) 5. Other skin findings: condyloma lata, (Figure 7.30) split papules, moth-eaten alopecia and mucous patches Subclinical, latent phase 1. No signs or symptoms except for reactive serology 2. May last 1–40 years

Cosma CL, Sherman DR, Ramakrishnan L. The secret lives of the pathogenic mycobacteria. Ann Rev Microbiol 2003; 57: 641–76 Fakhouri R, Sotto MN, Manini MI, Margarido LC. Nodular leprosy of childhood and tuberculoid leprosy: a comparative, morphologic, immunopathologic and quantitative study of skin tissue reaction. Int J Lepr Other Mycobact Dis 2003; 71: 218–26 Jayalakshmi P, Tong M, Sing S, Ganesapillai T. Leprosy in children. Int J Lepr Other Mycobact Dis 1997; 65: 95–7 Ramos-e-Silva M, Rebello PF. Leprosy. Recognition and treatment. Am J Clin Dermatol 2001; 2: 203–11 Rook GA, Martinelli R, Brunet LR. Innate immune responses to mycobacteria and the downregulation of atopic responses. Curr Opin Allergy Clin Immunol 2003; 3: 337–42

Syphilis Synonym: lues Major points

• Incubation period: 9–90 days after initial exposure

115

Figure 7.27

Syphilitic chancre in an adult

Mallory Chapter 07

116

27/1/05

1:50 pm

Page 116

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Figure 7.28 congenitally

Secondary syphilis – age 6 weeks acquired

Figure 7.30 Secondary syphilis – condylomata lata (previously published in Pediatric Dermatology 1989; 6: 51–2, with permission)

• Sexually transmitted disease with penetration of •

the organism through mucous membranes or abrasions in the stratum corneum Nonsexual transmission from an infected parent to a child is rare; sexual abuse should be assumed until proven otherwise

Diagnosis

• Nontreponemal antigen tests include the rapid

Figure 7.29 Secondary syphilis – typical copper-colored palmar lesions

•

• Tertiary or late stage 1. Develops in one-third of untreated cases; rare in children 2. Typically presents 3–5 years after the initial infection 3. Presents with nodular lesion or gummas 4. Can involve the bones, CNS and cardiovascular systems Pathogenesis

• Caused by the spirochete Treponema pallidum

• •

plasma reagent (RPR) and Venereal Disease Research Laboratory (VDRL) test; typically positive within 5–6 weeks of infection; negative with therapy and in late syphilis Treponemal antigen tests are more sensitive and specific and include the microhemagglutination assay for T. pallidum (MHA-TP) or fluorescent treponemal antibody absorption (FTA-ABS) test; typically positive at 2–3 weeks after infection and remains positive for life Dark field examination and direct fluorescent antibody tests on lesional exudate or tissue Histology varies with stage of disease 1. Primary syphilis: acanthosis, ulcer infiltrated by lymphocytes and plasma cells; Warthin–Starry silver stain may reveal the spirochete at the dermal–epidermal junction or around vessels

Mallory Chapter 07

27/1/05

1:50 pm

Page 117

Bacterial and spirochetal diseases

2. Secondary syphilis: epidermal psoriasiform hyperplasia, spongiosis, vacuolar alteration, papillary dermal edema, and a lymphohistiocytic perivascular and periadnexal infiltrate with variable number of plasma cells; spirochetes can be seen in one-third of cases with silver staining 3. Tertiary syphilis: granulomatous inflammation with central necrosis and peripheral infiltrate of lymphocytes, macrophages and plasma cells; spirochetes are typically not present Differential diagnosis

• Primary: herpes simplex, chancroid, granuloma • •

inguinale Secondary: pityriasis rosea, psoriasis, drug eruptions, lichen planus, sarcoidosis Tertiary: leprosy, tuberculosis, sarcoidosis

Treatment

• Parenteral penicillin G is the treatment of choice

•

in all stages of syphilis, and is the only antibiotic with documented efficacy in pregnancy and in neurosyphilis 1. Primary and secondary: benzathine penicillin G 50 000 units/kg intramuscularly up to 2.4 million units, in a single dose 2. Latent: benzathine penicillin G 50 000 units/kg IM up to 2.4 million units with three doses at 1-week intervals 3. Neurosyphilis: aqueous crystalline penicillin G 200 000–300 000 units/kg per day intravenously for 10 days Penicillin-allergic patients can be treated with:

117

1. Doxycycline 100 mg twice a day for 2–4 weeks depending on the duration of infection; associated with discoloration of teeth if <8 years old 2. Tetracycline 500 mg four times a day for 2–4 weeks depending on the duration of infection; associated with discoloration of teeth if <8 years old 3. Erythromycin 500 mg four times a day for 2 weeks Prognosis

• Variable depending on the stage of disease • Untreated, the disease is slowly progressive and fatal with CNS and cardiac involvement References Burstein GR. Workowski KA. Sexually transmitted diseases treatment guidelines. Curr Opin Pediatr 2003; 15: 391–7 Golden MR. Marra CM. Holmes KK. Update on syphilis: resurgence of an old problem. J Am Med Assoc 2003; 290: 1510–14 Hollier LM, Cox SM. Syphilis. Semin Perinatol 1998; 22: 323–31 Ozturk F, Gurses N, Sancak R, et al. Acquired secondary syphilis in a 6-year-old girl with no history of sexual abuse. Cutis 1998; 62: 150–1 Pandhi D, Kumar S, Reddy BS. Sexually transmitted diseases in children. J Dermatol 2003; 30: 314–20 Rubins S, Janniger CK, Schwartz RA. Congenital and acquired early childhood syphilis. Cutis 1995; 56: 132–6 Vural M, Ilikkan B, Polat E, et al. A premature newborn with vesiculobullous skin lesions. Eur J Pediatr 2003; 162: 197–9

Mallory Chapter 07

27/1/05

1:50 pm

Page 118

Mallory Chapter 08

27/1/05

2:00 pm

Page 119

8 VIRAL AND RICKETTSIAL DISEASES

GENERAL

• Exanthems

• •

1. Morbilliform (measles-like) 2. Petechial 3. Scarlatiniform (scarlet-fever like) 4. Vesiculobullous 5. Papulonodular 6. Asymmetric periflexural exanthem Enanthems (oral lesions) 1. Nonspecific 2. Specific Epidermal growths 1. Verrucous 2. Papular

•

erythematous macules and papules which can become petechial (Figure 8.2) Complications (more common in young children, or those malnourished or chronically ill): 1. Bacterial otitis media 2. Bacterial pneumonia 3. Encephalitis 4. Myocarditis/pericarditis 5. Thrombocytopenia 6. Hepatitis 7. Acute glomerulonephritis Atypical measles 1. Usually in patients who have had killed measles vaccine, or failed vaccination

Measles (Rubeola) Major points

• Classic measles: prodrome of fever, malaise and • • • • • •

•

upper respiratory symptoms followed by high fever, cough, coryza (rhinitis), conjunctivitis Incubation period 9–14 days Cough ‘barking’, sounds like croup Coryza (runny nose) Conjunctivitis with photophobia Lymphadenopathy, especially cervical Koplik spots (enanthem): 1-mm white spots (‘grains of sand’) on intensely erythematous background, usually on buccal mucosa (Figure 8.1) Characteristic rash begins on face as blotchy erythema, progresses downward to involve trunk and extremities with multiple discrete very

Figure 8.1 Rubeola – Koplik spots: tiny white papules on oral mucosa

Mallory Chapter 08

120

27/1/05

2:00 pm

Page 120

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

• Drug eruptions • Vasculitis Treatment

• • • •

• •

Isolation of patient; highly contagious Symptomatic treatment Antibiotics for secondary infection Immune globulin 0.25 ml/kg of body weight, intramuscularly; immunocompromised children 0.5 ml/kg (maximum 15 ml) given within 6 days attenuates the infection in exposed persons Immunization with live attenuated vaccine reduces the incidence of measles in contacts Vitamin A supplementation 200 000 IU orally for age >1 year; 100 000 IU for 6 months to 1 year. Repeat next day and 4 weeks later if there is ophthalmologic evidence of vitamin deficiency

Prognosis Figure 8.2

Rubeola – intense morbilliform eruption

• Lifelong immunity follows natural measles infection or immunization

2. Symptoms: high fever, abdominal pain, pneumonitis, acral petechiae, vesicles, vesiculopustular eruption, vasculitis Pathogenesis

• Measles virus replicates in nasopharynx before disseminating

• Lymphoid hyperplasia occurs with wide distribution of virus-infected cells

• Rash is result of viremia with lodging of antigen • •

and virus in the capillaries, followed by cellmediated response Koplik spots contain viral nucleocapsids Lifelong immunity follows natural measles infection

Diagnosis

• Characteristic rash and symptoms • Positive serologic test for measles IgM antibody • Viral isolation from nasopharyngeal secretions, • •

blood or urine Rise in measles IgG antibody, acute and convalescent sera at first encounter and after 2–4 weeks Viral antigen detected by immunofluorescence in cell smears from nasal aspirates early in illness

• High morbidity and mortality rate in malnourished or immunosuppressed patients References Bialecki C, Feder HM, Grant-Kels JM. The six classic childhood exanthems: a review and update. J Am Acad Dermatol 1989; 21: 891–903 Butler JC, Havens PL, Sowell AL, et al. Measles severity and serum retinal (vitamin A) concentration among children in the United States. Pediatrics 1993; 91: 1176–81 Frieden IJ, Resnick SD. Childhood exanthems. Old and new. Pediatr Clin North Am 1991; 38: 859–87 Rall GF. Measles virus 1998–2002: progress and controversy. Annu Rev Microbiol 2003; 57: 343–67 Report of the Committee on Infectious Diseases. Red Book, 26th edn. American Academy of Pediatrics: Elk Grove Village, IL, 2003: 419–29 Somech R, Spirer Z. Uncommon presentation of some common pediatric diseases. Adv Pediatr 2003; 50: 269–304 Venczel L, Rota J, Dietz V, et al. The Measles Laboratory Network in the region of the Americas. J Infect Dis 2003; 187 (Suppl 1): S140–5

Rubella

Differential diagnosis

Major points

•

• Incubation period ~18 days (14–21 days)

Rocky Mountain spotted fever

Mallory Chapter 08

27/1/05

2:00 pm

Page 121

Viral and rickettsial diseases

• Prodrome may be mild or negligible, lasts 1–5 • • • • • • • •

•

days, with fever up to 39°C, headache, malaise, sore throat, conjunctivitis 50% of infections are asymptomatic Rash may be absent in 40% of cases Enanthem (Forschheimer sign) present in 20%; consists of red macules or petechiae on soft palate Lymph node enlargement begins in prodrome in suboccipital, postauricular and cervical glands Rash appears on face and spreads downwards to trunk and limbs, made up of pink macules, which become confluent; clears quickly in 3–4 days Complications few in childhood Complications in adults and older children: monoarticular arthritis, which lasts ~1 month; rarely, purpura or encephalitis Rubella in pregnancy 1. Fetal damage in 90% of cases in first 11 weeks of pregnancy (rubella embryopathy) 2. Between 12 and 16 weeks’ gestation, risk of deafness is 25% 3. Major defects: deafness, mental retardation, heart damage, eye damage (cataracts, glaucoma), microcephaly, growth retardation Neonatal period 1. Thrombocytopenic purpura which clears spontaneously in several weeks 2. Jaundice (rubella hepatitis) 3. Bone lesions 4. Recurrent exanthem which may recur during first 5 years 5. ‘Blueberry muffin’ appearance with blue/purple macules, papules in a generalized pattern due to extramedullary hematopoiesis Infectivity 1. Patients infective for 2 days before rash and 7 days after rash begins 2. In congenital rubella, virus can be shed up to 5–6 years Epidemics occur in spring, mainly in older children and adults

Pathogenesis

• Rubella virus member of Rubivirus genus, RNA virus, Togaviridae

• Virus spreads through direct or droplet contact from nasopharyngeal secretions

• Rash may be result of viral dissemination to skin • Mechanism of embryopathy unknown

121

Diagnosis

• Morphology of rash with enlarged lymph nodes • • •

suggestive of diagnosis Serology with four-fold increase in antibody titers in acute and convalescent serum Specific IgM antibody in previous infection Viral isolation from peripheral blood leukocytes, stool or urine for months to years after birth in patients with rubella embryopathy or from nasal mucosa in acute disease

Differential diagnosis

• Acute viral disease in children or adults (Table 8.1) or drug eruptions

• Congenital infections (toxoplasmosis, syphilis, cytomegalovirus (CMV), herpes simplex), neonatal lupus erythematosus, Wiskott–Aldrich syndrome, hereditary platelet disorders Treatment

• Symptomatic treatment for acute disease • Nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory agents for arthritis • Prophylaxis 1. Active immunization with live attenuated rubella virus. Administration in pregnancy is contraindicated. Arthralgia is common

Table 8.1

Viral morbilliform eruptions

Characteristic disease pattern Measles Rubella Roseola Erythema infectiosum Infectious mononucleosis Pityriasis rosea Hand, foot and mouth disease Nonspecific morbilliform eruptions Hepatitis A, B, C, D, E Mumps Echovirus Coxsackievirus Respiratory syncytial virus Cytomegalovirus Adenoviruses Dengue fever Ehrilichiosis Colorado tick fever HIV

Mallory Chapter 08

122

27/1/05

2:00 pm

Page 122

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

2. Immune serum globulin given 0.5 ml/kg intramuscularly

Pathogenesis

• Caused by human herpesvirus-6 (HHV-6),

Prognosis

• Good in acute disease • Poor in rubella embryopathy. Multidisciplinary

•

approach and birth defects clinic is advisable

•

References Bale JF Jr. Congenital infections. Neurol Clin 2002; 20: 1039–60, vii Bialecki C, Feder HM, Grant-Kels JM. The six classic childhood exanthems: a review and update. J Am Acad Dermatol 1989; 21: 891–903 Hartley AH, Rasmussen JE. Infectious exanthems. Pediatr Rev 1988; 9: 321–9 Report of the Committee on Infectious Diseases. Red Book, 26th edn. American Academy of Pediatrics: Elk Grove Village, IL, 2003: 536–41 Spika JS, Wassilak S, Pebody R, et al. Measles and rubella in the World Health Organization European region: diversity creates challenges. J Inf Dis 2003; 187 (Suppl 1): S191–7 Vander Straten MR, Tyring SK. Rubella. Dermatol Clin 2002; 20: 225–31

Roseola (exanthem subitum, sixth disease)

member of the family Herpesviridae; a large, double-stranded DNA virus HHV-6 preferentially attacks circulating lymphocytes After initial infection, virus persists and can be detected in saliva

Diagnosis

• Clinical picture usually specific with lack of • • •

symptoms during febrile stage, and eruption begins as fever subsides HHV-6 can be identified by culture of peripheral blood lymphocytes Serodiagnosis with rise in antibody production Skin lesions can demonstrate virus

Differential diagnosis See Table 8.1: drug eruptions Treatment

• Symptomatic treatment of fever with antipyretics and tepid sponge baths

• Follow-up at 2 days is recommended to confirm •

the diagnosis or rule out other causes of morbilliform rash and fever Isolation of the hospitalized patient is not necessary

Prognosis Major points

• Incubation period ~9 days • Occurs mainly in infants under 2 years of age • Abrupt high fever (39.5–40°C) for 2–5 days, with

• Benign in infants • Most older children and adults are immune, but

child looking otherwise well

• When the temperature falls, rash breaks out • Rash consists of pink, morbilliform maculopapules

•

and fades within 1–2 days

• Rash starts on neck and trunk, and later spreads to extremities and face

• Occasionally febrile seizures occur. Encephalitis rare

• Subclinical infection common • Other features: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Mild edema of eyelids Cervical lymphadenopathy Cough Otitis media Hematuria

•

may have a mild mononucleosis-like illness with fever, rash, cervical lymphadenopathy and possibly hepatitis for up to 3 months HHV-6 has been isolated from peripheral B cells in HIV patients, and may become reactivated in immunosuppressed patients with fever, hepatitis, bone marrow suppression and pneumonia By age 4 years, almost all individuals are seropositive

References Bialecki C, Feder HM, Grant-Kels JM. The six classic childhood exanthems: a review and update. J Am Acad Dermatol 1989; 21: 891–903 Blauvelt A. Skin diseases associated with human herpesvirus 6, 7, and 8 infection. Symposium Proceedings. J Invest Dermatol 2001; 6: 197–202

Mallory Chapter 08

27/1/05

2:00 pm

Page 123

Viral and rickettsial diseases

123

De Araujo T, Berman B, Weinstein A. Human herpesviruses 6 and 7. Dermatol Clin 2002; 20: 301–6 Dockrell DH. Human herpesvirus 6: molecular biology and clinical features. J Med Microbiol 2003; 52: 5–18 Report of the Committee on Infectious Diseases. Red Book, 26th edn. American Academy of Pediatrics: Elk Grove Village, IL, 2003: 357–9

Erythema infectiosum (fifth disease) Major points

• Common in school-aged children • Classical presentation: intense confluent redness of • • • • • •

• • • • •

both cheeks (‘slapped cheeks’) with circumoral pallor (Figure 8.3) Later symmetric, lacy, reticulated, macular, erythematous eruption on arms, legs, chest, abdomen or buttocks (Figure 8.4) Eruption lasts 3–5 days, but can have exacerbations up to 4 months, especially after exercise, fever, or sun-exposure Mild systemic symptoms and fever seen in 15–30% Occasionally, other eruptions may occur: morbilliform, vesicular, purpuric (particularly in a ‘gloves and socks’ distribution) Symmetric arthritis of hands, wrists and knees may occur which resolves in 1–2 months; more common in adults Red cell aplasia and transient aplastic crisis may occur in patients with chronic hemolytic anemias (e.g. sickle cell disease) lasting 7–10 days; may be persistent Chronic infection may result in systemic necrotizing vasculitis In pregnant women, fetal death may occur, caused by aplastic crisis in the fetus with resultant hydrops fetalis Risk of fetal death is <10% in first half of pregnancy, and nonsignificant in second half Conjunctivitis may occur Probaby not contagious once skin eruption occurs except in patients with aplastic crisis who can be contagious for at least 1 week after onset of rash

Pathogenesis

Figure 8.3 Erythema infectiosum (fifth disease) – ‘slapped cheeks’

Figure 8.4 erythema

• Virus replicates in erythroid bone marrow cells • •

• Caused by parvovirus B19, a small DNA virus, which can be identified in skin lesions by electron microscopy

Erythema infectiosum – typical reticulated

•

causing transient aplastic crises in children with chronic hemolytic anemias Spread by respiratory secretions and blood Patients with aplastic crises are highly contagious before onset of clinical symptoms until a week or longer afterwards Incubation period usually 4–14 days but can be up to 20 days

Mallory Chapter 08

124

27/1/05

2:00 pm

Page 124

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Diagnosis

• Cutaneous pattern characteristic • Serum specific parvovirus B19-IgM antibody

• •

within 30 days of onset of illness is diagnostic. Serum IgG antibody indicates previous infection and immunity Best method for detecting chronic infection is demonstrating virus by nucleic acid hybridization assay or polymerase chain reaction (PCR) assay Viral B19 antigens can be detected by radioimmunoassay or enzyme assay

Differential diagnosis

• • • •

Sunburn Drug eruptions (morbilliform) Collagen vascular diseases (reticulated pattern) See Table 8.1

Treatment

Silver MM, Hellmann J, Zielenska M, et al. Anemia, blueberry muffin rash and hepatomegaly in a newborn infant. J Pediatr 1996; 12: 579–86 Young NS, Brown KE, Parvovirus B19. N Engl J Med 2004; 350: 586–97

Gianotti–Crosti syndrome Synonym: papular acrodermatitis of childhood, papulovesicular acrolated syndrome Major points

• Characterized by numerous skin-colored or pink • • •

• Supportive care • Isolation from patients at risk for complications • • •

(pregnant women, chronic hemolytic anemia patients) Contact isolation for hospitalized children with aplastic crises or immunosuppressed patients Intravenous immunoglobulin may be effective in immunosuppressed children Good hand washing techniques

Prognosis

• Excellent in normal children • Children with arthritis, pregnant women,

• •

flat topped lichenoid symmetrical papules, 5–10 mm in size (Figures 8.5 and 8.6) Lesions begin individually and then often coalesce Distribution mainly on the arms, legs and face, and sparing trunk Associated findings: 1. Low-grade fever and mild upper respiratory symptoms 2. Lymphadenopathy 3. Diarrhea 4. Cough 5. Hepatosplenomegaly 6. Enanthem Age usually 8 months to 4 years Duration of rash 2–8 weeks

Pathogenesis

• Various viral causes: Epstein–Barr virus (EBV), echovirus, coxsackie B virus, hepatitis A, B, or C, CMV, respiratory syncytial virus, parainfluenza virus, parvovirus B19, rubella virus, poliovirus, adenovirus, rotavirus, HHV-6, and immunizations with diphtheria, pertussis or influenza vaccines

immunosuppressed patients and those with chronic hemolytic anemias should be followed until complications have subsided References

Diagnosis

Frieden IJ, Resnick SD. Childhood exanthems. Old and new. Pediatr Clin North Am 1991; 38: 859–87

• Characteristic clinical picture • Biopsy usually not necessary • Histology: spongiosis, exocytosis of lymphocytes,

Heegaard ED, Brown KE. Human parvovirus B19. Clin Microbiol Rev 2002; 15: 485–505 Katta R. Parvovirus B19: a review. Dermatol Clin 2002; 20: 333–42 Qari M, Qadri SMH. Parvovirus B19 infection. Postgrad Med 1996; 100: 239–52 Report of the Committee on Infectious Diseases. Red Book, 26th edn. American Academy of Pediatrics: Elk Grove Village, IL, 2003: 459–61

edema of the papillary dermis and a perivascular lymphocytic infitrate Differential diagnosis

• • • •

Molluscum contagiosum Viral exanthem (nonspecific) Scarlet fever Kawasaki syndrome

Mallory Chapter 08

27/1/05

2:00 pm

Page 125

Viral and rickettsial diseases

125

References Caputo R, Gelmetti C, Ermacora E, et al. Gianotti–Crosti syndrome: a retrospective analysis of 308 cases. J Am Acad Dermatol 1992; 26: 207–10 Chuh AA. Diagnostic criteria for Gianotti–Crosti syndrome: a prospective case–control study for validity assessment. Cutis 2001; 68: 207–13 Hoffmann B, Schuppe H-C, Adams O, et al. Gianotti–Crosti syndrome associated with Epstein–Barr virus infection. Pediatr Dermatol 1997; 14: 273–7 Nelson JS, Stone MS. Update on selected viral exanthems. Curr Opin Pediatr 2000; 12: 359–64 Report of the Committee on Infectious Diseases. Red Book, 26th edn. American Academy of Pediatrics: Elk Grove Village, IL, 2003: 419–29

Unilateral laterothoracic exanthem Figure 8.5 Gianotti–Crosti syndrome – lichenoid monomorphic papules on extremities

Synonym: Asymmetric periflexural exanthem Major points

• Female/male ratio >1 • Average age ~2 years, and most cases under 4 years

• More common in White children • More common in spring • Morbilliform, erythematous eczematous papules • • Figure 8.6 Gianotti–Crosti syndrome – individual lichenoid papules

• Measles • Rubella Treatment

• •

Usually no treatment is needed If rash is symptomatic, topical corticosteroids may be helpful

Prognosis

• Rash resolves within 2–8 weeks

• • • •

(occasionally with a pallid halo) on unilateral trunk (Figure 8.7) Begins as a discrete patch with small lichenoid papules, then extends into axilla over 3 weeks, becoming inflamed Lesions become confluent, then gradually clear, leaving some postinflammatory hyperpigmentation Similar lesions may appear on other side and involve extremities Pruritus uncommon Lesions last up to 6 weeks, with rare recurrences Usually no systemic symptoms

Pathogenesis

• Viral cause suggested by clinical symptoms, but no clear agent has been identified Diagnosis

• Clinical appearance • Histology: superficial perivascular dermatitis with some foci of lichenoid dermatitis

Mallory Chapter 08

126

27/1/05

2:00 pm

Page 126

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Echovirus Major points

• Morbilliform eruption, occasionally with • • • • • • • •

Figure 8.7 Unilateral laterothoracic exanthem – beginning on the lateral trunk

Differential diagnosis

• • • •

•

Atopic dermatitis Molluscum contagiosum Contact dermatitis Drug eruption

Treatment

•

• Topical steroids and antihistamines may be helpful if pruritus is present

petechiae Found worldwide and ubiquitous Incubation period 3–5 days Spread by fecal–oral route Despite enteric replication, gastrointestinal symptoms uncommon Severe symptoms can occur rarely: encephalitis, polio-like paralysis, neonatal hepatic necrosis Attack rates highest in infants and toddlers Occurs usually in summer in epidemics, particularly in crowded living conditions Echovirus 16 (‘Boston exanthem’) seen in epidemic form and may mimic roseola with morbilliform rash and sometimes vesicles appearing after 2–3 days of fever 1. Adenopathy common 2. Aseptic menigitis occasional Echovirus 9 usually shows a morbilliform eruption with acral petechiae which lasts 2–7 days 1. Can be epidemic, usually in summer and fall in temperate climates. No seasonal pattern in tropics 2. Primarily in preschool children 3. Fever, sore throat, abdominal pain and vomiting Echoviruses 2, 4, 6, 11, 25, 30 show similar signs and symptoms 1. Aseptic meningitis common

Prognosis

Pathogenesis

• Self-limited • May leave postinflammatory hyperpigmentation

• Echoviruses (33 types), small RNA viruses in

References

Diagnosis

Gutzmer R, Herbst RA, Kiehl P, et al. Unilateral laterothoracic exanthem (asymmetrical periflexural exanthem of childhood): report of an adult patient. J Am Acad Dermatol 1997; 37: 484–5

• Culture of echovirus from stool and throat

McCuaig CC, Russo P, Powell J, et al. Unilateral laterothoracic exanthem. J Am Acad Dermatol 1996; 34: 979–84 Resnick SD. New aspects of exanthematous diseases of childhood. Dermatol Clin 1997; 15: 257–66 Taieb A, Megraud F, Legrain V, et al. Asymmetric periflexural exanthem of childhood. J Am Acad Dermatol 1993; 29: 391–3

picornavirus group

•

washings, cerebrospinal fluid, or blood; biopsy if indicated Serum for acute and convalescent titers of antibodies (at 4 weeks) can be drawn and tested if tissue culture results are positive (enteroviruses can persist in the lower gastrointestinal tract for 8–12 weeks and may not be causative)

Differential diagnosis

• Coxsackie viruses • Roseola (human herpesvirus-6)

Mallory Chapter 08

27/1/05

2:00 pm

Page 127

Viral and rickettsial diseases

• • • • • • • • •

Atypical measles Rocky Mountain spotted fever Meningococcemia Streptococcal infection Epstein–Barr virus (EBV) infection Hepatitis Rubella Dengue fever Typhus

Treatment

• • • •

Symptomatic treatment Very contagious Follow-up visits usually not necessary Intravenous immunoglobulin with a high antibody titer to the infecting virus may be beneficial in immunocompromised patients or life-threatening neonatal infection

Prognosis

• Excellent unless complications cause permanent damage

•

• • • • • • •

7. Jaundice 8. Hepatomegaly 9. Arthritis 10. Rash (~15%): pink, fleeting morbilliform eruption lasting 1–5 days Treatment with ampicillin or penicillin for sore throat results in morbilliform rash in up to 80%: bright red papules or urticarial plaques; may persist for 7–10 days Palmar erythema may be prominent Neurologic symptoms: spatial and visual distortion, encephalitis, meningitis, neuritis, or Guillain–Barré syndrome Acute phase lasts 2–3 weeks; begins with fever and sore throat Extreme fatigue may persist for 3 months Rare complications: splenic rupture, thrombocytopenia, agranulocytosis, hemolytic anemia, orchitis and myocarditis Incubation period is 4–8 weeks in adolescents, shorter in prepubertal children Transmission by close personal contact (oral, fecal) or blood transfusion Asymptomatic carriage is common

References

•

Frieden IJ, Resnick SD. Childhood exanthems. Old and new. Pediatr Clin North Am 1991; 38: 859–87

Pathogenesis

Kim KS, Hufnagel G, Chapman NM, Tracy S. The group B coxsackieviruses and myocarditis. Rev Med Virol 2001; 11: 355–68 Report of the Committee on Infectious Diseases. Red Book, 26th edn. American Academy of Pediatrics: Elk Grove Village, IL, 2003: 269–70

Infectious mononucleosis Major points

• Can occur in all ages, with peak found in adolescents and young adults

• Onset is usually insidious • Spectrum of disease is extremely variable, ranging from asymptomatic to fatal

• Presenting symptoms 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Fatigue Fever Generalized lymphadenopathy Sore throat with exudative pharyngitis Headache Splenomegaly

127

• Caused by several different viruses: 1. Epstein–Barr virus (herpesvirus-4) a. More common in adolescents and is the cause in 85% b. EBV replicates in B-lymphocytes, which in normal patients are inhibited by natural killer and T-cell responses c. In patients with cellular immune deficiencies, fatal dissemination or B-cell lymphoma can occur 2. More common in infants and young children: a. Cytomegalovirus (herpesvirus-5) b. Human herpesvirus 6, 7 c. Rubella d. Human parvovirus B19 Diagnosis

• EBV antibody tests 1. Nonspecific serologic tests for heterophile antibody, Paul–Bunnell test and slide agglutination 2. Viral capsid antigen (VCA)-IgG antibody found in high titers early in infection

Mallory Chapter 08

128

•

27/1/05

2:00 pm

Page 128

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

3. IgM anti-VCA antibody and early antigen (EA) antibody; useful in identifying recent infections 4. Serum antibodies against EBV nuclear antigen (EBNA) demonstrate past or recent infection 5. PCR or culture of saliva or peripheral blood mononuclear cells for EBV Patients who are negative for EBV should be tested for CMV and other causes

•

Differential diagnosis

• • • • •

Streptococcal pharyngitis Parvovirus B19 infection Idiopathic thrombocytopenic purpura Systemic lupus erythematosus Malignancies

•

Treatment

• In mild cases, no treatment is necessary • In severe cases with complications, prednisone 2–3 mg/kg per day for 3 days

• Ampicillin or penicillin should be avoided • Avoid contact sports where abdominal injury may cause splenic rupture

• Weekly visits to assess the course of disease and complications

• In severe disease, hospitalization may be necessary • Isolation not necessary Prognosis

• Excellent unless there are complications References Ikediobi NI, Tyring SK. Cutaneous manifestations of Epstein–Barr virus infection. Dermatol Clin 2002; 20: 283–9 Ohga S, Nomura A, Takada H, Hara T. Immunological aspects of Epstein–Barr virus infection. Crit Rev Oncol Hematol 2002; 44: 203–15 Report of the Committee on Infectious Diseases. Red Book, 26th edn. American Academy of Pediatrics: Elk Grove Village, IL, 2003: 271–3 Yachie A, Kanegane H, Kasahara Y. Epstein–Barr virusassociated T-/natural killer cell lymphoproliferative diseases. Semin Hematol 2003; 40: 124–32

•

Pathogenesis

• Hepatitis A virus (HAV), single-stranded RNA

Hepatitis Major points

• Although viral hepatitis is not usually associated with an exanthem, it can cause a

morbilliform, urticarial, lichenoid or scarlatiniform eruption Hepatitis A and hepatitis E 1. Incubation period is 15–50 days, average 25–30 days 2. Symptoms: abrupt fever, jaundice, anorexia, nausea, malaise and occasionally upper respiratory symptoms 3. Subclinical cases are more common, especially in younger children 4. Sometimes have a preceding morbilliform eruption with following jaundice and development of icterus and hepatic tenderness 5. Pruritus may occur Hepatitis B, hepatitis C, hepatitis D 1. Spectrum of symptoms from asymptomatic seroconversion to clinical hepatitis with jaundice 2. Anicteric infection is most common in young children 3. Chronic infection can lead to cirrhosis, chronic active hepatitis or hepatocellular carcinoma 4. Symptoms: a. Morbilliform, urticarial and serumsickness-like eruptions are the most common skin manifestations b. Joint swelling c. Fixed urticaria, lichen planus d. Lasts 7–10 days, and resolves with the onset of hepatic symptoms e. Leukocytoclastic vasculitis or periarteritis nodosa Papular acrodermatitis of childhood (See Gianotti–Crosti syndrome)

•

viruses replicate in liver 1. Viral shedding into bowel during infectious stage, usually 1–3 weeks 2. Viremia may occur and produce rash 3. Hepatitis A and E are primarily waterborne, transmitted by human fecal contamination of food, causing local outbreaks Hepatitis B virus (HBV), double-stranded DNA virus, replicates by reverse transcription 1. Reproduces as complete virus particles and capsids which circulate in the blood

Mallory Chapter 08

27/1/05

2:00 pm

Page 129

Viral and rickettsial diseases

• •

•

2. Incubation period is 45–160 days, average 120 days 3. Transmitted by blood or body fluids such as wound exudates, semen, saliva 4. Chronic carrier is primary reservoir 5. HBV can survive 1 week on dry objects 6. Groups at high risk: intravenous drug users, multiple heterosexual partners, homosexual men, hemodialysis patients Hepatitis C virus, single-stranded RNA virus in a separate genus in Flaviviridae family Hepatitis delta virus, unique single-stranded RNA virus which needs a co-infection with hepatitis B in order to enter hepatocytes and can result in fulminant or chronic hepatitis Hepatitis E, single-stranded RNA virus, similar to calicivirus, acquired by fecal–oral route; incubation period ~40 days

Diagnosis

• Serum aminotransferase elevated • Serologic tests for IgM antihepatitis antibodies by •

•

enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay (ELISA) or radioimmunoassay diagnostic Hepatitis A 1. Presence of IgM anti-HAV antibodies usually indicates recent infection, disappearing within 6 months 2. IgG anti-HAV antibodies develop after IgM anti-HAV antibodies, and indicate past infection Hepatitis B 1. Acute active infection a. Hepatitis B surface antigen positive (HBsAg+) b. Hepatitis B core antigen positive (HBcAg+) c. Hepatitis B e antigen positive (HBeAg+) d. IgM anti-hepatitis B core antibody positive (Anti-HBcAb+) 2. Chronic infection a. HBsAg+ b. IgG anti-hepatitis B surface antibody negative (Anti-HBsAb–) c. IgG anti-hepatitis B core antibody positive (Anti-HBcAb+) 3. Immunized: IgG anti-hepatitis B surface antibody positive (Anti-HBsAb+) 4. Prior infection: Anti-HBsAb+, HBsAg– Hepatitis C: Anti-HCV+

129

Differential diagnosis

• Viral exanthems, particularly rubella, parvovirus • • • • •

B19 Urticaria Leukocytoclastic vasculitis of other etiologies Contact dermatitis Atopic dermatitis Lichen planus

Treatment

• Bed rest, supportive measures • Exposed individuals should receive human •

• • • • •

immune serum globulin 0.02 ml/kg, as soon as possible after exposure In HBV, hepatitis B immunoglobulin (HBIG), 0.06 ml/kg within 24 hours of exposure, and hepatitis B vaccine within 7 days of exposure. Repeat vaccination should be given 1 and 6 months later For perinatal exposure to HBV, 0.5 ml of HBIG within 12 hours of birth, and initial dose of vaccine at 7 days, 1 month and 6 months Education and good hygiene measures, as HAV may survive on objects in the environment for weeks Report to local public health officials Hepatitis B immunoprophylaxis is recommended Hepatitis C (chronic): interferon-α

Prognosis

• Course is usually benign, but can progress to liver failure References Fontana RJ, Everson GT, Tuteja S, et al. Controversies in the management of hepatitis C patients with advanced fibrosis and cirrhosis. Clin Gastroenterol Hepatol 2004; 2: 183–97 Ganem D, Prince AM. Hepatitis B virus infection – natural history and clinical consequences. N Engl J Med 2004; 350: 1118–29 Report of the Committee on Infectious Diseases. Red Book, 26th edn. American Academy of Pediatrics: Elk Grove Village, IL, 2003: 309–43 Roberts EA. Neonatal hepatitis syndrome. Semin Neonatol 2003; 8: 357–74 Shearer CM, Jackson JM, Callen JP. Symmetric polyarthritis with livedo reticularis: a newly recognized manifestation of hepatitis C virus infection. J Am Acad Dermatol 1997; 37: 659–61

Mallory Chapter 08

130

27/1/05

2:00 pm

Page 130

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Herpes simplex Major points

• Lesions are typically grouped vesicles on

•

erythematous base 1. Although characteristically around the mouth or genital region, can be found anywhere 2. On mucous membranes, blister roof easily becomes eroded 3. Regional lymphadenopathy often prominent 4. Generally heals within 8 days 5. Herpes simplex virus (HSV) is ubiquitous and transmitted from direct contact with infected oral secretions or lesions 6. Incubation period: 2 days to 2 weeks Manifestations in children and infants >1 month of age (Figure 8.8) 1. Gingivostomatitis is commonly first manifestation of primary HSV infection, with fever, irritability, foul breath and inability to take liquids orally a. Usually asymptomatic or diagnosed as a nonspecific ‘viral’ enanthem b. Lasts 7–14 days c. May need hospitalization if oral intake is poor 2. Eczema herpeticum (Kaposi varicelliform eruption): diffuse infection concentrated in areas of dermatitis or other skin disorders (e.g. burns, Darier disease) with characteristic grouped vesicles on erythematous bases and punched out erosions (Figure 8.19) a. High fever, lassitude, hundreds of vesicles b. May be primary infection with HSV c. Can be recurrent 3. Immunocompromised patients: severe local lesions may occur with central necrosis; visceral involvement may occur Neonatal herpes infection (<4 weeks of age) 1. 75–80% caused by HSV-2; the rest by HSV-1 2. Characteristics of different presentations: a. Generalized systemic infection with multiorgan involvement and encephalitis b. Localized CNS disease c. Disease localized to skin, eyes, or mucous membranes (Figure 8.10) d. Intrauterine infection, usually in first trimester, which causes malformations and small-for-gestational-age infants

Figure 8.8

Herpes simplex – primary infection

3. Presents at birth to 6 weeks of age, with disseminated disease occurring in first 2 weeks of life 4. Typical skin lesions present in 80% 5. Asymptomatic cases probably do not occur 6. Often severe with high mortality and morbidity, even with antiviral therapy 7. Recurrent skin lesions common in surviving infants 8. Incidence: 1 in 3000–20 000 live births 9. Infants frequently born prematurely

Figure 8.9 Eczema herpeticum – generalized herpes simplex infection in a teenager with atopic dermatitis

Mallory Chapter 08

27/1/05

2:00 pm

Page 131

Viral and rickettsial diseases

10. Transmitted during birth through an infected birth canal, or by ascending infection. (In USA, 0.01–0.39% of women shed HSV at birth) 11. Postnatal transmission from infected parent can occur if lesions on mouth, hands, or nipples 12. Transmission from nursery workers rarely occurs 13. Risk of HSV infection in infant born vaginally to mother with first herpetic infection is 33–50%; with recurrent HSV is 3–5%

• Herpes gladiatorum • •

• Herpes simplex: large, enveloped DNA virus with

• • • • Herpes simplex – in an 8-day-old neonate

1. Occurs in wrestlers from direct skin-to-skin inoculation Recurrent erythema multiforme minor can occur with reactivation of herpes virus Herpes encephalitis: associated with fever, convulsions, irritability, alterations of consciousness, or focal neurological changes

Pathogenesis

•

Figure 8.10

131

two major types which have genomic and antigenic differences 1. Type 1 (HSV-1) causes lesions above waist, but can be found anywhere 2. Type 2 (HSV-2) usually involves genitalia Epidermotropic; produces infection within keratinocytes Persists in nerve ganglia in latent form and can become reactivated following various factors: fever, ultraviolet light, trauma, menses Transmitted during primary and recurrent infections, either symptomatic or asymptomatic With recurrent lesions, first 24 hours has highest concentration of virus with development of vesicles Active infection occurs despite high titers of specific antibody; antibody cannot interact with active virus, which is transferred from cell to cell

Diagnosis

• Genital herpes infection

•

1. Usually caused by HSV-2; occasionally HSV-1 2. Vesicles or shallow ulcerations, usually painful, in perineal area or on genitalia 3. Transmitted from direct contact with infected secretions through sexual activity 4. Genital herpes in prepubertal children should be investigated for sexual abuse Eye infections 1. May be primary or recurrent 2. Cause superficial conjunctivitis 3. May involve deeper layers of cornea or chorioretinitis 4. Potentially leading to scarring and loss of vision Herpetic whitlow 1. Typically involves fingertips 2. More common in thumbsuckers with inoculation from oral lesions (Figure 8.11)

• Cell culture with special transport media will grow virus readily 1. Open and swab skin vesicles

Figure 8.11 Herpes simplex – herpetic whitlow in a thumb sucker

Mallory Chapter 08

132

• • •

27/1/05

2:00 pm

Page 132

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

2. In neonates, take cultures from skin, nasopharynx, eyes, urine, blood, stool and CSF and maternal lesions, cervix or vulva Direct fluorescent antibody staining or immunoassay detection of vesicle scraping Polymerase chain reaction (PCR) Tzanck preparation: multinucleated keratinocytes and eosinophilic intranuclear inclusions; smear material from base of blister on slide and stain with Wright stain

Differential diagnosis

• Cutaneous lesions

•

• • •

1. Cellulitis 2. Pyoderma 3. Impetigo Gingivostomatitis 1. Aphthous stomatitis 2. Erythema multiforme 3. Herpangina caused by enteroviruses, particularly coxsackie A virus Herpes keratitis 1. Adenovirus (usually bilateral) Genital herpes simplex 1. Gonorrhea 2. Syphilis Neonatal herpes simplex 1. TORCH complex (toxoplasmosis, other (syphilis, viruses), rubella, CMV, herpes simplex) 2. Staphylococcal infection 3. Candida infection

Treatment

• Acyclovir indicated for primary infections, and •

• • • •

occasionally for recurrences (see Chapter 21) Topical agents (as adjunct): acyclovir 5% ointment, docosamol 10% cream (Denavir) in conjunction with parenteral antiviral therapy) 1–2% trifluridine, 1% iododeoxyuridine, 3% vidarabine Topical steroids are contraindicated unless used in conjunction with antiviral therapy Refer to an ophthalmologist if eye involvement Isolation of patients in hospital HSV in wrestlers or rugby players 1. Inspection of skin of players during athletic competition

2. Exclusion from competition until lesions are healed or deemed noninfectious by viral cultures 3. Wash mats with freshly prepared 1/64 household bleach solution (one-quarter of a cup diluted to 1 gallon of water) between matches Prognosis

• Generally heals in ~8 days • Neonates and those who are immunocompromised have guarded prognosis

• All lesions are potentially recurrent References Amir J, Harel L, Smetana Z, Varsano I. The natural history of primary herpes simplex type 1 gingivostomatitis in children. Pediatr Dermatol 1999; 16: 259–63 Arvin AM, Prober CG. Herpes simplex virus type 2 – a persistent problem. N Engl J Med 1997; 337: 1158–9 Donovan B. Sexually transmissible infections other than HIV. Lancet 2004; 363: 545–56 Drago F, Rebora A. The new herpesviruses. Arch Dermatol 1999; 135: 71–5 Kimberlin DW. Neonatal herpes simplex infection. Clin Microbiol Rev 2004; 17: 1–13 Kimberlin DW, Lin C-Y, Jacobs RF, et al. Natural history of neonatal herpes simplex virus infections in the acyclovir era. Pediatrics 2001; 108: 223–9 Report of the Committee on Infectious Diseases. Red Book, 26th edn. American Academy of Pediatrics: Elk Grove Village, IL, 2003: 344–53 Waggoner-Fountain LA, Grossman LB. Herpes simplex virus. Pediatr Rev 2004; 25: 86–93 Wollenberg A, Zoch C, Wetzel S, et al. Predisposing factors and clinical features of eczema herpeticum: a retrospective analysis of 100 cases. J Am Acad Dermatol 2003; 49: 198–205

Varicella Synonym: chickenpox Major points

• Clinical characteristics 1. Abrupt onset of generalized pruritic, scattered vesicular rash with mild fever and mild systemic symptoms (Figures 8.12–8.14)

Mallory Chapter 08

27/1/05

2:00 pm

Page 133

Viral and rickettsial diseases

133

Figure 8.12 Varicella – typical multiple lesions in different stages of development

•

2. Initial lesions resemble ‘dew drops on a rose petal’ 3. Crops of lesions in different stages of development; break out for 2–5 days 4. Individual lesions go from papules to vesicles to crusts within 24–48 hours 5. When shed, crusts leave shallow erosions 6. Lesions may be concentrated in areas of skin injury or sun exposure 7. Oral cavity lesions frequent, as are other mucous membrane lesions 8. Total duration 7–10 days Epidemiology 1. Incubation period 10–21 days (average 14–16 days) 2. Highly contagious 3. Most contagious for 1–2 days before and shortly after onset of rash, but lasts until vesicles have crusted 4. Person-to-person transmission by direct contact with infected patients (varicella or zoster) or air-borne spread from respiratory secretions 5. Children who acquire their infection at home (secondary family cases) may have more severe disease than index case 6. Late winter and early spring more common 7. Most common in children <10 years 8. Immunity is usually life-long Complications 1. Bacterial superinfection with Staphylococcus aureus or Streptococcus 2. Thrombocytopenia

Figure 8.13 Varicella – classic initial lesion described as a ‘dew drop on a rose petal’

Figure 8.14 trunk

Varicella – typical multiple lesions on the

3. Pneumonia 4. Arthritis 5. Hepatitis 6. Encephalitis or meningitis 7. Glomerulonephritis 8. More severe in adolescents and adults 9. Reye syndrome 10. Acute cerebellar ataxia 11. Immunocompromised children can have progressive varicella with continued eruption of

Mallory Chapter 08

134

27/1/05

2:00 pm

Page 134

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

lesions and high fever from 2 weeks to several months 12. Children receiving corticosteroids or chronic salicylate therapy may have more severe disease or complications 13. Fetal infection (first or early second trimester) can result in varicella embryopathy (congenital varicella syndrome) with limb atrophy and scarring; attack rate 1.2% (higher between 13 and 20 weeks’ gestation) 14. Fetuses exposed to varicella-zoster virus can develop unapparent varicella and then zoster early in life 15. Severe neonatal varicella results when infant’s mother develops varicella from 5 days before to 2 days after delivery; mortality rate 30% Pathogenesis • Caused by varicella-zoster virus (human herpes virus-3) • Herpes viruses are epidermotropic and produce infection within the keratinocytes with epidermal cell death

• • • •

Coxsackie infections Echoviruses 4, 9, 11, 17, 25 Variola Vaccinia (cowpox)

Treatment

• Healthy children usually do not require treatment • Symptomatic treatment: wet dressings, soothing baths, oral antipruritics

• Acyclovir (see Chapter 21) • Varicella-zoster immune globulin (VZIG) within

• • •

72 hours of exposure can modify the course, but is not helpful once the disease is established. (Consult Red Book) Hospitalized patients should be isolated Contact with elderly, neonates and immunocompromised children should be avoided School children with uncomplicated cases may return to school on the 6th day after the onset of the rash or when there are no new lesions, and existing lesions have crusted over; children with zoster based on similar criteria may return to school when lesions have crusted Varicella vaccine is a cell-free live-attenuated preparation 1. Single dose recommended for patients between 12 months and 12 years with a 97% seroconversion rate 2. Persons >13 years should have second dose 4–8 weeks after initial vaccination Secondary bacterial infection should be treated with antibiotics

Diagnosis • Clinical diagnosis • Viral culture is usually positive in the first 3–4 days of eruption • Immunofluorescent staining with monoclonal antibodies of vesicular scrapings; PCR • Tzanck smear demonstrates multinucleated epithelial cells containing intranuclear inclusions • Acute and convalescent-phase sera for antivaricella-zoster virus antibody • Serologic tests: enzyme immunoassay (EIA), latex agglutination (LA), indirect fluorescent antibody (IFA) and fluorescent antibody-to-membrane antigen (FAMA) assays • Histology: balloon degeneration within keratinocytes, multinucleated giant epithelial cell and nuclear inclusions

•

Differential diagnosis • Insect bite reactions • Molluscum contagiosum • Pityriasis lichenoides et varioliformis acuta • Rickettsialpox • Dermatitis herpetiformis • Herpes simplex (disseminated) • Orf

Arvin AM. Varicella vaccine – the first six years. N Engl J Med 2001; 344: 1007–9

•

Prognosis

• Excellent in a healthy child • Immunosuppressed children have higher rate of complications

• Virus persists in latent form after initial infection • Reactivation causes herpes zoster (‘shingles’) References

English R. Varicella. Pediatr Rev 2003; 24: 372–9 Hall S, Maupin T, Seward J, et al. Second varicella infections: are they more common than previously thought? Pediatrics 2002; 109: 1068–73 LaRussa P. The success of varicella vaccine. Pediatr Ann 2002; 31: 710–15

Mallory Chapter 08

27/1/05

2:00 pm

Page 135

Viral and rickettsial diseases

LaRussa P, Steinberg SP, Shapiro E, et al. Viral strain identification in varicella vaccines with disseminated rashes. Pediatr Infect Dis 2000; 19: 1037–9

• Complications 1. 2. 3. 4.

Scarring (Figure 8.16) Motor paralysis Keratitis Ramsay-Hunt syndrome: involvement of geniculate ganglion with pain in the ear, vesicles on pinnae and facial palsy 5. Postherpetic neuralgia (rare in children)

MMWR. Varicella-related deaths among adults – United States, 1997. Morbid Mortal Weekly Rep 1997; 46: 409 Report of the Committee on Infectious Diseases. Red Book, 26th edn. American Academy of Pediatrics: Elk Grove Village, IL, 2003: 672–86 Vazquez M, LaRussa PS, Gerxon AA, et al. The effectiveness of the varicella vaccine in clinical practice. N Engl J Med 2001; 344: 955–60

Pathogenesis

• Caused by a recrudescence of a latent infection with varicella zoster virus (human herpes virus-3)

Herpes zoster Major points

• Patients have previously had varicella infection or vaccine

• Clinical characteristics: 1. Lesions begin as erythematous macules, then become grouped vesicles on erythematous base in dermatomal distribution (may be one to three sensory dermatomes) (Figure 8.15) 2. Most common dermatomes involved are on the trunk and buttocks 3. Mild febrile illness lasts 7–10 days 4. Pruritus may be severe 5. Pain can occur and is localized to the area involved 6. Generalized lesions may be seen in immunocompromised patients, with lesions appearing outside the dermatomes, with visceral complications

135

Diagnosis

• Clinical diagnosis • See Varicella above, for testing Differential diagnosis

• Herpes simplex infection • Impetigo • Pain can mimic internal disease: encephalitis, appendicitis Treatment

• Acyclovir either oral or intravenously (see Chapter 21)

• Topical antibiotic ointments (e.g. mupirocin, bacitracin)

• Oral antipruritics: hydroxyzine 10–25 mg every •

6 hours, diphenhydramine 10–25 mg every 6 hours Prednisone 1–2 mg/kg per day to prevent postherpetic neuralgia and to decrease inflammation

Prognosis

• Excellent in immunocompetent host • May be prolonged in immunocompromised host • May cause scarring References Brown TJ, McCrary M, Tyring SK. Antiviral agents: nonantiviral drugs. J Am Acad Dermatol 2002; 47: 581–99 English R. Varicella. Pediatr Rev 2003; 24: 372–9 Figure 8.15 Herpes zoster – typical dermatomal distribution of vesicles

Johnson RW. Herpes zoster in the immunocompetent patient: management of post-herpetic neuralgia. Herpes 2003; 10: 38–45

Mallory Chapter 08

136

27/1/05

2:00 pm

Page 136

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Figure 8.17 Hand, foot and mouth disease caused by coxsackie virus

Figure 8.16

Post-herpes zoster scarring

Kakourou T, Theodoridou M, Mostrous G, et al. Herpes zoster in children. J Am Acad Dermatol 1998; 39: 207–10 Liang MG, Heidelberg KA, Jacobson RM, McEvoy MT. Herpes zoster after varicella immunization. J Am Acad Dermatol 1998; 38: 761–3 McCrary ML, Severson J, Tyring SK. Varicella zoster virus. J Am Acad Dermatol 1999; 41: 1–14 Thomas SL, Hall AJ. What does epidemiology tell us about risk factors for herpes zoster? Lancet Infect Dis 2004; 4: 26–33

Hand, foot and mouth disease Major points

• Abrupt onset of scattered papules/vesicles, oval or

Figure 8.18 Hand, foot and mouth disease – oral lesion with erythematous halo

linear in shape, in an acral distribution

• Individual (not grouped) lesions are seen on palms,

• • • • • •

fingertips, soles and mouth; occasionally, more numerous lesions may involve extremities (Figures 8.17 and 8.18) Lesions usually number <100 Fever may be mild or nonexistent Oral lesions are discrete, shallow, oval erosions There is diarrhea, particularly in young children Epidemics occur in summer and early fall in temperate climates Incubation period: 3–5 days

• Fecal–oral acquisition; virus may be excreted in • • •

feces for up to 12 weeks Contagious from 2 days before onset of rash to 2 days after Enteroviruses may survive on fomites Clinical attack rates highest in young children

Pathogenesis

• Caused by several coxsackie virus groups: A16, A2, A5, A10 and A71

Mallory Chapter 08

27/1/05

2:00 pm

Page 137

Viral and rickettsial diseases

Diagnosis

• Virus isolation from throat, stool and rectal swabs, •

and occasionally blood Antibodies from sera (onset of illness and 4 weeks after) showing rise in titer

• Cutaneous warts are common in school-aged children

• Transmitted from person to person by direct contact. Enters areas of minor trauma to skin

• Severe or widespread infections occur in patients

Differential diagnosis See Table 8.1

•

• Acropustulosis of infancy • Insect bites • Urticaria

•

Treatment

• None usually necessary • Treat dehydration if it occurs in infants • IVIG containing high antibody titer may be •

• •

helpful for immunocompromised patients Good handwashing, personal hygiene, especially after diaper changes

Prognosis

• Excellent References Chang LY, King CC, Hsu KH, et al. Risk factors of enterovirus 71 infection and associated hand, foot, and mouth disease/herpangina in children during an epidemic in Taiwan. Pediatrics 2002; 109: 88 Chang LY, Lin TY, Huang YC, et al. Comparison of enterovirus-71 and coxsackievirus A16 clinical illnesses during the Taiwan enterovirus epidemic, 1998. Pediatr Infect Dis J 1999; 18: 1092–6 Frieden IJ, Resnick SD. Childhood exanthems. Old and new. Pediatr Clin North Am 1991; 38: 859–87

• •

•

Messner J, Miller JJ, James WD, Honig PJ. Accentuated viral exanthems in areas of inflammation. J Am Acad Dermatol 1999; 40: 345–6 Report of the Committee on Infectious Diseases. Red Book, 26th edn. American Academy of Pediatrics: Elk Grove Village, IL, 2003: 269–70 Thomas I, Janniger CK. Hand, foot and mouth disease. Cutis 1993; 52: 265–6

Verrucae Major points

• Human papillomaviruses (HPV) cause benign epithelial tumors (warts) of skin and mucous membranes

137

•

with compromised cellular immunity (e.g. transplantation, HIV infection) or atopic patients Anogenital warts are primarily transmitted by sexual contact, but may be acquired at delivery from an infected mother Evidence of genital HPV infection has been detected in up to 38% of sexually active adolescent females Incubation period: unknown; estimated 3 months to several years Common warts (caused by HPV 2, 4): domeshaped papules with finger-like projections giving a rough appearance or texture of cauliflower (Figures 8.19 and 8.20) 1. Usually asymptomatic and multiple 2. Commonly occur on hands and around nails but can be anywhere, including lips and mouth 3. Thrombosed capillaries give appearance of tiny dark dots Flat warts (caused by HPV 3, 10) common on face and extremities; usually small, multiple, flat topped papules (Figure 8.21) Plantar warts (caused by HPV 1, 4 and others) on weight-bearing areas; can be painful, hyperkeratotic; multiple lesions grouped together (‘mosaic’ appearance) (Figure 8.22) Anogenital or venereal warts (caused by HPV 6, 11, 16, 18) can range from asymptomatic papules to condylomata acuminata (cauliflower-like growths ranging from a few millimeters to several centimeters) (Figure 8.23) 1. In males, found on shaft of the penis, meatus, scrotum and perineal areas 2. In females, located on labia, vagina, cervix or perianal areas 3. Perianal warts can cause itching, burning, local pain or bleeding Laryngeal papillomas found in children <3 years of age 1. Manifest as hoarse crying or respiratory obstruction 2. Acquired via aspiration of infected secretions from mother during passage through infected birth canal

Mallory Chapter 08

138

27/1/05

2:00 pm

Page 138

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Figure 8.19

Verruca vulgaris

Figure 8.21 Plantar verrucae demonstrating the Koebner phenomenon

Figure 8.22 capillaries

Plantar warts showing the thrombosed

• >80 types have been identified, but most warts are caused by a few types Figure 8.20 face

Filiform verrucae often occur on the

• Epidermodysplasia verruciformis: inherited deficiency of cell-mediated immunity to particular HPV types 1. Presents in childhood as flat warts 2. Malignant transformation occurs in adults in one-third of cases, particularly in sun-exposed areas

• Papillomaviruses are common in mammals and are species-specific

• HPV is located in epidermal cell nucleus and induces keratinocyte proliferation with relatively normal differentiation Diagnosis

• Clinical diagnosis • Histology: vacuolated epidermal cells with hypergranulosis and eosinophilic inclusions

• PCR detection of certain viral types

Pathogenesis

Differential diagnosis

• Caused by papillomavirus, Papovaviridae family,

• Common warts: molluscum contagiosum, cysts • Plantar warts: calluses

DNA viruses

Mallory Chapter 08

27/1/05

2:00 pm

Page 139

Viral and rickettsial diseases

139

reported to appropriate authorities; inspect genitalia for signs of abuse 8. If history of unusual behavior, withdrawal, sleep disturbances, phobias, enuresis or encopresis, consider child abuse Prognosis

• Although most warts spontaneously regress, some persist for years

• Multiple treatments are often needed References Brown TJ, McCrary M, Tyring SK. Antiviral agents: nonantiviral drugs. J Am Acad Dermatol 2002; 47: 581–99 Focht DR, Spicer C, Fairchok MP. The efficacy of duct tape vs. cryotherapy in the treatment of verruca vulgaris (the common wart). Arch Pediatr Adolesc Med 2002; 156: 971–4

Figure 8.23 Condyloma acuminata in a sexually abused child caused by human papillomavirus

• Anogenital warts: syphilis (condyloma lata); molluscum contagiosum

• Flat warts: lichen planus, lichen nitidus, seborrheic keratosis, epidermal nevus Treatment

• Nongenital warts often resolve spontaneously in <2

•

years 1. Destruction: liquid nitrogen (–195ºC), salicylic acid paints (17%), CO2 laser, pulsed dye laser, electrodesiccation, tape occlusion 2. Tretinoin (0.025% or 0.05% cream) (off label) may be helpful for flat warts Anogenital warts 1. Podophyllum resin 25% 2. Podofilox 3. Destructive methods such as liquid nitrogen, trichloroacetic acid, CO2 laser, or surgical excision 4. Imiquimod 5% approved for >12 years 5. Recurrences common 6. Cervical HPV infections can be associated with epithelial dysplasia, and in certain types of HPV (16, 18, 31) may predispose the patient to cervical cancer 7. In children who are not sexually active, suspicion of child abuse should be raised and

Grussendorf-Conen E-I, Jacobs S. Efficacy of imiquimod 5% cream in the treatment of recalcitrant warts in children. Pediatr Dermatol 2002; 19: 263–6 Handley J, Hands E, Armstrong K, et al. Common association of HPV 2 with anogenital warts in prepubertal children. Pediatr Dermatol 1997; 14: 339–43 Hengge UR, Cusini M. Topical immunomodulators for the treatment of external genital warts, cutaneous warts and molluscum contagiosum. Br J Dermatol 2003; 149: 15–19 Kopera D. Verrucae vulgaris: flashlamp-pumped pulsed dye laser treatment in 134 patients. Int J Dermatol 2003; 42: 905–8 Majewski S, Pniewski T, Malejczyk M, Jablonska S. Imiquimod is highly effective for extensive, hyperproliferative condyloma in children. Pediatr Dermatol 2003; 20: 440–2 Torrelo A. What’s new in the treatment of viral warts in children? Pediatr Dermatol 2002; 19: 191–9

Molluscum contagiosum Major points

• Several (usually 2–20) skin-colored or pearly • • •

1–6 mm discrete papules with central umbilication (Figures 8.24 and 8.25) Eczematous dermatitis often surrounds larger lesions Common locations: face, axilla and groin; can be anywhere May be sexually transmitted, mainly in teens and adults. In children, groin lesions common and

Mallory Chapter 08

140

27/1/05

2:00 pm

Page 140

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Figure 8.25 Molluscum contagiosum – large lesion with several smaller ones nearby

Figure 8.24 Molluscum contagiosum – skin-colored papules, some with central umbilication

• • • • • • •

should not be considered a sexually transmitted disease unless there are other stigmata of sexual abuse Patients with atopic dermatitis often have hundreds of lesions Infection occurs after contact with infected person, contaminated object, or swimming pool Incubation period 2–7 weeks but may be longer, up to 6 months Infectious as long as lesions are present Lesions may spontaneously suppurate, crust and resolve, being mistaken for secondary infection Conjunctivitis or keratitis may complicate lesions on eyelids Patients with HIV may have larger and more numerous lesions, suggesting that cell-mediated immunity helps eliminate the virus

Pathogenesis

• Caused by a poxvirus (Poxviridae) which induces epidermal cell proliferation Diagnosis

• Clinical diagnosis • Extrusion of keratinous material from a papule and inspecting it microscopically with Wright stain or

• •

potassium hydroxide will show characteristic pearshaped ‘molluscum bodies’ Histology: pear-shaped eosinophilc ‘molluscum bodies’ in the keratinocytes; bodies contain cytoplasmic masses of virus material Virus can be seen with electron microscopy

Differential diagnosis

• • • • • • •

Warts Closed comedones Epidermal cysts Milia Folliculitis Pyogenic granuloma Keratoacanthoma

Treatment

• Lesions self-limiting and benign • Can leave small pox-like scars, and can become • •

very inflamed before resolving Mechanical removal of each papule can be performed with a dermal curette with prior application of anesthetic cream Other treatments: 1. Liquid nitrogen 2. Opening the lesions and squeezing out the contents 3. Cantharidin 4. Tretinoin or salicylic acid preparations may cause irritation and are somewhat unpredictable for treatment 5. Imiquimod 5% cream (off label)

Mallory Chapter 08

27/1/05

2:00 pm

Page 141

Viral and rickettsial diseases

141

6. Cidofovir (off label)

• Recurrences common • Treat every 2–4 weeks until cleared • Molluscum is contagious; therefore, bathing or swimming together and sharing towels should be avoided Prognosis

• Most cases are self-limited within 6–9 months; however, some persist for years References Bayerl C, Feller G, Goerdt S. Experience in treating molluscum contagiosum in children with imiquimod 5% cream. Br J Dermatol 2003; 149 (Suppl 66): 25–8 Hengge UR, Cusini M. Topical immunomodulators for the treatment of external genital warts, cutaneous warts and molluscum contagiosum. Br J Dermatol 2003; 149 (Suppl 66): 15–19 Hengge UR, Esser S, Schultewolter T, et al. Selfadministered topical 5% imiquimod for the treatment of common warts and molluscum contagiosum. Br J Dermatol 2000; 143: 1026–31 Majewski L, Jablonska S. Human papillomavirus-associated tumors of the skin and mucosa. J Am Acad Dermatol 1997; 36: 659–85 Meadows KP, Tyring SK, Pavia AT, Rallis TM. Resolution of recalcitrant molluscum contagiosum virus lesions in human immunodeficiency virus-infected patients treated with cidofovir. Arch Dermatol 1997; 133: 987–90 Myskowski PL. Molluscum contagiosum. New insights, new directions. Arch Dermatol 1997; 133: 1039–60 Silverberg N. Pediatric molluscum contagiosum: optimal treatment strategies. Paediatr Drugs 2003; 5: 505–12

Pathogenesis

Orf

Treatment

Synonym: ecthyma contagiosum

• Secondary infection should be treated • Removal of the bulk of lesion by biopsy may

Major points

• Widespread in sheep and goats, affecting mainly • •

• •

young lambs that contract it from one another or persistent virus in pastures Incubation period: 5–6 days Begins as small, firm, red tender papule, enlarging to form a hemorrhagic pustule or bulla, which becomes crusted or umbilicated in the center (Figure 8.26) Usually 2–5 cm, solitary or few in number Common on fingers and hands

Figure 8.26

Orf – bullous, erythematous nodule on finger

• Caused by poxviridae inoculated from sheep or goats Diagnosis

• Clinical diagnosis with appropriate history • Histology: inter- and intracellular edema, vacuolization and ballooning degeneration of the epidermis Differential diagnosis

• Pyoderma • Brown recluse spider bite

hasten healing Prognosis

• Spontaneous recovery in 6 weeks References Haig DM, McInnes C, Deane D, et al. The immune and inflammatory response to orf virus. Comp Immunol Microbiol Infect Dis 1997; 20: 197–204 Weedon D. Skin Pathology. Churchill Livingstone: Edinburgh, 1997: 586–7

Mallory Chapter 08

142

27/1/05

2:00 pm

Page 142

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Human immunodeficiency virus

Table 8.2 Revised case definition of AIDSdefining conditions for adults and adolescents ≥ 13 years of age

Major points

• Acquired immunodeficiency syndrome (AIDS): • •

severe end of the clinical spectrum of HIV infections AIDS in children accounts for 2% of reported cases in the USA; most acquired from mothers Clinical manifestations (See Table 8.2) 1. Generalized lymphadenopathy 2. Hepatomegaly 3. Splenomegaly 4. Failure to thrive 5. Candidiasis (oral or esophageal) 6. Recurrent diarrhea 7. Parotitis 8. Cardiomyopathy 9. Hepatitis 10. Nephropathy 11. CNS disease 12. Developmental delay 13. Seborrheic dermatitis (persistent) 14. Pneumonia with Pneumocystis carinii (PCP); lymphoid interstitial pneumonia 15. Recurrent bacterial infections with Staphylococcus aureus (Figure 8.27) 16. Dermatophyte infections, widespread 17. Scabies; severe, crusted 18. Eosinophilic folliculitis 19. Drug eruptions (especially with trimethoprim–sulfamethoxazole) 20. Opportunistic infections (see Table 8.2)

Candidiasis of bronchi, trachea, or lungs Candidiasis, esophageal Cervical cancer, invasive Coccidioidomycosis, disseminated or extrapulmonary Cryptococcosis, extrapulmonary Cryptosporidiosis, chronic intestinal Cytomegalovirus disease (other than liver, spleen or lymph nodes) Cytomegalovirus retinitis Encephalopathy, HIV related Herpes simplex: chronic ulcer >1 month’s duration, or bronchitis, pneumonitis, or esophagitis Histoplasmosis, disseminated or extrapulmonary Isosporiasis, chronic intestinal Kaposi sarcoma Lymphoma, Burkitt Lymphoma, immunoblastic Lymphoma, primary or brain Mycobacterium avium complex or M. kansasii, disseminated or extrapulmonary Mycobacterium tuberculosis Mycobacterium, other species disseminated Pneumocystis carinii pneumonia Pneumonia, recurrent Progressive multifocal leukoencephalopathy Salmonella septicemia, recurrent Toxoplasmosis of brain Wasting syndrome due to HIV CD4+ T-lymphocyte count < 200 cells/µl or CD4+ percentage < 15% Modified from Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. 1993 revised classification system for HIV infection and expanded case surveillance definition for AIDS among adolescents and adults. MMWR 1992; 41 (No. RR-17):1–19 and Red Book 2003: 360–82

•

Figure 8.27 Human immunodeficiency virus infection with secondary Staphylococcus aureus

21. Malignancies (uncommon in pediatric HIV) (see Table 8.2) Epidemiology 1. Humans are reservoir 2. HIV has been isolated from blood, CSF, pleural fluid, human milk, semen, cervical secretions, saliva, urine and tears 3. Transmission: a. Sexual contact b. Percutaneous or mucous membrane exposure to contaminated blood or body fluids

Mallory Chapter 08

27/1/05

2:00 pm

Page 143

Viral and rickettsial diseases

•

c. Mother-to-infant before or around the time of birth d. Breastfeeding e. Transfusion of blood or blood products Incubation period: 1. HIV-infected neonates are usually asymptomatic in the first months of life 2. Median onset of symptoms is 3 years of age if acquired perinatally (may be >5 years)

Pathogenesis

• Caused by human immunodeficiency virus type 1 • • • •

• • • •

(HIV-1), a RNA cytopathic human retrovirus; HIV-2 is more common in West Africa HIV is tropic for T-helper lymphocytes (CD4+) and other cells such as monocytes, macrophages and CNS cells Retroviruses integrate into cell genome and replicate Virus persists for life in infected individuals Increasing loss of cell-mediated immunity with lymphopenia, decrease in T-helper lymphocytes (CD4+), and decrease in normal CD4+/CD8+ cell ratio Response of T lymphocytes to mitogens is lost; patients become anergic Loss of humoral immune function with elevated IgG and IgA Panhypogammaglobulinemia Viral load of circulating virus may be high (300 000 RNA copies/ml) or low (40 000 RNA copies/ml)

Diagnosis

• For patients >18 months, serum antibody tests

• • • •

using enzyme immunoassays (EIA) are used for screening. Repeat testing should be performed, and confirmed with Western blot immunofluorescent antibody test Some patients with hypogammaglobulinemia or advanced disease may not have HIV antibodies Polymerase chain reaction (PCR) and HIV cultures are performed in reference laboratories Modified p24 antigen assay is less sensitive than PCR or culture but may be present early in infection For infants born to HIV-seropositive women, diagnosis may be difficult, as neonates are usually seropositive at birth, whether infected or not

143

1. HIV culture or PCR are preferred 2. May need to be repeated at 4–6 months of age Differential diagnosis

• Immunodeficiency states (e.g. severe combined • • • •

immunodeficiency) Malnutrition Child abuse Infections, viral and bacterial Nutritional deficiencies

Treatment

• Physicians should consult an HIV specialist if possible

• Treatment with antiretroviral agents for • • •

HIV-infected mothers during pregnancy can reduce the risk of vertical transmission Antiretroviral therapy Antibiotics or antifungal agents as appropriate for infections Newly diagnosed patients with HIV infection must be reported to public health department

Prognosis

• Opportunistic infections, progressive neurological •

disease and severe wasting are associated with poor prognosis Viral load and CD4+ count are good predictors of prognosis

References Fauci AS. The AIDS epidemic. N Engl J Med 1999; 341: 1046–50 Hachem ME, Bernardi S, Pianosi G, et al. Mucocutaneous manifestations in children with HIV infection and AIDS. Pediatr Dermatol 1998; 15: 429–34 Harris PS, Saag MS. Dermatologic manifestations of human immunodeficiency virus infection. Curr Prob Dermatol 1997; 9: 209–62 Mocroft A, Youle M, Phillips AN, et al. The incidence of AIDS-defining illnesses in 4883 patients with human immunodeficiency virus infection. Arch Intern Med 1998; 158: 491–7 Report of the Committee on Infectious Diseases. Red Book, 26th edn. American Academy of Pediatrics: Elk Grove Village, IL, 2003: 360–82 Rico JM, Myers SA, Sanchez MR. Guidelines of care for dermatologic conditions in patients infected with HIV. J Am Acad Dermatol 1997; 37: 450–72

Mallory Chapter 08

144

27/1/05

2:00 pm

Page 144

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Wananukul S, Deekajorndech T, Panchareon C, Thisyakorn U. Mucocutaneous findings in pediatric AIDS related to degree of immunosuppression. Pediatr Dermatol 2003; 20: 289–94 Ward HA, Russo GG, Shrum J. Cutaneous manifestations of antiretroviral therapy. J Am Acad Dermatol 2002; 46: 284–93

Rocky mountain spotted fever Major points

• Clinical characteristics: 1. Fever, headache, myalgias, nausea, vomiting, anorexia 2. Rash begins on wrists and ankles as an erythematous macular eruption which later becomes petechial and spreads to the trunk (Figure 8.28) a. Palms and soles are often involved b. Rarely, no rash is present; more common in infants 2. Thrombocytopenia 3. Anemia 4. Leukocytopenia 5. Duration of illness ~3 weeks 6. Involvement of various organ systems: CNS, cardiac, pulmonary, gastrointestinal tract, renal and other organs 7. Disseminated intravascular coagulation in severe cases 8. Shock leading to death

Figure 8.28 Rocky Mountain spotted fever with vasculitis and purpura

• Epidemiology 1. Incubation period: 2–14 days (usually 1 week) 2. Transmitted to humans by the bite of ticks, which are reservoirs and vectors of Rickettsia rickettsii 3. Ticks: Dermacentor variabilis (dog tick), Dermacentor andersoni (wood tick) in upper Rocky Mountain states, and Amblyomma americanum (Lone Star tick) in south central USA 4. Organism is transmitted transovarially and between stages in ticks 5. Increased risk: persons exposed to ticks frequently (e.g. pet owners, outdoorsmen) 6. More common in children <15 years of age 7. Most common in April through October 8. Widespread in USA, with most cases reported in southeastern and south central states; also reported in Canada, Mexico, Central and South America Pathogenesis

• Caused by Rickettsia rickettsii, an obligate intracellular pathogen and member of the spotted fever group of rickettsiae Diagnosis

• Culture of organism not recommended because of danger of transmission

• Skin biopsy of rash with immunofluorescent staining for R. rickettsii is specific but not readily available

• Four-fold increase in one of multiple rickettsial group-specific tests; or decrease in antibody titer between acute and convalescent sera by indirect immunofluorescence antibody (IFA), complement fixation (CF), latex agglutination (LA), indirect hemagglutination (IHA), or microagglutination tests 1. Antibodies can be detected by IFA 7–10 days after illness starts 2. IFA and IHA are the most sensitive and specific tests 3. CF and microagglutination are highly specific but lack sensitivity 4. Weil–Felix serologic test (Proteus Ox-19 and Ox-2 agglutinins) is nonspecific and not sensitive 5. PCR test from blood and skin specimens is available in reference laboratories but positivity depends upon number of organisms

Mallory Chapter 08

27/1/05

2:00 pm

Page 145

Viral and rickettsial diseases

Differential diagnosis

• • • • • • • •

Drug eruptions Petechiae Vasculitis Ehrlichiosis Toxic shock syndrome Disseminated intravascular coagulation Measles Parvovirus B19 (‘gloves and socks’ syndrome)

Report of the Committee on Infectious Diseases. Red Book, 26th edn. American Academy of Pediatrics: Elk Grove Village, IL, 2003: 532–4 Sexton DJ, Kaye KS. Rocky mountain spotted fever. Med Clin North Am 2002; 86: 351–60, vii-viii

Lyme disease Synonym: erythema chronicum migrans

Treatment

Major points

• Doxycycline 2–4 mg/kg per day in one to two

• Clinical manifestation divided into three stages:

• • • •

doses given orally or intravenously (adult dose 1–2 g/day) is drug of choice for all ages. Tetracycline staining of teeth is dose related and doxycycline is less likely to stain developing teeth than other tetracyclines. Since ehrlichiosis and Rocky Mountain Spotted Fever overlap clinically, tetracyclines are effective against both infections, whereas chloramphenicol is not Chloramphenicol 50–100 mg/kg per day given intravenously or orally in four doses (adult dose 2–4 g/day) Treatment is given until the patient has been afebrile for 2–3 days (usually 7–10 days) Preventative measures: protective clothing, tick/insect repellents to skin and clothes Thorough inspection of the skin after being outdoors and removal of ticks

Prognosis

• Early treatment is needed for a good outcome • Mortality highest in males, in persons >30 years, in •

non-Whites, and in persons with no known tickbite history Delay in disease recognition increases risk of death or neurological sequelae

References Case Records of the Massachsetts General Hospital (Case 32-1997). N Engl J Med 1997; 337: 1149–56 Jacobs RF. Human monocytic ehrlichiosis: similar to Rocky Mountain spotted fever but different. Pediatr Ann 2002; 31: 180–4 Masters EJ, Olson GS, Weiner SJ, Paddock CD. Rocky Mountain spotted fever: a clinician’s dilemma. Arch Int Med 2003; 163: 769–74 McGinley-Smith DE, Tsao SS. Dermatoses from ticks. J Am Acad Dermatol 2003; 49: 363–92

145

1. Early localized a. Erythema migrans at site of tick bite (Figure 8.29)

Figure 8.29 Lyme disease – typical annular patches of erythema chronicum migrans

b. Begins as a red macule or papule, expanding during days to weeks to form a large annular erythematous lesion >5 cm (average 15 cm) with central clearing c. Rash can vary greatly and may be vesicular or necrotic in the center d. Fever, malaise, headache, mild neck stiffness and arthralgia 2. Early disseminated a. Multiple lesions of erythema migrans which are similar to but usually smaller than the primary lesion b. Lesions usually occur 3–5 weeks after the tick bite c. Common manifestations: palsies of cranial nerves (especially 7th cranial nerve),

Mallory Chapter 08

146

•

27/1/05

2:00 pm

Page 146

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

meningitis, conjunctivitis, arthralgias, myalgias, headache and fatigue d. Rare manifestation: carditis 3. Late disease a. Occurs several months to several years after the tick bite b. Recurrent arthritis (pauciarticular, affecting large joints, particularly knees) c. Chronic arthritis is uncommon in children treated in early stages with antibiotics d. CNS: encephalopathy, neuropathy Epidemiology 1. Usually occurs April through October 2. Incubation period 3–31 days (average 7–14 days) 3. Occurs in three distinct geographic regions in the USA (although it has been reported in 48 states): northeast (Massachusetts to Maryland), upper midwest (Minnesota, Wisconsin), west coast (northern California) 4. Reported in Canada, Europe, former Soviet Union, China, Japan 5. Tick vectors a. Ixodes scapularis (previously called Ixodes dammini) in east and midwest b. Ixodes pacificus in west

Pathogenesis

• Caused by spirochete Borrelia burdorferi, acquired

• Immunofluoresence assay (IFA): may give false•

• •

Differential diagnosis

• • • • •

• Early treatment usually prevents development of later stages

• Clinical response is slow, and symptoms may persist for weeks

• Jarisch–Herxheimer reaction with fever, chills and

Diagnosis

•

readily available

• Serological testing:

•

1. IgM specific antibody titers peak 3–6 weeks after onset of disease 2. IgG antibody titers rise slowly and peak weeks to months later 3. Titers persist for years and should not be used to assess treatment 4. Localized erythema migrans, because it occurs 1–2 weeks after tick bite, usually does not show rising titers. Some patients treated early never develop elevated titers Enzyme immunosorbent assay (EIA): may give false-positive results; should be confirmed with immunoblot

Granuloma annulare Gyrate erythema Tinea corporis Urticaria Drug eruption

Treatment

by tick bite

• Clinical diagnosis • Borrelia cultures require special media and are not

positive results; should be confirmed with immunoblot Western immunoblot test: should be used to corroborate positive or equivocal EIA or IFA results 1. Both IgM and IgG should be assessed if early in disease 2. IgM not recommended if illness >1 month’s duration 3. Comparing acute- and convalescent-phase sera may be needed in some cases PCR is specific but limited in availability Widespread practice of ordering serologic tests for nonspecific symptoms should be discouraged, as positive tests are frequently false-positives

• •

•

malaise can occur transiently when therapy is started; nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory agents may be helpful Early localized disease: 1. Doxycycline 100 mg twice a day, orally for 14–21 days for children >8 years and nonpregnant women 2. Amoxicillin 25–50 mg/kg per day, divided into three doses (maximum 2 g per day) for 14–21 days Multiple erythema migrans: 1. Same oral regimen as early disease for 21 days Isolated facial palsy: 1. Same oral regimen as early disease but for 21–28 days 2. Treatment has no effect on palsy, but prevents further complications Arthritis: 1. Same oral regimen as for early disease but for 28 days

Mallory Chapter 08

27/1/05

2:00 pm

Page 147

Viral and rickettsial diseases

• Persistent or recurrent arthritis:

•

1. Ceftriaxone 75–100 mg/kg, intravenously or intramuscularly, once a day (maximum 2 g/day) for 14–21 days; or 2. Penicillin 300 000 U/kg per day intravenously, given in divided doses every 4 hours (maximum, 20 million U/day) for 14–21 days Carditis/meningitis or encephalitis: 1. Ceftriaxone 75–100 mg/kg intravenously or intramuscularly, once a day (maximum 2 g/day) for 14–21 days; or 2. Penicillin 300 000 U/kg per day, intravenously, given in divided doses every 4 hours (maximum, 20 million U/day) for 14–21 days Control measures: 1. Avoid tick-infested areas 2. Cover skin with clothing as much as possible 3. Permethrin can be sprayed on clothing to prevent tick attachment 4. Repellents containing diethyltoluamide (DEET) can be applied sparingly to skin; can be neurotoxic in high doses 5. Bathe with soap and water after outdoor exposure 6. Inspect the skin and remove ticks daily 7. Prophylactic antimicrobial treatment after tick bite is not usually recommended routinely, especially if the tick attachment is <24–48 hours

147

8. Analysis of ticks to determine infectivity is not recommended Prognosis

• Excellent for early disease • Guarded for disseminated or late disease References American Academy of Pediatrics. Committee on Infectious Diseases. Prevention of Lyme disease. Pediatrics 2000; 105: 142–7 Bachman DT, Srivastava G. Emergency department presentations of Lyme disease in children. Pediatr Emerg Care 1998; 14: 356–61 Eppes SC. Diagnosis, treatment, and prevention of Lyme disease in children. Paediatr Drugs 2003; 5: 363–72 Hengge UR, Tannapfel A, Tyring SK, et al. Lyme borreliosis. Lancet Infect Dis 2003; 3: 489–500 Huppertz HI. Lyme disease in children. Curr Opin Rheumatol 2001; 13: 434–40 McGinley-Smith DE, Tsao SS. Dermatoses from ticks. J Am Acad Dermatol 2003; 49: 363–92 Report of the Committee on Infectious Diseases. Red Book, 26th edn. American Academy of Pediatrics: Elk Grove Village, IL, 2003: 407–11 Singh-Behl D, La Rosa SP, Tomecki KJ. Tick-borne infections. Dermatol Clin 2003; 21: 237–44 Stanek G, Strle F. Lyme borreliosis. Lancet 2003; 362: 1639–47

Mallory Chapter 08

27/1/05

2:00 pm

Page 148

Mallory Chapter 09

27/1/05

2:01 pm

Page 149

9 FUNGAL DISEASES

SUPERFICIAL FUNGAL INFECTIONS Candida Major points

•

• Oral candidiasis (thrush) 1. Affects ~5% of healthy infants 2. Clinical presentation: white, raised patches on buccal mucosa, tongue and palate; may be described as having a ‘cheesy’ appearance or as ‘pseudomembranous’ patches; scraping reveals a raw, red base (Figure 9.1) 3. May be acquired from passage through the birth canal in a healthy newborn

•

• •

• Figure 9.1

Candida – thrush on the lips and tongue

4. Infants or older children with persistent oral thrush should be evaluated for predisposing factors (e.g. immunodeficiency, HIV) Diaper candidiasis 1. Clinical presentation: brightly erythematous (‘beefy red’) confluent patches with a sharply demarcated serpiginous border and satellite pustules; small rings of scale, edema, oozing Candidal paronychia 1. Seen in children who suck their fingers, in people who are exposed to excessive moisture, or in diabetics 2. Clinical presentation: chronic inflammation of the skin surrounding the nails; periungual erythema, edema and separation of the nail fold from the nail plate Congenital candidiasis/neonatal candidiasis (see Chapter 2) Chronic mucocutaneous candidiasis (CMC) 1. Recurrent or severe infections of the skin, mucous membranes and nails with Candida, most frequently C. albicans 2. Persistent infection, sometimes granulomatous, and resistant to therapy 3. Rare disorder 4. Majority of cases begin in the first 3 years of life 5. Male/female ratio = 1 6. Absence of visceral or disseminated sepsis 7. Often associated with genetic, immunologic or endocrine dysfunction 8. Most common immune defect is a specific inability to respond to antigens of C. albicans Systemic candidiasis 1. Candidal infection in the blood, urine or cerebrospinal fluid (CSF)

Mallory Chapter 09

150

•

27/1/05

2:01 pm

Page 150

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

2. Affects 2–4% of very-low-birth-weight infants 3. Associated with long-term hospitalization, invasive instrumentation, immunosuppression 4. Cutaneous findings: erythematous macules, papules and plaques Other manifestations of candida infection: folliculitis, candidal intertrigo, vaginitis and vulvovaginitis, esophagitis and laryngitis, intravenous line sepsis, candiduria Risk factors for invasive infection: 1. High risk: HIV, extreme prematurity, neutropenia, diabetes, chemotherapy, corticosteroid therapy 2. Increased risk: neutrophil defects (chronic granulomatous disease or myeloperoxidase deficiency), intravenous hyperalimentation, broad-spectrum antimicrobial therapy

Pathogenesis

• Causative pathogen is a yeast-like fungus of the genus Candida

• Most common is Candida albicans (50–60%),

• • • • • •

which is part of the normal flora of the gastrointestinal tract and mucocutaneous areas of humans; it is not part of the normal skin flora The yeast phase is the dominant form; the pseudohyphal (mycelial) phase is the invasive form; the chlamydospore is the resting state Mechanism of invasion is unclear Host defense factors against invasion include: intact stratum corneum, humoral immunity Person-to-person transmission rarely occurs Patients with immunodeficiency (e.g. HIV/AIDS, prematurity, organ transplantation, chemotherapy) are at risk for invasive/recurrent disease Other risk factors: endocrine dysfunction, malnutrition, prematurity, use of antibiotics

Diagnosis

• Characteristic clinical findings • KOH preparation shows pseudohyphae and budding yeast

• Culture is helpful but may be misleading; Candida can be cultured from non-infected skin

• Diagnosis of invasive candidiasis requires isolation •

of the organism from typically sterile body fluid or tissue (e.g. blood, CSF, bone marrow, biopsy) For early-onset, recurrent or recalcitrant candidal infections, suspect CMC and evaluate

for underlying endocrine and autoimmune disorders Differential diagnosis • Oral candidiasis 1. Lichen planus 2. Food in the mouth 3. Leukoplakia 4. Squamous cell carcinoma • Diaper candidiasis 1. Irritant contact dermatitis 2. Psoriasis 3. Allergic contact dermatitis • Candidal paronychia 1. Bacterial infection 2. Herpetic whitlow Treatment • Oral candidiasis 1. Oral nystatin suspension 100 000 U/ml four times a day PO, ‘swish and swallow’ 2. Clotrimazole troches 3. Elimination of predisposing factors (e.g. antibiotics) 4. In the immunocompromised: oral fluconazole or itraconazole • Skin infections 1. Topical nystatin is effective and inexpensive 2. Other topical antifungals: miconazole, clotrimazole, naftifine, ketoconazole, econazole, ciclopirox Vulvovaginal candidiasis • 1. Topical azoles are more effective than nystatin 2. Clotrimazole, miconazole, ketoconazole, others • Diaper candidiasis 1. Topical nystatin or antifungal creams 2. Oral nystatin may be of benefit, especially if there is thrush 3. Protective barrier (e.g. zinc oxide-containing ointments) after dermatitis has resolved 4. Elimination of predisposing factors, frequent diaper change, use of superabsorbent disposable diapers • Chronic mucocutaneous candidiasis 1. Usually refractory to traditional topical antifungal therapies and imidazole preparations 2. Systemic antifungal agents: oral fluconazole, oral itraconazole and low-dose IV amphotericin B (0.3 mg/kg per day, maximum 1.5 mg/kg per day) have been used successfully

Mallory Chapter 09

27/1/05

2:01 pm

Page 151

Fungal diseases

•

3. Immune enhancers 4. Maintenance on antifungal therapy may be necessary Systemic candidiasis 1. Early treatment is critical, based on clinical suspicion, as culture may take days 2. IV amphotericin B: drug of choice for disseminated disease 3. Alternative treatment: fluconazole IV or PO 4. Duration based on clinical response, presence or absence of neutropenia 5. Flucytosine may be used as adjuvant in cases with CNS involvement; can act synergistically with amphotericin B

151

• More prevalent in warm or moist climates • Clinical presentation: red, scaly papules coalescing

• •

into annular plaques; may see erythema, vesicles, pustules, bulla, crusting; often unilateral; may be pruritic (Figures 9.2–9.4) Tinea incognito – alteration in appearance when topical corticosteriod is applied (source of diagnostic confusion) Tinea gladiatorum – tinea corporis affecting wrestlers; lesions usually on neck and upper arms where there is physical contact

Prognosis

• Based on the severity of disease and underlying predisposing factors

• Disseminated or invasive candidiasis can be rapidly fatal

• Chronic mucocutaneous candidiasis has a high frequency of relapse; severe infections with other organisms may occur and result in serious morbidity or death References Friedlander SF, Rueda M, Chen BK, Caceres-Rios HW. Fungal, protozoan, and helminthic infections. In: Pediatric Dermatology, 3rd edn. Schachner LA, RC Hansen, eds. CV Mosby: St Louis, 2003: 1093–129

Figure 9.2 Tinea corporis – annular erythematous scaly plaque, acquired from a cat

Garcia Hidalgo L. Dermatological complications of obesity. Am J Clin Dermatol 2002; 3: 497–506 Kaufman D. Strategies for prevention of neonatal invasive candidiasis. Semin Perinatol 2003; 27: 414–24 Mengesha YM, Bennett ML. Pustular skin disorders: diagnosis and treatment. Am J Clin Dermatol 2002; 3: 389–400 Report of the Committee on Infectious Diseases. Red Book, 26th edn. American Academy of Pediatrics: Elk Grove Village, IL, 2003: 229–32 Rowen JL. Mucocutaneous candidiasis. Semin Perinatol 2003; 27: 406–13

Tinea corporis Synonym: ringworm Major points

• Dermatophyte infection of body surfaces, not otherwise designated to a specific body site

Figure 9.3 Tinea corporis – multiple inflammatory, annular lesions

Mallory Chapter 09

152

27/1/05

2:01 pm

Page 152

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Figure 9.4

Tinea corporis – acquired from a kitten

• Tinea profunda – unusual clinical presentation of a boggy mass resembling a kerion

• Majocchi granuloma – perifollicular or follicular

•

granulomatous inflammatory response to dermatophyte, often associated with topical steroid usage (Figure 9.5) Hypersensitivity eruption (dermatophytic or id reaction) – pruritic, fine papulovesicular eruption on trunk, hands, or face caused by a hypersensitivity reaction to fungal infection

Figure 9.5 Majocchi granuloma from tinea pedis treated with topical steroids

Treatment

• Topical treatment usually sufficient in limited

Pathogenesis

• Most common causes: Trichophyton tonsurans, T. •

rubrum and T. mentagrophytes, Microsporum canis and Epidermophyton floccosum Transmission by direct contact with infected humans, animals, or fomites

•

Diagnosis

• KOH preparation – scraping should be performed •

from scale with demonstration of hyphae in epidermal cells Culture on dermatophyte test medium (DTM) or Sabouraud dextrose agar

Differential diagnosis

• • • • • • •

Nummular eczema Granuloma annulare Candidiasis Erythema annulare centrifugum Psoriasis Pityriasis rosea Subacute cutaneous or discoid lupus erythematosus

•

disease: 1. Miconazole, clotrimazole, terbinafine, tolnaftate, naftifine, or ciclopirox, ketoconazole, econazole, oxiconazole, butenafine, or sulconazole until 1–2 weeks after clearance 2. Minimum duration of therapy recommended is 4 weeks 3. Treat until there is no scaling Oral antifungals for poor response or in extensive disease 1. Griseofulvin 20 mg/kg per day PO for 4 weeks given 1–2 times a day 2. Oral itraconazole, fluconazole and terbinafine (off label) Use of combination antifungal/corticosteroid (e.g. Lotrisone) can be associated with persistent/recurrent infection

Prognosis

• Cases resolve with treatment References Adams BB. Tinea corporis gladiatorum: a cross-sectional study. J Am Acad Dermatol 2000; 43: 1039–41

Mallory Chapter 09

27/1/05

2:01 pm

Page 153

Fungal diseases

153

Alston SJ, Cohen BA, Braun M. Persistent and recurrent tinea corporis in children treated with combination antifungal/corticosteroid agents. Pediatrics 2003; 111: 201–3 Greenberg HL, Shwayder TA, Bieszk N, Fivenson DP. Clotrimazole/betamethasone diproprionate: a review of costs and complications in the treatment of common cutaneous fungal infections. Pediatr Dermatol 2002; 19: 78–81 Gupta AK, Chaudhry M, Elewski B. Tinea corporis, tinea cruris, tinea nigra, and piedra. Dermatol Clin 2003; 21: 395–400 Report of the Committee on Infectious Diseases. Red Book, 26th edn. American Academy of Pediatrics: Elk Grove Village, IL, 2003: 619–20

Tinea pedis Synonym: athlete’s foot fungus Major points

Figure 9.6

Tinea pedis – typical scaling on bottom of foot

• Prevalence in industrialized countries approaches

• •

• • • •

10%; men have a 20% risk of developing tinea pedis; increases in incidence with age (probably due to increased exposure) Uncommon in young children; common in adolescents and adults Clinical presentation: scaly, pruritic, erythematous eruption on the plantar and dorsal surfaces of the feet with maceration, peeling, and fissuring in the lateral toe web spaces (especially in the 3rd and 4th interdigital spaces); may see vesicles (Figures 9.6 and 9.7) Toenails can be affected and dystrophic Commonly occurs in association with tinea cruris Often a family history is positive (usually an affected parent) Hypersensitivity reaction to the fungus (dermatophytid or id reaction) may be present on the hands and feet with pruritic vesicles and papules

Pathogenesis

• Causative organisms: Trichophyton rubrum (60%), • •

Trichophyton mentagrophytes (25%), Epidermophyton floccosum (10%) and mixed (5%) Transmission is by person-to-person contact; often source of exposure in children is a parent Fungi also found in damp areas – swimming pools, locker rooms

Figure 9.7 Tinea pedis – bullous, annular lesion with a positive KOH preparation

Diagnosis

• Characteristic clinical manifestations • KOH preparation – scraping reveals branching hyphae

• Fungal culture to confirm on DTM or Sabouraud media

Mallory Chapter 09

154

27/1/05

2:01 pm

Page 154

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Differential diagnosis

• • • • • •

Dyshidrotic eczema Contact dermatitis Atopic dermatitis Juvenile plantar dermatosis (‘sweaty-sock syndrome’) Psoriasis Pitted keratolysis

Weinstein A, Berman B. Topical treatment of common superficial tinea infections. Am Fam Physician 2002; 65: 2095–102 Zaias N, Rebell G. Clinical and mycological status of the Trichophyton mentagrophytes (interdigitale) syndrome of chronic dermatophytosis of the skin and nails. Int J Dermatol 2003; 42: 779–88

Treatment

Tinea capitis

•

Syndrome: Scalp ringworm

•

Topical antifungal therapy 1. Miconazole, haloprogin, clotrimazole, ciclopirox, terbinafine, butenafine, tolnaftate, ketoconazole, econazole, naftifine, oxiconazole, or sulconazole 2. Duration of treatment ~2–3 weeks Oral antifungals for severe, chronic, or recalcitrant tinea pedis 1. Oral griseofulvin for 6–8 weeks 2. Oral itraconazole or terbinafine (not US Food and Drug Administration (FDA)-approved for this indication) Superimposed bacterial infections treated with antibacterial agents (topical or systemic); soak feet in dilute bleach water (Dakin solution 0.25%) once daily for 15 minutes Prevention of recurrences: 1. Foot hygiene: keep feet cool and dry; drying between toes; absorbent socks; air shoes between wearings 2. Topical antifungal powder (e.g. ZeaSORB AF®)

Major points

• Most common in preschool or school-age • • • •

Prognosis

• Rarely, may be complicated by bacterial superinfection including lymphangitis, lymphadenitis and cellulitis

•

References Gupta AK, Chow M, Daniel CR, Aly R. Treatments of tinea pedis. Dermatol Clin 2003; 21: 431–62 McBride A, Cohen BA. Tinea pedis in children. Am J Dis Child 1992; 146: 844–7

•

children (ages 3–9 years) Incidence is highest in Black children Most common cause is Trichophyton tonsurans in North America (>90%) Clinical presentation is an incomplete alopecia especially prominent on the crown and occipital regions, with scaling Other clinical presentations: 1. Asymptomatic scaling 2. Widespread scaling with minimal hair loss (seborrheic dermatitis-like pattern) (Figures 9.8–9.10) 3. Black-dot tinea – discrete areas of hair loss with stubs of broken hairs resembling dots 4. Kerion – painful, inflamed, crusted mass with purulent discharge; often with associated fever and regional lymphadenopathy (Figure 9.11) 5. Favus – inflammation and scarring characterized by yellow cup-shaped crusts (scutula), around a hair; rare in the USA Classified as ectothrix (spores on the surface of the hairs) which fluoresces with Wood’s lamp or endothrix (spores inside the hair shaft) which does not fluoresce Hypersensitivity reaction (dermatophytic or id reaction); pruritic, fine, papulovesicular eruption on trunk, hands, or face may occur (Figure 9.12)

Pathogenesis

Report of the Committee on Infectious Diseases. Red Book, 26th edn. American Academy of Pediatrics: Elk Grove Village, IL, 2003: 621–3

• Caused by dermatophytic fungi; common

Sweeney SM, Wiss K, Mallory SB. Inflammatory tinea pedis/manum masquerading as bacterial cellulitis. Arch Pediatr Adolesc Med 2002; 156: 1149–52

•

etiologic agents are T. tonsurans (anthropophilic) and Microsporum canis (zoophilic) Transmission is person-to-person or fomites such as combs, clothing, bedding, toys and furniture

Mallory Chapter 09

27/1/05

2:02 pm

Page 155

Fungal diseases

155

Figure 9.10 Tinea capitis – scaling typical of Trichophyton tonsurans with additional tinea corporis

Figure 9.8 Tinea capitis – scaly patch of hair loss with Microsporum canis

Figure 9.11 in the scalp

Figure 9.9 Tinea capitis – typical diffuse scaling mistaken for dandruff

• Histology: neutrophils in the upper stratum corneum; stain for fungi with periodic acid-Schiff (PAS) or methenamine silver stain

• Asymptomatic individuals, especially family members, act as reservoirs for infection (~25% of family members affected) Diagnosis

• Clinical examination • KOH preparation: observe spores within brokenoff hairs, rarely hyphae

• Culture – collect specimen by rubbing a sterile •

cotton swab over the scalp and inoculating in fungal media or DTM Skin biopsy may be necessary to confirm diagnosis in unusual cases, especially Majocchi granuloma

Kerion – marked inflammation and crusting

Differential diagnosis

• • • • • •

Alopecia areata Trichotillomania Staphylococcal infection Traction alopecia Seborrheic dermatitis Psoriasis

Treatment

• Topical antifungals not fully effective • Oral griseofulvin:

Mallory Chapter 09

156

27/1/05

2:02 pm

Page 156

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

• • • • •

2. Ketoconazole 1–2% shampoo 2–3 times a week Newer oral antifungal therapies shown to be safe and effective: (see doses in Chapter 21) terbinafine, itraconazole, fluconazole Obtain follow-up cultures until negative result is obtained Evaluate household contacts and treat if necessary For severe inflammatory kerion: prednisone 1 mg/kg per day in addition to antifungal therapy, can hasten reduction of scaling and pruritus Secondary bacterial infection in a kerion should be treated with appropriate antibiotic therapy for Staphylococcus coverage

Prognosis

• Usually resolves without permanent alopecia • With severe inflammatory disease, scarring and Figure 9.12

Hypersensitivity reaction to tinea capitis

permanent hair loss may occur, but tends to be rare and spotty References Abdel-Hamid IA, Agha SA, Moustafa YM, El-Labban AM. Pityriasis amiantacea: a clinical and etiopathologic study of 85 patients. Int J Dermatol 2003; 42: 260–4 Chen BK, Friedlander SF. Tinea capitis update: a continuing conflict with an old adversary. Curr Opin Pediatr 2001; 13: 331–5 Gupta AK, Adam P, Dlova N, et al. Therapeutic options for the treatment of tinea capitis caused by Trichophyton species: griseofulvin versus the new oral antifungal agents, terbinafine, itraconazole, and fluconazole. Pediatr Dermatol 2001; 18: 533–8

Figure 9.13 plaques

•

Tinea versicolor with hyperpigmented scaly

1. Microsize griseofulvin 20 mg/kg per day (maximum 1 g/24 hours) 2. Ultramicrosize griseofulvin 10 mg/kg per day (maximum 750 mg/24 hours) 3. Take BID with fatty foods to increase absorption 4. Minimal duration of treatment is 4–6 weeks; continue for 2 weeks past clinical resolution Adjuvant treatment to decrease fungal shedding and curb spread of infection: 1. Selenium sulfide 2.5% shampoo 2–3 times a week

Gupta AK, Cooper EA, Ginter G. Efficacy and safety of itraconazole use in children. Dermatol Clin 2003; 21: 521–35 Gupta AK, Cooper EA, Lynde CW. The efficacy and safety of terbinafine in children. Dermatol Clin 2003; 21: 511–20 Report of the Committee on Infectious Diseases. Red Book, 26th edn. American Academy of Pediatrics: Elk Grove Village, IL, 2003: 617–18

Onychomycosis Synonym: tinea unguium Major points

• Less common in children than adults; rare in children <6 years old

Mallory Chapter 09

27/1/05

2:02 pm

Page 157

Fungal diseases

• Prevalence of onychomycosis in children is • • • • •

0.3–0.44% Mycotic nail infection accounts for roughly 30% of nail diseases seen in childhood Most commonly affects the toenails Most common type in children is distal and lateral subungual onychomycosis Higher prevalence in children with Down syndrome or HIV infection Usually associated with tinea pedis

Pathogenesis

• Most common causative agent is Trichophyton •

rubrum, followed by Candida sp. and T. interdigitale Transmission usually from a family member

Diagnosis

• KOH preparation – scrape underneath the nail

• •

plate or take fine clippings or filings through the entire thickness of the nail with visualization of hyphae Histology of nail clipping with PAS staining can demonstrate fungal elements For severe disease, must exclude immunodeficiency, HIV, endocrinopathies

Differential diagnosis

• • • •

Psoriasis Lichen planus Alopecia areata Twenty-nail dystrophy

157

Prognosis

• May be recurrent References Arrese JE, Pierard GE. Treatment failures and relapses in onychomycosis: a stubborn clinical problem. Dermatology 2003; 207: 255–60 Faergemann J, Baran R. Epidemiology, clinical presentation and diagnosis of onychomycosis. Br J Dermatol 2003; 149 (Suppl 65): 1–4 Ghannoum MA, Hajjeh RA, Scher R, et al. A large-scale North American study of fungal isolates from nails: the frequency of onychomycosis, fungal distribution and antifungal susceptibility patterns. J Am Acad Dermatol 2000; 43: 641–8 Gupta AK, Chang P, Del Rosso JQ, et al. Onychomycosis in children: prevalence and management. Pediatr Dermatol 1998; 15: 464–71 Gupta AK, Skinner AR. Onychomycosis in children: a brief overview with treatment strategies. Pediatr Dermatol 2004; 21: 74–9 Gupta AD, Skinner AR. Onychomycosis in children: a brief overview with treatment strategies. Pediatr Dermatol 2004; 21: 74–9 Scher RK, Baran R. Onychomycosis in clinical practice: factors contributing to recurrence. Br J Dermatol 2003; 149 (Suppl 65): 5–9

Tinea versicolor Synonyms: pityriasis versicolor

Treatment

Major points

• Mild cases may respond to topical therapy:

• Worldwide distribution • Superficial chronic fungal infection • Common in temperate regions: prevalence of ~1%

• • •

1. Terbinafine or ketoconazole creams 2. Ciclopirox 8% lacquer (Penlac) Oral antifungals needed for moderate to severe disease: griseofulvin, itraconazole, terbinafine, fluconazole Adjuvant surgical debridement or excision of affected nail may be of benefit for severely affected nails Foot hygiene to reduce recurrence: keep feet cool, clean and dry; absorbent socks; antifungal foot powders; well-fitting shoes; avoid barefoot contact with areas with a high density of fungal spores, such as bathroom floors, gymnasiums and locker rooms

during warmer parts of the year

• More common in tropical and subtropical regions: • • • • •

incidence of up to 40% in tropics Majority of cases occur during adolescence 5–7% of cases occur in children <13 years Male/female ratio = 1 Family history is often positive Clinical presentation: 1. Discrete or confluent hypopigmented or hyperpigmented (fawn-colored or brown) oval macules and patches with slight, fine scale (Figures 9.13 and 9.14)

Mallory Chapter 09

158

27/1/05

2:02 pm

Page 158

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

3. Confluent and reticulate papillomatosis – may represent a host response to P. orbiculare 4. Systemic infection in patients receiving intralipid therapy: neonates with cardiovascular disease, or immunosuppressed Pathogenesis

• Causative agent is Pityrosporum orbiculare (Malassezia furfur)

• Lipophilic yeast, part of the normal flora of the skin

• Not contagious • P. orbiculare changes from the round, budding Figure 9.14 scale

blastospore form to the hyphal form under predisposing conditions: 1. Exogenous factors: heat, humidity or moisture, or occlusive clothing 2. Endogenous factors: adrenalectomy, diabetes, pregnancy, malnutrition, systemic corticosteroids, immunosuppression, hyperhidrosis, seborrheic dermatitis

Tinea versicolor with typical furfuraceous

Diagnosis

• Characteristic skin findings • Wood’s lamp may aid in diagnosis of subclinical patches

• KOH preparation – ‘spaghetti and meatballs’ appearance of budding yeast cells and hyphae

• Culture/biopsy usually unnecessary Differential diagnosis

Figure 9.15 Sporotrichosis – grouped erythematous papules and nodules

•

2. Distribution over back, upper chest and shoulders, neck and proximal extremities 3. The face is commonly affected in children (rarely in adults) 4. Lesions fail to tan normally and are more prominent in summer months Other related conditions: 1. Pityrosporum folliculitis 2. Obstructive dacryocystitis – from colonization of the lacrimal sac

• • • • • • •

Vitiligo Pityriasis alba Postinflammatory hypopigmentation Psoriasis Seborrheic dermatitis Erythrasma Dermatophytosis

Treatment

• Topical therapy 1. Selenium sulfide 2.5% applied once a day for 7 days for 10 minutes, and washed off; then on the first and third day of the month for 6 months 2. Propylene glycol 50% in water applied once or twice a day 3. Topical azoles: ketoconazole, miconazole, oxiconazole once or twice a day

Mallory Chapter 09

27/1/05

2:02 pm

Page 159

Fungal diseases

4. Topical terbinafine 1% cream

• Systemic therapy: ketoconazole 400 mg in a single dose, repeated 1 week later; exercise to induce sweating increases skin concentration and increases effectiveness of systemic therapy

159

• Severe disease manifestations: disseminated •

visceral, osteoarticular meningeal, and pulmonary sporotrichosis Usually affects normal hosts; disease more severe in immunosuppressed people

Prognosis

• Repigmentation may take months or years • Recurrence rates high, 60–80%, with topical therapy References Gupta AK, Batra R, Bluhm R, Faergemann J. Pityriasis versicolor. Dermatol Clin 2003; 21: 413–29 Report of the Committee on Infectious Diseases. Red Book, 26th edn. American Academy of Pediatrics: Elk Grove Village, IL, 2003: 623–4 Terragni, L, Lassagni A, Oriani A, Gelmetti C. Pityriasis versicolor in the pediatric age. Pediatr Dermatol 1991; 8: 9–12 Vander Straten MR, Hossain MA, Ghannoum MA. Cutaneous infections dermatophytosis, onychomycosis, and tinea versicolor. Infect Dis Clin North Am 2003; 17: 87–112

Figure 9.16 on the leg

Blastomycosis – isolated verrucous plaque

• Risk factors for severe disease: strong association DEEP FUNGAL INFECTIONS Sporotrichosis

•

Major points

• Worldwide distribution • Clinical presentation: subacute or chronic cutaneous and subcutaneous infection 1. Lymphocutaneous sporotrichosis – commonly on upper or lower extremities or face; incubation period 1–3 weeks; begins with small, firm, subcutaneous, violaceous nodules with regional lymphadenopathy; over the next 2 weeks, secondary nodules and streaking appear following the course of lymphatics; often ulcerates; facial localization common in children (Figure 9.15) 2. Fixed cutaneous sporotrichosis – erythematous papules, nodules, or verrucous plaques (may ulcerate) with scale or crust surrounded by violaceous halo; does not extend past point of inoculation 3. Children more commonly have solitary lesions

with HIV infection, diabetes, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD) Pulmonary and disseminated sporotrichosis is rare in children

Pathogenesis

• Causative agent is Sporothrix schenckii, a dimorphic • •

• •

fungus which exists as a mold in nature and as yeast in vivo at a temperature of 37°C The organism grows in sphagnum moss, thorny plants (especially roses), decaying vegetation, soil and hay Infection occurs with exposure to environmental foci at the site of minor trauma; specific activities associated with disease include rose gardening, topiary production, Christmas tree farming, hay baling, masonry; inoculation may occur after motor vehicle or other accidents or animal (especially cat) bites/scratches Pulmonary sporotrichosis – transmitted by inhalation of spores T-cell-mediated immunity is important in host defense; disease more severe in patients with AIDS

Mallory Chapter 09

160

27/1/05

2:02 pm

Page 160

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Diagnosis

• Culture scrapings or exudates from site of infection

• •

on Sabouraud dextrose agar at room temperature; read at 4–7 days; conversion to yeast form demonstrated on brain–heart infusion agar at 37°C Skin biopsy for culture/examination with special stains (e.g. PAS) demonstrates organisms No definitive serologic test available

Differential diagnosis

• • • • • • • •

Bacterial infection Pyoderma Spider or insect bite Non-tuberculous mycobacteria infection Nocardiosis Deep fungal infections: blastomycosis, paracoccidiomycosis, chromoblastomycosis Tularemia Leishmaniasis

Treatment

• Itraconazole 100 mg/day PO for 3–6 months • Saturated solution of potassium iodide (SSKI)

•

1. For a 50–70 kg person: 5 drops (50 mg/drop) three times daily, increasing 1 drop per dose per day to a maximum of 30–35 drops TID for 4–6 weeks after resolution of the lesion (do not increase if there is severe nausea) 2. For infants and smaller children: 1 drop TID, increasing to a maximum of 10 drops TID for 4–6 weeks until resolution of lesions Local heat therapy applied ~1 hour/day for many months (baths at ~45°C, hot compress, hand-held heater); watch for burns 1. Basis for treatment is that growth of some strains is inhibited by temperature of >35°C, killed at a temperature of 39°C Amphotericin B – for pulmonary, disseminated and meningeal disease, and in children with immunodeficiency

Prognosis

• May lead to scarring or hyperpigmentation References Burch JM, Morelli JG, Weston WL. Unsuspected sporotrichosis in childhood. Pediatr Infect Dis J 2001; 20: 442–5

De Araujo T, Marques AC, Kerdel F. Sporotrichosis. Int J Dermatol 2001; 40: 737–42 Koga T, Matsuda T, Matsumoto T, Furue M. Therapeutic approaches to subcutaneous mycoses. Am J Clin Dermatol 2003; 4: 537–43 Queiroz-Telles F, McGinnis MR, Salkin I, Graybill JR. Subcutaneous mycoses. Infect Dis Clin North Am 2003; 17: 59–85, viii Report of the Committee on Infectious Diseases. Red Book, 26th edn. American Academy of Pediatrics: Elk Grove Village, IL, 2003: 558–9

Blastomycosis Synonyms: North American blastomycosis, Gilchrist disease Major points • Endemic in midwest and south central USA, the Great Lakes region, upstate New York, Eastern Canada, Manitoba • Cases have been reported in Africa, and rarely in Central and South America, Europe, India and the Middle East • Rare in children • Clinical findings: acute, primary pulmonary infection (often subclinical) occurs after a 30–45-day incubation period; this may resolve or progress to chronic pulmonary infection or dissemination with extrapulmonary manifestations, such as cutaneous findings (secondary cutaneous blastomycosis) • Skin is involved in 40–80% of cases where there is extrapulmonary disease • Cutaneous lesions are verrucous or ulcerative with heaped-up borders; usually slowly enlarging; erythema nodosum has been reported; may see subcutaneous nodules (Figure 9.16) • Other organs involved include: bones and joints, genitourinary system, CNS (mass lesion or meningitis) • Primary cutaneous blastomycosis – relatively rare, inoculation occurs after trauma (e.g. dog bite, open wounds); lymphangitis and regional lymphadenopathy often accompany the skin lesion; no evidence of systemic infection; the organism can be recovered from the skin lesion • Immunosuppression is a risk factor for disease, and also for more aggressive disease with higher mortality • Intrauterine or congenital infections occur rarely

Mallory Chapter 09

27/1/05

2:02 pm

Page 161

Fungal diseases

161

• Other cutaneous infections: sporotrichosis, nocardiosis, atypical mycobacteria, tularemia, leishmaniasis Treatment

• Amphotericin B IV has greatest proven treatment success (cure rates up to 97%)

• Itraconazole 4–10 mg/kg per day has been used to treat non-life-threatening blastomycosis in children; treatment course is many months Prognosis Figure 9.17

Mucormycosis – acquired from infected tape

• May result in chronic pulmonary disease • In immunosuppressed patients, serious disease is frequent with complications of CNS disease, acute respiratory distress syndrome, fungemia and high mortality rates

Pathogenesis

• Causative agent is Blastomyces dermatitidis, a

• • • •

dimorphic fungus, growing in a mycelial form at room temperature and in a yeast form at 37°C; reproduces with characteristic broad-based budding The organism is found in warm, damp soil Transmission to humans is most often via lungs; aerosolized conidia are inhaled and transform to the yeast form at body temperature Person-to-person transmission does not occur Cellular immunity and adequate neutrophil and humoral responses are among the factors necessary for host defense

Diagnosis

• Clinical findings • Histology: thick-walled, broad-based budding yeasts

• Specimen collection:

• •

1. Sputum: organisms can be seen on KOH preparation or by special stains 2. Wet preparation or special stains of exudates from cutaneous lesions, synovial fluid, or soft tissue abscesses usually reveal organisms 3. CSF is usually negative Culture needed for definitive diagnosis Serologic assays not sensitive or specific

Differential diagnosis

• Pyoderma gangrenosum • Squamous cell carcinoma

References Bradsher RW, Chapman SW, Pappas PG. Blastomycosis. Infect Dis Clin North Am 2003; 17: 21–40 Lemos LB, Baliga M, Guo M. Blastomycosis: the great pretender can also be an opportunist. Initial clinical diagnosis and underlying diseases in 123 patients. Ann Diagn Pathol 2002; 6: 194–203 Pappas PG, Dismukes WE. Blastomycosis, Gilchrist’s disease revisited. Curr Clin Top Infect Dis 2002; 22: 61–77 Report of the Committee on Infectious Diseases. Red Book, 26th edn. American Academy of Pediatrics: Elk Grove Village, IL, 2003: 219–20 Zampogna JC, Hoy MJ, Ramos-Caro FA. Primary cutaneous North American blastomycosis in an immunosuppressed child. Pediatr Dermatol 2003; 20: 128–30

Mucormycosis Major points

• Acute, rapidly progressive, fatal disease occurring •

in immunosuppressed patients caused by opportunistic fungi Cutaneous mucormycosis: 1. Superficial: gradual onset with slow progression, associated with the use of contaminated adhesive tape; no vascular or deep tissue involvement (Figure 9.17) 2. Gangrenous: progresses rapidly with painful ulcers and eschars; vascular invasion with

Mallory Chapter 09

162

•

27/1/05

2:02 pm

Page 162

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

hematogenous spread common; poor prognosis; usually occurs in the setting of skin trauma (e.g. IM injection, open fracture, insect bites, motor vehicle accidents) in patients with an underlying predisposing condition a. Premature infants: associated with contaminated adhesive tape use or wooden tongue depressors for limb splinting; very grave prognosis in this setting b. Older children with underlying myeloproliferative disease Other clinical presentations: 1. Rhinocerebral: most common, affects diabetics with underlying ketoacidosis 2. Pulmonary: more common in patients with hematologic malignancies 3. Gastrointestinal: usually seen only with severe malnutrition; high (98%) mortality rate 4. Disseminated: more common in patients with hematologic malignancies Infection affects patients with neutropenia, diabetes, generalized immunosuppression (hematologic malignancy, bone marrow or solid organ transplantation, HIV/AIDS), deferoxamine therapy, trauma, burns Rarely occurs in immunocompetent individuals

•

Differential diagnosis

• Aspergillosis • Ecthyma gangrenosum (pseudomonas infection) Treatment

• Extensive surgical debridement of necrotic tissue • •

• • •

• •

opportunistic ‘bread molds’ Most common pathogen is Rhizopus oryzae Organism is present in decaying fruits and vegetables, seeds, soil and animal excreta Infection occurs after skin/soft tissue trauma, ingestion of spores (gastrointestinal form), use of contaminated tape in a patient with underlying predisposing factors Angiotrophic nature of the fungus results in vascular invasion and destruction leading to skin necrosis and ulceration Infection occurs in patients with impaired neutrophil or mononuclear cell phagocytic function

Diagnosis

• Early diagnosis is critical • Tissue biopsy usually needed for diagnosis – direct microscopic examination with hematoxylin and

required (due to poor penetration of antifungal agents) Amphotericin B, IV Correction of underlying disease

Prognosis

• High mortality rates; especially with infection in infants

• Older children have somewhat better prognosis • Prognosis is best for the cutaneous form of the disease

• Mortality rates: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Pathogenesis

• Caused by fungi in the family Mucoraceae;

eosin (H&E), PAS staining or Gomori’s methenamine silver Organism grows on routine bacterial and fungal culture media

•

Cutaneous 16% Rhinocerebral 67% Pulmonary 83% Disseminated and gastrointestinal disease ~100% Early detection, extensive surgical debridement, and systemic amphotericin B necessary for survival

References Boyd AS, Wiser B, Sams HH, King LE Jr. Gangrenous cutaneous mucormycosis in a child with a solid organ transplant: a case report and review of the literature. Pediatr Dermatol 2003; 20: 411–15 Leitner C, Hoffmann J, Zerfowski M, Reinert S. Mucormycosis: necrotizing soft tissue lesion of the face. J Oral Maxillofacial Surg 2003; 61: 1354–8 Prabhu RM, Patel R. Mucormycosis and entomophthoromycosis: a review of the clinical manifestations, diagnosis and treatment. Clin Microbiol Infect 2004; 10: 31–47

Mallory Chapter 10

27/1/05

2:12 pm

Page 163

10 INFESTATIONS AND ENVIRONMENTAL HAZARDS

Scabies

• Symptoms may vary: asymptomatic carriers, or few

Major points

• Papules on wrists, fingerwebs, periaxillary skin, • • • • • •

genitalia and abdomen In infants, lesions more generalized: feet, scalp and face Multiple excoriations, erythematous papules, honeycolored crusts, some pustules and secondary impetigo Pruritus, often increased in evening/night Erythematous nodules (nodular scabies) more common on trunk and axillae, particularly in infants (Figure 10.1) Debilitated or immunosuppressed individuals who are unable to scratch may be severely affected Burrows (linear superficial lesions) are diagnostic; usually seen on wrists, interdigital webs, or feet of infants (Figures 10.2 and 10.3)

Figure 10.1 Nodular scabies – usually more prominent in the axillary areas

• •

scattered itchy papules, or hundreds of lesions, or thick crusts which have hundreds of mites (crusted scabies) High index of suspicion in pruritic patients Family members are often itchy, although degree of itching may vary

Pathogenesis

• Caused by eight-legged human mite, Sarcoptes •

•

scabiei, <0.4 mm in length Female mite remains within stratum corneum where she lays eggs and can move 0.5–5 mm/day; female mite lives 30–40 days; burrows up to 5 mm/day; lays 2–3 eggs/day; eggs take 10–14 days to mature Human contact or contagious clothing or bed sheets (fomites) necessary for transmission

Figure 10.2 Scabies – typical pruritic papules on the hands and finger webs

Mallory Chapter 10

164

27/1/05

2:12 pm

Page 164

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Differential diagnosis

• • • • • • • •

Atopic dermatitis Lichen planus Dermatitis herpetiformis Papular urticaria (insect bites) Impetigo Folliculitis Contact dermatitis Histiocytosis

Treatment

• Permethrin cream 5% (see Table 10.1) Figure 10.3 Scabies – burrow showing linear tunnel with tiny, dark dot at end which is the mite

• Newly infested individuals may not itch for 3–6 weeks and may be a source of infestation Diagnosis

• Confirmed by scraping an unscratched burrow, demonstrating a mite, egg, feces (scybala) microscopically (Figure 10.4)

•

1. Dispense 60 g per patient; no refills 2. Apply thin layer of cream from neck down to toes 3. Be sure to include finger webs, armpits, groin 4. Leave cream on for 8–12 hours (overnight) 5. Take a hot shower or bath in the morning 6. Wash clothes used in previous 3 days through the hot cycle of the washer 7. Reapply cream (same technique) 1 week later 8. Do not apply cream more than twice Gamma benzene hexachloride lotion or cream 1% (lindane, Kwell®, Gamene®) 1. Dispense 60 g per patient; no refills 2. A bath is not recommended before applying the lotion

Table 10.1 treatment

Instruction sheet for scabies

Permethrin cream 5%

Figure 10.4 Scabies – typical eggs and feces seen microscopically

• Technique of scraping:

•

1. Scrape several lesions, preferably unscratched burrows with a no. 15 blade 2. Place scales on glass slide, cover with immersion oil or KOH and coverslip 3. Microscope objective on low power: 4× or 10× Adult female mite has a round body, eight legs, length ~0.3 mm; male is half that size

A bath is not necessary before applying the cream. If you take a bath, wait half an hour before applying the cream. Apply a thin layer from the neck down to the toes. Be sure not to forget finger webs, fingernails, armpits and groin. Leave cream on for 8–12 hours (overnight). After this, take a hot shower or bath to remove the cream. At the time of the shower, wash clothing and bed linen used in the previous 3 days in the hot cycle of the washer. Reapplication is necessary 1 week later (left on 8–12 hours – same routine). Be sure to keep your return appointment with your doctor. Do not apply this cream more than is recommended by your doctor

Mallory Chapter 10

27/1/05

2:12 pm

Page 165

Infestations and environmental hazards

•

3. Apply a thin layer of cream or lotion from the neck down to the toes. Be sure to include finger webs, armpits and groin 4. Leave cream on for 8–12 hours (overnight) 5. In the morning, take a hot shower or bath 6. At time of shower, wash clothing and bed linen used in previous 3 days in hot cycle of washer 7. Reapply cream or lotion (same technique) 1 week later (left on for 8–12 hours) with same routine 8. Lindane should not be used by pregnant women, women who are breast feeding, or very young infants 9. Do not apply this lotion more than is recommended Precipitated sulfur ointment 6–10% (for infants, small children, and pregnant patients) 1. Apply thin layer of ointment from neck down to toes 2. Be sure to apply between fingers, toes, in armpits and groin 3. For babies who have lesions on their heads, apply ointment directly to these areas 4. Leave ointment on for 24 hours 5. After this time, the patient may bathe 6. Reapply ointment in the same manner. Leave on for 24 hours 7. Again reapply ointment; three times each for 24 hours (total 72 hours) 8. After 72 hours, wash clothing and bed linen used in previous 3 days in hot cycle of washer and dryer 9. Sulfur ointment is messy and odiforous, and may stain clothing Ivermectin (oral) 150–400 µg/kg for teens and adults (off label) 1. Single dose orally is 95% effective; repeat at 2 weeks if necessary 2. Administered as 6-mg scored tablets (range 9–18 mg depending upon weight) Other points: 1. Follow-up in 2–3 weeks to prevent patient from continually treating themselves for itching. 2. Patients may need hydrocortisone 1–2.5% cream or ointment to calm residual itching 3. Be sure to treat all family members and others with close personal contact 4. People do not get human scabies from animals

165

References Avila-Romay A, Alvarez-Franco M, Ruiz-Maldonado R. Therapeutic efficacy, secondary effects, and patient acceptability of 10% sulfur in either pork fat or cold cream for the treatment of scabies. Pediatr Dermatol 1991; 8: 64–6 Hoke AW, Maibach HI. Scabies management: a current perspective. Cutis 1999; 64: 2–16 Huynh TH, Norman RA. Scabies and pediculosis. Dermatol Clin 2004; 22: 7–11 Kim K-J, Rosh K-H, Choi J-H, et al. Scabies incognito presenting as urticaria pigmentosa in an infant. Pediatr Dermatol 2002; 19: 409–11 Meinking TL, Taplin D, Hermida JL, et al. The treatment of scabies with ivermectin. N Engl J Med 1995; 333: 26–30 Paller AS. Scabies in infants and small children. Semin Dermatol 1993; 12: 3–8 Pruksachatkunakorn C, Damrongsak M, Sinthupuan S. Sulfur for scabies outbreaks in orphanages. Pediatr Dermatol 2002; 19: 448–53 Usha V, Gopalakrishnan Nair TV. A comparative study of oral ivermectin and topical permethrin cream in the treatment of scabies. J Am Acad Dermatol 2000; 42: 236–40

Pediculoses (louse infestations) Major points

• Body louse infestations present with excoriated papules and pustules on trunk and perineum

• Pediculosis capitis usually presents with pruritic papules at nape of neck (Figure 10.5)

• Nits and lice can be detected in scalp or clothing, especially seams of clothing

• Nits are white ovoid bodies, tightly adherent to hair shafts

• Head lice are infrequent in Black patients • Pubic lice (‘crabs’) occasionally with blue-black crusted macules (maculae ceruleae)

• Pubic lice can also be seen in eyelashes or the scalp of young children Pathogenesis

• Caused by Pediculus humanus (human body louse) •

with subspecies capitis (head lice) or humanus (body lice) and Pthirus pubis (crab lice) Lice are six-legged insects, 1–4 mm long; they attach to skin or hair and ingest blood

Mallory Chapter 10

166

27/1/05

2:12 pm

Page 166

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

• Dermatitis herpetiformis • Factitial excoriations • Pseudonits (retained external hair root sheath) Treatment

• Pediculosis Capitis (Head lice)

Figure 10.5 Pediculosis (lice) – pruritic papules and nits at the nape of the neck

• The female louse produces new offspring every 2 • • •

weeks, attaching to hair and depositing eggs along the hair shaft Crowded living conditions are ideal for spreading infestation through direct contact Fomites (e.g. hairbrushes, hats, scarves, coats, clothes) Body lice carry typhus in some endemic areas

Diagnosis

• Observation of nits or lice by visual inspection or microscopically (Figure 10.6) Differential diagnosis

• Scabies • Insect bites (mosquitoes, fleas)

•

• Figure 10.6 Pediculosis (lice) – louse with nits microscopically (courtesy of Dr Anne Lind)

1. Permethrin 1% (Nix®) one application of cream rinse, left on for 10 minutes after shampoo, then rinsed out 2. Pyrethrins with piperonyl butoxide (RID®, A-200 Pyrinate Shampoo®) two applications (5–7 days apart) applied undiluted to the scalp, left on 10 minutes, then rinsed out 3. Lindane 1% shampoo (by prescription) 10minute application then rinsed out; repeat in 1 week 4. Malathion 0.5% (Ovide®) excellent ovicidal, but odiferous. Apply to hair, let dry for 8–12 hours, then shampoo out. Repeat in 1 week. Caution: flammable 5. Ivermectin 200–250 µg/kg in a single oral dose (off label) 6. Other hints a. Apply cream rinse and comb hair to remove nits b. Chemicals used to ‘dissolve’ nits (of questionable value): vinegar, glacial acetic acid, Step 2® (formic acid); use with combing c. Metal nit combs – helpful if hair is thick d. Nit picking – if hair is thin (may want to cut individual hairs) e. R & C Spray® – for use on clothing, furniture which cannot be washed or dry cleaned; do not use on people f. Pseudonits – flakes of skin on hair shafts which may resemble nits; to differentiate, observe microscopically Pediculosis corporis (Body lice) 1. Proper hygiene, clean clothes, clean housing conditions 2. Lindane lotion 1% (left on 8 hours, then washed off ) Pediculosis pubis (crab lice) 1. Lindane 1% shampoo a. 5-minute application, then wash out b. Repeat in 1 week c. Nits should be removed

Mallory Chapter 10

27/1/05

2:12 pm

Page 167

Infestations and environmental hazards

167

2. Synergized pyrethrins (OTC)-(RID®, R & C Shampoo®, A-200®) a. Apply undiluted, leave on 10 minutes, then wash off b. Second application in 1 week 3. Treat sexual contacts or other appropriate contacts 4. Eyelash involvement a. Use petrolatum 3–5 times a day for 8 days b. Remove nits c. Do not use lindane or pyrethrins on the eyelids References Burgess IF. Human lice and their control. Annu Rev Entomol 2004; 49: 457–81 Drugs for head lice. Medical Letter 1997; 39 (Issue 992): 6–7 Frankowski B, Weiner LB. Head lice. Pediatrics 2002; 110: 638–43 Huynh TH, Norman RA. Scabies and pediculosis. Dermatol Clin 2004; 22: 7–11 Ko CJ, Elston DM. Pediculosis. J Am Acad Dermatol 2004; 50: 1–12 Meinking TL, Serrano L, Hard B, et al. Comparative in vitro pediculicidal efficacy of treatments in a resistant head lice population in the United States. Arch Dermatol 2002; 138: 220–4 Williams LK, Reichert A, MacKenzie WR, et al. Lice, nits and school policy. Pediatrics 2001; 107: 1011–15

Papular urticaria (insect bite reactions)

Figure 10.7 Papular urticaria (insect bite reactions) – multiple, erythematous, pruritic papules

8. Common in spring or summer 9. Some immunosuppressed children or those with HIV infections can have severe exaggerated reactions 10. Harvest mites (chiggers) a. Trombiculidae splendens b. Bright red mites c. Tends to occur in intertriginous areas and around waistband d. Larval form takes blood meal then drops off

Major points

• Clinical points 1. Erythematous pruritic papules (Figure 10.7) 2. May be grouped in clusters; where the insect bit several times, it looks like ‘breakfast, lunch and dinner’ 3. Occasional vesicles or bullae, especially in young children 4. May be anywhere on the body, but typically on exposed skin 5. Children aged 18 months to 10 years typically affected 6. Recurrent crops common 7. One child in the family may be the only person bitten

Pathogenesis

• Lesions caused by delayed hypersensitivity reaction to insect bite

• Fleas (dog or cat), mosquitoes, bedbugs, lice, scabies or mites (fowl, grain, grass) can be implicated in most cases Diagnosis

• Clinical recognition • May need biopsy confirmation in rare or unusual cases

• Histology: wedge-shaped perivascular lymphoid infiltrate with eosinophils, endothelial prominence and spongiosis or focal epidermal necrosis

Mallory Chapter 10

168

27/1/05

2:12 pm

Page 168

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Differential diagnosis

• • • •

Viral exanthems (varicella and others) Scabies Atopic dermatits Pityriasis lichenoides et varioliformis acuta

Hymenoptera stings Major points

• Bee, wasp, or hornet stings followed by local

Treatment

• Avoid offending insects • Veterinarian should inspect household pets for • • • • •

fleas or mites Insecticides used in house can kill fleas in carpet or furniture Protective clothing with long sleeves and long trousers Insect repellents containing DEET 10% or less may be applied to clothing or skin (Caution: can be neurotoxic) Pruritic lesions can be individually treated with a topical steroid (low strength to medium) 2–3 times a day Oral antihistamines (diphenhydramine, hydroxyzine) may help reduce itching

•

reaction: 1. Immediate pain and burning followed by intense, local, erythematous reaction with swelling, pruritus and an urticarial plaque (Figure 10.9) 2. Honeybee leaves stinger in skin which can be gently removed by scraping with a fingernail or blade to prevent further envenomation 3. Other Hymenoptera (e.g. yellow jackets) may sting repeatedly Systemic reactions (1–3% of population): 1. Angioedema or generalized urticaria within 10 minutes 2. Laryngeal edema and/or bronchospasm 3. Rare anaphylaxis, shock and death

Prognosis

• Excellent, once offending agent is removed References Asada H, Miyagawa S, Sumikawa Y, et al. CD4+ Tlymphocyte-induced Epstein–Barr virus reactivation in a patient with severe hypersensitivity to mosquito bites and Epstein–Barr virus-infected NK cell lymphocytosis. Arch Dermatol 2003; 139: 1601–7 Demain JG. Papular urticaria and things that bite in the night. Curr Allergy Asthma Rep 2003; 3: 291–303 Diven DB, Newton RC, Ramsey KM. Heightened cutaneous reactions to mosquito bites in patients with acquired immunodeficiency syndrome receiving zidovudine. Arch Intern Med 1988; 148: 2296 Goddard J. Physician’s Guide to Arthropods of Medical Importance, Boca Raton, FL: 4th edn. CRC Press, 2003 Moffitt JE. Allergic reactions to insect stings and bites. South Med J 2003; 96: 1073–9 Tokura Y, Ishihara S, Tagawa S, et al. Hypersensitivity to mosquito bites as the primary clinical manifestation of a juvenile type of Epstein–Barr virus-associated natural killer cell leukemia/lymphoma. J Am Acad Dermatol 2001; 45: 569–78

Figure 10.8 Hymenoptera sting – marked erythema and pruritus 2 days after a sting

• Fire ant bites (Solenopsis) – intense local inflammatory response followed by superficial pustules; bites/stings are usually multiple Pathogenesis

• Hymenoptera order of insects includes bees, wasps, • •

hornets and ants Venom contains phospholipase A2 which liberates acute inflammatory mediators Other active agents: hyaluronidase, histamine, acid phosphatase, norepinephrine and others

Mallory Chapter 10

27/1/05

2:12 pm

Page 169

Infestations and environmental hazards

Diagnosis

• Rare systemic findings: tachycardia, arrhythmia,

• Clinical diagnosis and history Differential diagnosis

•

• • • •

•

Urticaria Snake bite Lacerations Animal bite

Treatment

• Apply ice or cold compresses • Systemic reactions may require subcutaneous • • •

epinephrine (adrenaline), steroids, antihistamines and treatment of shock if necessary In highly sensitive patients, consider desensitization Potent or ultrapotent topical steroid for persistent reactions Avoidance and pest control

Prognosis

• Excellent for local reactions. • Guarded in sensitive patients with severe systemic symptoms References Cohen PR. Imported fire ant stings: clinical manifestations and treatment. Pediatr Dermatol 1992; 9: 44–8 Ditto AM. Hymenoptera sensitivity: diagnosis and treatment. Allergy Asthma Proc 2002; 23: 381–4 Golden DB. Stinging insect allergy. Am Fam Physician 2003; 67: 2541–6

•

Gardner TL, Elston DM. Painful papulovesicles produced by the puss caterpillar. Cutis 1997; 60: 125–6 Kuspis DA, Rawlins JE, Krenzelok EP. Human exposures to stinging caterpillar: Lophocampa caryae exposures. Am J Emerg Med 2001; 19: 396–8 Maier H, Spiegel W, Kinaciyan T, et al. The oak processionary caterpillar as the cause of an epidemic airborne disease: survey and analysis. Br J Dermatol 2003; 149: 990–7 Severs GA, Elston DM. What’s eating you? Megalopyge opercularis. Cutis 2003; 71: 445–8

Spider bites Major points

• Two spiders in USA which cause most problems: •

Caterpillar dermatitis (lepidopterism)

• Lepidoptera (order) consists of butterflies and moths

• Incidental contact with insect larvae, especially hairs or spines of caterpillars

• Presents with widespread red macules and urticarial wheals

• Chronic cutaneous lesions: lichen simplex •

chronicus, post-inflammatory hyperpigmentation Other symptoms: inflammation of skin, eyes, respiratory system with dermatitis, conjunctivitis, keratitis, rhinitis, wheezing

chest pain, dyspnea, peripheral neuropathy, convulsions, shock Treatment of symptoms: antihistamines, antipruritic lotions, mid-potency topical corticosteroids Stripping skin with adhesive tape will help remove remaining hairs Symptoms last hours to 10 days

References

•

Major points

169

• •

black widow spider (Lactrodectus mactans) and brown recluse spider (Loxosceles reclusa) Initial bites may be either painful (black widow spider) or nonpainful until several hours later (brown recluse spider) Hemorrhagic painful blister or skin necrosis follows, which may extend for several days until size reaches its maximum (Figure 10.9) Common on exposed skin (e.g. ankles or hands) Systemic reactions: vomiting, headache, chills, malaise, thrombocytopenia, hemolysis and hemoglobinuria; probably related to amount of venom injected

Pathogensis

• Spiders with powerful jaws which penetrate skin, inject venom and produce a reaction

• Loxosceles reclusa found in midwestern USA (particularly Arkansas, Tennessee, Texas and Missouri); mainly in attics, cellars and abandoned buildings

Mallory Chapter 10

170

27/1/05

2:12 pm

Page 170

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

• Close follow-up until lesion stabilized • Corticosteroids for systemic symptoms (e.g.

•

hemolysis or thrombocytopenia); best given IV and patient observed for other symptoms for ~3 days Recognition of spider and its habitat is important in avoiding these bites. In endemic areas, shake out clothes before getting dressed and shake bed clothes before retiring Antivenin if available if reation severe

References Figure 10.9 Spider bite – necrosis and pain from Loxosceles reclusa

•

1. Size 8–10 mm, brown, with thin legs, and has a distinct violin shape on its dorsal thorax Lactrodactus mactans 1. Causes acute pain and edema at site of bite; systemic symptoms caused by neurotoxin α-lactrotoxin 2. Often found in old outhouses and bite exposed buttocks

Diagnosis

• Identify spider if possible • Central necrosis and pain may be prominent Differential diagnosis

• • • • • • • •

Vascular infarction Vasculitis Bacteremia Ecthyma gangrenosum Streptococcal gangrene Herpes zoster Cutaneous diphtheria Anthrax

Treatment

• Ice packs directly to site will reduce spread of • • • •

venom in tissues Elevation of area and bed rest advised until necrosis has stopped, usually several days Surgical excision not recommended and may spread toxin Dapsone may be helpful early 25% of bites become infected with Staphylococcus aureus – use antibiotics to cover

Elston DM. What’s eating you? Loxosceles reclusa (brown recluse spider). Cutis 2002; 69: 91–2, 94–5 Isbister GK, Graudins A, White J, Warrell D. Antivenom treatment in arachnidism. J Toxicol Clin Toxicol 2003; 41: 291–300 Orion E, Matz H, Ruocco V, Wolf R. Parasitic skin infestations II, scabies, pediculosis, spider bites: unapproved treatments. Clin Dermatol 2002; 20: 618–25 Sams HH, Dunnick CA, Smith ML, King LE. Necrotic arachnidism. J Am Acad Dermatol 2001; 44: 561–73 Sams HH, Hearth SB, Long LL, et al. Nineteen documented cases of Loxosceles reclusa envenomation. J Am Acad Dermatol 2001; 44: 603–8 Wendell RP. Brown recluse spiders: a review to help guide physicians in nonendemic areas. South Med J 2003; 96: 486–90 Williams ST, Khare VK, Johnston GA. Severe intravascular hemolysis associated with brown recluse spider envenomation. Am J Clin Pathol 1995; 104: 463–7

Tick bites Major points • • • •

•

Usually painless, and often noticed when engorged tick is found (Figure 10.10) Local urticaria, pruritus, or erythema can occur several days after the bite (Figure 10.11) Common locations: scalp, axilla and groin Persistent pruritic papule may occur from retained tick mouthparts forming a granulomatous reaction Borrelia burgdorferi, which causes Lyme disease, can be carried by ticks. Observation of an expanding ring of erythema (erythema chronicum migrans) at the site of tick attachment is seen within 3 weeks after the bite (See Chapter 8)

Mallory Chapter 10

27/1/05

2:12 pm

Page 171

Infestations and environmental hazards

•

• •

Figure 10.10 Tick embedded in skin, thought to be a ‘changing mole’

•

Rare reaction: tick paralysis with fever, nausea, abdominal cramping, headache and ascending symmetric paralysis similar to Guillain–Barré syndrome

Ticks occur in wooded areas primarily in warmer months; also occur from handling dogs or clothing Larval and nymphal stages attach their heads into skin for blood meal, and become engorged Ticks cut skin surface with sharp chelicerae, introducing the proboscis, and secreting saliva into wound. Saliva contains an anticoagulant, an anesthetic and a cement substance, as well as possible Borrelia. As tick engorges, Borrelia proliferate in the tick gut and enters patient’s blood after 24–48 hours

Diagnosis • •

Careful clinical inspection and history Nymphal stages are small and may be overlooked (size 1–2 mm, ‘seed ticks’)

Differential diagnosis

Pathogenesis

• • •

•

Treatment

Major species 1. Dermacentor variabilis (American dog tick); carrier of Rocky Mountain spotted fever 2. Amblyomma americanum (Lone Star tick) in Southern USA; carrier of Rocky Mountain spotted fever and Ehrlichia 3. Ixodes dammini (deer tick) in Eastern USA; carrier of Borrelia burgdorferi (Lyme disease) 4. Ixodes ricinus in Europe; carrier of Borrelia (erythema chronicum migrans)

•

• • • •

Nevocellular nevus Skin tag Pyogenic granuloma

Remove tick: 1. Grasp the body of tick as close to the mouthparts as possible 2. Apply slow, gentle, firm, outward pressure until the tick releases its mouthparts 3. Not recommended: burning tick with a match, applying noxious substances to skin, squeezing, twisting or jerking the tick Cleanse skin with alcohol and apply topical antibiotic ointment Dispose of the tick by putting it in a jar of alcohol for a few minutes, then flush down the toilet Keep the tick for examination later; may be helpful in endemic Lyme disease areas Prevention is important 1. Avoid tick-infested areas, especially tall grass and dense brush 2. Wear long sleeves, and long trousers tucked into boots 3. Wear insect repellents containing DEET 4. Inspect children and dogs after exposure

References Figure 10.11

Tick bite with erythematous patch

171

Eppes SC. Diagnosis, treatment, and prevention of Lyme disease in children. Paediatr Drugs 2003; 5: 363–72

Mallory Chapter 10

172

27/1/05

2:12 pm

Page 172

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

McGinley-Smith DE, Tsao SS. Dermatoses from ticks. J Am Acad Dermatol 2003; 49: 363–92 Meinking T, Taplin D. Infestations. In Pediatric Dermatology, 3rd edn. Schachner L, Hansen R. eds. Mosby: New York, 2003: 1141–80 Spach DH, Liles WC, Campbell GL, et al. Tick-borne diseases in the United States. N Engl J Med 1993; 329: 936–47 Stanek G, Strle F. Lyme borreliosis. Lancet 2003; 362: 1639–47 Wilson ME. Prevention of tick-borne diseases. Med Clin North Am 2002; 86 :219–38

Cutaneous larva migrans Synonym: creeping eruption Major points • •

• • •

Within a few hours, there is pruritic dermatitis at the site of exposure Serpiginous, linear, erythematous, slightly raised, pruritic tracts 2–3 mm wide with bizarre patterns (Figure 10.12) Vesicles, pain or edema in area Feet most frequently affected Peripheral eosinophilia (can be up to 35% of cells)

Pathogenesis •

•

Caused by Ancylostoma braziliensis or A. caninum, the dog and cat hookworm (most common in southeastern North America) 1. History of playing along southeastern or central shoreline of USA or in sandbox where cat or dog excreta may have been deposited 2. Larvae hatch and penetrate bare skin where they migrate and die within 4–6 weeks 3. Larvae can migrate 1–2 cm/day Other organisms less commonly causing larva migrans: Bunostmum phlebotomum (cattle hookworm), A. duodenale, and Necator americanus

Diagnosis •

Characteristic history and inspection: linear, serpiginous, pruritic lesions

Differential diagnosis • • •

Annular erythema Erythema chronicum migrans Tinea corporis

Figure 10.12 Cutaneous larva migrans – typical erythematous, serpiginous, linear streak

• • •

Tinea pedis Nummular eczema Visceral larva migrans

Treatment •

• • • •

For A. braziliensis, topical thiabendazole 15% cream applied 3–4 times/day for 5–7 days; apply cream beyond erythematous lesions Freeze advancing burrow with liquid nitrogen Return visit 4–5 days after starting treatment to determine therapeutic response Ivermectin 12 mg PO, single dose 0.2 mg/kg (off label) High potency topical steroids for itching

Prognosis • •

Lesions are self-limited because humans are ‘deadend’ hosts Duration is variable, usually lasting 4–6 weeks

References Albanese G, Venturi C, Galviati G. Treatment of larva migrans cutanea (creeping eruption): a comparison between albendazole and traditional therapy. Int J Dermatol 2001; 40: 67–71 Brenner MA, Patel MB. Cutaneous larva migrans: the creeping eruption. Cutis 2003; 72: 111–15 Caumes E, Datry A, Paris L, et al. Efficacy of ivermectin in the therapy of cutaneous larva migrans. Arch Dermatol 1992; 128: 994–5 Caumes E. Treatment of cutaneous larva migrans. Clin Infect Dis 2000; 30: 811–14

Mallory Chapter 10

27/1/05

2:12 pm

Page 173

Infestations and environmental hazards

173

Davies HD, Sakuls P, Keystone JS. Creeping eruption. Arch Dermatol 1993; 129: 588–91

Jones N, Khoosal M. Infected dog and cat bites. N Engl J Med 1999; 340: 1841–2

Elgart ML. Creeping eruption. Arch Dermatol 1998; 134: 619–20

Overall KL, Love M. Dog bites to humans – demography, epidemiology, injury, and risk. J Am Vet Med Assoc 2001; 218: 1923–34

Van den Enden E, Stevens A, Van Gompel A. Treatment of cutaneous larva migrans. N Engl J Med 1998; 339: 1246–7

Animal bites Major points • • • • •

Dog and cat bites (pets) are most common Victim usually a child who is teasing or playing with the animal Location usually the hand Human bites and monkey bites are often infected with aerobic or anaerobic mouth organisms Wild animals such as skunks, bats, foxes, coyotes, raccoons, other carnivores and some monkeys should be considered rabid until proven otherwise

Presutti RJ. Prevention and treatment of dog bites. Am Fam Physician. 2001; 63: 1567–72 Weiss HB, Friedman DI, Coben JH. Incidence of dog bite injuries treated in emergency departments. J Am Med Assoc 1998; 279: 51–3

Snake bites Major points •

Pathogenesis •

Most common organism causing secondary infection is Pasteurella multocida

Diagnosis •

History of a bite and clinical appearance

Differential diagnosis •

•

• •

•

Other bites or stings

Treatment •

•

Culture wound for bacteria, then wash and leave open if possible (except face) Antibiotics should be given: amoxicillin–clavulanic acid, cefuroxime or clindamycin and a fluoroquinolone Tetanus immunization if needed Rabies immunization considered if needed

•

• • • •

Prognosis • • •

Excellent unless lesions are large or multiple Scarring is possible Secondary infection

•

Snakes 1. Family Viperidae a. Crotalinae (pit vipers). North America: rattlesnake, cottonmouth, copperhead b. Viperinae (true vipers). Africa, Europe, other continents: vipers, adders 2. Elapidae a. Tropical and warm temperate zones: coral snakes, cobras, mambas 3. Hydrophidae a. Hydrophinae. Indopacific region: sea snakes 7000 bites recorded annually in USA, 2000 by venomous snakes Degree of toxicity depends upon potency of the venom, amount injected, size of person bitten, and size of snake Pain occurs immediately after bite followed by edema, numbness, ecchymosis and painful lymphadenopathy within 30 minutes Typical victims are males, aged 17–27 years Most bites are on extremities, between April and September Skin will have distinct fang punctures Immediate pain occurs, followed by edema, numbness, ecchymosis and painful lymphadenopathy within 30 minutes (Figure 10.13) Systemic symptoms (must be differentiated from terror): nausea, vomiting, sweating, fever, slurred speech, bleeding

References

Pathogenesis

Gandhi RR, Liebman MA, Stafford BL, et al. Dog bite injuries in children: a preliminary survey. Am Surg 1999; 65: 863–4

•

Pit-viper venom increases permeability of capillary membranes, causing edema, hypotension, hemolysis and other symptoms

Mallory Chapter 10

174

27/1/05

2:12 pm

Page 174

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

• •

first-aid treatments provided, timing of definitive treatment and state of health of the victim Common necrosis of skin with scar formation Rarely fatal

References Dart RC, McNally J. Efficacy, safety, and use of snake antivenoms in the United States. Ann Emerg Med 2001; 37: 181–8 Gold BS, Dart RC, Barish RA. Bites of venomous snakes. N Engl J Med 2002; 347: 347–56

Figure 10.13 Snake bite from copperhead showing marked swelling, necrosis and pain

•

Venoms are mixtures of potent proteolytic enzymes and low molecular-weight peptides with toxic effects

Diagnosis •

Clinical diagnosis with history

Hall EL. Role of surgical intervention in the management of crotaline snake envenomation. Ann Emerg Med 2001; 37: 175–80 Juckett G, Hancox JG. Venomous snakebites in the United States: management review and update. Am Fam Physician 2002; 65: 1367–74 Lalloo DG, Theakston RD. Snake antivenoms. J Toxicol Clin Toxicol 2003; 41: 277–90; 317–27 Rosen PB, Leiva JI, Ross CP. Delayed antivenom treatment for a patient after envenomation by Crotalus atrox. Ann Emerg Med 2000; 35: 86–8

Differential diagnosis •

Other venomous animal or insect bites

Cercarial dermatitis (swimmer’s itch)

Treatment

Major points

•

• • • • • •

Call regional Poison Control Center (National hotline: 800-222-1222) 1. Identify species 2. Aggressive supportive care, laboratory evaluation, and observation for at least 8–12 hours 3. Antivenom if available and indicated 4. Polyvalent pit viper antivenin should be used for severe snake bites (except the coral snake) as soon as possible Clean and cover the wound; baseline circumferential measurements of necrosis Limb should be immobilized in a functional position Tetanus toxoid Antibiotic coverage, if indicated Hospitalization with careful observation for dropping blood count and hemolysis Surgical debridement may need to be performed 3–10 days after the bite

Prognosis •

Severity depends upon size and species of snake, amount and degree of toxicity of venom, location,

•

Clinical characteristics 1. Begins with urticarial lesions (usually 10–30 but can be >200) and prickling sensation starting half an hour after exposure to infected water (Figure 10.14) 2. Within 24 hours, pruritic erythematous papules occur in exposed areas not covered by a swimsuit 3. Headache, fever and superinfection occasionally seen Occurs in freshwater lakes of upper Great Lakes region of North America and throughout the world

Pathogenesis • • • •

Caused by Schistosoma cercariae (larval form of schistosomes) Humans are accidental hosts in life cycle of schistosomes Primary hosts (waterfowl, birds, mice, deer, etc.) deposit eggs in excreta in water Eggs hatch forming miracidia which infect snails, where they transform into cercariae

Mallory Chapter 10

27/1/05

2:12 pm

Page 175

Infestations and environmental hazards

• • • •

175

Severe eruption can be treated with oral prednisone 1 mg/kg per day for 5 days Treat secondary infection if present Not contagious Prevention is difficult. Barrier clothing or application of petrolatum prior to swimming may be of some benefit

Prognosis •

Lesions are self-limited

References Folster-Holst R, Disko R, Rowert J, et al. Cercarial dermatitis contracted via contact with an aquarium: case report and review. Br J Dermatol 2001; 145: 638–40 Gonzales E. Schistosomiasis, cercarial dermatitis, and marine dermatitis. Dermatol Clin 1989; 7: 291–300

Figure 10.14

•

• •

Cercarial dermatitis (swimmer’s itch)

In host, cercariae attach to skin and penetrate into dermis and blood vessels, passing to the gastrointestinal tract; eggs are discharged into feces, completing the life cycle In humans, ceracariae do not penetrate the blood vessels, but die in the superficial papillary dermis Cercarial proteins stimulate delayed-type hypersensitivity response manifest as an erythematous rash and itching

Sangueza OP, Lu D, Sangueza M, Pereira CP. Protozoa and worms. In Dermatology. Bolognia JL, Jorizzo JL, Rapini R, eds. Mosby: London, 2003: 1295–320

Seabather’s eruption Synonym: marine dermatitis Major points •

Diagnosis •

Typical distribution after history of swimming in fresh water

Differential diagnosis • • • • • • • •

Seabather’s eruption Insect bites Impetigo Varicella Insect bites Contact dermatitis Scabies Jellyfish stings

Pathogenesis •

Topical steroid creams (low or mid-strength), drying lotions, oatmeal baths and oral antihistamines may help pruritus

Caused by stinging larvae of sea anemones, Portuguese man-of-war, or thimble jellyfish; type determined by geographical location

Diagnosis •

Treatment •

Clinical characteristics 1. Erythematous macules, papules or wheals that itch or burn 2. May progress to vesiculopapules and heal with crusts in 7–10 days 3. Occurs under covered areas (e.g. swimsuit, bathing cap, wet suit areas), beginning shortly after bathing in seawater 4. Symptoms usually noticed after exiting water 5. Systemic symptoms (e.g. fatigue, malaise, fever, lymphadenopathy)

Clinical lesions in typical bathing suit distribution after salt water swimming

Differential diagnosis • •

Atopic dermatitis Jellyfish stings

Mallory Chapter 10

176

• • • • • • •

27/1/05

2:12 pm

Page 176

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Swimmer’s itch Insect bites Contact dermatitis Caterpillar dermatitis Varicella Viral eruptions Urticaria

Treatment • • • •

Wash and dry skin immediately after bathing Symptomatic relief with topical steroids, antipruritic lotions, or oral antihistamines Oral prednisone 1 mg/kg per day if symptoms are severe Avoid occluding clothes, such as T-shirts, wet suits

Prognosis •

Self-limited eruption; resolves in 2 weeks

References Adams BB. Dermatologic disorders of the athlete. Sports Med 2002; 32: 309–21 Freudenthal AR, Joseph PR. Seabather’s eruption. N Engl J Med 1993; 329: 542–4 Segura Puertas L, Burnett JW, Heimer de la Cotera E. The medusa stage of the coronate scyphomedusa Linuche unguiculata (‘thimble jellyfish’) can cause seabather’s eruption. Dermatology 1999; 198: 171–2 Tomchik RS, Russell MT, Szmant AM, Black NA. Clinical perspectives on seabather’s eruption, also known as ‘sea lice’. J Am Med Assoc 1993; 269: 1669–72 Wong DE, Meinking TL, Rosen LB, et al. Seabather’s eruption. J Am Acad Dermatol 1994; 30: 399–406

Mallory Chapter 11

27/1/05

2:16 pm

Page 177

11 HYPERSENSITIVITY DISORDERS/ UNCLASSIFIED DISORDERS

Urticaria Major points

• 15–20% of children will have at least one episode by adolescence

• Classified as acute if it lasts for <6 weeks, chronic • • • •

•

if >6 weeks Usually acute (not chronic) in children Etiologic factor can often be identified in children Frequent association with atopy Presents with circumscribed, slightly elevated, erythematous, edematous plaques that persist for minutes to hours; typical wheal and flare; usually pruritic; often presents at points of pressure (e.g. belt-line, palms, soles); individual lesions rarely last for more than 24–48 hours, but new lesions often arise as older ones clear (Figures 11.1 and 11.2) Food-related urticaria often has associated itching and swelling of the lips, mucous membranes,

Figure 11.2 Urticaria – annular plaques which have become confluent. These lesions were gone the next day

• • • • •

Figure 11.1

Urticaria – generalized pruritic wheals

palate and tongue with gastrointestinal (GI) symptoms (e.g. diarrhea) Papular urticaria occurs on the lower extremities of children as a result of insect bites Dermatographism – sharply demarcated wheal and erythematous flare occurring within seconds of stroking the skin Giant urticaria – large lesions of 6–10 cm in diameter Anaphylaxis – life-threatening medical emergency characterized by the sudden onset of urticaria, angioedema, dyspnea and hypotension Angioedema – deep edema of the subcutaneous tissue manifesting as diffuse swelling; often affects the hands, feet, eyelids and lips 1. Mild angioedema accompanies ordinary urticaria in 10% of infants and children

Mallory Chapter 11

178

27/1/05

2:16 pm

Page 178

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

2. Occurs more severely in: a. Anaphylaxis b. Serum sickness c. Hereditary angioedema – autosomal dominant deficiency in C1 esterase inhibitor Pathogenesis

Diagnosis

• Complete history and physical examination

• •

• Results from dilatation of capillaries, arterioles and venules with increased permeability

• Mediators: histamine released from circulating

•

mast cells and basophils, anaphylotoxins, kinins, arachadonic acid metabolites, acetylcholine (cholinergic urticaria) Mechanism/etiologic factors: 1. Immunologic factors: type I IgE-mediated hypersensitivity reaction; type II hypersensitivity reaction; type III hypersensitivity reaction (serum sickness); activation of alternate complement pathway 2. Nonimmunologic factors: cholinergic effects, direct effect of physical agents, drugs 3. Modulating factors: alcohol, heat, fever, exercise and emotional stress, endocrine factors 4. Genetic factors: may play a role in chronic urticaria 5. Infections: association with streptococcal pharyngitis, otitis media, sinusitis, upper respiratory infection, mononucleosis, hepatitis, coxsackie infections, mycoplasma infections, parasitic infections, fungal infections 6. Drugs: a. Allergic reaction: penicillins, others b. Histamine liberators (even in normal individuals): codeine, morphine, cocaine, meperidine, quinine, thiamine, pilocarpine, polymyxin, dextran, D-tubocurarine 7. Foods/additives: cow’s milk allergy (infants), eggs, nuts, shellfish and other sea foods, chocolate, strawberries, grains 8. Insect bites and stings: fleas, bed bugs, mites, bees, fire ants 9. Acute contact urticaria: nettles, cat scratch, animal saliva, sea lice, moth or butterfly scales 10. Physical agents or pressure 11. Localized heat or cold 12. Sun exposure (solar urticaria) 13. Exposure to water (aquagenic urticaria)

•

looking for infection, drug history, travel, environmental history, pet exposure, food history Test for dermatographism Other tests as indicated: ice cube test (cold urticaria), exercise test or methacholine test (cholinergic urticaria), pressure test (pressure urticaria), tepid towel test (aquagenic urticaria) Laboratory studies as indicated: streptococcal throat culture, complete blood count (CBC), streptozyme, erythrocyte sedimentation rate (ESR), urinalysis, complement levels, transaminases (AST and ALT), mycoplasma titers, sinus films, chest X-ray, urine culture, stool for ova and parasites, C1 esterase inhibitor level (if angioedema is present)

Differential diagnosis

• • • • • • • • •

Erythema multiforme Systemic lupus erythematosus Dermatomyositis Porphyria Dermatitis herpetiformis Bullous pemphigoid Vasculitis Guttate psoriasis Pityriasis rosea

Treatment

• H1-type oral antihistamines

• • •

1. Over-the-counter oral medications such as chlorpheniramine and diphenhydramine (Benadryl) are often adequate 2. Prescription medications: hydroxyzine (Atarax®) or azatadine 3. Continue treatment for at least 1 week after resolution of hives Identification and removal of etiologic agent if possible (e.g. food, drug) or treat infection Reassurance For anaphylaxis: epinephrine and airway/cardiovascular support; wear Medical Alert bracelet

Prognosis

• Acute urticaria – excellent prognosis in the absence of serious disease

Mallory Chapter 11

27/1/05

2:16 pm

Page 179

Hypersensitivity disorders/unclassified disorders

1. Rare prodrome, mild if present, with low-grade fever, cough, decreased appetite 2. Fixed red papules which develop into target/iris lesions 3. Target or iris lesions – regular circular macule or plaque that enlarges centrifugally, forming three zones of color change, and may coalesce with other lesions; central zone appears as dusky erythematous macule with bulla and/or crust (indicating epidermal damage) surrounded by lighter area and a purplish red external ring (Figure 11.3) 4. Vesicles and bullae 5. Symmetrically distributed in acral distribution on extensor surfaces of extremities and face 6. Mucous membrane involvement can be mild or absent, or may have painful oral erosions 7. Predilection for sun-exposed skin 8. May exhibit Koebner phenomenon 9. Frequently recurrent 10. May or may not have a history of preceding HSV 1 or HSV 2 infection (~50%) 11. Itching and/or burning sensation may occur

• 20–30% of cases of acute urticaria will evolve into •

chronic or recurrent disease Chronic urticaria – prognosis for early resolution better than in adults 1. Urticaria only: average duration 6 months 2. Angioedema only: average duration 1 year 3. Urticaria with angioedema: average duration 5 years 4. Cholinergic urticaria: average duration 7 years 5. Dermatographism: average duration 2 years

References Beattie PE, Dawe RS, Ibbotson SH, Ferguson J. Characteristics and prognosis of idiopathic solar urticaria. Arch Dermatol 2003;139:1149-54 Greaves MW. Chronic idiopathic urticaria. Cur Opin Allergy Clin Immunol 2003; 3: 363–8 Kozel MMA, Bossuyt PMM, Mekkes JR, Bos JD. Laboratory tests and identified diagnoses in patients with physical and chronic urticaria and angioedema: a systematic review. J Am Acad Dermatol 2003; 48: 409–16 Mortureux P, Leaute-Labreze C, Legrain-Lifermann V, et al. Acute urticaria in infancy and early childhood. Arch Dermatol 1998; 134: 319–23 Muller BA. Urticaria and angioedema: a practical approach. Am Fam Physician 2004; 69: 1123–8 Poon M, Reid C. Do steroids help children with acute urticaria? Arch Dis Child 2004; 89: 85–6 Sackesen C, Sekerel BE, Orhan F, et al. The etiology of different forms of urticaria in childhood. Pediatr Dermatol 2004; 21: 102–108

Pathogenesis

• Presumed to be a delayed hypersensitivity reaction •

with cytotoxic attack on keratinocytes bearing foreign (e.g. viral) antigens HSV has been the most prevalent precipitating factor identified in erythema multiforme minor; can be detected by polymerase chain reaction (PCR) of skin

Zembowicz A, Mastalerz L, Setkowicz M, et al. Safety of cyclooxygenase 2 inhibitors and increased leukotriene synthesis in chronic idiopathic urticaria with sensitivity to nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory drugs. Arch Dermatol 2003; 139: 1577–82

Erythema multiforme Synonym: erythema multiforme minor Major points

• Acute, self-limited cutaneous disease • Herpes simplex virus (HSV 1 or 2) is the major precipitating factor

• Most common in young adults, rare in younger children

• Clinical features:

179

Figure 11.3 Erythema multiforme – target lesions with bullous component

Mallory Chapter 11

180

27/1/05

2:16 pm

Page 180

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

• Other etiologic factors: drugs, Histoplasma infection and orf

• Histology: interface dermatitis with exocytosis,

Weston WL, Morelli JG. Herpes simplex virus-associated erythema multiforme in prepubertal children. Arch Pediatr Adolesc Med 1997; 151: 1014–16

apoptotic keratinocytes and a perivascular mononuclear cell infiltrate Diagnosis

Stevens–Johnson syndrome/toxic epidermal necrolysis

• Characteristic clinical findings • Skin biopsy if diagnosis is in doubt • No laboratory studies usually necessary

Major points

• Stevens–Johnson syndrome (SJS) and toxic

Differential diagnosis

• • • • • •

Giant urticaria Drug reaction Polymorphous light eruption Bullous pemphigoid Vasculitis Systemic lupus erythematosus

Treatment

• Symptomatic treatment: • • • •

1. Oral antihistamines for itching/burning 2. Oral antacids for oral ulcers, for soothing effect Topical antibiotics to prevent secondary infection Preventative treatment: prophylactic oral acyclovir can prevent recurrences, use for 6–12 months Intermittent acyclovir ineffective unless used early during outbreak Systemic steroids if given early for recurrences

Prognosis

• • • •

epidermal necrolysis (TEN) are on a spectrum and have considerable overlap (see Chapter 13) Severe cutaneous reaction in which the individual appears acutely ill Rare in infants and children compared to teens and adults Combined incidence of SJS and TEN is approximately 1.5–2 cases per million per year in the general population Stevens–Johnson syndrome (erythema multiforme major): 1. Drugs are the major precipitating factor 2. Mycoplasma pneumoniae infection associated in children and teens 3. Clinical features: a. 1–14 day prodrome of high fever, sore throat, malaise b. Rapid onset of cutaneous blistering with epidermal detachment beginning with target lesions (Figures 11.4–11.6)

• Lesions fade over 1–3 weeks without specific treatment

• Usually lesions heal without sequelae, but may have mild scarring or hypopigmentation

• HSV-associated erythema multiforme commonly recurs

• Patients on immunosuppressive drugs tend to have more frequent and longer recurrences References Ayangco L, Rogers RS. Oral manifestations of erythema multiforme. Dermatol Clin 2003; 21: 195–205 Weston WL. Erythema multiforme and Stevens–Johnson syndrome. In Dermatology. Bolognia JL, Jorizzo JL, Rapini RP, et al., eds. Mosby: London, 2003: 313–21 Weston WL, Brice SL, Jester JD, et al. Herpes simplex virus in childhood erythema multiforme. Pediatrics 1992; 89: 32–4

Figure 11.4 Stevens–Johnson syndrome – marked eye involvement

Mallory Chapter 11

27/1/05

2:16 pm

Page 181

Hypersensitivity disorders/unclassified disorders

181

Figure 11.5 Stevens–Johnson syndrome – early erythema and tenderness of the lips

Figure 11.7 Toxic epidermal necrolysis – diffuse blistering over 90% of the skin surface

Figure 11.6 Stevens–Johnson syndrome – same patient as Figure 11.5 5 days later showing intense erythema and bleeding on the lips

Figure 11.8 Toxic epidermal necrolysis – positive Nikolsky sign

•

c. Involvement of two or more mucosal sites d. Fever, lymphadenopathy, toxic symptoms e. Total body surface area of epidermal detachment ≤10% classified as SJS; 10–30% classified as SJS–TEN overlap; >30% as TEN Toxic epidermal necrolysis: 1. Drugs are the cause in >95% of cases 2. Clinical features: a. 1–3 day prodrome of fever, stinging eyes, cutaneous tenderness b. Rapid onset of blistering with epidermal detachment (Figures 11.7 and 11.8) c. Positive Nikolsky sign d. Total body surface area of epidermal detachment >30%

Pathogenesis

• Same factors precipitate SJS and TEN:

• •

1. Drugs: a. Antibiotics: penicillin, doxycycline, tetracycline b. Anticonvulsants: carbamazapine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, lamotrigine, valproic acid c. Sulfonamides d. Nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory drugs (NSAIDs): ibuprofen, naproxen 2. Specific cause identified in only 50% of cases Immune-mediated: drug activates CD95 (fas) ligand which binds to an apoptotic receptor located on the keratinocyte cell surface Histology:

Mallory Chapter 11

182

27/1/05

2:16 pm

Page 182

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

1. Extensive epidermal damage with keratinocyte necrosis, basal cell layer vacuolation and blister formation at the dermal–epidermal junction 2. Dermal edema 3. Perivascular infiltrates Diagnosis

• Characteristic clinical findings and course • Skin biopsy

• Mortality ~30% in SJS and 25–70% in TEN • Poor prognostic factors in TEN: neutropenia, large percentage of body surface skin loss

• Disease has a protracted course lasting from 15 days to months

• Recovery is long and may require home physical therapy, tutoring and psychological support

• Sequelae: scarring, contractures, ocular sequelae

Differential diagnosis

• • • •

Staphylococcal scalded skin syndrome Kawasaki disease Toxic shock syndrome Serum sickness-like drug eruption

Treatment

• Severe cases best treated in an intensive care unit, •

•

preferably a burn unit Supportive measures: 1. Removal of offending drug and any crossreacting drug 2. Fluid and electrolyte balance 3. Nutritional support 4. Prevention of complications (e.g. cultures and antibiotics for infection only when indicated) 5. Physical therapy to prevent contractures Management of skin wounds: 1. Topical antibiotic therapy e.g. 1% silver sulfadiazine (Silvadene®) twice daily (unless sensitive to sulfa) 2. Debridement is indicated for extensive disease but may not be necessary for localized disease 3. Hydrotherapy in a tank, bathtub, or shower to aid debridement 4. Pre-medication with pain medicines 5. Consider biological dressings Systemic treatments: 1. Intravenous immunoglobulin (IVIG) 0.5–2 g/kg administered over 3 days 2. Corticosteroids are controversial a. If used, should be early and high dose short duration (<5 days) b. Some evidence suggests IV pulsed methylprednisolone is preferable c. May cause increased septic complications

Prognosis

• High morbidity and mortality rates

•

(eyelid immobility, corneal scarring, blindness), esophageal and anal strictures, vaginal stenosis, urethral meatal stenosis, hair and nail loss Recurrences rare; most caused by re-exposure to same offending medication

References Bachot N, Roujeau JC. Differential diagnosis of severe cutaneous drug eruptions. Am J Clin Dermatol 2003; 4: 561–72 Bachot N, Roujeau JC. Intravenous immunoglobulins in the treatment of severe drug eruptions. Curr Opin Allergy Clin Immunol 2003; 3: 269–74 Bannasch H, Kontny U, Kruger M, et al. A semisynthetic bilaminar skin substitute used to treat pediatric full-body toxic epidermal necrolysis. Arch Dermatol 2004; 140: 160–2 Hebert AA, Bogle MA. Intravenous immunoglobulin prophylaxis for recurrent Stevens–Johnson syndrome. J Am Acad Dermatol 2004; 50: 286–8 Martinez AE, Atherton DJ. High-dose systemic corticosteroids can arrest recurrences of severe mucocutaneous erythema multiforme. Pediatr Dermatol 2000; 17: 87–90 Metry DW, Jung P, Levy ML. Use of intravenous immunoglobulin in children with Stevens–Johnson syndrome and toxic epidermal necrolysis: seven cases and review of the literature. Pediatrics 2003; 112: 1430–6 Prendiville J. Stevens–Johnson syndrome and toxic epidermal necrolysis. Adv Dermatol 2002; 18: 151–73 Ringheanu M, Laude TA. Toxic epidermal necrolysis in children–an update. Clin Pediatr 2000; 39: 687–94

Erythema nodosum Major points

• Uncommon skin disorder • Prevalence of 2.4 per 10 000 in adults; rarer in children

• Sex ratio in children before puberty is roughly equal (in contrast to the female predominance in adults)

Mallory Chapter 11

27/1/05

2:16 pm

Page 183

Hypersensitivity disorders/unclassified disorders

• Often associated with infection:

• •

1. Beta-hemolytic streptococcus (especially pharyngitis) 2. Other causes: Yersinia, Mycoplasma pneumoniae, tuberculosis Less commonly associated chronic diseases: inflammatory bowel disease, Hodgkin disease, sarcoidosis Clinical presentation: 1. Tender, erythematous or bruise-like nodules or plaques with irregular and indistinct borders (Figure 11.9) 2. No ulceration or suppuration 3. Usually located bilaterally on the anterior and lateral legs 4. Other body sites: upper limbs, trunk, face, plantar surfaces in children 5. Upper respiratory symptoms/fever/arthralgias related to etiologic agent (i.e. infection) 6. Clinical course is <6 weeks 7. Resolves without scarring

Pathogenesis

• Autoimmune or hypersensitivity disease • Etiologic factors: infections, chronic diseases, •

idiopathic Histology: septal panniculitis

Diagnosis

• Characteristic clinical findings usually sufficient for diagnosis

• Skin biopsy in atypical, protracted cases

183

• Laboratory studies: CBC, ESR, liver enzymes, throat swab, stool culture, CXR, anti-streptolysin titer, Yersinia serologic test Differential diagnosis

• Nodular vasculitis (Bazin disease) from • • • • • •

tuberculosis Henoch–Schönlein purpura Eosinophilic cellulitis Infectious cellulitis Other panniculitides Child abuse Trauma

Treatment

• Bed rest and restriction of physical activities for ~2 weeks

• Analgesic medications or nonsteroidal antiinflammatory drugs (NSAIDs)

• Treatment of underlying condition Prognosis

• Course is benign and self-limited • Lesions last ~10–14 days and resolve without scarring

• Recurrences are rare References Boh EE, al-Smadi RM. Cutaneous manifestations of gastrointestinal diseases. Dermatol Clin 2002; 20: 533–46 Crawford GH, Kim S, James WD. Skin signs of systemic disease: an update. Adv Dermatol 2002; 18: 1–27 Hern AE, Shwayder TA. Unilateral plantar erythema nodosum. J Am Acad Dermatol 1992; 26: 259–60 Kakourou T, Drosatou P, Psychou F, et al. Erythema nodosum in children: a prospective study. J Am Acad Dermatol 2001; 44: 17–21 Labbe L, Perel Y, Maleville J, Taieb A. Erythema nodosum in children: a study of 27 patients. Pediatr Dermatol 1996; 13: 447–50 Ter Poorten MC, Thiers BH. Panniculitis. Dermatol Clin 2002; 20: 421–33, vi

Annular erythemas Major points Figure 11.9 Erythema nodosum – tender plaques on the anterior shins caused by streptococcal disease

• Heterogeneous group of disorders characterized by annular erythematous eruption

Mallory Chapter 11

184

27/1/05

2:16 pm

Page 184

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

• Transient: 1. Erythema gyratum atrophicans transiens neonatale a. Presents in newborns b. Patchy, generalized erythema that resolves into atrophic hypopigmented patches 2. Annular erythema of infancy a. Onset in infancy, usually ages 3–11 months b. Erythematous plaques that enlarge centrifugally to form rings and arcs; lesions appear and vanish over 36–48 hours (Figure 11.10)

•

3. Erythema chronicum migrans (ECM) a. Manifestation of Lyme disease caused by infection with Borrelia burgdorferi (see Chapter 8) b. Enlarging erythematous ring develops at the site of a tick bite, up to a diameter of 20–30 cm Nonspecific annular erythemas

Pathogenesis • Inflammatory hypersensitivity disorder of unknown etiology Diagnosis • Characteristic clinical findings • Skin biopsy • Histology consistent with diagnosis: superficial and deep lymphohistiocytic infiltrate in a perivascular distribution with presence of eosinophils and sometimes neutrophils Differential diagnosis • Erythema multiforme • Annular urticaria • Tinea corporis • Seborrheic dermatitis

Figure 11.10 Annular erythema of infancy – this rash resolved in 2 weeks without treatment

•

3. Annular erythema in infants born to mothers with autoimmune disease (e.g. neonatal lupus erythematosus) Chronic: 1. Erythema annulare centrifugum (EAC) a. Rare in children but has been reported in neonates b. Dusky red, erythematous papules and plaques that expand in a centrifugal pattern, usually on trunk and proximal extremities, fine scale at advancing edge c. May accompany an underlying infection or neoplasm 2. Familial annular erythema a. Presents shortly after birth b. Erythematous papules that enlarge centrifugally to form rings; may have vesiculated borders or inner collarette of scale c. Family history of disorder

Treatment • Tends to resolve without treatment in the absence of underlying disease • Antihistamines, antibiotics, corticosteroids (systemic and local), antifungals (oral and topical) have been reported to have no effect on disease course • ECM and accompanying Lyme disease should be treated with antibiotics (see Chapter 8); skin lesion resolves with treatment Prognosis • Complete resolution without treatment has been reported to occur after a course of partial remissions and exacerbations over a period of months to years • Course can be chronic References Anzai H, Kikuchi A, Kinoshita A, Nishikawa T. Recurrent annular erythema in juvenile chronic myelogenous leukaemia. Br J Dermatol 1998; 138: 1058–60 Bottoni U, Innocenzi D, Bonaccorsi P, et al. Erythema annulare centrifugum: report of a case with neonatal onset. J Eur Acad Dermatol Venereol 2002; 16: 500–3

Mallory Chapter 11

27/1/05

2:16 pm

Page 185

Hypersensitivity disorders/unclassified disorders

185

Cox NH, McQueen A, Evans TJ, Morley WN. An annular erythema of infancy. Arch Dermatol 1987; 123: 510–13 Stachowitz S, Abeck D, Schmidt T, Ring J. Persistent annular erythema of infancy associated with intestinal Candida colonization. Clin Exp Dermatol 2000; 25: 404–5 Toonstra J, de Wit FE. ‘Persistent’ annular erythema of infancy. Arch Dermatol 1984; 120: 1069–72 Watanabe T, Tsuchida T, Ito Y, et al. Annular erythema associated with lupus erythematosus/Sjogren’s syndrome. J Am Acad Dermatol 1997; 36: 214–18 Weyers W, Diaz-Cascajo C, Weyers I. Erythema annulare centrifugum: results of a clinicopathologic study of 73 patients. Am J Dermatopathol 2003; 25: 451–62

Granuloma annulare Major points

Figure 11.11 papules

Granuloma annulare – typical ring of

Figure 11.12 nodules

Granuloma annulare – deep subcutaneous

• Benign, self-limited dermatosis • Subcutaneous indurated dermal papules/plaques in an annular configuration

• Several different types:

•

1. Localized form – most common, usually seen on the dorsa of the hands and feet and lower extremities, but may be seen anywhere (Figure 11.11) 2. Subcutaneous form – deep dermal or subcutaneous nodules with no overlying epidermal change, commonly on the pretibial area of children aged 2–5 years (Figure 11.12) 3. Perforating form (generalized perforating granuloma annulare) – rare, grouped papules, some of which have a central area where damaged collagen ulcerates through the epidermis 4. Generalized form – hundreds of small papules forming ringed lesions that coalesce into reticulate patterns or linear bands Association with insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus in adults, not children

Pathogenesis

• Etiology unknown • Proposed to be an immune-mediated response to

•

an unknown antigenic stimulus with degeneration of collagen in the dermis, reactive inflammation and fibrosis Histology: palisading granuloma with necrobiotic collagen, fibrin and mucin deposits; in perforating

granuloma annulare the granulomas perforate the epidermis, extruding necrobiotic material Diagnosis

• Characteristic clinical findings • Skin biopsy if atypical • No specific laboratory abnormalities associated Differential diagnosis

• • • •

Tinea corporis Sarcoidosis Rheumatoid nodules Necrobiosis lipoidica

Mallory Chapter 11

186

27/1/05

2:16 pm

Page 186

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Treatment

• Reassurance of benign condition • Mid-range topical corticosteroid with or without •

• Reported following trauma or acute tonsillitis • Histology: 1. Similar to that of subcutaneous granuloma annulare 2. Central necrotic zone surrounded by palisading histiocytes and mononuclear inflammatory cells

occlusion Intralesional steroids for persistent lesions

Prognosis

• Lesions persist for several years then resolve •

spontaneously Mainly a cosmetic problem

References Choi JC, Bae JY, Cho S, et al. Generalized perforating granuloma annulare in an infant. Pediatr Dermatol 2003; 20: 131–3 Grogg KL, Nascimento AG. Subcutaneous granuloma annulare in childhood: clinicopathologic features in 34 cases. Pediatrics 2001; 107: 42 Kuwahara, RT, Naylor MF, Skinner RB. Treatment of granuloma annulare with topical 5% imiquimod cream. Pediatr Dermatol 2003; 20: 90

Diagnosis

• Clinical presentation • Absence of clinical or laboratory evidence of JRA Differential diagnosis

• • • •

Granuloma annulare Rheumatoid nodules associated with JRA Calcinosis cutis Osteoma cutis

Treatment

• No specific treatment usually needed • Intralesional steroids Prognosis

Rheumatoid nodules Major points

• Subcutaneous nodules similar to the ones seen in • •

• •

rheumatoid arthritis in adults with no other clinical signs or laboratory evidence of systemic disease Seen in otherwise healthy children most commonly at 2–10 years of age Clinical presentation: 1. Subcutaneous nodules 2. Often multiple 3. Distribution usually on the limbs, over the occiput, prepatellar and malleolar regions, pretibial areas, heels, fingers, elbows and proximal ulnar regions 4. Occasional reports of associated arthralgias Not thought to be a precursor for juvenile rheumatoid arthritis (JRA); however, there have been rare reported cases of development of JRA May be the same entity as subcutaneous granuloma annulare (pseudorheumatoid nodules)

• Nodules may regress and disappear over time • Generally, does not progress to JRA References Cawkwell GD. Benign rheumatoid nodules. Arch Pediatr Adolesc Med 1994; 148: 1219–20 Nalbant S, Corominas H, Hsu B, et al. Ultrasonography for assessment of subcutaneous nodules. J Rheumatol 2003; 30: 1191–5 Yamamoto T, Matsunaga T, Nishioka K. Rheumatoid neutrophilic dermatitis, rheumatoid papules, and rheumatoid nodules in a patient with seronegative rheumatoid arthritis. J Am Acad Dermatol 2003; 48: 634–5 Yavuz H, Ozel A, Yilmaz O, et al. Benign rheumatoid nodules. Am J Dis Child 1993; 147: 1011–12

Necrobiosis lipoidica diabeticorum Major points

• Skin lesions strongly associated with diabetes

Pathogenesis

• Etiology unknown • Thought to be an immunologic mechanism; IgG and IgM have been found in nodules

• •

mellitus (DM) type I but has been reported with type II DM Prevalence of 0.06% in children with diabetes and may precede onset of DM Female/male ratio >1

Mallory Chapter 11

27/1/05

2:16 pm

Page 187

Hypersensitivity disorders/unclassified disorders

• Average age of onset: 15 years • Clinical presentation: 1. Painless papules which enlarge to form a central, waxy, atrophic, depressed area with an elevated violaceous peripheral ring (Figure 11.13) 2. Central color is reddish-brown to orangeyellow 3. Telangiectasias may be seen within plaques 4. Usually over the bilateral anterior tibias 5. Often multiple plaques 6. May rarely be seen on the upper extremities or trunk 7. Tend to ulcerate

187

• Panniculitis • Morphea Treatment

• Treat underlying diabetes to achieve good glycemic control

• Corticosteroids:

•

1. Potent topical corticosteroids – for early lesions 2. Intralesional corticosteroids – injected into the active border of established lesions Oral pentoxifylline (Trental®)

Prognosis

• Ulcerated lesions heal slowly and may ulcerate •

again May indicate a greater risk for diabetic retinopathy and nephropathy

References de Silva DM, Schofield OM, Walker JD. The prevalence of necrobiosis lipoidica diabeticorum in children with type 1 diabetes. Br J Dermatol 1999; 141: 593–4 Pestoni C, Ferreirós MM, de la Torre C, Toribio J. Two girls with necrobiosis lipoidica and type I diabetes mellitus with transfollicular elimination in one girl. Pediatr Dermatol 2003; 20: 211–14 Retting KR. Necrobiosis lipoidica diabeticorum. Clin Pediatr 2000; 39: 439–40 Figure 11.13 Necrobiosis lipoidica diabeticorum – erythematous, shiny plaques on shins with central atrophy

Szabo RM, Harris GD, Burke WA. Necrobiosis lipoidica in a 9-year-old girl with new-onset type II diabetes mellitus. Pediatr Dermatol 2001; 18: 316–19

Pathogenesis

• Etiology unknown • Microangiopathy or other vascular etiology, lipid •

disorder, and immunologic mechanisms have been proposed Histology: diffuse palisading and interstitial granulomatous inflammation

Diagnosis

• Characteristic clinical findings • Skin biopsy • Evaluation for diabetes Differential diagnosis

• Granuloma annulare • Sarcoidosis

Kawasaki disease Major points

• Characterized by high fever, lymphadenopathy and •

mucocutaneous lesions Most serious complications are coronary artery abnormalities: 1. Aneurysms, diffuse ectasia, vasculitis 2. Develop in 20–25% of cases of untreated Kawasaki disease 3. Giant aneurysm carries the worst prognosis – risk of developing coronary thrombosis, stenosis or myocardial infarction 4. Smaller aneurysms tend to resolve; giant aneurysms do not

Mallory Chapter 11

188

27/1/05

2:16 pm

Page 188

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

• Most common cause of acquired heart disease among children in the USA

• Occurs predominantly in children <5 years age • Hospitalization rate for US children aged <5 years • •

•

is ~17 per 100 000 (approximates the disease incidence) Increased risk in younger children, males (ratio of 1.5 : 1), and individuals of Asian descent Increased rates in winter and spring months, with higher socioeconomic status, and in certain geographic regions of the USA (higher in the Northeast and West) Clinical course can be divided into three phases: 1. Acute febrile phase (7–14 days): a. Fever b. Conjunctival injection c. Mouth and lip changes – dryness, redness, fissuring, crust, ‘strawberry tongue’ d. Swelling and erythema of hands and feet e. Rash – polymorphous exanthem on the body and/or extremities, especially in diaper area (Figures 11.14 and 11.15) f. Cervical lymphadenopathy 2. Subacute phase (from the end of fever for ~25 days) a. Desquamation of fingers and toes (Figure 11.16)

Figure 11.15 peeling

b. Arthritis and arthralgias c. Thrombocytosis 3. Convalescent phase (6–8 weeks) a. Clinical symptoms resolve b. Continues until ESR becomes normal Pathogenesis

• Etiology unknown • Immunoregulatory abnormalities – response to a •

Figure 11.14 Kawasaki disease – targetoid, erythematous macules

Kawasaki disease – perineal rash with

bacterial (or viral) protein toxin acting as a superantigen has been proposed Presumed etiology is infectious – viral (e.g. Epstein–Barr virus and retrovirus), Streptococcus viridans, staphylococci, Propionibacterium species and parvovirus

Figure 11.16 fingertips

Kawasaki disease – desquamation of the

Mallory Chapter 11

27/1/05

2:16 pm

Page 189

Hypersensitivity disorders/unclassified disorders

Diagnosis

• Based on history and physical examination • Jones criteria:

•

• •

1. High fever for ≥5 days without other explanation 2. Four of the following five criteria: a. Conjunctival injection b. Oropharyngeal changes: injected or fissured lips, hyperemia of pharynx, strawberry tongue c. Extremity changes: erythema of palms or soles, hand or foot edema, periungual desquamation d. Polymorphous rash (especially on trunk) e. Acute nonsuppurative cervical lymphadenopathy Cases of ‘atypical’ or ‘incomplete’ Kawasaki disease: 1. Fewer than four of the five criteria 2. Coronary complications 3. More common in infants <6 months age Electrocardiogram and echocardiogram – to look for cardiovascular manifestations Common laboratory abnormalities: leukocytosis, thrombocytosis, elevated ESR and C-reactive protein, sterile pyuria

Differential diagnosis

• • • • • •

Viral exanthem Scarlet fever Staphylococcal scalded skin syndrome Stevens–Johnson syndrome Drug reactions Toxic shock syndrome

189

• Treatment of cardiac complications – •

thrombolytics, surgical revascularization, cardiac transplantation Use of corticosteroids is controversial

Prognosis

• 85% of children treated in the first 10 days after • •

•

onset will have prompt defervesence and resolution of signs of inflammation Prognosis is favorable for those children who do not develop coronary artery abnormalities In children with coronary artery aneurysms: 1. 50% regress within 2 years 2. For giant aneurysms (>8 mm), risk for stenosis, complete obstruction, or myocardial infarction Myocardial infarction is the major cause of mortality – most commonly occurs after years in patients with giant aneurysms

References Genizi J, Miron D, Spiegel R, et al. Kawasaki disease in very young infants: high prevalence of atypical presentation and coronary arteritis. Clin Pediatr 2003; 42: 263–7 Holman RC, Curns AT, Belay ED, et al. Kawasaki syndrome hospitalizations in the United States, 1997 and 2000. Pediatrics 2003; 112: 495–501 Meissner HC, Leung DYM. Kawasaki syndrome: where are the answers? Pediatrics 2003; 112: 672–5 Proft T, Fraser JD. Bacterial superantigens. Clin Exp Immunol 2003; 133: 299–306 Taubert KA, Shulman ST. Kawasaki disease. Am Fam Physician 1999; 59: 3093–102, 3107–8

Pyoderma gangrenosum

Treatment

• Combined intravenous immunoglobulin (IVIG)

•

and aspirin therapy 1. IVIG – 2 g/kg as a single dose before day 10 of fever can reduce risk of coronary artery disease from ~20% to <5% 2. Aspirin – 30–100 mg/kg per day in four divided doses until defervescence, and then reduced to 3–5 mg/kg per day as a single daily dose Ongoing fever or other signs of inflammation 24–72 hours or longer after treatment may warrant additional doses of IVIG

Major points

• Clinical features: 1. Begins as a small pustule, erythematous nodule, or bulla that spreads concentrically from the center to develop necrotic ulceration with a mucopurulent base, violaceous undermined border, and peripheral erythema (Figure 11.17) 2. Clinical variants: ulcerative, pustular, bullous, or vegetative 3. History given of preceding minor trauma or irritation is common

Mallory Chapter 11

190

27/1/05

2:16 pm

Page 190

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

4. May progress to become atrophic paper-like skin or cribriform scars 5. Single or multiple lesions 6. Most frequent on anterior legs; may occur on face, trunk, or buttocks

• •

1. Frequent association with systemic diseases with presumed autoimmune etiology or immunologic defects 2. Associated immune abnormalities have been reported, including: immunoglobulin levels, cell-mediated immunity and neutrophil function Pathergy has been reported in ~20% of cases Histology: necrosis and ulceration of the epidermis and dermis, acute inflammatory cell infiltrate and the margin of the lesion, chronic inflammatory cell infiltrate at the base

Diagnosis

• Skin biopsy – to exclude deep fungal infection and vasculitis

• Look for underlying conditions • Common laboratory abnormalities: elevated ESR, mild anemia, various immune defects (e.g. abnormal immunoglobulins) Differential diagnosis

Figure 11.17 Pyoderma gangrenosum – deep scarring and painful erythema

•

7. Exquisitely painful 8. Pathergy may be reported Often occurs in association with systemic disorders: 1. Inflammatory bowel disease 2. Arthritis 3. Hematologic disease: leukemia, monoclonal gammopathy, polycythemia vera, lymphoma 4. Immunodeficiency disorders: hypogammaglobulinemia, IgA deficiency, impaired leukocyte deficiency, HIV 5. Most common in children: inflammatory bowel disease and arthritis Idiopathic (no associated disease identified) in 20–30% of cases

Pathogenesis

• Cause is unknown • Proposed to be an exaggerated inflammatory response caused by an underlying immunologic abnormality

• • • •

Deep fungal infection Vasculitis Sweet syndrome Spider bite

Treatment

• Treat underlying disorder • Systemic treatment • • • •

•

1. Oral or pulsed IV corticosteroids 2. Dapsone (oral) Adjuvant topical antibiotic therapy Topical or intralesional corticosteroids at edge of active lesion Dressings – oxygen-permeable or semi-permeable Other options if above treatments fail: cyclophosphamide, azathioprine, methotrexate, mercaptopurine, melphalan, minocycline, tetracycline, clofazimine, cyclosporine A, thalidomide Surgical debridement can extend the lesion; not recommended

Prognosis

• Atrophy or scarring common • Successful treatment of underlying disorder may result in clearing

• Chronic relapsing disease may occur and may be difficult to manage

Mallory Chapter 11

27/1/05

2:16 pm

Page 191

Hypersensitivity disorders/unclassified disorders

191

References Crowson AN, Mihm MC Jr, Magro C. Pyoderma gangrenosum: a review. J Cutan Pathol 2003; 30: 97–107 Dourmishev AL, Miteva I, Schwartz RA. Pyoderma gangrenosum in childhood. Cutis 1996; 58: 257–62 Gettler S, Rothe M, Grin C, Grant-Kels J. Optimal treatment of pyoderma gangrenosum. Am J Clin Dermatol 2003; 4: 597–608 Mekkes JR, Loots MA, Van Der Wal AC, Bos JD. Causes, investigation and treatment of leg ulceration. Br J Dermatol 2003; 148: 388–401

Sweet syndrome Synonym: acute febrile neutrophilic dermatosis Major points

• Cardinal features: fever, neutrophilic leukocytosis

•

in the peripheral blood; tender, red plaques on limbs, face and neck; dense dermal infiltrate of neutrophils on histology Can occur at all ages 1. Peak onset in middle age 2. Pediatric cases account for 5% of all total reported cases 3. Can occur in infants as young as 7 weeks Cutaneous manifestations: 1. Abrupt onset of lesions that enlarge and coalesce over days to weeks 2. Bright red to purple, painful, tender, sharply demarcated plaques (Figure 11.18) 3. May have scaling, crusting, hemorrhagic bullae, or ulceration 4. May be warm to touch 5. Lesions range in size from 4 mm to >12 cm 6. Lesions are usually multiple 7. Solitary lesions usually have a predilection for the face 8. Distribution is asymmetric; over the upper extremities, neck, face more than trunk, lower extremities 9. Pathergy has been reported Extracutaneous manifestations: 1. Fever 2. Neutrophilic leukocytosis 3. Serum sickness-like symptoms: myalgias, malaise, nausea, headache

Figure 11.18

Sweet syndrome – large, indurated plaques

4. 5. 6. 7.

•

Meningeal symptoms Gastrointestinal distress Musculoskeletal symptoms: arthralgias, arthritis Renal involvement (11–72%): proteinuria, hematuria, acute renal failure, glomerulonephritis 8. Ocular findings: iritis, episcleritis, conjunctivitis 9. Lung involvement 10. Hepatic involvement Associated with many conditions (Table 11.1): 1. Antecedent infection (especially upper respiratory infection) 2. Autoimmune/inflammatory diseases 3. Malignancy (in 20% of cases) – primarily hematologic malignancies 4. Drugs and vaccinations (especially granulocyte colony-stimulating factor; G-CSF)

Pathogenesis

• Likely to be a reactive process resulting from

• •

immunologic hypersensitivity to a variety of agents (e.g. infection, neoplasm, drug, autoimmune processes) Interleukin-1 has been implicated as a mediator for both cutaneous and systemic inflammation Association with G-CSF treatment supports neutrophil activation as a mechanism

Mallory Chapter 11

192

27/1/05

2:16 pm

Page 192

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Table 11.1 syndrome

Conditions associated with Sweet

• Histology: 1. Dense, dermal infiltrate of mature neutrophils 2. Epidermis is usually normal, but may have reactive changes 3. Classic definition of Sweet syndrome requires the absence of vasculitis; however, vasculitis (vessel damage) may be seen especially in lesions present for a long duration – thought to be a result of toxic metabolites released by activated neutrophils

Inflammatory/autoimmune Ulcerative colitis Crohn disease Bowel bypass syndrome Systemic lupus erythematosus Rheumatoid arthritis Sjögren syndrome Behçet syndrome Pyoderma gangrenosum Subacute thyroiditis Cirrhosis

Diagnosis

• Diagnostic criteria (two major and one minor

Infections Staphylococcus Streptococcus Yersinia Salmonella Tuberculosis Histoplasmosis Meningitis Hepatitis HIV Malignancy Acute myelogenous leukemia Chronic myelogenous leukemia Acute lymphocytic leukemia Chronic lymphocytic leukemia Lymphoma Myelodysplastic syndromes Breast cancer Prostate cancer Ovarian cancer Endometrial cancer Vaginal cancer Testicular cancer Rectal cancer

• •

Other

•

Drugs (most commonly granulocyte colonystimulating factor) Immunizations Pregnancy Photoinduction Renal stones Adapted from Fitzgerald RL, McBurney IE, Nesbitt LT. Sweet’s syndrome. Int J Dermatol 1996; 35: 9–15

•

criteria needed for diagnosis): 1. Major criteria: a. Abrupt onset of tender or painful erythematous plaques or nodules b. Predominantly neutrophilic infiltration in the dermis 2. Minor criteria: a. Preceded by respiratory infection, GI infection, vaccination or associated with: inflammatory disease, hematoproliferative disorder, solid malignant tumor, or pregnancy b. Malaise and fever (>38°C) c. Laboratory values at onset: ESR >20 mm, C-reactive protein, segmented neutrophils >70% in peripheral blood smear, leukocytosis (three out of four values necessary) d. Excellent response to systemic corticosteroid or potassium iodide treatment Rule out infectious causes, including HIV Underlying condition (e.g. malignancy) should be investigated Laboratory findings are nonspecific: ESR, Creactive protein, CBC, renal function tests Skin biopsy usually necessary

Differential diagnosis

• • • • • • • •

Drug reaction Cellulitis Herpes simplex infection Pyoderma gangrenosum Secondary syphilis Erythema multiforme Vasculitis Leukemia cutis

Mallory Chapter 11

27/1/05

2:16 pm

Page 193

Hypersensitivity disorders/unclassified disorders

Treatment

• Systemic glucocorticoids:

•

1. Oral steroids 0.5–1.5 mg/kg per day for 10 days followed by a slow taper 2. Lesions usually clear in several days with treatment Other drugs: potassium iodide, dapsone, cyclosporine, colchicine, clofazimine, indomethacin, methotrexate, isotretinoin, pulse steroids with chlorambucil

Prognosis

• Most cases respond well to oral steroids with rapid • • • •

clearing of lesions Healing may result in hyperpigmentation, milia, or scarring Untreated lesions usually resolve in 6–8 weeks, but may take months Recurrences are common Prognosis depends upon severity of underlying systemic condition

References Callen JP. Neutrophilic dermatoses. Dermatol Clin 2002; 20: 409–19 Crawford GH, Kim S, James WD. Skin signs of systemic disease: an update. Adv Dermatol 2002; 18: 1–27 Fitzgerald RL, McBurney IE, Nesbitt LT. Sweet’s syndrome. Int J Dermatol 1996; 35: 9–15 Kourtis AP. Sweet syndrome in infants. Clin Pediatr 2002; 41: 175–7 Malone JC, Slone SP, Wills-Frank LA, et al. Vascular inflammation (vasculitis) in Sweet syndrome. Arch Dermatol 2002; 138: 345–9 Von den Driesch P. Sweet’s syndrome (acute neutrophilic dermatosis). J Am Acad Dermatol 1994; 3: 535–56

Sarcoidosis Major points

• Systemic granulomatous disorder characterized by the presence of noncaseating granulomas

• Rare in pediatric age group; more common in adolescents and young adults

• Male/female ratio = 1 • Two distinct forms of juvenile sarcoidosis: 1. Early-onset:

• •

193

a. Presents in ages 1–5 years b. Triad of arthritis/rash/uveitis with typical pulmonary disease often absent c. Predominantly Whites d. Often confused with JRA e. Less favorable prognosis – progressive and debilitating course 2. Older children: a. Presents in adolescence b. Similar to adult disease with lung/lymph node/eye involvement c. Predominantly Blacks Clinical manifestations are protean; multiple organ systems can be involved Most common clinical features: 1. Lung involvement: a. Most common organ involved b. Accounts for majority of morbidity and mortality c. Dry cough and dyspnea d. Bilateral hilar lymphadenopathy with or without parenchymal involvement e. Abnormal chest X-ray and pulmonary function tests 2. Cutaneous manifestations: a. Red to yellowish-brown papules, plaques, or nodules; erythema nodosum; hypo- or hyperpigmentation (Figure 11.19) b. Most frequent on the face, but may occur on trunk, extremities, buttocks c. Lupus pernio (sarcoidosis of the nose) – rare in children 3. Eye involvement: a. Common, serious and progressive b. Granulomatous uveitis c. Conjunctival granulomatous nodules d. Complications: optic neuritis, band keratopathy, cataracts, glaucoma, retinal vasculitis 4. Lymphadenopathy 5. Other organ systems involved: CNS, kidneys, liver, spleen, heart and blood vessels, musculoskeletal system

Pathogenesis

• Etiology unknown • Postulated to represent an altered immune response to unknown agent(s) resulting in granuloma formation

Mallory Chapter 11

194

27/1/05

2:16 pm

Page 194

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

• Patients with multisystem disease: 1. Oral corticosteroid treatment for serious lung, ocular, neurological, cardiac disease 2. Methotrexate if refractory to steroid treatment or as a steroid-sparing agent 3. Other agents used: cyclosporine, azathioprine, cyclophosphamide Prognosis

• Majority of older children recover with minimal or • Figure 11.19 Sarcoidosis – typical firm papules on the face in an adult

no therapy with improved pulmonary status (similar to adults) Poor prognosis associated with severe involvement at presentation, multiorgan involvement, earlyonset form of disease

References

• Genetic predisposition • Histology: discrete, compact, noncaseating, epithelioid cell granulomas Diagnosis

• Biopsy: demonstration of noncaseating granulomas

• •

in one or more organs a. Fungal and other infections should be ruled out using special stains b. Least invasive biopsy site should be chosen based on clinical presentation (e.g. skin, palpable lymph nodes) Characteristic clinical findings Radiographic imaging: 1. Chest X-ray: bilateral hilar lymphadenopathy 2. CT or MRI for involvement in the orbit, CNS, muscle/bone Ophthalmologic evaluation Laboratory studies are nonspecific: calcium levels and serum angiotensin converting enzyme may be elevated

Differential diagnosis

• • • • •

Systemic juvenile rheumatoid arthritis Lymphoma Tuberculosis Other diffuse interstitial pulmonary diseases Infections with granulomatous reactions

Treatment

• Asymptomatic patients and mild disease; watchful waiting without treatment may be appropriate; may spontaneously resolve

Cimaz R, Ansell BM. Sarcoidosis in the pediatric age. Clin Exp Reumatol 2002; 20: 231–7 Fetil E, Ozkan S, Ilknur T, et al. Sarcoidosis in a preschooler with only skin and joint involvement. Pediatr Dermatol 2003; 20: 416–18 Lindsley CB, Petty RE. Overview and report on international registry of sarcoid arthritis in childhood. Curr Rheumatol Rep 2000; 2: 343–8 Mana J, Marcoval J, Graells J, et al. Cutaneous involvement in sarcoidosis: relationship to systemic disease. Arch Dermatol 1997; 133: 882–8 Ramanan AV, Denning DW, Baildam EM. Cutaneous childhood sarcoidosis – a rare disease refractory to treatment. Rheumatology 2003; 42: 1570–1 Shetty AK, Gedalia A. Sarcoidosis: a pediatric perspective. Clin Pediatr 1998; 37: 707–17 Shetty AK, Gedalia A. Sarcoidosis in children. Curr Probl Pediatr 2000; 30: 153–76

NUTRITIONAL DISORDERS Anorexia and bulimia nervosa-associated skin disorders

• Xerosis • Acral changes: coldness, cyanosis, periungual erythema

• Hypertrichosis • Telogen effluvium • Brittle hair and nails

Mallory Chapter 11

27/1/05

2:16 pm

Page 195

Hypersensitivity disorders/unclassified disorders

195

• Carotenemia • Oral changes: cheilitis and perleche, aphthae, gum erosions, dental caries

• Russell sign: calluses on the dorsum of hands from repetitive forced vomiting

Kwashiorkor

• Protein intake deficiency with normal caloric intake

• Causes:

•

1. All maize diet (e.g. in impoverished areas) 2. Chronically ill children 3. Restricted diet (e.g. food fads, food aversion) Cutaneous findings: 1. Generalized hyperpigmentation 2. Black patches of thickened epidermis over pressure point which desquamate (‘peeling paint’ appearance) (Figure 11.20) 3. Dry, hypopigmented hair 4. Desquamation around eyes, mouth 5. Erosions in mouth, intertriginous areas with fissuring Extracutaneous findings: massive edema/anasarca, extreme irritability, apathy

Figure 11.20 Kwashiorkor – protein malnutrition in a child who was thought to be allergic to milk, so milk was eliminated from her diet

• Vitamin B1 (thiamine) deficiency – beriberi

Marasmus

• Total calorie starvation • Cutaneous findings:

•

1. Thin, dry, lax skin 2. Hair is thin, falls out readily 3. Occasionally seen: fine scaling, desquamation, hyperpigmentation Extracutaneous findings: 1. Loss of subcutaneous fat and muscle 2. Individual remains alert

•

Vitamin deficiencies

• Vitamin A (retinol) deficiency 1. Cutaneous findings: scaliness, atrophy of sebaceous and sweat glands, follicular hyperkeratosis (phrynoderma), dull scalp hair 2. Extracutaneous findings: poor night vision, conjunctival xerosis, Bitot spots in the eyes, impaired bone growth, cranial nerve lesions 3. Causative drugs/factors: fat malabsorption, liver disease

•

1. Wet (cardiac) beriberi: myocarditis with highoutput congestive heart failure, edema 2. Dry (neurologic) beriberi: peripheral neuropathy with wrist/foot drop, motor and digestive disturbances 3. Wernicke–Korsakoff syndrome: encephalopathy with psychosis, ataxia, memory loss, confabulation, confusion 4. Orogenital dermatitis 5. Causative factors: rice-dependent diets, chronic alcoholism Vitamin B2 (riboflavin) deficiency 1. Cutaneous findings: oculo-orogenital syndrome, angular cheilitis, black tongue, glossitis, seborrheic dermatitis/dyssebacia, scrotal dermatitis 2. Extracutaneous findings: anemia, mental retardation 3. Causative drugs/factors: borate poison, neonatal phototherapy for hyperbilirubinemia, protein deficiency, hypothyroidism Vitamin B3 (niacin) deficiency – pellagra 1. Classic triad (3 Ds): diarrhea, dermatitis, dementia 2. Cutaneous findings: dermatitis on sun-exposed skin, Casal necklace – photosensitive eruption

Mallory Chapter 11

196

•

27/1/05

2:16 pm

Page 196

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

around the neck, angular stomatitis, glossitis, oral and perirectal sores 3. Causative drugs/factors: gastrointestinal (malabsorptive) disease, drugs, plain corn diet, alcoholism Vitamin B6 (pyridoxine) deficiency 1. Cutaneous findings: periorificial dermatitis, pellagra-like rash, seborrhea, conjunctivitis, stomatitis, glossitis 2. Extracutaneous findings: anorexia, GI symptoms, anemia, lymphopenia, confusion 3. Causative factors: drugs, uremia, cirrhosis Vitamin B12 (cobalamin) deficiency 1. Cutaneous findings: hyperpigmentation of flexural areas, palms, soles, nails, oral cavity, glossitis, poliosis 2. Extracutaneous findings: megaloblastic anemia, paresthesias, ataxia, hypotonia in infants, mental status changes 3. Causative drugs/factors: a. In infants – born to strict vegan mother or mothers with pernicious anemia, malnutrition due to low socioeconomic status b. Others: decreased gastric synthesis of intrinsic factor (pernicious anemia), tropical sprue, strict vegetarianism, ileal destruction or bypass, chronic alcoholism Vitamin C (ascorbic acid) deficiency – scurvy 1. Cutaneous findings: follicular hyperkeratosis, perifollicular petechiae, ‘corkscrew’ hairs, poor wound healing, koilonychias, gingival hemorrhage, sclerodermatous changes 2. Extracutaneous findings: weakness, fatigue, depression Vitamin D deficiency – rickets 1. No cutaneous alterations seen with deficiency 2. Extracutaneous findings: rickets, muscle weakness 3. Causative drugs/factors: excessive lack of sunlight, malabsorption, liver disease, vitamin D resistance, renal disease Biotin deficiency 1. Cutaneous findings: acrodermatitis enteropathica, intertriginous and periorificial dermatitis, conjunctivitis, glossitis, cheilitis, xerosis, alopecia 2. Extracutaneous findings: neuropsychiatric symptoms

•

3. Causative drugs/factors: raw egg-white ingestion (avidin impedes absorption of biotin), anticonvulsant drugs, total parenteral nutrition, chronic GI disease, short bowel Vitamin K deficiency 1. Deficiency results in impairment of the coagulation cascade; vitamin K is required for synthesis of factors II, VII, IX, X and proteins C and S 2. Cutaneous findings: purpura, ecchymoses, hemorrhage 3. Extracutaneous findings: GI, nasal, subgaleal, intracranial hemorrhage 4. Causative drugs/factors: neonates (inadequate intake and decreased production), warfarin, antibiotics, liver disease, fat malabsorption Folic acid deficiency 1. Similar to vitamin B12 deficiency 2. Cutaneous findings: hyperpigmentation of tongue and genitals, glossitis, angular cheilitis 3. Extracutaneous findings: megaloblastic anemia 4. Causative drugs/factors: phenytoin, barbiturates, methotrexate, celiac disease, goat’s milk diet, pregnancy

References Avci Z, Turul T, Aysun S, Unal I. Involuntary movements and magnetic resonance imaging findings in infantile cobalamine (Vit B 12) deficiency. Pediatrics 2003; 112: 684–6 Barthelemy H, Chouvet B, Cambazard F. Skin and mucosal manifestations in vitamin deficiency. J Am Acad Dermatol 1986; 15: 1263–74 Grob JJ, Collet-Villette AM, Aillaud MF, et al. Spontaneous adult scurvy in a developed country: new insight in an ancient disease. Arch Dermatol 1990; 126: 249–51 Glorio R, Allevato M, De Pablo A, et al. Prevalence of cutaneous manifestations in 200 patients with eating disorders. Int J Dermatol 2000; 39: 348–53 Hegyi J, Schwartz RA, Hegyi V. Pellagra: dermatitis dementia, and diarrhea. Int J Dermatol 2004; 43: 1–5 Lucky AW, Powell J. Cutaneous manifestations of endocrine, metabolic, and nutritional disorders. In Pediatric Dermatology, 3rd edn. Schachner LA, Hansen RC, eds. Mosby: New York, 2003: 937–8 Lutter CK, Rivera JA. Nutritional status of infants and young children and characteristics of their diets. J Nutr 2003; 133: 2941S–9S Miller SJ. Nutritional deficiency and the skin. J Am Acad Dermatol 1989; 21: 1–30

Mallory Chapter 11

27/1/05

2:16 pm

Page 197

Hypersensitivity disorders/unclassified disorders

197

Schulze UME, Pettke-Rank CV, Kreienkamp M, et al. Dermatologic findings in anorexia and bulimia nervosa of childhood and adolescence. Pediatr Dermatol 1999; 16: 90–4 Sigman GS. Eating disorders in children and adolescents. Pediatr Clin North Am 2003; 50: 1139–77

Acrodermatitis enteropathica Synonym: zinc deficiency Major points

• Classic presentation: dermatitis, diarrhea, alopecia, extreme irritability

• Types:

•

• • • • •

1. Genetic (autosomal recessive) 2. Nutritional, found sporadically in premature and full-term infants 3. Endemically in the Middle East (growth failure and delayed pubertal maturation); caused by concurrent ingestion of high amounts of a zinc-binding ligand, phytate 4. Iatrogenic zinc deficiency associated with total parenteral nutrition Genetic form: usually occurs 1–2 weeks after weaning from breast feeding, and rarely during breast feeding; in bottle-fed infants it occurs 4–10 weeks of age Dermatitis: periorificial (around mouth, eyes, genital area) and acral areas: erythematous, vesiculobullous or psoriasiform eruption with exudation and crusting (Figure 11.21) Secondary superinfection with Candida and staphylococci common Nail changes: pustular paronychia with subsequent nail dystrophy Hair fine and sparse, leading to total alopecia Photophobia, blepharitis, conjunctivitis, cheilitis Other: failure to thrive, apathy, ataxia, immune abnormalities, poor wound healing

Pathogenesis

• Zinc is essential for normal function of all cells • May be caused by defect in intestinal absorption of

•

zinc or from deficient intake, malabsorption (as in cystic fibrosis) (Figures 11.22 and 11.23) and other chronic illnesses In the genetic form, caused by mutation in the intestinal zinc-specific transporter SLC39A4 on chromosome 8q24.3

Figure 11.21 Acrodermatitis enteropathica – erythematous, eroded, periorificial plaques

Figure 11.22 Cystic fibrosis presenting with edema and acrodermatitis enteropathica lesions

Diagnosis

• Low plasma zinc levels are pathognomonic (blood •

must be collected in special acid-washed or plastic tubes) Low serum alkaline phosphatase (a zinc-dependent metalloenzyme)

Differential diagnosis

• Seborrheic dermatitis • Psoriasis

Mallory Chapter 11

198

27/1/05

2:16 pm

Page 198

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Prognosis

• Excellent response when treated • Can be fatal without supplementation References Brar BK, Pall A, Gupta RR. Acrodermatitis enteropathicalike rash in an exclusively breast fed infant with zinc deficiency. J Dermatol 2003; 30: 259–60 Kim BE, Wang F, Dufner-Beattie J, et al. Zn2+-stimulated endocytosis of the mZIP4 zinc transporter regulates its location at the plasma membrane. J Bio Chem 2004; 279: 4523–30 Michalczyk A, Varigos G, Catto-Smith A, et al. Analysis of zinc transporter, hZnT4 (Slc30A4), gene expression in a mammary gland disorder leading to reduced zinc secretion into milk. Hum Genet 2003; 113: 202–10

Figure 11.23 cheeks

Cystic fibrosis – edema is obvious in the

• Candidal infection • Fatty acid deficiency • Biotin deficiency Treatment

• Rapid and dramatic improvement with • •

supplementation Zinc is in nuts, whole grains, green leafy vegetables, shellfish Daily requirement is 1–3 mg/kg per day, or 10–20 mg for adults

Muniz AE, Bartle S, Foster R. Edema, anemia, hypoproteinemia, and acrodermatitis enteropathica: an uncommon initial presentation of cystic fibrosis. Pediatr Emerg Care 2004; 20: 112–4 Nakano A, Nakano H, Nomura K, et al. Novel SLC39A4 mutations in acrodermatitis enteropathica. J Invest Dermatol 2003; 120: 963–6 Perafan-Riveros C, Franca LF, Alves AC, Sanches JA Jr. Acrodermatitis enteropathica: case report and review of the literature. Pediatr Dermatol 2002; 19: 426–31 Quirk CM, Seykora J, Wingate BJ, Cotsarelis G. Acrodermatitis enteropathica associated with anorexia nervosa. J Am Med Assoc 2002; 288: 2655—6 Wang K, Zhou B, Kuo YM, et al. A novel member of a zinc transporter family is defective in acrodermatitis enteropathica. Am J Hum Genet 2002; 71: 66–73

Mallory Chapter 12

27/1/05

2:27 pm

Page 199

12 PHOTODERMATOSES AND PHYSICAL INJURY AND ABUSE

PHOTODERMATOSES General

• Sun exposure in childhood is normal; excessive sun exposure may result in sunburn (toxic response) or, in some cases, abnormal reactions (e.g. lupus) Tanning is a sign of ultraviolet (UV) injury, and should not be considered ‘healthy’ Long-term consequences of chronic sun damage: skin cancer and photoaging

• •

Phototoxicity/sunburn

•

Major points

• Sunburn depends upon a number of factors: 1. Length of exposure

Table 12.1

•

2. Skin phototype (Table 12.1) 3. Direction of sun’s rays (summer > winter) 4. Time of day (10.00 to 15.00 are strongest rays) 5. Geographical location (nearer equator) 6. Altitude (higher > lower) 7. Age (infants > young children > adults) Erythema and tenderness begin 30 minutes to 4 hours after sun exposure; peaks at 24 hours; may last for 72 hours (Figures 12.1 and 12.2) Most prominent on areas which receive direct light (e.g. nose, cheeks, shoulders) with less reaction in shielded areas (e.g. under nose and chin, and on upper eyelids) With intense exposure: blistering, edema and later desquamation 1. Sleep often disturbed 2. Tenderness of skin 3. Reduced sweating

Skin phototypes

Skin type

Reactivity to sun

Examples

Always burns; never tans

Light skin, blond or red hair, blue or brown eyes, and freckles (e.g. Celts)

Always burns; tans minimally or lightly

Light skin; red, blond, or brown hair; blue, hazel or brown eyes (e.g. Northern Europeans)

III

Sometimes burns; tans gradually and uniformly

Brown hair, blue or brown eyes (e.g. Southern Europeans)

Burns minimally or never; always tans

Dark brown hair, dark eyes, light brown skin (e.g. Latinos, Asians)

Moderately pigmented skin; never burns, always tans well

Medium brown skin, dark brown hair (e.g. Middle Easterners, Latinos)

Deeply pigmented; never burns, always tans well

Dark skin, dark hair (e.g. Black Africans)

Mallory Chapter 12

200

27/1/05

2:27 pm

Page 200

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Figure 12.1

Phototoxicity – from excessive sun exposure

•

Figure 12.2

•

Phototoxicity from doxycycline

4. In severe burns, collapse from heat stroke, fever, headache and fatigue Ultraviolet light 1. UV light consists of UVA, UVB, UVC 2. UVB does not generate a perception of warmth unless skin is already burned (i.e. a person does not realize the damage until it is too late) 3. On cloudy days, visible light and infrared rays (both cause a sensation of warmth) are filtered out; however, 80% of UVB can get through 4. Much of lifetime sun exposure occurs before 18 years

Pathogenesis

• Acute ultraviolet injury is caused by radiation damage

1. First change is vasodilatation, probably caused by prostaglandins as mediators 2. Metabolic changes occur within epidermal cells, which demonstrate clumping of tonofilaments and abnormalities of cytoplasm and nucleus which produce dyskeratotic ‘sunburn cells’, recognizable by light microscopy. These cells lose their epidermal cell attachments, and produce intraepidermal blisters 3. By 48 hours, damage throughout epidermis 4. By 72 hours, regeneration begins 5. At 96 hours, great increase in number of melanocytes that have arborized their dendrites, beginning the tanning process Tanning response occurs in two distinct phases: 1. Immediate response caused by photo-oxidation of melanin chromoproteins 2. Delayed tanning develops with increased melanosome formation and increased transfer of melanosomes to keratinocytes; starts at 2 days and peaks at 19 days 3. Melanin absorbs UVB and also acts as a ‘sponge’ by mopping up free radicals which damage the epidermis UV radiation effects are cumulative 1. Long-term effects: fine, deep wrinkling, actinic keratoses, skin cancer (especially basal cell carcinoma and squamous cell carcinoma), laxity, mottled pigmentation and telangiectasias 2. Malignant melanoma: more common in patients with a history of several severe sunburns

Diagnosis

• Clinical symptoms and history • Histology: epidermal spongiosis, ‘sunburn cells’

•

(dyskeratotic damaged epidermal cells), dermal vasodilatation, edema, neutrophils, monocytes, reduced number of Langerhans cells Photosensitizing agents can induce a reaction with short exposure (5–30 minutes) (Table 12.2)

Differential diagnosis

• • • •

Porphyria Lupus erythematosus Viral eruptions (e.g. fifth disease) Xeroderma pigmentosum

Mallory Chapter 12

27/1/05

2:27 pm

Page 201

Photodermatoses and physical injury and abuse

Table 12.2

4. Topical anesthetics (e.g. benzocaine) can be sensitizing and only bring temporary relief. Not recommended 5. Efficacies of topical aloe vera, jojoba oil and vitamin E have not been well studied

Exogenous photosensitizers

Examples Drugs

Antibiotics (sulfonamides, tetracyclines, griseofulvin), phenothiazines, diuretics (furosemide, thiazides), quinine, isoniazid, tranquilizers, antidepressants, antiinflammatory agents (naproxen), antiarrhythmics, antihypertensives

Plants

Furocoumarins

Dyes

Methylene blue, toluidine blue, xanthenes, fluorescein, eosin, erythrosine, acridine

Polycyclic hydrocarbons

Pitch, coal tars, anthracene, acridine, fluoranthrene

Perfumes/ cosmetics

Bergamot oil, musk ambrette, 6-methylcoumarin, halogenated salicylanilides

Sunscreens

PABA, benzophenones, cinnamates

Tatoos

Cadmium sulfide

Treatment

• Prevention

•

1. Good sun protection habits should be stressed at an early age 2. Infants <6 months should not have much direct sun exposure, but should be protected with clothing and umbrellas; more likely to develop heat stroke because of decreased ability to sweat 3. Sun-protective clothing (e.g. Solumbra) 4. Shade (e.g. umbrellas) 5. Sunscreens (see Chapter 21) with the regular use of SPF 15 sunscreen during first 18 years of life, the lifetime incidence of nonmelanoma skin cancers can be reduced 78% Acute sunburn 1. Cool wet compresses 2. Aspirin, non-steroidal agents and indomethacin inhibit prostaglandin synthesis, and may modify sunburn if given within 24–48 hours of exposure, but will not repair damage already done to epidermal cells 3. Steroids either topically or orally are not beneficial

201

Prognosis

• Self-limited • Chronic sun exposure has long-term effects References Cokkinides VE, Weinstock MA, O’Connell MC, Thun MJ. Use of indoor tanning sunlamps by US youth, ages 11–18 years, and by their parent or guardian caregivers: prevalence and correlates. Pediatrics 2002; 109: 1124–30 Drake LA, Dinehart SM, Farmer ER, et al.Guidelines of care for photoaging/photodamage. J Am Acad Dermatol 1996; 35: 462–4 Driscoll MS, Wagner RF Jr. Clinical management of the acute sunburn reaction. Cutis 2000; 66: 53–8 Garssen J, van Loveren H. Effects of ultraviolet exposure on the immune system. Crit Rev Immunol 2001; 21: 359–97 Geller AC, Colditz G, Oliveria S, et al. Use of sunscreen, sunburning rates, and tanning bed use among more than 10 000 US children and adolescents. Pediatrics 2002; 109: 1009–14 Kim HJ. Photoprotection in adolescents. Adolesc Med State Art Rev 2001; 12: 181–93

Photoallergic dermatitis Major points

• Chemicals can produce abnormal reactions when •

light energy is absorbed, causing either phototoxic or photoallergic reactions Photosensitizing agents may be either endogenous or exogenous 1. Endogenous photosensitivity (e.g. porphyria); primary action spectrum is in the UVA range, 400–410 nm 2. Exogenous photosensitizers produce phototoxic reactions which clinically resemble exaggerated sunburn (see Table 12.2) 3. Topical photosensitizers (e.g. furocoumarins, lime oil, oil of cedar, vanilla oils, oil of lavender and sandalwood oil) cause photosensitivity reactions beginning 24 hours after exposure (see Phytophotodermatitis)

Mallory Chapter 12

202

27/1/05

2:27 pm

Page 202

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

3. Limes, certain perfumes, celery and certain grasses have higher content of furocoumarins 4. History of exposure is helpful

• Ranges from mild erythema or eczematous patches •

to severe blistering; may present with only postinflammatory hyperpigmentation Most photosensitization caused by UVA (320–400 nm)

References Crouch RB, Foley PA, Baker CS. Analysis of patients with suspected photosensitivity referred for investigation to an Australian photodermatology clinic. J Am Acad Dermatol 2003; 48: 714–20 Darvay A, White IR, Rycroft RJ, et al. Photoallergic contact dermatitis is uncommon. Br J Dermatol 2001; 145: 597–601 Moore DE. Drug-induced cutaneous photosensitivity: incidence, mechanism, prevention and management. Drug Safety 2002; 25: 345–72 Morison WL. Clinical practice. Photosensitivity. N Engl J Med 2004; 350: 1111–17

Differential diagnosis

• • • •

Allergic contact dermatitis Postinflammatory hyperpigmentation Incontinentia pigmenti Lentiginous nevus

Treatment

• Avoid photosensitizing chemicals • Apply moderate potency topical corticosteroid 2–3 •

times daily for 2–3 weeks Over-the-counter bleaching creams with hydroquinone may be helpful for postinflammatory hyperpigmentation, although usually not needed

Prognosis

Phytophotodermatitis

• Excellent; lesions fade slowly

Major points

References

• Caused by exposure to furocoumarins (psoralens)

Bowers AG. Phytophotodermatitis. Am J Contact Dermatitis 1999; 10: 89–93

from plants

• Clinical picture: 1. Redness, blisters and post-inflammatory hyperpigmentation, which often occur in bizarre shapes or linear streaks (Figure 12.3) 2. Can present with hyperpigmented streaks without history of erythema or blistering

Coffman K, Boyce WT, Hansen RC. Phytophotodermatitis simulating child abuse. Am J Dis Child 1985; 139: 239–40 Goskowicz MO, Friedlander SF, Eichenfield LF. Endemic ‘Lime’ disease: phytophotodermatitis in San Diego County. Pediatrics 1994; 93: 828–30 Solis RR, Dotson DA, Trizna Z. Phytophotodermatitis: a sometimes difficult diagnosis. Arch Fam Med 2000; 9: 1195–6

Polymorphous light eruption Major points

• Broad term for a group of sun-sensitive disorders which have distinct clinical patterns

• Four major types:

Figure 12.3 Phytophotodermatitis caused by lime juice and sun exposure

1. Papular polymorphous light eruption (PMLE) a. Most common type, manifests as a papular, itchy dermatitis beginning in spring and tending to improve throughout summer (Figure 12.4) b. Sudden onset of pruritic, discrete, erythematous papules and plaques

Mallory Chapter 12

27/1/05

2:27 pm

Page 203

Photodermatoses and physical injury and abuse

Figure 12.4 the face

203

Polymorphous light eruption – vesicles on

c. Begins within hours to days of sun exposure d. Lasts 1–7 days e. Not scarring f. Not all areas of sun exposure affected g. Female/male ratio >1 h. Some improvement or resolution with time 2. Actinic prurigo (Hutchinson summer prurigo) a. Most commonly seen in school-aged children b. More common in Native Americans c. Dermatitis starts in the early spring with acute itchy facial and forearm dermatitis with edematous papules and vesicles d. With time, crusting, thickening and lichenification e. Eruption clears, only to recur the next spring; however, some children have the eruption all year f. Chronic cheilitis, especially of the lower lip g. Autosomal dominant in some families 3. Juvenile spring eruption (hydroa aestivale) a. Primarily seen in northern European boys, aged 5–12 years b. Discrete papules of 2–3 mm or vesicles on ears and cheeks lasting about a week (Figure 12.5) c. Tends to recur each spring d. Some patients develop more typical papular PMLE

Figure 12.5

Juvenile spring eruption – limited to the ears

4. Hydroa vacciniforme a. Discrete, deep-seated vesicles on ears, nose and face which lead to hemorrhage and scarring b. Lesions last up to 4 weeks c. Occasional keratitis and uveitis d. Begins before age 10 years e. Male/female ratio >1 f. Rare Pathogenesis

• Considered to be caused by delayed-type • •

hypersensitivity response to a UV radiationinduced antigen One-quarter of affected individuals sensitive to UVB alone, one-quarter to UVB and UVA together, and one-half to UVA only Probably genetic, with incomplete expression and penetrance

Diagnosis

• Suspect diagnosis on clinical basis. Biopsy or phototesting may be needed

• Histology shows: 1. Superficial and deep lymphocytic infiltrate 2. Papillary dermal edema and hemorrhage 3. Variable epidermal changes

Mallory Chapter 12

204

27/1/05

2:27 pm

Page 204

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

4. Spongiotic dermatitis resembling eczema 5. Late lesions demonstrate chronic infiltration of lymphocytes and spongiosis Differential diagnosis

• • • • • • • • •

Atopic dermatitis Contact dermatitis Systemic lupus erythematosus Erythropoietic protoporphyria Sunburn/phototoxicity Photoallergic reactions Tinea corporis Drug-induced photosensitivity Solar urticaria

Treatment

• Sun avoidance • Restriction of daily activities outdoors between 10.00 and 16.00 (peak UV times)

Hann SK, Im S, Park Y-K, Lee S. Hydroa vacciniforme with unusually severe scar formation: diagnosis by repetitive UVA phototesting. J Am Acad Dermatol 1991; 25: 401–3 Hasan T, Ranki A, Jansen CT, Karvonen J. Disease associations in polymorphous light eruption. Arch Dermatol 1998; 134: 1081–5 Leenutaphong V. Hydroa vacciniforme: an unusual clinical manifestation. J Am Acad Dermatol 1991; 25: 892–5 Patel DC, Bellaney GJ, Seed PT, et al. Efficacy of short-course oral prednisolone in polymorphic light eruption: a randomized controlled trial. Br J Dermatol 2000; 143: 828–31 Rhodes LE. Polymorphic light eruption reassessed. Arch Dermatol 2004; 140: 351–2 van de Pas CB, Hawk JL, Young AR, Walker SL. An optimal method for experimental provocation of polymorphic light eruption. Arch Dermatol 2004; 140: 286–92 Van Praag MCG, Boom BW, Vermeer BJ. Diagnosis and treatment of polymorphous light eruption. Int J Dermatol 1994; 33: 233–8

• Clothing: wide-brimmed hat, long-sleeved shirt and sunscreens

• Topical corticosteroids in an ointment vehicle 2–3 times a day

• Wet dressings for acute weeping lesions • Treatment of secondary bacterial infection if • • • •

present β-carotene (Solatene) 60–180 mg/day for an adult For severe cases, oral psoralen plus UVA (PUVA) under controlled conditions may help induce hardening Frequent follow-up visits if dermatitis is not under control; less frequent as child improves Hydroxychloroquine (Plaquenil®) 100–200 mg BID (adult dose) for severe cases

Prognosis

• Variable; some patients may improve with time or with chronic sun exposure; however, many patients continue to have symptoms

Solar urticaria Major points

• Pruritic wheals occur within minutes of sun exposure and last <24 hours

• Locations on sun-exposed areas • Onset usually >10 years of age • Tolerance (i.e. ‘hardening’) can occur after repeated exposure

• Onset usually between 10 and 50 years of age • Slight female predominance Pathogenesis

• Allergic response to photo-induced allergen • Mast cells play a major role • Types of solar urticaria based on action spectra: usually visible light, but UVA and UVB or combinations may be responsible

References

Diagnosis

Boonstra HE, van Weelden H, Toonstra J, van Vloten WA. Polymorphous light eruption: a clinical, photobiologic, and follow-up study of 110 patients. J Am Acad Dermatol 2000; 42: 199–207

• Clinical characteristics • Histology: similar to urticaria with dermal edema,

Fusaro RM, Johnson JA. Hereditary polymorphic light eruption of American Indians: occurrence in non-Indians with polymorphic light eruption. J Am Acad Dermatol 1996; 34: 612–17

Differential diagnosis

perivascular neutrophilic and eosinophilic infiltrates

• Urticaria • Polymorphous light eruption

Mallory Chapter 12

27/1/05

2:27 pm

Page 205

Photodermatoses and physical injury and abuse

• Porphyria • Drug reactions Treatment • Sun avoidance with clothing and sunscreens • Nonsedating antihistamines • Systemic steroids (short course for 5–10 days) initially may be helpful • PUVA may induce tolerance

•

Beattie PE, Dawe RS, Ibbotson SH, Ferguson J. Characteristics and prognosis of idiopathic solar urticaria: a cohort of 87 cases. Arch Dermatol 2003; 139: 1149–54 Grabbe J. Pathomechanisms in physical urticaria. Symposium Proceedings. J Invest Dermatol 2001; 6: 135–6 Roelandts R. Diagnosis and treatment of solar urticaria. Dermatol Ther 2003; 16: 52–6

GENODERMATOSES WITH SUN SENSITIVITY Porphyria Major points

• Group of disorders of porphyrin metabolism •

which can have sun sensitivity as a primary feature (Table 12.3) Erythropoietic protoporphyria (EPP) 1. Most common type in children 2. Usually presents in preschool child with burning, itching or stinging of skin after short exposure to sun, even through window glass 3. Younger children may be irritable but may not have typical skin lesions 4. Intense sun exposure may result in severe facial edema, urticaria, vesiculation and crusting 5. Chronic changes: thickened skin-colored papules on the dorsal hands, and pitted scarring on nose and face (Figures 12.6 and 12.7) 6. Perioral linear papules may result from previous vesicular damage

Pathogenesis • Caused by enzyme defects in heme biosynthesis which lead to blockade of porphyrin

pathway and accumulation of porphyrins and precursors Porphyrin molecules absorb visible light and generate molecular level excited states leading to free radical formation with subsequent cell membrane damage and cell death

Diagnosis

• Histology: thickening of superficial blood vessels

Prognosis • May be chronic and intermittent References

205

•

and a perivascular deposit of periodic acid-Schiff (PAS)-positive material which, on direct immunofluorescence, contains IgG Blood, urine and stool porphyrin levels have characteristic patterns

Differential diagnosis • Phototoxicity • Photoallergic reactions • Polymorphous light eruption • Solar urticaria • Contact dermatitis Treatment • Sun avoidance with clothing and sunscreens blocking UVA (physical sunscreens with titanium dioxide are best) • β-carotene (Solatene) 60–180 mg/day may be helpful • Because of potential chronic liver changes, liver function tests should be followed every 6–12 months • Genetic counseling advised. Family members should be screened and liver functions followed • Low-dose hydroxychloroquine Prognosis • Chronic, life-long sun sensitivity, skin damage and possible liver disease References Ahmed I. Childhood porphyrias. Mayo Clin Proc 2002; 77: 825–36 Bruce AJ, Ahmed I. Childhood-onset porphyria cutanea tarda: successful therapy with low-dose hydroxychloroquine (Plaquenil). J Am Acad Dermatol 1998; 38: 810–14 Cummins R, Wagner-Weiner L, Paller A. Pseudoporphyria induced by celecoxib in a patient with juvenile rheumatoid arthritis. J Rheumatol 2000; 27: 2938–40 De Silva B, Banney L, Uttley W, et al. Pseudoporphyria and nonsteroidal antiinflammatory agents in children with juvenile idiopathic arthritis. Pediatr Dermatol 2000; 17: 480–3

Mallory Chapter 12

206

27/1/05

2:27 pm

Page 206

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Table 12.3

Porphyrias

Type

Characteristics

Erythropoietic porphyria (EP)

Begins in infancy Uroporphyrinogen III Marked photosensitivity with pain synthetase (UROS) Vesicles, bullae Gene locus: 10q25.2-q26.3 Hypertrichosis Autosomal recessive Mutilating scars Hemolytic anemia Splenomegaly Erythrodontia

Gene

Laboratory investigations Urine: elevated URO I, COPRO I Urine: fluorescent Stool: elevated COPRO I Blood: fluorescent RBCs

Erythropoietic protoporphyria (EPP)

Onset in first decade Ferrochelatase (FECH) Mild to severe Gene locus: 18q21.3 photosensitivity Autosomal dominant Burning, stinging after sun exposure Edematous plaques with erythema, purpura Waxy or depressed scars on nose, dorsal hands Liver: cholelithiasis, hepatic failure

Blood: elevated FEP Blood: elevated RBC & plasma PROTO Blood: fluorescent RBCs Urine: normal porphyrins Stool: elevated PROTO

Acute intermittent Onset 2nd to 4th decade porphyria (AIP) No photosensitivity Recurrent attacks of abdominal pain, weakness, neuropathy, behavioral changes Attacks precipitated by drugs, events

PBG deaminase Gene locus: 11q23.3 Autosomal dominant

Urine: elevated ALA, PBG during attacks Stool: ALA, PBG during attacks Blood: plasma neg, RBC neg

Porphyria cutanea tarda (PCT)

Onset in 3rd to 4th decade Moderate photosensitivity Bullae, fragility, scars, milia, hyperpigmentation, facial hypertrichosis Precipitated by alcohol, estrogens, iron, hydrocarbons Liver iron overload

Uroporphyrinogen decarboxylase (UROD) Gene locus: 1p34 Autosomal dominant or sporadic

Urine: URO I>III, ISOCOPRO Stool: ISOCOPRO>PROTO Plasma + RBC neg

Variegate porphyria (VP)

Onset 2nd to 3rd decade Photosensitivity similar to PCT Acute attacks simlar to AIP Common in South Africa

Protoporphyrinogen oxidase Gene locus: 1q22, 6p21.3 Autosomal dominant

Urine: ALA and PBG elevated during attacks Urine: elevated URO & COPRO between attacks Stool: PROTO>COPRO both elevated during and between attacks

Hereditary coproporphyria (HCP)

Onset any age Skin lesions resemble PCT but milder Attacks like AIP but milder

Coproporphyrinogen oxidase Gene locus: 3q12 Autosomal dominant

Stool: COPRO III elevated during and between attacks Urine: COPRO III elevated during and between attacks Elevated ALA, PBG only during attacks

ALA, delta-aminolevulinic acid; PBG, porphobilinogen; URO, uroporphyrin; COPRO, coproporphyrin; PROTO, protoporphyrin; ISOCOPRO, isocoproporphyrin; RBCs, red blood cells; FEP, free erytrocyte protoporphyria

Mallory Chapter 12

27/1/05

2:27 pm

Page 207

Photodermatoses and physical injury and abuse

207

Paller AS, Eramo LR, Farrell EE, et al. Purpuric phototherapy-induced eruption in transfused neonates: relation to transient porphyrinemia. Pediatrics 1997; 100: 360–4 Pandhi D, Suman M, Khurana N, Reddy BSN. Congenital erythropoietic porphyria complicated by squamous cell carcinoma. Pediatr Dermatol 2003; 20: 498–501 Poh-Fitzpatrick MB, Wang X, Anderson KE, et al. Erythropoietic protoporphyria: altered phenotype after bone marrow transplantation for myelogenous leukemia in a patient heteroallelic for ferrochelatase gene mutations. J Am Acad Dermatol 2002; 46: 861–6 Figure 12.6 hands

Erythropoietic protoporphyria – scars on

Xeroderma pigmentosum Major points

• Presents in infancy with extreme sun sensitivity • By 18 months of age, early sunburn reactions and • • • • • • • Figure 12.7 the face

Porphyria cutanea tarda – hypertrichosis on

freckling are evident after minimal sun exposure (Figure 12.8) Sunburn reactions persist for weeks Telangiectasias and atrophy of skin Actinic keratoses develop as red, scaly persistent macules and papules on sun-exposed areas In darker skinned patients, findings may be more subtle By 6–8 years, multiple basal cell carcinomas, squamous cell carcinomas and malignant melanoma are common Ocular findings, particularly photophobia and decreased vision, occur in ~20% Mild to severe mental retardation, especially evident in De Sanctis–Cacchione syndrome

Pathogenesis Fritsch C, Bolsen K, Ruzicka T, Goerz G. Congenital erythropoietic porphyria. J Am Acad Dermatol 1997; 36: 594–610 Gross U, Hoffmann GF, Doss MO. Erythropoietic and hepatic porphyrias. J Inherit Metab Dis 2000; 23: 641–61 Huang J-L, Zaider E, Roth P, et al. Congenital erythropoietic porphyria: clinical, biochemical, and enzymatic profile of a severely affected infant. J Am Acad Dermatol 1996; 34: 924–7 LaDuca JR, Bouman PH, Gaspari AA. Nonsteroidal antiinflammatory drug-induced pseudoporphyria: a case series. J Cutan Med Surg 2002; 6: 320–6

• Defective repair of ultraviolet radiation damage to

•

• •

pyrimidine dimers in DNA in many cell types (e.g. epidermal cells, fibroblasts, lymphocytes, corneal cells, liver cells) Group A: most severe form; exhibits skin and central nervous system disorders (severe or mild) (DeSanctis–Cacchione syndrome); gene locus/gene: 9q22.3/ XPA Group B: gene locus/gene: 2q21/ ERCC3, XPB Group C: usually have only skin disorders; most common in USA, Europe, Egypt; gene locus/gene: 3p25/ XPC

Mallory Chapter 12

208

27/1/05

2:27 pm

Page 208

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

• Prevention with complete sun avoidance: sun • •

protective clothing, sunscreens, and night time habits of outdoor activities Should ideally be followed at a center which is familiar with this condition and treatment of skin cancers Frequent visits are important to evaluate incipient tumors

Prognosis

• Prognosis is poor. Morbidity from chronic skin cancers requiring surgery. Early death from metastatic skin cancer or melanoma. Some types have a better prognosis References Bootsma D, Hoeijmakers JHJ. The genetic basis of xeroderma pigmentosum. Ann Genet 1991; 34: 143–50 Figure 12.8 Xeroderma pigmentosum – multiple lentigines and scarring from previous skin cancer removal

• Group D: skin cancer, CNS disorders; may have • • •

Cockayne syndrome or trichothiodystrophy; gene locus/gene: 19q13.2-q13.3/ ERCC2, EM9 Group E: few skin cancers, excision repair 40–50% of normal, gene locus: 11p12-p11 Group F: mild skin symptoms, excision repair 10–20% of normal; gene locus: 16p13.3-p13.13; gene: ERCC4 Group G: mental retardation, neurological abnormalities, photosensitivity, excision repair <5% of normal; gene locus: 13q33, gene: ERCC5

Cleaver JE, Thompson LH, Richardson AS, States JC. A summary of mutations in the UV-sensitive disorders: xeroderma pigmentosum, Cockayne syndrome, and trichothiodystrophy. Hum Mutat 1999; 14: 9–22 Kraemer KH, Lee MM, Scotto J. Xeroderma pigmentosum. Cutaneous, ocular, and neurologic abnormalities in 830 published cases. Arch Dermatol 1987; 123: 241–50 Stary A, Sarasin A. The genetics of the hereditary xeroderma pigmentosum syndrome. Biochimie 2002; 84: 49–60 Tsao H. Genetics of nonmelanoma skin cancer. Arch Dermatol 2001; 137: 1486–92

Cockayne syndrome Major points

Diagnosis

• Sub-typing can be done in certain laboratories by studying the DNA repair mechanisms after UV light exposure in the clinical setting of XP Differential diagnosis

• Multiple lentigines syndrome (LEOPARD • •

syndrome) Erythropoietic protoporphyria Basal cell nevus syndrome

Treatment

• Treatment is symptomatic, with removal of skin •

cancers Early biopsy of suspicious lesions

• Premature aging • Microcephaly • Photosensitivity – scaly erythema, begins at 1 year • • • • • • • • •

of age Short stature Mental retardation (progressive) Disproportionately large hands, feet, ears Atrophy of subcutaneous facial fat with sunken eyes Ocular defects Flexion contractures Short life span Autosomal recessive Gene locus/gene: 1. Type 1: chromosome 5/ERCC8, CKN1 2. Type 2: chromosome 10q11/ERCC6, CKN2

Mallory Chapter 12

27/1/05

2:27 pm

Page 209

Photodermatoses and physical injury and abuse

References Berneburg M, Lehmann AR. Xeroderma pigmentosum and related disorders: defects in DNA repair and transcription. Adv Genet 2001; 43: 71–102 Licht CL, Stevnsner T, Bohr VA. Cockayne syndrome group B cellular and biochemical functions. Am J Hum Genet 2003; 73: 1217–39

• • • •

Bloom syndrome Major points

• Short stature (prenatal onset) • Telangiectatic facial erythema (butterfly • • • • • • • •

distribution) Photosensitivity (not true poikiloderma) Hypogonadism High incidence of malignancy, especially leukemias, lymphomas, gastrointestinal tract cancer Increased susceptibility to infections Autosomal recessive Male/female ratio >1 Gene locus: 15q26.1 Gene: BLM, RECQ3 helicase; protein product is member of DNA helicase

References Chisholm CA, Bray MJ, Karns LB. Successful pregnancy in a woman with Bloom syndrome. Am J Med Genet 2001; 102: 136–8

• • • •

209

edematous plaques sometimes accompanied by blistering Photosensitivity Ocular abnormalities Hyperkeratoses of palms, soles, hands, wrists, ankles and elsewhere (squamous cell carcinoma may develop) Scalp hair sparse and fine, may progress to partial or total alopecia Short stature (<4 feet) (<1.2 m) Autosomal recessive (female/male ratio >1) Gene locus: 8q24.3 Gene: RECQL4 (DNA helicase)

References Collins P, Barnes L, McCabe M. Poikiloderma congenitale: case report and review of the literature. Pediatr Dermatol 1991; 8: 58–60 Duker NJ. Chromosome breakage syndromes and cancer. Am J Med Genet 2002; 115: 125–9 Furuichi Y. Premature aging and predisposition to cancers caused by mutations in RecQ family helicases. Ann NY Acad Sci 2001; 928: 121–31 Hickson ID. RecQ helicases: caretakers of the genome. Nature Rev Cancer 2003; 3: 169–78 Kitao S, Shimamoto A, Goto M, et al. Mutations in RECQL4 cause a subset of cases of Rothmund–Thomson syndrome. Nature Genet 1999; 22: 82–4 Vennos EM, Collins M, James WD. Rothmund–Thomson syndrome: review of the world literature. J Am Acad Dermatol 1992; 27: 750–62

Duker NJ. Chromosome breakage syndromes and cancer. Am J Med Genet 2002; 115: 125–9 Duker NJ. Chromosome breakage syndromes and cancer. Am J Med Genet 2002; 115: 125–9 Franchitto A, Pichierri P. Protecting genomic integrity during DNA replication: correlation between Werner’s and Bloom’s syndrome gene products and the MRE11 complex. Hum Mol Genet 2002; 11: 2447–53 Siegel DH, Howard R. Molecular advances in genetic skin diseases. Curr Opin Pediatr 2002; 14: 419–25

Rothmund–Thomson syndrome Synonym: poikiloderma congenitale

Pellagra – vitamin B3 (niacin) deficiency Major points

• Four D’s: Diarrhea, Dementia, Dermatitis (on sun•

exposed areas, angular stomatitis, glossitis, oral and perirectal sores), Death Causative drugs/factors: isoniazid, sulfonamides, anticonvulsants, antidepressants, plain corn diet (niacin not bioavailable), gastrointestinal disease (malabsorption), carcinoid syndrome, Hartnup disease

Major points

References

• Generalized poikiloderma, begins in infancy and

Karthikeyan K, Thappa DM. Pellagra and skin. Int J Dermatol 2002; 41: 476–81

progresses until age 3–5 years; lesions begin as red

Mallory Chapter 12

210

27/1/05

2:28 pm

Page 210

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Tyler I, Wiseman MC, Crawford RI, Birmingham CL. Cutaneous manifestations of eating disorders. J Cutan Med Surg 2002; 6: 345–53

COLD INJURIES Pernio Synonym: chilblains Major points

• Abnormal inflammatory response to cold, damp, nonfreezing conditions

• May be associated with cryogloblulins • Clinical:

• •

1. Single or multiple erythematous to violaceous macules, papules or nodules; rare blistering (Figure 12.9) 2. Distribution: symmetrical on distal toes and fingers; less often on heels, nose and ears Pathogenesis unknown but thought to be of vascular origin Histology: nonspecific with papillary dermal edema, superficial and deep perivascular infiltrate comprising of lymphocytes

Treatment

• Warming the affected area • Takes 1–2 weeks to recover Differential diagnosis

• • • •

Systemic lupus erythematosus Leukemia Trauma Cryoglobulinemia

Figure 12.9 Pernio – erythematous painful nodules after cold exposure

Frostbite Major points

• Erythema, edema, numbness initially followed by • •

hyperemia and pain with re-warming Locations: usually nose, ears, fingertips, toes Ranges from first-degree frostbite to fourth-degree frostbite with full thickness loss of skin, muscle, tendon and bone

Pathogenesis

• Occurs when skin temperature drops below –2°C • Combination of tissue freezing and vasoconstriction with damage due to inflammatory mediators Diagnosis

References Goette DK. Chilblains (perniosis). J Am Acad Dermatol 1990; 23: 257–62 Klapman MH, Johnston WH. Localized recurrent postoperative pernio associated with leukocytoclastic vasculitis. J Am Acad Dermatol 1991; 24: 811–13 Weston WL, Morelli JG. Childhood pernio and cryoproteins. Pediatr Dermatol 2000; 17: 97–9 White KP, Rother MJ, Milanese A, Grant-Kels JM. Perniosis in association with anorexia nervosa. Pediatr Dermatol 1994; 11: 1–5

• Clinical diagnosis: easily recognizable • Histology: superficial dermal edema, subepidermal bullae, hemorrhage, necrosis Treatment

• Rapid re-warming with water bath ~40°C References Biem J, Koehncke N, Classen D, Dosman J. Out of the cold: management of hypothermia and frostbite. Can Med Assoc J 2003; 168: 305–11

Mallory Chapter 12

27/1/05

2:28 pm

Page 211

Photodermatoses and physical injury and abuse

Huh J, Wright R, Gregory N. Localized facial telangiectasias following frostbite injury. Cutis 1996; 57: 97–8 Murphy JV, Banwell PE, Roberts AH, McGrouther DA. Frostbite: pathogenesis and treatment. J Trauma-Injury Infect Crit Care 2000; 48: 171–8 Nissen ER, Melchert PJ, Lewis EJ. A case of bullous frostbite following recreational snowmobiling. Cutis 1999; 63: 21–2

• CHILD ABUSE General

• Dr C. Henry Kempe in 1962 described ‘battered child syndrome’

• Child abuse encompasses: physical abuse, neglect, sexual exploitation

• Physical abuse is the nonaccidental injury of a child

• Statistics: >2 million children abused in USA per • •

year; 55% neglect, 27% physical, 16% sexual, 8% emotional Many teens run away from home 1200–1300 fatalities per year; 50% are <1 year old

Major points

• Victim usually 1–5 years of age, considered the ‘vulnerable child’; often preverbal or handicapped

• No predilection for sex, race, social class, or income

• Morbidity is both physical and mental, with 25–30% permanent

• Tends to be self-propagating (i.e. one generation to the next)

• Mortality overall 3–4%, caused by head trauma, or abdominal organ rupture

• Classification of abuse: 1. Definite abuse: definite act causing harm to child a. Seen by eyewitness b. Physical examination c. Skeletal survey 2. Probable abuse: most information indicates an act of commission but was not beyond reasonable doubt; unlikely to be the result of an accident 3. Household violence: not directed at a child

211

4. Neglect: complete lack of parental supervision; inadequate food, shelter, clothing 5. Medical neglect: inadequate medical care 6. Accident: unpreventable by reasonable parental supervision 7. Accident resulting from neglect: could have been prevented by reasonable parental supervision (e.g. more than one accidental poisoning) Cutaneous manifestations: 1. Incidence 80–100% of child abuse cases 2. Unusual findings should make one suspect abuse a. Lacerations in a child less than 1 year of age to the face or genitals b. Forced ingestions 3. Common manifestations a. Bruises (blunt trauma) i Child <1 year, especially facial bruises ii Unusual location (upper lip with torn frenulum, or back of buttocks) iii Multiple bruises iv Pinch marks on penis or ears v Age of bruise is determined by color. Fresh–3 days: reddish blue, purple, black; 7–10 days: greenish yellow; >8 days: yellow brown; 2–4 weeks: resolution vi Linear bruising from rod or stick vii Loop marks such as small ropes, cords, belts (Figure 12.10) viii Normal (not abuse) bruises are common and found on shins, knees, elbows b. Imprints i Buckles ii Slap imprints of fingers iii Human bites cause crushing injuries, not puncture wounds c. Binding or gagging around the ankles, wrists, or mouth means perpetuators are mentally disturbed d. Traumatic alopecia – hair pulled or yanked e. Thermal burns (Figure 12.11) i 4–8% of childhood burn patients have been abused ii 28% of tap water burn victims have been abused iii Hot water dunking iv Cigarette burns v Microwave injuries (baby placed into the microwave oven causes injury to the

Mallory Chapter 12

212

•

2:28 pm

Page 212

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Figure 12.10

•

27/1/05

Child abuse – loop marks caused by a belt

skin and deeper structures, not the subcutaneous fat) vi Branding with a hot object (e.g. curling iron) vii Hot water vaporizer: holding the child’s face too close which results in burn injuries viii Stun gun f. Child abuse until proven otherwise: i Circumferential burns in child <3 years ii Punched out, circular burns implying cigarette burns iii Forced immersion causing a doughnut pattern on the buttocks iv Gravity pattern of pouring hot fluids, particularly in areas the child could not cause v Uniform patterns g. Accidental burn prevention: recommend turning the water heater down to 120°F (49°C) Physical signs of neglect 1. Emaciation 2. Severe diaper dermatitis 3. Dirty, unkempt 4. Inappropriate dermatitis for the age (e.g. fire ant bites in a baby) Sexual abuse 1. 90% are female children 2. Natural father, stepfather or mother’s boyfriend is usually the perpetrator 3. Evidence of assaultive abuse (acute) a. Vaginal tears

Figure 12.11

•

Child abuse – facial burn

b. Anal tears c. Hematomas, bruises, petechiae 4. Evidence of assaultive abuse (previous) a. Hymenal distortions b. Scarring 5. Evidence of nonassaultive abuse a. Genital herpes simplex b. Condyloma accuminata c. Any sexually transmitted disease d. HIV; mean age of acquiring is 9 years; 64% in females 6. Examination a. Hymenal orifice size with lateral and posterior traction should be <4 mm b. Cultures for Neisseria gonorrhoeae, Trichomonas, Chylamydia, herpes simplex, Gardnerella vaginosis c. Serological tests for syphilis, HIV Symptoms which may occur after sexual abuse: 1. Depression 2. Dysuria 3. Encopresis 4. Excessive masturbation 5. Hematochezia 6. Nightmares 7. Promiscuous behavior 8. School failure 9. Sexually inappropriate behavior

Mallory Chapter 12

27/1/05

2:28 pm

Page 213

Photodermatoses and physical injury and abuse

•

10. Sleep disturbances 11. Suicide gestures 12. Substance abuse 13. Urinary tract infection 14. Vaginal bleeding or discharge Symptoms of noncutaneous child abuse: 1. Head injury 2. Shaking injuries 3. Abdominal injury (kicking, slamming against an object)

Pathogenesis

• • • •

213

2. Anticipate hostility and explain your role as a child’s advocate 3. Good photographs are imperative to document injuries Treat sexually transmitted diseases Refer for psychological counseling, social services Testify in court if necessary Provide support and follow-up care for the patient and family

Prognosis

• Nonaccidental injury to a child

• Poor prognosis unless intervention occurs • Can be self-perpetuating in subsequent generations

Diagnosis

References

• Maintain a high index of suspicion • Suspect child abuse in the following circumstances:

American Academy of Pediatrics, and American Academy of Pediatric Dentistry. Oral and dental aspects of child abuse and neglect. Pediatrics 1999; 104: 348

•

1. Physical features 2. Unusual behavior 3. Family characteristics 4. Actions of parents Clues which aid in diagnosis 1. Injury inconsistent with history 2. Changing history 3. Delay in seeking medical attention 4. Evidence of neglect 5. Injury blamed on someone else 6. Evidence of doctor shopping 7. Extremely passive or fearful child 8. High-risk family situation a. History of abuse to parent, sibling or patient b. Disorganized family relationships c. Parental history of drug or alcohol abuse or psychosis d. Child perceived as ‘special’. Parent thinks the child ‘deserves what he gets’ e. No family support systems

Differential diagnosis (See Table 12.4) Treatment

• Evaluation and acute management (Table 12.5) • Criteria for suspecting child abuse (Tables •

12.6–12.8) Physicians are mandated to report child abuse or sexual abuse in all 50 states in the USA 1. Report to child protective services

Bar-on ME, Zanga JR. Child abuse: a model for the use of structured clinical forms. Pediatrics 1996: 98: 429–33 Carroll ST, Riffenburgh RH, Roberts TA, Myhre EB. Tattoos and body piercings as indicators of adolescent risktaking behaviors. Pediatrics 2002; 109: 1021–7 Cohen JA, Mannarino AP, Zhitova AC, Capone ME. Treating child abuse-related posttraumatic stress and comorbid substance abuse in adolescents. Child Abuse Neglect 2003; 27: 1345–65 Dubowitz H, Black M, Harringon D. The diagnosis of child sexual abuse. Am J Dis Child 1992; 146: 688–93 Duhaime A-C, Christian CW, Rorke LB, Zimmerman RA. Nonaccidental head injury in infants – the ‘shaken-baby syndrome’. N Engl J Med 1998; 338: 1822–9 Gutman LT, Herman-Giddens ME, Phelps WC. Transmission of human genital papillomavirus disease: comparison data from adults and children. Pediatrics 1993; 91: 31–8 Kivlahan C, Druse R, Furnell D. Sexual assault examinations in children. Am J Dis Child 1992; 146: 1365–70 Ledbetter EO. An ethical approach to intervention/prevention of child maltreatment. Adv Pediatr 2003; 50: 215–29 Raimer BG, Raimer SS, Hebeler JR. Cutaneous signs of child abuse. J Am Acad Dermatol 1981; 5: 203–12 Schachner LA, Hankin D. Assessing child abuse in the dermatologist’s office. Adv Dermatol 1988; 3: 61–74 Stiffman MN, Schnitzer PG, Adam P, et al. Household composition and risk of fatal child maltreatment. Pediatrics 2002; 109: 615–21 Wissow LS. Child abuse and neglect. Review. N Engl J Med 1995; 332: 1425–31

Mallory Chapter 12

214

27/1/05

2:28 pm

Page 214

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Table 12.4

Differential diagnosis of child abuse

Clinical findings

Differential diagnosis

Differential tests

Bruising

Trauma Hemophilia Von Willebrand disease Henoch–Schönlein purpura Purpura fulminans Ehlers–Danlos syndrome

Skin biopsy Partial thromoplastin time Bleeding time Rule out sepsis, and other causes of vasculitis Rule out sepsis with cultures Hyperextensibility of joints

Local erythema or bullae

Thermal burn Staphylococcal impetigo Bacterial cellulitis Pyoderma gangrenosum Photosensitivity/phototoxicity Frostbite Herpes simplex or zoster Epidermolysis bullosa Contact dermatitis, allergic or irritant Lichen sclerosis Vulvar pemphigoid

History Culture, Gram stain Culture, Gram stain Culture, Gram stain, biopsy History of sensitizing agent (oral or topical) Clinical history and characteristics Tzanck smear, viral culture Skin biopsy, family history Clinical characteristics, patch testing

DERMATITIS ARTEFACTA Synonym: factitial dermatitis

Clinical characteristics, skin biopsy Skin biopsy, direct immunofluorescence

Table 12.5 Evaluation and management of the abused child

Major points

Detailed history (medical and social)

• • • •

Physical examination

• •

Created by self-induced lesions of the skin Motive is usually subconscious Female/male ratio >1 Single or multiple skin lesions range from vesicles to purpura, often with bizarre or unnatural appearance and angulated borders (Figures 12.12 and 12.13) Patient usually denies doing it Munchausen syndrome by proxy 1. Caused by parent inflicting injury on the child 2. Readily seeks medical advice, multiple doctors 3. Parent never leaves the bedside 4. Perplexing problem to physicians 5. Unexplained fever, cellulitis, seizures 6. Injuries caused by caustic solutions, fingernails or implements 7. Blood in the urine, vomit, sputum

Pathogenesis

• Psychocutaneous disorder where patients cause cutaneous lesions as a means to satisfy a psychological need of which they are not always consciously aware

Examine entire cutaneous surface (oral, rectal, genital mucosa, retina, tympanic membranes) Laboratory data (complete blood count, serology, appropriate cultures) Treatment of acute injuries or infections Radiographs (skeletal survey) Documentation in case records with photographs, diagrams, videos, as indicated Report to a local child protective service agency by telephone followed by a detailed written report Protection of the child from further injury

Diagnosis

• Lesions can mimic any dermatosis • Difficult to make a diagnosis; other primary skin disorders must be ruled out

• Histology: early signs of injury without inflammatory response; material injected; can vary

Mallory Chapter 12

27/1/05

2:28 pm

Page 215

Photodermatoses and physical injury and abuse

Table 12.6 Checklist criteria for suspecting child abuse

Table 12.7

215

Findings specific for sexual abuse

Presence of semen, sperm, or acid phosphatase Physical findings: Fresh bruises; unusual locations or shapes Old scars; unusual locations or shapes Past or current burns; unusual shapes Signs of rectal, genital injury

Pregnancy Fresh genital or anal injuries (lacerations, hematomas, ecchymoses, petechiae) in the absence of an adequate accidental explanation Positive test or culture for syphilis or gonorrhea (not perinatally acquired)

Medical experience, abuse or neglect suggested by: Current medical problems Prior medical problems Prior emergency visits – ingestions or trauma Prior hospitalizations Current or past venereal disease or pregnancy Poor compliance Incomplete immunizations Poor physical or developmental growth

HIV infection (if not acquired perinatally or through intravenous route) Markedly enlarged hymenal opening for age with associated findings of hymen disruption, including absent hymen, hymenal remnants, or scars in the absence of an adequate accidental or surgical explanation

Behavioral abnormalities with evidence of: Withdrawal Overcompliance Compliant posturing Phobias Sleep problems Recent onset of enuresis or encopresis Sexualized play Excessive interest in genitalia Inappropriate or excessive masturbation

Table 12.8

Findings suggestive of sexual abuse

Genital or anal Trichomonas, Chlamydia, condyloma accuminatum, herpes simplex type 2, if not perinatally acquired Disruptions of hymen tissue, including posterior or lateral angular, absence, and scars

Psychosocial conditions with evidence of: Disturbed parent–child interaction Violent interaction between parents Violent interaction between siblings Violent interaction with friends and relatives Parents abused as children Parents victims of sexual abuse Extra stresses on the family: marital discord, unemployment, alcoholism, substance abuse, recent death or illness in the family

Anal scars outside the midline Anal skin tags outside the midline Anal dilatation >15–20 mm without stool in the ampulla Irregularity of the anal orifice after complete dilatation Marked dilatation of the hymenal opening, persisting in different examination positions

Inappropriate custodial care of the child: Inappropriate responsibilities for a child

widely depending upon how lesions were produced

Family isolation: Lack of supportive relatives, friends or neighbors Previous referrals for abuse or neglect Adapted from Schachner L, Hankin DE. Assessing child abuse in childhood condyloma accuminatum. J Am Acad Dermatol 1985; 12: 157–60

Treatment

• Symptomatic initially • Psychology referral • Oral antidepressants Prognosis

• Best for children in whom the lesions represent a •

response to transient stress In chronic cases, severity can wax and wane

Mallory Chapter 12

216

27/1/05

2:28 pm

Page 216

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Figure 12.12 Factitial lesions – linear lesions without any signs of dermatitis (published in An Illustrated Dictionary of Dermatologic Syndromes by SB Mallory and S Leal-Khouri)

Figure 12.13

References

Koblenzer CS. Dermatitis artefacta. Clinical features and approaches to treatment. Am J Clin Dermatol 2000; 1: 47–55

Driscoll MS, Rother MJ, Grant-Kels JM, Hale MS. Delusional parasitosis: a dermatologic, psychiatric, and pharmacologic approach. J Am Acad Dermatol 1993; 29: 1023–33 Hettler J. Munchausen syndrome by proxy. Pediatric Emerg Care 2002; 18: 371–6 Joe EK, Li VW, Magro CM, et al. Diagnostic clues to dermatitis artefacta. Cutis 1999; 63: 209–14

Habitual picking the great toenail

Mallory SB, Leal-Khouri S. An illustrated Dictionary of Dermatologic Syndromes. Carnforth, UK: Parthenon Publishing, 1994 Puig L, Perez M, Llaurado A, et al. Factitial dermatosis of the breast: a possible dermatolgic manifestation of Munchausen’s syndrome. Cutis 1989; 44: 292–4

Mallory Chapter 13

27/1/05

2:29 pm

Page 217

13 DRUG ERUPTIONS

GENERAL

• Drug reactions occur in 1–3% of all hospitalized

Table 13.1 Drugs with a low incidence of cutaneous reactions

patients

• Reactions can occur through allergic, metabolic or toxic mechanisms

• Patients with allergy to one medicine are at risk of developing other drug allergies

• Disease states may cause eruptions or act as

•

cofactors (e.g. Epstein–Barr virus (EBV) and ampicillin, or HIV and trimethoprim–sulfamethoxazole) Predisposing factors 1. Personal or family history of skin disease 2. Environmental exposure to other etiologic agents (e.g. sunlight) Some drugs have a very low incidence of drug eruption (Table 13.1)

TYPES OF REACTION Morbilliform (maculopapular type) eruption

• Most common type of reaction causing ~40% of • • •

all reactions Symmetric erythematous blanchable macules and papules which coalesce into patches and plaques; can become pustular (Figures 13.1 and 13.2) Lesions tend to begin on extremities or in areas of pressure or trauma Variable involvement of mucous membranes, palms and soles

Acetaminophen Acyclovir Aspirin Aminophylline Atropine Chloral hydrate Chlorpromazine Cimetidine Codeine Desloratadine (Clarinex) Digoxin Diphenhydramine Estrogens Ferrous sulfate Fexofenadine (Allegra) Folic acid Heparin Hydroxyzine Lidocaine hydrochloride Magnesium sulfate Methyldopa Milk of magnesia Morphine Multivitamins Nitroglycerin Oral contraceptives Potassium chloride Prednisone/prednisolone Promethazine hydrochloride Propranolol Regular insulin Spironolactone Tetracycline Warfarin sodium

Mallory Chapter 13

218

27/1/05

2:29 pm

Page 218

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Table 13.2

Figure 13.1

Common causes of drug reactions

Amoxicillin Amphotericin B Ampicillin Barbiturates Blood products Captopril Carbamazepine Cephalosporins Chlorothiazide Diazepam Erythromycin Furosemide Gentamicin sulfate Hydralazine Hydrochlorothiazide Isoniazid Mercurial diuretics Naproxen Opiates Penicillin Phenytoin Radiologic dyes Thiazides Trimethoprim–sulfamethoxazole

Morbilliform drug eruption from penicillin

1. Ampicillin (patients with infectious mononucleosis have an incidence of >50%) 2. Trimethoprim–sulfamethoxazole (incidence >60% in HIV patients) 3. Penicillin derivatives 4. Antiepileptic drugs

Urticaria

• Red wheals occur which are very pruritic, ranging • Figure 13.2 Morbilliform drug eruption from trimethoprim–sulfamethoxazole

• •

• Usual time period between ingestion and drug • • • •

eruption is 1–2 weeks Rash usually lasts 1–2 weeks Low-grade fever common Rash may not recur with rechallenge Main causes: Table 13.2

• • •

in size from pinpoint to >20 cm and last <24 hours (Figure 13.3) Immediate reactions: reactions occur within minutes to hours Accelerated reactions: reactions occur 12–36 hours after exposure Angioedema (deep dermal swelling) may involve mucous membranes Anaphylaxis can occur with subsequent administration of the offending drug Caused by the degranulation of mast cells with release of histamine and other mediators Most common offending drugs causing urticaria: 1. Penicillins

Mallory Chapter 13

27/1/05

2:29 pm

Page 219

Drug eruptions

Figure 13.3 soles

Urticarial drug eruption involving palms and

2. Cephalosporins 3. Sulfonamides 4. Blood products 5. Radiographic dyes 6. Opiates 7. Curare 8. Aspirin 9. Nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory agents 10. Benzoates (in foods) 11. Food dyes (FD&C yellow dye no. 5)

Erythema multiforme See Chapter 11 • Hypersensitivity caused by a drug, infection (e.g. herpes simplex or mycoplasma) or other cause • Target-shaped lesions with urticaria or bullae (Figure 13.4) • Onset is sudden and often associated with malaise and sore throat • Stevens–Johnson syndrome – severe cutaneous lesions with mucous membrane involvement • Most common drugs involved: 1. Sulfonamides 2. Phenytoin 3. Barbiturates 4. Penicillins 5. Cephalosporins

219

Figure 13.4 Bullous erythema multiforme which progressed into toxic epidermal necrolysis

Toxic epidermal necrolysis See Table 13.3 • Most serious cutaneous drug reaction • Skin turns red, and the epidermis peels in large sheets, leaving a moist very tender base (Figure 13.5) • Usually caused by a drug • Examples: 1. Phenytoin 2. Sulfonamides 3. Nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory agents

Drug-induced hypersensitivity See Table 13.4 • Multisystemic idiosyncratic drug reaction • Fever, rash, lymphadenopathy, hepatitis, eosinophilia, leukocytosis • Female/male ratio = 1 • Begins 7–60 days (mean 17 days) after starting suspected drug • Rash (Figures 13.6 and 13.7) 1. Begins as morbilliform on face, upper trunk 2. Can progress to erythroderma or chronic exfoliative dermatitis 3. Can have vesicles, bullae, petechiae, purpura, edema

Mallory Chapter 13

220

27/1/05

2:29 pm

Page 220

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Table 13.3 Findings associated with serious cutaneous drug eruptions

Cutaneous Marked erythema Edema, particularly facial Cutaneous pain Palpable purpura Skin necrosis Bullae Positive Nikolsky sign Mucous membrane involvement Urticaria Other findings Fever >40°C Arthralgias/arthritis Pulmonary symptoms (shortness of breath, wheezing) Hypotension Laboratory abnormalities Abnormal liver function tests Elevated eosinophil count Atypical lymphocytosis Drugs implicated Allopurinol Amoxicillin Ampicillin Carbamazepine Lamotrigine Phenobarbital Phenylbutazone Phenytoin Piroxicam Sulfadiazine Sulfadoxime Sulfamethoxazole–trimethoprim Sulfasalazine Valproic acid Adapted from: Stern RS, Wintroub BU. Cutaneous reactions to drugs. In Fitzpatrick’s Dermatology in General Medicine, 5th edn. Freedberg IM, Eisen AZ, Wolff K, et al. McGraw Hill: New York, 1999: 1633–42

•

4. Mucous membrane findings subtle (erythema, petechiae) Systemic involvement 1. Liver (61%) 2. Hematologic (48%) – eosinophilia, leukocytosis, reactive lymphocytosis, leukopenia, anemia

Figure 13.5 Toxic epidermal necrolysis – with sheets of denuded epidermis

• •

•

3. Renal (15%) 4. Pulmonary (14%) 5. Spleen 6. Myositis 7. Pancreatitis Can be associated with recent viral or bacterial infection (e.g. EBV, hepatitis B, parvovirus, Streptococcus, Mycoplasma) Treatment 1. Oral prednisone 0.5–2.0 mg/kg per day 2. Topical steroids 3. Supportive care 4. May need hospitalization Pathogenesis 1. Possible defect in epoxide hydrolase enzymatic pathway which normally degrades toxic arene oxide metabolites formed during oxidation of antiepileptics; arene oxide metabolites may be directly cytotoxic or act as haptens, leading to hypersensitivity reaction 2. Sulfonamides – possible defect in glutathione transferase-mediated enzymatic breakdown

Serum sickness

• Type III immune complex disease caused by deposition of circulating immune complexes in

Mallory Chapter 13

27/1/05

2:29 pm

Page 221

Drug eruptions

Table 13.4 Drugs associated with hypersensitivity syndrome

Aromatic anticonvulsants Carbamazepine Phenobarbital Phenytoin Primidone Nonaromatic anticonvulsants Lamotrigine Valproic acid Ethosuxidimide Sulfa drugs Dapsone Sulfasalazine Sulfonamides Sulfamethoxazole Others Allopurinol Diltiazem Minocycline Terbinafine

•

Figure 13.6 phenytoin

Drug-induced hypersensitivity from

blood vessels and other tissues, activating the complement cascade Characterized by urticaria, morbilliform eruption, vasculitis, fever, arthralgia, lymphadenopathy, gastrointestinal disturbance, renal disease

Serum sickness-like reaction

• Characterized by rash (urticarial, maculopapular,

• • •

erythema multiforme-like angioedema), fever, arthralgias, lymphadenopathy, eosinophilia (Figure 13.8) No circulating immune complexes, vasculitis or renal disease Usually starts 1–3 weeks after administration of offending drug Common drugs: cefaclor, amoxicillin, ampicillin, β-blockers, cefprozil, cephalexin, doxycycline, minocycline, penicillin, sulfonamide

Figure 13.7 Drug-induced hypersensitivity from phenytoin with erythematous plaques

• Common drugs: 1. Oral contraceptives 2. Sulfonamides 3. Sulfonylureas

Erythema nodosum

• Red, tender subcutaneous nodules, usually located on the anterior lower legs

• May be caused by drugs, infection, inflammatory bowel disease or other causes

Photosensitivity eruptions See Table 13.5 • Action spectrum is long-wave ultraviolet light (UVA)

221

Mallory Chapter 13

222

27/1/05

2:29 pm

Page 222

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Table 13.5 Drugs and chemicals that cause photosensitivity reactions

Antidepressants Amitriptyline Doxepin Nortriptyline

Figure 13.8 Serum sickness-like eruption from a cephalosporin

•

Antihistamines Cyproheptadine

Diphenhydramine

Antimetabolic drugs Actinomycin Doxorubicin 5-fluorouracil

Methotrexate Vinblastine Hydroxyurea

Antimicrobials Ciprofloxacin Doxycycline Enoxacin Griseofulvin Minocycline Nalidixic acid Sulfasalazine Tetracycline Sulfamethoxazole–trimethoprim

• Phototoxic reactions are characterized by an

•

Desipramine Imipramine

exaggerated sunburn reaction 1. Does not involve immunologic mechanisms 2 Severity is dose-related 3. Phototoxic agents generally have a resonating chemical structure capable of absorbing photons of ultraviolet light and moving to an excited state, thus producing damage to cells 4. Examples: psoralen, tetracyclines Photoallergic responses involve primarily type IV reactions 1. Not dose-related 2. Occurs in a sensitized individual 3. Examples: chlorpromazine, sulfanilamide, thiazides, sulfonylureas Topical photosensitizers 1. Drug applied to the skin and exposed to light causing an eczematous eruption 2. Examples: para-amino benzoic acid (PABA), phenothiazines, coal tar, oil of bergamot, psoralens

Antiparasitic drugs Chloroquine

Quinine

Diuretics Acetazolamide Furosemide

Chlorothiazide Hydrochlorothiazide

Nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory drugs Ketoprofen Naproxen Piroxicam Sulindac Psychiatric drugs Chlorpromazine Haloperidol Tricylic antidepressants Other agents Acetretin Captopril Gold salts Oral contraceptives Psoralen

Amiodarone Carbamazepine Isotretinoin Promethazine Quinidine

Lichenoid drug eruption

• Purple-red, flat-topped, pruritic papules, similar to • •

lichen planus Often photo-distributed Examples: gold, antimalarials, phenothiazines, captopril, β-blockers and thiazide diuretics

Fixed drug eruption

• Well-demarcated, red to brown plaque with dusky center

• Lesions appear at the same sites after each administration of the medication

• May become vesicular or bullous periodically with

•

introduction of the offending medicine; chronically becomes a hyperpigmented patch (Figure 13.9) Location is usually hands, feet, face and genitalia, but can occur anywhere, including mucosal surfaces

Mallory Chapter 13

27/1/05

2:29 pm

Page 223

Drug eruptions

223

Figure 13.9 Fixed drug eruption – with typical dark center and erythematous halo

• Lesions are solitary or multiple • Common offenders: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Trimethoprim–sulfamethoxazole Ampicillin Amoxicillin Erythromycin Phenolphthalein Tetracycline Barbiturates Ibuprofen

Figure 13.10 minocycline

3. 4. 5. 6.

Gray pigmentation of the skin – caused by

Antimalarials Cytotoxic agents (bleomycin) Hydantoin Tetracyclines

Lupus-like reactions

Vasculitis

• Difficult to tell the difference between lupus and

• Palpable purpura with concentration on the lower

• • • •

drug-induced lupus reaction Erythema in the butterfly malar distribution and V of the neck Usually: antinuclear antibody-positive, antihistone antibody-positive, antidouble-stranded DNA antibody-negative Renal involvement less common in drug-induced lupus Examples: minocycline, procainamide, hydralazine (in patients who are slow acetylators), isoniazid, phenytoin, penicillamine

• •

extremities May involve other organs (e.g. liver, kidney, brain and joints) Examples: penicillin, phenytoin, thiazides

Acneiform eruptions

• Follicular papules and pustules in an acne •

distribution, often sudden in onset Causes: corticosteroids, oral contraceptives, halogens, hydantoin, lithium

Pigmentary changes

Alopecia

• Mechanisms: drugs stimulate melanocytic activity

• Anagen arrest caused by cytotoxic agents • Telogen effluvium caused by anticoagulants, oral

•

or deposit drug in tissues (Figure 13.10) Examples: 1. Heavy metals (gold, silver, mercury) 2. Phenothiazines

contraceptives and β-blockers

• Androgenetic alopecia caused by oral contraceptives

Mallory Chapter 13

224

27/1/05

2:29 pm

Page 224

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

SPECIFIC DRUGS CAUSING REACTIONS Penicillin

• Reactions range from 16 to 52 per 1000 recipients or 5–10% of the population

• Increased use of penicillin increases the risk of developing allergy

• Route of administration: parenterally administered • •

• •

drugs cause more reactions than those administered orally Certain diseases (e.g. infection with EBV, HIV, cytomegalovirus (CMV), etc.) may cause an increased risk of reaction Manifestations: 1. Maculopapular and/or papulosquamous reactions most common (associated with IgM antibodies) 2. Urticarial reactions – risk of developing anaphylaxis on subsequent exposure Penicillin can cause any of the four types of immunologic reactions Testing available to diagnose allergy to certain components of penicillin

Cephalosporins

Figure 13.11

Antiepileptic drugs

• Characteristic syndrome of maculopapular rash,

• • •

• Erythema which progresses to ‘purple urticaria’ • • •

(not true erythema multiforme), with cutaneous swelling (especially feet), migratory pruritic lesions No adenopathy Serum-sickness-like picture Hypersensitivity occurs in ~3% of patients

Corticosteroids

• Occurs from oral, parenteral, or topical application •

of corticosteroids Manifestations: 1. Acneiform eruptions 2. Striae (Figure 13.11) 3. ‘Moon facies’ caused by fat deposition in the cheeks 4. ‘Buffalo hump’ caused by fat deposition on the upper back 5. Telangiectasias 6. Atrophy 7. Masking of other dermatoses (e.g. tinea, scabies)

Striae caused by corticosteroids

fever, facial edema, lymphadenopathy, leukocytosis, hepatitis, nephritis, pneumonitis (see Drug-induced hypersensitivity) Most patients develop this syndrome within 2 months of starting the drug Cross-sensitivity with phenytoin, carbamazepine and phenobarbital Lamotrigine, which is structurally dissimilar, can also cause this reaction

Tetracyclines

• • • • • • • • •

Phototoxic reactions Onycholysis Fixed drug eruptions Staining of teeth Hyperpigmentation Serum sickness-like reactions Drug-induced lupus (e.g. minocycline) Urticaria Morbilliform eruptions

Gold

• Reactions occur in about one-third to one-half of patients

• Clinical manifestations: 1. Lichenoid reactions 2. Papulosquamous reactions (resembling pityriasis rosea) 3. Exfoliative dermatitis

Mallory Chapter 13

27/1/05

2:29 pm

Page 225

Drug eruptions

•

4. Morbilliform eruptions 5. Erythema nodosum Chrysiasis can occur after prolonged use, resulting from deposition of gold salts in the skin, causing blue pigmentation of the skin and ocular conjunctiva

225

• Vasculitis • Pseudoporphyria – blistering, erosions and scarring on dorsa of hands, and bridge of nose

Coumadin

• Sharply – demarcated, erythematous, purpuric Antimetabolites (chemotherapy)

• Anagen effluvium (alopecia) caused by the sudden • • • •

weakening of hair and subsequent breakage Stomatitis caused by toxic effect on mucosal cells which have a high mitotic rate Acneiform eruptions (e.g. actinomycin-D) Onychodystrophy (e.g. bleomycin, hydroxyurea, 5-fluorouracil) Chemical cellulitis/phlebitis/ulceration from intravenous extravasation

Lithium

plaques which become necrotic and form an eschar

• Lesions occur between days 3 and 10 of anticoagulant therapy

• Thrombosis due to a relative drop in circulating protein C levels Pathogenesis

• Molecular characteristics

•

• Aggravation of acne and psoriasis Iodides and bromides

• Acneiform eruptions • Granulomatous fungating lesions (halogenodermas)

Antimalarials

• Increased pigmentation (black or yellow) of skin • •

and mucous membranes Lichenoid eruptions Erythema annulare centrifugum

•

Sulfonamides and thiazides

• Thiazides are substituted sulfonamides and may • • • • •

cross-react with sulfonamide antibiotics Urticaria Morbilliform eruptions Erythema multiforme Vasculitis Toxic epidermal necrolysis

Nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory drugs

• Morbilliform eruptions • Bullous fixed drug eruptions

•

1. Increases in molecular size and complexity are associated with increased immunologic reactions 2. Small molecules form stable bonds with tissue macromolecules forming haptens Environmental/other factors 1. Viral infections can alter the host response, increasing the frequency of reactions (e.g. mononucleosis or HIV plus ampicillin-induced morbilliform eruptions) 2. Light exposure with photoallergic reactions (e.g. tetracyclines) 3. Associated diseases: systemic lupus erythematosus predisposes to developing reactions 4. Genetic factors: deficiency in epoxide hydrolase, an enzyme required for metabolism of a toxic epoxide derived from aromatic anticonvulsants such as phenytoin, carbamazepine and phenobarbital Nonimmunologic methods 1. Drugs may release mast cell mediators directly, causing urticaria (e.g. opiates, curare, radiocontrast media) 2. Drugs may activate complement in the absence of antibody 3. Drugs may alter the pathway of arachidonic acid metabolism (e.g. aspirin) 4. Individual metabolic variation (e.g. defect in clearing reactive intermediate metabolites with thiazides and sulfonamides) Type 1 immunologic reactions: 1. Mediated by IgE 2. Result in varying degrees of urticaria, pruritus, bronchospasm and anaphylaxis

Mallory Chapter 13

226

•

27/1/05

2:29 pm

Page 226

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

3. Immediate reactions occur within minutes after exposure 4. Accelerated reactions occur hours or days after drug exposure 5. Production of IgE directed against the drug or drug–hapten complex 6. Drug molecules in general are usually small enough so that they cannot initiate an immune reaction by themselves but require a carrier protein 7. Re-exposure to drug plus antibodies of IgE cause mast cells to release histamine, slow reacting substance of anaphylaxis (SRS-A), eosinophil chemotactic factor of anaphylaxis, neutrophil chemotactic factors and platelet activating factor 8. Examples: penicilloyl polylysin Type 2 immunologic reactions (cytotoxic antibody reaction): 1. Mediated by cytotoxic antibodies 2. Specific antigens combine with endogenous tissue components which, when combined, act as an antigen, stimulating the formation of antibodies 3. Antibodies coat the target tissue and stimulate complement activation and tissue destruction Type 3 immunologic reactions (immune complex reaction): 1. Most drug reactions are caused by this type of reaction: serum sickness, possibly erythema multiforme and erythema nodosum 2. Classic reaction pattern is serum sickness with fever, arthritis, nephritis, neuritis, edema and urticarial or morbilliform eruptions 3. Symptoms develop >6 days after exposure 4. Drug or drug–protein complex acts as an antigen, which stimulates antibody production 5. Sensitization occurs during first exposure with subsequent antibody formation, usually IgG or IgM 6. When the concentration of antibodies is high enough, there is formation of large immune complexes 7. Various sizes of immune complex result; size depends upon the rate of antibody production and immune complex clearance rates 8. Some immune complexes deposit in the peripheral circulation, where they stimulate inflammation and destroy local tissues

•

9. Products of the complement cascade, especially C5a and C3a, can degranulate mast cells causing urticaria Type 4 immunologic reactions (cell-mediated type): 1. Keratinocytes are activated and express various cytokines 2. Associated with morbilliform reactions to some oral drugs (e.g. amoxicillin) 3. Common as the cause of contact dermatitis (e.g. neomycin) Fixed drug eruption: 1. Histology: superficial and deep perivascular infiltrate with lymphocytes, eosinophils, some neutrophils and necrotic keratinocytes in the epidermis 2. Hypothesis that intercellular adhesion molecule1 (ICAM-1) plays a role in site restriction

Diagnosis

• Clinical evaluation:

•

1. History of taking drug 2. Alternative explanations for the rash (e.g. viral causes, contact history) 3. Timing of drug exposure with flow chart 4. Removal of the offending agent 5. Response to rechallenge Laboratory tests: 1. Drug levels 2. Complete blood count with differential 3. Liver function tests 4. Specific drug evaluations: a. Penicillin: skin tests b. Radioallergosorbent test (RAST) measures specific serum IgE against specific drug Histology: 1. Sparse mixed inflammatory cell infiltrate with eosinophils 2. Slight vacuolar alteration 3. Scattered dyskeratotic keratinocytes 4. Lichenoid drug eruption resembles lichen planus with eosinophils and a deep infiltrate 5. Fixed drug eruption shows keratinocyte necrosis, melanophages in the papillary dermis and a superficial and deep infiltrate

Differential diagnosis

• Morbilliform drug eruptions 1. Viral eruption 2. Miliaria rubra

Mallory Chapter 13

27/1/05

2:29 pm

Page 227

Drug eruptions

• • • •

•

3. Graft-versus-host disease 4. Kawasaki syndrome Urticaria 1. Insect bites 2. Vasculitis Erythema multiforme 1. Urticaria 2. Kawasaki syndrome Erythema nodosum 1. Ecchymoses 2. Vasculitis Photosensitive eruptions 1. Sunburn 2. Contact dermatitis 3. Eczema Lupus-like reactions 1. Systemic lupus erythematosus

Treatment • Discontinue offending drug • Supportive therapy as indicated by clinical picture • Corticosteroids early (prednisone 1–2 mg/kg per day) • Antihistamines • Topical antipruritic agents • Baths, with or without additives (e.g. oatmeal) • Intravenous immunoglobulins for toxic epidermal necrolysis • If patient is at risk for anaphylaxis or severe reaction, a medical alert bracelet is warranted • Consider desensitization if drug is necessary Prognosis

• Resolution with cessation of drug • Some pigmentation or scarring can be permanent References Barbaud AM, Bene M-C, Schmutz J-L, et al. Role of delayed cellular hypersensitivity and adhesion molecules in amoxicillin-induced morbilliform rashes. Arch Dermatol 1997; 133: 481–6 Callot V, Roujeau J-C, Bagot M, et al. Drug-induced pseudolymphoma and hypersensitivity syndrome. Arch Dermatol 1996; 132: 1315–21 Carroll MC, Yueng-Yue KA, Esterly NB, Drolet BA. Druginduced hypersensitivity syndrome in pediatric patients. Pediatrics 2001; 108: 485–93 Caumes E, Guermonprez G, Lecomte C, et al. Efficacy and safety of desensitization with sulfmethoxazole and trimethoprim in 48 previously hypersensitive patients infected with human immunodeficiency virus. Arch Dermatol 1997; 133: 465–9

227

Chosidow O, Bourgault I, Roujeau J-C. Drug rashes. What are the targets of cell-mediated cytotoxicity? Arch Dermatol 1994; 130: 627–9 Gonzalez E, Gonzalez S. Drug photosensitivity, idiopathic photodermatoses, and sunscreens. J Am Acad Dermatol 1996; 35: 871–85 Halevy S, Shai A. Lichenoid drug eruptions. J Am Acad Dermatol 1993; 29: 249–55 Hawfield W, Goodrich R, Warren S, Morrell D. Traumainduced cutaneous pigmentation from tetracycline: a case report. Pediatr Dermatol 2004; 21: 164–6 Hebert AA, Sigman ES, Levy ML. Serum sickness-like reactions from cefaclor in children. J Am Acad Dermatol 1991; 25: 805–8 Huang Y-L, Hong H-S, Wang Z-W, Kuo T-T. Fatal sodium valproate-induced hypersensitivity syndrome with lichenoid dermatitis and fulminant hepatitis. J Am Acad Dermatol 2003; 49: 316–19 Kaur S, Sarkar R, Thami G, Kanwar AJ. Anticonvulsant hypersensitivity syndrome. Pediatr Dermatol 2002; 19: 142–5 Lee WM. Drug-induced hepatotoxicity. N Engl J Med 1995; 333: 1118–27 Levy ML, Barron KS, Eichenfield L, Honig PJ. Naproxeninduced pseudoporphyria: a distinctive photodermatitis. J Pediatr 1990; 117: 660–4 Litt JZ. Drug Eruption Reference Manual, 9th edn. Parthenon Publishing: New York, 2003 Ming ME, Bhawan J, Stefanato CM, et al. Imipramineinduced hyperpigmentation: four cases and a review of the literature. J Am Acad Dermatol 1999; 40: 159–66 Morelli JG, Tay Y-K, Rogers M, et al. Fixed drug eruptions in children. J Pediatr 1999; 134: 365–7 Nigen S, Knowles SR, Shear NH. Drug eruptions – approaching the diagnosis of drug-induced skin diseases. J Drugs Dermatol 2003; 3: 278–99 Sehgal VN, Srivastava G, Sardana K. Erythroderma/exfoliative dermatitis: a synopsis. Int J Dermatol 2004; 43: 39–47 Shapiro LE, Shear NH. Drug interactions: proteins, pumps, and p-450s. J Am Acad Dermatol 2002; 47: 467–84 Shapiro LE, Knowles SR, Shear NH. Comparative safety of tetracycline, minocycline and doxycycline. Arch Dermatol 1997; 133: 1224–30 Stern RS, Wintroub BU. Cutaneous reactions to drugs. In Fitzpatrick’s Dermatology in General Medicine, 5th edn. Freedberg IM, Eisen AZ, Wolff K, et al., eds. McGraw Hill: New York, 1999: 1633–42 Tristani-Firouzi P, Petersen MJ, Saffle JR, et al. Treatment of toxic epidermal necrolysis with intravenous immunoglobulin in children. J Am Acad Dermatol 2002; 47: 548–52

Mallory Chapter 13

27/1/05

2:29 pm

Page 228

Mallory Chapter 14

27/1/05

2:30 pm

Page 229

14 PIGMENTARY DISORDERS

LINES OF BLASCHKO

HYPERPIGMENTED DISORDERS

• A form of mosaicism with two or more genetically

Postinflammatory hyperpigmentation

• • •

distinct cell lines arising from a postzygotic somatic mutation (see Table 17.1) Follow segmental and linear skin lines which are V-shaped or a circling pattern on the chest and a linear distribution on the extremities Should not be confused with dermatomes, which are areas of the skin innervated by sensory nerves Can be hypopigmented (e.g. hypomelanosis of Ito), hyperpigmented (e.g. linear and whorled hypermelanosis), or verrucous (e.g. epidermal nevus), depending upon the type of defect

Major points

• Most common cause of increased pigmentation in childhood

• Follows an inflammatory process or traumatic

• •

injury to the epidermis, especially following atopic dermatitis, contact dermatitis, or lichen planus (Figure 14.1) Lesions usually localized and follow the distribution of the resolving skin disorder More common in dark skin types

References Bolognia JL, Orlow SJ, Glick SA. Lines of Blaschko. J Am Acad Dermatol 1994; 31: 157–90 Danarti R, Bittar M, Happle R, Konig A. Linear atrophoderma of Moulin: postulation of mosaicism for a predisposing gene. J Am Acad Dermatol 2003; 49: 492–8 Duran-McKinster C, Moises C, Rodriguez-Jurado R, et al. Streptococcal exanthem in a Blaschkolinear pattern: clinical evidence for genetic mosaicism in hypomelanosis of Ito. Pediatr Dermatol 2002; 19: 423–5 Happle R, Assim A. The lines of Blaschko on the head and neck. J Am Acad Dermatol 2001; 44: 612–15 Kabbash C, Laude TA, Weinberg JM, Silverberg NB. Lichen planus in the lines of Blaschko. Pediatr Dermatol 2002; 19: 541–5 Nehal KS, DeBenito R, Orlow SJ. Analysis of 54 cases of hypopigmentation and hyperpigmentation along the lines of Blaschko. Arch Dermatol 1996; 132: 1167–70 Rott HD. Extracutaneous analogies of Blaschko lines. Am J Med Genet 1999; 85: 338–41

Figure 14.1 Postinflammatory hyperpigmentation following insect bites

Mallory Chapter 14

230

27/1/05

2:30 pm

Page 230

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Pathogenesis

• Histology: aberrant delivery of melanin to the surrounding keratinocytes and deposition of pigment in the dermal melanophages Diagnosis

• Clinical presentation Differential diagnosis

• Café au lait macule • Becker nevus • Nevus spilus Treatment

• No treatment is very effective • Hydroquinone 2-4% BID may decrease epidermal hyperpigmentation slowly Prognosis

• After inflammation is resolved, hyperpigmentation fades slowly over many months References

Figure 14.2 Generalized hyperpigmentation caused by Addison disease with accentuation of palmar creases

Pathogenesis

Ruiz-Maldonado R, Orozco-Covarrubias ML. Postinflammatory hypopigmentation and hyperpigmentation. Semin Cutan Med Surg 1997; 16: 36–43

• Etiology depends upon cause of pigmentation • Melanogenic action of increased pituitary peptides

Generalized hyperpigmentation

Diagnosis

Major points

• Clinical presentation • Histology: increased melanin in melanocytes and

• Widespread accentuation of normal areas of

• •

melanin pigmentation all over the body with marked increases in skin creases of palms and soles and mucous membranes Generalized hyperpigmentation should be differentiated from normal variation or from sun exposure Causes: 1. Endocrine abnormalities (e.g. Addison disease, Cushing syndrome, acromegaly, melanotropinstimulating hormone (MSH) excess) (Figure 14.2) 2. Certain drugs (e.g. heavy metals, phenothiazines, antimalarials) 3. Hemochromatosis 4. Chronic renal disease 5. Chronic hepatic disease 6. Scleroderma 7. AIDS

(e.g. MSH in Addison disease)

some melanophages in the dermis Differential diagnosis

• See Causes (above) Treatment

• Depends upon the cause of hyperpigmentation • Discontinuance of medication or treatment of disease does not always improve hyperpigmentation Prognosis

• Generally permanent, unless caused by a medicine which can be discontinued References Fulk CS. Primary disorders of hyperpigmentation. J Am Acad Dermatol 1984; 10: 1–16 Oelkers W. Adrenal insufficiency. N Engl J Med 1996; 335: 1206–12

Mallory Chapter 14

27/1/05

2:30 pm

Page 231

Pigmentary disorders

Congenital nevocellular nevi

• Other tumors developing in CNN: schwannoma, neuroid tumor, lipoma, rhabdomyosarcoma, neurofibroma and others

Synonym: congenital nevomelanocytic nevi, congenital melanocytic nevi Major points

Pathogenesis

• Lesions are apparent at birth or within 1 year of

• CNN form in utero between 8 weeks and 6

• •

• • • • •

•

birth (Figure 14.3) Surface can be smooth, pebbly, verrucous or lobular Pigmentation is usually uniform, medium or dark brown but may have dark brown speckles or black areas. In dark skin, congential nevocellular nevi (CNN) tend to be more heavily pigmented Size ranges from small (2 mm to 1.5 cm) to medium (1.5–19.9 cm) to large (>20 cm) and can cover a large portion of the skin surface Except for size, the overall appearance is similar to that of acquired nevi Some have coarse long hairs Familial tendency has been reported CNN of the head or neck (usually large in size) may be associated with leptomeningeal melanocytosis, manifesting as hydrocephalus, seizures, mental retardation, or melanoma, and carries a poor prognosis Melanoma arises in ~5–15% in the reported literature

231

•

months Histology: nests, sheets or single nevus cells in the dermis, epidermis and sometimes into subcutaneous tissues with features of neuroid appearance, epithelioid cells and/or spindle cells; involvement around appendageal and neurovascular structures is common

Diagnosis

• Usually clinical, but biopsy might be indicated to confirm the diagnosis in unusual cases Differential diagnosis

• • • • • • •

Mongolian spot Café au lait macule Lentigo Acquired nevocellular nevus Nevus sebaceus Smooth muscle hamartoma Becker nevus

Treatment

• Ulceration, nodules or markedly varied •

• • •

pigmentation suggests the possibility of melanoma and should be biopsied Treatment is dependent on perceived risk of melanoma, cosmetic and functional considerations. There is some controversy amongst experts whether excision versus watching is advised Excision if indicated; goal is to remove as much of the CNN as possible while preserving function and cosmesis Management of extensive CNN should be individualized on a case-by-case basis Dermabrasion and other destructive methods may be cosmetically helpful but are controversial

Prognosis

• CNN usually expand in direct proportion to Figure 14.3 Large congenital nevocellular nevus – with variation in color

growth of the anatomic site and can actually enlarge. They often darken with time and develop hair; rarely they may become lighter in color

Mallory Chapter 14

232

27/1/05

2:30 pm

Page 232

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

• Incidence of melanoma in CNN is unknown, but •

ranges from 5 to 15%. In large CNN, half of the cases of melanoma arise before age 5 years Prognosis for patients who develop melanoma in a giant CNN is poor, because of early metastasis or late diagnosis

• Lesions slowly enlarge and become papular with age

• Nevi increase in darkening, size and number at puberty

• Most acquired nevi are <0.5 cm in diameter • The majority of nevi are in sun-exposed areas,

References DeDavid M, Orlow SJ, Provost N, et al. A study of large congenital melanocytic nevi and associated malignant melanomas: review of cases in the New York University Registry and the world literature. J Am Acad Dermatol 1997; 36: 409–16

•

Leech SN, Bell H, Leonard N, et al. Neonatal giant congenital nevi with proliferative nodules. Arch Dermatol 2004; 140: 83–8 LoGiudice J, Gosain AK. Pediatric tissue expansion: indications and complications. J Craniofac Surg 2003; 14: 866–72 Management of congenital melanocytic nevi: a decade later. Special Symposium. Pediatr Dermatol 1996; 13: 321–40 Marghoob AA, Borrego JP, Halpern AC. Congenital melanocytic nevi: treatment modalities and management options. Semin Cutan Med Surg 2003; 22: 21–32 Marghoob AA, Schoenbackh SP, Kopf AW, et al Large congenital melanocytic nevi and the risk for the development of malignant melanoma. Arch Dermatol 1996; 132: 170–5 Makkar HS, Frieden IJ. Congenital melanocytic nevi: an update for the pediatrician. Curr Opin Pediatr 2002; 14: 397–403

•

particularly the torso, but can be anywhere, including the palms, soles, buttock, scalp Types: 1. Junctional nevus: flat, with nevus cells located at the dermal–epidermal junction 2. Dermal nevus: dome shaped; nevus cells located within dermis 3. Compound nevus: slightly elevated dome-shaped hyperpigmented papule with nevus cells at the dermal–epidermal junction and in the dermis Dysplastic nevi 1. Unusually large, variegated in color, often multiple (Figures 14.4 and 14.5) 2. Common on back and scalp 3. If numerous, watch for changes of melanoma Increased numbers in: atypical mole syndrome, Noonan syndrome, Langer–Giedion syndrome, Turner syndrome, others

Pathogenesis

• Histology: nevus cells at the dermal–epidermal junction, within the dermis, or both

• Nevus cells are thought to arise from the neural crest Diagnosis

Shapall S, Frieden I, Chesney M, Newman T. Risk of malignant transformation of congenital melanocytic nevi in blacks. Pediatr Dermatol 1994; 11: 204–8

• Clinical presentation

Zutt M, Kretschmer L, Emmert S, et al. Multicentric malignant melanoma in a giant melanocytic congenital nevus 20 years after dermabrasion in adulthood. Dermatol Surg 2003; 29: 99–101

• Congenital nevocelluar nevus • Folliculitis • Spitz nevus

Differential diagnosis

Treatment

Acquired melanocytic nevi Synonyms: pigmented nevi, pigmented moles, melanocytic nevi Singular: nevus

• Nevi change slowly over months to years; therefore, only observation is warranted

• When indicated, elliptical excision or deep saucerization removal

• Lesion with atypical histology should be excised

Major points

• Nevi begin to develop in early childhood as small 1–2 mm pigmented macules

•

completely or followed closely for malignant change Destructive modes of therapy (e.g. cryotherapy, laser, etc.) not recommended

Mallory Chapter 14

27/1/05

2:30 pm

Page 233

Pigmentary disorders

233

Drake LA, Ceilley RI, Cornelison RL, et al. Guidelines of care for nevi, II: non-melanocytic nevi, hamartomas, neoplasms, and potentially malignant lesions. J Am Acad Dermatol 1995:32: 104–8 Guidelines of care for nevi, I (nevocellular nevi and seborrheic keratoses). J Am Acad Dermatol 1992; 26: 629–31 Marghoob AA, Orlow SJ, Kopf AW. Syndromes associated with melanocytic nevi. J Am Acad Dermatol 1993; 29: 373–88 Naeyaert JM. Brochez L. Clinical practice. Dysplastic nevi. N Engl J Med 2003; 349: 2233–40 Pope DJ, Sorahan T, Marsen JR, et al. Benign pigmented nevi in children. Arch Dermatol 1992; 128: 1201–6 Salopek TG. The dilemma of the dysplastic nevus. Dermatol Clin 2002; 20: 617–28

Spitz nevus Figure 14.4

Dysplastic nevi – numerous and large nevi

Synonyms: spindle and epithelioid nevus, benign juvenile melanoma Major points

• Solitary, reddish brown or dark brown, dome-

• • • • • Figure 14.5 Dysplastic nevi – closer view of a different patient. These lesions are all larger than normal and display variegation in color

Prognosis

• Natural course: appearance in childhood, number •

of lesions peaking in second and third decades then disappearing in seventh to ninth decade Majority of CNN are benign, growing in proportion to body growth

References Bauer J, Garbe C. Acquired melanocytic nevi as risk factor for melanoma development. A comprehensive review of epidemiological data. Pigment Cell Res 2003; 16: 297–306

shaped papule, 0.5–10 mm in size (Figure 14.6) 1. On face, tends to be reddish brown 2. On extremities, tends to be brown, mottled or verrucous Grows rapidly or slowly for about a year, then stops growing Affects children aged 3–13 years, primarily No racial or sex predilection Solitary lesions most common, but can be agminated or in multiple clusters Rare bleeding or pruritus

Pathogenesis

• Presumed to be derived from same progenitor cells giving rise to epidermal melanocytes and nevomelanocytes Diagnosis

• Histology: nevus cells are large and/or spindleshaped and slightly pleomorphic with maturation of melanocytes; little or no evidence of upward migration into epidermis Differential diagnosis

• Pyogenic granuloma • Hemangioma

Mallory Chapter 14

234

27/1/05

2:30 pm

Page 234

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Su LD, Fullen DR, Sondak VK, et al. Sentinel lymph node biopsy for patients with problematic spitzoid melanocytic lesions: a report on 18 patients. Cancer 2003; 97: 499–507

Blue nevus Major points

• Acquired or congenital • Usually solitary • Blue-gray or blue-black papule, nodule or plaqueFigure 14.6 Spitz nevus – brown-red papule which appeared quickly on this child’s face

• • • • •

• •

Malignant melanoma Juvenile xanthogranuloma Mastocytoma Acquired intradermal nevus Malignant Spitz nevus

Treatment

• Complete excision

• •

Pathogenesis

• Etiology unknown • Thought to be ectopic accumulation of melanin-

Prognosis

• Benign, and do not metastasize • May persist into adult life, becoming intradermal nevi in some cases

• Some case reports in adults who had ‘Spitz nevi’ really had melanoma, and therefore in an adult or late teen this diagnosis should be suspect References

like aggregate of dermal melanocytes (Figure 14.7) Blue-gray color is an optical effect of dermal melanin seen through overlying skin Diameter usually <10 mm, but can range up to 3 cm Location usually dorsal hands and feet Associated with: lentigines, cardiac myxoma and cutaneous myxomas (Carney complex)

•

producing melanocytes in the dermis during migration from neural crest to skin Origin either Schwann cells, endoneural cells or melanocytes

Diagnosis

• Typical clinical appearance • Histology: dermal melanocytes with melanincontaining macrophages

LeBoit PE. ‘Safe’ Spitz and its alternatives. Pediatr Dermatol 2002; 19: 163–5 Ruiter DJ, van Dijk MC, Ferrier CM. Current diagnostic problems in melanoma pathology. Semin Cutan Med Surg 2003; 22: 33–41 Shimek CM, Golitz LE. The golden anniversary of the Spitz nevus. Arch Dermatol 1999; 135: 333–5 Sordi E, Ferrari A, Piccolo D, Peris K. Pigmented Spitz nevi. Dermatol Surg 2002; 28: 1182–3 Spatz A, Barnhill RL. The Spitz tumor 50 years later: revisiting a landmark contribution and unresolved controversy. J Am Acad Dermatol 1999; 40: 223–8 Spatz A, Calonje E, Handfield-Jones S, Barnhill RL. Spitz tumors in children. Arch Dermatol 1999; 135: 282–5

Figure 14.7

Blue nevus – blue-black papule on wrist

Mallory Chapter 14

27/1/05

2:30 pm

Page 235

Pigmentary disorders

Differential diagnosis

Major points

• • • • • •

• Characterized by a pink or brown central nevus

Melanoma Nevocellular nevus Traumatic tattoo Sclerosing hemangioma Dermatofibroma Carney complex

Treatment

• Surgical excision is advised, because differentiation between blue nevus and melanoma is difficult

• Laser treatment controversial Prognosis

• Natural evolution has not been studied, but •

probably benign Rare malignant blue nevus found in contiguity with benign blue nevus

References Carney JA, Stratakis CA. Epithelioid blue nevus and psammomatous melanotic schwannoma: the unusual pigmented skin tumors of the Carney complex. Semin Diag Pathol 1998; 15: 216–24 Hendricks WM. Eruptive blue nevi. J Am Acad Dermatol 1981; 4: 50–3 Hsiao G-H, Hsiao C-W. Plaque-type blue nevus on the face: a variant of Ota’s nevus. J Am Acad Dermatol 1994; 30: 849–51

• • • • • •

surrounded by a halo of depigmentation usually 0.5–5 cm in diameter, often indicating onset of regression of nevus (Figure 14.8) Can be associated with acquired or congenital nevi More common in children with mean age of 15 years (majority <20 years) Multiple lesions common (25–50%) Any race Common association: vitiligo (18–26%) Can be seen with melanoma at distant sites (very rare)

Pathogenesis

• Both humoral and cellular factors may be responsible for nevus destruction Diagnosis

• Clinical presentation • Histology: central melanocytic nevus with dermal lymphocytic infiltrate surrounding the nevus, and depigmented zone devoid of epidermal melanocytes Differential diagnosis

• Vitiligo • Eczematous eruption around molluscum • Melanoma (usually adults)

Knoell KA, Nelson KC, Patterson JW. Familial multiple blue nevi. J Am Acad Dermatol 1998; 39: 322–5 Milgraum SS, Cohen ME, Auletta MJ. Treatment of blue nevi with the Q-switched ruby laser. J Am Acad Dermatol 1995; 32: 307–10 Pinto A, Raghavendra S, Lee R, et al. Epithelioid blue nevus of the oral mucosa: a rare histologic variant. Oral Surg Oral Med Oral Pathol Oral Radiol Endodontics 2003; 96: 429–36 Schaffer JV, Bolognia JL. The clinical spectrum of pigmented lesions. Clin Plast Surg 2000; 27: 391–408 Tschen JA, Cartwright J, Font RL. Nonmelanized macromelanosomes in a cellular blue nevus. Arch Dermatol 1989; 125: 809–12

Halo nevus Synonyms: halo nevomelanocytic nevus, leukoderma acquisitum centrifugum, Sutton nevus

235

Figure 14.8 Halo nevus – depigmented halo around a typical acquired nevus

Mallory Chapter 14

236

27/1/05

2:30 pm

Page 236

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Treatment

Pathogenesis

• Close examination of skin in order to rule out

• Histology of the light brown area: lentiginous

•

other associated disorders (e.g. vitiligo, dysplastic nevi, melanoma) Surgical removal of normal nevus with halo not usually indicated in children because of benign nature

Prognosis

•

melanocytic hyperplasia. Darker macules/papules demonstrate nests of nevus cells at the dermal–epidermal junction (junctional or compound nevi) Diagnosis

• Clinical diagnosis

Central nevus may persist, become less pigmented over time, or disappear with eventual repigmentation

References Baranda L, Torres-Alvarez B, Moncada B, et al. Presence of activated lymphocytes in the peripheral blood of patients with halo nevi. J Am Acad Dermatol 1999; 41: 567–72 Inamadar AC, Palit A, Athanikar SB, et al. Unusual course of a halo nevus. Pediatr Dermatol 2003; 20: 542–3 Musette P, Bachelez H, Flageul B, et al. Immune-mediated destruction of melanocytes in halo nevi is associated with the local expansion of a limited number of T cell clones. J Immunol 1999; 162: 1789–94 Zeff RA, Freitag A, Grin CM, Grant-Kels JM. The immune response in halo nevi. J Am Acad Dermatol 1997; 37: 620–4

Differential diagnosis

• Becker nevus • Café au lait macule • Congenital melanocytic nevus Treatment

• Observation usually sufficient • Surgical excision or biopsy is warranted if lesion demonstrates abnormally rapid growth of dark pigment Prognosis

• Risk of malignant change unknown, but probably very small References

Nevus spilus Synonym: speckled lentiginous nevus Major points

• Presents at birth or early childhood as a tan or brown macule which becomes speckled with darker pigmented macules over time (Figure 14.9)

Casanova D, Bardot J, Aubert JP, et al. Management of nevus spilus. Pediatr Dermatol 1996; 13: 233–8 Cohen LM. Nevus spilus: congenital or acquired? Arch Dermatol 2001; 137: 215–16 Cramer SF. Speckled lentiginous nevus (nevus spilus): the ‘roots’ of the ‘melanocytic garden’. Arch Dermatol 2001; 137: 1654–5 Johr RH, Binder M. Management of nevus spilus–a better way. Pediatr Dermatol 2000; 17: 491–2 Moreno-Arias GA, Bulla F, Vilata-Corell JJ, Camps-Fresneda A. Treatment of widespread segmental nevus spilus by Q-switched alexandrite laser (755 nm, 100 nsec). Dermatol Surg 2001; 27: 841–3 Rhodes AR. Nevus spilus: a potential precursor of cutaneous melanoma worthy of aggressive surgical excision? Pediatr Dermatol 1996; 13: 250–2

Melanoma Major points

• Rare in children, but has been associated with Figure 14.9

Nevus spilus – café au lait macule with nevi

congenital nevocellular nevi, acquired nevi, or de novo (Figures 14.10 and 14.11)

Mallory Chapter 14

27/1/05

2:30 pm

Page 237

Pigmentary disorders

237

• Change in nevus:

•

1. Asymmetry. Irregular pigmentation with darkening of one portion of the nevus, a small dark elevated papule within an otherwise flat papule, or flaking, scaling, ulceration or bleeding 2. Border irregularity. Lesion appears to be growing in one direction with scalloped edges 3. Color variation. Appearance of black, dark brown or admixture of red, white and black 4. Diameter >6 mm; most benign acquired nevi are <6 mm 5. Symptoms: burning, itching, or tenderness Risk factors: 1. New or changing mole 2. Age >15 years 3. Dysplastic nevi, prior melanoma and familial melanoma 4. Congenital nevocellular nevus 5. 50 nevi, >2 mm in diameter 6. 12 nevi, >6 mm in diameter 7. Light skin color 8. Marked freckling 9. Sun sensitivity 10. Excessive sun exposure Associations: 1. Family history of melanoma 2. Presence of multiple atypical nevi (atypical mole syndrome) 3. Xeroderma pigmentosum 4. Transplacental spread of maternal melanoma

Figure 14.10

Melanoma – arising in a congenital nevus

Pathogenesis

• Genetic factors with resultant progressive changes in DNA and inability to repair DNA

• Familial cutaneous malignant melanoma (OMIM no. 15560) can be caused by germline mutations in CDKN2A on chromosome 9p21 and CDK4 on 12q14 and 1p36 Diagnosis

Figure 14.11 Melanoma – changes in color brought this patient to the doctor; it was melanoma in situ

• Clinical features • Histology: increased numbers of atypical

Differential diagnosis

basal melanocytes with atypical nuclei of different sizes, epidermotropism, nest of melanocytes with variation in size and shape, asymmetrical no maturation of melanocytes, signs of regression

• • • •

Spitz nevus Congenital nevocellular nevus Acquired melanocytic nevus Blue nevus

Mallory Chapter 14

238

27/1/05

2:30 pm

Page 238

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

• Traumatic hemorrhage (especially under the nails, on the heels, or on the mucous membranes)

• Pyogenic granuloma Treatment

• Excision with wide margins based on microscopic

•

depth of melanoma cells: 1. In situ: 2–5 mm excision margin 2. <1 mm: 1 cm excision margin 3. 1–2 mm: 1–2 cm excision margin 4. 2.1–4 mm: 2–3 cm excision margin 5. >4 mm: 2–3 cm excision margin Adjunctive treatments: α-interferon, chemotherapy

Prognosis

• Influenced by depth of the lesion and involvement of lymph nodes

uncommon variant, pigment-synthesizing melanoma. J Am Acad Dermatol 2002; 47: 77–90 Saenz NC, Saenz-Badillos J, Busam K, et al. Childhood melanoma survival. Cancer 1999; 85: 750–4 Sahin S, Levin L, Kopf AW, et al. Risk of melanoma in medium-sized congenital melanocytic nevi: a follow-up study. J Am Acad Dermatol 1998; 39: 428–33 Schmid-Wendtner MH, Berking C, Baumert J, et al. Cutaneous melanoma in childhood and adolescence: an analysis of 36 patients. J Am Acad Dermatol 2002; 46: 874–9 Sober AJ, et al. (Task Force). Guidelines of care for primary cutaneous melanoma. J Am Acad Dermatol 2001; 45: 579–86 Wechsler J, Bastuji-Garin S, Spatz A, et al. Reliability of the histopathologic diagnosis of malignant melanoma in childhood. Arch Dermatol 2002; 138: 625–8

• Five year survival (in general; many factors influence staging): stages I–II: 79%; stage III: 13–69%; stage IV: 6% References Arbiser JL. Melanoma. Lessons from metastases. Arch Dermatol 1998; 134: 1027–8 Bevona C, Goggins W, Quinn T, et al. Cutaneous melanomas associated with nevi. Arch Dermatol 2003; 139: 1620–4

Becker nevus Synonyms: Becker’s melanosis, hairy epidermal nevus Major points

• Male/female ratio >1 • Clinical:

de Braud F, Khayat D, Kroon BB, et al. Malignant melanoma. Crit Rev Oncol Hematol 2003; 47: 35–63 Eedy DJ. Surgical treatment of melanoma. Br J Dermatol 2003; 149: 2–12 Handfield-Jones SE, Smith NP. Malignant melanoma in childhood. Br J Dermatol 1996; 134: 607–16 Johnson TM, Hamilton T, Lowe L. Multiple primary melanomas. J Am Acad Dermatol 1998; 39: 422–7 Johnson TM, Yahanda AM, Chang AE, et al. Advances in melanoma therapy. J Am Acad Dermatol 1998; 38: 731–41 Kanzler MH, Swetter SM. Malignant melanoma. Periodic synopsis. J Am Acad Dermatol 2003; 48: 780–3 Monzon J, Liu L, Brill H, et al. CDKN2A mutations in multiple primary melanomas. N Engl J Med 1998; 338: 879–87 Queirolo P, Taveggia P, Gipponi M, Sertoli MR. Sentinel lymph node biopsy in melanoma patients: the medical oncologist’s perspective. J Surg Oncol 2004; 85: 162–5 Richardson SK, Tannous ZS, Mihm MC. Congenital and infantile melanoma: review of the literature and report of an

•

1. May be present at birth or childhood as a brown patch with smudged borders 2. Sharply demarcated irregular hyperpigmented patch with or without coarse dark hair (Figure 14.12) 3. Location characteristically over the shoulder, anterior chest, or scapula, but can be anywhere 4. Enlarges slowly over ~2 years, then stabilizes 5. Usual size: 2–20 cm 6. Asymptomatic Rare association: hypoplasia of underlying structures (e.g. hypoplasia of the breast)

Pathogenesis

• Organoid hamartoma of ectoderm and mesoderm • Increase in expression of testosterone receptors and increased sensitivity to androgens may account for expression of lesion around puberty Diagnosis

• Clinical presentation • Histology: slight acanthosis, papillomatosis, hyperpigmented basal cell layer and variable increase in smooth muscle fibers

Mallory Chapter 14

27/1/05

2:30 pm

Page 239

Pigmentary disorders

Differential diagnosis

Freckles (ephelides)

• Congenital nevocellular nevus • Smooth muscle hamartoma

Major points

Treatment

• • • • •

No treatment needed Pigmented lesion lasers (Q-switched ruby, neodymium : YAG lasers) may improve hyperpigmentation Photoprotection decreases darkening from sun exposure Bleaching agents with hydroquinone may be helpful For hair removal: shaving, depilatories, electrolysis, laser

239

• 2–3-mm tan-brown macules appearing in sun• •

exposed areas, particularly on face, upper torso and arms (Figure 14.13) Lightly pigmented individuals usually affected Tend to fade in winter and increase in summer

Figure 14.13

Freckles – this young adult has type 1 skin

Pathogenesis

• Caused by sun exposure in light-skinned person with a genetic predispostion Histology: hyperpigmentation of basal cell layer Melanocytes are large and have more numerous and prominent dendritic processes

Figure 14.12 Becker nevus – unilateral mottled brown patch with increased hair

• •

Prognosis

Diagnosis

• Lesion persists indefinitely • Benign

• Clinical presentation

References

• Lentigines • Nevocellular nevi

Chima KN, Janniger CK, Schwartz RA. Becker’s melanosis. Cutis 1996; 57: 311–13 Formigon M, Alsina MM, Mascaro JN, Rivera F. Becker’s nevus and ipsilateral breast hypoplasia androgen-receptor study in two patients. Arch Dermatol 1992; 128: 992–3 Happle R, Koopman RJ. Becker nevus syndrome. Am J Med Genet 1997; 68: 357–61 Nirde P, Dereure O, Belon C, et al. The association of Becker nevus with hypersensitivity to androgens. Arch Dermatol 1999; 135: 212–14

Differential diagnosis

Treatment

• No treatment needed • Sunscreens and protective clothing can decrease the appearance of new freckles Prognosis

• Usually permanent but tend to fade with less sun exposure

Mallory Chapter 14

240

27/1/05

2:30 pm

Page 240

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

References Levine N, Fulk CS, Rubenzik R. Ephelides (freckles). In The Pigmentary System. Nordlund JJ, Boissy RE, Hearing VJ, et al. eds. Oxford University Press: New York, 1998: 849–51 Zhang XJ, He PP, Liang YH, et al. A gene for freckles maps to chromosome 4q32-q34. J Invest Dermatol 2004; 122: 286–90

Lentigo simplex

Arnsmeier SL, Paller AS. Pigmentary anomalies in the multiple lentigines syndrome: is it distinct from LEOPARD syndrome? Pediatr Deramtol 1996; 13: 100–4 Chamlin SL, Williams ML. Pigmented lesions in adolescents. Adolesc Med State Art Rev 2001; 12: 195–212 Chong W-S, Klanwarin W, Giam Y-C. Generalized lentiginosis in two children lacking systemic associations: case report and review of the literature. Pediatr Dermatol 2004; 21: 139–45

Plural: lentigines

Cognetta AB Jr, Stolz W, Katz B, et al. Dermatoscopy of lentigo maligna. Dermatol Clin 2001; 19: 307–18

Major points

Fulk CS. Primary disorders of hyperpigmentation. J Am Acad Dermatol 1984; 10: 1–16

• Hyperpigmented macule similar to a freckle, but is • • •

darker and does not necessarily show predilection for sun-exposed areas Size 2–15 mm in diameter Color ranges from brown to black Solar lentigines: irregularly shaped, darkly pigmented macules which appear after a severe sunburn; often seen with increased freckles in the same area

O’Neill JF, James WD. Inherited patterned lentiginosis in blacks. Arch Dermatol 1989; 125: 1231–5 Rahman SB, Bhawan J. Lentigo. Intern J Dermatol 1996; 35: 229–38 Smith SR, O’Grady TC. Reticulated ephelides: ‘inkspots’ revisited. Arch Dermatol 1996; 132: 353–4 Tanzi EL, Lupton JR, Alster TS. Lasers in dermatology: four decades of progress. J Am Acad Dermatol 2003; 49:1–31

Pathogenesis

• Histology: elongation of rete ridges, increase in numbers of melanocytes in basal layer and increased melanin in melanocytes and keratinocytes

Café au lait macules Major points

Diagnosis

• Clinical presentation Differential diagnosis

• Junctional nevocellular nevus • LEOPARD syndrome (multiple lentigines

• • • • •

syndrome)

• Peutz–Jeghers syndrome Treatment

•

Laser ablation: carbon dioxide, Q-switched ruby, neodymium : yttrium–aluminum–garnet, and alexandrite

Discrete brown macules (Figure 14.14) Appear at birth or during childhood Size 1 mm to >20 cm May involve any skin surface Neurofibromatosis: >6 macules greater than 0.5 cm in diameter if <15 years old, and 1.5 cm if >15 years (Figure 14.15)

Pathogenesis

• Histology: increased numbers of melanocytes and increased melanin in melanocytes and keratinocytes Diagnosis

Prognosis

• Clinical presentation

• Persists unless treated

Differential diagnosis

References Abdelmalek NF, Gerber TL, Menter A. Cardiocutaneous syndromes and associations. J Am Acad Dermatol 2002; 46: 161–83

• • • •

Neurofibromatosis McCune–Albright syndrome LEOPARD syndrome Epidermal nevus

Mallory Chapter 14

27/1/05

2:30 pm

Page 241

Pigmentary disorders

241

Figure 14.14 Café au lait macule – associated with neurofibromatosis

Figure 14.15 Café au lait macules in a linear distribution, not associated with neurofibromatosis

• Nevocellular nevus • Lentigo/lentigines

McCune–Albright syndrome

Treatment

• None usually needed • On the face, treatment with a pigmented laser may

Major points

• Triad of findings:

be temporarily helpful but may need multiple treatments Prognosis

• Lesions tend to be stable in size and distribution

•

References Goldberg Y, Dibbern K, Klein J, et al. Neurofibromatosis type 1 – an update and review for the primary pediatrician. Clin Pediatr 1996; 35: 545–61 Karabiber H, Sasmaz S, Turanli G, Yakinci C. Prevalence of hypopigmented maculae and café-au-lait spots in idiopathic epileptic and healthy children. J Child Neurol 2002; 17: 57–9 Landau M, Krafchik BR. The diagnostic value of café au lait macules. J Am Acad Dermatol 1999; 40: 877–90 Okazaki M, Yoshimura K, Suzuki Y, et al. The mechanism of epidermal hyperpigmentation in cafe-au-lait macules of neurofibromatosis type 1 (von Recklinghausen’s disease) may be associated with dermal fibroblast-derived stem cell factor and hepatocyte growth factor. Br J Dermatol 2003; 148: 689–97

1. Large irregularly shaped café au lait macules, usually on trunk; may be present at birth, usually evident in infancy 2. Precocious puberty (especially females) 3. Polyostotic fibrous dysplasia – usually onset at <10 years of age Other findings: 1. Endocrine abnormalities (e.g. acromegaly, hyperthyroidism, autonomous adrenal hyperplasia) 2. Ovarian cysts 3. Facial asymmetry

Pathogenesis

• Activating missense mutation in gene for alpha • • •

subunit of GS, the G protein that stimulates cyclic adenosine monophosphate formation Somatic mutation of GS alpha gene in early embryogenesis produces a mosaic of normal and mutant-bearing tissues Manifestions and severity depend on number and location of abnormal cells Gene locus: 20q13.2

Mallory Chapter 14

242

27/1/05

2:30 pm

Page 242

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

• Gene: GNAS1, stimulatory G protein, alpha subunit (Gsa; activating mutations) Diagnosis

• Clinical presentation

• Increased macular pigmentation in sun-exposed areas (Figure 14.16)

• Symmetric, patchy, facial melanosis • Often associated with pregnancy or oral contraceptives

Differential diagnosis

• Neurofibromatosis • Proteus syndrome Treatment

• See Café au lait macules Prognosis

• Depends upon endocrine and bony involvement • Lesions are static References de Sanctis C, Lala R, Matarazzo P, et al. Pubertal development in patients with McCune-Albright syndrome or pseudohypoparathyroidism. J Pediatr Endocrinol Metab 2003; 16 (Suppl 2): 293–6 Landau M, Krafchik BR. The diagnostic value of café au lait macules. J Am Acad Dermatol 1999; 40: 877–90 Levine MA. Clinical implications of genetic defects in G proteins: oncogenic mutations in G alpha s as the molecular basis for the McCune–Albright syndrome. Arch Med Res 1999; 30: 522–31 Lumbroso S, Paris F, Sultan C. McCune–Albright syndrome: molecular genetics. J Pediatr Endocrinol Metab 2002; 15 (Suppl 3): 875–82 Roth JG, Esterly NB. McCune–Albright syndrome with multiple bilateral café au lait spots. Pediatr Dermatol 1991; 8: 35–9 Shenker A, Weinstein LS, Moran A, et al. Severe endocrine and nonendocrine manifestations of the McCune–Albright syndrome associated with activating mutations of stimulatory G protein GS. J Pediatr 1993; 123: 509–18 Weinstein LS, Shenker A, Gejman PV, et al: Activating mutations of the stimulatory G protein in the McCune– Albright syndrome. N Engl J Med 1991; 325: 1688–95

Figure 14.16 Melasma – can be caused by oral contraceptives

• Female/male ratio >1 • More common in Latinos and Asians Pathogenesis

• Increase in number and activity of melanocytes • Histology: increase in epidermal and/or dermal melanin Diagnosis

• Clinical presentation Differential diagnosis

• Postinflammatory hyperpigmentation • Phytophotocontact dermatitis Treatment

Melasma Major points

• Common acquired hypermelanosis in teenage and adult women

• Discontinuation of oral contraceptives • Topical sunscreens • Bleaching creams with hydroquinone 2–4% BID for <6 months

• Cover-up makeup

Mallory Chapter 14

27/1/05

2:30 pm

Page 243

Pigmentary disorders

243

Prognosis

Pathogenesis

• Exacerbated by sun exposure • Chronic condition which may wax and wane

• Dermal pigmentation appears gray-blue because of

References Grimes PE. Melasma. Etiologic and therapeutic consideration. Arch Dermatol 1995; 131: 1453–7 Guevara IL, Pandya AG. Safety and efficacy of 4% hydroquinone combined with 10% glycolic acid, antioxidants, and sunscreen in the treatment of melasma. Int J Dermatol 2003; 42: 966–72

Mongolian spot Synonym: congenital dermal melanocytosis

decreased reflectance in longer wavelength region compared with surrounding area Diagnosis

• Clinical presentation • Histology: dermal melanocytes with fully melanized melanosomes Differential diagnosis

• Bruises • Congenital nevocellular nevus Treatment

Major points

• Opaque cosmetics • Q-switched ruby laser

• Clinical

Prognosis

1. Blue-gray macules with indistinct margins (Figure 14.17) 2. Common in Asians and Blacks, occasionally in Whites 3. Locations – lumbosacral area most common; aberrant lesions can be on face, extremities and torso 4. Size ranges from a few centimeters to >20 cm. 5. Can be multiple or single

• Natural course of lumbosacral macules is to fade in childhood

• Aberrant lesions stay indefinitely and tend not to fade References Bashiti HM, Blair JD, Triska RA, Keller L. Generalized dermal melanocytosis. Arch Dermatol 1981; 117: 791–3 Cordova A. The mongolian spot. Clin Pediatr 1981; 20: 714–22 Fulk CS. Primary disorders of hyperpigmentation. J Am Acad Dermatol 1984; 10: 1–16 Hori Y, Takayama O. Circumscribed dermal melanoses. Classification and histologic features. Dermatol Clin 1988; 6: 315–26 Leung AK, Kao CP. Extensive mongolian spots with involvement of the scalp. Pediatr Dermatol 1999; 16: 371–2 Smalek JE. Significance of mongolian spots. J Pediatr 1980; 97: 504–5 Stanford DG, Georgouras KE. Dermal melanocytosis: a clinical spectrum. Aust J Dermatol 1996; 37: 19–25 Van Gysel D, Oranje AP, Stroink H, Simonsz HJ. Phakomatosis pigmentovascularis. Pediatr Dermatol 1996; 13: 33–5

Nevus of Ota/nevus of Ito Figure 14.17 Mongolian spot in the typical location on the lumbar back

Synonyms for nevus of Ota: oculodermal melanocytosis, nevus fuscoceruleus ophthalmomaxillaris

Mallory Chapter 14

244

27/1/05

2:30 pm

Page 244

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Synonym for nevus of Ito: nevus fuscoceruleus acromiodeltoideus Major points

• Clinical 1. 2. 3. 4.

Sporadic inheritance More common in Asians and Blacks Female/male ratio >1 Characterized by unilateral, blue-black macules intermingled with small brown macules, giving a mottled appearance (Figure 14.18) 5. Location of nevus of Ota: skin innervated by V1 and V2; mucosa, conjunctiva, tympanic membrane may be involved 6. Location of nevus of Ito: unilateral pigmentation over supraclavicular, deltoid and scapular regions 7. Half the lesions present at birth; remainder appear at puberty Pathogenesis

• Histology: melanocytes widely scattered in reticular dermis with melanosomes singly dispersed and fully melanized Diagnosis

• Clinical presentation Differential diagnosis

• Congenital nevocellular nevus • Mongolian spot

Treatment

• Q-switched ruby laser – may require multiple treatments

• Cosmetic camouflage Prognosis

• Tends to enlarge and darken with time • Very rarely, melanoma arises within the lesion • Glaucoma arises in 10% References Fulk CS. Primary disorders of hyperpigmentation. J Am Acad Dermatol 1984; 10: 1–16 Hirayama T, Suzuki T. A new classification of Ota’s nevus based on histopathological features. Dermatologica 1991; 183: 169–72 Kono T, Chan HH, Ercocen AR, et al. Use of Q-switched ruby laser in the treatment of nevus of Ota in different age groups. Lasers Surg Med 2003; 32: 391–5 Lee CS, Lim HW. Cutaneous diseases in Asians. Dermatol Clin 2003; 21: 669–77 Leung AK, Kao CP, Lee TK. Mongolian spots with involvement of the temporal area. Int J Dermatol 2001; 40: 288–9 Liesegang TJ. Pigmented conjunctival and scleral lesions. Mayo Clin Proc 1994; 69: 151–61 Watanabe S, Takahashi H. Treatment of nevus of Ota with the Q-switched ruby laser. N J Engl J Med 1994; 331: 1745–50

Incontinentia pigmenti Synonym: Block–Sulzberger syndrome Major points

• X-linked dominant disorder characterized by linear

•

Figure 14.18 Nevus of Ota – dark gray patch around the eye (published in An Illustrated Dictionary of Dermatologic Syndromes by SB Mallory and S Leal-Khouri)

rows of blisters in first year of life, followed by swirling hyperpigmentation which follow Blaschko lines Four stages which can overlap: 1. Bullous stage (age birth to ~1 year) – linear rows of blisters following Blaschko lines on extremities and occasionally trunk; lesions can recur or new lesions can develop 2. Verrucous stage (~3 months to 3 years) – linear, verrucous lesions develop usually on extremities 3. Hyperpigmented stage (1 year to 20 years) – whorls of dirty-brown to slate-gray

Mallory Chapter 14

27/1/05

2:30 pm

Page 245

Pigmentary disorders

hyperpigmentation mainly on the trunk following Blaschko lines; fades in adolescence (Figure 14.19) 4. Hypopigmented stages (adulthood) – streaks of hairless atrophic hypopigmentation on the extremities; often subtle

245

• Gene locus Xq28. Gene: NEMO (nuclear factor κB essential modulator IKK-gamma)

Diagnosis

• Clinical diagnosis but confirmed with biopsy of skin in early life

• Histology: 1. Bullous stage: numerous eosinophils with spongiosis in the epidermis 2. Verrucous stage: eosinophilic dyskeratosis, hyperkeratosis, acanthosis, papillomatosis 3. Pigmented stage: melanin in dermis or in dermal macrophages 4. Hypopigmented stage: absence of skin appendages; mild epidermal atrophy; melanocytes decreased or normal Differential diagnosis

• Bullous stage:

• • Figure 14.19 Incontinentia pigmenti (stage 3) – whorling pigmentation following Blaschko lines

• • Associated manifestations: 1. Dental (65–80%) – anodontia, hypodontia and others 2. Hair (38–50%) – thin or sparse hair, patches of alopecia (especially vertex), woolly hair nevus 3. CNS (10–31%) – seizures, mental retardation, hemiplegia and others 4. Eye (35–40%) – strabismus, abnormalities of developing retinal vessels 5. Skeletal (14%) – chondrodystrophy, cleft lip and/or palate, clubfoot, contractures, hemiatrophy and others 6. Nails (7–40%) – onychogryphosis, pitting, ridging, subungual keratotic tumors and others 7. Breast – unilateral aplasia 8. Eosinophilia (up to 65%) in infancy Pathogenesis

• X-linked dominant disorder, usually lethal in male

1. Herpes simplex 2. Bullous impetigo 3. Other bullous disorders (see Chapter 6) Verrucous stage: 1. Linear epidermal nevus 2. Warts Pigmented stage: 1. Epidermal nevus 2. Linear and whorled hypermelanosis Hypopigmented stage: 1. Anetoderma 2. Goltz syndrome

Treatment

• Symptomatic treatment • Skin in neonatal period – topical care and topical antibiotics

• Other organ systems should be examined as indicated by specialists: ophthalmology, audiology, neurology, dental, genetics Prognosis

• Watch for seizures early in life (which often

• •

improve with time) with referral to neurologist if indicated; magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) or computerized tomography (CT) scan do not need to be routinely ordered Birth defects (e.g. alopecia, eye abnormalities) are permanent Pigmentary changes improve with age

Mallory Chapter 14

246

27/1/05

2:30 pm

Page 246

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

References Hadj-Rabia S, Froidevaux D, Bodak N, et al. Clinical study of 40 cases of incontinentia pigmenti. Arch Dermatol 2003; 139: 1163–70 Happle R. A fresh look at incontinentia pigmenti. Arch Dermatol 2003; 139: 1206–8 Hennel SJ, Ekert PG, Volpe JJ, Inder TE. Insights into the pathogenesis of cerebral lesions in incontinentia pigmenti. Pediatr Neurol 2003; 29: 148–50 Shah SN, Gibbs S, Upton CJ, et al. Incontinentia pigmenti associated with cerebral palsy and cerebral leukomalacia: a case report and literature review. Pediatr Dermatol 2003; 20: 491–4 Zvulunov A, Esterly NB. Neurocutaneous syndromes associated with pigmentary skin lesions. J Am Acad Dermatol 1995; 32: 915–35

Figure 14.20 Erythema dyschromicum perstans – slate-gray macules with indistinct borders

Prognosis

Erythema dyschromicum perstans

• Usually static once process stops

Synonym: ashy dermatosis

References

Major points

Meffert JJ. Erythema dyschromicum perstans: a case report and review. Cutis 2002; 70: 62

• Idiopathic, acquired, generalized, macular, blue•

gray hyperpigmentation Clinical features 1. Common in Latin Americans 2. Sporadic 3. Healthy individuals from childhood to adolescence 4. May begin as erythematous macules which fade and becomes slate-gray or ashy or may begin de novo as gray macules (Figure 14.20) 5. Lesions slowly enlarge and coalesce

Metin A, Calka O, Ugras S. Lichen planopilaris coexisting with erythema dyschromicum perstans. Br J Dermatol 2001; 145: 522–3 Osswald SS, Proffer LH, Sartori CR. Erythema dyschromicum perstans: a case report and review. Cutis 2001; 68: 25–8 Pandya AG, Guevara IL. Disorders of hyperpigmentation. Dermatol Clin 2000; 18: 91–8 Silverberg NB, Herz J, Wagner A, Paller AS. Erythema dyschromicum perstans in prepubertal children. Pediatr Dermatol 2003; 20: 529–30

Pathogenesis

• Pathogenesis unknown • Histology: increased melanin in dermis and epidermis with vacuolization of basal cell layer Diagnosis

• Clinical presentation Differential diagnosis

• Mongolian spots • Postinflammatory hyperpigmentation • Lichen planus Treatment

• None very effective

Acanthosis nigricans Major points

• Clinical manifestations: 1. Brownish-black, velvety thickening of the skin with increased skin markings (Figure 14.21) 2. Prominent in axillae, posterior neck, sides of the neck, groin, antecubital, popliteal surfaces and the umbilical area 3. May have soft papillomas (skin tags) or warty nodules on the affected skin 4. Rarely may affect mucocutaneous skin: eyelids, conjunctivae, lips, oral cavity, vulva

Mallory Chapter 14

27/1/05

2:30 pm

Page 247

Pigmentary disorders

247

• Malignancy-associated AN

•

1. Rare in children 2. Sudden onset and rapid spread of skin involvement 3. Associated with internal malignancy (e.g. gastric cancer, Wilms tumor) Medication-induced AN – e.g. nicotinic acid, diethylstilbestrol (DES), corticosteroids, estrogens, oral contraceptives

Pathogenesis

• Hyperinsulinemia is implicated in pathogenesis

• Figure 14.21 Acanthosis nigricans – typical velvety, dark appearance on the neck

•

• Epidemiology:

•

• •

1. Male/female ratio =1 2. Occurs most commonly during puberty, or in early adulthood 3. Peak prevalence in childhood is age ~12 years 4. Strong association with obesity: 66% prevalence in adolescents weighing >200% of their ideal body weight Benign acanthosis nigricans (AN) 1. Rare autosomal dominant genodermatosis 2. Associated with multiple melanocytic nevi 3. Presents at birth or early childhood Obesity-associated AN 1. Most common form 2. Clinical course of skin lesions follows weight gain and loss Acral AN 1. Occurs in healthy individuals 2. Distribution over dorsal hands and feet Syndromic AN – syndromes with associated insulin resistance 1. Lawrence–Seip syndrome (lipodystrophy and AN) 2. Leprechaunism 3. Polycystic ovary disease 4. Crouzon syndrome 5. Others

1. Usually caused by underlying insulin resistance in obesity or syndromes 2. Excess insulin binds to receptors on keratinocytes and fibroblasts, leading to increased proliferation of epidermal cells Tumor product with insulin-like activity or transforming growth factor (TGF-α) activity is implicated in malignant AN Histology: hyperkeratosis and epidermal papillomatosis; areas of acanthosis alternating with atrophy

Diagnosis

• Clinical features • Evaluate for underlying endocrine abnormality or malignancy if indicated Differential diagnosis

• Confluent and reticulate papillomatosis • Retained keratin Treatment

• Directed at correcting underlying disease

• •

1. Weight loss 2. Correction of underlying endocrine dysfunction 3. Discontinue offending drug 4. Treat underlying malignancy If mild AN, may not require treatment Topical emollients, keratolytics, topical retinoid (e.g. tretinoin 0.1% cream once daily for 2 weeks) or low-dose systemic retinoids

Prognosis

• Clinical course tends to follow exacerbation or resolution of underlying disorder

• Obesity-associated AN may improve with weight loss

Mallory Chapter 14

248

27/1/05

2:30 pm

Page 248

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

References Brockow K, Steinkraus V, Rinninger F, et al. Acanthosis nigricans: a marker for hyperinsulinemia. Pediatr Dermatol 1995; 12: 323–6 Hermanns-Le T, Hermanns JF, Pierard GE. Juvenile acanthosis nigricans and insulin resistance. Pediatr Dermatol 2002; 19: 12–14 Panidis D, Skiadopoulos S, Rousso D, et al. Association of acanthosis nigricans with insulin resistance in patients with polycystic ovar`y syndrome. Br J Dermatol 1995; 132: 936–41 Schroeder B. Early diagnosis, presenting complaints, and management of hyperandrogenism in adolescents. Curr Wom Health Rep 2001; 1: 124–30 Schwartz RA, Janniger CK. Childhood acanthosis nigricans. Cutis 1995; 55: 337–9

Figure 14.22 Confluent and reticulated papillomatosis – lesions can resemble tinea versicolor but a scraping for hyphae is negative, and it does not respond to antifungal therapy

Torley D, Bellus GA, Munro CS. Genes, growth factors and acanthosis nigricans. Br J Dermatol 2002; 147: 1096–101 Uyttendaele H, Koss T, Bagheri B, et al. Generalized acanthosis nigricans in an otherwise healthy young child. Pediatr Dermatol 2003; 20: 254–6

Confluent and reticulated papillomatosis Synonym: Gougerot and Carteaud syndrome

Differential diagnosis

• Tinea versicolor • Acanthosis nigricans Treatment

• Oral minocycline 100 mg BID • Variable success with topical therapy: salicylic acid,

Major points

• Distinctive clinical disorder of adolescents and • • • •

young adults Female/male ratio >1 Blacks/Whites ratio >1 Presents with brown hyperkeratotic papules coalescing into plaques with reticulate periphery (Figure 14.22) Location: chest, inframammary area, neck, shoulders, interscapular back and epigastric area

Pathogenesis

• Unknown etiology • Considered a variant of acanthosis nigricans or a disorder of keratinization

• May be related to endocrine abnormalities or host reponse to Pityrosporum orbiculare Diagnosis

• Clinical findings • Histology: similar to acanthosis nigricans with undulating hyperkeratosis, papillomatosis and mild acanthosis with basal hyperpigmentation

•

selenium sulfide, antifungals, 5-fluorouracil, calcipotriene, retinoids Oral retinoids if minocycline is ineffective

Prognosis

• Benign persistent course with recurrences References Bowman PH, Davis LS. Confluent and reticulated papillomatosis: response to tazarotene. J Am Acad Dermatol 2003; 48(5 Suppl): S80–1 Hirokawa M, Matsumoto M, Iizuka H. Confluent and reticulated papillomatosis: a case with concurrent acanthosis nigricans associated with obesity and insulin resistance. Dermatology 1994; 188: 148–51 Jang HS, Oh CK, Cha JH, et al. Six cases of confluent and reticulated papillomatosis alleviated by various antibiotics. J Am Acad Dermatol 2001; 44: 652–5 Mutasim DF. Confluent and reticulated papillomatosis without papillomatosis. J Am Acad Dermatol 2003; 49: 1182–4 Shimizu S, Han-Yaku H. Confluent and reticulated papillomatosis responsive to minocycline. Dermatology 1997; 194: 59–61

Mallory Chapter 14

27/1/05

2:30 pm

Page 249

Pigmentary disorders

249

HYPOPIGMENTED DISORDERS Vitiligo Major points

• Common, sometimes heritable, acquired loss of pigment in interfollicular melanocytes

• Affects ~1–2% of all races • Types

•

• •

1. Generalized – most common type; macules are symmetrical involving extensor surfaces of distal digits, knees, elbows and periorificial areas; mucosal involvement common (Figure 14.23) 2. Segmental – unilateral macules with dermatomal or segmental configuration which remains stable and is unlikely to be associated with autoimmune diseases; trigeminal area most common (Figure 14.24) 3. Focal – an isolated macule or a few scattered macules 4. Universal – widespread vitiligo; often associated with multiple endocrinopathy syndrome Clinical: 1. Onset at any age from birth to 81 years, with majority of cases beginning in childhood 2. Macules are chalky white, round or oval, with fairly distinct often scalloped margins measuring several millimeters to many centimeters without any epidermal changes 3. Trichrome vitiligo: presence of a band of lighter skin which interfaces between white and normal color displaying three colors: white, light tan and normal skin color (Figure 14.25) 4. Lesions begin as small areas and enlarge over time with coalescence, which can be extensive 5. Can exhibit Koebner phenomenon with involvement after injury 6. Associated with poliosis, prematurely gray hair, halo nevi and alopecia areata Generalized vitiligo can be associated with various autoimmune disorders: thyroid disease, diabetes mellitus, Addison disease, pernicious anemia, multiple autoantibodies, hypoparathyroidism Ocular involvement: iritis, retinal pigmentary abnormalities, chorioretinitis; visual acuity usually normal Rare syndromes: 1. Vogt–Koyanagi–Harada syndrome: rare multisystem disease characterized by aseptic

Figure 14.23 and elbows

Vitiligo classically on the fingertips, knees

Figure 14.24 Vitiligo – acquired depigmented patches in a segmental distribution

meningoencephalitis, vitiligo, poliosis, uveitis, dysacousia 2. Alezzandrini syndrome: characterized by unilateral facial vitiligo, poliosis (white patches of hair), ipsilateral pigmentary retinitis with gradual visual loss, and deafness

Mallory Chapter 14

250

27/1/05

2:30 pm

Page 250

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

• Repigmentation (slow and requires commitment

• • Figure 14.25

Vitiligo – trichrome color change

Pathogenesis

• Generalized vitiligo is a polygenic disorder; up to 30% have a family member affected

• Segmental vitiligo is not inherited • Theories for mechanism of destruction of melanocytes: autoimmune, neurochemical, or selfdestruction (toxic)

• •

Prognosis

• Natural course of generalized vitiligo is

Diagnosis

• Clinical presentation. Wood’s lamp examination •

may be helpful to identify lesions in light-skinned individuals Histology: loss of melanocytes; lymphocytes may be present in upper dermis in evolving macules

Differential diagnosis

• • • • • • • • • • •

Postinflammatory hypopigmentation Pityriasis alba Tinea versicolor Tuberous sclerosis Nevus depigmentosus Chemical leukoderma (phenolic compounds) Lupus erythematosus Melanoma-associated leukoderma Piebaldism Waardenburg syndrome Leprosy

Treatment

• Education about disease is most helpful • Sunscreens to vitiliginous areas to avoid sunburn

from patient and parents): 1. Topical corticosteroids (mid-strength to ultra-potent) 1–2 times a day 2. Psoralen (oral or topical) plus UVA light (PUVA) 3. UVB light, 2–3 times per week 4. Success depends upon presence of follicular melanocytes Surgical techniques with micrografts from uninvolved skin can be used only if patches are stable (non-progressive) Depigmentation with monobenzylether of hydroquinone 20% should be reserved for only those patients who have lost a large percentage of color and have no hope of repigmenting naturally Psychosocial factors should be addressed Cover-up cosmetics (e.g. Dermablend®) or temporary dyes

•

unpredictable, but most vitiligo is slowly progressive. Spontaneous regression rare. Treatment can repigment some areas (face responds best) Segmental vitiligo is usually stable but can respond to treatment

References Drake LA, Dinehart SM, Farmer ER, et al. Guidelines of care of vitiligo. J Am Acad Dermatol 1996; 35: 620–6 Gauthier Y, Cario Andre M, Taieb A. A critical appraisal of vitiligo etiologic theories. Is melanocyte loss a melanocytorrhagy? Pigment Cell Res 2003; 16: 322–32 Herane MI. Vitiligo and leukoderma in children. Clin Dermatol 2003; 21: 283–95 Hoffman MD, Dudley C. Suspected Alezzandrini’s syndrome in a diabetic patient with unilateral retinal detachment and ipsilateral vitiligo and poliosis. J Am Acad Dermatol 1992; 26: 496–8 Majumder PP, Nordlund JJ, Nath SK. Pattern of familial aggregation of vitiligo. Arch Dermatol 1993; 129: 994–8 Ongenae K, Van Geel N, Naeyaert JM. Evidence for an autoimmune pathogenesis of vitiligo. Pigment Cell Res 2003; 16: 90–100 Schaffer JV, Bolognia JL. The treatment of hypopigmentation in children. Clin Dermatol 2003; 21: 296–310

Mallory Chapter 14

27/1/05

2:30 pm

Page 251

Pigmentary disorders

Tsukamoto K, Osada A, Kitamura R, et al. Approaches to repigmentation of vitiligo skin: new treatment with ultrasonic abrasion, seed-grafting and psoralen plus ultraviolet A therapy. Pigment Cell Res 2002; 15: 331–4

b. c. d. e.

Irides progressively darken Skin can tan minimally Nevi and freckles may develop Temperature-sensitive variant: darkly pigmented hair on the arms and legs, and lightly pigmented hair centrally 3. OCA 2 (tyrosinase-positive OCA) a. Dilution of pigment of hair and iris but not complete loss b. Skin color paler than in relatives c. Hair white or light blonde d. With maturity, pigment increases and nevi and freckles can develop e. Photophobia and nystagmus are present, but not as severe as in OCA 1A f. More common in African-Americans 4. OCA 3 (rufous OCA) a. Red hair and lighter skin

Albinism Synonym: oculocutaneous albinism Major points

• General

•

1. Albinism includes a group of genetic disorders with dilution or absence of ocular and cutaneous pigmentation 2. All races affected 3. Lack of pigment is caused by an abnormal maturation of melanosomes Types of oculocutaneous albinism (OCA): 1. OCA 1A (tyrosinase-negative OCA) a. Marked hypopigmentation of the skin and eyes (Figure 14.26) b. Skin varies from pink to milky white c. Hair white d. Eyes are pale blue with a pink or red reflex which can be seen through the iris e. Severe photophobia caused by lack of pigment f. Associated ocular abnormalities: decreased visual acuity, nystagmus and strabismus 2. OCA 1B (minimal pigment OCA, yellow OCA) a. Hair begins white but may progress to dark blonde or brown in adolescence

251

Pathogenesis

• OCA 1: mutation of the tyrosinase gene

• •

(chromosome 11p1) 1. Complete loss with phenotype OCA 1A; reduced activity (5–10% of normal) results in OCA 1B OCA 2: mutation of the P gene (chromosome 15q11.2-12), membrane transporter gene OCA 3: mutation of TYRP1 gene affecting melanin synthesis; chromosome 9p23

Diagnosis

• Clinical presentation • Genetic testing • Electron microscopy can determine the stages of melanosomes Differential diagnosis

• • • • • •

Prader–Willi syndrome Angelman syndrome Homocystinuria Apert syndrome Vitiligo (generalized) Phenylketonuria

Treatment

• Photoprotection is most important to reduce risk Figure 14.26

Albinism – type 1 oculocutaneous albinism

•

of cutaneous malignancies Ophthalmological evaluation and follow-up

Mallory Chapter 14

252

27/1/05

2:30 pm

Page 252

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Prognosis

• Cutaneous squamous cell carcinoma and basal cell carcinoma along with other signs of photoaging are common in unprotected skin References King RA. Albinism. In The Pigmentary System. Nordlund JJ, Boissy RE, Hearing VJ, et al. eds). Oxford University Press: New York, 1998: 553–75 Oetting WS, Fryer JP, Shriram S, King RA. Oculocutaneous albinism type 1: the last 100 years. Pigment Cell Res 2003; 16: 307–11 Oetting WS. The tyrosinase gene and oculocutaneous albinism type 1 (OCA1): a model for understanding the molecular biology of melanin formation. Pigment Cell Res 2000; 13: 320–5 Orlow SJ. Albinism: an update. Semin Cutan Med Surg 1997; 16: 24–9 Sarangarajan R, Boissy RE. Tyrp1 and oculocutaneous albinism type 3. Pigment Cell Res 2001; 14: 437–44

•

1. Similar to type I with limb abnormalities 2. Gene/gene locus: PAX 3 gene/2q35 3. Autosomal dominant Waardenburg syndrome type IV 1. Similar to type I with Hirschsprung disease 2. Gene/gene locus: endothelin B receptor gene/20q13.2-q13.3 3. Autosomal recessive

References da Silva EO. Waardenburg I syndrome: a clinical and genetic study of two large Brazilian kindreds and literature review. Am J Med Genet 1991; 40: 65–74 Mollaaghababa R, Pavan WJ. The importance of having your SOX on: role of SOX10 in the development of neural crest-derived melanocytes and glia. Oncogene 2003; 22: 3024–34 Read AP, Newton VE. Waardenburg syndrome. J Med Genet 1997; 34: 656–65

Tomita Y. The molecular genetics of albinism and piebaldism. Arch Dermatol 1994; 130: 355–8

Shanske A, Ferreira JC, Leonard JC, et al. Hirschsprung disease in an infant with a contiguous gene syndrome of chromosome 13. Am J Med Genet 2001; 102: 231–6

Waardenburg syndrome

Shibahara S, Takeda K, Yasumoto K, et al. Microphthalmiaassociated transcription factor (MITF): multiplicity in structure, function, and regulation. Symposium Proceedings. J Invest Dermatol 2001; 6: 99–104

Major points

• Waardenburg syndrome type I 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

•

Depigmented patches of the skin and hair Heterochromia irides Deafness Dystopia canthorum Broad nasal root Synophrys (confluence of the medial eyebrows) Hypoplasia of the nasal alae Gene/gene locus: PAX 3 gene (transcription factor for melanocyte proliferation and migration from the neural crest)/2q35 9. Autosomal dominant Waardenburg syndrome type II 1. Similar to type I except without dystopia canthorum 2. Gene/gene locus: MITF gene (microphthalmia-associated transcription factor)/3p14.1-12.3 and others 3. Autosomal dominant Waardenburg syndrome type III (Klein–Waardenburg syndrome)

Piebaldism Major points

• Clinical features 1. Symmetrical well-demarcated patches of depigmented skin and hair with V-shape on forehead and frontal scalp, patches on anterior chest and abdomen, and extremities around elbows and knees with sparing of hands and feet (Figure 14.27) 2. No progressive loss of pigment 3. No extracutaneous findings except in a few families with deafness 4. 80–90% of patients have a white forelock Pathogenesis

• Defective cell proliferation and migration of melanocytes during embryogenesis caused by mutation in c-KIT gene which is responsible for melanocytic proliferation; chromosome 14q12

Mallory Chapter 14

27/1/05

2:30 pm

Page 253

Pigmentary disorders

253

Spritz RA. Molecular basis of human piebaldism. J Invest Dermatol 1994; 103: 137S–140S Spritz RA. Piebaldism, Waardenburg syndrome, and related disorders of melanocyte development. Semin Cutan Med Surg 1997; 16: 15–23 Syrris P Malik NM, Murday VA, et al. Three novel mutations of the proto-oncogene KIT cause human piebaldism. Am J Med Genet 2000; 95: 79–81 Tomita Y. The molecular genetics of albinism and piebaldism. Arch Dermatol 1994; 130: 355–8

Hermansky–Pudlak syndrome Major points

• Tyrosinase-positive albinism • Bleeding diathesis with epistaxis, gingival bleeding or bleeding after surgical procedures Figure 14.27 Piebaldism – symmetrical congenital depigmentation with thumbprint hypermelanotic macules within the depigmented patches

Diagnosis

• Clinical diagnosis • Confirmed by genetic analysis with mutations on •

c-KIT gene Histology: melanocytes are absent from white patches

Differential diagnosis

• Waardenburg syndrome • Vitiligo Treatment

• Cosmetic covering • Sun protection of the white patches Prognosis

• White patches stable and may develop actinic keratoses

• Autosomal recessive; more common in Puerto Ricans and Dutch

• Ceroid storage disease affecting lungs, gut, platelets • Gene/gene locus: HPS1 (transmembrane protein)/chromosome 10q2 and others References Gahl WA, Brantly M, Kaiser-Kupfer MI, et al. Genetic defects and clinical characteristics of patients with a form of oculocutaneous albinism (Hermansky–Pudlak syndrome). N Engl J Med 1998; 338: 1258–64 Huizing M, Boissy RE, Gahl WA. Hermansky-Pudlak syndrome: vesicle formation from yeast to man. Pigment Cell Res 2002; 15: 405–19 Huizing M, Gahl WA. Disorders of vesicles of lysosomal lineage: the Hermansky–Pudlak syndromes. Curr Mol Med 2002; 2: 451–67 Starcevic M, Nazarian R, Dell’Angelica EC. The molecular machinery for the biogenesis of lysosome-related organelles: lessons from Hermansky–Pudlak syndrome. Semin Cell Dev Biol 2002; 13: 271–8 Vanhooteghem O, Courtens W, Andre J, et al. Hermansky–Pudlak syndrome: a case report and discussion. Pediatr Dermatol 1998; 15: 374–7

References Boissy RE, Nordlund JJ. Molecular basis of congenital hypopigmentary disorders in humans: a review. Pigment Cell Res 1997; 10: 12–24 Richards KA, Fukai K, Oiso N, Paller AS. A novel KIT mutation results in piebaldism with progressive depigmentation. J Am Acad Dermatol 2001; 44: 288–92

Phenylketonuria Major points

• Caused by absence of hepatic phenylalanine hydroxylase (PAH) with build-up of phenylalanine

Mallory Chapter 14

254

27/1/05

2:30 pm

Page 254

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

• If untreated, phenylketonuria results in mental retardation and pigment dilution

• Most patients have blonde hair, blue eyes, fair skin, • • •

photosensitivity, mousy body odor and neurologic disturbances When treated, skin coloration reverts to normal Autosomal recessive Gene/gene locus: phenylalanine hydroxylase/12q24.1 and others

References Beasley MG, Costello PM, Smith I. Outcome of treatment in young adults with phenylketonuria detected by routine neonatal screening between 1964 and 1971. Q J Med 1994; 87: 155–60 Erlandsen H, Patch MG, Gamez A, et al. Structural studies on phenylalanine hydroxylase and implications toward understanding and treating phenylketonuria. Pediatrics 2003; 112: 1557–65 Mineroff AD. Phenylketonuria. In The Pigmentary System. Nordlund JJ, Boissy RE, Hearing VJ, King RA, Ortonne JP, eds. Oxford University Press: New York, 1998: 590–1

Figure 14.28 Hypomelanosis of Ito – hypopigmented streaks following Blaschko lines

Zschocke J. Focus on the molecular genetics of phenylketonuria. Hum Mutat 2003; 21: 331–2

Pathogenesis

• Mosaicism caused by two distinct germ lines formed during embryogenesis

Hypomelanosis of Ito Synonym: incontinentia pigmenti achromians Major points

Diagnosis

• Clinical presentation • Histology: hypopigmented areas show normal or reduced number of melanocytes with reduction in number of melanosomes

• Hypopigmented streaks and whorls, mainly on the • • • • •

• •

trunk, following the lines of Blaschko (Figure 14.28) Present at birth or becomes apparent during early life Macular pigmentation tends to be stable over time or may fade Inheritance sporadic or autosomal dominant Female/male ratio: 2.5–1 Other cutaneous findings: aplasia cutis, fibromas, follicular keratosis, angiomas, generalized or focal hypertrichosis, and abnormalities in the teeth, hair, nails and sweat glands Extracutaneous findings (30%): mainly CNS, musculoskeletal and ocular system involvement Other findings: limb-length discrepancies, facial hemiatrophy, scoliosis, abnormal facies, genitourinary abnormalities, cardiac abnormalities

Differential diagnosis

• • • • • • •

Goltz syndrome Vitiligo Nevus depigmentosus Incontinentia pigmenti (stage 4) Epidermal nevi Lichen striatus Segmental vitiligo

Treatment

• Cosmetic cover-up is rarely needed Prognosis

• Majority of children are normal, but in the first 2 years of life children should be observed for developmental delay and CNS abnormalities

Mallory Chapter 14

27/1/05

2:30 pm

Page 255

Pigmentary disorders

255

• Neurologic and ocular examinations may be indicated

• Hypopigmentation may fade or be stable References Duran-McKinster C, Moises C, Rodriguez-Jurado R, et al. Streptococcal exanthem in a blaschkolinear pattern: clinical evidence for genetic mosaicism in hypomelanosis of Ito. Pediatr Dermatol 2002; 19: 423–5 Kuster W, Ehrig T, Happle R. In The Pigmentary System. Nordlund JJ, Boissy RE, Hearing VJ, et al. eds. Oxford University Press: . New York, 1998: 594–601 Kuster W, Konig A. Hypomelanosis of Ito: no entity, but a cutaneous sign of mosaicism. Am J Med Genet 1999; 85: 346–50 Nehal KS, DeBenito R, Orlow SJ. Analysis of 54 cases of hypopigmentation and hyperpigmentation along the lines of Blaschko. Arch Dermatol 1996; 132: 1167–70 Ruggieri M, Pavone L. Hypomelanosis of Ito: clinical syndrome or just phenotype? J Child Neurol 2000; 15: 635–44 Ruiz-Maldonado R, Roussaint S, Tamayo L, et al. Hypomelanosis of Ito: diagnostic criteria and report of 41 cases. Pediatr Dermatol 1992; 9: 1–10

Nevus depigmentosus (nevus achromicus) Major points

• • • • • •

Single, well-circumscribed, hypopigmented patch, sometimes following the lines of Blaschko or in a segmental unilateral distribution (Figure 14.29) Border of lesion may be serrated or jagged Lesions present at birth or within the first years of life Usual locations: trunk and proximal extremities Male/female ratio = 1 Rare associated findings: hemihypertrophy, seizures and mental retardation

Figure 14.29 Nevus depigmentosus – congenital hypopigmented well-defined patch

• Electron microscopy: defect in transfer of pigment between the melanocyte and keratinocyte with a decreased number of melanosomes in the keratinocytes; number of melanocytes normal Differential diagnosis

• • • • • •

Nevus anemicus Segmental vitiligo Hypopigmented macules of tuberous sclerosis Hypomelanosis of Ito Pityriasis alba Postinflammatory hypopigmentation

Treatment

• Usually none needed • Camouflage makeup such as Dermablend® or Covermark®

Pathogenesis

Prognosis

• Hypothesis: functional defect of melanocytes and

• Stable in size and distribution throughout life

morphologic abnormalities of melanosomes Diagnosis

• Clinical examination • Under Wood’s light examination, lesions show off-white accentuation, in contrast to vitiligo, which is bright white

References Alkemade H, Juhlin L. Unilateral lentiginosis with nevus depigmentosus on the other side. J Am Acad Dermatol 2000; 43: 361–3 Dippel E, Utikal J, Feller G, et al. Nevi flammei affecting two contralateral quadrants and nevus depigmentosus: a new

Mallory Chapter 14

256

27/1/05

2:30 pm

Page 256

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

type of phacomatosis pigmentovascularis? Am J Med Genet 2003; 119A: 228–30 Lee HS, Chun YS, Hann SK. Nevus depigmentosus: clinical features and histopathologic characteristics in 67 patients. J Am Acad Dermatol 1999; 40: 21–6

Postinflammatory hypopigmentation Major points

• Partial loss of cutaneous melanin in affected area of •

skin resulting from an inflammatory process (Figures 14.30 and 14.31) Appears as a hypochromic macule or patch in distribution of previous inflammation

Figure 14.31 Postinflammatory hypopigmentation caused by a steroid injection for a cyst

Diagnosis

• Clinical presentation with history of inflammation Differential diagnosis

• Tinea corporis • Tinea versicolor • Seborrheic dermatitis Figure 14.30 Postinflammatory hypopigmentation from eczema in a baby. The color reverted to normal after therapy

Treatment

• Treat underlying cause of inflammation Prognosis

• More easily seen in dark skin • Trauma and inflammation are thought to cause •

dysfunction of melanocytes Wood’s lamp examination enhances hypopigmented areas in light skin and helps distinguish between depigmentation and hypopigmentation

Pathogenesis

• Histology can help to establish the cause of hypopigmentation

• Can improve with treatment or remain static References Herane MI. Vitiligo and leukoderma in children. Clin Dermatol 2003; 21: 283–95 Ruiz-Maldonado R, Orozco-Covarrubias ML. Postinflammatory hypopigmentation and hyperpigmentation. Semin Cutan Med Surg 1997; 16: 36–43

Mallory Chapter 15

27/1/05

2:37 pm

Page 257

15 COLLAGEN VASCULAR DISEASES

DERMATOMYOSITIS Major points

• Affects three children per million per year in the • • •

•

USA Bimodal distribution: peaks at 5–9 years of age and again in teenage years Equal gender distribution at 5–9 years of age; 10 : 1 female predominance in early teenage years Skin manifestations: 1. Heliotrope rash – violaceous, periorbital erythema with swelling 2. Gottron papules – scaly, erythematous papules overlying metacarpal–phalangeal joints or interphalangeal joints (Figure 15.1) 3. Erythematous malar rash and over neck, upper back and arms (shawl sign) 4. Scaly, erythematous patches of the elbows, knees and cheeks 5. Nails: periungual telangiectasias and cuticular overgrowth 6. Poikiloderma 7. Calcinosis cutis – usually occurs late in the course of disease, occurs much more frequently in children than adults; incidence can be reduced with aggressive treatment Noncutaneous manifestations: 1. Symmetric, progressive, proximal muscle weakness (Gower sign) 2. Muscle pain 3. Constitutional symptoms: fever, weight loss, fatigue 4. Dysphagia 5. Nasal speech, hoarseness

Figure 15.1 Dermatomyositis – typical Gottron papules over the knuckles

•

6. Abdominal pain 7. Arthritis and tenosynovitis 8. Pulmonary disease (diffuse interstitial fibrosis, secondary aspiration and infection) 9. Cardiac disease: heart block, arrythmias, pericarditis 10. Gastrointestinal disease (mucosal ulceration) 11. Calcinosis around joints and in intermuscular fascial planes Differs from adult dermatomyositis in that malignancy is extremely rare (work-up for malignancy is unnecessary)

Mallory Chapter 15

258

27/1/05

2:37 pm

Page 258

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Pathogenesis

• Etiology unknown • Presumed autoimmune disorder • May be multifactorial: infectious, genetic and environmental etiologies have been implicated Diagnosis

• Criteria (Bohan and Peter)

•

1. Characteristic rash, plus three of the four following: a. Symmetric proximal muscle weakness b. Elevated muscle enzymes (aldolase, creatine kinase, lactate dehydrogenase, transaminases (AST/ALT) c. Muscle biopsy (chronic inflammation with or without necrosis) d. Abnormal electromyogram (EMG) Magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) is useful in determining areas of muscle involvement: 1. Identifies areas of edema and inflammation 2. Used to identify appropriate muscle biopsy site 3. Used to follow disease course

Differential diagnosis

• Systemic lupus erythematosus • Photosensitive eruption (e.g. drug-induced dermatitis)

• Postinfectious myositis • Other myopathies Treatment

• Systemic corticosteroids – most cases respond to

• •

• • •

corticosteroid therapy 1. Oral prednisone taper over several months 2. High-dose intravenous pulse methylprednisolone (IVMP) Methotrexate is second-line agent of choice with recalcitrant disease If no response or there are intolerable adverse effects, other therapies to consider: cytoxan, hydroxychloroquine, azathioprine, cyclosporine, intravenous immunoglobulins (IVIG) and plasmapheresis Sun protection and sun avoidance Physical therapy to prevent contractures Early aggressive therapy is successful in minimizing long-term sequelae, including calcinosis

Prognosis • With successful treatment, prognosis is good – overall mortality <7% • Most children will completely recover after a single course (lasting months to years) • ~25% will have disease with repeated acute exacerbations or persistence despite treatment • Causes of mortality: myocarditis, progressive myositis, bowel perforation, aspiration pneumonia • Causes of morbidity: 1. Calcinosis may occur in up to 40% 2. Joint contractures 3. Cutaneous and gastrointestinal ulcers 4. Residual muscle weakness and disability • Cutaneous features can persist for years despite resolution of all other features of the disease References Drake LA, Dinehart SM, Farmer ER, et al. Guidelines of care for dermatomyositis. American Academy of Dermatology. J Am Acad Dermatol 1996; 34: 824–9 Fisler RE, Liang MG, Fuhlbrigge RC, et al. Aggressive management of juvenile dermatomyositis results in improved outcome and decreased incidence of calcinosis. J Am Acad Dermatol 2002; 47: 505–11 Pachman LM, Hayford JR, Chung A, et al. Juvenile dermatomyositis at diagnosis: Clinical characteristics of 79 children. J Rheumatol 1998; 25: 1198–204 Pachman LM. Juvenile dermatomyositis: immunogenetics, pathophysiology, and disease expression. Rheum Dis N Amer 2002; 28: 579–602 Ruperto N, Ravelli A, Murry KJ, et al. Paediatric Rheumatology International Trials Organization (PRINTO). Pediatric Rheumatology Collaborative Study Group (PRCSG). Preliminary core sets of measures for disease activity and damage assessment in juvenile systemic lupus erythematosus and juvenile dermatomyositis. Rheumatology 2003; 42: 1452–9 Santmyire-Rosenberger B, Dugan EM. Skin involvement in dermatomyositis. Curr Opin Rheumatol 2003; 15: 714–22. Uzel G, Pachman LM. Cytokines in juvenile dermatomyositis pathophysiology: potential and challenge. Curr Opin Rheumatol 2003; 15: 691–7

SYSTEMIC LUPUS ERYTHEMATOSUS Major points

• Incidence is ~5–10 per 100 000 • Disease shows a female predominance after puberty

Mallory Chapter 15

27/1/05

2:37 pm

Page 259

Collagen vascular diseases

• Black, Hispanic and Asian children have increased • • •

•

frequency of disease 25% of patients with systemic lupus erythematosus (SLE) have onset in the first two decades of life 80% of adolescents with SLE have cutaneous findings Cutaneous manifestations (presenting sign in 25%): 1. Photosensitive eruption – malar or ‘butterfly’ rash, erythema with scale (Figure 15.2) 2. Discoid lesions – round, sharply demarcated, erythematous lesions with adherent scale, follicular plugging, telangiectasias and scarring 3. Telangiectasias – cuticular and other locations 4. Livedo reticularis 5. Scarring or nonscarring alopecia 6. Nasal or oral ulcerations (particularly the hard palate) 7. Vasculitis, erythema nodosum, lupus panniculitis can also occur Systemic symptoms: 1. Arthritis, arthralgias 2. Fever, malaise, weight loss, lymphadenopathy, muscle weakness 3. Raynaud phenomenon 4. Pulmonary and cardiac disease 5. CNS involvement (neuropsychiatric) 6. Renal disease (extent of involvement related to prognosis)

259

• Association with complement deficiencies, such as C2 deficiency Pathogenesis • Autoimmune disorder • Genetic predisposition • Many factors potentially contribute: viral, hormonal, environmental and immunogenetic • Histology: vacuolar change of epidermal cells with a perivascular lymphohistiocytic infiltrate • Direct immunofluorescence (DIF): granular deposition of IgG, with or without IgM, and complement at the dermal–epidermal junction and around hair follicles; IgA may occasionally be seen • Circulating antibodies can be detected Diagnosis • American College of Rheumatology (ACR) criteria require four of the following 11 for diagnosis: 1. Malar rash 2. Discoid rash 3. Photosensitivity 4. Oral ulcers 5. Arthritis: peripheral, nonerosive, involving two or more joints 6. Serositis: pleuritis or pericarditis 7. Renal disorder: proteinuria or cellular casts 8. Neurologic disorder 9. Hematologic disorder: anemia, leukopenia, lymphopenia, thrombocytopenia 10. Immunologic disorder: positive antiphospholipid antibody, anti-DNA, or antiSm antibody; false positivity for syphilis 11. Positive antinuclear antibody(ANA) • Complement levels (C3 and C4) are low – levels may be used to monitor disease activity • Biopsies may be performed: skin, renal or liver, as indicated Differential diagnosis • Dermatomyositis • Juvenile rheumatoid arthritis • Fifth disease • Drug-induced lupus-like reactions (e.g. isoniazid, hydralazine, procainamide, D-penicillamine, minocycline)

Figure 15.2 rash

Systemic lupus erythematosus with butterfly

Treatment • High-dose systemic corticosteroids – continuous or pulsed

Mallory Chapter 15

260

27/1/05

2:37 pm

Page 260

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

• Immunosuppressive agents:

(Imuran®),

• • • •

cyclophosphamide 1. Azathioprine (Cytoxan®), methotrexate, chlorambucil, mycophenolate mofetil 2. Usually reserved for patients with severe systemic involvement (including renal and/or CNS disease) 3. Combination with steroid therapy is effective and decreases steroid dose needed Topical corticosteroids for cutaneous lesions Oral hydroxychloroquine – for photosensitive cutaneous lesions Sun protection and avoidance Renal transplantation for end-stage renal disease

Prognosis • Early diagnosis and aggressive treatment can improve prognosis • Dependent on the degree of systemic involvement • Frequently a more severe disease in children than in adults (renal and CNS disease common) • Worst prognosis in children with diffuse proliferative glomerulonephritis and hypertension in the first 6 months of disease • Infection is the cause of most deaths, especially in patients on chronic corticosteroid therapy

development of lupus erythematosus. Pediatr Dermatol 2003; 20: 318–22 Mevorach D. Systemic lupus erythematosus and apoptosis: a question of balance. Clin Rev Allergy Immunol 2003; 25: 49–60 Ruperto N, Ravelli A, Murray KJ, et al. Paediatric Rheumatology International Trials Organization (PRINTO). Pediatric Rheumatology Collaborative Study Group (PRCSG). Preliminary core sets of measures for disease activity and damage assessment in juvenile systemic lupus erythematosus and juvenile dermatomyositis. Rheumatology 2003; 42: 1452–9

NEONATAL LUPUS ERYTHEMATOSUS See Chapter 2

DISCOID LUPUS ERYTHEMATOSUS Major points

• Characterized by the presence of discoid skin

References Barnett NK, Wright DA. Connective tissue diseases and arthritides. In Pediatric Dermatology, 3rd edn. Mosby: New York, 2003: 943–50 Dall’Era M, Davis JC. Systemic lupus erythematosus. How to manage, when to refer. Postgrad Med 2003; 114: 31–7, 40 DeSilva TN, Kress DW. Management of collagen vascular diseases in childhood. Clin Dermatol 1998; 16: 579–92 Drake LA, Dinehart SM, Farmer ER, et al. Guidelines of care for cutaneous lupus erythematosus. American Academy of Dermatology. J Am Acad Dermatol 1996; 34: 830–6 Gibson LE, Specks U, Homburger H. Clinical utility of ANCA tests for the dermatologist. Int J Dermatol 2003; 42: 859–69 Gill JM, Quisel AM, Rocca PV, Walters DT. Diagnosis of systemic lupus erythematosus. Am Fam Physician 2003; 68: 2179–86 Hamasaki K, Mimura T, Kanda H, et al. Systemic lupus erythematosus and thrombotic thrombocytopenic purpura: a case report and literature review. Clin Rheumatol 2003; 22: 355–8 Lyon VB, Nocton JJ, Drolet BA, Esterly NB. Necrotic facial papules in an adolescent: C2 deficiency with eventual

• •

lesions without systemic involvement 1. Some children with discoid lupus erythematosus (DLE) may progress to SLE; this transition seems to be more frequent and more severe in children and teens 2. Discoid lesions may also be seen as a cutaneous manifestation of SLE Uncommon in children; <5% of patients with DLE develop disease before age 16 years Clinical presentation: 1. Erythematous, sharply demarcated, scaly round plaques sometimes with telangiectasias (Figures 15.3 and 15.4) 2. Lesions may be hyperpigmented or hypopigmented 3. Adnexal involvement with follicular plugging and scarring alopecia 4. Localized to sun-exposed areas – often over nose and malar eminences 5. Most frequent locations: face, hands, ears and scalp a. Localized DLE – involvement limited to head b. Disseminated DLE – involvement below neck

Mallory Chapter 15

27/1/05

2:37 pm

Page 261

Collagen vascular diseases

261

Pathogenesis

• Autoimmune disorder • Histology: inflammatory, mononuclear infiltrate

•

• •

involving upper and lower dermis and interface, perivascular and periadnexal areas; thickened basement membrane zone; keratinocyte damage; follicular plugging DIF: granular deposits at the dermal–epidermal junction 1. Negative DIF does not rule out the diagnosis 2. Scarred, burned-out lesions may no longer contain immunoreactants Predominance of activated T cells Sun exposure has been implicated in the development and exacerbation

Diagnosis Figure 15.3 Discoid lupus erythematosus – typical erythematous, scaly, atrophic plaque with central atrophy

• Characteristic clinical findings • Skin biopsy for histologic examination and DIF Differential diagnosis

• • • •

Polymorphous light eruption Trauma Factitial dermatitis Sarcoidosis

Treatment

• • • •

Sun protection and avoidance Topical corticosteroids Intralesional corticosteroids Systemic therapy: hydroxychloroquine, systemic corticosteroids, dapsone

Prognosis

• Scarring, atrophy and dyspigmentation are common

• May progress to SLE References Figure 15.4 Discoid lupus erythematosus – keratotic papules in the ear, a common location

• •

6. Results in atrophic, dyschromic scars Low incidence of photosensitivity as compared to DLE in adults Lack of female predominance as compared to other autoimmune diseases

Cherif F, Mebazaa A, Mokni M, et al. Childhood discoid lupus erythematosus: a Tunisian retrospective study of 16 cases. Pediatr Dermatol 2003; 20: 295–8 George PM, Tunnessen WW. Childhood discoid lupus erythematosus. Arch Dermatol 1993; 129: 613–17 McMullen EA, Armstrong KD, Bingham EA, Walsh MY. Childhood discoid lupus erythematosus: a report of two cases. Pediatr Dermatol 1998; 15: 439–42

Mallory Chapter 15

262

27/1/05

2:37 pm

Page 262

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

SCLERODERMA

7. Esophageal disease: symptoms of gastroesophageal reflux from esophageal dysmotility 8. Renal disease 9. Cardiac disease 10. Myositis, arthritis, arthralgias, muscle atrophy

Synonyms: systemic sclerosis, progressive systemic sclerosis Major points

• Childhood cases account for 3% of all cases of scleroderma

• Female/male ratio >1 • Raynaud phenomenon occurs in 90% overall and •

•

may precede onset of disease Clinical subcategories: 1. Diffuse disease – trunk and proximal portions of extremities 2. Limited disease – only face and distal extremities involved 3. CREST syndrome – Calcinosis, Raynaud phenomenon, Esophageal dysmotility, Sclerodactyly, Telangiectasia (rare in children) Clinical findings: 1. Skin: generalized sclerotic changes, tightening, induration, occasional pruritus; progression to fibrosis and contractures; may be preceded by edema or rarely, an erythematous phase (Figure 15.5) 2. Nailfold capillary dilatation and dropout 3. Raynaud phenomenon 4. Sclerodactyly 5. Distal fingertip pitting from infarction 6. Pulmonary disease: most commonly restrictive lung disease, interstitial lung disease

Pathogenesis

• Most evidence supports an immunologic (autoimmune) mechanism

• Histology: dense sclerosis of the dermis with excessive collagen deposition and trapping of adnexal structures 1. Early phases: dense lymphocytic infiltrate at the interface between the deep dermis and the subcutaneous fat Diagnosis

• Characteristic clinical findings • Autoantibodies: 1. ANA (22–100% in children) 2. Anti-Scl 70 (40% in children) 3. Anticentromere antibodies common in CREST syndrome, less common in systemic sclerosis (rarely found in children) Differential diagnosis

• • • • • •

Scleredema Scleromyxedema Eosinophilic fasciitis Mixed connective tissue disease Chronic graft versus host disease Drug or chemical exposure

Treatment

• Early treatment to prevent irreversible organ tissue fibrosis

• Systemic therapies:

• Figure 15.5 Scleroderma – depigmented, sclerotic patch with retained follicular pigmentation

1. Systemic corticosteroids 2. D-Penicillamine 3. Methotrexate 4. PUVA - Psoralen+UVA 5. Cyclophosphamide 6. Cyclosporine Cutaneous treatment: 1. Bland emollients (e.g. petrolatum) 2. Avoidance of extreme temperatures (especially cold) 3. Physical therapy to prevent joint contractures

Mallory Chapter 15

27/1/05

2:37 pm

Page 263

Collagen vascular diseases

• Raynaud phenomenon: 1. 2. 3. 4.

• • •

Cold protection and avoidance Avoidance of smoking Calcium channel blockers (e.g. nifedipine) Nitroglycerin patch to fingertips for temporary relief 5. IV infusion of prostaglandin E1 and prostacyclin for nonhealing ulcers or debilitating disease Gastroesophageal disease with reflux esophagitis: 1. Proton pump inhibitors (e.g. omeprazole) 2. Head of bed elevation, light meals Pulmonary disease: cyclophosphamide Renal disease (with malignant hypertension): 1. Angiotensin-converting enzyme (ACE)inhibitors (e.g. captopril) 2. Hemodialysis

Prognosis

• Slow progression for years with organ failure and death (similar to adults)

• Young males and patients with significant •

cardiac, pulmonary, or renal disease have worse prognosis Interstitial lung disease is the most common cause of mortality

263

MORPHEA Synonym: localized scleroderma Major points

• Sclerodermatous patches limited to skin (Figures 15.6 and 15.7)

• Progression to systemic involvement is exceedingly rare

• Self-limited disorder, lasting ~3–5 years • Often an unsolicited history of trauma to the area • Clinical course: superficial erythema and

•

inflammation of skin followed by hardening of the area and subdermal structures; loss of hair and anhidrosis; hypo- or hyperpigmentation; may affect muscle or bone if extensive or over a joint Linear scleroderma 1. Most frequent type in children 2. Usually unilateral along part of an extremity, but may affect thorax, abdomen, or buttocks 3. Linear lesions are initially erythematous plaques, gradually lose their color centrally and become white, shiny, atrophic or thickened with sclerosis 4. May cause joint contractures, muscle wasting, or limb growth failure if over a joint

References Atamas SP, White B. The role of chemokines in the pathogenesis of scleroderma. Curr Opin Rheumatol 2003; 15: 772–7 Black CM. Scleroderma and fasciitis in children. Curr Opin Rheumatol 1995; 7: 442–6 Drake LA, Dinehart SM, Farmer ER, et al. Guidelines of care for scleroderma and sclerodermoid disorders. J Am Acad Dermatol 1996; 35: 609–14 Harris ML, Rosen A. Autoimmunity in scleroderma: the origin, pathogenetic role, and clinical significance of autoantibodies. Curr Opin Rheumatol 2003; 15: 778–84 Leask A, Denton CP, Abraham DJ. Insights into the molecular mechanism of chronic fibrosis: the role of connective tissue growth factor in scleroderma. J Invest Dermatol 2004; 122: 1–6 Murray KJ, Laxer RM. Scleroderma in children and adolescents. Rheum Dis Clin North Am 2002; 28: 603–24 Vancheeswaran R, Black CM, David J, et al. Childhoodonset scleroderma: is it different from adult-onset disease? Arth Rheum 1996; 39: 1041–9

Figure 15.6 Morphea – hyperpigmented, sclerotic plaque on extremity

Mallory Chapter 15

264

27/1/05

2:37 pm

Page 264

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Figure 15.7 Morphea – two large plaques on the back. He later developed a large plaque on one leg

• En coup de sabre

•

1. Ivory sclerotic plaque with peripheral hyperpigmentation appears on forehead and scalp (resembling a saber cut) (Figure 15.8) a. May cause alopecia of the scalp, eyebrows, eyelashes b. May affect nose, cheek, chin and neck c. Ranges in severity from minor indentation to severe hemifacial atrophy 2. May have CNS involvement (e.g. seizures, intracranial calcification, intracranial aneurysm), tongue atrophy, tooth growth abnormalities, uveitis 3. Parry-Romberg syndrome (progressive facial hemiatrophy) considered by some authors to be a variant of en coup de sabre type Plaque morphea 1. Oval patches or plaques involving the skin and subcutaneous tissue 2. Most common on trunk, may be seen on extremities, head and neck 3. Erythematous or hyperpigmented plaques, several centimeters in diameter; central clearing with a violaceous border; later a white center that becomes shiny, firm and waxy 4. Plaques tend to have no hair or sweating 5. May see plaque morphea and linear lesions in the same patient Generalized morphea 1. Large plaques in different anatomic locations (>4 plaque lesions in ≥2 body sites) 2. Lesions similar to plaque morphea with generalized involvement

Figure 15.8 Morphea (en coup de sabre) – hyperpigmented, sclerotic indentation on the forehead and cheek

Pathogenesis

• Thought to be an autoimmune disorder • Early inflammation with edema and increased • •

vascularity; progressing to sclerosis and abnormal collagen formation; ultimately resulting in atrophy Trauma and Borrelia burgdorferi infection have been implicated as triggers Histology: 1. Early: dermal edema with swelling and degeneration of collagen fibrils, lymphocytic infiltrate around dermal vessels and appendages 2. Late: progressive dermal thickening and condensation of collagen – with bundles densely packed and aligned parallel to the dermal – epidermal junction with loss of appendages

Diagnosis • Clinical findings • Skin biopsy may be performed to aid in diagnosis but not always necessary • Laboratory studies: none specific but may be helpful in following the course; ANA, complete blood count (CBC) with differential, immunoglobulins, rheumatoid arthritis factor • Consider work-up for other collagen vascular diseases as indicated by history and physical

Mallory Chapter 15

27/1/05

2:37 pm

Page 265

Collagen vascular diseases

•

examination; extensive disease may be more likely to have immunologic abnormalities MRI/ultrasound – useful if there is CNS or eye involvement or to determine depth of lesions

Differential diagnosis • Postinflammatory hyperpigmentation • Erythema dyschromicum perstans • Lichen sclerosus • Traumatic scars • Eosinophilic fasciitis • Scleredema of Buschke Treatment • Systemic therapy: 1. Low-dose methotrexate 2. Systemic corticosteroids (oral or IV pulse) 3. Oral calcitriol (vitamin D analog) 4. PUVA (not recommended for <11 years) 5. D-Penicillamine • Topical therapy: 1. Potent topical steroids 2. Emollients 3. Topical calcipotriene • Physical therapy/occupational therapy for joint involvement • Psychological support as needed Prognosis • Lesions tend to have an active, progressive phase for several years then slowly resolve spontaneously with softening of skin • Progression exceedingly rare to systemic involvement • Potential sequelae include: residual hyperpigmentation, skin atrophy, limb atrophy, joint contractures and psychological sequelae References Cunningham BB, Landells ID, Langman C, et al. Topical calcipotriene for morphea/linear scleroderma. J Am Acad Dermatol 1998; 39: 211–15 Drake LA, Dinehart SM, Farmer ER, et al. Guidelines of care for scleroderma and sclerodermoid disorders. J Am Acad Dermatol 1996; 35: 609–14 Hawk A, English JC 3rd. Localized and systemic scleroderma. Semin Cutan Med Surg 2001; 20: 27–37 Jablonska S, Blaszczyk M. Scleroderma and sclerotic skin conditions: unapproved treatments. Clin Dermatol 2002; 20: 634–7

265

Murray KJ, Laxer RM. Scleroderma in children and adolescents. Rheum Dis Clin North Am 2002; 28: 603–24 Nelson AM. Localized scleroderma including morphea, linear scleroderma and eosinophilic fasciitis. Curr Prob Pediatr 1996; 26: 318–24 Sehgal VN, Srivastava G, Aggarwal AK, et al. Localized scleroderma/morphea. Int J Dermatol 2002; 41: 467–75

LICHEN SCLEROSUS Synonyms: lichen sclerosus et atrophicus Major points

• Female/male ratio is 10 : 1 • Some clinical overlap seen between morphea and LS • Clinical findings: 1. Ivory or white, shiny macules or papules that coalesce into homogeneous hypo- or depigmented plaques; affected area is sharply dermarcated from surrounding skin (Figures 15.9 and 15.10) 2. Commonly encircles the vulvar and perianal areas in a ‘figure of eight’ pattern 3. Extragenital involvement on the trunk, forearm, neck and face 4. Other cutaneous findings: vesicles, bullae (which are occasionally hemorrhagic), ulcerations, excoriations 5. Symptoms: pruritus, dysuria, painful defecation, and anal and vulvar bleeding 6. In males, major symptom may be phimosis Pathogenesis

• • • •

Inflammatory disorder of unknown etiology Familial cases have been reported LS in children has been associated with trauma Histology: homogenized collagen with a band-like lymphocytic infiltrate underlying a normal or atrophic epidermis

Diagnosis

• Characteristic clinical findings • Skin biopsy may be helpful in uncertain cases Differential diagnosis

• Morphea • Trauma, including sexual abuse

Mallory Chapter 15

266

27/1/05

2:37 pm

Page 266

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

• • • • •

Proper perineal hygiene Nonocclusive underwear Avoid trauma (e.g. bicycle riding) Antimicrobial treatment for secondary bacterial or yeast infections Topical tacrolimus or pimecrolimus (off label) BID

Prognosis

• Two-thirds of pre-pubertal girls will have clearing • Figure 15.9 plaque

Lichen sclerosus – hypopigmented, atrophic

•

or improvement of lesions at puberty (childhood form has better prognosis than adult form) Potential complications of persistent lesions: scarring and labial atrophy; constriction of the vaginal introitus or urethral meatus Squamous cell carcinoma is a rare complication of LS in adults

References Fischer G, Rogers M. Treatment of childhood vulvar lichen sclerosus with potent topical corticosteroids. Pediatr Dermatol 1997; 14: 235–8 Helm KF, Gibson LE, Muller SA. Lichen sclerosus et atrophicus in children and young adults. Pediatr Dermatol 1991; 8: 97–101 Neill SM, Tatnall FM, Cox NH. British Association of Dermatologists. Guidelines for the management of lichen sclerosus. Br J Dermatol 2002; 147: 640–9 Sahn EE, Bluestein EL, Olivia S. Familial lichen sclerosus et atrophicus in childhood. Pediatr Dermatol 1994; 11: 160–3 Tasker GL, Wojnarowska F. Lichen sclerosus. Clin Exp Dermatol 2003; 28: 128–33 Warrington SA, de San Lazaro C. Lichen sclerosus et atrophicus and sexual abuse. Arch Dis Child 1996; 75: 512–16 Figure 15.10

Lichen sclerosus – involving the vulva

• Vitiligo • Postinflammatory hypopigmentation

VASCULITIS

Treatment

Major points

•

• Group of disorders characterized by inflammation

Topical corticosteroids: 1. Potent topical corticosteroids (e.g. 0.05% betamethasone ointment) BID for short period of time, usually 2–4 weeks; then tapered to once daily; may need to use intermittently for symptoms 2. Taper to low-potency steroids when disease under control

of blood vessel walls

• Cutaneous manifestations: purpura, petechiae, ecchymosis, erythematous macules, papules, nodules, urticaria, livedo reticularis, necrosis, ulceration, vesicles, pustules, bullae, pyoderma gangrenosum-like lesions, erythema nodosum-like lesions (Figure 15.11)

Mallory Chapter 15

27/1/05

2:37 pm

Page 267

Collagen vascular diseases

3. Takayasu arteritis a. Granulomatous inflammation of the aorta and its main branches causing stenosis and aneurysms b. In children, thoracic and abdominal aorta most commonly affected c. ‘Pulseless’ disease – diminished or no pulses in the arms and blood pressure discrepancies between arms d. Lacks skin lesions 4. Wegener granulomatosis a. Granulomatous inflammation involving the respiratory tract (sinuses, nasal passages, pharynx, lungs) and kidneys (glomerulonephritis) b. Common clinical presentation: malaise, fever, sinusitis, epistaxis and hematuria c. May have necrotizing lesions of the skin, CNS, or gut

Figure 15.11 Vasculitis – associated with systemic lupus erythematosus

• Most common vasculitis in childhood is Henoch–Schönlein purpura (see below)

• Tends to be more self-limited in children than adults

• Classified by the size of vessel affected (small,

•

medium or large vessel) 1. Large-vessel vasculitis a. Giant cell (temporal) arteritis b. Takayasu arteritis 2. Medium-vessel vasculitis a. Kawasaki disease (see Chapter 11) b. Classic polyarteritis nodosa (PAN) 3. Small-vessel vasculitis (leukocytoclastic vasculitis) a. Henoch–Schönlein purpura b. Cutaneous leukocytoclastic vasculitis c. Microscopic polyarteritis nodosa d. Wegener granulomatosis e. Churg–Strauss syndrome f. Essential cryoglobulinemic vasculitis Major types of vasculitis seen in children: 1. Henoch–Schönlein purpura (see below) 2. Polyarteritis nodosa a. Constitutional symptoms: malaise, fever, weight loss b. Hypertension c. Skin findings: purpuric papules with or without necrosis, livedo reticularis, tender subcutaneous nodules d. Systemic involvement: musculoskeletal, renal, nervous system, gastrointestinal (GI) tract most commonly affected

267

Pathogenesis

• May be triggered by a variety of agents: infection, drugs and malignancy (Table 15.1)

• Infectious vasculitis: bacterial, rickettsial, mycobacterial, spirochetal, fungal, viral

• Immune-mediated vasculitis can be categorized as: 1. T-cell-mediated inflammation (e.g. Takayasu arteritis) 2. Antibody-mediated inflammation: a. Immune complex deposition in vessel walls (e.g. IgA immune complex deposition in Henoch–Schönlein purpura) b. Direct binding of antibodies to vessel wall antigens (e.g. Kawasaki disease) c. Activation of leukocytes by leukocytespecific antigens (e.g. antineutrophilic cytoplasmic autoantibodies (ANCA)) Diagnosis

• Clinical findings – look for evidence of infection,

• • •

drug history, environmental/allergen exposure and systemic manifestations on history and physical examination Skin biopsy to confirm diagnosis Directed biopsies of specific organs to evaluate visceral disease Laboratory studies: ANA, cryoglobulins, hepatitis B and C antibodies, ANCA, complement levels, IgA–fibronectin aggregates

Mallory Chapter 15

268

27/1/05

2:37 pm

Page 268

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Table 15.1 Common causes and associated underlying diseases in leukocytoclastic vasculitis

Treatment

• Should be directed toward symptoms and prevention of visceral disease

Infections Streptococcal and neisserial bacterial infections Hepatitis B Cytomegalovirus Epstein–Barr virus Medications and drugs Sulfa antibiotics Thiazides, phenothiazines, sulfonylureas and other sulfa-related drugs Quinidine Phenytoin Injected illicit drugs Allopurinol Radiographic contrast media Nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory agents Autoimmune diseases Lupus erythematosus Rheumatoid arthritis Giant cell arteritis Wegener granulomatosis Mixed connective tissue disease Sjögren syndrome Inflammatory bowel disease Dysproteinemias Cryoglobulinemia Monoclonal and polyclonal gammopathies Malignancies Myeloma Leukemia Lymphoma Food products Food dyes and preservatives Adapted from Schachner and Hansen, Pediatric Dermatology, 3rd edn. Mosby, New York 2003; 823

• Imaging studies as indicated: chest X-ray, CT scans, •

angiography or magnetic resonance angiography – if there are bruits or ischemic symptoms Further work-up determined by extent of systemic disease

Differential diagnosis

• Coagulopathies (e.g. thrombocytopenia, •

disseminated intravascular coagulation (DIC), platelet dysfunction) Occlusive disorders

• Infection must be ruled out before starting immunosuppressive therapy

• Removal of causative agents: e.g. infectious pathogen, drug, malignancy (rare in childhood)

• Corticosteroids • Immunosuppressive agents (e.g. azathioprine or cyclophosphamide) Prognosis

• Dependent on disease severity and presence/extent of systemic involvement References Crowson AN, Mihm MC Jr, Magro CM. Cutaneous vasculitis: a review. J Cutan Pathol 2003; 30: 161–73 Fiorentino DF. Cutaneous vasculitis. J Am Acad Dermatol 2003; 48: 311–40 Ozen S. The spectrum of vasculitis in children. Best Pract Res Clin Rheumatol 2002; 16: 411–25 Weyard CM, Goronzy JJ. Medium- and large-vessel vasculitis. N Engl J Med 2003; 349: 160–9

HENOCH–SCHÖNLEIN PURPURA Synonyms: anaphylactoid purpura Major points

• Leukocytoclastic vasculitis characterized by • • • • •

palpable purpura, joint pain, abdominal pain and renal disease (i.e. glomerulonephritis) Incidence is 14 per 100 000 per year in children Male/female ratio is ~1.5 : 1 Peak incidence between 2 and 5 years Often a history of a recent upper respiratory infection (66–75%) – viral or streptococcal infection Cutaneous findings: 1. Palpable purpura (but may be only macular) (Figure 15.12) 2. Distribution is usually symmetric over buttocks and lower extremities but can occur on upper extremities over extensor surfaces (elbows, knees), trunk and face 3. Petechiae, maculopapular erythematous rash, ulcers, vesicles and bullae (which may become hemorrhagic) and edema

Mallory Chapter 15

27/1/05

2:37 pm

Page 269

Collagen vascular diseases

•

4. Younger children <3 years age have more scalp, periorbital and acral edema Extracutaneous findings: 1. Joint symptoms – arthralgias and/or arthritis 2. Colicky abdominal pain from GI involvement: bleeding, melena, hematemesis, hemorrhage and intussusception (ileoileal) 3. Renal involvement – glomerulonephritis Acute hemorrhagic edema of childhood 1. Shares many features with Henoch–Schönlein purpura – once considered a variant, but is likely to be a distinct entity 2. Age usually <2 years; has been reported at birth 3. Clinical findings: a. Abrupt onset of fever and tender edema of the face, eyelids, ears, scrotum and acral extremities b. Purpuric, ecchymotic lesions on face and extremities (usually sparing the trunk) c. Circinate, medallion-like pattern d. No other associated systemic symptoms other than fever; good general health 4. Pathogenesis: small-vessel vasculitis thought to be a hypersensitivity reaction to an infectious agent or following immunization

269

a. Has been reported following staphylococcal or streptococcal infection, upper respiratory infection, otitis, urinary tract infection, conjunctivitis, or adenovirus b. IgA is variably present 5. Diagnosis: a. Characteristic clinical findings b. Skin involvement only – renal and GI systems should be evaluated to rule out involvement c. Laboratory studies: leukocytosis, thrombocytosis, eosinophilia, elevated erythrocyte sedimentation rate (ESR) 6. No treatment is usually necessary 7. Antibiotics for associated infection Pathogenesis

• IgA immune complex-mediated small-vessel vasculitis

• Thought to be triggered by a preceding •

• •

respiratory infection; considered a hypersensitivity reaction Histology: leukocytoclastic vasculitis of capillaries in upper dermis with perivascular neutrophils, nuclear debris and extravasated erythrocytes; IgA deposition in vessels on DIF Distribution of lesions has been suggested to be gravity dependent (predilection for buttock and lower extremities in older children) Henoch–Schönlein purpura nephropathy is caused by mesangial IgA deposition

Diagnosis

• Characteristic cutaneous findings in the presence of joint swelling and abdominal pain

• Skin biopsy and DIF (important for diagnosis) – • • • •

leukocytoclastic vasculitis; DIF demonstrates perivascular IgA, C3 and fibrin deposits About half the patients have elevated serum IgA; circulating IgA-containing immune complexes may be present Urinalysis to establish renal status Abdominal ultrasound examination for abdominal pain to evaluate for intussusception Guaiac stool for frank or occult blood

Differential diagnosis Figure 15.12 Henoch–Schönlein purpura with palpable purpura on lower legs

• Other vasculitis • Septic vasculitis

Mallory Chapter 15

270

27/1/05

2:37 pm

Page 270

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Treatment

• Supportive, bed rest • Elevation of swollen areas • Nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory medications • •

(NSAIDs) for joint symptoms Corticosteroids for GI symptoms High-dose pulse steroids or immunosuppressive agents (e.g. cyclophosphamide or azathioprine) for progressive renal disease

Saulsbury FT. Hemorrhagic bullous lesions in Henöch– Schonlein purpura. Pediatr Dermatol 1998; 15: 357–9

PURPURA FULMINANS Major points

• Heterogeneous group of disorders characterized by

Prognosis

• Generally considered benign and self-limited in the

•

pediatric age group 1. More severe disease in adults 2. Resolution usually in 2–4 weeks; may relapse for several months (up to 40% of patients); can rarely become chronic (up to years) Long-term morbidity and mortality rates due to renal failure 1. End-stage renal disease occurs in 5% of patients 2. Risk factors for renal involvement: purpura affecting the upper part of the trunk, fever, elevated ESR, recent history of upper respiratory infection Recurrence after a 1-year asymptomatic period can occur in 10% of patients

References

• •

acute onset, rapidly progressing, purpuric lesions which develop into extensive areas of skin necrosis, hemorrhage and peripheral gangrene (Figure 15.13) Development of disseminated intravascular coagulation (DIC) is a defining feature Occurs in three clinical settings: 1. Acute infectious purpura fulminans (most common) a. In the setting of overwhelming sepsis b. Majority of cases due to meningococcal sepsis (Neisseria meningitidis); develops in 15–25% of those with meningococcemia c. Occurs rarely with other pathogens: Streptococcus pneumoniae, group B streptococcus (in neonates), Haemophilus influenzae type b and others 2. Homozygous protein C or protein S deficiency a. Seen in neonatal period

Al-Sheyyab M, El-Shanti H, Ajlouni S, et al. The clinical spectrum of Henoch–Schönlein purpura in infants and young children. Eur J Pediatr 1995; 154: 699–701 Ballinger S. Henoch–Schönlein purpura. Curr Opin Rheumatol 2003; 15: 591–4 Fervenza FC. Henoch–Schönlein purpura nephritis. Int J Dermatol 2003; 42: 170–7 Gonggryp LA, Todd G. Acute hemorrhagic edema of childhood (AHE). Pediatr Dermatol 1998; 15: 91–6 Nussinovitch M, Prais D, Finkelstein Y, et al. Cutaneous manifestations of Henoch–Schönlein purpura in young children. Pediatr Dermatol 1998; 15: 426–8 Magro CM, Crowson AN. A clinical and histologic study of 37 cases of immunoglobulin-A associated vasculitis. Am J Dermatopathol 1999; 21: 234–40 Manzoni APD, Viecili JB, Benvenuto de Andrade C, et al. Acute hemorrhagic edema of infancy: a case report. Int J Dermatol 2004; 43: 48–51 Piette WW. What is Schönlein–Henoch purpura, and why should we care? Arch Dermatol 1997; 133: 515–18

Figure 15.13

Purpura fulminans – associated with sepsis

Mallory Chapter 15

27/1/05

2:37 pm

Page 271

Collagen vascular diseases

•

3. Idiopathic purpura fulminans (uncommon) a. Postinfectious–after a relatively benign antecedent infection (e.g. varicella or group A streptococcal infection) b. Unknown etiology–after noninfectious condition (e.g. cutaneous hypersensitivity reaction, or stomatitis) c. Differs from acute infectious form in that organ involvement other than skin usually does not occur, extremities are spared, and there is lower mortality (circulatory collapse not initially present) Cutaneous lesions: 1. Early skin discomfort followed by erythema with or without edema and petechiae 2. Rapid evolution into painful, indurated, welldemarcated purpuric papules and plaques with erythematous borders 3. Late vesicles and bullae in necrotic areas, hemorrhagic necrosis, and eschar formation 4. Gangrene of subcutaneous tissues, muscle and/or bone Extracutaneous clinical features: 1. Epiphyseal growth plate necrosis; may lead to limb shortening 2. Shock, thrombotic hemorrhage of multiple vascular beds and organ systems (e.g. adrenal glands, lungs and kidney), and multi-organ dysfunction are common

degradation products, protein C and S, antithrombin III Differential diagnosis

• Thrombotic thombocytopenic purpura • Hemolytic uremic syndrome • Coumadin (warfarin) necrosis Treatment

• Acute infectious purpura fulminans:

•

Pathogenesis

• Cutaneous lesions caused by widespread dermal vascular thrombosis

• Laboratory evidence of a consumptive

•

coagulopathy (DIC) 1. Prolonged prothrombin time (PT) and partial thromboplastin time (PTT) 2. Decreased fibrinogen levels 3. Elevated fibrin degradation products (e.g. D-dimers) 4. Reduced protein C, protein S and antithrombin III levels Histology: dermal vascular thrombosis and secondary hemorrhagic necrosis

Diagnosis

• Characteristic clinical course • Laboratory studies: CBC with platelet count, PT, PTT, fibrinogen, fibrin

271

•

1. Treat underlying infection and shock with supportive measures and IV antibiotics 2. Fresh-frozen plasma or prothrombin complex concentrate – for protein C, protein S and antithrombin III replacement 3. Blood components as necessary: packed red blood cells, platelets, cryoprecipitate 4. Vitamin K 5. Consultation of surgical and nutritional services 6. Local skin care: topical antibiotics and debridement as needed Idiopathic purpura fulminans 1. Fresh-frozen plasma or prothrombin complex concentrate for replacement of coagulation products 2. Heparin anticoagulation: full-dose heparin for at least 2 weeks after skin lesions cease to develop 3. Protein C concentrate if indicated 4. Antibiotic coverage until culture results are negative – to cover Gram-positive cocci, meningococci, Gram-negative bacilli 5. Local skin care using topical antibiotics and debridement as needed Neonatal purpura fulminans 1. Acute setting: a. Initiate therapy immediately b. Fresh-frozen plasma or prothrombin complex concentrate – replace protein C and S c. Alternative: protein C concentrate, advantage of avoiding blood volume overload 2. Long-term treatment: a. Low-dose oral anticoagulants plus replacement therapy b. Topical nitroglycerin may be applied to poorly perfused extremities c. Protein C concentrates for protein C deficiency

Mallory Chapter 15

272

27/1/05

2:37 pm

Page 272

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Prognosis

• Can be fatal, especially in cases of acute infectious

•

purpura fulminans 1. Meningococcemia with purpura fulminans carries a 20–60% mortality rate 2. Idiopathic purpura fulminans has lower mortality rate (~15%) High morbidity related to loss of digits, limbs, or areas of skin

References Baselga E, Drolet BA, Esterly NB. Purpura in infants and children. J Am Acad Dermatol 1997; 37: 673–705 Darmstadt GL. Acute infectious purpura fulminans: pathogenesis and medical management. Pediatr Dermatol 1998; 15: 169–83 Esmon CT. The protein C pathway. Chest 2003; 124 (3 Suppl): 26S–32S Ilan Y, Naparstek Y. Henoch Schönlein purpura in children and adults: is it one entity? Semin Arthritis Rheum 2002; 32: 139–40

Figure 15.14 Pigmented purpura with cayenne pepper red dots and hemosiderin deposition

Levin M, Eley BS, Louis J, et al. Postinfectious purpura fulminans caused by an autoantibody directed against protein C. J Pediatr 1995; 127: 355–63 Manco-Johnson MJ, Nuss R, Key N, et al. Lupus anticoagulant and protein S deficiency in children with postvaricella purpura fulminans or thrombosis. J Pediatr 1996; 128: 319–23 Pathan N, Faust SN, Levin M. Pathophysiology of meningococcal meningitis and septicaemia. Arch Dis Child 2003; 88: 601–7 Wheeler JS, Anderson BJ, De Chalain TM. Surgical interventions in children with meningococcal purpura fulminans – a review of 117 procedures in 21 children. J Pediatr Surg 2003; 38: 597–603

PIGMENTED PURPURA Synonym: primary (idiopathic) capillaritis General

• Group of closely related, chronic, benign conditions with similar histologic and clinical manifestations 1. Clinical: nonpalpable petechiae and hemosiderotic eruptions; old and new petechiae can be seen at the same examination (Figure 15.14)

• •

2. Histology: perivascular lymphocytic infiltrate, extravasation of red blood cells, deposit of hemosiderin (mostly inside macrophages), narrowing of the lumen of small vessels, and endothelial swelling Unknown etiology Includes: 1. Schamberg progressive pigmented purpura (see below) 2. Lichen aureus (see below) 3. Purpura annularis telangiectodes of Majocchi 4. Pigmented purpuric lichenoid dermatitis of Gougerot and Blum 5. Eczematoid-like purpura of Coucas and Kapetanakis

References Kim HJ, Skidmore RA, Woosley JT. Pigmented purpura over the lower extremities. Purpura annularis telangiectodes of Majocchi. Arch Dermatol 1998; 134: 1477–80 Pock L, Capkova S. Segmental pigmented purpura. Pediatr Dermatol 2002; 19: 517–19 Reinhold U, Seiter S, Ugurel S, Tilgen W. Treatment of progressive pigmented purpura with oral bioflavonoids and ascorbic acid: an open pilot study in 3 patients. J Am Acad Dermatol 1999; 41: 207–8

Mallory Chapter 15

27/1/05

2:37 pm

Page 273

Collagen vascular diseases

Satoh T, Yokozeki H, Nishioka K. Chronic pigmented purpura associated with odontogenic infection. J Am Acad Dermatol 2002; 46: 942–4 Weston WL, Orchard D. Vascular reaction. In Pediatric Dermatology, 3rd edn. Schachner LA, Hansen RC, eds. Mosby: New York, 2003: 821–2

273

with oral bioflavinoids and ascorbic acid; pentoxifylline Prognosis

• Benign but chronic course • Petechiae and pigmentation may last for months to years

Schamberg disease

References

Synonym: Schamberg progressive pigmented purpura

Hersh CS, Shwayder TA. Unilateral progressive pigmentary purpura (Schamberg’s disease) in a 15-year-old boy. J Am Acad Dermatol 1991; 24: 651

Major points

• Most common of the pigmented purpuras • Common cause of chronic petechiae in children • Clinical findings:

Kano Y, Hirayama K, Orihara M, Shiohara T. Successful treatment of Schamberg’s disease with pentoxifylline. J Am Acad Dermatol 1997; 36: 827–30

1. Asymptomatic nonpalpable purpura and petechiae with orange to brown patches; old and new petechiae can be seen within a patch 2. Usually affects the legs but can be seen elsewhere (e.g. trunk) 3. Usually bilateral but may be asymmetric or unilateral, especially in adolescents Chronic course, often lasts months to years

Reinhold U, Seiter S, Ugurel S, Tilgen W. Treatment of progressive pigmented purpura with oral bioflavonoids and ascorbic acid: an open pilot study in 3 patients. J Am Acad Dermatol 1999; 41: 207–8

•

Torrelo A, Requena C, Mediero IG, Zambrano A. Schamberg’s purpura in children: a review of 13 cases. J Am Acad Dermatol 2003; 48: 31–3

Lichen aureus

Pathogenesis

Synonym: lichen purpuricus

• Etiology unknown • Benign chronic capillaritis; capillary fragility leads

Major points

•

to red cell extravasation Histology: mild perivascular infiltrate, mainly lymphocytes, extravasated red blood cells, and macrophages containing hemosiderin deposits involving the papillary and upper dermis; focal parakeratosis and spongiosis of epidermis

Diagnosis

• Characteristic clinical findings • Biopsy helpful Differential diagnosis

• Vasculitis • Cutaneous T-cell lymphoma • Pityriasis lichenoides Treatment

• Treatment is difficult and often ineffective • Mid-strength topical steroids • Therapies that have been reported to be effective without serious side-effects: combination therapy

• • • •

Type of pigmented purpura Male/female ratio = 1 Onset at any age (17% of cases occur in children) Clinical findings: 1. Yellow-gold (aureus), gold-brown, or burntorange papules or macules; isolated or coalescing into patches of 1–20 cm in diameter; with scattered petechiae (Figure 15.15) 2. Solitary or multiple lesions 3. Unilateral, bilateral, or rarely a segmental or zosteriform distribution 4. Occurs more often on the legs, arms, trunk; reported on the abdomen and face 5. Usually asymptomatic, but rarely is pruritic, painful, or accompanied by a burning sensation

Pathogenesis

• Etiology unknown • Benign chronic capillaritis; capillary fragility leads to red cell extravasation

Mallory Chapter 15

274

27/1/05

2:37 pm

Page 274

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Differential diagnosis

• Bruising • Drug eruption • Dermatitis artefacta Treatment

• Largely unresponsive to treatment (topical or • •

systemic) Topical steroids useful in rare instances PUVA has been used successfully in those >11 years of age

Prognosis Figure 15.15 patch

Lichen aureus – yellow-brown persistent

• Sporadic cases associated with drug consumption •

or asymptomatic infection (e.g. lower urinary tract infection, otitis, tonsillitis) Histology: lymphohistiocytic band-like infiltrate, sometimes perivascular, in papillary dermis, extravasated erythrocytes, and hemosiderin deposits; overlying epidermis is normal

Diagnosis

• Characteristic clinical findings • No associated laboratory abnormalities • Biopsy helpful

• Chronic course • Tends to resolve spontaneously in months to years (variable) References Aoki M, Kawana S. Lichen aureus. Cutis 2002; 69: 145–8 Gelmetti C, Cerri D, Grimalt R. Lichen aureus in childhood. Pediatr Dermatol 1991; 8: 280–3 Ling TC, Goulden V, Goodfield MJ. PUVA therapy in lichen aureus. J Am Acad Dermatol 2001; 45: 145–6 Patrizi A, Neri I, Marini R, et al. Lichen aureus with uncommon clinical features in a child. Pediatr Dermatol 1996; 13: 173 Rubio FA, Robayna G, Herranz P, et al. Abdominal lichen aureus in a child. Pediatr Dermatol 1997; 14: 411

Mallory Chapter 16

27/1/05

2:49 pm

Page 275

16 VASCULAR AND LYMPHATIC DISEASES

VASCULAR DISORDERS General

• Vascular birthmarks are one of the most common •

forms of congenital lesions Occur in 1–2% of children surveyed in the newborn nursery

Hemangioma of infancy Synonym: strawberry hemangioma General

Figure 16.1 Superficial hemangioma – early, with halo from vasoconstriction

• Benign growth of endothelial cells which appears • • • •

at birth or within the first 2 months of life, and slowly involutes over 5–10 years Female/male ratio is 5 : 1 Premature babies <1500 g are more commonly affected 50% on head and neck Multiple lesions are seen in 15–30% of cases

• Growth phase:

Major points

• At birth, skin may appear normal in color and •

texture or have a precursor lesion (Figure 16.1) Precursor lesions: 1. Faint hypopigmentation resembling nevus anemicus 2. Small telangiectatic patch 3. Area of erythema resembling a capillary malformation 4. Skin ulceration 5. Bruise-like area

•

1. Begins within first 2 months with a quickly growing, red vascular plaque (Figures 16.2–16.7) 2. Grows for 6–15 months 3. Followed by stabilization period where growth plateaus and begins to develop a white surface 4. After this plateau period, hemangioma begins to involute 5. Fully developed hemangiomas of infancy are present at birth in about 5% of cases Involution: virtually all undergo spontaneous involution 1. Some leave no trace of previous lesion 2. Abnormal skin is often left behind: telangiectasias, atrophy, hypopigmentation, anetoderma (Figures 16.8 and 16.9) 3. Fifty per cent involute by 5 years, 70% involute by 7 years and 90% involute by 9 years

Mallory Chapter 16

276

27/1/05

2:49 pm

Page 276

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Figure 16.2 the face

Hemangioma – typical vascular nodule on

Figure 16.4 Hemangioma – segmental vascular plaque associated with closure of the eyelid. This child required oral steroids to keep the eyelid open

Figure 16.5 Deep hemangioma – deep purple tumor with telangiectasias on the surface

Figure 16.3 Superficial and deep hemangioma – typical vascular nodule on the forehead

• Clinical subtypes: 1. Superficial hemangiomas are most common and constitute 50–60% of all hemangiomas 2. Deep hemangiomas (previously called ‘cavernous hemangiomas’) are deep bluish swellings with a telangiectatic surface

•

3. Mixed hemangiomas have both superficial and deep components 4. Disseminated neonatal hemangiomatosis – numerous small hemangiomas (1 mm to 2 cm) with high risk of internal involvement (e.g. liver, gastrointestinal tract and/or brain) and heart failure (Figure 16.10) Complications 1. Ulceration may occur in the growth phase, especially around the mouth or in the diaper

Mallory Chapter 16

27/1/05

2:49 pm

Page 277

Vascular and lymphatic diseases

277

Figure 16.6 Superficial hemangioma – typical vascular plaque with papular surface

Figure 16.8 Hemangioma – residual scar at age 21/2 years with crinkly surface changes (same child as Fig 16.6)

Figure 16.7 nasal tip

Cyrano nose – hemangioma involving the

area; heals slowly and can last for months (Figure 16.11) 2. Bleeding is rarely a problem, although frequently expressed by parents as a concern a. If bleeding should occur, direct pressure to the area for several minutes will usually stop the bleeding. If it does not stop, surgical intervention may be warranted 3. Kasabach–Merritt syndrome a. Sudden growth of the lesion, tenseness, tenderness and a purpuric appearance b. Decreased platelets c. Petechiae and purpura d. Average age: 6 weeks e. Histology: tufted angioma, or Kaposiform hemangioendothelioma

Figure 16.9 Hemangioma – residual scar at age 4 years in another patient

4. PHACES syndrome: Posterior fossa brain malformations (e.g. Dandy–Walker malformation), Hemangiomas (especially large, plaque-like facial lesions), Arterial anomalies, Coarctation of the aorta or other cardiac defects, Eye abnormalities, Sternal cleft or supra-umbilical raphe (Figure 16.12) 5. Sacral hemangioma: associated with tethered cord (Figure 16.13) 6. Airway compromise: usually associated with large hemangiomas in the beard distribution (Figure 16.14)

Mallory Chapter 16

278

27/1/05

2:49 pm

Page 278

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Figure 16.10 Diffuse neonatal hemangiomatosis associated with liver hemangiomatosis

Figure 16.12 PHACES syndrome – associated with Dandy–Walker malformation

Figure 16.11 diaper area

Ulcerated hemangiomas often occur in the

Pathogenesis

• Etiology unknown, but it is thought that

• • •

•

angiogenic factors are involved (overexpression of basic fibroblast growth factor, vascular endothelial growth factor, proliferating cell nuclear antigen, type IV collagenase, etc.) Proliferation of endothelial cells Embryologically blastogenic factors play a role Skin biopsy is rarely needed; however, it can differentiate soft tissue tumors (e.g. Kaposiform hemangioendothelioma, myofibromatosis, rhabdomyosarcoma) Endothelia of hemangiomas express GLUT1, a glucose transporter normally restricted to endothelia with blood–tissue barrier function, as in brain and placenta as well as other immunohistochemical markers resembling placental tissue

Figure 16.13 Sacral hemangioma – associated with tethered cord

Diagnosis

• Typical clinical appearance in 95% of cases • For atypical lesions, diagnostic tests may be helpful: 1. Platelet count to evaluate for Kasabach–Merritt syndrome

Mallory Chapter 16

27/1/05

2:49 pm

Page 279

Vascular and lymphatic diseases

279

• Periodic re-evaluation, particularly in growth and involutional phases

• Therapy should be individualized based on size of • • •

Figure 16.14 Hemangiomas in the beard area and chest can be associated with tracheal hemangiomas

2. Ultrasound: may be helpful in hepatic hemangiomas, but also useful with large facial hemangiomas to differentiate extent of lesion and possible structural brain abnormalities 3. Magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) can distinguish between hemangiomas and venous malformations, and determine structural brain abnormalities

•

Differential diagnosis

• • • • • • • • • •

Capillary malformation Venous malformation Arteriovenous malformation Pyogenic granuloma Nasal glioma Spitz nevus Dermoid cyst Blue nevus Myofibromatosis Rhabdoid tumor

Treatment

• Parent education: discussion of natural history of hemangiomas; serial photographs helpful; anticipatory guidance on how to handle comments and queries from strangers, family members

•

lesion, location, presence of complications and age of patient Watchful waiting is treatment for majority of hemangiomas of infancy Surgery may be indicated when the child is 3–5 years of age, and occasionally earlier Indications for treatment: 1. Life-threatening illness 2. Loss of vision, amblyopia (hemangioma around the eye should always be followed by an ophthalmologist) 3. Respiratory distress or stridor 4. Kasabach–Merritt syndrome 5. Hepatic hemangiomatosis 6. Cardiac failure 7. Skin ulceration 8. Bleeding 9. Permanent disfigurement, particularly large hemangiomas on face, nose, lips, ear Medical treatment 1. Intralesional corticosteroids – triamcinolone 3–5 mg/kg per treatment (maximum 20 mg) 2. Systemic corticosteroids: prednisone 2–5 mg/kg per day given BID initially then once daily for several months until stablization, then tapered 3. Interferon-α (subcutaneous) – initial dose of 1–3 million U/m2 per day and increased as tolerated until hemangioma or symptoms have improved. Side-effect: spastic diplegia in ~10% 4. Pressure occlusion on an extremity with Ace wrap or Jobst stocking, making sure that the distal portion does not develop necrosis Surgical excision 1. Not necessary in majority of cases 2. May be indicated for small, easily excisable lesions on face or pedunculated hemangiomas likely to leave significant fibrofatty residua after involution Flash-lamp pumped pulsed dye laser 1. Decreases telangiectasias on surface, and those left over after lesion has resolved 2. Ulcerated hemangiomas may heal more quickly and less painfully 3. Other lasers (argon, copper vapor, Nd-YAG, krypton, KTP) may be useful in certain cases

Mallory Chapter 16

280

27/1/05

2:49 pm

Page 280

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

• Cryosurgery with cryoprobe • Radiation • •

1. Generally should be avoided, but may be indicated in severe, uncontrollable hemangiomas Embolization may be attempted in selected lesions which have life-threatening consequences Photography is very helpful in documenting progression and resolution

Prognosis

• Depends upon location, complications, results •

after involution, psychological effects Early on, it can be difficult to predict the ultimate size, rate of involution, and results; however, a physician knowledgable about hemangiomas would be a good source of information

References Barlow CF, Priebe CJ, Mulliken JB, et al. Spastic diplegia as a complication of interferon alfa-2a treatment of hemangiomas of infancy. J Pediatr 1998; 132: 527–30 Bennett ML, Fleischer AB, Chamlin SL, Frieden IJ. Oral corticosteroid use is effective for cutaneous hemangiomas. Arch Dermatol 2001; 137: 1208–13 Boon LM, MacDonald DM, Mulliken JB. Complications of systemic corticosteroid therapy for problematic hemangioma. Plast Reconstr Surg 1999; 104: 1616–23 Bronzetti G, Giardini A, Patrizi A, et al. Ipsilateral hemangioma and aortic arch anomalies in posterior fossa malformations, hemangiomas, arterial anomalies, coarctation of the aorta and cardiac defects and eye abnormalities (PHACE) anomaly: report and review. Pediatrics 2004; 113: 412–15 Ceisler EJ, Santos L, Blei F. Periocular hemangiomas: what every physician should know. Pediatr Dermatol 2004; 21: 1–9 Drolet BA, Esterly NB, Frieden IJ. Hemangiomas in children. N Engl J Med 1999; 341: 173–81 Elsas FJ, Lewis AR. Topical treatment of periocular capillary hemangioma. J Pediatr Ophthalmol Strabismus 1994; 31: 153–6 Enjolras O, Riche MD, Merland JJ, et al. Management of alarming hemangiomas in infancy: a review of 25 cases. Pediatrics 1990; 85: 491–7 Esterly NB. Cutaneous hemangiomas, vascular stains and malformations, and associated syndromes. Curr Probl Dermatol 1995; 7: 65–108 Frieden IJ, Eichenfield LF, Esterly NB, et al. Guidelines of care for hemangiomas of infancy. J Am Acad Dermatol 1997; 37: 631–7

Frieden IJ, Reese V, Cohen D. PHACE Syndrome. Arch Dermatol 1996; 132: 307–11 Herron MD, Coffin CM, Vanderhooft SL. Tufted angiomas: variability of the clinical morphology. Pediatr Dermatol 2002; 19: 394–401 Metry DW, Dowd CF, Barkovich J, Frieden IJ. The many faces of PHACE syndrome. J Pediatr 2001; 139: 117–23 Metry DW, Hebert AA. Benign cutaneous vascular tumors of infancy. When to worry, what to do. Arch Dermatol 2000; 136: 905–14 Mulliken JB, Young AE. Vascular Birthmarks: Hemangiomas and Malformations. WB Saunders: Philadelphia, 1988 North PE, Waner M, Mizeracki A, et al. A unique microvascular phenotype shared by juvenile hemangiomas and human placenta. Arch Dermatol 2001; 137: 559–70 Wananukul S, Nuchprayoon I, Seksarn P. Treatment of Kasabach–Merritt syndrome: a stepwise regimen of prednisolone, dipyridamole, and interferon. Int J Dermatol 2003; 42: 741–8 Wong S-N, Tay YK. Tufted angioma: a report of five cases. Pediatr Dermatol 2002; 19: 388–93

Vascular malformations General

• Malformation denotes an abnormal structure • •

resulting from an aberration in embryologic development They do not resolve on their own and are always present at birth, although they might not be noticeable at birth They can involve veins, arteries, capillaries and occasionally lymphatic channels

Major points

• Capillary malformations (port wine stains, nevus flammeus) 1. Most common type of vascular malformation 2. Commonly occurs on the face, usually unilaterally, but can be anywhere on the body 3. Noticeable at birth as pink, red or deep purple, macular patch which blanches with pressure (Figures 16.15 and 16.16) 4. Involvement of first portion of fifth cranial nerve (V1) involving upper eyelid can be associated with glaucoma (~45%). An ophthalmologist should be consulted

Mallory Chapter 16

27/1/05

2:49 pm

Page 281

Vascular and lymphatic diseases

Figure 16.15 Capillary malformation (port wine stain), which is flat and pink in an infant

Figure 16.16 Capillary malformation in an adult, raised with dark red-purple papules

•

5. Small risk of glaucoma occurs in V2; V3 has no risk of glaucoma Venous malformations 1. Appears as blue or purple, grouped, subcutaneous nodules with enlarged neighboring veins (Figure 16.17)

Figure 16.17 varicosities

281

Venous malformation – notice purple

2. Hyperhidrosis overlying the malformation is common 3. Symptoms a. Usually asymptomatic b. May develop pressure on other nearby structures c. Pain may be caused by slow flow and clot formation d. Complications usually later in life 4. Varicosities (varicose veins) commonly occur 5. Complications: a. Glaucoma is associated with lesions in V1 and V2 distribution 6. Blue rubber bleb syndrome (OMIM no. 112200) a. Multiple venous malformations of the skin and gastrointestinal (GI) tract b. Blue or purple soft rubbery nodules which can be easily compressed c. Nocturnal pain in the lesions common d. Bleeding in the GI tract from the lesions may cause melena and anemia e. Other organs may be involved f. Autosomal dominant; chromosome 9p21; gene: receptor tyrosine kinase TIE2 7. Maffucci syndrome (OMIM no. 166000) a. Diffuse asymmetric enchondromatosis and multiple venous malformations

Mallory Chapter 16

282

27/1/05

2:49 pm

Page 282

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

b. Soft blue subcutaneous nodules which progressively enlarge c. Hard nodules appear on long bones, hands, fingers and feet d. Gross deformity may occur e. Enchondromas can transform into chondrosarcoma (~15%) f. Gene map locus 3p22-p21.1; gene: PTH/PTHRP type I receptor Pathogenesis

• Vascular ectasias rather than a proliferative process;

•

progressive vascular dilatation of pre-existing blood vessels caused by either a defect in vascular walls or abnormalities of supporting structure of surrounding dermis Arterial malformations are high-flow lesions that can cause right-to-left shunting with subsequent heart failure 1. Doppler testing can reveal shunting 2. Listen to the lesion with a stethoscope for a bruit

Diagnosis

• Clinical presentation • May need further testing: MRI if not straightforward or complications arise Differential diagnosis

• Hemangioma of infancy • Lymphatic malformation Treatment

• Pulsed dye laser (577–585 nm) • Surgery may be warranted in lesions with persistent pain, or bleeding

• Sclerotherapy by interventional radiologist for symptomatic deep venous malformations

• Treatment for tenderness with warm packs and oral aspirin

References Bedocs PM, Gould JW. Blue rubber-bleb nevus syndrome: a case report. Cutis 2003; 71: 315–18 Cantatore JL, Kriegel DA. Laser surgery: an approach to the pediatric patient. J Am Acad Dermatol 2004; 50: 165–84 Enjolras O, Ciabrini D, Mazoyer E, et al. Extensive pure venous malformations in the upper or lower limb: a review of 27 cases. J Am Acad Dermatol 1997; 36: 219–25 Enjolras O. Vascular tumors and vascular malformations: are we at the dawn of a better knowledge? Pediatr Dermatol 1999; 16: 238–41 Ertem D, Acar Y, Kotiloglu E, et al. Blue rubber bleb nevus syndrome. Pediatrics 2001; 107: 418–20 Gabikian P, Clatterbuck RE, Gailloud P, Rigamonti D. Developmental venous anomalies and sinus pericranii in the blue rubber-bleb nevus syndrome. Case report. J Neurosurg 2003; 99: 409–11 McClean K, Hanke CW. The medical necessity for treatment of port-wine stains. Dermatol Surg 1997; 23: 663–7 Michel S, Landthaler M, Hohenleutner U. Recurrence of port-wine stains after treatement with flashlamp-pumped pulsed dye laser. Br J Dermatol 2000; 143: 1230–4 Nguyen CM, Yohn JJ, Huff C, et al. Facial port wine stains in childhood: prediction of the rate of improvement as a function of the age of the patient, size and location of the port wine stain and the number of treatments with the pulsed dye (585 nm) laser. Br J Dermatol 1998; 138: 821–5 Requena L, Sangueza OP. Cutaneous vascular anomalies. Part I. Hamartomas, malformations, and dilatation of preexisting vessels. J Am Acad Dermatol 1997; 37: 523–49 Sheu M, Fauteux G, Chang H, et al. Sinus pericranii: dermatologic considerations and literature review. J Am Acad Dermatol 2002; 46: 934–41

Sturge–Weber syndrome Major points

• Facial capillary malformation including the V1

Prognosis

• Persist into adult life, becoming darker purple, • •

raised and thickened with cobblestone appearance Small angiomatous nodules may appear within the lesion Prognosis depends upon location, size and extent

• • •

distribution (upper eyelid and forehead), accompanied by ipsilateral leptomeningeal angiomatosis (Figure 16.18) Glaucoma is usual but not invariably present Vascular malformation may be unilateral with a sharp midline cut-off, or may be bilateral and extensive Seizures are the most frequent neurological manifestation

Mallory Chapter 16

27/1/05

2:49 pm

Page 283

Vascular and lymphatic diseases

283

• Seizures and mental retardation should be followed by pediatrician and/or neurologist Prognosis

• Lesions are static or progressive References Bebin EM, Gomez MR. Prognosis in Sturge–Weber disease: comparison of unihemispheric and bihemispheric involvement. J Child Neurol 1988; 3:181–4 Dahan D, Fenichel GM, El-Said R. Neurocutaneous syndromes. Adolesc Med State Art Rev 2002; 13: 495–509 Eerola I, Boon LM, Mulliken JB, et al. Capillary malformation–arteriovenous malformation, a new clinical and genetic disorder caused by RASA1 mutations. Am J Hum Genet 2003; 73: 1240–9 Enjolras O, Riche MC, Merland JJ. Facial port-wine stains and Sturge–Weber syndrome. Pediatrics 1985; 76: 48–51 Figure 16.18 Sturge–Weber syndrome – associated with glaucoma, mental retardation and seizures

• Mental retardation common • Other neurological abnormalities: hemiplegia, • •

hemisensory defects, homonymous hemianopsia Other eye findings: buphthalmos, blindness Other skin findings: overgrowth of soft tissue and underlying bone of the face

Pathogenesis

• Etiology unknown • Vascular malformation of vessels of brain, eye and skin

• Histology: increase in dilated venules, mainly in upper reticular dermis Diagnosis

• MRI or computerized tomography (CT) scan can •

identify abnormal vasculature and extent of cortical calcifications Eye examination demonstrates glaucoma

Differential diagnosis

• Capillary malformation without internal •

involvement Other vascular malformations

Klippel–Trenaunay syndrome Major points

• Cutaneous capillary and venous malformations, • • • • • • • •

congenital varicosities, and hypertrophy of involved limb (Figures 16.19 and 16.20) Occasionally with an arteriovenous fistula (Parkes–Weber syndrome) Involved limb hypertrophied, with enlargement of muscles, thickened skin and excess subcutaneous fat Lymphedema can be present Venous thrombosis common Female/male ratio = 1 Single lower limb is most common area involved, but bilateral lower limbs or upper limbs may be involved Lesions present at birth Sporadic

Pathogenesis

• Etiology of overgrowth of tissues unknown but may be secondary to oversupply of blood to the subcutaneous tissues Diagnosis

• Clinical presentation

Treatment

Differential diagnosis

• Glaucoma should be followed by an

• Vascular malformation without internal

ophthalmologist and may require surgery

involvement

Mallory Chapter 16

284

27/1/05

2:49 pm

Page 284

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Prognosis

• Variable: may be static or progressive in hypertrophy

• May have increased leg length discrepancy References Aelvoet GE, Jorens PG, Roelen LM. Genetic aspects of the Klippel–Trenaunay syndrome. Br J Dermatol 1992; 126: 603–7 Bird LM, Jones MC, Kuppermann N, Huskins WC. Gramnegative bacteremia in four patients with Klippel– Trenaunay–Weber syndrome. Pediatrics 1996; 98: 739–41 Dogan R, Faruk Dogan O, Oc M, et al. A rare vascular malformation, Klippel–Trenaunay syndrome. Report of a case with deep vein agenesis and review of the literature. J Cardiovasc Surg 2003; 44: 95–100

Figure 16.19 Klippel–Trenaunay syndrome demonstrating hypertrophy of the limb with a capillary malformation

Eerola I, Boon LM, Mulliken JB, et al. Capillary malformation–arteriovenous malformation, a new clinical and genetic disorder caused by RASA1 mutations. Am J Hum Genet 2003; 73: 1240–9 Marler JJ, Fishman SJ, Upton J, et al. Prenatal diagnosis of vascular anomalies. J Pediatr Surg 2002; 37: 318–26 Requena L, Sangueza OP. Cutaneous vascular anomalies. Part I. Hamartomas, malformations, and dilatation of preexisting vessels. J Am Acad Dermatol 1997; 37:,523–49

Cutis marmorata telangiectatica congenita Major points

• Malformation of blood vessels characterized by

• • Figure 16.20 Klippel–Trenaunay syndrome with extensive vascular malformation of the back as well as the extremities

• •

Treatment

• Superficial component can be treated with pulsed • •

dye laser If there is leg length discrepancy, orthopedic referral Possible embolization if complications arise

• •

blue-violet, reticulated, marbled, cutaneous, vascular pattern present at birth, often with atrophy of involved tissues Unresponsive to warming Often segmental, involving one limb (frequently the leg) with a sharp cut-off at the midline (89%) or may be generalized (11%) Reticulated pattern frequently indented, atrophic, or may have ulcerations (Figure 16.21) Purplish color accentuated by crying, vigorous movement, or cold temperatures Telangiectasias often seen within area Associated with various congenital anomalies in 50% of patients (usually minor): 1. Hypertrophy or atrophy of involved limb 2. Other vascular anomalies

Mallory Chapter 16

27/1/05

2:49 pm

Page 285

Vascular and lymphatic diseases

285

Prognosis

• Gradual improvement in first 2 years • Some lesions do not resolve completely References Devillers ACA, de Waard-van der Spek FB, Oranje AP. Cutis marmorata telangiectatica congenita. Clinical features in 35 cases. Arch Dermatol 1999; 135: 34–8 Fujita M, Darmstadt GL, Dinulos JG. Cutis marmorata telangiectatica congenita with hemangiomatous histopathologic features. J Am Acad Dermatol 2003; 48: 950–4 Happle R. Dohi Memorial Lecture. New aspects of cutaneous mosaicism. J Dermatol 2002; 29: 681–92 Mazereeuw-Hautier J, Carel-Caneppele S, Bonafe JL. Cutis marmorata telangiectatica congenita: report of two persistent cases. Pediatr Dermatol 2002; 19: 506–9 Figure 16.21 Cutis marmorata telangiectatica congenita – reticulated, atrophic, vascular pattern on an extremity

•

3. Macrocephaly 4. Glaucoma (if face involved) 5. Persistent ductus arteriosus 6. Congenital nevus 7. Mental retardation Sporadic inheritance

Pathogenesis

• Etiology unknown, but thought to be ectasia of •

veins and possibly of capillaries from vasospasm in utero Histology: dilated capillaries and veins in all layers of dermis and subcutaneous fat

Requena L, Sangueza OP. Cutaneous vascular anomalies. Part I. Hamartomas, malformations, and dilatation of preexisting vessels. J Am Acad Dermatol 1997; 37: 523–49

Glomuvenous malformations Synonyms: glomus tumors, glomangiomas Major points

• Present as single or multiple, purple papules, nodules • • • • •

or plaques scattered over body (Figure 16.22) Size ranges from 5 mm to large plaques Usually asymptomatic but may be painful Congenital large plaques have been reported Lesions progressively enlarge slowly with time Usually sporadic but may be inherited – autosomal dominant with incomplete penetrance and variable expressivity

Diagnosis

Pathogenesis

•

• Abnormality of glomulin gene mapped to

Clinical presentation

Differential diagnosis

• • • •

Cutis marmorata (normal variant) Klippel–Trenaunay syndrome Sturge–Weber syndrome Diffuse phlebectasia (appears later and is progressive)

chromosome 1p21

• Uncontrolled growth of glomus cells Diagnosis

• Clinical diagnosis with histologic confirmation • Histology: nonencapsulated tumors with vascular spaces lined by one or two layers of glomus cells

Treatment

Differential diagnosis

• •

• Venous malformation • Varicosities

Treatment is usually not needed If lesions persist, pulsed dye laser

Mallory Chapter 16

286

27/1/05

2:49 pm

Page 286

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

• Female/male ratio = 1 • Circumscribed, pale macule with irregular margins (Figure 16.23)

• Sometimes surrounded by satellite pink macules

• Location anywhere on body, but most often seen on upper chest

• Not accentuated by Wood’s lamp examination Pathogenesis

• Pharmacologic anomaly responding to catecholamines rather than an anatomic one

• Vascular structures are histologically normal Diagnosis

• With diascopy, lesion is indistinguishable from blanched surrounding skin

• Friction, cold or heat accentuates normal Figure 16.22 Glomuvenous malformation – typical purple intermittently painful vascular plaque

surrounding skin but does not induce erythema within the lesion Differential diagnosis

Treatment

• Surgical excision • Large lesions may be difficult, and usually do not respond to pulsed dye laser Prognosis

• Slowly progressive enlargement; can develop pain

• Nevus depigmentosus • Vitiligo • Hypopigmented macules of tuberous sclerosis Treatment

• Not needed, but camouflage make-up may be desired

References

Prognosis

Brouillard P, Boon LM, Mulliken JB, et al. Mutations in a novel factor, glomulin, are responsible for glomuvenous malformations (‘glomangiomas’). Am J Hum Genet 2002; 70: 866–74

• Static

Brouillard P, Vikkula M. Vascular malformations: localized defects in vascular morphogenesis. Clin Genet 2003; 63: 340–51 Enjolras O, Mulliken JB. Vascular tumors and vascular malformations. New issues. Adv Dermatol 1997; 13: 375–423

Nevus anemicus Major points

• Uncommon congenital vascular lesion which appears lighter than surrounding skin as a pale macule; no pigment involved

Figure 16.23 Nevus anemicus – vasoconstricted patch unchanged by rubbing

Mallory Chapter 16

27/1/05

2:49 pm

Page 287

Vascular and lymphatic diseases

References

Diagnosis

Eichenfield L, Larralde M. Neonatal skin and skin disorders. In Pediatric Dermatology, 3rd edn. Schachner LA, Hansen RC, eds. Mosby: Edinburgh, 2003: 221

• Clinical presentation

Requena L, Sangueza OP. Cutaneous vascular anomalies. Part I. Hamartomas, malformations, and dilatation of preexisting vessels. J Am Acad Dermatol 1997; 37: 523–49

Nevus simplex (salmon patch) Major points

• Benign, erythematous, macular patch on newborn’s glabellar region (Figure 16.24)

• Tends to disappear or lighten signficantly in first year of life

• On face, colloquially called ‘angel’s kiss’ • On posterior neck, known as ‘stork bite’ • 25–40% of newborns of all races have pink–red macular lesions on face, usually in midline glabella (salmon patch), or in occipital or nuchal regions Pathogenesis

• Thought to represent persistence of fetal circulatory patterns

Figure 16.24 Salmon patch (nevus simplex) – typical glabellar distribution which improved in the first year of life

287

Differential diagnosis • Capillary malformation Treatment • None needed • If persistent, pulsed dye laser Prognosis • Nuchal lesions persist through life unchanged • Sacral lesions persist through life, and are rarely associated with underlying anomalies • Facial lesions usually lighten within the first years of life References Frieden I, Enjolras O, Esterly NB. Vascular lesions. In Pediatric Dermatology, 3rd edn. Schachner LA, Hansen RC, eds. Churchill Livingstone: New York, 2003: 833–62

Angiokeratoma Major points • Acquired, hyperkeratotic, superficial vascular abnormality with ectasia of pre-existing blood vessels in the papillary dermis • Location usually lower extremities • Presents either at birth or appears early in life as flat red, purple or blue patch (Figure 16.25) • Slowly enlarges with time and becomes progressively verrucous or scaly • Satellite lesions frequent • Lesions bleed with trauma • Types of angiokeratomas: 1. Solitary angiokeratoma a. Small, warty, purple-black papule usually on lower extremities b. Thought to be caused by injury, trauma or chronic irritation c. Thrombosis may occur 2. Angiokeratoma circumscriptum a. Large, solitary, hyperkeratotic, vascular, verrucous plaques b. Usually present at birth c. Occurs in bands, streaks or linear arrangements d. Commonly on extremity

Mallory Chapter 16

288

27/1/05

2:49 pm

Page 288

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Pathogenesis

• Etiology unknown • Histology: thickened epidermis with

•

hyperkeratosis, dilated capillaries and venules in papillary and reticular dermis. In Fabry disease, vacuolization of endothelial cells and smooth muscle cells as well as other cells Electron microscopy: lipid deposits in endothelial cells, pericytes and other cells which have characteristic lamellar structure

Diagnosis Figure 16.25 plaque

Angiokeratoma – purple-red, hyperkeratotic

• Clinical presentation • Biopsy often needed for confirmation Differential diagnosis

3. Angiokeratoma of Mibelli a. Several red-purple papules with hyperkeratotic surface on dorsal hand or foot, particularly fingers and toes b. Appears in childhood or adolescence c. More common in females d. May be associated with cold injury, acrocyanosis or chilblains e. Autosomal dominant 4. Angiokeratoma of Fordyce a. Multiple red-purple 2–4-mm papules on scrotum or vulva b. Most common in elderly patients 5. Angiokeratoma corporis diffusum a. Cutaneous manifestation of Fabry disease, an X-linked recessive disorder caused by the deficiency of lysosomal hydrolase α-galactosidase A b. Multiple lesions appear in late childhood c. Small, punctuate, dark, red-purple papules 1–2 mm in size usually more prominent on the lower trunk and legs d. Enlarge and become more prominent with time e. Neutral glycosphingolipids (trihexosylceramide) accumulates within lysosomes of endothelial cells, fibroblasts, and other cells throughout the body resulting in renal, cardiac, ocular and neurological abnormalities f. Can also be seen in fucosidosis, galactosidosis and other rare enzymatic deficiencies

• • • •

Hemangioma of infancy Vascular malformation Angiomas Pyogenic granuloma

Treatment

• Excision • CO2 laser • Enzyme replacement for Fabry disease Prognosis

• Static or progressive References Kiyohara T, Kumakiri M, Kawasaki T, et al. Linear acral pseudolymphomatous angiokeratoma of children (APACHE): further evidence that APACHE is a cutaneous pseudolymphoma. J Am Acad Dermatol 2003; 48 (2 Suppl): 15–7 Mohrenschlager M, Braun-Falco M, Ring J, Abeck D. Fabry disease: recognition and management of cutaneous manifestations. Am J Clin Dermatol 2003; 4: 189–96 Schiller PI, Itin PH. Angiokeratomas: an update. Dermatology 1996; 193: 275–82

LYMPHATIC MALFORMATIONS General

• Term used to describe localized or diffuse malformations of cutaneous, subcutaneous, or submucous lymphatic vessels

Mallory Chapter 16

27/1/05

2:49 pm

Page 289

Vascular and lymphatic diseases

Lymphangioma circumscriptum

Diagnosis

Major points

• Clinical presentation • Biopsy may be indicated, especially in deeper

• Most common variant of cutaneous lymphatic • • • • • • •

malformations Present at birth but may not be apparent, and may be noticed in childhood as a solitary soft tissue swelling Superficial lymphatic malformations are characterized by clear vesicles on the surface of the skin, grouped in plaques (Figure 16.26) Often small areas of bleeding within lymphatic channels from abnormal blood vessels which run parallel to abnormal lymph channels Verrucous surface sometimes seen Often involves deeper tissues Location can be anywhere but has a predilection for axilla, shoulder, neck, tongue and proximal parts of extremities Usually asymptomatic, but may ooze lymph fluid

Pathogenesis

• Congenital malformation of lymphatics with

• • •

formation of large cisterns that lie in subcutaneous tissue and communicate with superficial lymphatic system by dilated dermal lymphatics Histology: dilated lymph vessels lined by flat endothelial cells situated beneath the epidermis and within the reticular dermis Deeper involvement is common, with individual lymph channels arranged in clusters Erythrocytes may be seen within some channels

289

lesions without characteristic clinical features Differential diagnosis

• • • • •

Herpes simplex Hemangioma Kaposi sarcoma Warts Molluscum contagiosum

Treatment

• Surgical excision frequently results in recurrences • • •

because of interconnecting lymphatic channels Surgery should depend upon severity of signs and symptoms CO2 laser can ablate superficial component, but often recurs Sclerotherapy by interventional radiologists for macrocystic lesions followed by surgery in some cases

Prognosis

• Static or slowly progressive References Axt-Fliedner R, Hendrik HJ, Schwaiger C, et al. Prenatal and perinatal aspects of a giant fetal cervicothoracal lymphangioma. Fetal Diagn Ther 2002; 17: 3–7 Giguere CM, Bauman NM, Smith RJ. New treatment options for lymphangioma in infants and children. Ann Otol Rhinol Laryngol 2002; 111: 1066–75 Hilliard RI, McKendry JBJ, Phillips MJ. Congenital abnormalities of the lymphatic system: a new clinical classification. Pediatrics 1990; 86: 988–94 McAlvany JP, Jorizzo JL, Zanolli D, et al. Magnetic resonance imaging in the evaluation of lymphangioma circumscriptum. Arch Dermatol 1993; 129: 194–7 Mulliken JB, Fishman SJ, Burrows PE. Vascular anomalies Curr Probl Surg 2000; 37: 517–84 Ryan TJ, Mortimer PS, Jones RL. Lymphatics of the skin, neglected but important. Inter J Dermatol 1986; 25: 411–19

Macrocystic lymphatic malformations Major points Figure 16.26 Lymphangioma circumscriptum – clear vesicles with some hemorrhage into the vesicles

• Abnormal lymphatic channels in deeper portions of the lymphatic system

Mallory Chapter 16

290

27/1/05

2:49 pm

Page 290

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

• Characterized by subcutaneous painless nodules • •

covered by normal skin Usually asymptomatic, but may be painful when pressed or bumped Cystic hygroma occurs around neck, axillae and inguinal regions with prominent deep component (Figure 16.27) 1. Presents at birth or early childhood as a large cystic mass; demonstrated by transillumination 2. Cystic hygromas of posterior neck associated with Turner or Noonan syndrome, hydrops fetalis and other congenital malformations

Pathogenesis

Prognosis

• Static or slowly progressive • Painful if traumatized References Gallagher PG, Mahoney MJ, Gosche JR. Cystic hygroma in the fetus and newborn. Semin Perinatol 1999; 23: 341–56 Requena L, Sangueza OP. Cutaneous vascular anomalies. Part I. Hamartomas, malformations, and dilatation of preexisting vessels. J Am Acad Dermatol 1997; 37: 523–49 Weintraub AS, Holzman IR. Neonatal care of infants with head and neck anomalies. Otolaryngol Clin North Am 2000; 33: 1171–89

• Histology: irregular, dilated and interconnecting •

lymphatic vessels with multilocular cystic cavities in subcutaneous fat Some lymph channels contain smooth muscle bundles in walls

Lymphedema Major points

• Malformation or destruction of lymphatic

Diagnosis

channels and subsequent swelling of tissues

• Clinical presentation • Biopsy may be needed

• Primary lymphedema

Differential diagnosis

• Lipoma • Epidermal cyst • Tumors Treatment

• Surgical removal of bulk of lesion is usually •

•

indicated; high rate of recurrence Sclerosing agents by interventional radiology

• • • •

1. Congenital lymphedema (Figure 16.28) 2. Milroy disease: congenital, autosomal dominant 3. Idiopathic a. Lymphedema praecox appears between ages of 10 and 25 years b. Lymphedema tardum (after age 35 years) Secondary lymphedema 1. Infection 2. Surgical destruction 3. Malignant infiltration 4. Fibrosis (radiation, stasis) Female/male ratio >1 Swelling of limb or limbs is gradual and painless Swelling improves when feet are elevated overnight Soft, pitting edema of distal extremities

Pathogenesis

• Malformation of lymphatic channels with aplasia, hypoplasia or varicosities of lymphatic channels

• Milroy disease: gene map locus 5q35.3; FLT4 • Figure 16.27 under arm

Cystic hygroma – congential deep swelling

gene, which encodes the vascular endothelial growth factor receptor-3 Lymphedema praecox: gene map locus 16q24.3; forkhead family transcription factor gene MFH1 (FOXC2)

Mallory Chapter 16

27/1/05

2:49 pm

Page 291

Vascular and lymphatic diseases

291

Evans AL, Brice G, Sotirova V, et al. Mapping of primary congenital lymphedema to the 5q35.3 region. Am J Hum Genet 1999; 64: 547–55 Irrthum A, Karkkainen MJ, Devriendt K, et al. Congenital hereditary lymphedema caused by a mutation that inactivates VEGFR3 tyrosine kinase. Am J Hum Genet 2000; 67: 295–301 Makhoul IR, Sujov P, Ghanem N, Bronshtein M. Prenatal diagnosis of Milroy’s primary congenital lymphedema. Prenat Diagn 2002; 22: 823–6 Veraart JCJM, Neumann HAM. Effects of medical elastic compression stockings on interface pressure and edema prevention. Dermatol Surg 1996; 22: 867–71 Figure 16.28 feet and legs

Congenital lymphedema – swelling of the

Wu JJ, Wagner AM. Verruciform xanthoma in association with Milroy disease and leaky capillary syndrome. Pediatr Dermatol 2003; 20: 44–7

Diagnosis

• Clinical presentation • Lymphoscintigraphy with radioisotopic • • •

preparations can differentiate lymphedema from other causes of edema MRI of area involved Abdominal MRI may be needed to rule out extensive involvement or tumor Secondary causes should be ruled out

Differential diagnosis

• Lipodystrophy • Panniculitis • Myxedema Treatment

• Minimize edema to prevent progression • Prevent secondary complications (e.g. cellulitis) • •

and further destruction of lymphatic channels Elastic garments (e.g. Jobst stockings) with pressures of >20 mmHg should be worn during the day Lymphedema pumps with sequential chambers

Prognosis

• Progressive or stable • In Turner syndrome, lymphedema can resolve References Araujo JA, Curbelo JG, Mayol AL, et al. Effective management of marked lymphedema of the leg. Int J Dermatol 1997; 36: 389–92

ACQUIRED LESIONS Pyogenic granuloma Major points

• Common vascular tumor in childhood and • • • • • • • • • •

pregnancy, accounting for 0.5% of pediatric nodules No racial or sex predilection A misnomer: neither bacterial (pyogenic) nor granulomatous in origin Commonly occurs between 1 and 4 years of age Location: face and neck most common but can occur anywhere Begins as small (5–8 mm) vascular papules Rapidly enlarges over several weeks to a dull red, dome-shaped, smooth, nontender papule (Figure 16.29) Usually solitary Rarely, multiple grouped satellite lesions develop around the original lesion Often pedunculated with a collarette of scale Surface becomes crusted and bleeds easily

Pathogenesis

• Etiology unknown • Trauma may play a role • May represent an inflammatory repair mechanism with granulation tissue and blood vessels

Mallory Chapter 16

292

27/1/05

2:49 pm

Page 292

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Diagnosis

• Histology: hemangioma-like proliferation of capillaries with flattened epidermis and epidermal collarette Differential diagnosis

• • • • • • • • •

Hemangioma of infancy Telangiectasia (spider angioma) Traumatized wart or molluscum Irritated melanocytic nevi Spitz nevus Amelanotic melanoma Eccrine poroma (on sole of the foot) Solitary glomus tumor Bacillary angiomatosis (seen in HIV-positive male patients)

Figure 16.29 Pyogenic granuloma – typical bleeding, friable, vascular papule

Treatment

• Shave excision with curettage and •

electrodesiccation or surgical excision Pulsed dye laser may be effective in small lesions, but may require multiple treatments

•

Prognosis

• Small risk of recurrence after removal • Untreated lesions tend to enlarge slowly, ulcerate and bleed References Frieden I, Enjolras O, Esterly NB. Vascular Lesions. In Pediatric Dermatology, 3rd edn. Schachner LA, Hansen RC, eds. Churchill Livingstone: New York, 2003: 833–62 Fleming AN, Smith PJ. Vascular cell tumors of the hand in children. Hand Clin 2000; 16: 609–24 Morelli JG. Use of lasers in pediatric dermatology. Dermatol Clin 1998; 16: 489–95 Pagliai KA, Cohen BA. Pyogenic granuloma in children. Pediatr Dermatol 2004; 21: 10–13

Livedo reticularis

1. Most often seen in women 2. Symmetrical diffuse mottling, usually on extremities 3. Numbness and tingling common 4. Painful ulceration uncommon Secondary causes: 1. Intravascular obstruction a. Hematologic stasis: paralysis, emboli, cryoglobulinemia, anticardiolipin antibody syndrome b. Vessel wall disease: anticardiolipin antibody syndrome, polyarteritis nodosa, lupus erythematosus, dermatomyositis, syphilis, tuberculosis c. Drugs: amantadine, quinine, quinidine

Pathogenesis

• Thought to be due to slow venous drainage at • •

margins of areas of skin richly supplied by arterial cones Increased viscosity and low flow rates in superficial venous plexus caused by cold Deoxygenation occurs and bluish pattern becomes more pronounced

Major points

Diagnosis

• Mottled, reddish-blue macular discoloration of

• Clinical presentation • Rule out causes

• •

skin forming net-like pattern (Figure 16.30) Pattern is persistent, but darkens when environment is cold, and lightens when skin is warmed Idiopathic livedo reticularis

Differential diagnosis

• Cutis marmorata (physiologic) • Congenital abnormalities of blood vessels

Mallory Chapter 16

27/1/05

2:49 pm

Page 293

Vascular and lymphatic diseases

• • • •

Congenital heart disease Cutis marmorata telangiectatica congenita Angioma serpiginosum Erythema ab igne

Treatment

• Usually persistent despite treatment of underlying •

disorder Avoidance of cold

Spider angioma Synonyms: telangiectasia, nevus araneus Major points

• Most common type of telangiectasia in childhood • Benign fixed pinpoint vascular punctum •

Prognosis

• Persistent or progressive

(0.5–4 mm) with radiating, tiny capillaries resembling legs of a spider Central vascular papule is a superficial arteriole which feeds into web of surrounding telangiectasias, occasionally pulsing Occurs either as single lesions or in crops Most common on sun-exposed areas, such as face and arms Occurs in 10–15% of normal adults and children More common in northern Europeans

References

• •

Abrahamian LM, Berke A, Van Voohees AS. Type 1 diabetes mellitus associated with livedo reticularis: case report and review of the literature. Pediatr Dermatol 1991; 8: 46–50

• •

Asherson RA, Cervera R. Unusual manifestations of the antiphospholipid syndrome. Clin Rev Allergy Immunol 2003; 25: 61–78

Pathogenesis

Gibson GE, Su WP, Pittelkow MR. Antiphospholipid syndrome and the skin. J Am Acad Dermatol 1997; 36: 970–82

293

• • • •

Quintero-Del-Rio AI. Antiphospholipid antibodies in pediatrics. Curr Rheumatol Rep 2002; 4: 387–91

Etiology unknown Genetic predisposition Sun or trauma may play a role Histology: ascending arteriole which ends in a thin-walled ampulla just beneath the epidermis with radiating arterial branches in the papillary dermis

Diagnosis

• Clinical presentation • Diascopy (pressure with a glass slide) results in disappearance of lesion Differential diagnosis

• Multiple telangiectasias Treatment

• Pulsed dye laser • Light electrodesiccation of central feeder vessel • Treatment does not prevent new lesions in other •

areas Recurrence rare

Prognosis

• Natural history has not been well studied, but most lesions are persistent; some may spontaneously disappear References Figure 16.30 Livedo reticularis – reticulated vascular pattern associated with collagen vascular disease (anticardiolipin antibodies)

Geronemus RG. Treatment of spider telangiectases in children using the flashlamp-pumped pulsed dye laser. Pediatr Dermatol 1991; 8: 61–3

Mallory Chapter 16

294

27/1/05

2:49 pm

Page 294

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Requena L, Sangueza OP. Cutaneous vascular anomalies. Part I. Hamartomas, malformations, and dilatation of preexisting vessels. J Am Acad Dermatol 1997; 37: 523–49

Differential diagnosis

• Spider angioma Treatment

Major points

• Pulsed dye laser • Light electrodesiccation of the central feeder vessels • Treatment does not prevent new lesions in other

• Abnormal permanent dilatation of venules and

• Sunscreens may prevent new lesions

Telangiectasias

•

occasionally capillaries and arterioles of subpapillary plexus (Figure 16.31) Telangiectases may be seen in: 1. Collagen vascular diseases 2. Mastocytosis 3. Trauma 4. Sun damage 5. Radiodermatitis 6. Poikiloderma 7. Ataxia telangiectasia 8. Essential or benign telangiectasias

Pathogenesis

• Histology: capillaries are dilated within papillary dermis, affecting venous portion of capillary loop Diagnosis

• Clinical presentation • Diascopy causes disappearance of lesion

areas Prognosis

• Persistent unless treated • Recurrence is occasionally seen References Abrahmian LM, Rothe MJ, Grant-Kels JM. Primary telangiectasia of childhood. Int J Dermatol 1992; 31: 307–13 Gold MH, Eramo L, Prendiville JS. Hereditary benign telangiectasia. Pediatr Dermatol 1989; 6: 194–7 Goldman MP, Bennett RG. Treatment of telangiectasia: a review. J Am Acad Dermatol 1987; 17: 167–82 Gonzalez E, Gange RW, Momtaz KT. Treatment of telangiectases and other benign vascular lesions with the 577 nm pulsed dye laser. J Am Acad Dermatol 1992; 27: 220–6 Marchuk DA, Srinivasan S, Squire TL, Zawistowski JS. Vascular morphogenesis: tales of two syndromes. Hum Mol Genet 2003; 12: R97–112

Generalized essential telangiectasias Major points

• More common in females in late teens to adults • •

and made worse in pregnancy Rarely involve conjunctivae and oral mucosa No bleeding diathesis or associated internal disease (e.g. liver disease)

Pathogenesis

• Etiology unknown • Histology: dilated horizontal subpapillary venous plexus Diagnosis

• Clinical presentation Differential diagnosis Figure 16.31

Typical spider angioma on the face

• Hereditary hemorrhagic telangiectasia • Collagen vascular diseases

Mallory Chapter 16

27/1/05

2:49 pm

Page 295

Vascular and lymphatic diseases

Treatment

• Perivascular connective tissue is abnormal and is

• Pulsed dye or other vascular laser Prognosis

•

Persistent and can be progressive

295

•

thought to be responsible for telangiectasias and hemorrhage Gene locus/gene: OWR1-9q34.1/ENG (endoglin); OWR2- 12q11-q14/ACVRL1 (activin A receptor-like kinase-1)

References Abrahmian LM, Rothe MJ, Grant-Kels JM. Primary telangiectasia of childhood. Int J Dermatol 1992; 31: 307–13 Gold MH, Eramo L, Prendiville JS. Hereditary benign telangiectasia. Pediatr Dermatol 1989; 6: 194–7

Diagnosis

• Clinical presentation • Evaluation of GI tract and lungs Differential diagnosis

• Essential telangiectasias Hereditary hemorrhagic telangiectasia

Treatment

Synonym: Osler–Weber–Rendu syndrome

• Pulsed dye laser or other vascular laser • Electrocautery

Major points

• Characterized by telangiectases involving the skin, • • • • • • •

mucous membranes and internal organs (especially GI tract, lungs) Dark red, slightly elevated, central punctum with radiating vessels which can become matted with age In childhood, epistaxis from telangiectasias in nose Location most prominent on palms, soles, lips, tongue, palate, nasal mucous membranes and under nails GI involvement: bleeding is frequent and melena and anemia are common Lungs: arteriovenous fistulas or other venous malformations Other organs: kidney, spleen, bladder, liver, meninges and brain Autosomal dominant

Pathogenesis

• Histology: dilated thin-walled post-capillary venules, closely apposing overlying epidermis, lined by one layer of flattened endothelial cells

Prognosis

• Slow progression of cutaneous, gastrointestinal and pulmonary lesions with bleeding, anemia

• Arteriovenous fistula in lungs can develop References Azuma H. Genetic and molecular pathogenesis of hereditary hemorrhagic telangiectasia. J Med Invest 2000; 47: 81–90 Begbie ME, Wallace GM, Shovlin CL. Hereditary haemorrhagic telangiectasia (Osler–Weber–Rendu syndrome): a view from the 21st century. Postgrad Med J 2003; 79: 18–24 Guttmacher AE, Marchuk DA, White RI. Hereditary hemorrhagic telangiectasia. N Engl J Med 1995; 333: 918–24 Peery WH. Clinical spectrum of hereditary hemorrhagic telangiectasia. Am J Med 1987; 82: 989–97 Swanson DL, Dahl MV. Embolic abscesses in hereditary hemorrhagic telangiectasia. J Am Acad Dermatol 1991; 24: 580–3 van den Driesche S, Mummery CL, Westermann CJ. Hereditary hemorrhagic telangiectasia: an update on transforming growth factor beta signaling in vasculogenesis and angiogenesis. Cardiovasc Res 2003; 58: 20–31

Mallory Chapter 16

27/1/05

2:49 pm

Page 296

ashry

Mallory Chapter 17

27/1/05

2:53 pm

Page 297

17 TUMORS, CYSTS AND GROWTHS

BLASCHKO LINES See Chapter 14 for definition Lesions that follow Blaschko lines (Table 17.1)

Epidermal nevus Major points

• • • • •

Hamartoma of cutaneous elements No racial predilection Sporadic, with a few cases in families 60% present at birth; 95% present by age 7 years Types: 1. Nevus verrucosus – most common type a. Hyperpigmented, warty plaque measuring 2 to >10cm (Figure 17.1) b. Usually solitary

Table 17.1 Disorders which follow Blaschko lines/segmental disorders

Nevoid/hamartomas Epidermal nevus/ILVEN Nevus sebaceus Nevus comedonicus Porokeratotic eccrine ostial and dermal duct nevus Nevus lipomatosus CHILD syndrome Pigmented lesions Incontinentia pigmenti Hypomelanosis of Ito Nevus depigmentosus Linear and whorled nevoid hypermelanosis Segmental vitiligo Tuberous sclerosis with leukodermic macules Café au lait macules (McCune–Albright syndrome) Congenital nevus Vascular lesions Angiokeratoma circumscriptum Verrucous hemangioma Glomuvenous malformations Venous malformations Angioma serpiginosum Lymphangioma circumscriptum Unilateral nevoid telangiectasia

Figure 17.1 Epidermal nevus – on the body following Blaschko lines (published in An Illustrated Dictionary of Dermatologic Syndromes by SB Mallory and S Leal-Khouri)

Other Lichen striatus Linear lichen planus Focal dermal hypoplasia (Goltz syndrome) Conradi–Hünermann syndrome (X-linked dominant) Menkes syndrome (female carriers) X-linked hypohidrotic ectodermal dysplasia (female carriers) Oral–facial–digital syndrome, type 1 Linear porokeratosis Linear keratosis follicularis

Mallory Chapter 17

298

27/1/05

2:53 pm

Page 298

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Figure 17.2 Epidermal nevus – on the legs following Blaschko lines

c. Linear or oval in shape d. Most common on extremities, but can be anywhere e. Does not continue to grow after age 7 years except in proportion to the child 2. Nevus unius lateris (systematized epidermal nevus) a. Extensive lesions which can be unilateral or bilateral (Figure 17.2) b. Can continue to expand into adolescence, following Blaschko lines c. Associated with underlying systemic deformities in 30% of patients (called ‘epidermal nevus syndrome’ with CNS, skeletal, cardiovascular, ocular abnormalities) 3. Ichthyosis hystrix a. Extensive lesions following Blaschko lines b. Histology: epidermolytic hyperkeratosis 4. Inflammatory linear verrucous epidermal nevus (ILVEN) a. Erythematous scaly linear plaque/plaques (Figure 17.3) b. Small or large c. Intensely pruritic d. Often in groin e. More common in females (4 : 1)

Figure 17.3 Inflammatory linear verrucous epidermal nevus – scaly, erythematous streaks following Blaschko lines on the leg

Pathogenesis

• Mosaicism arising from somatic mutations early in

•

embryogenesis. Two distinct cell lines result and migrate along developmental lines (Blaschko lines) producing patchy and linear abnormalities If epidermal nevus has histology of epidermolytic hyperkeratosis and if the gonads are involved in the somatic mutation, offspring may be affected with widespread epidermolytic hyperkeratosis

Diagnosis • Histology: 1. Papillomatous hyperplasia of the epidermis with or without epidermolytic hyperkeratosis 2. Inflammation in the dermis may be seen in the inflammatory types Differential diagnosis • Nevus verrucosus 1. Nevus sebaceus 2. Seborrheic keratosis 3. Verrucae • Inflammatory linear verrucous epidermal nevus 1. Psoriasis 2. Linear lichen planus 3. Lichen simplex chronicus 4. Darier disease

Mallory Chapter 17

27/1/05

2:53 pm

Page 299

Tumors, cysts and growths

Treatment

• Solitary epidermal nevi usually require no treatment

• Surgery must include upper levels of dermis in • •

order to prevent recurrences Other techniques which may be effective for removal: CO2 laser, dermabrasion, chemical peels, liquid nitrogen Pruritus in ILVEN may be improved with potent topical or intralesional steroids, pulsed dye laser or short contact dithranol

299

• Sporadic in occurrence; familial cases have been reported

• No racial or sexual predilection • Incidence 0.3% of the population • Solitary oval or linear hairless plaque on the scalp, head or neck (Figure 17.4)

Prognosis

• Lesions persist unless fully removed References Alam, M, Arndt KA. A method for pulsed carbon dioxide laser treatment of epidermal nevi. J Am Acad Dermatol 2002; 46; 554–6 Boyce S, Alster TS. CO2 laser treatment of epidermal nevi: long-term success. Dermatol Surg 2002; 28: 611–14 Grebe TA, Rimsza ME, Richter SF, et al. Further delineation of the epidermal nevus syndrome: two cases with new findings and literature review. Am J Med Genetics 1993; 47: 24–30 Happle R, Rogers M. Epidermal nevi. Adv Dermatol 2002; 18: 175–201 Ivker R, Resnick SD, Skidmore RA. Hypophosphatemic vitamin D-resistant rickets, precocious puberty, and the epidermal nevus syndrome. Arch Dermatol 1997; 133: 1557–61 Paller AS, Syder AJ, Chan Y-M, et al. Genetic and clinical mosaicism in a type of epidermal nevus. N Engl J Med 1994; 331: 1408–15

Figure 17.4 Nevus sebaceus – extensive, yellowish plaque on the face following Blaschko lines

• Surface smooth, velvety or wart-like with a yellowish color

• Size ranges from 0.5 to >6 cm; can be extensive • In childhood, the lesions flatten and become

• •

Prayson RA, Kotagal P, Wyllie E, Bingaman W. Linear epidermal nevus and nevus sebaceus syndrome. Arch Pathol Lab Med 1999; 123: 301–5 Rogers M, McCrossin I, Commens C. Epidermal nevi and the epidermal nevus syndrome. J Am Acad Dermatol 1989; 20: 476–88

Nevus sebaceus Synonym: nevus sebaceus of Jadassohn, organoid nevus Major points

• Congenital hamartoma of skin and adnexae, predominantly sebaceous glands, abortive hair follicles and ectopic apocrine glands

•

less apparent; thought to be caused by the reduction of maternal hormones and sebaceous glands At puberty, most plaques thicken and become verrucous (Figure 17.5) Development of hamartomatous tumors within the lesion usually after puberty 1. Tumors: syringocystadenoma papilliferum, trichoblastoma, hidradenoma, basal cell carcinoma, others 2. Malignant tumors such as squamous cell carcinoma, apocrine carcinoma and other adnexal carcinomas are rare before age 40 years 3. Detected by development of a papule with ulceration within the lesion Extensive lesions may be associated with multiple systemic manifestations in the nevus sebaceus syndrome (Schimmelpenning syndrome): seizures, mental retardation, arteriovenous malformations of the brain, skeletal abnormalities, ophthalmologic abnormalities

Mallory Chapter 17

300

27/1/05

2:53 pm

Page 300

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Prognosis

• Lesions persist throughout life • Potential in adulthood to develop nodules or skin tumors References Cribier B, Scrivener Y, Grosshans E. Tumors arising in nevus sebaceus: a study of 596 cases. J Am Acad Dermatol 2000; 42: 263–8 LeSueur BW, Silvis NG, Hansen RC. Basal cell carcinoma in children: report of 3 cases. Arch Dermatol 2000; 136: 370–2

Figure 17.5 Nevus sebaceus – verrucous plaque on the forehead of an 11-year-old

Pathogenesis

• Complex hamartoma of pilosebaceous follicles, epidermis and adenexal structures that are under hormonal control Diagnosis

• Histology: 1. Early: small underdeveloped sebaceous glands and hair follicles 2. Childhood: small, immature ectopic appendageal structures 3. Puberty: hyperplasia and maturation of the sebaceous glands. Hair follicles remain rudimentary; fully developed apocrine glands occur Differential diagnosis

• • • •

Epidermal nevus Aplasia cutis Congenital triangular alopecia Cutaneous infection (e.g. staphylococcal, streptococcal, herpes simplex)

Oranje AP, Przyrembel H, Meradji M, et al. Solomon’s epidermal nevus syndrome (type: linear nevus sebaceus) and hypophosphatemic vitamin D-resistant rickets. Arch Dermatol 1994; 130: 1167–71 Rogers M, McCrossin I, Commens C. Epidermal nevi and the epidermal nevus syndrome. J Am Acad Dermatol 1989; 20: 476–88 Santibanez-Gallerani A, Marshall D, Duarte AM, et al. Should nevus sebaceus of Jadassohn in children be excised? A study of 757 cases, and literature review. J Craniofac Surg 2003; 14: 658–60 Turner CD, Shea CR, Rosoff PM. Basal cell carcinoma originating from a nevus sebaceus on the scalp of a 7-year-old boy. J Pediatr Hematol Oncol 2001; 23: 247–9

Nevus comedonicus Major points

• Presents at birth or early childhood • Dilated follicular orifices on top of papules, closely set and usually linear (Figure 17.6)

• Site: face, neck, upper arms and chest • Usually solitary • If systematized (rare), developmental defects of the CNS, eyes, bone and skin can be associated

• Usually asymptomatic, but individual papules and cysts within plaques may become inflamed, resembling acne vulgaris

Treatment

Pathogenesis

• Full-thickness surgical excision around the time of

• Considered to be a variant of epidermal nevus, a

puberty is recommended If excision will result in a worse cosmetic defect, then observation may be reasonable CO2 laser is a second choice for destruction of the lesion in a difficult area; however, recurrences may occur

hamartoma of abnormal hair follicle infundibula

• •

Diagnosis

• Clinical diagnosis • Histology: multiple dilated follicles filled with keratinous plugs

Mallory Chapter 17

27/1/05

2:53 pm

Page 301

Tumors, cysts and growths

301

Differential diagnosis

• Acne vulgaris • Nevus sebaceus Treatment • Topical retinoids • Keratolytic agents: 12% ammonium lactate lotion (LacHydrin), tretinoin • Surgical excision Prognosis • Persistent References Beck MH, Dave VK. Extensive nevus comedonicus. Arch Dermatol 1980; 116: 1048–50 Cestari TF, Rubim M, Valentini BC. Nevus comedonicus: case report and brief review of the literature. Pediatr Dermatol 1991; 8: 300–5 Patrizi A, Neri I, Fiorentini C, Marzaduri S. Nevus comedonicus syndrome: a new pediatric case. Pediatr Dermatol 1998; 15: 304–6 Seo YJ, Piao YJ, Suhr KB, et al. A case of nevus comedonicus syndrome associated with neurologic and skeletal abnormalities. Int J Dermatol 2001; 40: 648–50 Vasiloudes PE, Morelli JG, Weston WL. Inflammatory nevus comedonicus in children. J Am Acad Dermatol 1998; 38: 834–6

Figure 17.6 Nevus comedonicus – note the inflamed open and closed comedones

CYSTS Epidermal cyst Major points

• Slow-growing, firm, ballotable round dermal nodule (Figure 17.7)

• Range in size from 0.5 to 15 cm • Neonates:

•

1. Can be seen anywhere 2. If present in the midline (face, nose) and associated with pits or cysts, may indicate intracranial connection Adolescents: 1. Solitary cysts with acne vulgaris 2. Multiple cysts in childhood or adolescents might suggest Gardner syndrome Ruptured epidermal cysts become markedly inflamed; caused by keratin inciting a foreign body reaction

Figure 17.7 Epidermal cyst – inflamed tender ruptured cyst on the cheek

Pathogenesis

• Epidermal cysts result from the proliferation of surface epidermal cells within the dermis producing keratin. They arise from cells of the follicular infundibulum, or from implantation of epidermal cells into the dermis through trauma, or from trapping of epidermal cells along embryonal fusion planes

Mallory Chapter 17

302

27/1/05

2:53 pm

Page 302

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Diagnosis

• Easy to diagnose if there is a central punctum from •

which keratinous material can be expressed Clinically difficult to distinguish between epidermal and dermoid cysts without a biopsy

Vasiloudes PE, Morelli JG, Weston WL. Plantar epidermal cysts in children. Arch Dermatol 1997; 133: 1465 Zuber TJ. Minimal excision technique for epidermoid (sebaceous) cysts. Am Fam Physician 2002; 65: 1409–12, 1417–18, 1420

Differential diagnosis See Table 17.2

Milia

Treatment

Major points

• Surgical excision with removal of the entire cyst wall

• A milium (plural, milia) is a 1–2 mm superficial

Prognosis

• Cysts persist and slowly enlarge over time • If traumatized, the cyst wall can break, extruding keratinous material into the surrounding dermis, causing marked inflammation References Knight PJ, Reiner CB. Superficial lumps in children. Pediatrics 1983; 72: 147–53 Pariser RJ. Benign neoplasms of the skin. Med Clin North Am 1998; 82: 1285–307

• • •

white globoid papule within the epidermis or upper dermis Consists of a tiny ball of keratin with a thin cyst wall Common on the face of newborns, and within scars (especially in epidermolysis bullosa) Milia on the palate of newborns called Epstein pearls

Pathogenesis

• Etiology unknown • Milia are thought to be derived from pilosebaceous follicles Diagnosis

Table 17.2 Benign skin papules, nodules and cysts in infants and children

Epidermal cyst Dermoid cyst Pilomatrixoma Nasal glioma Encephalocele Branchial cleft cyst Milia Eruptive vellus hair cysts Fibroma Neurofibroma Lipoma Panniculitis Juvenile xanthogranuloma Mastocytoma Lymphangioma Granuloma annulare Syringoma Trichoepithelioma Dermatofibroma Keloid Calcinosis cutis Osteoma cutis Foreign body granuloma

• Clinical diagnosis • Histology: identical to an epidermal cyst, differing only in size Differential diagnosis

• Molluscum contagiosum • Keratosis pilaris Treatment

• Lesions can be easily expressed with a comedone extractor after incision with a surgical blade or needle Prognosis

• Superficial milia can spontaneously extrude; deeper ones may be persistent References Bridges AG, Lucky AW, Haney G, Mutasim DF. Milia en plaque of the eyelids in childhood: case report and review of the literature. Pediatr Dermatol 1998; 15: 282–4 Cairns ML, Knable AL. Multiple eruptive milia in a 15year-old boy. Pediatr Dermatol 1999; 16: 108–10

Mallory Chapter 17

27/1/05

2:53 pm

Page 303

Tumors, cysts and growths

Girardi M, Federman GL, McNiff JM. Familial multiple basaloid follicular hamartomas: a report of two affected sisters. Pediatr Dermatol 1999; 16: 281–4 Langley RGB, Walsh NMG, Ross JB. Multiple eruptive milia: report of a case, review of the literature, and a classification. J Am Acad Dermatol 1997; 37: 353–6 Stefanidou MP, Panayotides JG, Tosca AD. Milia en plaque: a case report and review of the literature. Dermatol Surg 2002; 28: 291–5

Pathogenesis

• Caused by the sequestration of epithelium along the planes of closure of embryonic clefts Diagnosis

• Biopsy should not be performed unless it is certain there is no intracranial connection

• Histology: an encapsulated cyst with a wall composed of keratinizing, stratified squamous epithelium with hair follicles, sebaceous glands, eccrine and aprocrine glands; within the cyst are lipids, keratin and hair

Dermoid cyst Major points

• Manifest at birth (40%) or before age 5 years • • • •

• •

•

(70%) Solitary, soft round subcutaneous cyst which is freely moveable within the dermis (Figure 17.8) Sinus opening or hairs may be associated Size usually 1–4 cm Location usually on the forehead, most common in the lateral third of the eyebrow or midline nasal bridge. Also seen on the anterior or lateral neck, sternum, scrotum, perineal raphe and sacral areas In the periorbital area, may cause proptosis or eyelid displacement Most dermoid cysts are superficial, but up to 45% may have intracranial connections to extradural or intradural compartments often indicated by a sinus pit Usually asymptomatic; rarely recurrent infections with cellulitis or abscess; pressure erosion of the bone may occur

303

Differential diagnosis See Table 17.2 Treatment

• Simple excision • Midline lesions of the face should be evaluated with an MRI looking for intracranial connections

• Surgery by a pediatric neurosurgeon is essential for •

lesions with intracranial connections in order to avoid ascending infection Dermoid cysts located along the lateral eyebrows rarely have intracranial connections and do not require MRI

Prognosis

• Excellent if completely excised References Ackerman LL, Menezes AH, Follett KA. Cervical and thoracic dermal sinus tracts. A case series and review of the literature. Pediatr Neurosurg 2002; 37: 137–47 Brownstein MH, Helwig EB. Subcutaneous dermoid cysts. Arch Dermatol 1973; 107: 237–9 Drolet BA. Cutaneous signs of neural tube dysraphism. PediatrClin North Am 2000; 47: 813–23 Paller AS, Pensler JM, Tomita T. Nasal midline masses in infants and children. Arch Dermatol 1991; 127: 362–6

Pilomatrixoma Synonym: calcifying epithelioma of Malherbe Major points

• Firm, freely movable slowly growing papule/nodule Figure 17.8

Dermoid cyst – above the eyebrow of an infant

usually <1 cm (can be up to 5 cm) (Figure 17.9)

Mallory Chapter 17

304

27/1/05

2:53 pm

Page 304

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

2. Cyst is irregular in shape, with connective tissue capsule Differential diagnosis See Table 17.2 Treatment

• Surgical excision Prognosis

• Persistent • Natural history: slow enlargement over months References Ahmad M, Khan IU, Khan AH, et al. Pilomatricoma: a retrospective study. Int J Dermatol 1992; 31: 703–5 Cambiaghi S, Ermacora E, Brusasco A, et al. Multiple pilomatricomas in Rubinstein–Taybi syndrome: a case report. Pediatr Dermatol 1994; 11: 21–5 Figure 17.9 cheek

Pilomatrixoma – enlarging hard cyst on the

• Overlying skin may have a bluish hue • Usually solitary; multiple lesions have been • • • • • • •

reported Location: common on the face of a child but can be seen anywhere May feel rock-hard Slight female predominance No racial predilection Sporadic; familial cases reported If cyst ruptures to the surface, it may drain chalky calcium-containing material If ruptured under the skin, it may be very inflamed and painful

Demircan M, Balik E. Pilomatricoma in children: a prospective study. Pediatr Dermatol 1997; 14: 430–2 Julian CG, Bowers PW. A clinical review of 209 pilomatricomas. J Am Acad Dermatol 1998; 39: 191–5 Kopeloff I, Orlow SJ, Sanchez MR. Multiple pilomatricomas: report of two cases and review of the association with myotonic dystrophy. Cutis 1992; 50: 290–2 Mencia-Gutierrez E, Gutierrez-Diaz E, Garcia-Suarez E, Ricoy JR. Eyelid pilomatricomas in young adults: a report of 8 cases. Cutis 2002; 69: 23–6 Yencha MW. Head and neck pilomatricoma in the pediatric age group: a retrospective study and literature review. Int J Pediatr Otorhinolaryngol 2001; 57: 123–8

Eruptive vellus hair cysts

Pathogenesis

Major points

• Benign hyperplasia of the cells of hair matrix • Cyst composed of elements of normal hair cortex • Characteristic calcium phosphate deposition

• Multiple small, discrete, soft 1–4 mm skin-colored or hyperpigmented papules (Figure 17.10)

• Location: lower chest and upper abdomen in a

within the cyst

• Not usually associated with underlying disease Diagnosis

• Histology: two populations of cells: irregular islands of basophilic cells at the periphery, and pale shadow cells containing no nuclei 1. Within cyst: keratin, foreign body reaction, calcification and sometimes ossification

• • • • • •

follicular pattern is typical; other areas can be involved Occasional umbilication Asymptomatic Ages usually 4–18 years No systemic associations No sexual or racial predilection Autosomal dominant and familial cases have been reported

Mallory Chapter 17

27/1/05

2:53 pm

Page 305

Tumors, cysts and growths

305

References Mahendran R, Pollock B, Clark S. Multiple asymptomatic papules in a child. Pediatr Dermatol 2003: 20: 451–2 Ohtake N, Kubota Y, Takayama O, et al. Relationship between steatocystoma multiplex and eruptive vellus hair cysts. J Am Acad Dermatol 1992; 26: 876–8 Reep MD, Robson KJ. Eruptive vellus hair cysts presenting as multiple periorbital papules in a 13 year old boy. Pediatr Dermatol 2002; 19: 26–7

FAT Figure 17.10 Eruptive vellus hair cysts – typical mid-chest follicular papules resembling comedones

Lipoma Major points

Pathogenesis

• Defect in the development of vellus hair follicles •

which predispose to follicular occlusion at the infundibular level Relation to steatocystoma multiplex has been suggested, because the cyst wall can contain sebaceous glands

• Common, benign, asymptomatic, well-demarcated nodule with a doughy consistency

• Size: 1 cm to >15 cm • If a lesion compresses a nerve, it may be painful • Location often on neck and trunk but can be anywhere

• Usually solitary but may be multiple

Diagnosis

Pathogenesis

• Clinical diagnosis • Biopsy may be necessary to confirm the diagnosis • Histology: small mid-dermal cysts lined by

• Benign mesenchymal tumor of unknown etiology

squamous epithelium; cysts contain lamellar keratin and tiny nonpigmented vellus hair shafts Differential diagnosis

• • • • • •

Epidermoid cysts Syringomas Steatocystoma multiplex Acne Viral exanthems Molluscum contagiosum

Treatment

• Topical keratolytics (e.g. lactic acid, tretinoin cream) may hasten resolution

• Excision or other destructive measures may be needed for larger lesions Prognosis

• Lesions may spontaneously resolve over months to years

• New lesions can continue to form

Diagnosis

• Histology: well-circumscribed sheets of mature, uniform adipocytes with thin strands of fibrous tissue intersecting the sheets of adipocytes Differential diagnosis See Table 17.2 Treatment

• Surgical excision if indicated Prognosis

• Most lipomas are asymptomatic and stable • Trauma or ischemia can cause necrosis of lipomas with pain, and later dystrophic calcification References McAtee-Smith J, Hebert AA, Rapini RP, Goldberg NS. Skin lesions of the spinal axis and spinal dysraphism. Arch Pediatr Adolesc Med 1994; 148: 740–8 Salam GA. Lipoma excision. Am Fam Physician 2002; 65: 901–4

Mallory Chapter 17

306

27/1/05

2:53 pm

Page 306

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Sanchez MR, Colomb FM, Moy JA, Petozkin JR. Giant lipoma: case report and review of the literature. J Am Acad Dermatol 1993; 28: 266–8 Trapp CF, Baker EJ. Mobile encapsulated lipomas. Cutis 1992; 49: 63–4 Zvijac JE, Sheldon DA, Schurhoff MR. Extensive lipoma causing suprascapular nerve entrapment. Am J Orthop 2003; 32: 141–3

Knuttel R, Silver EA. A cerebriform mass on the right buttock. Dermatol Surg 2003; 29: 780–1 Lane JE, Clark E, Marzec T. Nevus lipomatosus cutaneus superficialis. Pediatr Dermatol 2003; 20: 313–14

Anetoderma Synonym: macular atrophy Major points

Nevus lipomatosus

• Multiple oval depressions or slightly bulging

Major points

• Herniates inward with fingertip pressure • Location: mainly upper trunk and upper arms, but

papules with wrinkled surface (Figure 17.11)

• Presents at birth or childhood • Multiloculated yellowish or skin-colored plaque of • • • •

rubbery papules and nodules Location usually in lumbosacral area or thighs but may be anywhere Size usually several centimeters or larger Asymptomatic No underlying associations

Pathogenesis

• Rare, benign hamartoma of mature fat cells Diagnosis

• Histology: mature, polypoid fat with the appearance of an acrochordon (skin tag) Differential diagnosis

• Goltz syndrome (focal dermal hypoplasia) • Encephalocraniocutaneous lipomatosis

can be anywhere

• May or may not be preceded by inflammation • Secondary anetoderma may develop after certain cutaneous processes such as syphilis, leprosy, lupus and others Pathogenesis

• Results from increased degradation or reduced synthesis of elastic tissue

• Histology: 1. Perivascular infiltrate of lymphocytes (predominantly helper T cells) 2. Scattered macrophages, giant cells with some elastophagocytosis 3. In established lesion, elastic fibers are sparse in superficial dermis and almost completely absent in mid-dermis

Treatment

• None usually needed • Surgical excision • Liposuction Prognosis

• Benign with no malignant potential References Bergonse FN, Cymbalista NC, Nico MM, et al. Giant nevus lipomatosus cutaneus superficiails: case report and review of the literature. J Dermatol 2000; 27: 16–19 Inoue M, Ueda K, Hashimoto T. Nevus lipomatosus cutaneus superficialis with follicular papules and hypertrophic pilo-sebaceous units. Int J Dermatol 2002; 41: 241–3

Figure 17.11 Anetoderma – note wrinkly skin overlying slightly raised plaques

Mallory Chapter 17

27/1/05

2:54 pm

Page 307

Tumors, cysts and growths

307

Diagnosis

• Clinical diagnosis Differential diagnosis

• Connective tissue nevus • Nevus lipomatosis Treatment

• None known to help Prognosis

• Stable or may increase in number References Colditz PB, Dunster KR, Joy GJ, et al. Anetoderma of prematurity in association with electrocardiographic electrodes. J Am Acad Dermatol 1999; 41: 479–81 Ghomrasseni S, Dridi M, Gogly B, et al. Anetoderma: an altered balance between metalloproteinases and tissue inhibitors of metalloproteinases. Am J Dermatopathol 2002; 24: 118–29 Karrer S, Szeimies R-M, Stolz W, Landthaler M. Primary anetoderma in children: report of two cases and literature review. Pediatr Dermatol 1996; 13: 382–5 Prizant TL, Lucky AW, Frieden IJ, et al. Spontaneous atrophic patches in extremely premature infants. Arch Dermatol 1996; 132: 671–4 Sparsa A, Piette JC, Wechsler B, et al. Anetoderma and its prothrombotic abnormalities. J Am Acad Dermatol 2003; 49: 1008–12 Thomas JE, Mehregan DR, Holland J, Mehregan DA. Familial anetoderma. Int J Dermatol 2003; 42: 75–7

Figure 17.12 Piezogenic pedal papules – herniations of fat which are more pronounced when standing

• Histology: thickened dermis, loss of normal small fat compartments in the lower dermis and subcutis with many protrusions of enlarged fat lobules into the dermis caused by degeneration of the thin fibrous septa Diagnosis

• Clinical diagnosis Differential diagnosis

• Lipomas • Connective tissue nevus • Plexiform neurofibroma Treatment

• Special orthotic heel cups for severely painful Piezogenic pedal papules

lesions Prognosis

Major points

• Common entity found in 10–20% of the general • • • •

population More common in women Asymptomatic skin-colored papules seen along the sides of the plantar surface only when weightbearing (Figure 17.12) Occasionally painful Often seen in runners

Pathogenesis

• Caused by herniations of subcutaneous fat into the dermis on the sides of the feet caused by weight bearing

• Usually stable unless there is chronic stress on the feet, in which case it may progress References Boni R, Dummer R. Compression therapy in painful piezogenic pedal papules. Arch Dermatol 1996; 132: 127–8 Van Straaten EA, Van Langen IM, Oorthuys JWE, Oosting J. Piezogenic papules of the feet in healthy children and their possible relation with connective tissue disorders. Pediatr Dermatol 1991; 8: 277–9 Woodrow SL, Brereton-Smith G, Handfield-Jones S. Painful piezogenic pedal papules: response to local electroacupuncture. Br J Dermatol 1997; 136: 628–30

Mallory Chapter 17

308

27/1/05

2:54 pm

Page 308

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Panniculitis

Table 17.3

Types of panniculitis

Major points

• Panniculitis is a term used to describe a group of • • • • • • •

diseases with inflammation in the subcutaneous fat (see Table 17.3) Presents with erythematous or violaceous, painful, subcutaneous nodules (Figures 17.13 and 17.14) Size usually 1–4 cm Common location: lower legs, symmetrical, but nodules may be anywhere Usually do not ulcerate Recurrent crops Lesions involute over a few weeks, and erythema is replaced with hyperpigmentation Erythema nodosum – most common type of panniculitis (see Table 17.4)

Pathogenesis

• Inflammation of fat; etiology depends upon type of panniculitis Diagnosis

• Histology: degeneration and necrosis of lipocytes with an infiltrate of polymorphonuclear leukocytes and lymphocytes within the lobules of fat or in the septae Differential diagnosis

• Epidermal cyst (ruptured) • Cellulitis

Neonatal panniculitis Sclerema neonatorum Subcutaneous fat necrosis of the neonate Physical panniculitis Cold-induced (popsicle panniculitis) Traumatic Chemical-induced Factitial Post-steroid injection Systemic diseases with panniculitis Systemic lupus erythematosus Pancreatitis Sarcoidosis Renal failure Lymphoma Leukemia Infections α1-antitrypsin deficiency Vasculitis Nodular vasculitis Polyarteritis nodosa Cutaneous polyarteritis nodosa Superficial migratory thrombophlebitis Septal panniculitis without vasculitis Erythema nodosum Scleroderma panniculitis Eosinophilic fasciitis Eosinophilic myalgia syndrome Idiopathic lobular panniculitis (Weber–Christian disease)

Treatment

• • • •

Bed rest if lesions occur on legs Withdrawal of offending agent (e.g. drugs) Nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory agents Oral steroids may be indicated, particularly in cases of vasculitis

Prognosis

• Course variable, depending upon the type of panniculitis

• May spontaneously resolve or persist with new lesions occurring in crops References Aronson IK, Zeitz HJ, Variakojis D. Panniculitis in childhood. Pediatr Dermatol 1988; 5: 216–30

Figure 17.13

Panniculitis associated with Crohn disease

Mallory Chapter 17

27/1/05

2:54 pm

Page 309

Tumors, cysts and growths

Table 17.4 nodosum

309

Major etiologies of erythema

Drug-induced Sulfonamides Bromides Oral contraceptives Bacterial infections Streptococcal infections Yersinia enterocolitica Mycoplasma pneumoniae Leprosy Leptospirosis Tularemia Bartonella henselae (cat scratch disease) Fungal infections Coccidioidomycosis Blastomycosis Histoplasmosis Dermatophytosis

Figure 17.14 Popsicle panniculitis – caused by sucking on a cold popsicle

Viral infections/other infections Paravaccinia Infectious mononucleosis Hepatitis B Psittacosis Tuberculosis

Eberhard BA, Ilowite NT. Panniculitis and lipodystrophy. Curr Opin Rheumatol 2002; 14: 566–70 McBean J, Sable A, Maude J, Robinson-Bostom L. Alpha1antitrypsin deficiency panniculitis. Cutis 2003; 71: 205–9 Ruiz-Maldonado R, Parrilla FM, Luz Orozco-Covarrubias M, et al. Edematous, scarring vasculitic panniculitis: a new multisystemic disease with malignant potential. J Am Acad Dermatol 1995; 32: 37–44 Sutra-Loubet C, Carlotti A, Guillemette J, Wallach D. Neutrophilic panniculitis. J Am Acad Dermatol 2004; 50: 280–5

Other diseases Sarcoidosis Ulcerative colitis Crohn disease Lymphoma Leukemia Behçet syndrome

CONNECTIVE TISSUE

3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Fibromatoses General

• Two broad groups: superficial (fascial) fibromatoses, and deep (musculoaponeurotic) fibromatoses

• Benign proliferations of myofibroblasts Major points

• Infantile digital fibromatosis 1. Most common fibrous proliferation in the first year of life 2. Solitary, smooth, dome-shaped nodule on the distal digital phalanx, which is either skincolored or red (Figure 17.15)

•

Size reaches 1–3 cm Multiple tumors common Fingers affected commonly (86%) No sex predilection Can spontaneously involute May need to be surgically excised, but there is a high recurrence rate Infantile myofibromatosis 1. Seen at birth or early life 2. Multiple cutaneous nodules with underlying tumors in the muscle, bone and visceral organs 3. Lesions are firm, skin-colored to red-purple nodules ranging in size from 0.5 to 7 cm 4. If limited to skin and bones, does not require treatment unless there is functional

Mallory Chapter 17

310

27/1/05

2:54 pm

Page 310

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

• Fibrous hamartoma of infancy

•

1. Solitary (or multiple) nodules usually located on the shoulder, arm or axilla 2. Present at birth or shortly after 3. Treat with excision; recurrence is uncommon Juvenile hyaline fibromatosis 1. Very rare triad of fibrous growths on the head and neck, flexion contractures and gingival hyperplasia 2. Skull and encephalic abnormalities 3. Autosomal recessive 4. Relentless progression

Pathogenesis • Etiology is unknown, but fibromatoses are characterized by a proliferation of fibrous/myofibrous tissue Figure 17.15 Infantile digital fibromatosis – painless, firm papules on an infant’s fingers

•

impairment. More aggressive types may require chemotherapy or radiation and may be fatal Plantar fibromatosis 1. Firm, nontender nodule on mid-plantar surface of foot present at birth 2. Uncomfortable when child walks 3. Requires excision when symptomatic; recurrence is uncommon if completely excised Knuckle pads 1. Solitary or multiple thickenings over the metacarpophalangeal or proximal interphalangeal joints (Figure 17.16) 2. Require no treatment

Diagnosis • Histology is essential 1. Infantile digital fibromatosis: perinuclear cytoplasmic inclusions seen with trichrome stain (may represent actin microfilaments) within a proliferation of fibrous tissue 2. Infantile myofibromatosis: spindle-shaped fibroblasts in whorls and interlacing bundles 3. Fibrous hamartoma of infancy: distinctive tracts of fibroblasts, fat and small blue cells within the lesion 4. Juvenile hyaline fibromatosis: hyalinized collagen with fibroblast proliferation Differential diagnosis • Knuckle pads: Gottron papules (dermatomyositis), acanthosis nigricans • Infantile myofibromatosis: soft tissue sarcomas, hemangioendotheliomas, fibrosarcomas, lipomas, fibrous histiocytomas, lipoblastomas, neurofibromas, rhabdomyosarcomas • Infantile digital fibroma/fibrous hamartoma of infancy: sarcoma Prognosis • Deeper variants can behave aggressively and become infiltrative but do not metastasize References

Figure 17.16

Knuckle pads on all the fingers

Bellman B, Wooming G, Landsman L, et al. Infantile myofibromatosis: a case report. Pediatr Dermatol 1991; 8: 306–9

Mallory Chapter 17

27/1/05

2:54 pm

Page 311

Tumors, cysts and growths

311

Caylakli F, Cakmak O, Seckin D, et al. Juvenile hyaline fibromatosis: a case report. Int J Pediatr Otorhinolaryngol 2003; 67: 557–61 Counsell SJ, Devile C, Mercuri E, et al. Magnetic resonance imaging assessment of infantile myofibromatosis. Clin Radiol 2002; 57: 67–70 Dickey GE, Sotelo-Avila C. Fibrous hamartoma of infancy: current review. Pediatr Dev Pathol 1999; 2: 236–43 Eich GF, Hoeffel JC, Tschappeler H, et al. Fibrous tumours in children: imaging features of a heterogeneous group of disorders. Pediatr Radiol 1998; 28: 500–9 Gandhi MM, Nathan PC, Weitzman S, Levitt GA. Successful treatment of life-threatening generalized infantile myofibromatosis using low-dose chemotherapy. J Pediatr Hematol Oncol 2003; 25: 750–4 Goldberg NS, Bauer BS, Kraus H, et al. Infantile myofibromatosis: a review of clinicopathology with perspectives on new treatment choices. Pediatr Dermatol 1988; 5: 37–46 Haleem A, Al-Hindi HN, Juboury MA, et al. Juvenile hyaline fibromatosis: morphologic, immunohistochemical, and ultrastructural study of three siblings. Am J Dermatopathol 2002; 24: 218–24 Ikediobi NI, Iyengar V, Hwang L, et al. Infantile myofibromatosis: support for autosomal dominant inheritance. J Am Acad Dermatol 2003; 49 (2 Suppl): S148–50 Kang SK, Chang SE, Choi JH, et al. A case of congenital infantile digital fibromatosis. Pediatr Dermatol 2002; 19: 462–3 Kanwar AJ, Kaur S, Thami GP, Mohan H. Congenital infantile digital fibromatosis. Pediatr Dermatol 2002; 19: 370–1

Figure 17.17

• • • •

Keloids Major points

• Caused by unchecked proliferation of fibrous tissue and collagen following an injury to the dermis which invades the surrounding skin Diagnosis

• Histology: whorls of young fibrous tissue and fibroblasts arranged in a haphazard manner with thick, eosinophilic, acellular bands of collagen and thickening of dermis; mast cells and plasma cells increased in number; elastin usually absent Differential diagnosis

• Hypertrophic scar • Fibrosarcoma Treatment

• Intralesional steroids (e.g. triamcinolone

• Mildly tender, firm papule or nodule arising in site

•

of previous injury (e.g. surgery, ear piercing, cystic acne, burns) and extends beyond the border of the original injury (Figure 17.17) Lesions are skin-colored, pink or hyperpigmented

Can be disfiguring May be painful, especially when growing Common locations are shoulders, chest and earlobes More common in dark-skinned teenagers

Pathogenesis

Keltz M, DiCostanzo D, Desai P, Cohen SR. Infantile (desmoid-type) fibromatosis. Pediatr Dermatol 1995; 12: 149–51 Rahman N, Dunstan M, Teare MD, et al. The gene for juvenile hyaline fibromatosis maps to chromosome 4q21. Am J Hum Genet 2002; 71: 975–80

Keloid – firm plaque in a scar

•

10–40 mg/ml) given every 2–4 weeks until flattened and not growing Larger lesions should be excised with subsequent steroid injections until growth of the lesion has stopped

Mallory Chapter 17

312

27/1/05

2:54 pm

Page 312

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Prognosis

Diagnosis

• Keloids tend to persist and enlarge slowly over

• Clinical diagnosis

time and can recur even when treated References Berman B, Bieley HC. Keloids. J Am Acad Dermatol 1995; 33: 117–23 Gold MH. A controlled clinical trial of topical silicone gel sheeting in the treatment of hypertrophic scars and keloids. J Am Acad Dermatol 1994; 30: 506–7 Kelly AP. Pseudofolliculitis barbae and acne keloidalis nuchae. Dermatol Clin 2003; 21: 645–53 Marneros AG, Norris JEC, Olsen JR, Reichenberger E. Clinical genetics of familial keloids. Arch Dermatol 2001; 137: 1429–34 Poochareon VN, Berman B. New therapies for the management of keloids. J Craniofac Surg 2003; 14: 654–7 Rahban SR, Garner WL. Fibroproliferative scars. Clin Plast Surg 2003; 30: 77–89 Sahl WJ, Clever J. Cutaneous scars: part II. Int J Dermatol 1994; 33: 763–9

Acne keloidalis nuchae Major points:

• Chronic scarring folliculitis located on posterior • • • •

neck in young Black men Characteristic follicular papules that coalesce into firm plaques and nodules (Figure 17.18) Begins with a chronic folliculitis which heals with keloid-like papules Can form small to large plaques Lesions usually pruritic or painful

Differential diagnosis

• Folliculitis • Hypertrophic scars • Pseudofolliculitis barbae Treatment

• Early treatment essential • Intralesional steroids or short course of oral • •

steroids for acute inflammation Surgical excision followed by intralesional steroids if extensive Oral antibiotics (e.g. minocycline, doxycycline) and topical retinoids

Prognosis

• Chronic unless treated References Dinehart SM, Herzberg AJ, Kerns BJ, Pollack SV. Acne keloidalis: a review. J Dermatol Surg Oncol 1989; 15: 642–7 Giovannini UM. Treatment of scars by steroid injections. Wound Repair Regeneration 2002; 10: 116–17 Glenn MJ, Bennett RG, Kelly AP. Acne keloidalis nuchae: treatment with excision and second-intention healing. J Am Acad Dermatol 1995; 33: 243–6 Tsao SS, Dover JS, Arndt KA, Kaminer MS. Scar management: keloid, hypertrophic, atrophic, and acne scars. Semin Cutan Med Surg 2002; 21: 46–75

Pathogenesis

• Etiology uncertain • Aggravated by shaving tightly curled hair at the

•

nape of the neck and having the new hair curve back into the skin, causing inflammation at the deep infundibular and isthmic levels of the hair follicle Histology: 1. Early: inflammatory cells in the upper onethird of hair follicle; sebaceous glands diminished 2. Later: dermal fibrosis and scar formation

Figure 17.18 Acne keloidalis nuchae – typically seen at the nape of the neck

Mallory Chapter 17

27/1/05

2:54 pm

Page 313

Tumors, cysts and growths

313

Hypertrophic scars

Striae distensae

Major points

• Firm, slightly raised, flat, pink or red nodule or

• Visible scars with linear, smooth bands of atrophic

plaque in the area of previous injury or inflammation but stays within the site of original injury

•

skin (Figure 17.19) Begin as reddish streaks, then turn purple, and finally white

Pathogenesis

• Caused by unchecked proliferation of fibrous tissue following an injury to the dermis Diagnosis

• Histology: whorls of young fibrous tissue and fibroblasts arranged in a haphazard manner with marked thickening of the dermis Differential diagnosis

• • • •

Keloid Basal cell carcinoma Skin appendage tumors Dermatofibroma

Treatment

Figure 17.19 Striae distensae (‘stretch marks’) occur commonly in teens on the lower back, inner thighs and breasts

• Intralesional steroids (e.g. triamcinolone •

10–40 mg/ml) given every 2–4 weeks until flattened Silicone gel sheeting worn continuously for several months

Prognosis

• Most common sites: thighs, buttocks, breasts in girls, lower back in boys Pathogenesis

• Histology: thin overlying epidermis, fine dermal

• Hypertrophic scars can flatten with time, but are usually stable after 1 year References Brissett AE, Sherris DA. Scar contractures, hypertrophic scars, and keloids. Fac Plast Surg 2001; 17: 263–72 Gold MH. A controlled clinical trial of topical silicone gel sheeting in the treatment of hypertrophic scars and keloids. J Am Acad Dermatol 1994; 30: 506–7 Nemeth AJ. Keloids and hypertrophic scars. J Dermatol Surg Oncol 1993; 19: 738–46

• •

collagen bundles arranged in straight parallel lines, some inflammation, and elastolysis; late stages show dermal collagen in thin eosinophilic bundles, oriented in straight lines Pathogenesis unknown, probably relates to changes in extracellular matrix components Causes: puberty, obesity, corticosteroids, pregnancy, increased adrenocortical function, genetic factors

Diagnosis

• Clinical inspection

Sahl WJ, Clever J. Cutaneous scars: part II. Intern J Dermatol 1994; 33: 763–9

Differential diagnosis

Shaffer JJ, Taylor SC, Cook-Bolden F. Keloidal scars: a review with a critical look at therapeutic options. J Am Acad Dermatol 2002; 46 (2 Suppl): S63–97

• Ehlers–Danlos syndrome • Marfan syndrome • Child abuse

Mallory Chapter 17

314

27/1/05

2:54 pm

Page 314

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Treatment

• Usually no treatment is necessary • Pulsed dye laser can improve redness in early • •

lesions Discontinuance of steroids, if this is a precipitating factor Emollients (e.g. petrolatum, cocoa butter)

Prognosis

• Lesions are permanent References Di Lernia V, Bonci A, Cattania M, Bisighini G. Striae distensae (rubrae) in monozygotic twins. Pediatr Dermatol 2001; 18: 261–2 Garcia Hidalgo L. Dermatological complications of obesity. Am J Clin Dermatol 2002; 3: 497–506 Jabbour SA. Cutaneous manifestations of endocrine disorders: a guide for dermatologists. Am J Clin Dermatol 2003; 4: 315–31 McDaniel DH. Laser therapy of stretch marks. Dermatol Clin 2002; 20: 67–76

Dermatofibroma Synonym: fibrous histiocytoma Major points

• Common, benign, asymptomatic papule or papules ranging from 0.5 mm to 1 cm, commonly found on the lower legs, but may occur anywhere (Figure 17.20)

• Usually solitary but may be multiple • Color varies: yellow, red, purple or dark brown with rim of brown pigment and variation in color

• Palpation: firm or hard; feels like a pea which is •

fixed to the skin surface and freely movable over the subcutis Lateral pressure produces a ‘dimple sign’ with an overlying depression in the center of the papule

Pathogenesis • Cause unknown but thought to be the result of trauma, insect bites, or viral infection Diagnosis • Clinical features characteristic • Histology: whorling fascicles of spindle cells; edges are poorly defined. A Grenz zone of normal tissue lies above the lesion in the papillary dermis; epidermis is acanthotic Differential diagnosis • Nevocellular nevus • Melanoma • Xanthoma • Prurigo nodularis • Seborrheic keratosis • Dermatofibrosarcoma protuberans Treatment • None usually needed • Excision if painful or large Prognosis

• Lesions are benign and usually stable • Can resolve, leaving hypo- or hyperpigmentation References Bouyssou-Gauthier M-L, Labrousse F, Longis B, et al. Dermatofibrosarcoma protuberans in childhood. Pediatr Dermatol 1997; 14: 463–5 Curco N, Jucgla A, Bordas X, Moreno A. Dermatofibroma with spreading satellitosis. J Am Acad Dermatol 1992; 27: 1017–18 Holst VA, Junkins-Hopkins JM, Elenitsas R. Cutaneous smooth muscle neoplasms: clinical features, histologic findings, and treatment options. J Am Acad Dermatol 2002; 46: 477–90 Figure 17.20 Dermatofibroma – firm brown papule commonly seen on the lower legs

Kutzner H. Expression of the human progenitor cell antigen CD34 (HPCA-1) distinguishes dermatofibrosarcoma protuberans from fibrous histiocytoma in formalin-fixed,

Mallory Chapter 17

27/1/05

2:54 pm

Page 315

Tumors, cysts and growths

315

paraffin-embedded tissue. J Am Acad Dermatol 1993; 28: 613–17

• Those associated with neurofibromatosis tend to

Lew W, Lim HS, Kim YC. Cutaneous metastatic malignant fibrous histiocytoma. J Am Acad Dermatol 2003; 48 (2 Suppl): S39–40

References

Niiyama S, Katsuoka K, Happle R, Hoffmann R. Multiple eruptive dermatofibromas: a review of the literature. Acta Derm Venereol 2002; 82: 241–4

Neurofibroma Major points

• Presents as a skin-colored papule or nodule, soft to palpation ranging in size from 0.5 to >3 cm

• Upon pressure to the lesion, the neurofibroma • • •

pushes into the skin giving the sensation that one is pushing a button through a buttonhole Some lesions are pedunculated Usually solitary unless seen in the context of neurofibromatosis (see Chapter 20) Variants such as plexiform neurofibroma can be seen in neurofibromatosis

Pathogenesis • Hyperplasia of nerve elements arising in nerves, composed of Schwann cells, fibroblasts and endothelial cells Diagnosis • Biopsy often needed for confirmation • Histology: Schwann cells, fibroblasts, endothelial cells, mast cells, perineural fibroblasts and axons arranged haphazardly in a matrix containing collagen and myxoid ground substance; circumscribed but not encapsulated Differential diagnosis • Dermal nevus • Skin tag (acrochordon) • Dermatofibroma Treatment

• Usually no treatment needed • Simple excision if indicated Prognosis • Small neurofibromas not associated with neurofibromatosis tend to remain stable or slowly enlarge with time

enlarge slowly

DeBella K, Szudek J, Friedman JM. Use of the National Institutes of Health criteria for diagnosis of neurofibromatosis 1 in children. Pediatrics 2000; 105: 608–14 Johnson NS, Saal HM, Lovell AM, Schorry EK. Social and emotional problems in children with neurofibromatosis type 1: evidence and proposed interventions. J Pediatr 1999; 134: 767–72 Kandt RS. Tuberous sclerosis complex and neurofibromatosis type 1: the two most common neurocutaneous diseases. Neurol Clin 2003; 21: 983–1004 Riccardi VM. Of mass and men. Neurofibromas and histogenesis [Editorial]. Arch Dermatol 2000; 136: 1257–8 Viskochil DH. It takes two to tango: mast cell and Schwann cell interactions in neurofibromas. J Clin Invest 2003; 112: 1791–3

Corns and calluses Synonym: clavus (multiple: clavi) Major points

• Hyperkeratotic plaque seen over pressure or frictional areas typically on the feet

• When pared with a blade, there is a central • •

•

translucent core, without thrombosed capillaries (as seen in warts) Corns can be hard, soft, vascular, or neurovascular Hard corns are usually over the dorsal interphalangeal joints, on the plantar surface underlying the metatarsal heads, or on the great toe Soft corns arise interdigitally, typically in the fourth web space

Pathogenesis

• Corns are caused by ill-fitting footwear with pointed toes causing crowding in the shoe toe box, or from the digits pressing on each other Diagnosis

• Clinical features Differential diagnosis

• Verruca vulgaris • Verruca plantaris

Mallory Chapter 17

316

27/1/05

2:54 pm

Page 316

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

• Glomus tumors • Eccrine poroma

(termed peau d’orange, ‘skin of an orange’)

• Solitary lesions usually measure 2–10 cm, whereas

Treatment

clustered lesions usually are 4–5 mm

• Pare with scalpel blade • Salicylic acid plasters and other keratolytics used in •

• Surface of plaque has a pebbled appearance

• Associations: 1. Tuberous sclerosis: shagreen plaques 2. Buschke–Ollendorff syndrome (dermatofibrosis lenticularis disseminata) shows multiple small CTN and osteopoikilosis (bony dysplasia of the long bones, pelvis, hands and feet)

combination with paring Obtain shoes that fit better

Prognosis

• Lesions are stable or progressive unless underlying cause is addressed

Pathogenesis

References

• Hamartoma with various amounts of collagen,

Smith M. Environmental and sports-related skin diseases. In Dermatology. Bolognia JL, Jorizzo JL, Rapini R, eds. Mosby: London, 2003: 1399

Diagnosis

Connective tissue nevus

• Often requires biopsy for confirmation • Biopsy should be a small wedge biopsy including

elastin and adipose tissue without increase in fibroblasts

lesional and nonlesional skin in order to compare normal and abnormal dermal tissues

Major points

• Connective tissue nevi (CTN) are hamartomas of

• • • • •

either collagen or elastin or an abnormality in ground substance plus structural components of connective tissue Male/female ratio = 1 Sporadic or autosomal dominant inheritance Usually present at birth or in early childhood Characteristic firm, nontender, irregularly shaped, or oval skin-colored plaque (Figure 17.21) Common locations: trunk, buttocks, or extremities

Differential diagnosis

• • • • • •

Smooth muscle hamartoma Plexiform neurofibroma Neurofibroma Amyloidosis Colloid millium Nevus lipomatosus

Treatment

• Reassurance to parents of benign nature • Surgical excision Prognosis

• Most solitary CTN are benign and not associated with other syndromes References Chang SE, Kang SK, Kim ES, et al. A case of congenital mucinous nevus: a connective tissue nevus of the proteoglycan type. Pediatr Dermatol 2003; 20: 229–31 Crivellato E. Disseminated nevus anelasticus. Int J Dermatol 1986; 25: 171–3 DePadova-Elder S, Mols-Kowalczewski BL, Lambert WC. Multiple connective tissue nevi. Cutis 1988; 42: 222–4 Figure 17.21 plaque

Connective tissue nevus – skin-colored

Uitto J, Santa Cruz DJ, Eisen AZ. Connective tissue nevi of the skin. J Am Acad Dermatol 1980; 3: 441–61

Mallory Chapter 17

27/1/05

2:54 pm

Page 317

Tumors, cysts and growths

Yeh SW, Magalhaes AM, Vasconcellos MR, et al. Zosteriform connective tissue nevus: a case report. Int J Dermatol 2003; 42: 720–2

Smooth muscle hamartoma

spectrum, with varying increases of epidermis, smooth muscle and hair appendages Diagnosis • Histology: numerous smooth muscle fibers oriented haphazardly within the dermis

Major points

Differential diagnosis

• Lesions are solitary, skin-colored or

• • • • •

hyperpigmented, infiltrative patches or plaques with accentuation of hair follicles (Figure 17.22)

317

Mastocytoma Connective tissue nevus Plexiform neurofibroma Congenital nevus Becker nevus

Treatment • None needed • Seldom requires excision Prognosis

• Lesion is benign and stable References D’Addario SF, Morgan M, Talley L, Smoller BR. h-Caldesmon as a specific marker of smooth muscle cell differentiation in some soft tissue tumors of the skin. J Cutan Pathol 2002; 29: 426–9 Grau-Massanes M, Raimer SS, Colome-Grimmer M, et al. Congenital smooth muscle hamartoma presenting as a linear atrophic plaque: case report and review of the literature. Pediatr Dermatol 1996; 13: 222–5 Figure 17.22 Smooth muscle hamartoma – with overlying hypertrichosis

• • • • • • •

•

Size usually 1–5 cm Hypertrichosis develops in two-thirds of lesions Often overlooked in infancy Rarely acquired in later life Common location in lumbosacral area (67%) No associated systemic abnormalities When firmly stroked, fasciculation of the skin causes the appearance of goosebumps or cobblestones (pseudo-Darier sign) from the stimulation of aberrant arrector pili muscles Slight male predominance

Pathogenesis

• Some authors think smooth muscle hamartoma and Becker nevus are hamartomas of a single

Gualandri L, Cambiaghi S, Ermacora E, et al. Multiple familial smooth muscle hamartomas. Pediatr Dermatol 2001; 18: 17–20 Holst VA, Junkins-Hopkins JM, Elenitsas R. Cutaneous smooth muscle neoplasms: clinical features, histologic findings, and treatment options. J Am Acad Dermatol 2002; 46: 477–90

INFILTRATIONS Juvenile xanthogranuloma Major points

• Most common non-Langerhans cell histiocytosis of childhood

• Sporadic in occurrence • No sexual or racial predilection • Usually appear in early infancy, between 1 and 4 years

Mallory Chapter 17

318

27/1/05

2:54 pm

Page 318

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

• One lesion (25% of cases) to hundreds of firm, • • • •

• •

•

reddish-yellow papules/nodules; size 1–10 mm (Figure 17.23) Continues to develop lesions over 2 years Telangiectasias on surface are common Occasional superficial erosions Types: 1. Disseminated micronodular juvenile xanthogranuloma (JXG): small papular lesions (<6 mm) are most common 2. Patients who have larger nodules tend to have fewer lesions 3. Solitary giant JXG (4–10 cm) 4. Clustered variant 5. Generalized lichenoid variant Typical locations: face, neck, scalp, but trunk and extremities can be involved Extracutaneous sites (very rare): eyes, lungs, pericardium, spleen, liver, testes, meninges 1. Rarely symptomatic except eye involvement 2. Eye involvement more common in disseminated micronodular variant. Usually unilateral and can be confused with retinoblastoma Numerous associations. Most are probably coincidental except JXG associated with neurofibromatosis and juvenile chronic myelogenous leukemia

Pathogenesis

• Cause unknown • May be a reactive histiocytic process rather than a neoplasia

• Blood lipid levels normal Diagnosis

• Histology: 1. Early lesions show accumulation of macrophages without lipid droplets 2. Well-developed lesions demonstrate granulomatous infiltrate with foamy lipidladen macrophages and Touton giant cells 3. No Birbeck granules on electron microscopy or S-100 protein present Differential diagnosis

• Mastocytoma • Spitz nevus • Benign cephalic histiocytosis

Figure 17.23 with red halo

• • • •

Juvenile xanthogranuloma – yellow papule

Langerhans cell histiocytosis Tuberous xanthoma Papular xanthoma (Figure 17.24) Multicentric reticulohistiocytosis

Treatment

• None is necessary except in ulcerated or large lesions where surgical intervention may be warranted Prognosis

• Excellent, with complete involution within 6 months in 30%

• Spontaneous involution in the remainder by 3–6 years

• Residual pigmentation or atrophy may occur References Chang MW. Update on juvenile xanthogranuloma: unusual cutaneous and systemic variants. Semin Cutan Med Surg 1999; 18: 195–205 Chang MW, Frieden IJ, Good W. The risk of intraocular juvenile xanthogranuloma: survey of current practices and assessment of risk. J Am Acad Dermatol 1996; 34: 445–9 Freyer DR, Kennedy R, Bostrom BC, et al. Juvenile xanthogranuloma: forms of systemic disease and their clinical implications. J Pediatr 1996; 129: 227–37 Piraccini BM, Fanti PA, Iorizzo M, Tosti A. Juvenile xanthogranuloma of the proximal nail fold. Pediatr Dermatol 2003; 20: 307–8 Zelger B, Burgdorf WH. The cutaneous ‘histiocytoses’. Adv Dermatol 2001; 17: 77–114

Mallory Chapter 17

27/1/05

2:54 pm

Page 319

Tumors, cysts and growths

319

• Solitary mastocytoma

Figure 17.24 Eruptive xanthomas – in a patient with elevated triglycerides and diabetes

• Zvulunov A, Barak Y, Metzker A. Juvenile xanthogranuloma, neurofibromatosis, and juvenile chronic myelogenous leukemia. Arch Dermatol 1995; 131: 904–8

Mastocytosis Major points

• Group of disorders characterized by the • • • • • •

infiltration of mast cells into the tissues, particularly the skin Usually begins in childhood and distinct from adult mastocytosis which tends to have a poor prognosis No sex predilection More common in Whites Sporadic occurrence; however, a familial form exists Onset between birth and 2 years in the majority of cases, with fewer presenting later in childhood Types of mastocytosis: solitary mastocytoma, urticaria pigmentosa, diffuse mastocytosis, telangiectasia macularis eruptiva perstans, systemic mastocytosis and mast cell leukemia 1. In pediatrics, the following account for >95% of cases of mastocytosis: solitary mastocytoma, urticaria pigmentosa and diffuse mastocytosis

•

1. Usually solitary, but occasionally several lesions 2. New lesions develop for several months after the first lesion appears, but tend not to continue to develop past 1 year 3. Most common on neck, arms and trunk, but can be anywhere 4. Typical oval to round 1–5 cm slightly brownish yellow nodule which feels thickened or rubbery with a pebbly surface 5. Darier sign: urtication can be demonstrated by stroking the lesion with a typical wheal and flare 6. History of bulla formation, generalized pruritus, flushing, colicky abdominal pain, diarrhea 7. Symptoms often resolve within 2 years, even when the lesion persists 8. Most plaques have flattened or disappeared by age 10 years Urticaria pigmentosa (UP) 1. Most common form of mastocytosis 2. Predominantly a disease of infants and young children 3. Symptoms begin between 3 and 9 months 4. Numerous 5 mm to 2 cm reddish brown to yellowish brown slightly elevated nodules, predominantly on the trunk, but can be anywhere; generally has fewer lesions (Figure 17.25) 5. Darier sign is positive in most lesions (Figure 17.26) 6. May be associated with dermatographism 7. New lesions may continue to develop for many years 8. Bullae may develop within the lesions 9. Pruritus is often the only symptom 10. History of bulla formation, generalized pruritus, flushing, colicky abdominal pain, diarrhea Diffuse cutaneous mastocytosis (DCM) 1. Rare in childhood 2. Neonates born with erythematous, thickened doughy feeling skin which appears lichenified 3. Severe widespread bullae may occur 4. Systemic involvement is prominent with flushing, diarrhea, vomiting, abdominal pain, respiratory distress, shock; can be fatal

Mallory Chapter 17

320

27/1/05

2:54 pm

Page 320

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

• Malignant mast cell disease

•

Figure 17.25 Mastocytosis – typical urticaria pigmentosa with numerous brown-yellow papules

1. Involvement of hematopoietic and reticuloendothelial systems 2. Occurs in 30% of adults with mastocytosis; very rare in children 3. One reported case of acute lymphoblastic leukemia associated with UP in a child Mastocytosis syndrome 1. Results from massive release of vasoactive mediators from mast cells 2. Can be caused by any mast cell degranulator (see Table 17.5) 3. Symptoms: flushing, tachycardia, diarrhea, projectile vomiting, abdominal pain, respiratory distress (wheezing), hypotension, severe pruritus and potential shock 4. Should be treated immediately

Pathogenesis

• Thought to represent a reactive hyperplasia of normal mast cells, rather than a neoplasia

Table 17.5

Figure 17.26 Mastocytosis – Darier sign can be elicited by rubbing a lesion of mastocytosis

• Telangiectasia eruptiva macularis perstans (TMEP)

•

1. Seen in <1% of cases of mastocytosis 2. Appears as tan to brown macules and patchy erythema with telangiectasias 3. Mainly in teens or adults Systemic mastocytosis 1. More common in widespread disease of UP and DCM 2. Skeletal system may show evidence of involvement on X-ray (e.g. lytic, cystic or sclerotic lesions), but in most cases of UP and DCM these lesions resolve 3. Involvement of other systems: lungs, liver, spleen, kidney and heart with hepatosplenomegaly, anemia, bone pain, failure to thrive

Mast cell degranulators

Drugs Aspirin Nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory drugs (e.g. ibuprofen, naproxen) Alcohol Caffeine Codeine Morphine Narcotics Polymyxin B (can be in topical antibiotics) Radiographic dyes Some anesthetics Physical stimuli Hot baths Exercise Rubbing the skin Cold stress (entering a cold lake or exiting a swimming pool) Hot spicy foods (also in some candies) Other Snake venom Shellfish Emotional stress Insect bites

Mallory Chapter 17

27/1/05

2:54 pm

Page 321

Tumors, cysts and growths

• Normal mast cells help protect the body by

• •

surveillance of environmental antigens 1. Found in skin, respiratory tract, GI tract, genitourinary tract and adjacent to neurovascular bundles 2. Receptors on mast cells have a high affinity for Fc portion of IgE antibody with subsequent degranulation Soluble mediators released from keratinocytes may cause accumulation of mast cells in the upper dermis Patients with mastocytosis do not have an increase in allergies

Diagnosis

• With a solitary mastocytoma or UP, clinical •

•

• •

appearance and typical Darier sign will usually make the diagnosis Histology: dense infiltration of normal-appearing mast cells in the upper dermis 1. Biopsy should not be performed on a recently stroked lesion, because the mast cells have degranulated and will not be seen with Giemsa stain Mast cells contain active mediators: histamine, heparin, tryptase, chymase, acid hydrolases, prostaglandin D2 (PGD2), leukotriene C4, platelet-activating factor and tumor necrosis factor-α Routinely, no laboratory tests are necessary. However, in some patients, the following tests may be monitored (depending upon symptoms): complete blood count, serum chemistry profiles, radiologic skeletal survey, bone marrow aspiration In diffuse disease, the following may be helpful in following the disease: serum or urinary histamine levels, urinary N-methylhistamine, N-methylimidazoleacetic acid (metabolites of histamine) Other markers of mast cell degranulation: PGD2, tryptase and heparin Skeletal survey or technetium bone scan may be indicated for bone pain

321

4. Congenital nevus

• Diffuse cutaneous mastocytosis

•

1. Histiocytosis 2. Bullous erythema multiforme 3. Staphylococcal scalded skin syndrome 4. Epidermolysis bullosa 5. Infiltrative leukemias TMEP 1. Telangiectasias 2. Urticaria 3. Ephiledes

Treatment

• No treatment of a solitary mastocytoma is usually needed

• Excision of a solitary mastocytoma is reserved for severely symptomatic lesions only

• Antihistamines may relieve pruritus (H1 blockers with or without H2 blockers)

• Oral disodium chromoglycate for GI symptoms • Topical application of high-potency steroid

• • • • •

• •

ointments under occlusion may be helpful in isolated lesions or TMEP, with reduction of symptoms Intralesional steroids may reduce symptoms in individual lesions Systemic steroids are not effective Topical antibiotics, if used on the lesions, should not contain polymyxin B; mupirocin is recommended Psoralen with ultraviolet A light can be used in children aged >11 years for extensive disease Symptoms of mastocytosis syndrome (e.g. hypotension, wheezing, shock) should be treated aggressively with intravenous fluids, antihistamines, epinephrine, corticosteroids and vasopressors Parents of children should always carry a list of potential drugs which can degranulate mast cells to avoid complications (Table 17.5) Some children with extensive disease would benefit from an identification bracelet and a syringe of epinephrine kept nearby (e.g. EpiPen®)

Differential diagnosis

Prognosis

• Solitary mastocytoma/urticaria pigmentosa

• Solitary mastocytoma resolves with few sequelae;

1. Juvenile xanthogranuloma 2. Spitz nevus 3. Nodular scabies

bullae rarely scar

• Urticaria pigmentosa in childhood spontaneously resolves. A small number of patients with more

Mallory Chapter 17

322

•

• •

27/1/05

2:54 pm

Page 322

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

systemic manifestations will continue into adulthood, and have a more guarded prognosis Diffuse cutaneous mastocytosis with early onset of blisters has a poor prognosis. Without blisters, the prognosis is better. Eventually, the skin improves in symptoms and texture Malignant mast cell disease with infiltration of bone marrow and other organs has a very poor prognosis Severe symptoms should be treated in the emergency room

References Almahroos M, Kurban AK. Management of mastocytosis. Clin Dermatol 2003; 21: 274–7

Figure 17.27 on an elbow

Caken H, Ciftci A, Kisaarslan AF, et al. A child with systemic mastocytosis who had a facial appearance resembling an aged man. Pediatr Dermatol 2002; 19: 184–5

• May be tender and ulcerate, discharging gritty

Golkar L, Bernhard JD. Mastocytosis. Lancet 1997; 349: 1379–85

• Distribution can be anywhere, but most common

Heide R, Tank B, Oranje AP. Mastocytosis in childhood. Pediatr Dermatol 2002; 19: 375–81

• With extensive calcinosis, complications of

Longley J, Duffy TP, Kohn S. The mast cell and mast cell disease. J Am Acad Dermatol 1995; 32: 545–61

material on the extremities, face and scrotum

•

Murphy M, Walsh D, Drumm B, Watson R. Bullous mastocytosis: a fatal outcome. Pediatr Dermatol 1999; 16: 452–5 Shah PY, Sharma V, Worobec AS, et al. Congenital bullous mastocytosis with myeloproliferative disorder and c-kit mutation. J Am Acad Dermatol 1998; 39: 119–21 Tharp MD. Understanding mast cells and mastocytosis. J Invest Dermatol 1997; 108: 698–9 Tharp MD, Chan IJ. Mastocytosis. Adv Dermatol 2003; 19: 207–36 Valent P, Akin C, Sperr WR, et al. Diagnosis and treatment of systemic mastocytosis: state of the art. Br J Haematol 2003; 122: 695–717 Valent P, Akin C, Sperr WR, et al. Mast cell proliferative disorders: current view on variants recognized by the World Health Organization. Hematol Oncol Clin North Am 2003; 17: 1227–41

Calcinosis cutis Major points

• Presents with firm, stony 1–30-mm papules or plaques which may have an erythematous border (Figure 17.27)

Calcinosis cutis – rock-hard, white papules

•

contractures, pain and suppuration with or without superinfection may occur Dystrophic calcinosis cutis 1. Most common form of calcinosis cutis 2. Caused by deposition of calcium salts within previously damaged tissues with no metabolic abnormalities 3. Localized forms arise in acne scars, ulcers, foreign body granulomas, subcutaneous fat necrosis of the newborn, neonatal heel sticks, cysts, lipomas and pilomatrixomas 4. Widespread calcification is seen in systemic sclerosis, CREST syndrome, dermatomyositis, pseudoxanthoma elasticum, systemic lupus erythematosus and Ehlers–Danlos syndrome 5. Iatrogenic causes: extravasation of intravenous calcium salts, electroencephalogram leads and electromyogram leads Idiopathic calcinosis cutis 1. No evidence of local tissue injury or systemic metabolic disorder 2. Localized a. Idiopathic calcinosis circumscripta b. Solitary congenital calcified nodule of the ear c. Idiopathic calcinosis of the scrotum or vulva

Mallory Chapter 17

27/1/05

2:54 pm

Page 323

Tumors, cysts and growths

•

3. Generalized a. Milia-like idiopathic calcinosis cutis, seen in Down syndrome Metastatic calcinosis cutis 1. Occurs with abnormal metabolism of calcium and/or phosphorous: chronic renal failure, vitamin D intoxication, sarcoidosis, parathyroid neoplasms, tumors 2. Calcinosis is rarely seen in the skin, but more commonly in kidney, lung, gastric mucosa, eyes and arteries

Pathogenesis

• Precipitation or deposition of hydroxyapatite • •

crystals of calcium phosphate within cutaneous tissues Etiology not understood, but unidentified local factors may promote calcification within tissues Calcium deposits tend to occur in areas of damaged tissue or elastic fibers

323

Evans MJ, Blessing K, Gray ES. Subepidermal calcified nodule in children: a clinicopathologic study of 21 cases. Pediatr Dermatol 1995; 12: 307–10 Kotsuji T, Imakado S, Iwasaki N, et al. Milia-like idiopathic calcinosis cutis in a patient with translocation Down syndrome. J Am Acad Dermatol 2001; 45: 152–3 Lai CH, Farah R, Mallory SB. Congenital calcinosis cutis of the ear. J Am Acad Dermatol 2003; 49: 122–4 Ostrov BE, Goldsmith DP, Eichenfield AH, Athreya BH. Hypercalcemia during the resolution of calcinosis universalis in juvenile dermatomyositis. J Rheumatol 1991; 18: 1730–4 Rodriguez-Cano L, Garcia-Patos V, Creus M, et al. Childhood calcinosis cutis. Pediatr Dermatol 1996; 13: 114–17 Touart DM, Sau P. Cutaneous deposition diseases. Part II. J Am Acad Dermatol 1998; 39: 527–44 Walsh JS, Fairley JA. Calcifying disorders of the skin. J Am Acad Dermatol 1995; 33: 693–706

Osteoma cutis

Diagnosis

Major points

• Radiographs reveal radio-opaque densities in areas

• Present as multiple or solitary, hard, raised 1–5-cm

• •

of calcification Laboratory abnormalities are found only in metastatic form Histology: calcium deposits in the dermis or subcutaneous tissues with or without a foreign body reaction

Differential diagnosis

• Osteoma cutis • Myositis ossificans • Pilomatrixoma Treatment

• Excision of isolated lesions may be indicated • Correcting a metabolic disorder usually does not resolve the calcinosis, but may stop progression Prognosis

• Lesions rarely resolve spontaneously • Superficial lesions may self-extrude through the skin References Ahn SK, Kim KT, Lee SH, et al. The efficacy of treatment with triamcinolone acetonide in calcinosis cutis following extravasation of calcium gluconate: a preliminary study. Pediatr Dermatol 1997; 14: 103–9

• • • •

nodules with surrounding normal or erythematous skin Lesions commonly seen on the face Usually asymptomatic; may be painful or tender Superficial lesions may become inflamed and extrude bony particles Primary ossification: 1. Albright hereditary osteodystrophy (AHO) a. Includes: pseudohypoparathyroidism and pseudopseudohypoparathyroidism b. Heterogeneous disorder with multiple areas of subcutaneous ossification which are present at birth or may occur later c. Lesions may occur anywhere and range in size from pinpoint to 5 cm d. Other associated abnormalities: short stature, round facies, multiple skeletal abnormalities (curvature of the radius and shortened metacarpals and metatarsals), short broad nails, basal ganglia calcification, hypothyroidism, mental retardatiion, defective teeth and cataracts e. Dimpling sign seen over knuckles caused by the shortened metacarpals f. Inherited disorder: autosomal dominant or X-linked dominant

Mallory Chapter 17

324

•

27/1/05

2:54 pm

Page 324

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

g. Pseudohypoparathyroidism is characterized by a low serum calcium, hyperphosphatemia, and no response to parathyroid hormone (PTH), no renal diseases or other cause h. Pseudopseudohypoparathyoidism has normal calcium and phosphorus levels and no response to PTH i. Progression to pseudohypoparathyroidism with hypocalcemia and seizures may occur, and patients need to be monitored closely 2. Other forms of primary osteoma cutis: a. Widespread osteomas present since birth or early life without AHO b. Single, large, plaque-like osteomas present since birth on the scalp or extremities c. Single, small osteomas arising in later life with or without epidermal elimination d. Multiple miliary osteomas of the face: multiple 0.1–0.4-cm bluish white papules on the face. Most common in women with longstanding acne who have taken tetracycline or minocycline Secondary ossification (also called metaplastic osteoma cutis) 1. Associated with neoplasms, cysts, inflammatory processes (e.g. dermatomyositis, scleroderma), scarring, metabolic conditions, trauma and pre-existing cutaneous mineralization

Pathogenesis

• AHO: gene locus: 20q13.2

•

1. Gene: GNAS1; partial deficiency of the protein which couples hormone receptors to stimulate adenylate cyclase, which causes multiple hormone resistance Secondary forms: hypothesized to follow inflammatory process or other insult

Diagnosis

• Histology: proliferation of bony tissue with spicules of bone within the dermis and subcutaneous tissue, calcification, lamellae, lacunae, osteoblasts, osteocytes and rarely bone marrow formation Differential diagnosis

• Calcinosis cutis • Subungual exostosis of the finger or toe (Figure 17.28)

Figure 17.28 Exostosis – bony nodule on the tip of the toe requiring surgical excision

• Calcifying epithelioma • Pilomatrixoma Treatment

• Surgical excision of larger or painful lesions • Isotretinoin may aggravate osteoma formation • Close follow-up of patients with AHO is important, with routine checking of calcium, phosphorous and thyroid hormone Prognosis

• Persists indefinitely, but occasionally extrudes spontaneously References Altman JF, Nehal KS, Busam KJ, Halpern AC. Treatment of primary miliary osteoma cutis with incision, curettage, and primary closure. J Am Acad Dermatol 2001; 44: 96–9 Bergonse FN, Nico MM, Kavamura MI, Sotto MN. Miliary osteoma of the face: a report of 4 cases and review of the literature. Cutis 2002; 69: 383–6 Chan I, Hamada T, Hardman C, et al. Progressive osseous heteroplasia resulting from a new mutation in the GNAS1 gene. Clin Exp Dermatol 2004; 29: 77–80 Izraeli S, Metzker A, Horev G, et al. Albright hereditary osteodystrophy with hypothyroidism, normocalcemia, and normal Gs protein activity: a family presenting with congenital osteoma cutis. Am J Med Genet 1992; 43: 764–7 Miller ES, Esterly NB, Fairley JA. Progressive osseous heteroplasia. Arch Dermatol 1996; 132: 787–91 Moritz DL, Elewski B. Pigmented postacne osteoma cutis in a patient treated with minocycline: report and review of the literature. J Am Acad Dermatol 1991; 24: 851–3

Mallory Chapter 17

27/1/05

2:54 pm

Page 325

Tumors, cysts and growths

Prendiville JS, Lucky W, Mallory SB, et al. Osteoma cutis as a presenting sign of pseudohypoparathyroidism. Pediatr Dermatol 1992; 9: 11–18

325

Diagnosis

• Histology: flattened sebaceous gland lobules and folded cyst walls within the cyst Differential diagnosis

GROWTHS

See Table 17.2

Steatocystoma multiplex

Treatment

Major points

• Because lesions are usually numerous, surgical

• Uncommon cause of cysts in childhood • Appears as asymptomatic, multiple, firm,

• Inflamed lesions can be excised or treated with

skin-colored or yellowish papules several millimeters to 1–3 cm in size (Figure 17.29)

excision is difficult incision and drainage Prognosis

• Lesions persist indefinitely References Ahn SK, Swang SM, Lee SH, Lee WS. Steatocystoma multiplex localized only in the face. Int J Dermatol 1997; 36: 372 Cho S, Chang SE, Choi JH, et al. Clinical and histologic features of 64 cases of steatocystoma multiplex. J Dermatology 2002; 29: 152–6 Kaur T, Kanwar AJ. Steatocystoma multiplex in four successive generations. J Dermatol 2003; 30: 559–61 Kaya TI, Ikizoglu G, Kokturk A, Tursen U. A simple surgical technique for the treatment of steatocystoma multiplex. Int J Dermatol 2001; 40: 785–8 Ohtake N, Kubota Y, Takayama O, et al. Relationship between steatocystoma multiplex and eruptive vellus hair cysts. J Am Acad Dermatol 1992; 26: 876–8 Sato K, Shibuya K, Taguchi H, et al. Aspiration therapy in steatocystoma multiplex. Arch Dermatol 1993; 129: 35–7 Figure 17.29 Steatocystoma multiplex – numerous yellowish papules on the neck

Syringomas

• When punctured, a characteristic oily or creamy • • • • •

fluid is discharged Common areas are axillae, chest and arms, but may appear anywhere Usually begins in adolescence or early adulthood Male/female ratio = 1 Autosomal dominant or sporadic Can be associated with pachyonychia congenita type 2

Pathogenesis

• Etiology unknown

Major points

• Appear at puberty as 1–2-mm skin-colored to • • •

yellowish papules (Figure 17.30) Location: most common around eyes, lids, upper cheeks, axillae and abdomen Female/male ratio >1 May be autosomal dominant

Pathogenesis

• Thought to be a benign hyperplasia of the cells of the eccrine sweat ducts

Mallory Chapter 17

326

27/1/05

2:54 pm

Page 326

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Pruzan DL, Esterly NB, Prose NS. Eruptive syringoma. Arch Dermatol 1989; 125: 1119–20

Trichoepithelioma Major points

• Presents in late childhood and adolescence • Appears as solitary or numerous 2–8-mm • • •

Figure 17.30 Syringomas – multiple, familial skin-colored papules around the eyes, a typical location

•

skin-colored papules on the face, usually around the nose and mid-face (Figure 17.31) Fine telangiectasias on the surface May be seen on other parts of the body, especially the scalp, neck and upper trunk Multiple lesions are seen in Spiegler-Brooke syndrome (OMIM no. 605041), an autosomal dominant disorder; gene map locus 16q12-q13; gene CYLD Solitary lesions are not inherited

Pathogenesis

• Benign tumor with follicular germinative Diagnosis

• Histology: numerous small eccrine ducts in the dermis with surrounding fibrosis; some ducts bulge out to form small comma-like excrescences (tadpole appearance)

differentiation Diagnosis

• Histology: multiple horn cysts and basophilic tumor islands in mid-dermis; can be difficult to distinguish from basal cell carcinoma

Differential diagnosis See Table 17.2 Treatment

• Difficult to treat • Electrocautery somewhat helpful Prognosis

• Lesions persist and may become numerous References Goyal S, Martins CR. Multiple syringomas on the abdomen, thighs, and groin. Cutis 2000; 66: 259–62 Guitart J, Rosenbaum MM, Requena L. ‘Eruptive syringoma’: a misnomer for a reactive eccrine gland ductal proliferation? J Cutan Pathol 2003; 30: 202–5 Karma P, Benedetto AV. Intralesional electrodesiccation of syringomas. Dermatol Surg 1997; 23: 921–4 Nguyen DB, Patterson JW, Wilson BB. Syringoma of the moustache area. J Am Acad Dermatol 2003; 49: 337–9

Figure 17.31 Trichoepithelioma – multiple, skin-colored, asymptomatic, slow-growing papules on the face

Mallory Chapter 17

27/1/05

2:54 pm

Page 327

Tumors, cysts and growths

Differential diagnosis

• • • • •

Basal cell carcinoma Pilomatricoma Nevocellular nevus Syringoma Acne vulgaris

• If left untreated, basal cell carcinoma is slow growing and may ulcerate

• Rare in childhood and should suggest a syndrome: basal cell nevus syndrome (see Chapter 20), xeroderma pigmentosum (see Chapter 12), or Bazex syndrome

Treatment

Pathogenesis

• Surgical excision; recurrence common unless

• Malignant growth arising from basal cells in

completely removed Prognosis

•

• Gradually increase in number and size, then •

stabilize Lesions do not resolve spontaneously

References Centurion SA, Schwartz RA, Lambert WC. Trichoepithelioma papulosum multiplex. J Dermatol 2000; 27: 137–43 Johnson SC, Bennett RG. Occurrence of basal cell carcinoma among multiple trichoepitheliomas. J Am Acad Dermatol 1993; 28: 322–6 Matt D, Xin H, Vortmeyer AO, et al. Sporadic trichoepithelioma demonstrates deletions at 9q22.3. Arch Dermatol 2000; 136: 657–60 Puig L, Nadal C, Fernandez-Figueras MT, et al. BrookeSpiegler syndrome variant: segregation of tumor types with mixed differentiation in two generations. Am J Dermatopathol 1998; 20: 56–60 Requena L, Farina MC, Robledo M, et al. Multiple hereditary infundibulocystic basal cell carcinomas: a genodermatosis different from nevoid basal cell carcinoma syndrome. Arch Dermatol 1999; 135: 1227–35 Shaffelburg M, Miller R. Treatment of multiple trichoepithelioma with electrosurgery. Dermatol Surg 1998; 24: 1154–6

327

patient with chronic sun exposure and genetic susceptibility For basal cell nevus syndrome: gene locus/gene: 9q22/PTCH1 gene

Diagnosis

• Biopsy necessary • Histology: solid masses of basal cells with a large nucleus and little cytoplasm Differential diagnosis

• • • • • •

Pilomatricoma Nevocellular nevus Trichoepithelioma Syringoma Acne vulgaris Tuberous sclerosis (angiofibromas)

Treatment

• Excision • Radiation should be avoided in childhood • Prophylactic avoidance of sun, use of sunscreens Prognosis

• Chronic slow progression of individual lesions • Rarely metastasize, but may be disfiguring if orbit or nasal area invaded References

TUMORS/MALIGNANCIES

Comstock J, Hansen RC, Korc A. Basal cell carcinoma in a 12-year-old boy. Pediatrics 1990; 86: 460–2

Basal cell carcinoma

Drake LA, Ceilley RI, Comelison RL, et al. (Committee on Guidelines of Care) Guidelines of care for basal cell carcinoma. J Am Acad Dermaol 1992; 26: 117–20

Major points

• Appear on the face or upper body as a •

skin-colored papule with telangiectasias on the surface Seen in light-skinned individuals (skin types 1–3) with increased sun exposure

Gaspari AA, Sauder DN. Immunotherapy of basal cell carcinoma: evolving approaches. Dermatol Surg 2003; 29: 1027–34 Ledwig PA, Paller AS. Congenital basal cell carcinoma. Arch Dermatol 1991; 127: 1066–7

Mallory Chapter 17

328

27/1/05

2:54 pm

Page 328

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Orozco-Covarrubias M, Tamayo-Sanchez L, DuranMcKinster C, et al. Malignant cutaneous tumors in children: twenty years of experience at a large pediatric hospital. J Am Acad Dermatol 1994; 30: 243–9 Strayer SM, Reynolds PL. Diagnosing skin malignancy: assessment of predictive clinical criteria and risk factors. J Fam Pract 2003; 52: 210–18 Tsao H. Update on familial cancer syndromes and the skin. J Am Acad Dermatol 2000; 42: 939–69

•

Wong CS, Strange RC, Lear JT. Basal cell carcinoma. Br Med J 2003; 327: 794–8

•

Leukemia cutis Major points

• Primary (specific) lesions are caused by direct •

•

invasion of leukemic cells; appear as multiple, brownred or violaceous papules and nodules (Figure 17.32) Acute lymphocytic leukemia (ALL) is the most common form of childhood leukemia 1. Peak incidence is 4 years of age 2. Petechiae are seen in 50% of cases at the time of presentation Acute nonlymphocytic leukemia has myelocytic or monocytic differentiation 1. Leukemia cutis is more common in acute monoblastic leukemia and congenital leukemias (50%) 2. Congenital leukemia often presents with ‘blueberry muffin lesions’ which show on histology dermal erythropoiesis

•

3. Other presentations: a. Gingival hypertrophy b. Soft tissue mass, most common in the deep soft tissues of the head and neck 4. More common in children with Fanconi anemia, Down syndrome, Bloom syndrome, ataxia telangiectasia, Wiscott–Aldrich syndrome and neurofibromatosis Chronic lymphocytic leukemia is rare in childhood Chronic nonlymphocytic leukemia 1. Accounts for <5% of leukemias in childhood 2. Adult form, seen in teenagers with Philadelphia chromosome 3. Juvenile form is seen most commonly in neurofibromatosis Nonspecific or secondary lesions which may suggest the diagnosis: 1. Erythematous plaques or nodules, purpura, petechiae, ecchymoses, erythema nodosum, pyoderma gangrenosum, diffuse erythroderma, Sweet syndrome

Pathogenesis • Uncontrolled replication of immature bone marrow cells Diagnosis • Histology of a lesion of primary leukemia cutis reveals a diffuse infiltrate of leukemic cells around blood vessels and in between collagen bundles Differential diagnosis

• Congenital lesions: congenital infections • • •

(cytomegalovirus toxoplasmosis, other viral infections) Tumors Granuloma annulare Cysts

Treatment • Refer to pediatric oncologist • Treatment of leukemia cures skin manifestations Prognosis • Prognosis depends upon type of leukemia Figure 17.32 Leukemia cutis – large, firm, quickly growing nodule on the scalp of an infant who had acute lymphocytic leukemia

References Baselga E, Drolet BA, Esterly NB. Purpura in infants and children. J Am Acad Dermatol 1997; 37: 673–705

Mallory Chapter 17

27/1/05

2:54 pm

Page 329

Tumors, cysts and growths

Buescher L, Anderson PC. Circinate plaques heralding juvenile chronic myelogenous leukemia. Pediatr Dermatol 1990; 7: 122–5

•

Chang HY, Wong KM, Bosenberg M, et al. Myelogenous leukemia cutis resembling stasis dermatitis. J Am Acad Dermatol 2003; 49: 128–9 Grundy RG, Martinez A, Kempski H, et al. Spontaneous remission of congenital leukemia: a case for conservative treatment. J Pediatr Hematol Oncol 2000; 22: 252–5 Maher-Wiese VL, Wenner NP, Grant-Kels JM. Metastatic cutaneous lesions in children and adolescents with a case report of metastatic neuroblastoma. J Am Acad Dermatol 1992; 26: 620–8 Millot F, Robert A, Bertrand Y, et al. Cutaneous involvement in children with acute lymphoblastic leukemia or lymphoblastic lymphoma. Pediatrics 1997; 100: 60–4 Pui C-H. Childhood leukemias. N Engl J Med 1995; 332: 1618–30

Lymphoma Major points

• Lymphomas are the third most common • • •

•

malignancy in childhood, after leukemia and CNS tumors Presents as an infiltrative plaque, nodule or asymptomatic scaly dermatitis Most common in adults, but can be seen in children Cutaneous T-cell lymphoma (CTCL) (See Chapter 3) 1. Presents with a scaly eczematous dermatitis (patch or plaque stage), poikiloderma vasculare atrophicans, or tumor nodules 2. Indolent T-helper cell lymphoma which affects the skin primarily with late spread to lymph nodes, bone marrow and viscera 3. Sézary syndrome manifests as a diffuse erythroderma with circulating abnormal T cells Hodgkin lymphoma: 1. Occurs in adolescence; rarely before age 5 years 2. Usual presentation is painless lymphadenopathy in the neck 3. Male/female ratio >1 4. Skin manifestations rare (e.g. papules, tumors, ulcerated nodules), but seen in advanced disease which has failed aggressive chemotherapy and radiation

329

5. Secondary signs: pruritus, acquired ichthyosis and herpes zoster B-cell lymphomas: 1. Painless enlarging lymphadenoathy most common 2. Rapidly growing and poorly differentiated 3. Cutaneous lesions: papules or nodules which may ulcerate and form arcuate lesions 4. Common location: scalp

Pathogenesis

• Anaplasia of B or T cells Diagnosis

• Biopsy of tissue confirms and differentiates the diagnosis Differential diagnosis

• • • • •

Pseudolymphoma Persistent insect bite reaction Granuloma annulare Lymphomatoid papulosis Follicular mucinosis

Treatment

• Depends upon type of lymphoma • CTCL is treated with psoralen plus ultraviolet light A (PUVA) or topical nitrogen mustard or, for a single plaque, ultrapotent steroids Prognosis

• Depends upon the type of lymphoma • CTCL has a good prognosis, but requires life-long observation and therapy References Burg G, Kempf W, Haeffner AC, et al. Cutaneous lymphomas. Curr Prob Dermatol 1997; 9: 137–204 Jones D, Duvic M. The current state and future of clonality studies in mycosis fungoides. J Invest Dermatol 2003; 121: ix–x Maher-Wiese VL, Wenner NP, Grant-Kels JM. Metastatic cutaneous lesions in children and adolescents with a case report of metastatic neuroblastoma. J Am Acad Dermatol 1992; 26: 620–8 Orozco-Covarrubias ML, Tamayo-Sanchez L, DuranMcKinster C, et al. Malignant cutaneous tumors in children. J Am Acad Dermatol 1994; 30: 243–9

Mallory Chapter 17

330

27/1/05

2:54 pm

Page 330

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Querfeld C, Rosen ST, Kuzel TM, Guitart J. Cutaneous Tcell lymphomas: a review with emphasis on new treatment approaches. Semin Cutan Med Surg 2003; 22: 150–61 Sandlund JT, Downing JR, Crist WM. Non-Hodgkin’s lymphoma in childhood. N Engl J Med 1996; 334: 1238–48 Shani-Adir A, Lucky AW, Prendiville J, et al. Subcutaneous panniculitic T-cell lymphoma in children: response to combination therapy with cyclosporine and chemotherapy. J Am Acad Dermatol 2004; 50 (2 Suppl): S18–22 Thorley-Lawson DA, Gross A. Persistence of the Epstein–Barr virus and the origins of associated lymphomas. N Engl J Med 2004; 350: 1328–37 Zackheim HS, Vonderheid EC, Ramsay DL, et al. Relative frequency of various forms of primary cutaneous lymphomas. J Am Acad Dermatol 2000; 43: 793–6

Figure 17.33 Langerhans cell histiocytosis – keratotic hemorrhagic papules resembling seborrheic dermatitis

e. f. g. h. i.

Histiocytosis Major points

• Histiocytoses includes a group of benign and fatal •

•

disorders which may be manifested in a variety of ways Langerhans cell histiocytosis (LCH) was traditionally separated into the following groups, but these are now included under the heading of LCH: 1. Eosinophilic granuloma (localized bony lesions) 2. Hand–Schuller–Christian disease (multiple organ involvement with skull defects, diabetes insipidus and exophthalmos) 3. Letterer–Siwe disease (visceral lesions in lungs, lymph nodes, liver, spleen, bone marrow and skin) Letterer–Siwe disease is most common 1. Peak incidence occurs between 1 and 4 years, but can occur at any age 2. Discrete yellow-brown scaly papules which coalesce in the seborrheic areas (e.g. diaper area, postauricular area, scalp, etc.) and may show petechiae (Figure 17.33) 3. Other involvement a. Bone lesions: lytic lesions (typical in skull), proptosis, mastoid involvement and others b. Lymph nodes c. Bone marrow (pancytopenia) d. Liver enlargement

•

Spleen enlargement Lungs GI tract Thymic enlargement Endocrine glands (diabetes insipidus, anterior pituitary involvement with growth hormone deficiency) j. CNS involvement rare (intracranial hypertension, seizures) Other forms of histiocytosis: 1. Self-healing reticulohistiocytosis presents with papules and nodules that frequently ulcerate at birth (Figure 17.34) 2. Benign cephalic histiocytosis: 2–5-mm yellowred papules on the face and neck in a child <1 year of age (non-Langerhans cell histiocytosis)

Figure 17.34 Self-healing histiocytosis – isolated congenital papule

Mallory Chapter 17

27/1/05

2:54 pm

Page 331

Tumors, cysts and growths

Pathogenesis

• Clonal neoplastic disorder of Langerhans cells (monocyte/macrophage which contains Birbeck granules; expresses CD1 glycoprotein) Diagnosis

• Biopsy necessary for confirmation of diagnosis • Histology: histiocytes with clear or eosinophilic

•

cytoplasm and indented nuclei, macrophages, lymphocytes and other cells; stains positive for CD1a and S100 protein Electron microscopy demonstrates Birbeck granules in LCH

Differential diagnosis

• • • • • •

Seborrhea Eczema Scabies Irritant diaper dermatitis Mastocytosis Juvenile xanthogranuloma

Shani-Adir A, Chou P, Morgan E, Mancini AJ. A child with both Langerhans and non-Langerhans cell histiocytosis. Pediatr Dermatol 2002; 19: 419–22 Snow JL, Su WPD. Histiocytic disease. J Am Acad Dermatol 1995; 33: 111–16 Willman CL, Busque L, Griffith BB, et al. Langerhans’-cell histiocytosis (histiocytosis X) – a clonal proliferative disease. N Engl J Med 1994; 331: 154–60

Rhabdomyosarcoma Major points

• Most common malignant soft-tissue tumor in childhood

• Causes 5% of childhood solid malignancies • Peak ages: 1–5 years and adolescence • Predilection for the head and neck region, •

Treatment

•

• Refer to pediatric hematologist/oncologist • Therapy depends upon the extent of involvement

•

of disease and location of infiltrates

• In milder cases, observation may be indicated • For extensive disease, chemotherapy (e.g. corticosteroids, vinblastine or etoposide)

• Skin lesions may respond to topical steroids, topical nitrogen mustard or PUVA

patients have poorer prognosis), extent of disease and rate of disease progression

genitourinary tract, the retroperitoneum and soft tissues of the extremities Local signs of destruction may occur with progression of the lesion May spread by local extension or lymphatic/hematogenous metastases Sporadic inheritance

Pathogenesis

• Malignant tumor of striated muscles Diagnosis

• Histology: composed of small round cells, spindle

Prognosis

• Depends upon age of patient at diagnosis (younger

•

or polygonal cells or large pleomorphic cells; variants: embryonal (including botryoid variant), alveolar, pleomorphic Immunoperoxidase stains positive for vimentin, desmin, myoglobin and muscle actin

References

Differential diagnosis

Bhatia S, Nesbit ME, Egeler RM, et al. Epidemiologic study of Langerhans cell histiocytosis in children. J Pediatr 1997; 130: 774–84

• • • • •

Egeler RM, D’Angio GJ. Langerhans cell histiocytosis. J Pediatr 1995; 127: 1–11 Kilborn TN, Teh J, Goodman TR. Paediatric manifestations of Langerhans cell histiocytosis: a review of the clinical and radiological findings. Clin Radiol 2003; 58: 269–78 Seward JL, Malone JC, Callen JP. Generalized eruptive histiocytosis. J Am Acad Dermatol 2004; 50: 116–20

331

Epidermal cyst Lymphangioma Leukemia cutis Other tumors Infectious (fasciitis)

Treatment

• Refer to hematologist/oncologist • Radiation and combination chemotherapy followed by surgical excision

Mallory Chapter 17

332

27/1/05

2:54 pm

Page 332

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Prognosis

Pathogenesis

•

• Tumor of primitive neural crest cells of the

Determined by extent and location of disease

sympathetic nervous system in the adrenal medulla, sympathetic side chain, visceral ganglia, paraganglia, bladder, or genitalia. Tumors can be seen anywhere these cells migrate

References Brecher AR, Reyes-Mugica M, Kamino H, Chang MW. Congenital primary cutaneous rhabdomyosarcoma in a neonate. Pediatr Dermatol 2003; 20: 335–8 Pisick E, Skarin AT, Salgia R. Recent advances in the molecular biology, diagnosis and novel therapies for various small blue cell tumors. Anticancer Res 2003; 23: 3379–96 Herzog CE, Stewart JM, Blakely ML. Pediatric soft tissue sarcomas. Surg Oncol Clin North Am 2003; 12: 419–47 Sebire NJ, Malone M. Myogenin and MyoD1 expression in paediatric rhabdomyosarcomas. J Clin Pathol 2003; 56: 412–16

Neuroblastoma Major points

• Second most common solid tumor malignancy in • • • •

• • • • • •

childhood Usually presents before age 5 years with an enlarging mass in the upper abdomen or retroperitoneal space Cutaneous lesions are uncommon outside the neonatal period Metastatic disease occurs early and frequently Cutaneous metastases appear as multiple 2 mm to 2 cm bluish papules or nodules scattered over the body (‘blueberry muffin’ appearance) which tend to blanch centrally and develop an erythematous halo 2–3 minutes after stroking, which lasts about 1 hour, resulting from local tumor catecholamine release causing vasoconstriction Metastatic cutaneous lesions common on the trunk and extremities, but can be anywhere on the body Bilateral periorbital ecchymoses, described as ‘raccoon eyes’ (from orbital metastases) Heterochromia irides Nonspecific signs and symptoms include: fever, weight loss, flushing, sweating, joint pains and others Occurrence is usually sporadic but may be autosomal dominant Male/female ratio = 1

Diagnosis

• Histology: dermal or subcutaneous infiltrate of • •

small blue cells with large nuclei, mitoses, hemorrhage Staging important to determine treatment and prognosis Laboratory findings: elevated levels of urinary catecholamines or their metabolites (vanillylmandelic acid and homovanillic acid)

Differential diagnosis

• • • • • • •

Leukemia cutis Sarcomas Lymphoma Child abuse (‘raccoon eyes’) Congenital infections (TORCH and other ‘blueberry-muffin’ syndromes) Vascular tumors Histiocytosis

Treatment

• Refer to pediatric oncologist and pediatric surgeon Prognosis

• Staging, classification and prognosis determined by tumor burden, nodal involvement and distant metastases 1. Stages I and II have 60–80% 2-year survival rate 2. Stages III and IV have 7–13% 2-year survival rate 3. Stage IV-S has 60–90% survival rate References Dominey AM, Hawkins H, Levy ML. Congenital cutaneous and subcutaneous nodules. Pediatr Dermatol 1992; 9: 301–3 Lee KL, Ma JF, Shortliffe LD. Neuroblastoma: management, recurrence, and follow-up. Urol Clin North Am 2003; 30: 881–90 Maher-Wiese VL, Wenner NP, Grant-Kels JM. Metastatic cutaneous lesions in children and adolescents with a case report of metastatic neuroblastoma. J Am Acad Dermatol 1992; 26: 620–8

Mallory Chapter 17

27/1/05

2:54 pm

Page 333

Tumors, cysts and growths

Matthay KK. Neuroblastoma: a clinical challenge and biologic puzzle. Cancer J Clin 1995; 45: 179–92 Moore SW, Satge D, Sasco AJ, et al. The epidemiology of neonatal tumours. Report of an international working group. Pediatr Surg Int 2003; 19: 509–19

333

Weinstein JL, Katzenstein HM, Cohn SL. Advances in the diagnosis and treatment of neuroblastoma. Oncologist 2003; 8: 278–92

Mallory Chapter 17

27/1/05

2:54 pm

Page 334

Mallory Chapter 18

27/1/05

2:55 pm

Page 335

18 HAIR DISORDERS

Major points • Alopecia: general term for sparseness of hair • Loss of 25–50% of scalp hair is necessary for diffuse loss to be clinically noticeable in most people • Scalp has ~100 000–150 000 hairs • Anagen and telogen hairs randomly distributed • Growth rate 0.3–0.4 mm/day (1 cm/month) a. Depends upon site (vertex faster than temples) • Normal hair growth is cyclical 1. Anagen phase a. Active growth phase b. Lasts ~2–6 years c. 80–90% of scalp hairs d. Shiny, white sheath near proximal end e. Pigmented bulb 2. Catagen phase a. Transitional phase b. 5% of scalp hairs c. Lasts few days to 2 weeks 3. Telogen phase a. Resting phase b. Lasts ~100 days (2–4 months) c. 10–15% of scalp hairs d. Club-shaped root e. Depigmented terminal bulbs Diagnosis • Classification of non-scarring alopecia (See Table 18.1) • Evaluation of hair loss in childhood (See Table 18.2) References Ahmad W, Panteleyev A, Christiano AM. Molecular basis of congenital atrichia in humans and mice. Cutis 1999; 64: 269–76

Messenger AG. The control of hair growth: an overview. J Invest Dermatol 1993; 101: 4S–9S Miller J, Djabali K, Chen T, et al. Atrichia caused by mutations in the vitamin D receptor gene is a phenocopy of generalized atrichia caused by mutations in the hairless gene. J Invest Dermatol 2001; 117: 612–17 Milner Y, Sudnik J, Filippi M, et al. Exogen, shedding phase of the hair growth cycle: characterization of a mouse model. J Invest Dermatol 2002; 119: 639–44 Paus R, Christoph T, Muller-Rover S. Immunology of the hair follicle: a short journey into terra incognita. Invest Dermatol Symp Proc 1999; 4: 226–34 Paus R, Cotsarlelis G. The biology of hair follicles. N Engl J Med 1999; 341: 491–7 Shapiro J, Price VH. Hair regrowth. Therapeutic agents. Dermatol Clin 1998; 16: 341–56 Sperling LC. Evaluation of hair loss. Curr Prob Dermatol 1996; 8: 97–136

Table 18.1

Types of non-scarring hair loss

Telogen effluvium Anagen effluvium Alopecia areata Androgenetic alopecia Hair shaft abnormalities Trauma Infectious disorders (e.g. dermatophytes, syphilis) Systemic disease (e.g. thyroid disease, systemic lupus erythematosus, iron deficiency anemia) Intoxications (e.g. vitamin A, bismuth) Nutritional deficiencies (e.g. zinc, biotin) Medications

Mallory Chapter 18

336

27/1/05

2:55 pm

Page 336

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Tobin DJ, Slominski A, Botchkarev V, Paus R. The fate of hair follicle melanocytes during the hair growth cycle. Invest Dermatol Symp Proc 1999; 4: 323–32

CONGENITAL ALOPECIA: LOCALIZED Occipital alopecia Major points

Table 18.2

Evaluation of hair loss in childhood

• Normal process • Common disorder in first year • Well-defined patch of alopecia with broken hairs over occiput (Figure 18.1)

History Duration of loss Rate of shedding Breakage versus falling out from roots Drug intake Hair care Trauma General health, developmental history Family history of hair disorders Symptoms (pruritus, etc.) Pregnancy Physical examination Scalp examination: scarring versus nonscarring Hair texture, length, color Pattern and distribution of loss; diffuse versus patchy Tips tapered versus broken ends General hair distribution Teeth, nails, sweating abnormalities Mentation Other anomalies Useful procedures Hair pull: 30–50 hairs grasped between thumb and forefinger with firm, steady traction applied along the lengths of the hairs; 2–5 telogen hairs – normal; >6 hairs extracted considered abnormal Hair pluck: forcefully extracting ~50 hairs from the scalp by clamping hairs about 1 cm from skin surface with a rubber coated hemostat and pulling Microscopic examination: anagen versus telogen hairs KOH preparation Fungal, bacterial cultures Scalp biopsy Laboratory evaluation: complete blood count, thyroxine, thyroid stimulating hormone, rapid plasma reagin, serum iron, dehydroepiandrosterone sulfate, free testosterone

Figure 18.1 Occipital alopecia – this common patchy hair loss occurs in infants in the first year of life

Pathogenesis

• Lanugo hairs on posterior scalp shed at ~8–12 weeks of age, then replaced with normal anagen hairs Diagnosis

• Clinical diagnosis Differential diagnosis

• Alopecia areata • Hair shaft disorders Treatment

• None needed Prognosis

• Excellent References Olsen EA. Hair loss in childhood. In Disorders of Hair Growth. Olsen EA, ed. McGraw-Hill: New York, 1994: 139–88

Mallory Chapter 18

27/1/05

2:55 pm

Page 337

Hair disorders

337

Patchy alopecia Major points

• Aplasia cutis congenita: irregularly shaped erosion • • • • •

• • •

which leads to scarring or oval patch covered by membrane (see Chapter 2) Melanocytic nevus: associated with hyper- or hypotrichosis Hemangioma of infancy: after resolution, may have localized alopecia Nevus sebaceus: linear or oval patch of alopecia with yellowish papules (see Chapter 17) Epidermal or organoid nevi: linear, grouped, verrucous papules Temporal triangular alopecia (Figure 18.2) 1. Well-circumscribed triangular or lance-shaped area of alopecia at the temple 2. Appears at 2–5 years of age; unilateral (80%) or bilateral 3. Vellus hairs present; occasionally a few terminal hairs 4. Erroneously thought to be from forceps delivery Cranial meningoceles, encephaloceles, heterotopic brain tissue: can be surrounded by collar of thick hair (called ‘hair collar sign’) Birth trauma (forceps) from pressure on hair follicles Rare syndromes with patchy hair loss 1. Conradi–Hünermann syndrome 2. Goltz syndrome

Figure 18.3 This type of hair loss resembles triangular alopecia but is caused by styling practices where the hair is pulled tightly into braids

•

3. Hallerman–streiff syndrome 4. CHILD syndrome Causes of scarring alopecia (Table 18.4)

References Armstrong DKB, Burrows D. Congenital triangular alopecia. Pediatr Dermatol 1996; 13: 394–6 Elmer KB, George RM. Congenital triangular alopecia: a case report and review. Cutis 2002; 69: 255–6 Garcia-Hernandez MJ, Rodriguez-Pichardo A, Camacho F. Congenital triangular alopecia (Brauer nevus). Pediatr Dermatol 1995; 12: 301–3 Trakimas C, Sperling LC, Skelton HG, et al. Clinical and histologic findings in temporal triangular alopecia. J Am Acad Dermatol 1994; 31: 205–9

CONGENITAL ALOPECIA: DIFFUSE Early-onset diffuse alopecia Major points

• Causes: Figure 18.2 Triangular alopecia – congenital and familial patch of alopecia usually over one or both temples

1. Metabolic disorders/nutritional deficiencies a. Acrodermatitis enteropathica (zinc deficiency)

Mallory Chapter 18

338

27/1/05

2:55 pm

Page 338

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

2. 3. 4. 5.

b. Biotin deficiency c. Essential fatty acid deficiency d. Amino acid disorders Congenital alopecia universalis Loose anagen syndrome Hair shaft defects Genetic syndromes a. KID syndrome b. Trichorhinophalangeal syndrome

References Ahmad W, Panteleyev AA, Christiano AM. The molecular basis of congenital atrichia in humans and mice: mutations in the hairless gene. Invest Dermatol Symp Proc 1999; 4: 240–3 Cambiaghi S, Barbareschi M. A sporadic case of congenital hypotrichosis simplex of the scalp: difficulties in diagnosis and classification. Pediatr Dermatol 1999; 16: 301–4 Carrington PR, Chen H, Altick JA. Trichorhinophalangeal syndrome, type I. J Am Acad Dermatol 1994; 31: 331–6 Ludecke H-J, Wagner MJ, Nardmann J, et al. Molecular dissection of a contiguous gene syndrome: localization of the genes involved in the Langer–Giedion syndrome. Hum Mol Genet 1995; 4: 31–6 Nardmann J, Tranebjaerg L, Horsthembke B, Ludecke H-J. The tricho-rhino-phalangeal syndromes: frequency and parental origin of 8q deletions. Hum Genet 1997; 99: 638–43 Roberts JL, Whiting DA, Henry D, et al. Marie Unna congenital hypotrichosis: clinical description, histopathology, scanning electron microscopy of a previously unreported large pedigree. Invest Dermatol Symp Proc 1999; 4: 261–7 Zlotogorski A, Hochberg Z, Mirmirani P, et al. Clinical and pathologic correlations in genetically distinct forms of atrichia. Arch Dermatol 2003; 139: 1591–6

Ectodermal dysplasia (hypohidrotic/anhidrotic) Synonym: anhidrotic ectodermal dysplasia, Christ–Siemens–Touraine syndrome Major points

• Presents at birth • Hair-fine, sparse, light and twisted terminal hairs •

and eyebrows; may thicken at puberty (Figure 18.4) Sweat glands – partial or complete absence with heat intolerance; sweat pores absent on visual inspection of fingertips

Figure 18.4 Hypohidrotic ectodermal dysplasia – newborn with absence of hair

• Teeth – hypodontia, anodontia, and conical incisors

• Nails – normal or brittle, thin, ridged • Characteristc facies

•

1. Thick, everted lips 2. Frontal bossing 3. Large, pointed ears 4. Saddle nose 5. Maxillary hypoplasia Other findings 1. Frequent bronchitis and pneumonia 2. Recurrent otitis media, impacted cerumen 3. Hoarse voice 4. Failure to thrive (20%) 5. Unexplained fever in infancy and childhood 6. Poorly developed mucous glands in respiratory and gastrointestinal tract 7. Periorbital hyperpigmentation 8. Skin – soft, dry, finely wrinkled 9. X-linked recessive 10. Increased frequency of atopic dermatitis

Pathogenesis

• Gene locus: Xq12-q13.1 • Gene: ectodysplasin-A (ED1) Diagnosis

• Clinical presentation Differential diagnosis

• Other (Figure 18.5)

Mallory Chapter 18

27/1/05

2:55 pm

Page 339

Hair disorders

339

Wisniewski SA, Kobielak A, Trzeciak WH, Kobielak K. Recent advances in understanding of the molecular basis of anhidrotic ectodermal dysplasia: discovery of a ligand, ectodysplasin A and its two receptors. J Appl Genet 2002; 43: 97–107

Ectodermal dysplasia (hidrotic) Synonym: Clouston syndrome Major points

• Generalized hypotrichosis (sparse, fine, blond, wiry, brittle hair); hair loss may be progressive

• Nail dystrophy: nails may be white in early Figure 18.5 Isolated scalp hypotrichosis – with no other ectodermal defects

• Treatment

• Environmental control for temperature stability: • • • •

air conditioning or specialized cooling units Dental consultation for abnormal teeth, with dentures and dental implants Hair appliances (wigs) if necessary Treatment of infections as needed National Foundation for Ectodermal Dysplasias (www.nfed.org)

Prognosis

• Good with close supervision • Increased mortality in infancy References

• • • • • • •

childhood; thickened nails; slow growth; paronychial infections (Figure 18.6) Hyperkeratosis of the palms and soles with pebbling on the fingertips, which increases with age Teeth – normal Mild mental retardation or normal mentation Sweating normal Conjunctivitis Blepharitis possible secondary to absence of protection from eyelashes More common in French Canadian families Autosomal dominant

Pathogenesis

• Gene locus: 13q12 • Gene: GJB6 (gap junction protein) which encodes CX30 (connexin-30)

Aswegan AL, Josephson KD, Mowbray R, et al. Autosomal dominant hypohidrotic ectodermal dysplasia in a large family. Am J Med Genet 1997; 72: 462–7 Azon-Masoliver A, Ferrando J. Loose anagen hair in hypohidrotic ectodermal dysplasia. Pediatr Dermatol 1996; 13: 29–32 Cambiaghi S, Restano L, Paakkonen K, et al. Clinical findings in mosaic carriers of hypohidrotic ectodermal dysplasia. Arch Dermatol 2000; 136: 217–24 Dahan D, Fenichel GM, El-Said R. Neurocutaneous syndromes. Adolesc Med State Art Rev 2002; 13: 495–509 Hummel P, Guddack S. Psychosocial stress and adaptive functioning in children and adolescents suffering from hypohidrotic ectodermal dysplasia. Pediatr Dermatol 1997; 14: 180–5 Lamartine J. Towards a new classification of ectodermal dysplasias. Clin Exp Dermatol 2003; 28: 351–5

Figure 18.6 Hidrotic ectodermal dysplasia – small nails with pebbling of fingertips in a patient with hypotrichosis

Mallory Chapter 18

340

27/1/05

2:55 pm

Page 340

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Diagnosis • Clinical presentation • Histology: orthohyperkeratosis of palms and soles with normal granular layer • Abnormal hair with nonspecific narrowing and fraying Differential diagnosis

• Other ectodermal dysplasias • Ankyloblepharon ectodermal dysplasia clefting •

(AEC) syndrome Pachyonychia congenita

Treatment • Hair appliance (wig) if necessary

Figure 18.7 Alopecia areata – sudden loss of hair with exclamation point hairs appearing as broken-off hairs along the periphery

Prognosis

• Hair and nail abnormalities permanent References Chitty LS, Dennis N, Baraitser M. Hidrotic ectodermal dysplasia of hair, teeth, and nails: case reports and review. J Med Genet 1996; 33: 707–10 Hayflick SJ, Taylor T, McKinnon W, et al. Clouston syndrome (hidrotic ectodermal dysplasia) is not linked to keratin gene clusters on chromosomes 12 and 17. J Invest Dermatol 1996; 107: 11–14 Lamartine J, Essenfelder GM, Kibar Z, et al. Mutations in GJB6 cause hidrotic ectodermal dysplasia. Nature Genet 2000; 26: 142–4 Priolo M, Silengo M, Lerone M, Ravazzolo R. Ectodermal dysplasias: not only ‘skin’ deep. Clin Genet 2000; 58: 415–30

Figure 18.8 Alopecia areata – patchy, smooth hair loss of sudden onset

ACQUIRED NON-SCARRING ALOPECIA Alopecia areata Major points

• • • • • • •

Common disorder Incidence: 17 per 100 000 population per year 24–50% begins at age <16 years Male/female ratio = 1 Family history found in ~10–20% Sudden onset of asymptomatic well-defined oval or round patches of hair loss (Figures 18.7 and 18.8) Location

• • •

•

1. Alopecia areata – patchy hair loss 2. Alopecia totalis – loss of entire scalp hair with retention of other hair 3. Alopecia universalis – loss of all body hair 4. Can occur in any hair-bearing area: scalp, eyebrows, eyelashes, beard, body hair 5. Ophiasis region – along the nape of the neck Characteristic exclamation point hairs: hairs that taper as they approach the scalp Regrowth hair often depigmented initially Nail changes in 10–44% 1. Fine grid-like pitting, regularly arranged in horizontal or vertical rows 2. Trachyonychia (rough sandpaper nails) Associated with: thyroid disease, vitiligo and other autoimmune disorders

Mallory Chapter 18

27/1/05

2:55 pm

Page 341

Hair disorders

• Increased incidence in Down syndrome • Atopy seen in 10–22% of cases Pathogenesis

• Etiology unknown, generally thought to be an •

autoimmune disorder Histology 1. Perifollicular lymphocytic infiltrate surrounding hair bulbs resembling a ‘swarm of bees’ 2. Infiltrate: activated T lymphocytes with macrophages and Langerhans cells 3. Reduction in anagen : telogen ratio 4. Miniaturized dystrophic hairs

Diagnosis

• Clinical appearance • Hair pull test positive in active areas, especially at periphery of patch with increased number of telogen hairs and dystrophic anagen hairs Differential diagnosis • Telogen effluvium • Trichotillomania • Androgenetic alopecia • Syphilis (secondary) • Tinea capitis Treatment • Treatments only control the problem • Treatments should be used for a long time (minimum 3–6 months) because of the chronic nature of the disease • Patient education and psychological support • Corticosteroids 1. Topical: mid- to ultrapotent steroids BID 2. Intralesional: triamcinolone acetonide 2.5–5 mg/ml administered with 30-gauge needle with multiple intradermal injections of 0.1 ml per site, approximately 1 cm apart; maximum total 3 ml on scalp per visit; repeat every 4–6 weeks until improvement seen 3. Systemic steroids: recommended for extensive cases with sudden onset; high relapse rate a. Prednisone 20–40 mg/day with tapering by 5 mg /week for 4–6 weeks followed by alternate day therapy, and slow tapering with eventual discontinuation

341

• Topical irritants 1. Anthralin 0.25–1% cream, applied overnight or as short contact therapy, initially for 30 minutes and gradually increasing to 1 hour. Mild dermatitis is desired for a therapeutic effect • Topical sensitizers 1. Squaric acid dibutyl ester (SADBE) or diphenylcyclopropenone (DPCP): sensitization of the skin with resultant contact allergic reaction, followed by repeated treatments of the low-dose agent to maintain a low-grade allergic reaction. Response should be seen after 12 weeks • Topical minoxidil 2–5% applied BID • PUVA: psoralen taken orally or applied topically followed by UVA irradiation; administered 2–3 times per week; not recommended for children aged <10 years • Wig (prosthesis) • Support group: National Alopecia Areata Foundation Web site: www.alopeciaareata.com Prognosis

• Variable and unpredictable • Course recurrent in ~50% • Natural history: spontaneous remissions and recurrences

• Limited involvement: prognosis good with growth in 1 year seen in 95%

• 7–10% develop severe chronic form • Prognosis worse if there is: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Early onset Ophiasis pattern Atopy Nail dystrophy Long duration Presence of other autoimmune diseases Family history Extensive hair loss

References Bodemer C, Peuchmaur M, Fraitaig S, et al. Role of cytotoxic T cells in chronic alopecia areata. J Invest Dermatol 2000; 114: 112–16 Cotelless C, Peris K, Caracciolo E, et al. The use of topical diphenylcyclopropenone for the treatment of extensive alopecia areata. J Am Acad Dermatol 2001; 44: 73–6

Mallory Chapter 18

342

27/1/05

2:55 pm

Page 342

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Freyschmidt-Paul P, Happle R, McElwee KJ, Hoffmann R. Alopecia areata: treatment of today and tomorrow. J Invest Dermatol Symp Proc 2003; 8: 12–17 Hoffmann R. The potential role of cytokines and T cells in alopecia areata. Invest Dermatol Symp Proc 1999; 4: 235–8 Madani S, Shapiro J. Alopecia areata update. J Am Acad Dermatol 2000; 42: 549–66 McElwee KJ, Freyschmidt-Paul P, Sundberg JP, Hoffmann R. The pathogenesis of alopecia areata in rodent models. J Invest Dermatol Symp Proc 2003; 8: 6–11 Olsen E, Hordinshky M, McDonald-Hull S, et al. Alopecia areata investigations assessment guidelines. J Am Acad Dermatol 1999; 40: 242–6 Sehgal VN, Jain S. Alopecia areata: clinical perspective and an insight into pathogenesis. J Dermatol 2003; 30: 271–89 Tosti A, Guidetti MS, Bardazzi R, Misciali C. Long-term results of topical immunotherapy in children with alopecia totalis or alopecia universalis. J Am Acad Dermatol 1996; 35: 199–201 Whiting DA. Histopathologic features of alopecia areata. Arch Dermatol 2003; 139: 1555–9

Figure 18.9 Telogen effluvium – caused by severe, febrile illness with obvious regrowth of anagen hairs at the periphery of the scalp

6. 7. 8. 9.

Endocrine disorders: hypo- orhyperthyroidism Severe emotional stress Deficiencies: iron, zinc, biotin Physiologic effluvium of the newborn

Diagnosis

Telogen effluvium Major points

• Common type of hair loss • Sparse diffuse loss of scalp hair (Figure 18.9) • Hallmark: excessive shedding of telogen hairs caused by altered growth cycle

• Occurs 6 weeks to 4 months after inciting event • Lasts 6–24 weeks • Regrowth within 6 months Pathogenesis • Abnormally large shift from anagen to telogen hairs within a short period of time • Instead of 10% hairs in telogen (normal), there are 30–50% in telogen • Etiologies: 1. Drugs: anticonvulsants, anticoagulants, angiotensin-converting enzyme (ACE) inhibitors, β-blockers, interferons, lithium, oral contraceptive pills (during or after discontinuation), retinoids, excessive vitamin A 2. Febrile or systemic illness 3. Crash diets 4. Postpartum 5. Major surgical procedures, anesthesia

• History very helpful • Hair pull or pluck: increased telogen hairs up to 50% of hairs

• If precipitating factor not found, consider doing: complete blood count (CBC), chemistry profile, serum iron, thyroid studies Differential diagnosis

• Kwashiorkor • Acrodermatitis enteropathica • Celiac disease Treatment

• Patient education as to cause and prognosis, with reassurance

• Gentle hair care: avoid manipulation, vigorous shampooing, combing, brushing Prognosis

• Complete regrowth within 6 months if precipitating factor eliminated References Ben-Amitai D, Garty BZ. Alopecia in children after cardiac surgery. Pediatr Dermatol 1993; 10: 32–33

Mallory Chapter 18

27/1/05

2:55 pm

Page 343

Hair disorders

Chartier MB, Hoss DM, Grant-Kels JM. Approach to the adult female patient with diffuse nonscarring alopecia. J Am Acad Dermatol 2002; 47: 809–18 Harrison S, Sinclair R. Telogen effluvium. Clin Exp Dermatol 2002; 27: 389–5 Headington JT. Telogen effluvium. Arch Dermatol 1993; 129: 356–63 Pillans PI, Woods DJ. Drug-associated alopecia. Int J Dermatol 1995; 34: 149–58 Rebora A. Telogen effluvium: an etiopathogenetic theory. Int J Dermatol 1993; 32: 339–40 Sperling LC. Hair and systemic disease. Dermatol Clin 2001; 19: 711–26

343

Duvic M, Lemak NA, Valero V, et al. A randomized trial of minoxdil in chemotherapy-induced alopecia. J Am Acad Dermatol 1996; 35: 74–8 Feldman J, Levisohn DR. Acute alopecia: clue to thallium toxicity. Pediatr Dermatol 1993; 10: 29–31 Pillans PI, Woods DJ. Drug-associated alopecia. Intern J Dermatol 1995; 34: 149–58 Sommer M, Wilson C. Therapeutic approaches to the management of common baldness. Int J Clin Pract 1999; 53: 381–5

Androgenetic alopecia Synonym: male pattern baldness

Anagen effluvium Major points • Inhibition of anagen hair-matrix metabolism with resultant hair loss • Since >80% of scalp hair is normally in anagen, hair loss is marked • Hairs shed in growing (anagen) phase • Rapid loss of majority of scalp hair Pathogenesis • Chemotherapeutic agents • Radiation • Toxins: thallium, boric acid, arsenic, mercury

Major points

• Most common type of alopecia in adults • Characterized by progressive pattern of hair loss from scalp (Figure 18.10)

• Patterns: 1. Bitemporal recession 2. Frontal thinning 3. Vertex thinning leaving occipital and temporal margins with hair 4. Women have diffuse thinning, usually worse centrally; widened parting, with retention of frontal hairline or M-pattern

Diagnosis • History very helpful • Hair pull: ‘pencil point’ dystrophic hairs with proximal tips tapering to a point • Hair pluck: anagen and telogen hairs Differential diagnosis

• Telogen effluvium • Alopecia totalis • Loose anagen syndrome Treatment

• Discontinuance of toxic agent or cause Prognosis

• Excellent if toxic agent removed References Botchkarev VA. Molecular mechanisms of chemotherapyinduced hair loss. J Invest Dermatol Symp Proc 2003; 8: 72–5

Figure 18.10 Male pattern alopecia in a 14-year-old with a strong genetic history for androgenetic alopecia

Mallory Chapter 18

344

27/1/05

2:55 pm

Page 344

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

• Caused by circulating androgens in genetically • • • •

susceptible men and women Begins between teens and 30 years in both sexes Affects 70% of all males in later life and >30% of older women Common complaint: thinning Inheritance probably polygenic

Pathogenesis

• Gradual transformation of thick scalp hair follicles • •

to smaller follicles over many cycles, resulting in progressively shorter, finer, miniaturized hairs Regulated by dihydrotestosterone, which is formed by conversion of testosterone by 5α-reductase Histology shows miniaturized follicle with streamer of collapsed connective tissue sheath; increase ratio of telogen to anagen hairs and increase of vellus hairs; mild perifollicular lymphohistiocytic inflammation (nonspecific)

Diagnosis

• • •

Clinical diagnosis Family history Hair pull test negative

Differential diagnosis

• Virilizing tumors of adrenal or ovary • Telogen effluvium

References Ellis JA, Sinclair R, Harrap SB. Androgenetic alopecia: pathogenesis and potential for therapy. Expert Rev Mol Med 2002; 4: 1–11 Kaufman KD. Androgens and alopecia. Mol Cell Endocrinol 2002; 198: 89–95 Price VH. Androgenetic alopecia in adolescents. Cutis 2003; 71: 115–21 Price VH. Androgenetic alopecia in women. J Invest Dermatol Symp Proc 2003; 8: 24–7 Price VH. Treatment of hair loss. N Engl J Med 1999; 341: 964–73

Trichotillomania Major points

• Location often frontal or frontoparietal scalp; can • • • •

occur in scalp, eyebrows, eyelashes, pubic hair Irregularly shaped, angular patches with stubbly, broken-off hairs; area is never completely bald (Figures 18.11 and 18.12) Begins insidiously as irregular linear or rectangular area of partial hair loss Nonscarring Occurs in 8 million Americans

Treatment

• Evaluation in teenage girls: free testosterone,

• • •

•

dehydroepiandrosterone sulfate, luteinizing hormone, follicle stimulating hormone, prolactin Aim of treatment is to retard further thinning Topical minoxidil 2 or 5% BID, used for at least 1 year to assess efficacy; must maintain treatment to avoid shedding new growth Males: finasteride 1 mg PO daily; response seen as early as 3 months; needs continued treatment (contraindicated in women who may potentially become pregnant) Girls: 1. Oral spironolactone (aldosterone antagonist), 50–200 mg/day 2. Estrogen

Prognosis

• Slowly progressive

Figure 18.11 Trichotillomania – angular patches of broken-off hairs with areas of normal hair

Mallory Chapter 18

27/1/05

2:55 pm

Page 345

Hair disorders

345

Pathogenesis

• Caused by plucking, pulling, breaking, or twisting •

one’s own hair either consciously or subconsciously Histology: 1. Marked increase in catagen and telogen hairs 2. Presence of pigment casts 3. Trichomalacia with abnormally small, distorted, bizarre-shaped hairs 4. Dilated ostia with empty follicles 5. Absence of bulbar inflammation

Diagnosis

• Clinical diagnosis • Confirmed by finding wads of hair or observation •

of habit Histology helpful

Differential diagnosis Figure 18.12 Trichotillomania – hair breakage in an unusual pattern on the posterior scalp

• Alopecia areata • Trichorrhexis nodosa Treatment

• Occurs in all ages >2 years; two-thirds are children, adolescents and young adults

• Two types:

• • •

1. Temporary localized childhood pattern: a. Ages 2–6 years b. Harmless habit, tends to occur before child falls asleep or when reading, writing, or watching television c. No necessary treatment d. Good prognosis 2. Teenage/adult pattern: a. Obsessive compulsive disorder b. Irresistible urge to pluck hair, either unconscious or semi-conscious c. More severe form d. Prognosis worse e. Most deny doing it f. Female/male ratio >1 g. Often refractory to treatment h. Occurs frequently during psychosocial stress Other clinical features: focal perifollicular erythema, hemorrhage, excoriations Examination of hairs: blunt hair tips Concomitant occurrence with alopecia areata has been described

• • • • •

Supportive Psychological evaluation and treatment Behavior modification Oral anti-obsessive compulsive agents: selective serotonin uptake inhibitors: paroxetine (Paxil®), sertraline (Zoloft®), fluoxetine (Prozac®) Topical mild steroid to reduce any inflammation or sense of itching

Prognosis

• Good in childhood type, poor in teenage type if no treatment is given or if problem has been prolonged References Hautmann G, Hercogova J, Lotti T. Trichotillomania. J Am Acad Dermatol 2002; 46: 807–21 Khouzam HR, Battista MA, Byers PE. An overview of trichotillomania and its response to treatment with quetiapine. Psychiatry 2002; 65: 261–70 Oranje AP, Peereboom-Wynia JDR, De Raeymaecher DMJ. Trichotillomania in childhood. J Am Acad Dermatol 1986; 15: 614–19 Papadopoulos AJ, Janniger CK, Chodynicki MP, Schwartx RA. Trichotillomania. Int J Dermatol 2003; 42: 330–4 Trueb RM, Cavegn B. Trichotillomania in connection with alopecia areata. Cutis 1996; 58: 67–70

Mallory Chapter 18

346

27/1/05

2:55 pm

Page 346

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Traction alopecia

Prognosis

Major points

• Early disease (few months) – hair will recover • Late disease (years) can cause permanent loss of

• Common in females with tightly pulled hairstyles, • • • •

especially Black girls Outermost hairs are subject to most tension, so margin of scalp usually affected (Figure 18.3 and 18.13) Commonly involves temporal region and frontal scalp Scalp surface appears normal, with no scarring Insidious onset

hair follicles References Wilborn WS. Disorders of hair growth in African Americans. In Disorders of Hair Growth. Olsen EA, ed. McGraw-Hill: New York, 1994: 389–407

Traumatic alopecia

Pathogenesis

Major points

• Chronic traction of ponytails or braids, with

• Sudden onset caused by forceful extraction of hairs

tension on hair shafts or friction from headgear, rubber bands with hair breakage Diagnosis

• Clinical diagnosis Differential diagnosis

• • •

or prolonged pressure on scalp during surgery, resulting in focal tissue ischemia Clinical features: pain, inflammation, edema, followed by ulceration Forcible removal: consider child abuse Hair loss usually not permanent

• Alopecia areata • Trichotillomania

Syndromes with late-onset hypotrichosis

Treatment

• • • • • •

• Gentle hair care (Table 18.3) • Change hairstyle which includes loose braids, parting hair at different site

• Discontinue rubber bands and manipulation of hair

Ectodermal dysplasias Dyskeratosis congenita Werner syndrome Progeria (Hutchinson–Gilford syndrome) Cockayne syndrome Rothmund–Thomson syndrome

Table 18.3

Handout for hair care

1. Be gentle 2. Take time with brushing and combing. Brush and comb as little and as gently as possible 3. Use a soft bristle brush or wide-toothed plastic brush 4. Comb: use a wide-toothed, round-tipped comb, bone or plastic; never metal 5. Cream rinse or condition the hair after shampooing, especially if the hair is long. Choose one with protein added

Figure 18.13 Traction alopecia – caused by over-processing extremely curly hair

6. If your lifestyle does not include time for gentle combing and brushing, then keeping the hair short might be an option

Mallory Chapter 18

27/1/05

2:55 pm

Page 347

Hair disorders

HAIR SHAFT ABNORMALITIES Trichorrhexis nodosa Major points

• Fracture of hair shaft with splaying out and release • • • •

of individual cortical cells, suggesting the appearance of two brushes being pushed together Hairs very fragile and break with trauma Common in Black females, whose hairstyles include routine straightening Hairs along scalp edge are subject to most tension Can be seen with argininosuccinic aciduria (congenital trichorrhexis nodosa), citrullinemia and hypothyroidism

Pathogenesis

• Results from chronic trauma (mechanical or chemical) to hair shafts: traction, twisting, brushing, hot combing, drying, straightening and other chemical treatments Diagnosis

• Clinical features • Microscopy of hair shaft

• Variability of clinical picture • Hair fragile, short, dull; may affect eyebrows, eyelashes and body hair

• Other features 1. 2. 3. 4.

Ichthyosis linearis circumflexa Atopic dermatitis Erythroderma Secondary colonization with Staphylococcus aureus 5. Increased absorption of topical agents (e.g. tacrolimus) Pathogenesis

• Microscopy of hair shaft: ball and socket configuration or shallow invagination of distal into proximal shaft, resembling bamboo (Figure 18.14) Diagnosis

• Clinical features with characteristic microscopy of hair shaft

• Gene locus/gene: chromosome 5q32/ SPINK5 gene encoding the serine protease inhibitor LEKTI Differential diagnosis

• Other hair shaft abnormalities

• Atopic dermatitis • Erythroderma • Immune deficiencies

Treatment

• Avoid manipulating hair as much as possible

• Gentle hair care • Wigs

Differential diagnosis

(Table 18.3) Prognosis

• Slow recovery if trauma avoided References Lurie R, Hodak E, Ginzburg A, David M. Trichorrhexis nodosa: a manifestation of hypothyroidism. Cutis 1996; 57: 358–9 Quinn CR, Quinn TM, Kelly AP. Hair care practices in African American women. Cutis 2003; 72: 280–9

Trichorrhexis invaginata Synonym: bamboo hair Major points

• Characteristic of Netherton syndrome

347

Figure 18.14 Netherton syndrome – bamboo hair (courtesy of Dr Dongshi Li)

Mallory Chapter 18

348

27/1/05

2:55 pm

Page 348

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

• Intermittent topical corticosteroids for atopic dermatitis and scaling

• Emollients Prognosis

• As hair becomes thicker, it may become slightly less fragile References Allen A, Siegfried E, Silverman R, et al. Significant absorption of topical tacrolimus in 3 patients with Netherton syndrome. Arch Dermatol 2001; 137: 747–50 Chavanas S, Bodemer C, Rochat A, et al. Mutations in SPINK5, encoding a serine protease inhibitor, cause Netherton syndrome. Nature Genet 2000; 25: 141–2 Hausser I, Anton-Lamprecht I. Severe congenital generalized exfoliative erythroderma in newborns and infants: a possible sign of Netherton syndrome. Pediatr Dermatol 1996; 13: 183–99

Figure 18.15 Pili torti – twisted hairs involving the scalp and eyebrows

c. Hair twisted, coarse, sparse, hypopigmented or silvery; fragile, especially in areas of trauma d. Untreated disease usually lethal in early years e. Gene mutation in copper transporting P type ATPase protein (ATP7A) on chromosome X 13.3; blocks export of dietary copper from GI tract, leading to decreased bioavailability of copper with functional deficiencies of copper-dependent enzymes

Muller FB, Hausser I, Berg D, et al. Genetic analysis of a severe case of Netherton syndrome and application for prenatal testing. Br J Dermatol 2002; 146: 495–9 Siegel DH. Howard R. Molecular advances in genetic skin diseases. Curr Opin Pediatr 2002; 14: 419–25

Pili torti Major points

• Twisting of hair shaft on its own axis, usually • • • • •

through an angle of 180° Location: scalp, eyebrows, eyelashes Onset at birth or early months Hair: light in color, spangled, dry, brittle, breaks at different lengths and tends to stand out from scalp (Figure 18.15) Autosomal dominant, recessive or sporadic Syndromes that show pili torti: 1. Classic pili torti a. May be isolated finding b. Can be seen with teeth, nail, eye defects, keratosis pilaris 2. Björnstad syndrome a. Associated with sensorineural deafness b. Autosomal dominant 3. Menkes ‘kinky hair’ syndrome a. Progressive neurodegeneration b. Connective tissue abnormalities

Pathogenesis

• Histology of hair shaft: three or four regularly •

spaced twists, each 0.4–0.9 mm in width, occurring at irregular intervals along the shaft Twists almost always through 180° but can be less or more

Diagnosis

• Clinical features with microscopy of hair shaft Differential diagnosis

• Uncombable hair syndrome • Other hair shaft abnormalities Treatment

• Gentle hair care Prognosis

• Stable; may improve slightly with age

Mallory Chapter 18

27/1/05

2:55 pm

Page 349

Hair disorders

References Richards KA, Mancini AJ. Three members of a family with pili torti and sensorineural hearing loss: the Bjornstad syndrome. J Am Acad Dermatol 2002; 46: 301–3 Selvaag E. Pili torti and sensorineural hearing loss. A follow-up of Bjornstad’s original patients and a review of the literature. Eur J Dermatol 2000; 10: 91–7 Whiting DA. Hair shaft defects. In Disorders of Hair Growth. Olsen EA, ed. McGraw-Hill: New York, 1994: 91–137

349

• Hairs fracture at internodal spaces • Mutations in human basic hair keratins: hHb1 and hHb6

• Gene map locus 12q13 Diagnosis

• Clinical features with microscopy of hair shaft Differential diagnosis

• Pseudomonilethrix: artifact caused by hairs pressed between two glass slides

Monilethrix

• Other hair shaft anomalies

Synonym: beaded hair

Treatment

Major points

• Gentle hair care

• Beaded hairs on microscopy; nodes have diameter

Prognosis

• • • •

of normal hair, whereas internodes are narrow and are sites of fracture Hair usually normal at birth, but replaced by dry, dull, brittle hair which breaks spontaneously Scalp has stubbly appearance of hairs (Figure 18.16) Follicular keratosis often associated (scalp, face, limbs can have severe involvement) Autosomal dominant with high penetrance, but expressivity variable

Pathogenesis

• Characteristic elliptic nodes, 0.7–1 mm apart, with intervening tapered constrictions that are nonmedullated

• May improve slightly as hair becomes thicker with age References DeBerker DAR, Ferguson DJP, Dawber RPR. Monilethrix: a clinicopathological illustration of a cortical defect. Br J Dermatol 1993; 128: 327–31 Korge BP, Hamm H, Jury CS, et al. Identification of novel mutations in basic hair keratins hHb1 and hHb6 in monilethrix: implications for protein structure and clinical phenotype. J Invest Dermatol 1999; 113: 607–12 Landau M, Brenner S, Metzker A. Medical pearl: an easy way to diagnose severe neonatal monilethrix. J Am Acad Dermatol 2002; 46: 111–12 Smith F. The molecular genetics of keratin disorders. Am J Clin Dermatol 2003; 4: 347–64

Uncombable hair syndrome Synonyms: spun glass hair, pili trianguli et canaliculi

Figure 18.16 papules

Monilethrix – very short hairs with keratotic

Major points • Onset early in childhood • Hair light silvery-blond, pale, frizzy; stands away from the scalp, cannot be combed flat; often spangled in appearance (Figure 18.17) • Hair usually normal in length, quantity and strength • Eyebrows, lashes and body hair normal • Autosomal dominant, recessive or sporadic

Mallory Chapter 18

350

27/1/05

2:55 pm

Page 350

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Itin PH, Buhler U, Buchner SA, Guggenheim R. Pili trianguli et canaliculi: a distinctive hair shaft defect leading to uncombable hair. Dermatology 1993; 187: 296–8

Loose anagen syndrome Major points

• Characterized by actively growing anagen hairs

Figure 18.17 Uncombable hair syndrome – spangled hair which is difficult to style

• • •

Pathogenesis • Microscopy of hairs: longitudinal grooving along the shaft or flattened surface with intact cuticle; areas discontinuous and change orientation many times along the shaft • Cross-sectional microscopy: triangular, or other unusual shapes with longitudinal grooving Diagnosis

• Clinical diagnosis with characteristic microscopy of hair shaft Differential diagnosis

• Pili torti • Loose anagen syndrome Treatment

• Gentle hair care • Conditioners helpful • Hair not particularly fragile Prognosis

• Good; tends to improve with age, but is always difficult to manage References Ang P, Tay YK. What syndrome is this? Uncombable hair syndrome (Pili trianguli et canaliculi). Pediatr Dermatol 1998; 15: 475–6 Hicks J, Metry DW, Barrish J, Levy M. Uncombable hair (cheveux incoiffables, pili trianguli et canaliculi) syndrome: brief review and role of scanning electron microscopy in diagnosis. Ultrastruct Pathol 2001; 25: 99–103

• •

which are loosely anchored and can be easily and painlessly pulled from the scalp Mainly blond healthy girls aged 1–9 years Parents complain that hair will not grow and seldom needs cutting Subtle diffuse or patchy thinning with uneven length of hairs Hair appears limp and matted Sporadic inheritance; occasionally autosomal dominant

Pathogenesis

• Normal tenacious bond between lower hair shaft and inner root sheath is weak, allowing trivial traction to cause disruption and extraction of hairs Diagnosis

• Hair pull test (diagnostic) – numerous hair shafts painlessly extracted from scalp

• Microscopy of proximal ends of hairs pulled: anagen hairs without outer root sheaths, with ruffling of hair shaft (‘crumpled sock’ appearance) Differential diagnosis

• Uncombable hair syndrome • Pili torti • Congenital hypotrichosis Treatment

• Gentle hair care • Reassurance Prognosis

• Can improve with time References Boyer JD, Cobb MW, Sperling LC, Rushin JM. Loose anagen hair syndrome mimicking the uncombable hair syndrome. Cutis 1996; 57: 111–12

Mallory Chapter 18

27/1/05

2:55 pm

Page 351

Hair disorders

Chapalain V, Winter H, Langbein L, et al. Is the loose anagen hair syndrome a keratin disorder? A clinical and molecular study. Arch Dermatol 2002; 138: 501–6 Olsen EA, Bettencourt MS, Cote NL. The presence of loose anagen hairs obtained by hair pull in the normal population. Invest Dermatol Symp Proc 1999; 4: 258–60 Tosti A, Piraccini BM. Loose anagen hair syndrome and loose anagen hair. Arch Dermatol 2002; 138: 521–2

Trichothiodystrophy Synonyms: BIDS, IBIDS, PIBIDS Major points

• Sulfur-deficient, brittle hair (scalp, eyebrows, • • • • • • •

eyelashes) Neuroectodermal disorder Intellectual impairment Short stature Decreased fertility Photosensitivity with impaired DNA repair Ichthyosis Autosomal recessive

Pathogenesis

• Microscopy of hair shaft: flattened, twisted hair

• • •

shaft, wavy, irregular, trichoschisis (clean, transverse fractures where there is localized absence of cuticle cells) Polarized microscopy: alternating bright and dark bands, resembling a tiger tail Sulfur content of hair reduced by 50% Gene locus/gene: chromosome 19q13/ mutation in at least two separate genes: ERCC2/XPD, and ERCC3/XPB, which encode the two helicase subunits of transcription/repair vector TFIIH

351

Prognosis

• Depends upon status of mental capabilities References Bergmann E, Egly JM. Trichothiodystrophy, a transcription syndrome. Trends Genet 2001; 17: 279–86 Itin PH, Pittelkow MR. Trichothiodystrophy: review of sulfur-deficient brittle hair syndromes and association with the ectodermal dysplasias. J Am Acad Dermatol 1990; 22: 705–17 Itin PH, Sarasin A, Pittelkow MR. Trichothiodystrophy: update on the sulfur-deficient brittle hair syndromes. J Am Acad Dermatol 2001; 44: 891–920 McCuaig C, Marcoux D, Rasmussen JE, et al. Trichothiodystrophy associated with photosensitivity, gonadal failure, and striking osteosclerosis. J Am Acad Dermatol 1993; 28: 820–6 Sperling LC, DiGiovanna JJ. ‘Curly’ wood and tiger tails: an explanation for light and dark banding with polarization in trichothiodystrophy. Arch Dermatol 2003; 139: 1189–92 van Brabant AJ, Stan R, Ellis NA. DNA helicases, genomic instability, and human genetic disease. Annu Rev Genomics Hum Genet 2000; 1: 409–59

ACQUIRED SCARRING ALOPECIA Major points

• End result of inflammatory process affecting pilosebaceous unit, resulting in destruction of tissue and permanent hair loss (See Table 18.4) (Figure 18.18–20) References Tan E, Marinka M, Ball N, Shapiro J. Primary cicatricial alopecias: clinicopathology of 112 cases. J Am Acad Dermatol 2004; 50: 25–32

Diagnosis

• Clinical features with characteristic microscopy of hair shaft Differential diagnosis

• Other hair shaft abnormalities Treatment

• Gentle hair care

ABNORMALITIES OF INCREASED HAIR Hypertrichosis Major points

• Diffuse congential hypertrichosis 1. Hypertrichosis lanuginosa a. Very rare

Mallory Chapter 18

352

27/1/05

2:55 pm

Page 352

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Table 18.4

Causes of scarring alopecia

Developmental defects/syndrome Aplasia cutis congenita Conradi–Hünermann chondrodysplasia punctata Incontinentia pigmenti Ankyloblepharon, ectodermal dysplasia, cleft lip or palate (AEC) syndrome Epidermolysis bullosa Hallermann-Streiff syndrome KID syndrome Goltz syndrome Ichthyoses Infections Fungal, bacterial, viral (herpes zoster), syphilis Trauma Traction Trichotillomania Hot-comb alopecia Radiation Burns Inflammatory disorders Lichen planopilaris: lichen planus localized to follicles; progressive; mild itching; hyperkeratotic follicular papules with erythema and scaling; histology shows lichenoid infiltrate around follicle Morphea: discrete nontender sclerotic patches with ivory-colored shiny center and violaceous border; can see en coup de sabre pattern on frontal scalp Scleroderma: generalized progressive systemic sclerosis Lupus erythematosus: patchy erythema with telangiectases, follicular plugging and central hypo- or depigmentation with peripheral hyperpigmentation; or diffuse Keratosis pilaris atrophicans: follicular keratinous plugging with erythema Folliculitis decalvans: recurrent patchy painful folliculitis, mainly of scalp, often associated with Staphylococcus aureus Dissecting cellulitis of scalp: chronic inflammatory disease; painful fluctuant nodules and abscesses interconnected by deep sinus tracts (Figure 18.18) Alopecia mucinosa: grouped follicular papules and plaques with hair loss: histology shows accumulation of mucin in sebaceous glands with dissolution of cellular attachments; perifollicular and perivascular inflammatory cell infiltrate of lymphocytes, histiocytes and a few eosinophils. (Figure 18.19)

Figure 18.18 Dissecting folliculitis with cysts and tracts which are sterile abscesses

Figure 18.19 teenager

Neoplastic disorders Acne keloidalis: grouped, small papules typically on nape of neck: caused by shaving of hair and re-entry of curved hairs into skin causing inflammation and keloid formation Benign tumors: adenexal tumors, hemangiomas Malignant tumors: leukemias, lymphomas, sarcomas

•

Alopecia mucinosa – benign type seen in a

b. Characterized by retention of lanugo hair c. At birth: coat of profuse silky hair up to 10 cm long with accentuation over the spine and ears d. Autosomal recessive or dominant Prepubertal hypertrichosis

Mallory Chapter 18

27/1/05

2:55 pm

Page 353

Hair disorders

Table 18.5

Causes of hypertrichosis

Types of congenital circumscribed hypertrichosis Congenital nevocellular nevus Congenital Becker nevus Smooth muscle hamartoma Nevoid hypertrichosis Underlying neurofibroma Hypertrichosis cubiti Hemihypertrophy Spinal dysraphism Anterior cervical hypertrichosis

Figure 18.20 planopilaris

Figure 18.21

1. 2. 3. 4.

• •

Acquired scarring alopecia – lichen

Hypertrichosis – familial type on lower back

Common Generalized; can present from birth Severity in early childhood varies Profuse terminal hair growth on back and limbs, and also temples, forehead and eyebrows (Figure 18.21) 5. Not clear whether this represents an abnormality or normal range of hair growth seen in some racial groups (e.g. Mediterranean peoples, Indians) Drug-induced hypertrichosis (Table 18.5) Localized hypertrichosis (see Table 18.5) 1. Hypertrichosis with spinal fusion abnormalities a. Tuft of long hair overlying defect (dimple, sinus tract, lipoma, spinal bifida, occult spinal dysraphism) b. Lumbosacral area usually

Congenital syndromes with secondary hypertrichosis Brachmann-de Lange syndrome Fetal exposures Fetal hydantoin syndrome Fetal alcohol syndrome Lipoatrophic diabetes Mucopolysaccharidoses Congenital porphyrias Rubinstein–Taybi syndrome Hypomelanosis of Ito Causes of acquired localized hypertrichosis Becker nevus Orthopedic casts and splints Friction Lichen simplex chronicus Habitual biting Insect bites Atopic eczema Venous malformations, thrombosis Trichomegaly HIV Systemic lupus erythematosus Linear scleroderma Causes of acquired generalized hypertrichosis Infection Malnutrition Dermatomyositis Thyroid abnormalities Cerebral disturbances Acrodynia Pharmacologic causes of hypertrichosis Phenytoin Acetazolamide Streptomycin Cyclosporin A Diazoxide Minoxidil

353

Mallory Chapter 18

354

27/1/05

2:55 pm

Page 354

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

2. Hypertrichosis with cranial abnormalities (‘hair collar’ sign) a. Peripheral collar of thick dark tuft of hair with an underlying form fruste of a neural tube closure defect and heterotopic brain tissue Pathogenesis

• Increase in hair growth by conversion of vellus to terminal hairs, or changes in the hair-growth cycle Diagnosis

• Clinical diagnosis • Rule out causes of hirsutism, if appropriate Differential diagnosis (See Table 18.5) Treatment

• Depends upon cause of hypertrichosis • Removal of excess hair: shaving, epilation, chemical depilatories, threading, waxing, electrolysis, laser hair removal Prognosis

• Depends upon cause of hypertrichosis; usually

Figure 18.22 Hirsutism caused by polycystic ovary disease in a teenage girl

Diagnosis

• History • Physical examination • Laboratory tests: serum testosterone and free testosterone, dehydroepiandrosterone sulfate, cortisol levels, urinary 17-ketosteroids, luteinizing hormone, follicle stimulating hormone, prolactin levels and pelvic ultrasound examination

permanent References Miller ML, Yeager JK. Hairy elbows. Arch Dermatol 1995; 131: 858–9 Wendelin DS, Pope DN, Mallory SB. Hypertrichosis. J Am Acad Dermatol 2003; 48: 161–79

Hirsutism

Differential diagnosis

• • • • •

Genetic predisposition in some ethnic groups Congenital adrenal hyperplasia Cushing syndrome Hyperprolactinemia Ovarian and adrenal tumors

Major points

• Hair in masculine pattern in females on face, chest, upper back, abdomen

Treatment

• Removal of excess hair: shaving, epilation,

• Often associated with other signs of virilization or polycystic ovary syndrome in teens (Figure 18.22)

•

chemical depilatories, threading, waxing, electrolysis, laser hair removal Oral contraceptives

Pathogenesis

Prognosis

• Abnormality of pituitary, adrenal glands or ovary

• Depends upon etiology of hirsutism, usually

with increase in male hormones

permanent

Mallory Chapter 18

27/1/05

2:55 pm

Page 355

Hair disorders

References Shum KW, Cullen DR, Messenger AG. Hair loss in women with hyperandrogenism: four cases responding to finasteride. J Am Acad Dermatol 2002; 47: 733–9 Sperling LC, Heimer WL. Androgen biology as a basis for the diagnosis and treatment of androgenic disorders in women. II. J Am Acad Dermatol 1993; 28: 901–16 Whiting DA. Diagnostic and predictive value of horizontal sections of scalp biopsy specimens in male pattern androgenetic alopecia. J Am Acad Dermatol 1993; 28: 755–63

ABNORMALITIES OF HAIR COLOR See Table 18.6

Menkes kinky hair syndrome Major points • Hair appears lightly pigmented, twisted, sparse • Microscopic hair examination: pili torti, trichorrhexis nodosa • General decrease in skin pigmentation • Progressive severe mental retardation and neurologic defects • Bony changes resembling scurvy • Tortuosities of cerebral and systemic vasculature • Diverticuli of the bladder Pathogenesis • Gene/gene locus: ATP7A (copper transporting ATPase enzyme)/Xp 13.3 • Abnormality of a copper binding protein important in cytoplasmic copper transport, causing an inappropriate copper distribution within the cells • Copper accumulates in fibroblasts and macrophages • Kinky hair results from a surplus of free sulfhydryl groups and a decrease in copper-dependent disulfide bonds • Hypopigmentation results from a decrease in tyrosinase, a copper-containing enzyme Diagnosis • Clinical presentation • Low serum copper and ceruloplasm levels • Genetic testing

Table 18.6

355

Abnormalities of hair color

Disorders associated with primary reduction of hair color Oculocutaneous albinism Chediak–Higashi syndrome Elejalde syndrome Griscelli syndrome Pili torti Menkes syndrome Uncombable hair Phenylketonuria Homocystinuria Prader–Willi syndrome Disorders associated with premature canities (graying) Autoimmune disease Vitiligo Alopecia areata Pernicious anemia Addison disease Hypothyroidism Hyperthyroidism Syndromes Progeria Werner syndrome Rothmund–Thomson syndrome Dyskeratosis congenita Down syndrome Cri du chat syndrome Böök syndrome Localized hypopigmentation (poliosis) Piebaldism Waardenburg syndrome Vitiligo Vogt–Koyanagi–Harada syndrome Alezzandrini syndrome Alopecia areata Tuberous sclerosis Halo nevus

Differential diagnosis • Child abuse • Congenital lipodystrophic diabetes • Trichothiodystrophy Treatment • No effective treatment is available Prognosis • Death usually before 1 year of age

Mallory Chapter 18

356

27/1/05

2:55 pm

Page 356

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

• Mildly affected patients can survive to adolescence or adulthood References

•

Chelly J, Tumer Z, Tonnesen T, et al. Isolation of a candidate gene for Menkes disease that encodes a potential heavy metal binding protein. Nature Genet 1993; 3: 14–19 Kodama H, Sato E, Yanagawa Y, et al. Biochemical indicator for evaluation of connective tissue abnormalities in Menkes’ disease. J Pediatr 2003; 142: 726–8

•

3. Visual acuity normal, but strabismus and nystagmus common Infections: children usually present with infection and fever in early childhood 1. Infections of the skin, lungs, and upper respiratory tract with Staphylococcus aureus, Streptococcus species 2. Natural killer cell function decreased Neurological deterioration is progressive: clumsiness, abnormal gait, paresthesias and other findings Accelerated phase: fever, hepatosplenomegaly, lymphadenopathy, pancytopenia; Epstein–Barr virus has been implicated Autosomal recessive

Menkes JH. Kinky hair disease; twenty five years later. Brain Dev 1988; 10: 77–9

•

Poulsen L, Horn N, Heilstrup H, et al. X-linked recessive Menkes disease: identification of partial gene deletions in affected males. Clin Genet 2002; 62: 449–57

•

Shim H, Harris ZL. Genetic defects in copper metabolism. J Nutr 2003; 133 (5 Suppl 1): 1527S–31S

Pathogenesis

• Caused by a mutation in the LYST gene on chromosome 1q

Chediak–Higashi syndrome

Diagnosis

Major points

• Clinical presentation • Giant lysosomal granules are seen in

• Hypopigmentation of skin and hair 1. Hair has a silvery tint because of large melanosome granules in the hair (Figure 18.23) 2. Loss of iris pigmentation with photophobia

•

polymorphnuclear leukocytes, melanosomes, and other cells Genetic testing

Differential diagnosis

• • • •

Elejalde syndrome Griscelli syndrome Menkes kinky hair syndrome Other immunodeficiencies

Treatment

• Supportive treatments with antibiotics • Bone marrow transplantation early Prognosis

• Usually fatal before age 10 years, unless patient undergoes successful bone marrow transplant References Haddad E, Le Deist F, Blanche S, et al. Treatment of Chediak–Higashi syndrome by allogeneic bone marrow transplantation: report of ten cases. Blood 1995; 85: 3328–33 Figure 18.23 Chediak–Higashi syndrome with silvery hair, mental retardation and numerous infections

Shiflett SL, Kaplan J, Ward DM. Chediak–Higashi syndrome: a rare disorder of lysosomes and lysosome related organelles. Pigment Cell Res 2002; 15: 251–7

Mallory Chapter 18

27/1/05

2:55 pm

Page 357

Hair disorders

Ward DM, Shiflett SL, Kaplan J. Chediak–Higashi syndrome: a clinical and molecular view of a rare lysosomal storage disorder. Curr Mol Med 2002; 2: 469–77

357

review of the literature. J Am Acad Dermatol 1998; 38: 295–300

Elejalde syndrome Griscelli syndrome Major points Major points

• Characterized by pigment dilution, • • • • • • • •

hepatosplenomegaly, lymphohistiocytosis, and T and B cell immunodeficiencies Immunodeficiency with frequent pyogenic infections, fever, neutropenia, thrombocytopenia Hair has a silvery gray tint secondary to the dispersal and clumping of melanin in the hair shaft Skin is lighter in color than in siblings and parents Neurologic dysfunction with cerebellar and bulbar signs, encephalopathy, seizures, retardation Accelerated phase in childhood is usually fatal Autosomal recessive Gene locus: 15q 21 Gene: Myosin VA (Type 1), RAB27A (Type 2)

• Characterized by silvery hair, severe CNS • • • •

dysfunction, abnormal inclusions in cells of all tissues Neurologic abnormalities No immunologic dysfunctions Autosomal recessive Elejalde syndrome and Griscelli syndrome Type 1 may be the same entity

References Bahadoran P, Ortonne JP, Ballotti R, de Saint-Basile G. Comment on Elejalde syndrome and relationship with Griscelli syndrome. Am J Med Genet 2003; 116A: 408–9

References

Duran-McKinster C, Rodriguez-Jurado R, Ridaura C, et al. Elejalde syndrome – a melanolysosomal neurocutaneous syndrome: clinical and morphological findings in 7 patients. Arch Dermatol 1999; 135: 182–6

Griscelli C, Durandy A, Guy-Grand D, et al. A syndrome associating partial albinism and immunodeficiency. Am J Med 1978; 65: 691–702

Elejalde BR, Holguin J, Valencia A, et al. Mutations affecting pigmentation in man: I. Neuroectodermal melanolysosomal disease. Am J Med Genet 1979; 3: 65–80

Kumar M, Sackey K, Schmalstieg F, et al. Griscelli syndrome: rare neonatal syndrome of recurrent hemophagocytosis. J Pediatr Hematol Oncol 2001; 23: 464–8

Ivanovich J, Mallory S, Storer T, et al. 12-year-old male with Elejalde syndrome (neuroectodermal melanolysosomal disease). Am J Med Genet 2001; 98: 313–16

Mancini AJ, Chan LS, Paller AS. Partial albinism with immunodeficiency: Griscelli syndrome: report of a case and

Mallory Chapter 18

27/1/05

2:55 pm

Page 358

Mallory Chapter 19

27/1/05

3:07 pm

Page 359

19 NAIL DISORDERS

Agnail

Beau’s lines

• Hang nail; hard spicules at edge of nail

• Uniform transverse grooves across the nail plate

Alopecia areata

• Shallow pits on surface of nail plate; geometric arrangement giving the appearance of a grid or screen; 60% of patients with alopecia areata have pitting which is reversible (Figure 19.1)

• • • •

usually affecting all nails (Figure 19.2) Thumbnails and great toenails more prominent than others Grooves move distally with nail growth Caused by an arrest in nail plate formation by systemic illness or toxins No treatment is needed

Anonychia

Blue nails

• Absence of nail from birth; associated with nail

• Associated with antimalarial drugs, argyria,

patella syndrome, ectodermal dysplasias, maternal hydantoin ingestion, Coffin–Siris syndrome and others

Figure 19.1 Pitting – commonly occurs in alopecia areata and psoriasis

bleomycin, congenital pernicious anemia, minocycline and Wilson disease (Figure 19.3)

Figure 19.2 Beau’s lines – horizontal ridge of all 20 nails following a severe illness

Mallory Chapter 19

360

27/1/05

3:07 pm

Page 360

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

• Clinical presentations

Figure 19.3

Nail pigmentation caused by minocycline

1. Congenital hypertrophic lateral nail folds a. Presents as a firm red swelling of lateral nail fold with tenderness (Figure 19.5) b. Usually disappears spontaneously after several months, but may require surgical intervention 2. Distal-lateral nail embedding a. Caused by uneven cutting of the nail plate with subsequent growth of the plate into an injured lateral nail fold b. Painful with exuberant granulation tissue around the edge of the embedded plate c. Complications: secondary infection (often Pseudomonas) and paronychia

Brachyonychia

• Short nails with width greater than length; associated with Rubinstein–Taybi syndrome, Down syndrome

Clubbing

• Bulbous, fusiform enlargement of distal portion of fingers and toes

• Lovibond’s angle >180° • Associated with cystic fibrosis, cyanotic cardiovascular diseases

Dystrophy

• General term describing nail changes. Examples: trauma, epidermal nevus, lichen striatus, psoriasis, twenty-nail dystrophy and others

Figure 19.4 Half-and-half nails – proximal nail is white and distal nail is pink; associated with renal disease

Half-and-half nails (Lindsay nails)

• Proximal nail is white (Figure 19.4) • Distal 20–50% of nail is red, pink, or brown • Seen in renal failure Hutchinson sign

• Periungual spread of pigmentation into the proximal and lateral nail folds

• An important indicator of subungual melanoma but not pathognomonic for it

Ingrown nails

• Common problem in infancy, childhood and teens

Figure 19.5 Congenital ingrown toenails – erythema and swelling of the lateral nail folds, often bilateral

Mallory Chapter 19

27/1/05

3:07 pm

Page 361

Nail disorders

361

d. Treatment: subungual packing with sterile cotton in uncomplicated cases with silver nitrate cauterization, oral antibiotics, topical steroid solutions. In complicated cases, surgical removal of the trapped nail plate e. Rarely, total ungual avulsion may be needed

Koilonychia

• Spoon-shaped or flat nails (Figure 19.6) • Associated with iron deficiency anemia • Can be idiopathic or familial

Figure 19.6 Koilonychia – congenital curving of toenails, a common finding in infants and young children

Leukonychia

• • • •

White nails (Figure 19.7) May be congenital or acquired May be totally white, or striped May be associated with multiple causes: alopecia areata, hypoalbuminemia, exfoliative dermatitis, Darier disease, pellagra, zinc deficiency

Macronychia

• Large but otherwise normal nail • Associated with neurofibromatosis, tuberous sclerosis

Malalignment of the great toenails

Figure 19.7 Leukonychia – banded type of unknown etiology. This had been present for many years

• Characterized by lateral deviation of the nail plate relative to the axis of the hallux (Figure 19.8)

• Transverse ridging, thickening and gradual • • • • • •

tapering towards the distal free edge with dicoloration May be discolored from intermittent hemorrhage or microbes May be unilateral or bilateral Surgical correction may be needed Predisposes to paronychia and ingrown nails Spontaneous improvement can be seen Autosomal dominant

Median nail dystrophy

• Split or canal in nail plate usually just off center from cuticle to free edge (Figure 19.9)

Figure 19.8 discomfort

Malalignment of the great toenails, causing

Mallory Chapter 19

362

27/1/05

3:07 pm

Page 362

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

• Elbow dysplasia, subluxation of the radial heads • Iliac horns (calcifications from the posterior aspect of the ilium)

• Other findings

• Figure 19.9 tic

Median nail dystrophy – caused by a habit

•

1. Renal abnormalities: glomerulonephritis, renal dysplasia, Goodpasture syndrome 2. Hypoplasia of scapulae 3. Scoliosis 4. Cloverleaf pigmentation of irides (Lester iris) 5. Laxity of skin 6. Hyperhidrosis 7. Autosomal dominant Gene: LMX1B (LIM-homeobox transcription factor 1β) Gene locus: 9q34.1

References

• Caused by trauma or idiopathic; most common on thumb

Mee’s lines

• White bands in nail plate which move with plate as it grows

• Associated with arsenic ingestion, cardiac insufficiency, pellagra, renal failure, sickle cell anemia

Micronychia

• Small but otherwise normal nail or nails • Associated with ectodermal dysplasia, dyskeratosis congenita, nail–patella syndrome

Bongers EM, Gubler MC, Knoers NV. Nail–patella syndrome. Overview on clinical and molecular findings. Pediatr Nephrol 2002; 17: 703–12 Bongers EM, Van Bokhoven H, Van Thienen MN, et al. The small patella syndrome: description of five cases from three families and examination of possible allelism with familial patella aplasia–hypoplasia and nail–patella syndrome. J Med Genet 2001; 38: 209–14 Dreyer SD, Zhou G, Baldini A, et al. Mutations in LMX1B cause abnormal skeletal patterning and renal dysplasia in nail patella syndrome. Nature Genet 1998; 19: 47–50 Ogden JA, Cross GL, Guidera KJ, Ganey TM. Nail patella syndrome. A 55-year follow-up of the original description. J Pediatr Orthop 2002; 11: 333–8 Stratigos AJ, Baden HP. Unraveling the molecular mechanisms of hair and nail genodermatoses. Arch Dermatol 2001; 137: 1465–71

Muehrcke’s nails

• Paired white parallel bands seen with hypoalbuminemia

• Bands do not move

Nevi

• Characterized by longitudinal pigmented bands (Figure 19.10)

• Usually solitary Nail–patella syndrome Synonym: congenital iliac horns syndrome, hereditary osteo-onychodysplasia syndrome • Onychodystrophy (medial thumbnails most involved) with hypoplasia and splitting with usual sparing of the toenails • Triangular lunulae • Absent or rudimentary patellae, with unstable knees

Onychogryphosis

• Acquired thickening (Figure 19.11) • Caused by trauma, aging or unknown etiology Onychoheteropia

• Misplaced nails

Mallory Chapter 19

27/1/05

3:07 pm

Page 363

Nail disorders

Onychomycosis

• Fungal infection of the nail (See Chapter 9) (Figures 19.14 and 19.15)

Onychophagia

• Nail biting Onychoschizia

• Splitting of nails into parallel layers, with a lamellar surface so that small pieces flake off Figure 19.10 Nevus of the nail matrix with linear dark band of pigmentation; because there is no pigment on the proximal nail fold, this is not Hutchinson sign; however, a biopsy of the nail matrix is suggested to rule out malignant melanoma

Onychorrhexis

• Excess longitudinal ridging Pachyonychia congenita

• Type I: Jadassohn–Lewandowsky syndrome

Figure 19.11 Onychogryphosis of the third toenail with onchomycosis of the great toenail

Onycholysis

• Separation of nail plate from nail bed at distal and lateral attachments (Figure 19.12)

• Caused by hypo- or hyperthyroidism, trauma, psoriasis, candidal infections, diabetes, phototoxic reactions to drugs (tetracycline, thorazine), or idiopathic

Onychomadesis

• Separation of entire nail plate (Figure 19.13)

•

1. Marked thickening of nails (subungual hyperkeratosis) (Figure 19.16) 2. Recurrent nail shedding 3. Plantar and palmar keratoses 4. Acral bullae 5. Follicular keratoses on buttocks and extremities 6. Hyperhidrosis of the palms and soles 7. Leukoplakia that histologically resembles a white sponge nevus and shows no tendency toward malignant degeneration 8. Mutation of keratin gene: KRT6A, KRT16 (keratin 6a, keratin 16), gene locus: 17q12q21, 12q13 Type II: Jackson-Lawler syndrome 1. Clinical findings of Type I plus 2 Bullae of palms and soles 3. Palmar/plantar hyperhidrosis 4. Steatocystoma multiplex 5. Epidermal cysts 6. Natal teeth 7. No mucosal lesions 8. Mutation of gene: KRT6B, KRT17 (keratin 6b, keratin 17) 9. Gene locus: 17q17-q21, 12q13

Differential diagnosis

• Mucocutaneous candidiasis • Onychomycosis

363

Mallory Chapter 19

364

27/1/05

3:07 pm

Page 364

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Figure 19.12 Onycholysis – lifting off of the nail plate from the nail bed

Figure 19.15 Onychomycosis – thickened distal nails with keratotic debris

Figure 19.13 Onychomadesis – complete shedding of nails after a severe illness

Figure 19.16 nails

Pachyonychia congenita – markedly thick

Treatment

• Surgical removal of nails if severe infections around the nails; keratolytic agents may be helpful Prognosis

• Chronic thickening of nails with chronic paronychia References

Figure 19.14 Onychomycosis – superficial white discoloration associated with Trichophyton rubrum in a child

Feinstein A, Friedman J, Schewach-Millet M. Pachyonychia congenita. J Am Acad Dermatol 1988; 19: 705–11 Paller AS, Moore JA, Scher R. Pachyonychia congenita tarda: a late-onset form of pachyonychia congenita. Arch Dermatol 1991; 127: 701–3 Su WPD, Chun SI, Hammond DE, Gordon H. Pachyonychia congenita: clinical study of 12 cases and review of the literature. Pediatr Dermatol 1990; 7: 33–8

Mallory Chapter 19

27/1/05

3:07 pm

Page 365

Nail disorders

Paronychia

2. Topical clindamycin solution 3. Drying agents: 4% thymol in chloroform one or two times a day (should not be used in children who put their hands in their mouth)

• Infection of periungual tissues • Common causes: sucking thumb or fingers • Characterized by painful erythematous induration • • • • • •

•

of proximal or lateral nail folds with fissuring (Figure 19.17) Cuticle is obliterated; nail folds round and replaced with granulation tissue Pus may be expressed Nail dystrophy with wavy undulation may result from inflammation in the proximal nail fold affecting the matrix Common organisms: Staphylococcus, Streptococcus and Candida Trauma to the proximal nail fold disrupts the cuticle, and in moist environment, organisms invade If multiple fingers and toes are involved, consider predisposing diseases: acrodermatitis enteropathica, mucocutaneous candidiasis, or immunodeficiency syndromes Treatment is difficult if predisposing factors are not addressed 1. Topical combination of steroid and antifungal agents (Mycolog®) used two or three times per day for 4–6 months

Pincer nail

• Overcurvature of the nails causing pain and partial strangulation dystrophy of the soft tissues (Figure 19.18)

Polyonychia

• Two or more separate nails on one digit Pseudomonas nail

• Greenish discoloration under the nail plate with onycholysis (Figure 19.19)

Psoriasis

• Occurs in 15–79% of children with cutaneous • • •

Figure 19.17 Paronychia – inflammation around the nail caused by Candida albicans

365

signs of psoriasis Pitting of the nail plate is most common; rarely can involve all 20 nails (Figure 19.20) Other findings: discoloration, onycholysis, distal subungual debris and oil spotting Periungual psoriasis can lead to marked nail dystrophy with hyperkeratosis and crumbling of the nail plate

Figure 19.18

Pincer nail causing pain in this teenager

Mallory Chapter 19

366

27/1/05

3:07 pm

Page 366

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Racquet nail

• Congenital abnormality of the nail, causing the •

nail to be broader and shorter Most common on the thumb

Red lunulae

• Seen in collagen vascular disease, alopecia areata, congestive heart failure

Splinter hemorrhages

• Associated with subacute bacterial endocarditis, trauma, vasculitis, cirrhosis, trichinosis, scurvy, psoriasis, chronic glomerulonephritis, Darier disease

Terry’s nails Figure 19.19 Pseudomonas infection of the nail bed causing yellow–green discoloration of the nail and the nail bed

• Distal 1–2 mm pink, proximal nail white • Seen with hypoalbuminemia or hepatic cirrhosis Trachyonychia

• Uniform roughness of surface of nail plate • Associated with ichthyosis vulgaris, ectodermal dysplasia, 20-nail dystrophy, others

Traumatic nail injury

• Injury to the nail, nail matrix, nail plate (Figures • •

19.21 and 19.22) Common in childhood Can cause permanent dystrophy

Twenty-nail dystrophy Figure 19.20 Psoriasis – hyperkeratotic plaques under nails with pitting

• Acquired dystrophy involving all 20 nails • Characterized by marked roughness of the nail

Pterygium

• Associated with dyskeratosis congenita, graft-

• • • •

versus-host disease, Raynaud disease, systemic sclerosis

•

• Wing-shaped destruction of nail matrix • Overgrowth of cuticle onto nail eventually destroying the nail, causing scarring

plates (trachyonychia) with longitudinal grooves, striations, onychorrhexis, distal chipping (Figure 19.23) Nails can be either thin or thick May be associated with lichen planus Cause unknown Course variable with improvement in 6 months to 16 years Treatment:

Mallory Chapter 19

27/1/05

3:08 pm

Page 367

Nail disorders

Figure 19.21 Trauma – residual damage to nail caused by slamming the finger in a car door

367

Figure 19.23 Twenty-nail dystrophy – all nails simultaneously developed trachyonychia

• Painful recurrent vesicles around the distal finger or nails

Yellow nails

• Thickened yellow nails • Associated with chronic lymphedema, pleural effusion, bronchiectasis, chronic bronchitis, rheumatoid arthritis, sinusitis, thyroid disease, psoriasis, pachyonychia congenita, drugs (e.g. tetracycline, penicillamine) References Adams BB. Jogger’s toenail. J Am Acad Dermatol 2003; 48: S58–9 Carroll LA, Laumann AD. Doxycycline-induced photoonycholysis. J Drugs Dermatol 2003; 2: 662–3 Cohen PR. Red lunulae: case report and literature review. J Am Acad Dermatol 1992; 26: 292–4 Figure 19.22 Trauma – hemorrhage under the nail from dropping a heavy object on the toe in a patient with hemophilia

1. Potent topical steroids may be of some benefit over 6 months 2. Clear nail lacquers

Whitlow

• Caused by herpes inoculation into finger tip or around nail

Daniel CR, Piraccini BM, Tosti A. The nail and hair in forensic science. J Am Acad Dermatol 2004; 50: 258–61 Feldman SR, Gammon WR. Unilateral Muehrcke’s lines following trauma. Arch Dermatol 1989; 125: 133–4 Jerasutus S, Suvanprakorn P, Kitchawengkul O. Twenty nail dystrophy. Arch Dermatol 1990; 126: 1068–70 Rich P, Scher RK. Nail psoriasis severity index: a useful tool for evaluation of nail psoriasis. J Am Acad Dermatol 2003; 49: 206–12 Saray Y, Seckin D, Gulec AT, et al. Nail disorders in hemodialysis patients and renal transplant recipients: a case–control study. J Am Acad Dermatol 2004; 50: 197–202

Mallory Chapter 19

27/1/05

3:08 pm

Page 368

Mallory Chapter 20

27/1/05

3:09 pm

Page 369

20 GENODERMATOSES AND SYNDROMES

ICHTHYOSES

• Heterogeneous group of inherited disorders • •

characterized by the accumulation of scale on the skin surface The word ichthyosis comes from the Greek word for fish, referring to the scaliness of the skin National organization: www.scalyskin.org (F.I.R.S.T.)

Collodion baby Major points

• Not specific for any particular ichthyosis • At birth: taut shiny membrane of skin that resembles plastic wrap (Figure 20.1)

• Membrane often becomes fissured and cracked • Ectropion

• • • • •

Eclabium Pinnae crumpled Tips of fingers often tapered Resolves with shedding of membrane Hair and nails usually normal

Pathogenesis • Seen in various types of ichthyosis: 1. Lamellar ichthyosis 2. Ichthyosis vulgaris 3. Congenital ichthyosiform erythroderma (CIE) 4. Netherton syndrome 5. Conradi–Hünermann syndrome 6. Ectodermal dysplasia 7. Ankyloblepharon ectodermal dysplasia clefting (AEC) syndrome 8. Gaucher disease type 2 • Caused by retention of or abnormal stratum corneum in utero Diagnosis • Histology: stratum corneum thickened with orthokeratosis Differential diagnosis • Postmaturity desquamation • Staphylococcal scalded skin syndrome

Figure 20.1

Collodion membrane in a neonate

Treatment • Emollients (e.g. ointments) • Increase ambient humidity • Maintain hygiene to prevent secondary infection • Surveillance of skin cultures • Artificial tears for ectropion • Stabilization of temperature

Mallory Chapter 20

370

27/1/05

3:09 pm

Page 370

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Prognosis

• Membrane usually shed in 7–10 days • Outcome depends upon type of ichthyosis References Akcakus M, Gunes T, Kurtoglu S, Ozturk A. Collodion baby associated with asymmetric crying facies: a case report. Pediatr Dermatol 2003; 20: 134–6 Buyse L, Graves C, Marks R, et al. Collodion baby dehydration: the danger of high transepidermal water loss. Br J Dermatol 1993; 129: 86–8 DiGiovanna JJ, Robinson-Bostom L. Ichthyosis: etiology, diagnosis, and management. Am J Clin Dermatol 2003; 4: 81–95 Matsumoto K, Muto M, Seki S, et al. Loricrin keratoderma: a cause of congenital ichthyosiform erythroderma and collodion baby. Br J Dermatol 2001; 145: 657–60 Raghunath M, Hennies HC, Ahvazi B, et al. Self-healing collodion baby: a dynamic phenotype explained by a particular transglutaminase-1 mutation. J Invest Dermatol 2003; 120: 224–8 Richard G, Ringpfeil F. Ichthyoses, erythrokeratodermas and related disorders. In Dermatology. Bolognia JL, Jorizzo JL, Rapini RP, eds. Mosby: London, 2003: 775–808

Ichthyosis vulgaris Major points

• • • • • • • • • •

Most common form of ichthyosis Incidence: 1 per 300–2000 persons Onset 3–12 months of age Personal or family history of dry skin or atopy Fine white scales, can be dark Location: extensor surfaces of the extremities and trunk, with extremities more severely affected (Figure 20.2) Margin of scale tends to turn up Flexural areas spared Hyperlinearity of the palms and keratosis pilaris is common Autosomal dominant

Pathogenesis

• Increased adhesiveness of the stratum corneum cells and failure to separate

• Gene locus: 1q21 • Gene: profilaggrin, FLG (filaggrin)

Figure 20.2 Ichthyosis vulgaris associated with hyperlinearity of the palms

Diagnosis

• Clinical presentation • Histology: absent granular layer and retention hyperkeratosis

• Electron microscopy: abnormally small and crumbly appearing keratohyaline granules Differential diagnosis

• X-linked ichthyosis in a male • Sjögren–Larssen syndrome • Xerosis Treatment

• Topical keratolytic agents • α-hydroxyacids • Moisturize skin with emollients immediately after bathing and frequently through the day Prognosis

• Life-long disorder with exacerbations in dry (winter) weather References Okulicz JF, Schwartz RA. Hereditary and acquired ichthyosis vulgaris. Int J Dermatol 2003; 42: 95–8 Presland RB, Boggess D, Lewis SP, et al. Loss of normal profilaggrin and filaggrin in flaky tail (ft/ft) mice: an animal model for the filaggrin-deficient skin disease ichthyosis vulgaris. J Invest Dermatol 2000; 115: 1072–81 Smack DP, Korge BP, James WD. Keratin and keratinization. J Am Acad Dermatol 1994; 30: 85–102

Mallory Chapter 20

27/1/05

3:09 pm

Page 371

Genodermatoses and syndromes

Williams ML, Elias PM. From basket weave to barrier. Arch Dermatol 1993; 129: 626–9

• Increased adhesiveness of the stratum corneum

Zhong W, Cui B, Zhang Y, et al. Linkage analysis suggests a locus of ichthyosis vulgaris on 1q22. J Hum Genet 2003; 48: 390–2

• Gene locus: Xp22.32 • Gene: STS (steroid sulfatase)

371

cells and failure of these cells to separate

Diagnosis

X-linked ichthyosis

• Clinical presentation in a male, often with a

Synonym: steroid sulfatase deficiency

• Enzyme assay of scale, cultured fibroblasts,

Major points

• Lipoprotein electrophoresis: rapid mobility of

• Incidence: 1 per 2000–6000 males • Placental steroid sulfatase deficiency syndrome with failure to initiate or progress in labor

• Begins in the first year of life • Scales large, thick, adherent and dark (dirty • • • • • •

appearance) (Figure 20.3) Generalized involvement, milder on face May involve flexures and neck Slightly thickened, scaly palms and soles Asymptomatic corneal opacities (50% adult males, some female carriers) Cryptorchidism (20%) X-linked recessive inheritance (males only)

positive family history keratinocytes or blood leukocytes low-density lipoproteins

• Demonstration of gene mutation • Histology: nondiagnostic; shows retention hyperkeratosis Differential diagnosis

• Ichthyosis vulgaris • Sjögren–Larssen syndrome Treatment

• Topical keratolytic agents: α-hydroxyacids • Emollients immediately after bathing and frequently through the day

Pathogenesis

• Increase ambient humidity

• Cholesterol sulfate in epidermis is built up

Prognosis

• Persistent; worsens in dry weather and may resolve in humid environments

• Risk for testicular carcinoma and hypogonadism References Cuevas-Covarrubias SA, Jimenez-Vaca AL, Gonzalez-Huerta LM, et al. Somatic and germinal mosaicism for the steroid sulfatase gene deletion in a steroid sulfatase deficiency carrier. J Invest Dermatol 2002; 119: 972–5 Hernandez-Martin A, Gonzalez-Sarmiento R, De Unamuno P. X-linked ichthyosis: an update. Br J Dermatol 1999; 141: 617–27 Kashork CD, Sutton VR, Fonda Allen JS, et al. Low or absent unconjugated estriol in pregnancy: an indicator for steroid sulfatase deficiency detectable by fluorescence in situ hybridization and biochemical analysis. Prenat Diagn 2002; 22: 1028–32

Figure 20.3 the arms

X-linked ichthyosis – dark brown scaling on

Zettersten E, Man M-Q, Sato J, et al. Recessive X-linked ichthyosis: role of cholesterol-sulfate accumulation in the barrier abnormality. J Invest Dermatol 1998; 111: 784–90

Mallory Chapter 20

372

27/1/05

3:09 pm

Page 372

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Lamellar ichthyosis

Diagnosis

Major points

• Clinical diagnosis • Histology: massive orthohyperkeratosis and

• Incidence: 1 per 300 000 persons • Collodion membrane at birth • Large, dark, plate-like scales (generalized) with • • • • • • • •

fissuring between scales (Figure 20.4) Mild erythroderma Ectropion Eclabium Dystrophic nails Alopecia No abnormality of mucosa or teeth Decreased sweating Autosomal recessive

Pathogenesis

• Increased cell hyperplasia of the basal cells and • • • •

increased transit rate through the epidermis Decreased transit time of epidermal cells with increased mitotic activity Alteration of scale lipids Gene defect in transglutaminase 1 (TGM1) that catalyzes cross-linking of proteins in the upper layers of the epidermis Gene locus: 14q11.2, 2q33-35, 19p12-q12

mild/moderate acanthosis

• Genetic testing Differential diagnosis

• Congenital ichthyosiform erythroderma • • •

(nonbullous) Sjögren–Larssen syndrome Netherton syndrome Other ichthyoses

Treatment

• Topical keratolytic agents • Moisturize skin with emollients immediately after • •

bathing and frequently through the day Oral retinoids (isotretinoin, acetretin) Increase ambient humidity

Prognosis

• Persistent life-long hyperkeratosis and peeling • Secondary infection common References Akiyama M, Sawamura D, Shimizu H. The clinical spectrum of nonbullous congenital ichthyosiform erythroderma and lamellar ichthyosis. Clin Exp Dermatol 2003; 28: 235–40 Allen DM, Esterly NB. Significant systemic absorption of tacrolimus after topical application in a patient with lamellar ichthyosis. Arch Dermatol 2002; 138: 1259–60 DiGiovanna JJ, Robinson-Bostom L. Ichthyosis: etiology, diagnosis, and management. Am J Clin Dermatol 2003; 4: 81–95 Hennies HC, Kuster W, Wiebe V, et al. Genotype/phenotype correlation in autosomal recessive lamellar ichthyosis. Am J Hum Genet 1998; 62: 1052–61 Huber M, Rettler I, Bernasconi K, et al. Mutations of keratinocyte transglutaminase in lamellar ichthyosis. Science 1995; 267: 525–8

Congenital ichthyosiform erythroderma (nonbullous) (CIE) Major points Figure 20.4 Lamellar ichthyosis – thick, dark brown, plate-like scales in an adult

• Born with collodion membrane • Generalized scaling and erythroderma, not as severe as lamellar ichthyosis (Figure 20.5)

Mallory Chapter 20

27/1/05

3:09 pm

Page 373

Genodermatoses and syndromes

• • • • • • • •

Scales fine and white on face, trunk and scalp Scales large, plate-like and dark on legs Ectropion Corneal dystrophy Sparse hair Nail dystrophy Small stature (occasional) Mental retardation (occasional)

373

Prognosis

• Persistent, life-long scaling and erythema (can be mild to severe) References Akiyama M, Sawamura D, Shimizu H. The clinical spectrum of nonbullous congenital ichthyosiform erythroderma and lamellar ichthyosis. Clin Exp Dermatol 2003; 28: 235–40 Laiho E, Ignatius J, Mikkola H, et al. Transglutaminase 1 mutations in autosomal recessive congenital ichthyosis: private and recurrent mutations in an isolated population. Am J Hum Genet 1997; 61: 529–38 Porter RM, Lane EB. Phenotypes, genotypes and their contribution to understanding keratin function. Trends Genet 2003; 19: 278–85 Williams ML, Elias PM. Enlightened therapy of the disorders of cornification. Clin Dermatol 2003; 21: 269–73

Epidermolytic hyperkeratosis Synonym: bullous congenital ichthyosiform erythroderma Figure 20.5 Congenital ichthyosiform erythroderma – with erythema and fine scales

Pathogenesis

• Epidermal cell turnover markedly increased; • • •

decrease in transit time of epidermal cells Autosomal recessive or dominant Gene locus: 14q11.2 Gene: TGM1 (transglutaminase-1)

Major points

• • • • •

Incidence is 1 per 300 000 births Blisters, erosions or erythema at birth Generalized scaling develops in later infancy Scales are warty, ridged and columnar (Figure 20.6) Spontaneous erosions throughout life where scales come off

Diagnosis

• Clinical diagnosis • Histology: nondiagnostic; focal or extensive parakeratosis and acanthosis Differential diagnosis

• Lamellar ichthyosis • Other ichthyoses Treatment

• Topical keratolytic agents • Moisturize skin with emollients immediately after •

bathing and frequently through the day Increase ambient humidity

Figure 20.6 Epidermolytic hyperkeratosis with columnar thick odiferous scales

Mallory Chapter 20

374

• • • • •

27/1/05

3:09 pm

Page 374

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Prominent keratoderma on the palms and soles No ectropion Heat intolerance Secondary infection common, resulting in malodor Autosomal dominant or sporadic

Pathogenesis

• Chromosomes 12q and 17q • Gene: keratin 1 and 10 • Increased germinative cell hyperplasia of the basal •

cells and increased transit rate through the epidermis Increased transepidermal water loss

Diagnosis

• Clinical presentation • Histology: characteristic intracellular vacuolar •

degeneration of upper spinous/granular cell layers and large clumped keratohyalin granules Prenatal diagnosis by fetal skin biopsy at 20–22 weeks’ gestation

Differential diagnosis

• Lamellar ichthyosis • Congenital ichthyosiform erythroderma • • • • • •

(nonbullous) Epidermolysis bullosa at birth Incontinentia pigmenti at birth Staphylococcal scalded skin syndrome Ichthyosis hystrix Conradi–Hünermann syndrome Other ichthyoses

References Nazzaro V, Ermacora E, Santucci B, Caputo R. Epidermolytic hyperkeratosis: generalized form in children from parents with systematized linear form. Br J Dermatol 1990; 122: 417–22 Porter RM, Lane EB. Phenotypes, genotypes and their contribution to understanding keratin function. Trends Genet 2003; 19: 278–85 Schmuth M, Yosipovitch G, Williams ML, et al. Pathogenesis of the permeability barrier abnormality in epidermolytic hyperkeratosis. J Invest Dermatol 2001; 117: 837–47 Siegel DH, Howard R. Molecular advances in genetic skin diseases. Curr Opin Pediatr 2002; 14: 419–25 Smith F. The molecular genetics of keratin disorders. Am J Clin Dermatol 2003; 4: 347–64 Virtanen M, Smith SK, Gedde-Dahl T Jr, et al. Splice site and deletion mutations in keratin (KRT1 and KRT10) genes: unusual phenotypic alterations in Scandinavian patients with epidermolytic hyperkeratosis. J Invest Dermatol 2003; 121: 1013–20

Harlequin ichthyosis Major points

• Born with massive hyperkeratotic plates resembling • • • •

the diamond pattern on a harlequin’s costume (Figure 20.7) Distorted facial features with severe ectropion, eclabium, and rudimentary ears and nose Deformities of fingers/toes Premature delivery Autosomal recessive

Treatment

• Increase ambient humidity • Topical keratolytic agents • Bathing, add antimicrobial agents to water (e.g. • • •

dilute sodium hypochlorite dilution to reduce odor) (See Chapter 21) Moisturize skin with emollients immediately after bathing Low-dose retinoids (e.g. isotretinoin) Support group

Prognosis

• Persistent, life-long scaling • Malodor is a persistent problem • Secondary infection is common

Figure 20.7

Harlequin fetus – massive plate-like scales

Mallory Chapter 20

27/1/05

3:09 pm

Page 375

Genodermatoses and syndromes

Pathogenesis

• Gene locus: 18q21.3 • Genetic heterogeneity and division into three subtypes: in types 1 and 2 profilaggrin is expressed but not processed to filaggrin; type 3 lacks profilaggrin; types 2 and 3 both have keratins 6 and 16 in addition to normal keratins 5/14 and 1/10 seen in all three subtypes Diagnosis

• • • •

Clinical appearance Histology: compact orthohyperkeratosis Electron microscopy: absence of lamellar bodies Prenatal diagnosis by fetal skin biopsy at 20–22 weeks’ gestation

Differential diagnosis • Collodion membrane Treatment • Oral retinoids (e.g. isotretinoin, acetretin) within a few days of birth has increased survival in a few patients • Topical keratolytic agents • Moisturize skin with emollients immediately after bathing and frequently through the day • Ophthalmology consultation – important to open eyes to prevent blindness • Management of fluid and electrolytes

Gunes T, Akcakus M, Kurtoglu S, et al. Harlequin baby with ecthyma gangrenosum. Pediatr Dermatol 2003; 20: 529–30 Prasad RS, Pejaver RK, Hassan A, et al. Management and follow-up of harlequin siblings. Br J Derm 1994: 130; 650–3 Singh S, Bhura M, Maheshwari A, et al. Successful treatment of harlequin ichthyosis with acetretin. Int J Dermatol 2001; 40: 472–3 Zeeuwen PL, Dale BA, de Jongh GJ, et al. The human cystatin M/E gene (CST6): exclusion candidate gene for harlequin ichthyosis. J Invest Dermatol 2003; 121: 65–8

Conradi–Hünermann–Happle syndrome Synonym: X-linked dominant chondrodysplasia punctata Major points • Thick scaling in whorl-like pattern (early) following Blaschko lines which clears in 3–6 months, followed by follicular atrophoderma (Figure 20.8) • Asymmetrical, calcific, epiphyseal stippling by X-ray in newborn • Unusual facies: flat facies with depressed nasal bridge • Joint contractures • Kyphoscoliosis • Patchy, scarring alopecia • Dry, lusterless hair

Prognosis • Very poor, despite treatment • Most die perinatally from sepsis or massive hyperkeratotic plaques interfering with respiration and feeding • Survivors shed restrictive scale and develop severe congenital ichthyosiform erythroderma (CIE) phenotype References Chan Y-C, Tay Y-K, Tan L K-S, et al. Harlequin ichthyosis in association with hypothyroidism and juvenile rheumatoid arthritis. Pediatr Dermatol 2003; 20: 421–6 Culican SM, Custer PL. Repair of cicatricial ectropion in an infant with harlequin ichthyosis using engineered human skin. Am J Ophthalmol 2002; 134: 442–3 Fleckman P, Hager B, Dale BA. Harlequin ichthyosis keratinocytes in lifted culture differentiate poorly by morphologic and biochemical criteria. J Invest Dermatol 1997; 109: 36–8

375

Figure 20.8 Conradi–Hünermann syndrome – hyperkeratotic streaks following Blaschko lines

Mallory Chapter 20

376

• • • • •

27/1/05

3:09 pm

Page 376

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Shortening of humeri and femurs Asymmetrical skeletal deformities Lens opacities, other eye problems Normal mentation X-linked dominant (seen in girls), or autosomal dominant

Pathogenesis

• Gene locus: Xp11.22-p11.23 • Gene: delta (8)–delta (7) sterol isomerase (emopamil-binding protein)

• Mosaic disorder Diagnosis

• Clinical presentation • Genetic testing Differential diagnosis

• Epidermolytic hyperkeratosis • Goltz syndrome • Other ichthyoses Treatment

• Topical keratolytic agents • Moisturize skin with emollients immediately after bathing and frequently through the day

• Increase ambient humidity Prognosis

• Scaling resolves by 12 months, but other features persist References Braverman N, Lin P, Moebius FF, et al. Mutations in the gene encoding 3-beta-hydroxysteroid-delta(8),delta(7)isomerase cause X-linked dominant Conradi–Hunermann syndrome. Nature Genet 1999; 22: 291–4 Bruch D, Megahed M, Majewski F, Ruzicka T. Ichthyotic and psoriasiform skin lesions along Blaschko’s lines in a woman with X-linked dominant chondrodysplasia punctata. J Am Acad Dermatol 1995; 33: 356–60 Corbí MR, Conejo-Mir JS, Linares M, et al. Conradi–Hünermann syndrome with unilateral distribution. Pediatr Dermatol 1998; 15: 299–303 Milunsky JM, Maher TA, Metzenberg AB. Molecular, biochemical, and phenotypic analysis of a hemizygous male with a severe atypical phenotype for X-linked dominant Conradi–Hunermann–Happle syndrome and a mutation in EBP. Am J Med Genet 2003; 116A: 249–54

Offiah AC, Mansour S, Jeffrey I, et al. Greenberg dysplasia (HEM) and lethal X linked dominant Conradi–Hunermann chondrodysplasia punctata (CDPX2): presentation of two cases with overlapping phenotype. J Med Genet 2003; 40: 129 Wessels MW, Den Hollander NJ, De Krijger RR, et al. Fetus with an unusual form of nonrhizomelic chondrodysplasia punctata: case report and review. Am J Med Genet 2003; 120A: 97–104 Yanagihara M, Ueda K, Asano N, et al. Usefulness of histopathologic examination of thick scales in the diagnosis of X-linked dominant chondrodysplasia punctata (Happle). Pediatr Dermatol 1996; 13: 1–4

PALMOPLANTAR KERATODERMAS Major points • Characteristic thickening of the palms and soles (Figure 20.9) • Three major patterns: diffuse, focal or punctuate (Figure 20.10) • Can be inherited (autosomal or recessive) or acquired • Can be associated with ichthyoses or other abnormalities • Associated syndromes: Unna–Thost syndrome, Vohwinkel syndrome, pachyonychia congenita, tyrosinemia type II, epidermolytic hyperkeratosis, hidrotic ectodermal dysplasia, and other dermatoses such as psoriasis, atopic dermatitis, etc. Pathogenesis • Abnormalities of keratin 1, 9, 16, connexin 26, loricrin, desmoplakin, others Diagnosis • Clinical features Treatment • Salicylic acid 4–6% in petrolatum (watch for salicylism) • Mechanical debridement • Oral retinoids have variable effect Prognosis • Persistent, can be progressive References Kimyai-Asadi A, Kotcher LB, Jih MH. The molecular basis of hereditary palmoplantar keratodermas. J Am Acad Dermatol 2002; 47: 327–43

Mallory Chapter 20

27/1/05

3:09 pm

Page 377

Genodermatoses and syndromes

377

Whittock NV, Ashton GHS, Dopping-Hepenstal PJC, Gratian MJ. Striate palmoplantar keratoderma resulting from desmoplakin haploinsufficiency. J Invest Deramtol 1999; 113: 940–6 Yan AC, Aasi SZ, Alms WJ, et al. Aquagenic palmoplantar keratoderma. J Am Acad Dermatol 2001; 44: 696–9

OTHER GENODERMATOSES Neurofibromatosis Major points Figure 20.9 Palmoplantar keratoderma with yellow thickened plaques

Figure 20.10

• Neurofibromatosis type 1 (von Recklinghausen disease) 1. Incidence 1 : 3500 of the general population 2. Characterized by multiple café au lait macules and neurofibromas in the skin, CNS, bones, muscles and endocrine system 3. Diagnostic criteria (must have two for diagnosis) a. ≥6 café au lait macules which are >5 mm (before puberty) and >1.5 cm (after puberty) (Figure 20.11) b. Axillary freckling (Crowe sign) (Figure 20.12) c. ≥2 Lisch nodules (iris hamartomas) d. Distinctive osseous lesion such as sphenoid dysplasia or thinning of long bone cortex with or without pseudarthrosis e. Optic glioma f. ≥2 neurofibromas or a plexiform neurofibroma (large doughy mass with or without underlying limb hypertrophy which may be present at birth) (Figures 20.13 and 20.14)

Punctate palmoplantar keratoderma

McGrath JA, Eady RA. Recent advances in the molecular basis of inherited skin diseases. Adv Genet 2001; 43: 1–32 McLean WH. Epithelial Genetics Group. Genetic disorders of palm skin and nail. J Anat 2003; 202: 133–41 Paller AS. The molecular basis for the palmoplantar keratodermas. Pediatr Dermatol 1999; 16: 483–5 Richard G. Connexin disorders of the skin. Adv Dermatol 2001; 17: 243–77 Smith F. The molecular genetics of keratin disorders. Am J Clin Dermatol 2003; 4: 347–64

Figure 20.11

Neurofibromatosis – café au lait macules

Mallory Chapter 20

378

27/1/05

3:09 pm

Page 378

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Figure 20.12 Neurofibromatosis – Crowe sign with freckling on neck or axillae

•

g. First-degree relative with neurofibromatosis type 1 4. Neurologic: learning disorders, mental retardation, seizures, intracranial tumors 5. Ophthalmic: Lisch nodules, proptosis, ptosis, optic gliomas, congenital glaucoma 6. Skeletal: scoliosis, kyphosis, pseudarthrosis, macrocephaly, scalloping of vertebrae, short stature 7. Endocrine abnormalities: sexual precocity 8. Other associations: pheochromocytoma, Wilms tumor, leukemia and other malignancies 9. Autosomal dominant with 50% spontaneous mutations Neurofibromatosis type 2 1. Acoustic neuromas of the eighth cranial nerve (90% bilateral) 2. Multiple CNS tumors (various types) 3. Few café au lait macules or neurofibromas 4. No axillary freckling 5. No iris hamartomas (Lisch nodules) 6. Autosomal dominant

Pathogenesis • Neurofibromas are caused by loss of a tumor suppressor gene with uncontrolled growth of tissues • Neurofibromatosis type 1 1. Gene locus: chromosome 17q11.2 2. Gene: neurofibromin, a protein that acts as a negative feedback control for the ras protooncogene (tumor suppressor gene) • Neurofibromatosis type 2 1. Gene locus: 22q12.2

Figure 20.13 Neurofibromatosis – plexiform neurofibroma on chin; also note the café au lait macules on the neck

Figure 20.14 Neurofibromatosis – numerous neurofibromas in an adult

2. Gene: NF2, merlin (Moesin, Ezrin, RadixinLike proteIN) Diagnosis

• See Major points

Mallory Chapter 20

27/1/05

3:09 pm

Page 379

Genodermatoses and syndromes

Differential diagnosis

• Neurofibromas:

•

1. Lipomas 2. Epidermal cysts 3. Intradermal nevi 4. Anetoderma Café au lait macules: 1. McCune–Albright syndrome 2. Watson syndrome 3. Bannayan–Riley–Ruvalcaba syndrome 4. Epidermal nevus syndrome 5. Proteus syndrome

Treatment

• Annual visits (more frequent, as indicated) with a clinician familiar with neurofibromatosis type 1

• Patients should be followed for complications:

• • •

optic glioma, neural tumors, developmental disabilities, vascular problems, elevated blood pressure, orthopedic problems, malignancy, psychological problems Surgical excision of neurofibromas that are rapidly growing or painful Genetic testing is not routine or necessary in the majority of patients Specific treatment geared to specific complications

Prognosis

• Type 1: progressive and variable; may be an •

increase in complications around puberty or pregnancy Type 2: deafness usually in adulthood

References Ablon J. Parents’ responses to their child’s diagnosis of neurofibromatosis 1. Am J Med Genet 2000; 93: 136–42 Dasgupta B, Gutmann DH. Neurofibromatosis 1: closing the GAP between mice and men. Curr Opin Genet Dev 2003; 13: 20–7 DeBella K, Szudek J, Friedman JM. Use of the National Institutes of Health criteria for diagnosis of neurofibromatosis 1 in children. Pediatrics 2000; 105: 608–14 Dugoff L, Sujansky E. Neurofibromatosis type 1 and pregnancy. Am J Med Genet 1996; 66: 7–10 Drappier J-C, Khosrotehrani K, Zeller J, et al. Medical management of neurofibromatosis 1: a cross-sectional study of 383 patients. J Am Acad Dermatol 2003; 49: 440–4

379

Gutmann D, Aylsworth A, Carley J, et al. The diagnostic evaluation and multidisciplinary management of neurofibromatosis 1 and neurofibromatosis 2. J Am Med Assoc 1997; 278: 51–7 Evans DGR, Trueman L, Wallace A, et al. Genotype/phototype correlations in type 2 neurofibromatosis (NF2): evidence for more severe disease associated with truncating mutations. J Med Genet 1998; 35: 450–5 Goldberg Y, Dibbern K, Klein J, et al. Neurofibromatosis type 1 – an update and review for the primary pediatrician. Clin Pediatr 1996; 35: 545–61 Johnson NS, Saal HM, Lovell AM, Schorry EK. Social and emotional problems in children with neurofibromatosis type 1: evidence and proposed interventions. J Pediatr 1999; 134: 767–72 Kandt RS. Tuberous sclerosis complex and neurofibromatosis type 1: the two most common neurocutaneous diseases. Neurol Clin 2003; 21: 983–1004 McLaughlin ME, Jacks T. Neurofibromatosis type 1. Methods Mol Biol 2003; 222: 223–37 Task Force: Eichenfield LF, Levy ML, Paller AS, Riccardi VM. Guidelines of care for neurofibromatosis type 1. Academy guidelines. J Am Acad Dermatol 1997; 37: 625–30 Van Es S, North KN, McHugh K, De Silva M. MRI findings in children with neurofibromatosis type 1: a prospective study. Pediatr Radiol 1996; 26: 478–87

Tuberous sclerosis complex Synonym: Bourneville disease Major points

• Incidence: 5 per 100 000 • Characterized by a triad of features (commonly, only one or two of these classic features is present): 1. Adenoma sebaceum (angiofibromas) (>50%) a. Begins at ages 2–5 years as pink/red small papules on the cheeks and nasolabial folds and they enlarge slowly over time 2. Mental retardation in 30–65%; ranges from mild to severe 3. Seizures or infantile spasms (80%) Pathogenesis

• Gene locus/gene: 1. TSC-1, 9q34/ hamartin (tumor suppressor gene)

Mallory Chapter 20

380

27/1/05

3:09 pm

Page 380

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

2. TSC-2, 16p.13.3/ tuberin (GAP protein)

• 50–75% of cases are sporadic Diagnosis • Diagnostic criteria (see Table 20.1) • Examination with a Wood’s light can aid in the visualization of the hypopigmented macules in light-skinned individuals • Examination of family members • Histology (angiofibroma): dermal fibrosis and vasodilatation • Histology (shagreen patch): increased collagen and elastin • MRI can demonstrate CNS hamartomas Differential diagnosis • Facial lesions 1. Acne 2. Milia 3. Trichoepitheliomas 4. Molluscum contagiosum 5. Seborrheic dermatitis • Hypopigmented macules 1. Vitiligo 2. Nevus depigmentosus 3. Pityriasis alba 4. Hypomelanosis of Ito 5. Nevus anemicus 6. Postinflammatory hypopigmentation 7. Tinea versicolor • Periungual fibromas 1. Warts 2. Infantile digital fibromatosis Treatment • Hypopigmented macules – none needed • Adenoma sebaceum: CO2 laser or other destructive therapy • Close follow-up by pediatrician and specialists as indicated Prognosis • Variable • Some patients have severe CNS difficulties, some have severe development of angiofibromas, others have only minor stigmata of the disease and are only diagnosed when a family member is diagnosed • Hypopigmented lesions are static, or become less obvious with time

Table 20.1 Diagnostic criteria for tuberous sclerosis (TSC)

Definite TSC: either one primary feature, two secondary features or one secondary plus two tertiary features Probable TSC: either one secondary plus one tertiary feature or three tertiary features Suspect TSC: either one secondary feature or two tertiary features Primary features Facial angiofibromas (adenoma sebaceum) Multiple ungual fibromas Cortical tuber (histologically confirmed) Subependymal nodule or giant cell astrocytoma (histologically confirmed) Multiple calcified subependymal nodules protruding into the ventricle (radiographic evidence) Multiple retinal astrocytomas Secondary features Affected first-degree relative Cardiac rhabdomyomas (histologic or radiographic confirmation), often multiple Retinal hamartoma or achromic patch Cerebral tubers (radiographic confirmation) Noncalcified subependymal nodules (radiographic confirmation) Shagreen patch (connective tissue nevus) – most common in lumbar area (Figure 20.15) Forehead plaque (angiofibromas) Renal angiomyolipoma (radiographic or histologic confirmation) Renal cysts (histologic confirmation) Pulmonary lymphangioleiomyomatosis (histology required) Tertiary features Hypomelanotic macules/poliosis (white patches of hair) (Figure 20.16) Confetti skin lesions Renal cysts (radiographic evidence) Randomly distributed enamel pits in teeth Hamartomatous rectal polyps (histologic confirmation) Bone cysts (radiographic evidence) Pulmonary lymphangioleiomyomatosis (radiographic evidence) Cerebral white matter ‘migration tracts’ o heterotopias (radiographic evidence) Gingival fibroma Hamartoma of the other organs (histologic confirmation) Infantile spasms Continued...

Mallory Chapter 20

27/1/05

3:09 pm

Page 381

Genodermatoses and syndromes

Table 20.1

Continued

Other findings Pneumothorax Diffuse bronzing Retinal gliomas Optic atrophy Mental retardation Seizures

381

References Dahan D, Fenichel GM, El-Said R. Neurocutaneous syndromes. Adolesc Med State Art Rev 2002; 13: 495–509 Kandt RS. Tuberous sclerosis complex and neurofibromatosis type 1: the two most common neurocutaneous diseases. Neurol Clin 2002; 20: 941–64 Kwiatkowski DJ. Tuberous sclerosis: from tubers to mTOR. Ann Hum Genet 2003; 67: 87–96 Narayanan V. Tuberous sclerosis complex: genetics to pathogenesis. Pediatr Neurol 2003; 29: 404–9 Tsao H. Update on familial cancer syndromes and the skin. J Am Acad Dermatol 2000; 42: 939–69 Vanderhooft SL, Francis JS, Pagon RA, et al. Prevalence of hypopigmented macules in a healthy population. J Pediatr 1996; 129: 355–61 Zuvlunov A, Esterly NB. Neurocutaneous syndromes associated with pigmentary skin lesions. J Am Acad Dermatol 1995; 32: 915–35

Basal cell nevus syndrome

Figure 20.15 lower back

Tuberous sclerosis – shagreen patch on

Synonyms: nevoid basal cell carcinoma syndrome, Gorlin syndrome Major points

• Multiple basal cell carcinomas at an early age (Figure 20.17)

• Palmoplantar pits • Multiple jaw cysts (odontogenic keratocysts) with malignant potential

• Skeletal abnormalities

Figure 20.16 macules

Tuberous sclerosis – hypopigmented

• • • • • • •

1. Spina bifida occulta 2. Rib anomalies (splayed, bifid, fused, missing, etc.) 3. Scoliosis 4. Short fourth metacarpals 5. Mandibular prognathism 6. Vertebral anomalies 7. Pectus excavatum Hypertelorism Medulloblastoma Mental retardation Calcification of the falx cerebri Agenesis of the corpus callosum Frontal bossing Autosomal dominant

Mallory Chapter 20

382

27/1/05

3:09 pm

Page 382

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

References Barbagallo JS, Kolodzieh MS, Silverberg NB, Weinberg JM. Neurocutaneous disorders. Dermatol Clin 2002; 20: 547–60, viii Boutet N, Bignon Y-J, Drouin-Garraud V, et al. Spectrum of PTCH1 mutations in French patients with Gorlin syndrome. J Invest Dermatol 2003; 121: 478–81 Kulkarni P, Brashear R, Chuang TY. Nevoid basal cell carcinoma syndrome in a person with dark skin. J Am Acad Dermatol 2003; 49: 332–5 LeSueur BW, Silvis NG, Hansen RC. Basal cell carcinoma in children: report of 3 cases. Arch Dermatol 2000; 136: 370–2 Turner MB, Mallory SB. Nevoid basal cell carcinoma syndrome. Curr Opin Dermatol 1997; 4: 162–7

Figure 20.17 Basal cell nevus syndrome – with basal cell carcinoma resembling a nevus

EHLERS–DANLOS SYNDROME Synonym: cutis hyperelastica

Pathogenesis

Major points

• Gene locus: 9q22.3, 9q31 • Gene: PTC1 (patched gene) (PTC protein binds

• Ehlers–Danlos syndrome I. Gravis type (classic,

•

and inhibits transmembrane protein SMOOTHENED (SMO) Histology: similar to ordinary basal cell carcinomas

Diagnosis • Clinical features • X-rays looking for skeletal abnormalities and odontogenic keratocysts • Biopsy of suspicious lesion

•

Differential diagnosis • Melanocytic nevus • See Table 17.2 Therapy • Careful periodic evaluation to assess development of basal cell carcinoma and other abnormalities • Radiotherapy should be avoided • Removal of growing lesions • Sun avoidance, sunscreens • Genetic counseling Prognosis • Slow progression of basal cell carcinomas, jaw cysts • Depends upon behavior of tumors

•

severe): skin fragility and hyperextensibility; soft, velvety skin; joint hypermobility; easily bruised skin; atrophic scars; varicose veins (Figure 20.18) 1. Autosomal dominant 2. Biochemical defect: COL5A1, or COL5A2, or COL1A1 3. Gene locus: 2q31, 17q21.31-q22, 9q34.2-q34.3 Ehlers–Danlos syndrome II. Mitis type (classic, mild): similar to type I, but less severe; easily bruised skin; floppy mitral valve; absence of inferior labial frenulum and lingual frenulum 1. Autosomal dominant 2. Biochemical defect: COL5A1, COL5A2 3. Gene locus: 9q34.2-q34.3 Ehlers–Danlos syndrome III. Hypermobile type: large and small joint hypermobility (marked) and dislocations; soft skin 1. Autosomal dominant 2. Biochemical defect: COL3A1 and tenascin-XB 3. Gene locus: 2q31 Ehlers–Danlos syndrome IV. Vascular type: arterial, bowel and uterine rupture; marked skin fragility with thin, translucent skin; easily bruised skin; absence of skin and joint extensibility; tendency to form keloids; characteristic facial

Mallory Chapter 20

27/1/05

3:09 pm

Page 383

Genodermatoses and syndromes

•

383

1. Autosomal dominant 2. Biochemical defect unknown Ehlers–Danlos syndrome X. Fibronectin type: similar to EDS type II; striae distensae; prominent bruising; abnormal clotting studies; normal skin texture 1. Autosomal recessive 2. Biochemical defect: fibronectin-1 3. Gene locus: 2q34

Diagnosis • Clinical presentation • Genetic testing • Histology: large, irregular collagen fibrils in Ehlers–Danlos syndrome types I, II, III

Figure 20.18 from scars

•

Ehlers–Danlos syndrome – pseudotumors

appearance with parchment-like skin and very thin nose; reduced life expectancy 1. Autosomal dominant or autosomal recessive 2. Biochemical defect: abnormal type III collagen (COL 3A1) 3. Gene locus: 2q31 Ehlers–Danlos syndrome V. X-linked type: similar to EDS type II 1. X-linked recessive 2. Biochemical defect unknown Ehlers–Danlos syndrome VI. Ocular-scoliotic type: marked joint and skin involvement; scleral and corneal fragility; keratoconus; intraocular hemorrhage; scoliosis; hypotonia; arterial rupture 1. Autosomal recessive 2. Biochemical defect: lysyl hydroxylase 3. Gene locus: 1p36.3-p36.2 Ehlers–Danlos syndrome VII. Arthrochalsis multiplex congenita type: extreme joint hypermobility with congenital hip dislocation; short stature; excessive, soft skin particularly on the limbs; normal scarring; micrognathia 1. Autosomal recessive 2. Biochemical defect: COL1A1, COL1A2 3. Gene locus: 17q21.31-q22, 7q22.1 Ehlers–Danlos syndrome VIII. Periodontal type; moderate joint and skin involvement; periodontitis, gingival regression, tooth loss

Differential diagnosis • Cutis laxa • Normal hypermobility Treatment • Protection against injury to skin and joints • Orthopedic management with physical therapy and braces if needed Prognosis • Depends upon type • Stable or worsens with injury • Vascular type (Ehlers–Danlos syndrome type IV) has a guarded prognosis, because of vascular or bowel rupture References Beighton P. The Ehlers–Danlos syndrome. McKusick’s Heritable Disorders of Connective Tissue. Mosby–Year Book: St Louis. MO 1993: 189–251 Byers PH. Ehlers–Danlos syndrome: recent advances and current understanding of the clinical and genetic heterogeneity. J Invest Dermatol 1994; 103: 47S–52S Byers PH. Ehlers–Danlos syndrome type IV: a genetic disorder in many guises. J Invest Dermatol 1995; 105: 311–13 Dahan D, Fenichel GM, El-Said R. Neurocutaneous syndromes. Adolesc Med State Art Rev 2002; 13: 495–509 Germain DP. Clinical and genetic features of vascular Ehlers–Danlos syndrome. Ann Vasc Surg 2002; 16: 391–7 Henry F, Goffin V, Piérard-Franchimont C, Piérard GE. Mechanical properties of skin in Ehlers–Danlos syndrome, types I, II, and III. Pediatr Dermatol 1996; 13: 464–7 Mao JR, Bristow J. The Ehlers–Danlos syndrome: on beyond collagens. J Clin Invest 2001; 107: 1063–9

Mallory Chapter 20

384

27/1/05

3:09 pm

Page 384

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Myllyharju J, Kivirikko KI. Collagens and collagen-related diseases. Ann Med 2001; 33: 7–21 Sidhu-Malik NK, Wenstrup RJ. The Ehlers–Danlos syndromes and Marfan syndrome: inherited diseases of connective tissue with overlapping clinical features. Semin Dermatol 1995; 14: 40–6

Prognosis

Cutis laxa

Baldwin L, Kumrah L, Thoppuram P, Bhattacharji S. Congenital cutis laxa (dermatochalasia) with cardiac valvular disease. Pediatr Dermatol 2001; 18: 365–6

Major points

• Skin hangs in loose folds from birth or may

•

develop during childhood or adolescence and becomes inelastic giving a ‘hound dog’ appearance Generalized elastic tissue abnormality predisposing to: 1. Inguinal hernias 2. Lax joints 3. Bronchiectasis with pulmonary emphysema 4. Mitral valve prolapse 5. Aortic aneurysm 6. Gastrointestinal diverticula 7. Prolapse of the rectum or uterus 8. Bladder or urinary tract diverticula

Pathogenesis • Autosomal dominant (milder) – usually involves skin only • Mutations in elastin (ELN) or fibulin-5 (FBLN5) • Gene 14q32.1, 5q23.3-q31.2 • Autosomal recessive (severe): mutation in fibulin-5 (FBLN5) gene Diagnosis • Clinical presentation • Histology: marked fragmentation or diminution of elastic fibers Differential diagnosis • Ehlers–Danlos syndrome • Beare–Stevenson syndrome • Costello syndrome • Michelin tire baby syndrome • Marfan syndrome • Menkes kinky hair syndrome Treatment

• None specific • Surgery for cosmesis

• Slowly progressive References Andiran N, Sarikayalar F, Saraclar M, Caglar M. Autosomal recessive form of congenital cutis laxa: more than the clinical appearance. Pediatr Dermatol 2002; 19: 412–14

Banks ND, Redett RJ, Mofid MZ, Manson PN. Cutis laxa: clinical experience and outcomes. Plast Reconstruct Surg 2003; 111: 2434–42 Hwang ST, Williams ML, McCalmont TH, Frieden IJ. Sweet’s syndrome leading to acquired cutis laxa (Marshall’s syndrome) in an infant with a1-antitrypsin deficiency. Arch Dermatol 1995; 131: 1175–7 Orlow SJ. Cutaneous findings in craniofacial malformation syndromes. Arch Dermatol 1992; 128: 1379–86 Sarkar R, Kaur C, Kanwar AJ, Basu S. Cutis laxa in seven members of a north-Indian family. Pediatr Dermatol 2002; 19: 229–31

Pseudoxanthoma elasticum Major points

• Xanthoma-like papules (‘plucked chicken’

• • • • • • • • • • • •

appearance) found in flexural areas and neck which thicken with age; other areas periumbilical, antecubital fossae, wrists, popliteal fossae Small (1–3 mm) yellowish papules in a linear or reticular pattern, may be in confluent plaques (Figure 20.19) Perforating lesions with hyperkeratosis (e.g. elastosis perforans serpiginosa) Abnormal elastic tissue in arteries Hyperextensible skin and joints Marfanoid features Hypertension Cerebrovascular accidents Gastrointestinal hemorrhages caused by cracking of calcified vessels Cardiovascular disease Arteriosclerosis Myocardial infarction (can be seen in teenagers) Ocular abnormalities: 1. Angioid streaks in retina (breaks in Bruch membrane)

Mallory Chapter 20

27/1/05

3:09 pm

Page 385

Genodermatoses and syndromes

385

Prognosis • Depends upon type of psudeoxanthoma elasticum; some have more severe internal involvement than others References

Figure 20.19 Pseudoxanthoma elasticum – firm, yellow papules on the sides of the neck as a presenting sign

•

2. Loss of vision, drusen, peau d’orange or maculopathy Autosomal dominant or recessive

Pathogenesis • Aberrant calcification of elastic fibers • Gene locus: 16p13.1 • Gene: ABCC6 (ATP-binding cassette) Diagnosis

• Major criteria

•

1. Characteristic skin involvement 2. Histology: fragmented elastic tissue, clumped with calcium deposits demonstrated by von Kossa stain; calcification in vessels involving elastic media and intima 3. Characteristic ocular disease Minor criteria 1. Characteristic histologic features of nonlesional skin 2. Family history of pseudoxanthoma elasticum in first-degree relative

Differential diagnosis • Xanthomas • Connective tissue nevus • D-Penicillamine-induced skin lesions Treatment • Close observation for gastrointestinal hemorrhage and cardiovascular abnormalities • Surgical excision of abnormal skin rarely indicated • Possible restriction of calcium in childhood and adolescence

Balus L, Amantea A, Donati P, et al. Fibroelastolytic papulosis of the neck: a report of 20 cases. Br J Dermatol 1997; 137: 461–6 Hacker SM, Ramos-Caro FA, Beers BB, Flowers FP. Juvenile pseudoxanthoma elasticum: recognition and management. Pediatr Dermatol 1993; 10: 19–25 Lebwohl M, Halperin J, Phelps RG. Brief report: occult pseudoxanthoma elasticum in patients with premature cardiovascular disease. N Engl J Med 1993; 329: 1237–9 Lebwohl M, Neldner K, Pope M, et al. Classification of pseudoxanthoma elasticum: report of a consensus conference. J Am Acad Dermatol 1994; 30: 103–7 Le Saux O, Urban Z, Tschuch C, et al. Mutations in a gene encoding an ABC transporter cause pseudoxanthoma elasticum. Nature Genet 2000; 25: 223–7 Ohtani T, Furukawa F. Pseudoxanthoma elasticum. J Dermatol 2002; 29: 615–20 Uitto J, Pulkkinen L, Ringpfeil F. Progress in molecular genetics of heritable skin diseases: the paradigms of epidermolysis bullosa and pseudoxanthoma elasticum. J Invest Dermatol Symp Proc 2002; 7: 6–16

Gardner syndrome Major points • Multiple gastrointestinal polyps (mainly colon) with 100% risk for adenocarcinoma (adolescence to adulthood) • Osteomas - especially of mandible, maxilla and facial bones • Epidermal cysts – typical, multiple or large • Desmoid tumors – most often occur at sites of scars (25%) • Fibromas (skin, subcutaneous tissues, mesentery) • Congenital hypertrophy of retinal pigment epithelium – bilateral dark brown patches on fundoscopy • Autosomal dominant with 100% penetrance Pathogenesis • Gene locus: chromosome 5q21-q22 • Gene: APC gene (adenomatous polyposis coli) – a tumor suppressor gene

Mallory Chapter 20

386

27/1/05

3:09 pm

Page 386

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Diagnosis

Major points

• Histology of polyps – adenomatous type • Histology of epithelial cysts: lined with epithelial

• Can present in childhood with craniomegaly • Multiple hamartomas of ectodermal, endodermal,

cells Differential diagnosis

• • • • •

Familial polyposis Peutz–Jeghers syndrome Cowden syndrome Common epidermal cysts Bannayan–Riley–Ruvalcaba syndrome

• • • • •

Treatment

• Screening should begin at age 5 years for polyps in • • •

family members Prophylactic colectomy in teens is recommended Surveillance for secondary findings by physician familiar with the disorder Desmoid tumors – suggest excision; 50% recurrence rate; sulindac has been reported to result in regression in some patients

Prognosis 1. Poor if colon not removed before cancer begins References Armstrong JG, Davies DR, Guy SP, et al. APC mutations in familial adenomatous polyposis families in the northwest of England. Hum Mutat 1997; 10: 376–80 Gregory B, Ho VC. Cutaneous manifestations of gastrointestinal disorders. Part I. J Am Acad Dermatol 1992; 26: 153–66 Herrmann SM, Adler YD, Schmidt-Petersen K, et al. The concomitant occurrence of multiple epidermal cysts, osteomas and thyroid gland nodules is not diagnostic for Gardner syndrome in the absence of intestinal polyposis: a clinical and genetic report. Br J Dermatol 2003; 149: 877–83 Parks ET, Caldemeyer KS, Mirowski GW. Gardner syndrome. J Am Acad Dermatol 2001; 45: 940–2 Quesnel S, Malkin D. Genetic predisposition to cancer and familial cancer syndromes. Pediatr Clin N Amer 1997; 44: 791–808 Rustigi AK. Hereditary gastrointestinal polyposis and nonpolyposis syndromes. N Engl J Med 1994; 331: 1694–702

•

and mesodermal origin Trichilemmomas (especially facial) Facial papules, often grouped around the mouth, nose or ears, usually evident by age 20 years Oral papillomatosis (cobblestoning); can be seen in esophagus and duodenum Palmoplantar keratoses Other findings (seen in teens/adults) 1. Strong association with malignancy of breast (33%) and thyroid (5%) 2. Fibrocystic disease of the breast and follicular adenocarcinoma of the breast in women (75%) 3. Thyroid adenoma or goiter (65%) 4. Gastrointestinal polyps in both large and small bowel 5. Ovarian, cervical and uterine cancer Autosomal dominant

Pathogenesis • Gene locus: 10q23.3 • Gene: PTEN – a tumor suppressor gene Diagnosis • Clinical findings • Histology: trichilemmomas which arise from outer root sheath; multiple biopsies may be necessary; keratoses show hyperkeratotic papillomas Differential diagnosis • Basal cell nevus syndrome • Neurofibromatosis • Gardner syndrome • Tuberous sclerosis Treatment

• Close observation for thyroid,breast and • •

gynecologic cancer in females; bladder cancer in males Surgical removal of facial papules Close follow-up with physician familiar with disorder

Cowden disease

Prognosis

Synonym: multiple hamartoma syndrome

• Depends upon complications

Mallory Chapter 20

27/1/05

3:09 pm

Page 387

Genodermatoses and syndromes

References Eng C. PTEN: one gene, many syndromes. Hum Mutat 2003; 22: 183–98 Hanssen AMN, Fryns JP. Cowden syndrome. J Med Genet 1995; 32: 117–19 Hanssen AMN, Werquin H, Suys E, Fryns JP. Cowden syndrome: report of a large family with macrocephaly and increased severity of signs in subsequent generations. Clin Genet 1993; 44: 281–6 Lynch ED, Ostermeyer EA, Lee MK, et al. Inherited mutations in PTEN that are associated with breast cancer, Cowden disease, and juvenile polyposis. Am J Hum Genet 1997; 61: 1254–60 Marsh DJ, Kum JB, Lunetta KL, et al. PTEN mutation spectrum and genotype-phenotype correlations in Bannayan– Riley–Ruvalcaba syndrome suggest a single entity with Cowden syndrome. Hum Mol Genet 1999; 8: 1461–72 Marsh D, Zori R. Genetic insights into familial cancers– update and recent discoveries. Cancer Lett 2002; 181: 125–64 Tsao H. Update on familial cancer syndromes and the skin. J Am Acad Dermatol 2000; 42: 939–69 Waite KA, Eng C. From developmental disorder to heritable cancer: it’s all in the BMP/TGF-beta family. Nature Rev Genet 2003; 4: 763–73 Waite KA, Eng C. Protean PTEN: form and function. Am J Hum Genet 2002; 70: 829–44

387

• Frequent sinopulmonary infections: bronchitis,

•

• • • • • •

rhinitis, pneumonia, bronchiectasis 1. Defective cell-mediated: lymphopenia, impaired lymphocyte transformation 2. Humoral immunity: IgA and IgE deficiency Ocular findings 1. Telangiectasias beginning about age 2–6 years on bulbar conjunctiva 2. Nystagmus 3. Strabismus 4. Blepharitis Structural anomalies of thymus and lymph nodes Elevated α-fetoprotein Progressive mental and neurological deterioration Breaks and rearrangements of chromosomes particularly 7, 14 High incidence of neoplastic disorders (e.g. lymphoma, leukemia, breast carcinomas, etc.) in patients and carriers Autosomal recessive; male/female ratio = 1

Pathogenesis

• Caused by a mutation in ATM gene which repairs chromosomal strand breakage

• Gene locus: 11q22 • Gene: ATM

Ataxia–telangiectasia Synomyn: Louis–Bar syndrome Major points

• Progressive cerebellar ataxia beginning at age ~2 years

• Skin findings 1. Telangiectasias begin on ears, conjunctiva and flexural folds of extremities usually at about 3–5 years, and progress to malar areas and the V of the chest (Figure 20.20) 2. Granulomatous plaques (sterile) 3. Vitiligo 4. Poliosis 5. Premature graying of hair 6. Hypo- or hyperpigmentation 7. Atrophy of the skin 8. Chronic skin infections 9. Acanthosis nigricans

Figure 20.20 Ataxia–telangiectasia – telangiectasias on the conjunctivae

Mallory Chapter 20

388

27/1/05

3:09 pm

Page 388

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Diagnosis

• Clinical diagnosis with gene verification • Histology: nonspecific; dilated blood vessels of subpapillary plexus Differential diagnosis

• Hereditary hemorrhagic telangiectasia • Angioma serpiginosum • Generalized essential telangiectasia Treatment

• Supportive, with antibiotics, respiratory therapy, •

physical therapy Genetic counseling

Prognosis

Figure 20.21 Darier disease – scaling on the face resembling seborrheic dermatitis

• Usually fatal in second decade from secondary infections, respiratory failure, or malignancies

• Mucous membranes: white cobblestoning which

References Barbagallo JS, Kolodzieh MS, Silverberg NB, Weinberg JM. Neurocutaneous disorders. Dermatol Clin 2002; 20: 547–60, viii De la Torre C, Pincheira J, Lopez-Saez JF. Human syndromes with genomic instability and multiprotein machines that repair DNA double-strand breaks. Histol Histopathol 2003; 18: 225–43 Koenig M. Rare forms of autosomal recessive neurodegenerative ataxia. Semin Pediatr Neurol 2003; 10: 183–92 Perlman S, Becker-Catania S, Gatti RA. Ataxia–telangiectasia: diagnosis and treatment. Semin Pediatr Neurol 2003; 10: 173–82 Swift M, Morrell D, Massey RB, Chase CL. Incidence of cancer in 161 families affected by ataxia – telangiectasia. N Engl J Med 1991; 325:1831–6

• • • • •

Pathogenesis

• Gene locus: 12q23-24.1 • Gene: SERCA 2 (ATP 2A2) – plays a role in cell adhesion Diagnosis

• Clinical findings with classic histology of skin • Histology: suprabasal acantholysis and dyskeratosis; characteristic corps ronds and corps grains in stratum corneum

Darier disease Synomyn: keratosis follicularis, Darier–White disease Major points

• Firm greasy, yellow-brown, crusted papules which coalesce into plaques (Figure 20.21)

• Distribution: scalp, face, seborrheic and flexural areas, dorsa of hands and feet

• Palm and sole keratoses or minute pits • Malodorous • Onset usually between 8 and 15 years

coalesces into plaques; oropharynx, larynx and anorectal mucosa may be involved Nail changes: white or red longitudinal bands, V-shaped nicks at distal margin, subungual hyperkeratoses T-cell abnormalities in some patients Increased susceptibility to infections Mental disturbances or mild retardation Autosomal dominant, with male/female ratio >1

Differential diagnosis

• • • •

Seborrhea Transient acantholytic dermatosis Pemphigus foliaceus Hailey–Hailey disease

Treatment

• Emollients • Keratolytic agents

Mallory Chapter 20

27/1/05

3:09 pm

Page 389

Genodermatoses and syndromes

• Intermittent topical steroids for erythema or irritation

• Topical retinoids • Systemic retinoids • Antibiotics for secondary infection Prognosis

• Persistent, chronic dermatosis with exacerbations and partial remissions

• Aggravated by sunlight and heat • Responds to oral retinoids References Burge SM, Wilkinson JD. Darier–White disease: a review of the clinical features in 163 patients. J Am Acad Dermatol 1992; 27: 40–50

389

Cooper SM, Burge SM. Darier’s disease: epidemiology, pathophysiology, and management. Am J Clin Dermatol 2003; 4: 97–105 Devries DT, Warren SJ. Recent advances in intraepidermal blistering diseases. Adv Dermatol 2002; 18: 203–45 Kennedy JL, Berg D, Bassett AS, et al. Genetic linkage for Darier disease (keratosis follicularis). Am J Med Genet 1995; 55: 307–10 Munro CS. The phenotype of Darier’s disease: penetrance and expressivity in adults and children. Br J Dermatol 1992; 127: 126–30 O’Malley MP, Haake A, Goldsmith L, Berg D. Localized Darier disease. Implications for genetic studies. Arch Dermatol 1997; 133: 1134–8 Peacocke M, Christiano AM. Bumps and pumps, SERCA 1999. Nature Genet 1999; 21: 252–3

Mallory Chapter 20

27/1/05

3:09 pm

Page 390

Mallory Chapter 21

27/1/05

3:10 pm

Page 391

21 THERAPY

TOPICAL THERAPY Major points

• Treatment should be simple • Teach patients how to apply medications • Write prescriptions for steroids in sizes of tubes

• • •

• •

(e.g. 15, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120 g), not just ‘trade size’ 1. Patient may receive too little or too much medicine if not written correctly 2. Include the diagnosis in addition to instructions so that there is no confusion (e.g. ‘Apply at bedtime for acne’) Thin application is desirable for most medicines except emollients, where thick application is preferred Apply moisturizers to damp skin to retain hydration Estimates of coverage of the skin can be made by using the ‘Rule of Nines’, in which the body surface is divided into 11 equal parts, each constituting ~9% of the total body surface area 1. Head 2. Arm (one) 3. Chest (anterior) 4. Back 5. Abdomen 6. Buttocks, lumbar area 7. Leg (half each) Each area can be covered by ~2 g of cream or ointment (See Table 21.1) Factors which increase percutaneous absorption of a medication: 1. Inflammation 2. Hydration (after a bath)

•

3. Occlusion with plastic wraps, or diapers 4. Epidermal breakage or injury 5. Heat 6. Type of vehicle Topical agents are composed of: active medication and vehicle

VEHICLES

• Vehicles have a profound impact on the medication’s delivery and stability

Table 21.1

Amount of medicine to dispense

Area

One application in grams

BID application for 2 weeks in grams

Face

Hands

Head

Groin

One arm

Anterior chest

Back

One leg

120

30–60

840–1680

Whole body

Adapted from Weston WL, Lane AT, Morelli JG. Color Textbook of Pediatric Dermatology. Mosby: St Louis, 1996: 358

Mallory Chapter 21

392

27/1/05

3:10 pm

Page 392

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Ointments

• Indications:

• Simplest lubricating vehicle • Ointments are oleaginous pure greases (e.g. • •

• • •

petrolatum, lanolin) or greases with a small amount of water suspended in them Leave a greasy film on the skin, causing heat retention and water retention Indications: 1. Dry, cracked skin (atopic dermatitis) 2. Scaling (psoriasis) 3. Lubrication Do not use (as a general rule of thumb): 1. Moist skin areas (axillae, groin) 2. Hot humid environments Disadvantages: messy, stains clothing (e.g. petrolatum) Advantages: fewest inactive ingredients (i.e. fewer sensitizing agents)

•

1. Scalp 2. Hairy areas 3. Moist areas (toewebs) Do not use: 1. Broken skin (causes stinging) 2. Very dry skin

Lotions

• Lotions are mainly water with some lipids added • Indications: •

1. Mild dry skin 2. Moist folds Examples: Keri Lotion, Lubriderm, Eucerin Lotion, numerous others

Aerosols, sprays, and foams

• These products are solutions with a propellant Creams

• Emulsion of water and oil plus chemical • • • •

•

emulsifiers, preservatives and fragrances Creams require preservatives and stabilizers because of the addition of water Easier to use than ointments and cosmetically more acceptable Less occlusive than an ointment Indications: 1. Dry skin in humid climates 2. Semifold areas (antecubital area and neck) 3. Face Do not use: 1. Hairy scalp (in general) 2. If allergic or sensitive to preservatives in a specific product

Emollient creams

• Generally more oily than nonemollient types • Smooth application • More moisturizing than creams

•

• •

system Indications: 1. Scalp: with a small tubular applicator nozzle, aerosols are easy to use on the scalp 2. Body: can cover large areas with a very fine coat of medication (e.g. insect repellents) Advantages 1. Cosmetically elegant 2. Convenient, easy to use Disadvantages: may be drying and irritating

Gels

• Gelled propylene glycol solutions which liquify on • • • •

contact with skin Advantages: 1. Permit good penetration of medications 2. Leave little residue Disadvantage: very drying Indications: 1. Facial dermatoses 2. Scalp dermatoses Do not use on irritated or broken skin (causes stinging) Examples: tretinoin gel, steroid gels

Solutions

•

• Solutions contain alcohol and propylene glycol

Tape/plasters

•

with the active ingredient Completely evaporate, leaving the active medication on the skin

• Tape impregnated with medicament • Advantage

Mallory Chapter 21

27/1/05

3:10 pm

Page 393

Therapy

1. Stays in place

• Indications:

•

1. Thickened, pruritic plaques of lichen simplex chronicus 2. Warts Examples: Cordran tape, salicylic acid plasters

Shake lotions

• Liquid preparation to which powder has been • • • •

added Must be shaken to suspend the powder in solution Antipruritics (menthol, camphor) often added Examples: calamine lotion Indications: 1. Mild cooling and soothing effect 2. Weeping, oozing dermatitis (e.g. poison ivy dermatitis)

• Borderline oil-free products, although not technically oils or fats, can contain oil-like emollient esters which may be comedogenic

PRODUCTS AND TREATMENT Wet dressings

• Indications

• •

Pastes

• • • •

Creams or ointments with powder added Disadvantages: thick and stiff in consistency Indications: barrier cream Example: zinc oxide paste

393

1. Useful for first 24–72 hours of an acute weeping dermatitis 2. Evaporation of water is cooling, causing vasoconstriction 3. Relief of pruritus by increasing humidity 4. Helps remove crusts Examples: water, saline Examples: 1. Burow’s solution (aluminum acetate) for a more drying effect (e.g. Bluboro powder, Boropak powder, Domeboro powder or tablets) 2. Dakin’s solution (sodium hypochlorite) for antisepsis (strengths: 0.25%, 0.5%) 3. Oatmeal bathing products (e.g. Aveeno)

Topical corticosteroids

Powders

• Potency of topical steroids (Table 21.2) based on

• Consist of fine particles of talc • Indications:

•

• •

1. Increased surface area with a drying effect 2. Moist sweaty areas (axillae, groin, feet) 3. Reduce friction Examples: nystatin powder, Zeasorb AF Disadvantage: delivery of medication relatively poor

Oils

• Oily monophasic solution • Examples: mineral oil, Dermasmoothe Oil Oil-free products

• All avoid ingredients with the word ‘oil’; however, • •

may contain oils or fats which do not contain the word ‘oil’ (e.g. lanolin) May contain waxes or oily hydrocarbons Disadvantage: can be drying

•

vasocontriction assay, roughly corresponds to antiinflammatory properties Indications: inflammatory skin disorders (steroids cause vasoconstriction and prevent inflammation) 1. Low potency a. Ideal in infants b. Adults/teens – face, intertriginous, genitals 2. Mid-potency a. Atopic dermatitis b. Psoriasis 3. High potency/ultrapotency a. Palms and soles b. Psoriasis if thickened plaques c. Lichen simplex chronicus d. Acute contact dermatitis (e.g. poison ivy dermatitis) 4. High-potency and ultrapotency topical steroids should not be used in children except in short courses for specific conditions Dose: 1. Use a mid-strength steroid twice daily for 3–10 days until symptoms have subsided, then

Mallory Chapter 21

394

27/1/05

3:10 pm

Page 394

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

Table 21.2

Potency of topical steroids

Brand name Group I (ultrapotent) Cormax Ointment 0.05% Cormax Scalp Solution 0.05% Cordran Tape 4 µg/cm2 Diprolene Cream, Ointment, Gel 0.05% Olux Foam 0.05% Psorcon Ointment 0.05% Temovate Cream, Ointment, Gel, E Emollient Cream 0.05% Ultravate Cream, Ointment 0.05%

Generic name Clobetasol propionate Clobetasol propionate Flurandrenolide Betamethasone dipropionate Clobetasol propionate Diflorasone diacetate Clobetasol propionate Halobetasol propionate

Group II (potent) Cyclocort Ointment 0.1% Diprolene AF Cream 0.05% Diprosone Ointment 0.05% Elocon Ointment 0.1% Florone Ointment 0.05% Halog Cream, Oint., Sol., Emollient Cream 0.1% Kenalog Ointment 0.5% Lidex Cream, Gel, Ointment, Gel 0.05% Topicort Ointment, Cream 0.25% Topicort Gel 0.05%

Amcinonide Betamethasone dipropionate Betamethasone dipropionate Mometasone furoate Diflorasone diacetate Halcinonide Triamcinolone acetonide Fluocinonide Desoximetasone Desoximetasone

Group III (high mid-strength) Aristocort A Ointment 0.1% Aristocort-HP Ointment Cutivate Ointment 0.05% Cyclocort Cream and Lotion 0.1% Florone Cream 0.05% Halog Ointment 0.1% Lidex E Cream 0.05% Topicort LP Cream 0.05% Valisone Ointment 0.1%

Triamcinolone acetonide Triamcinolone acetonide Fluticasone propionate Amcinonide Diflorasone diacetate Halcinonide Fluocinonide Desoximetasone Betamethasone valerate

Group IV (middle mid-strength) Aristocort 0.1% Cream Cordran Ointment 0.05% Dermatop Ointment 0.1% Elocon Cream, Lotion 0.1% Kenalog Cream, Ointment 0.1% Luxiq Foam 0.12% Synalar Ointment 0.025% Westcort Ointment 0.2%

Triamcinolone acetonide Flurandrenolide Prednicarbate Mometasone furoate Triamcinolone acetonide Betamethasone valerate Fluocinolone acetonide Hydrocortisone valerate Continued...

reduce to once daily, eventually weaning off medication; emollients are often helpful 2. Face and groin: a. Only use low-potency steroids, class VI, VII (e.g. hydrocortisone 1–2.5%)

b. Prone to atrophy, striae and telangiectasias 3. Tachyphylaxis can occur with high-potency/ultrapotent steroids a. Caused by intense vasoconstriction, followed by rebound vasodilatation

Mallory Chapter 21

27/1/05

3:10 pm

Page 395

Therapy

Table 21.2

•

395

Continued

Brand name

Generic name

Group V (low mid-strength) Aclovate Cream, Ointment 0.05% Cordran Cream, Lotion 0.05% Cutivate Cream 0.05% Dermatop Cream 0.1% Kenolog Cream, Lotion 0.1% Locoid Cream, Ointment, Solution 0.1% Synalar Cream 0.025% Westcort Cream 0.2% Dermatop Cream 0.1%

Alclometasone dipropionate Flurandrenolide Fluticasone propionate Prednicarbate Triamcinolone acetonide Hydrocortisone butyrate Fluocinolone acetonide Hydrocortisone valerate Prednicarbate

Group VI (low strength) Aclovate Cream, Ointment 0.05% DesOwen Cream, Lotion, Ointment 0.05% Synalar Cream, Solution 0.01% Tridesilon Cream 0.05%

Alclometasone dipropionate Desonide Fluocinolone acetonide Desonide

Group VII (lowest strength) Hytone 0.5%, 1%, 2.5%, dexamethasone

Hydrocortisone 0.5%, 1%, 2.5%

b. Most commonly occurs on the face (causing perioral dermatitis or steroid rosacea) Monitor: 1. Adrenal axis suppression can occur with long-term or overuse of mid- or high-potency, or ultrapotent topical steroids 2. Limit total dosage to <50 g/week in adult/teen 3. Steroid addiction a. Results from prolonged use of mid-strength or high-potency steroids, particularly on the face b. With discontinuation, rebound vasodilatation occurs, resulting in patients’ continuing to apply steroid for relief c. With prolonged use, permanent redness, thinning and fine wrinkling, and acne can result d. Treatment – substitute a bland ointment and wean down to lower-potency steroids with eventual discontinuance Disadvantages/side-effects – accentuated with higher concentrations 1. Atrophy manifestations a. Thinning of skin/wrinkling b. Translucency of skin

c. Telangiectasias d. Striae e. Hypopigmentation f. Glaucoma when used on eyelids 2. Occlusion increases penetration and increases potency

Oral corticosteroids

• Indications: inflammatory dermatoses, bullous •

dermatoses, urticaria, immunosuppressive therapy Types of oral corticosteroids: 1. Prednisolone (Delta-Cortef, Prelone, Pediapred, others) a. Supplied: Prelone 15 mg/5 ml; Pediapred 5 mg/5 ml; tabs: 5 mg 2. Dexamethasone a. Supplied: tabs: 0.25, 0.5, 0.75, 1, 1.5, 2, 4, 6 mg; liquid: 0.5 mg/5 ml; 0.1 mg/ml; 1 mg/ml b. Dose: child: 0.08–0.3 mg/kg/24 hours given every 6–12 hours; adults: 0.75–9 mg/24 hours 3. Prednisone a. Supplied: Tabs: 1, 2.5, 5, 10, 20, 50 mg; liquid: 1 mg/ml, 5 mg/ml

Mallory Chapter 21

396

27/1/05

3:10 pm

Page 396

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology

b. Dose: 0.5–2 mg/kg per 24 hours given once daily to four times a day 4. Equivalents: a. Prednisone 5 mg = 0.75 mg dexamethasone 5. Stress dose (prednisolone/prednisone): 8–24 mg/m2/24 hours (approximately 3 mg/day in a 6-month-old) divided BID, given during stressful event, fever, surgery

• •

Intralesional corticosteroids

• Indications: keloids, alopecia areata • Dose • •

1. Keloids: 10–40 mg/ml 2. Alopecia areata 2.5–5 mg/ml Supplied: triamcinolone 3 mg/ml, 10 mg/ml, 25 mg/ml, 40 mg/ml Monitor: atrophy, hypopigmentation (usually not permanent)

Anthralin

• Consists of tricyclic hydrocarbons made from the reduction of anthraquinone

• Indications: • •

•

1. Antimitotic effect on epidermis 2. Psoriasis Supplied: 0.1%, 0.25%, 0.5%, 1% cream (Drithocreme) Dose: 1. Apply 1–2 times/day 2. Short contact therapy a. Apply to affected area for 5–10 minutes once daily b. Wash off with a pH-neutral soap (e.g. Dove) c. Start with mid-strength cream and advance in strength and time of exposure as tolerated Disadvantages: 1. Stains clothing and skin 2. Difficult to use, especially over large areas 3. Irritating 4. Avoid mucosal contact

Tar

• Derived from distillation

Illustrated Manual of Pediatric Dermatology: Diagnosis and Management - PDF Free Download (2024)